
















i^ v «?sA y> 




8 I A 



^ - A^ ’ Y 

* «>> r v 

*" 'S' cp 

V> « 

/ #b,A 



* v 


^ a n 

</' <v 



/ *> <s 


0 * k 



:<b 








% 

* A AA^Y'' A 

A v\ x c»^«/ 0 /'*' ,cr\* v,s 

.r aaaa^a ° * 0 * 


x 0( bo 


A 






A 1 



- ^ ‘ 

O ’ ,,'^UM-* o> b A 

A ».n*\/ ,.., X'.. 




kV 



A 


“ aV <A 3 

^ '"A’’ .-£*• *> -*> Y^" -<v ' v> . , . , _ 

^ A O ^ / , S «G < ^ y n * L * /> 

1 * * Sfi A x C 0 N c « y b .O^s - 1 1 * « '<S> c 0 

" * / ° . -V A* -* 

C ^ VJ 



^ ^ V^ X 



& 


8 1 \ 


* 


* * ' * > vO * . _ 

t -■ A^ Y £2 S\ * ^ 

* *^r C - * rl\ K^’/Vl ^'r \\> 

%& ~ mMM ° * <& * 

<* V>> Z 

<V> %<> o 
Y» ^ 


<*> 





& *7*U&*r v 

O *sr. , s .0 

A AbA ^ o°’,'* 

A\ *. -sN ’ s& ^ . N 

Va o ~ \Sss^L^fc ^ *X Y "* 

> ° rtOSmZJ <, *ocr 

* 4 -r, * 

-* QA / c£ > 1/1 

v \v *SL. A 

,\V 

■ V V t 

/y / ^ 



•> 


.0 N 0 


A”. ’ •"- A. *' 



% 




11 * * A"' °* ; "A c •»«,%>*' *"*' 



-r ^ 

■? j.\ 

- ^ V s 


x°A. 



^ ' * 9 H 0 ^ 


? ,0 


A V A - 
'V A * 


> <i 



,0 V 9 -' * 0 a '% 


A. V ^ 





o 

<r 

>- 


^> /- <x' o '* cp y , c A <-> 

*.n‘ k# t , » , %.^ * a h o ’ A J O 

•<‘°f ^ V' ^,'Lft-. ♦> > ' A*°a A‘ 




‘A <>> *> 

“VVaaa''- 



O^A'A c A ’ 0 ° " ' A< X 

/,'W- j 4 , 

■* ^ V s « 'Ao x ■ 


s\ 


^>0 

' Xi> 


x 0o ^> 



<1 z 
c> <C> o 

^ ^ ^ °*' V(S v ' ^ 

^ , , <r. o . V ■* 

0° b 


.^5 






























'K* cl 


i 

> c * \V ip- 


S- > 

« o 

3 ^ o J ^ ^ a i \ 

x 9> * ' * 0 ^ (7' 

a*o r <p $» <* *p 

* - ^ A * 



A 



% -\ 

P '.<■ ° “'= * „%; ■' • * s V\- 1 •.* * :<* 


*S *1^, ' 

s • 0 U% * 9N °' > </\ v *. ,\." *•■'* \>^ 

*i * \> . 




<* 

o 





^v 0 ^gRjjsj^ * v> 
cv ✓ v o v 

\ X o * C / 1 * * S S 

^ * C L^% °o 0 °\ 

^ 'A <S rS?\V,U ./• W ^ f 






* r ^ x 

*5.° , „ <r, - 0 , X * y\ O, ^ 

' ^ ^ ' 



^ * * a * s s ^ 




c> ^ o WM\Vtf * ,0^ «/\> 

* ^ <«• j Xr^> a* • ^ 

K ^^ V ,, ‘ V '.‘--*. 

* e5 '"' 5 *» f ~r -\\ s. 

■* A > : c 

\° Oft >• 

: >*; "'• v :^>'* ’■• ’>* ^: v *-, 

** c. *.A ^ *■ . ft 5t «_ -J^ 

■ ^ .,v'-' 


*o 








0: 
o 

>«* - WwM ; * 

V v^ZSlSf * 0 v* ^ 

^ %7^f s - n0 ^ v . * 

^ c 0 N c * -*b * * 0 ? <■ v 1B * '<P 

' ’oo^ *§mS&+ *+ ^ 

4 -f 

* K v ^ - 

' #■ y 

* * r . ^ o 




i, > r\ J C‘ i- v, CL • c^* r * 


£•* y '^Sj s ^ 

* .0 N 0 ’ 


•>> .’A 




* ^ 

4p , , » <^- g '»**'‘ /A 'O ' 7 , 

O’ v 9 1\ % / c° N S^o 

. ^ ^ : 

: x° °+ : 




■>\ 


»> ☆ ^ 





'• 1 8 ^ ^ 


<f> 


o 0 


v- 


' * 0 N 0 ’ 6 A 0< ' ) 72 

0 •* ^ Y * 0 . ^ 




S^.C*^ •* '' o^ 6 !-' ' 1 ' •%?“’ - v A <■ 

>. ° 0 ^ JO * 

* '^o o x * ^ ^ c 

' ••:% *• ■ 

_ ^ ^ t «a*id0a%^ ^ r <? ^ 

A :^Ma\ %.f », 

,r% -.mm.- 

« ^ o- ^ 



o ^ 

»».' # 

. % 

° tJ in A 
2. V 

<*> ’ ^ 0 v ^ 

Nc %''*>«<>'- 4° .,, 

*> <=>.-> rP’ v* V * ^ 


: %4 
: -.1 


\ 0 ^ 



^ 43 i 



. . a C „ w 6 s 4^ , , s <L. y o * ^ a A 

f / ', ** ■ .^ .‘!^*- °o C.°V ^ ,# .‘ 


o N c 



^ V 6 
\ 0 ^. 


x° o^ 
























• T— 
























✓ 



% 














" , • * 

V .. 

f ' 

+ 1 








• - 

















A TEXTBOOK 


ON 

ENGLISH 


INTERNATIONAL CORRESPONDENCE SCHOOLS 
SCRANTON, PA. 


CONVERSATIONAL LESSONS 


SCRANTON 

INTERNATIONAL TEXTBOOK COMPANY 


A-4 





/ 






LIBRARY nf 0ON6RESS 
Two Codes Received 

AUG 12 1904 


Cooyrlrht Entry 

Cvusk* li - t^or 

3LAS^ Ou XXo. Na 

<? i»l 1 



Copyright, 1904, by International Textbook Company 


Entered at Stationers’ Hall, London 


English, Parts 1 to 15: Copyright, 1903, by International Textbook Company. 
Entered at Stationers’ Hall, London. 


All rights reserved 


Printed in the United States 


9242 






METHODE 


D’ANGLAIS 


INTERNATIONAL CORRESPONDENCE SCHOOLS 
SCRANTON, PA. 


LECONS DE CONVERSATION 


SCRANTON 

INTERNATIONAL TEXTBOOK COMPANY 









PREFACE 


En presentant au public ces trois volumes qui composent 
notre cours d’anglais complet, nous croyons fermement offrir 
une sdrie de livres prepares de telle maniere qu’ils forment 
un cours plus complet et plus pratique qu’aucun autre cours 
publid jusqu ’a present. Ces volumes comprennent un 
volume de legons de conversation (le present volume), 
une grammaire et un lexique. Le plan des deux premiers 
livres a etd etabli de telle sorte que l’dleve puisse graduel- 
lement et avec facilite arriver a maitriser la langue 
anglaise de maniere a pouvoir s’en servir dans la conversa¬ 
tion. Ils ont aussi ete ecrits afin que le commengant aussi bien 
que l’eleve avance puissent trouver rapidement un renseigne- 
ment correct et complet dont ils peuvent avoir besoin sur 
n’importe quel point de la grammaire anglaise ou de la con¬ 
struction de la phrase. 

Les legons de conversation se divisent en cinq parties 
distinctes: Le “Vocabulaire,” ou liste des mots a apprendre 
par coeur; Les “Phrases et Conversation” ourecueil de phrases 
d’un usage tres commun dans la vie ordinaire et qui for¬ 
ment comme la fondation de chaque legon; Les “Remarques” 
ou collection de regies de construction preparees systematique- 
ment, et servant a expliquer les differences de construction 
dans les deux langages; L’ “Exercise Oral” ou groupe de 
phrases, arrangdes de maniere a servir d’exemples aux regies 
donnees dans la division pr6c£dente; La “Revue et Conver¬ 
sation” qui introduit sous la forme de dialogue, les expres¬ 
sions apprises dans les legons precedentes et les tient ainsi 
continuellement devant les yeux de l’eleve; cette revue est 
aussi un sommaire de la legon oh elle est placde. 

iii 



IV 


PREFACE 


Vingt-quatre cylindres phonographiqnes contenant trente 
legons de conversation accompagnent les legons. Ces 
cylindres permettent a l’eleve d’entendre et d’apprendre 
l’accent et l’inflexion de la langue anglaise tout aussi 
correctement que s’ils l’entendaient d’un maitre. De plus, 
dix-neuf exercices phonographiques sont intercales dans les 
legons dans le but de nous rendre compte de leurs progres 
et de corriger leur prononciation. 

La grammaire se compare favorablement avec n’importe 
quelle autre imprimee en frangais. Elle est exceptionnelle- 
ment complete dans le traitement du verbe, des autres parties 
du discours et des constructions idiomatiques. On y trouvera 
un chapitre traitant de la derivation et de la formation des 
mots, une etude des suffixes et des prefixes, et un clair traite 
de la prosodie anglaise si differente de la prosodie frangaise, 
par consequent de la plus grande utilite pour pouvoir com- 
prendre la poesie anglaise. Un cylindre phonographique 
servant a illustrer les regies de la prononciation accompagne 
la grammaire. 

Notre methode de numeroter les pages et les articles de 
chaque volume est telle que chaque sujet ou section forme 
une partie complete. Pour rendre la table des matieres 
intelligible, il nous a fallu donner un numero special a chaque 
section. Ce numero se trouve en tete de chaque page, et pour 
le distinguer du numero de la page, il est precedd par la 
marque §. 

International Correspondence Schools. 


SOMMAIRE 


Lecons de Conversation Anglaise Section Page 

Introduction.I vii 

Directions Generates.1 1 

Le Son des Voyelles en Anglais ... 1 3 

Conjugaison du Verbe to be , Temps Present 1 6 

Le Pluriel des Noms.1 24 

Conjugaison du Verbe to have , Temps 

Present.2 4 

Les Adjectifs Possessifs.2 5 

Conjugaison d’un Verbe, Temps Present . 2 20 

Construction de la Reponse.2 22 

Les Verbes Auxiliaires.3 4 

Les Pronoms Personnels.3 5 

Les Verbes Auxiliaires.3 6 

Forme Progressive du Verbe.3 24 

Les Nombres.3 28 

Les Pronoms Indefinis.4 4 

Prepositions Gouvernees par un Verbe . 4 23 

Les Pluriels Irreguliers des Noms ... 4 24 

Le Rapport de Possession.5 4 

Pronoms Relatifs et Pronoms Interrogates 5 23 

Conjugaison du Verbe, Temps Imparfait . 6 4 

Conjugaison du Verbe to be , Imparfait 6 8 

Conjugaison du Verbe to have , Imparfait . 6 9 

Pronoms Demonstrates.6 30 

Conjugaison des Verbes Irreguliers, Temps 

Imparfait.7 5 

Nombres Ordinaux.7 6 

Conjugaison d’un Verbe, Temps Futur . 7 26 


v 














VI 


SOMMAIRE 


Section Page 


Auxiliaires du Futur; Shall , Will ... 7 26 

Table de Distinction de Shall et Will . . 7 29 

Conjugaison des Verbes Irreguliers, 

Temps Imparfait.7 29 

Comparaison des Adjectifs.8 5 

Conjugaison d’un Verbe, Parfait Indefini 8 27 

Participe Passe des Verbes Irreguliers . 8 29 

Les Pronoms Indefinis ....... 9 5 

Conjugaison d’un Verbe, Temps Plus-que- 

Parfait.9 25 

Conjugaison des Verbes Irreguliers, 

Temps Composes.9 25 

Conjugaison des Verbes Irreguliers, 

Temps Composes.10 4 

Conjugaison d’un Verbe Reflechi ... 10 5 

Conjugaison d’un Verbe, Temps Futur- 

Anterieur.10 26 

Forme du Verbe, Passe Habituel ... 11 6 

Conjugaison d’un Verbe, Temps Condi- 

tionnel.11 8 

Le Participe Present du Verbe .... 11 24 

Noms Verbaux.11 27 

Forme Progressive du Verbe .... 12 5 

Forme Emphatique du Verbe .... 12 11 

Conjugaison d’un Verbe Passif .... 12 28 

Conjugaison d’un Verbe Passif .... 13 7 

Forme Progressive d’un Verbe Passif .13 26 

Comment le Mode Subjonctif Frangais se 

Rend en Anglais.14 5 

Le Mode Subjonctif Anglais.14 29 

Verbes Irreguliers: Idiomes Anglais . . 15 6 

Verbes Irreguliers., . . 15 28 

Idiomes Anglais.15 29 

La Deuxieme Personne du Singulier d’un 

Verbe.15 30 

Differences Entre la Langue Frangaise et 
la Langue Anglaise.15 31 















ANGLAIS 

(PARTIE 1) 


INTRODUCTION 


INSTRUCTIONS SUR LA MANIERE DE SE SERTIR 
DU PHONOGRAPHS 


L’ INSTRUMENT 

1. Notre Phonographe. — Le phonographe que nous 
employons dans ce cours est fabrique par la “National 
Phonograph Company,” et s’appelle “l’Edison Standard 
Phonograph.” II differe du “Standard” ’ordinaire, en ce 
qu’il est pourvu d’un appareil repetitenr constant d’apres 
nos indications. Ce repetiteur a une grande valeur peda- 
gogique parce qu’il permet a l’eleve de repeter, avec la 
plus grande facilite, le meme mot ou la meme phrase aussi 
souvent qu’il est n6cessaire. Nous fournissons aussi avec 
cet instrument un nouveau modele de tubes acoustiques 
egalement cr6es par nous, etant convaincus que ceux en 
existence ne pouvaient pas atteindre notre but. Nous parle- 
rons davantage dans le cours de cette introduction de ces 
appareils qui nous ont permis de faire du phonographe un 
parfait professeur de langues. 

2. Le Phonographe avec son Couvercle. — Vous 
recevez votre phonographe soigneusement emballe dans une 
caisse en bois. Ouvrez cette boite avec precaution, afin de 
ne pas en deteriorer le contenu. Quand le phonographe est 
retird de la caisse, il apparait comme dans la Fig. 1, et peut 
etre porte par la poignee d. 

For notice of copyright, see page immediately following the title page 

§1 • 





INTRODUCTION 


Le phonographe n’est pas exceptionnellement fragile, etne 
se derange pas facilement; cependant, comme c’est le cas 
avec toutes les machines, il faut le manier avec certaines 
precautions. 

3. Pour Enlever le Couvercle. —Posez l’instrument 
sur une table ou sur une chaise, et tirez les deux crampons 
marques dans la Fig. 1 par la lettre b. Le couvercle peut 



alors etre enleve par la poignee d, et le phonographe appa- 
rait comme dans la Fig. 2. Poussez alors les deux cram¬ 
pons dans leur premiere position, afin qu’ils ne vous 
genent pas. 

Pour remettre le couvercle, placez-le, apres avoir tire les 
deux crampons, de maniere a ce que les deux plaques 
percees entrent dans les deux trous rectangulaires qui 
se trouvent de chaque cote du phonographe, et poussez 
les crampons. S’il est necessaire, pressez un peu sur le 

viii 















INTRODUCTION 


couvercle de maniere a ce que les deux crampons entrent 
facilement. 

4. Instrument sans le Couvercle. — Les noms des 
parties les plus importantes du phonographe vous sont 
donnes ci-dessous dans la Fig. 2. Vous devez les apprendre 



a, Mandrin; b, Crampons potir retenir le couvercle; cd, Levier; e, bras des diaphragmes; 
f, Levier d'arret et de marche; g, Vis regulatrice; h i, iermoir tournant; 
k, Ressort; mmn , Appareil repHiteur; pp. Rail; q, Cour- 
roie; rr, Poulie; ss, Anneau desdiaphragmes. 

pour etre a meme de comprendre les explications qui 
suivent. En les etudiant, placez votre phonographe devant 
vous, et regardez attentivement les parties nominees. 


MANIERE DE SE SERVIR DU PHONOGRAPHE 

Note.— Avant de lire plus loin, levez la partie supdrieure de l’instru- 
ment selon les directions donnees a Particle 14, et otez tout ce qui 
peut se trouver a l’interieur ayant servi a l’emballage; ayez soin que 
la courroie q q, Fig. 5 soit bien placee sur la poulie b b , et remettez la 
partie superieure du phonographe a sa position premiere, comme dans 
la Fig. 2. 

ix 














INTRODUCTION 


5. Le Bevier. — Dans la Fig. 2, le bras est marque e\ on 
peut le voir avec plus de details et avec d’autres parties dans 
la Fig. 3. Les noms de ces parties sont donnds sous cette 
figure. Vous remarquerez que dans la Fig. 3, le levier est 
en haut, tandis qu’il est en bas dans la Fig. 2. Ce change- 
ment s’effectue en mettant le doigt sous l’extr6mitd c, Fig. 2, 
du levier, et en poussant ce levier en haut aussi loin qu’il 
peut aller. II tourne sur la vis e , Fig. 3, et l’extremitd d 
repose dans cette dernikre position sur le rail m m. Pour 
baisser le levier, saisissez-le par l’extremite c , et tournez-le 
doucement jusqu’ a ce qu’il soit en bas. Vous devez vous 
habituer a baisser le levier avec precaution. Si vous l’abais- 
sez brusquement lorsqu’un cylindre se trouve sur le man- 
drin, la pointe des diaphragmes peut frapper le cylindre et 
l’endommager. 



a a, Bras; c d, Levier: f g, Anneau des diaphragmes; h, Manche de I'anneau; m m, 
rati: p r, Appareil ripetiteur; s t, Tringle d'arrihre; u x, Vis sans fin; 
x, Ecrou; x. Plaque de cote; z. Roue d'engrenage moyenne. 

6. Mouvements du Bras des Diaphragmes. —Quand 
le bras est leve par le levier comme il est dit ci-dessus, et 
comme il est represente dans la Fig. 3, vous pouvez le glisser 
en le poussant de gauche a droite et de droite a gauche, en 
saisissant soit le levier en e, soit la partie h de I’anneau des 
diaphragmes. 

Faites mouvoir le bras des diaphragmes plusieurs fois de 
droite a gauche, et de gauche a droite, de maniere a devenir 
familier avec ce, mouvement qui, quoique tres simple, est 


x 








INTRODUCTION 


trks important. Vous devez faire attention de ne pas laisser 
tomber le levier. N'essayez jamais de glisser le bras pendant 
que le levier est en bas. 

Vous remarquerez, en regardant votre instrument, que 
lorsque vous levez le bras des diaphragmes et le poussez en 
arrihre, il tourne sur une tringle, (tringle d’arriere, st, 
Fig. 3) et qu’il peut etre levd jusqu’a ce qu’il soit presque 
debout. Pour glisser le bras, il faut que la partie h de 
l’anneau des diaphragmes soit levee d’au moins un pouce 
au-dessus du rail m m Ceci a pour but de degager l’ecrou x 
de la vis sans fin u x, Fig. 3. Lorsque cette partie h repose 
sur le rail m m , c’est-a-dire lorsque le levier c d est baisse, 
vous remarquerez que les fils de l’ecrou x s’engagent dans 
la vis sans fin ux , et c’est ce qui fait avancer le bras lorsque 
le mecanisme est en motion. 

7. Le Permoir Tournant. — Il est marqu6 hi dans la 
Fig. 2. Pour l’ouvrir, il suffit de tirer a droite le bouton j, 
le fermoir tournera au- 
tour de la chamiere l. 

Pour fermer l’instru- 
ment, poussez le fer¬ 
moir, et pressez le bou¬ 
ton j de maniere a ce 
que le ressort k retienne 
ce fermoir fortement en 
position contre l’extre- 
mite du rail p p , Fig. 2. 

8. Pour Kemonter 
l’lnstrument. — La 
force motrice du phono- 
grophe provient d’un 
fort ressort d’acier que 
l’on doit remonter comme une pendule ordinaire, avec l’aide 
de la manivelle repr6sentee dans la Fig. 4. 

Cette manivelle a deux rainures ^ s, qui s’engagent dans 
deux clavettes i, Fig. 5, plac6es sur la tige dans laquelle la 
manivelle s’engage. Ins^rez la manivelle dans le trou 



xi 



INTRODUCTION 


marqud c, Fig 1, en arriere du crampon b , et tournez-la h 
droite en pressant dessus. 

II n’est pas necessaire d’arreter l’instrument pour le 
remonter. 

9. La Courroie. —Cette courroie marquee q dans la 
Fig. 2, et q q dans la Fig. 5, doit passer autour des poulies 
r r, Fig. 2, et b b, Fig. 5. 

10. Pom* Faire Marcher on pour Arreter l’instru¬ 
ment. — Vous pouvez maintenant faire marcher l’instrument, 
mais avant, assurez-vous que le fermoir tournant est bien 
dans sa position. 

Pour vous exercer a faire marcher et a arreter l’instrument, 
il importe peu que le bras soit leve ou abaisse. Vous 
pouvez le faire dans les deux cas. Cependant, pour juger 
comment le bras des diaphragmes est mis en motion, il est 
mieux de l’abaisser. 

Pour faire marcher l’instrument, poussez le levier d’arret 
et de marche /, Fig. 2, vers la gauche, jusqu’a l’extremite de 
l’ouverture rectangulaire dans laquelle il est place. Le 
phonographe se mettra en motion, le mandrin tournera, et 
vous verrez le bras des diaphragmes avancer lentement vers 
la droite. 

Pour arreter l’instrument, poussez le levier d’arret et de 
marche vers la droite, aussi loin qu’il peut aller. 

S’il arrivait que l’instrument ne se mette pas en marche, 
apres avoir pousse le levier, vers la gauche, il faudrait l’attri- 
buer a deux causes: 1°, L’instrument n’est pas remonte; 2°, 
La vis regulatrice est trop basse, et il est necessaire de lui 
faire faire quelques tours comme pour la visser. 

11. Pour Regler la Vitesse.—La vitesse est reglee 
au moyen de la vis regulatrice, marquee g dans la Fig. 2. 
Pour obtenir une plus grande vitesse, vous devez tourner la 
vis comme pour la visser; pour diminuer la vitesse, vous 
devez tourner la vis dans la direction contraire. 

La question de vitesse est tres importante; nous y re- 
viendrons en parlant des directions pour ecouter un cylindre 
phonographique, ou pour en faire un. 

xii 


INTRODUCTION 


12. Pour Huiler l’Exterieur de 1’Instrument.— II 
est necessaire que l’instrument soit huile de temps en 
temps, autrement il ne marchera pas d’une manure egale 
et fera trop de bruit., Pour huiler, servez-vous d’huile a 
machine a coudre, et employez la burette qui est envoyee 
avec le phonographe. 

II faut toujours vous rappeler que lorsqu 'une partie solide 
d'une machine se meat sur une autre , leurs surfaces de contact 



doivent Hre huilies. II n’est pas necessaire de mettre l’huile 
dans le trou lui-meme; il suffit de la mettre sur la piece de 
la machine, immediatement au-dessus du trou; l’huile entrera 
d’elle-meme. 

13. Vous devez occasionnellment mettre quelques gout- 
tes d’huile dans les places suivantes: 

1. Sur les pivots sur lesquels le mandrin tourne. 

xiii 
























INTRODUCTION 


2. Sur VScrou x et la vis sans {in u x, Fig. 3. aussi bien 
qu'aux extremites de cette derniere oil elle est supportee. 

3. Sur la tringle d'arriere s t, Fig. 3. Apres avoir mis 
quelques gouttes d’huile, glissez le bras des diaphragmes 
plusieurs fois a droite et a gauche. 

4. Sur la partie superieure du rail m m, Fig. 3. 

5. Sur les dents de la roue d'engrenage z, Fig. 3 , et sur la 
plaque de cdte a V endroit oil la roue est supportee. 

14. Pour Ouvrlr l’instrument de Manibre a Toil* 
le Mecanisme Inter!eur. — Toute la partie superieure de 
rinstrument peut etre levee comme le couvercle d’ une boite, 
parce qu’elle est jointe a la partie inferieure par des char- 
nieres placees en arriere. Quand cette partie est levee, elle 
reste automatiquement dans la position que nous montre la 
Fig. 5, car elle est retenue par un levier a a. Fig. 5. Pour remet- 
tre la partie superieure en place, saisissez-en le bois d’une 
main, tirez le levier a a de votre cote etlaissez tomber douce- 
ment cette partie superieure en la maintenant avec votre main. 

Quand l’instrument est ouvert, vous pouvez le faire 
marcher de la meme maniere que lorsqu’il est ferme. Vous 
comprendrez mieux les expressions qui vont suivre si vous 
observez la motion de l’instrument lorsqu’il est ouvert. 

15. Pour Huilex* les Parties Inter!eures. —Votre 
phonographe etant ouvert, mettez une ou deux gouttes 
d’huile dans les places suivantes: 

1. Dans les trois petits Foils qui se trouvent a Vexterieur de 
la plaque de gauche marquie c, Fig. 5, ou vous verrez, quand 
le mecanisme est en mouvement, les extremites des petits 
arbres de couche tourner avec les roues a engrenage placees 
en dedans. Deux de ces arbres de couche sont supportes a 
leurs autres extremites par la plaque interieure d d. Mettez 
aussi un peu d’huile sur ces extremites. 

2. Dans le trou pres de la partie inferieure de la plaque de 
droite , ou vous verrez tourner l’arbre de couche qui supporte 
la grande roue h. 

3. Aux extremites de Varbre de couche e e oil la tringle est 
supportee. 


xiv 


INTRODUCTION 


4. Dans le trou de Varbre de couche , oil il entre dans 
le disque /. 

5. Sur les dents des roues d'engrenage. 

6. Sur Varbre de couche qui supporte la poulie bb, oil il 
entre dans la plaque de gauche c. 

7. A Vendroit de support de la petite poulie g. 

16. Remarques Generates Concernant le Graissage 
et le Nettoyage. — Il n’est pas necessaire d’huiler souvent 
votre phonographe, et lorsque vous le faites, evitez d’em- 
ployer trop d’huile. 

Ayez soin de ne pas laisser tomber d’huile sur les parties 
qui n’en ont pas besoin, comme la courroie, le mandrin, le 
levier, le bouton de l’appareil rdpetiteur, etc. 

Lorsque l’huile apparait epaisse, enlevez-la avec un chiffon 
trempe dans la benzine et huilez de nouveau. Toutes les 
parties, d’ailleurs, ont besoin d’etre nettoydes de temps en 
temps avec de la benzine. Il est plus facile de nettoyer les 
parties qui tournent lorsque l’appareil est en mouvement. 

N’employer jamais ni coton, ni flanelle pour nettoyer 
votre instrument. 

Le blaireau que vous recevez avec le phonographe doit 
etre employd uniquement pour brosser les cylindres sur le 
mandrin, et ne doit jamais servir pour nettoyer l’instrument. 
Il ne doit jamais etre en contact avec l’huile. 


DIRECTION POUR MANIER LES CYLINDRES 

17. Cylindres Vierges et Cylindres Phonograph! - 
ques.-La Fig. 6 montre un des tubes de cire que l’on 
emploie sur le phonographe, et que l’on place sur le mandrin. 

Quand un cylindre n’a pas ete employd, sa surface extd- 
rieure est parfaitement unie; on l’appelle cylindre vierge. 

Mais lorsque, par un procede decrit plus loin, on inscrit 
des sons sur la surface du cylindre, il s’appelle cylindre 
phono graphique. 

18. Dans le premier envoi, vous recevez dans la meme 
boite, avec votre phonographe deux cylindres vierges et 


xv 



INTRODUCTION 


deux cylindres phonographiques contenant les deux premie¬ 
res legons du cours. Ces derniers sont marques a l’exte- 
rieur de la boite cylindrique qui les con- 
tient “Cylindre Phonographique d’Anglais, 
No.—”; les autres ne presentent aucune 
marque exterieure. Cependant l’un d’eux est 
accompagne d’une etiquette pliee sous le cou- 
vercle de la boite, et qui contient, “Exercice 
d’Anglais No. — .” C’est cette etiquette que 
vous devez remplir, en donnant le numero 
de votre exercice, votre nom, votre numero 
d’ordre et les lettres qui designent votre 
cours. Elle doit toujours accompagner les 
cylindres phonographiques que vous envoyez a l’Ecole pour 
correction. 

19. Comment on Doit Manier les Cylindres. — Les 

cylindres doivent etre manies avec soin. Ne touchez pas la 
surface exterieure avec vos doigts, ni ne posez jamais les 
cylindres sur le cote. Pour les prendre, mettez l’index et le 



Fig. 6 



Fig. 7 


majeur de votre main a l’interieur du cylindre, comme dans 
la Fig. 7. Si vous desirez le deposer sur la table, mettez-le 
debout. Quand vous n’employez pas vos cylindres, enve- 
loppez-les dans le coton, et placez-les dans la boite en carton. 


xvi 

















INTRODUCTION 


Brossez un cylindre avec le blaireau ou une piece de coton 
tres propre. 

20. Pour Mettre un Cylindre sur le Mandrin. 
Onvrez le fermoir tournant, et poussez-le en arriere aussi 
loin qu’il peut aller. 

Vous remarquerez qne l’une des extremites du cylindre est 
taillee en biseau, ou en biais, au lieu d’etre couple perpendi- 
culairement comme l’autre extremite. Placez l’index et le 
majeur de votre main droite a l’interieur du cylindre du cote 
oil il est coupe droit, et introduisez l’extr6mite taillee en 
biseau sur le mandrin. Poussez le cylindre doucement de 
manikre a ce qu’il soit serrd sur le mandrin. Ne pressez 
pas trop fort, sans cela, vous casseriez le cylindre. 

Le cylindre ne doit pas, lorsqu’il est en place, glisser sur 
le mandrin. 



Fig. 8 


Ayez soin, en mettant votre cylindre, que la surface ne 
vienne pas en contact avec le fermoir tournant qui doit etre 
entierement ouvert. Un corps dur, frottant la surface d’un 
cylindre, l’endommagerait. 

Levez toujours le levier du bras des diaphragmes avant de 
mettre un cylindre sur le mandrin. S’il etait en bas, la 
pointe des diaphragmes viendrait rayer la surface du cylindre. 

xvii 



INTRODUCTION 


21 . Pour Oter un Cylindre (Iu Mantlrin. — Ouvrez 
le fermoir tournant aussi loin que vous pouvez. Placez 
ensuite votre main droite a l’extremite du mandrin comme 
dans la Fig. 8. Poussez le cylindre avec le majeur et F index 
de votre main gauche comme vous pouvez le voir dans la 
meme figure. Ayant ainsi desserre le cylindre du mandrin, 
poussez-le par le cote en biais, et introduisez l’index et le 
majeur de votre main droite a l’interieur de l’autre cote. 
Vous pouvez alors l’enlever facilement. Ayez soin d’avoir 
le levier du bras des diaphragmes leve. 


DIRECTIONS POUR EAIRE UN CYLINDRE 
PHONOGRAPHIQUE 

Note:. — Le procede pour faire un cylindre phonographique est 
donne ici, avant les directions pour ecouter un cylindre, parce qu’il 
est plus logique et plus facile de decrire les deux operations en 
employant cet ordre. Vous devez lire les directions suivantes pour 
faire et pour ecouter les cylindres phonographiques, de maniere a 
acquerir une idee generale. Cependant, vous devez reproduire la voix 
avant de parler vous-meme dans le phonographe. Quand vous com- 
mencerez a etudier la Legon 1, lisez les Arts. 30 a 37 tres soigneu- 
sement, et suivez-en les directions Quand vous serez pret a faire votre 
cylindre phonographique, c’est-a-dire votre exercice phonographique, 
vous lirez les Arts. 22 a 29. 



Fig. 9 


22. Les Diaphragmes. — Avec votre phonographe, vous 
recevez un “diaphragme enregistreur” marque “recorder,” 
et un “diaphragme reproducteur” marque “reproducer.” 
Quand ils sont employes sur le phonographe, ils s’emboitent 
dans l’anneau des diaphragmes ss, Fig. 2. 

xviii 




















INTRODUCTION 



Le diaphragme enregistreur, Fig. 9, est fabrique avec un 
manche h , on sans manche. Maniez-le par le manche h, le 
tube t ou le disque dd. Ne touchez pas la pointe, et lorsque 
vous le mettez sur une table, la pointe doit toujours etre en 
haut, comme dans la 
Fig. 10. 

Ce qui vient d’etre 
dit pour le diaphragme 
enregistreur s’applique 
aussi au diaphragme re- 
producteur, Fig. 11. 

23 . Pour Mettre 
les Diaphragmes. 

Pour mettre les dia- fig. io 

phragmes dans l’an- 

neau, dont le nouveau modele est donnd dans la Fig. 12, 
examinez si l’extremite de la vis s, ne passe pas au travers 

de l’anneau. Prenez un des 
diaphragmes dans votre main 
droite, par le tube t\ si c’est le 
diaphragme reproducteur, intro- 
duisez la partie w dans l’anneau, 
puis le diaphragme lui-meme, en 
ayant soin que la rainure n de 
ce diaphragme entre dans la 
petite dent marquee />, Fig. 12, 
puis vissez la vis s. Ces direc¬ 
tions s’appliquent aux deux dia¬ 
phragmes, excepte que le dia- 

nu. J.J. 

phragme enregistreur n’a pas la 
partie w, Fig. 11, et que par consequent il suffit de le placer 
simplement dans l’anneau. 



24 . Pie Tube Enregistreur. —Le tube enregistreur, 
Fig. 13, n’a besoin d’aucune description, et la gravure 
ci-dessous est suffisante pour que vous le reconnaissiez en 
ouvrant la boite qui contient tous les appareils. 


xix 



















INTRODUCTION 


25 . Pour Enregistrer la Parole. — N’oubliez jamais de 
remonter d’abord votre instrument, car si l’instrument s’arrete 
pendant que vous parlez, votre cylindre vierge sera gat 6. 

Mettez un cylindre vierge sur le 
mandrin, comme il a 6te expliqud 
dans l’Art. 20 . 

Placez ensuite votre diaphragme 
enregistreur dans l’anneau comme 
il a ete dit dans Particle 23 . (Ce 
diaphragme peut etre place avant 
le cylindre.) Prenez le tube en¬ 
registreur et placez-en l’extremite 
E, Fig. 13, dans le tube du dia¬ 
phragme. Placez le bras des dia- 
phragmes en le glissant, vers la 
gauche, de maniere a ce que la 
petite pointe du diaphragme se 
trouve au-dessus et pres de l’ex- 
tremite gauche du cylindre, c’est- 
h-dire a son commencement. Pour voir s’il est dans la bonne 
position, vous pouvez abaisser le levier du bras, de maniere 
a ce que la pointe du diaphragme touche le cylindre vierge. 

Placez-vous devant l’instrument, en tenant le tube enre¬ 
gistreur d’une main. Faites marcher l’instrument (Art. 10 ) 
et abaissez le levier. Placez-vous de maniere a ce que votre 
bouche occupe une des positions comme dans les Figs. 14 et 




Fig. 12 


15, et alors commencez a parler. La Fig. 14 montre la 
position la mieux adaptee pour les personnes qui ont une 
voix forte, et la Fig. 15, la meilleure position pour les dames, 
ou les hommes ayant une voix faible. 


xx 


INTRODUCTION 


26 . Parlez haut, un peu plus fort que dans la conversa¬ 
tion ordinaire, mais ne criez pas. Ayez soin surtout de ne 
pas changer la position de votre bouche par rapport au tube 



Fig. 14 

lorsque vous parlez. Si vous lisez, placez votre livre devant 
vous, en arriere de l’instrument, dans une position qui vous 
permette de lire facilement. - 


xxi 




INTRODUCTION 


Prononcez chaque son tres distinctement. Les consonnes 
finales, et la lettre .? doivent etre fortement accentuees. 



Fig. 15 


27. Lorsque vous avez fini de parler, levez le levier du 
bras, et brossez les particules de cire que la pointe du dia- 
phragme enregistreur a enlevees. Pour plus de facilite, 
placez la brosse contre le cylindre et faites marcher votre 

xxii 





INTRODUCTION 


phonographe. Pour ecouter ce que vous venez d’enregistrer, 
otez le diaphragme enregistreur, et remplacez-le par le 
diaphragme reproducteur, et suivez les directions donnees 
dans les Arts. 23 a 36. Lorsque vous avez fini, otez 
le cylindre, enveloppez-le dans le coton, et placez-le dans 
sa boite. 

Ne laissez jamais un cylindre sur le mandrin pendant 
plusieurs heures, parce que la difference de contraction entre 
le metal et la cire cassera votre cylindre. 

28. Vitesse du Mandrin. —Pour enregistrer la parole, 
c’est-a-dire pour faire vos exercices paries, le mandrin doit 
tourner avec une vitesse d’environ 90 tours par minute. 
Pour verifier la vitesse, prenez un morceau de ficelle, 
entourez-en le mandrin, et faites un noeud. Faites marcher 
l’instrument, et placez votre doigt au-dessus du mandrin de 
maniere a ce que vous sentiez le noeud quand il passe, et en 
regardant a votre montre, comptez le nombre de fois que le 
noeud passe par minute; ce qui sera naturellement le meme 
nombre de tours faits par le mandrin. Si ce nombre differe 
beaucoup de 90, augmentez ou diminuez la vitesse selon le 
cas au moyen de la vis regulatrice (Voyez Art. 11). Vous 
arrivez ainsi apres quelques tatonnements a la vitesse requise. 


DIRECTIONS POUR ECOIJTER UN CYLINDRE 
PHON OGRAPHIQUE 

29. Tubes Acoustiqnes. — Les tubes acoustiques 
employes pour dcouter un cylindre phonographique sont 
reproduits dans la Fig. 16. La Fig. 17 montre de quelle 
maniere ils doivent etre joints au phonographe, et ajustds 
de sorte que les disques c. c., Fig. 16 soient places sur les 
oreilles, et retenus en position au moyen de la bande d’acier 
/. /., placee au-dessus de la tete. Si les petits tubes d, a 
l’interieur des disques ne viennent pas exactement en face du 
centre du pavilion de l’oreille, devissez un peu les disques, et 
glissez-les dans la rainure m n , Fig. 16 jusqu’a la position 
qu’ils doivent occuper. Vissez-les ensuite pour les retenir 
dans cette position. 

xxiii 



INTRODUCTION 


30. Pour Ecouter un Cylindre PlionograpMque. 
Mettez votre cylindre phonographique sur le mandrin 
(Art. 20) et placez le diaphragme reproducteur dans 
l’anneau. Vous mettez ensuite l’extremitd a des tubes 
acoustiques dans le tube du diaphragme, et vous ajustez les 
disques a vos oreilles comme il a 6te dit plus haut. Glissez 
le bras des diaphragmes vers la gauche, jusqu’a ce que la 
pointe du diaphragme se trouve au commencement du 
cylindre, oh vous voyez que les mots ont 6te enregistres. 
Faites marcher l’instrument, et abaissez le levier. Vous 
entendrez alors la parole reproduite. Dans nos nouveaux 



Fig. 16 


tubes acoustiques, un petit cylindre perfore est introduit 
dans le caoutchouc a peu pres a un pied de l’extremite. II a 
pour objet de permettre a nos dleves de reduire les sons de 
l’instrument. Pour cela, il suffit de separer les deux 
extr6mit6s du tube en caoutchouc a l’endroit oh le tube 
metallique est insert, et de mettre ainsi a nu une partie plus 
ou moins longue de ce tube. Les sons 6tant ainsi rdduits, 
deviennent moins fatigants pour 1’oreille.” (Voyez Fig. 19.) 

31. Repetition. —Apres avoir 6cout6 votre cylindre, 
vous pouvez lever le bras des diaphragmes et le pousser de 
nouveau vers la gauche au point de depart; les mots seront 
r6p£t6s. Il n’est pas ndcessaire d’arreter l’instrument. 

Si vous desirez r6p6ter une partie du cylindre seulement, 
vous pouvez lever le bras des diaphragmes, le glisser h 


XXIV 




INTRODUCTION 


gauche, et l’abaisser a l’endroit que vous voulez. II n’est 
pas non plus n^cessaire que vous ayez ecoute tout le cylindre 
avant de rdpdter. Vous pouvez, h n’importe quel moment 



lever le bras des diaphragmes, le glisser h droite ou a 
gauche, et l’abaisser oh vous le desirez. La chose la plus 
importante h vous rappeler, est que vous devez toujours lever 


xxv 


Pig. 17 





INTRODUCTION 


le bras des diaphragmes avant de le glisser , sans cela vous 
endommagerez le cylindre. 

32. Appareil Repetlteur. — La methode de repetition 
expliqnee dans 1’article precedent s’applique seulement au 
cas ou l’on veut repeter de longues phrases, le tout ou une 
partie du cylindre. Lorsqu’on ne veut entendre que quelques 
mots, ou une courte phrase, il faut se servir de l’appareil 
repetiteur, marque mmn dans la Fig. 2, et pr dans la Fig. 3. 
Pour cela, il suffit de presser le bouton r, Fig. 3 jusqu’ou il 



peut aller. Vous devez presser assez rapidement, mais 
avoir soin de ne pas enlever votre doigt trop brusquement, 
car la pointe du diaphragme frapperait le cylindre avec force 
et l’endommagerait. Vous remarquerez que le mecanisme 
de l’appareil repetiteur est arrange de telle sorte qu’en pres- 
sant le bouton, le bras des diaphragmes se leve, glisse a 
gauche et s’abaisse. 

33. Le Pavilion. —Un pavilion en cuivre est joint aussi 
aux accessoires de votre phonographe. On peut l’employer 


XXVI 



INTRODUCTION 


pour dcouter un cylindre a la place des tubes acoustiques. 
II s’adapte sur le tube du diaphragme de la meme maniere 
que le tube enregistreur (Art. 25). II n’est pas necessaire 
de le tenir. Pour reproduire la parole avec ce pavilion, 
agissez comme vous le faites avec les tubes acoustiques. 

34. Les tubes acoustiques donnent un son moins metal- 
lique que le pavilion, et l’on entend les mots plus dis- 
tinctement. C’est pourquoi il vaut mieux, lorsque vous 
commencez a apprendre une legon, vous servir des tubes 
acoustiques. Lorsque vous etes familiers aveg les sons, et 
que vous pouvez les repdter, vous pouvez alors employer le 
pavilion pour habituer votre oreille aux sons anglais. 

35. Vitesse du Mandrin pour la Reproduction. 
La voix enregistree sur le cylindre doit etre reproduite en 
donnant au mandrin la meme vitesse qu’il avait lorsqu’on 

a enregistre la parole. 
Quand vous ecoutez un 
cylindre, il n’est pas neces¬ 
saire cependant de comp¬ 
ter le nombre de tours par 
minute que fait le mandrin 
(Art, 28). Si vous re- 
ig marquez que la voix est 

trop profonde, que les 
mots arrivent trop lentement, comme si l’instrument allait 
s’arreter, la vitesse n’est pas assez grande, et vous devez 
l’augmenter. Si au contraire les sons sont criards, les mots 
articules trop rapidement, c’est que la vitesse est trop 
grande, et vous devez la diminuer. Dans tous les cas, vous 
devez tourner la vis de vitesse dans un sens ou dans l’autre 
jusqu’a ce que la voix semble naturelle. 

36. Remarques Generates sur la Reproduction. — Il 
peut arriver que quelques mots, ou une phrase ne se repro- 
duisent pas distinctement. Cela est du a plusieurs causes: 

1. Il peut se faire que la pointe du diaphragme ne soit 
pas dans le propre sillon trace sur le cylindre. Il suffit alors 
de lever le bras des diaphragmes a l’aide de l’appareil 

xxvii 



INTRODUCTION 


r6p£titeur, et en l’abaissant, la pointe prendra la position 
normale. 

2. Si les sons sont encore indistincts, cela peut etre du au 
fait que la pointe du diaphragme n’est pas propre, et qu’elle 
est couverte d’un peu de cire, ou de petits morceaux de 
coton. Passez alors votre brosse sur la pointe. 

3. Finalement, le cylindre peut n’etre pas ferme en posi¬ 
tion sur le mandrin. S’il glisse, les sons seront imparfaits. 
Dans ce cas, arretez l’instrument, et poussez legerement le 
cylindre vers la gauche. 

4. Vous remarquerez aussi parfois que la voix reproduite 
devient de plus en plus grave, que les mots arrivent de plus 
en plus lentement: c’est un signe que votre instrument a 
besoin d’etre remonte. 


xxviii 


PREMIERE LECON 


DIRECTIONS GENERATES 

1. Les legons d’anglais qui composent la premiere partie 
de notre cours, sont accompagnees de cylindres phono- 
graphiques. Ils ont pour principal objet de donner a l’eleve 
une prononciation exacte de la langue anglaise. A ce grand 
avantage vient s’en joindre un autre. Tous les mots, toutes 
les expressions qui constituent une legon peuvent etre 
repetes par le phonographe aussi souvent que l’on veut. 
Cette repetition constante a pour consequence d’habituer 
l’oreille aux sons anglais. L’eleve peut ainsi acquerir sans 
effort toutes les expressions contenues dans une legon, et 
s’en etant rendu maitre, il pourra s’en servir avec autant de 
facilite que si elles appartenaient a sa langue maternelle. 
Sous ce rapport, le phonographe est un maitre superieur qui 
ne se lasse jamais. 

Nous vous engageons done a faire usage du cylindre du 
maitre, jusqu’a ce que tous les mots et toutes les phrases 
qu’il contient vous soient familiers, et que vous puissiez vous 
en servir en conversation sans traduction aucune. 

2. Avant de commencer cette legon, remontez votre 
phonographe, et mettez le premier cylindre sur le mandrin. 
Ajustez le diaphragme reproducteur, de maniere a ce que la 
pointe soit a gauche du cylindre, a l’endroit oh vous voyez 
les mots enregistres. 

3. Faites marcher l’instrument, et abaissez la pointe du 
diaphragme reproducteur, de maniere a ce qu’elle touche le 
cylindre. Ecoutez attentivement la legon en suivant le texte 
sur votre livre. Quand vous arrivez a un mot ou a une 
phrase dont vous ne comprenez pas bien la prononciation, 
employez votre repetiteur (voyez Introduction, Art. 32) 

For notice of copyright, see page immediately following the title page 

l 1 



2 


ANGLAIS 


1 


6coutez ce mot ou cette phrase un grand nombre de fois, 
jusqu’a ce que vous en ayez acquis la prononciation exacte. 

4. Les mots anglais s’ecrivent souvent comme les mots 
frangais, mais la prononciation en est tres differente. Ne 
cherchez done jamais a prononcer un mot sans l’avoir 
entendu d’abord par le phonographe. 

5. Lorsque vous aurez 6coute tous les mots du vocabu- 
laire, levez la pointe du diaphragme reproducteur, et ajustez- 
la de nouveau au point de depart, et repetez l’op^ration 
jusqu’a ce que vous soyez sur de la prononciation de ces 
mots. Prononcez-les apres l’instrument, et finalement 
sans l’aide du phonographe. Agissez de meme avec les 
phrases qui suivent, et n’oubliez jamais que vous devez 
toujours lire a haute voix. Toutes les phrases doivent etre 
6tudi6es jusqu’a ce que vous puissiez les r6peter sans l’aide 
de votre livre ou de votre instrument. 

6. Pour que la prononciation des mots contenus dans les 
premiers cylindres soit tres claire et tres distincte, ils sont 
reproduits tres lentement. Vous devez cependant apprendre 
k les lire plus rapidement, avec la vitesse que l’on emploie 
ordinairement dans la conversation. 

7. II est de la plus haute importance que vous sachiez bien 
une le$on avant de passer h la suivante. Bien savoir une legon 
ne signifie pas seulement que vous devez pouvoir la repeter 
sans hesitation, mais aussi que tous les mots et toutes les 
phrases qu’elle contient doivent vous paraitre aussi naturels 
que s’ils etaient en frangais. Plus vous 6couterez le cylindre 
du maitre, et plus naturelles vous sembleront ces expressions. 


CYLINDRE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 

8. Quoique le phonographe reproduise les sons anglais 
correctement, l’el&ve, habitue cependant a lire le frangais, a 
une certaine tendance, surtout au commencement, a pronon¬ 
cer les mots comme s’ils etaient frangais. Les observations 
qui suivent sont donnees dans le but de mettre l’eleve a 



1 


PREMIERE LECON 


3 


meme d’entendre les sons anglais tels qu’ils sont reproduits 
dans le cylindre dn maitre. 

9. Remarquez qu’en anglais les voyelles n’ont pas tou- 
jours un seul et meme son: 

Prenez la lettre a, par exemple. 

Elle a le son de a en frangais dans and, bad, happy, madam; 
celui de d fans garden. 

Dans also, elle a le son de 6. 

Notez que la lettre a suivie de m ou n n’est pas nasale 
en anglais, mais la lettre n ou m est fortement accentu^e, 
comme c’est le cas en frangais lorsque n ou m est double 
(annee, ammoniaque, etc.). 

La lettre e a le son de ie dans be, here (ler. e). 

Elle a le son de 6 dans where, there, yes; celui de 6 dans 
very; elle se prononce comme enn dans pen, garden, diligent; 
er dans merchant, teacher, painter a le son de eur en frangais; 
enfin cette lettre finale est muette dans here, where, there, 
quite. 

La lettre i ou y a le meme son qu’en frangais dans diligent, 
happy, in, Lucy, physician, pupil, rich, very, yes, young. Elle 
se prononce comme aille dans I, kind, quite, et comme eu 
dans sir. 

Oo et Vo de to ont le son de ou dans book, too, good. 

La lettre u a aussi plusieurs sons: Elle se prononce 
comme eu dans but; comme ou dans Lucy; et comme iou 
dans pupil. 

Enfin, les combinaisons suivantes ont comme sons frangais 
equivalents: 


ow de how 
ea de teacher 
ou de young 
ch de rich 


comme aou 


comme ze 
comme o 
comme tch 


Remarquez aussi que toutes les consonnes finales sont 
prononcees en anglais. 

Ecoutez attentivement la prononciation de th en anglais, 
dans the et there. II se prononce en plagant la langue legere- 
ment entre les dents, et en souffiant fort. Evitez de don- 
ner a ce th le son de z. 


4 


ANGLAIS 


1 


VOCABULAIRE 


I. c. s. 

English Record No. 1 

also, anssi 

and, et 

bad, mauvais 

to be, Hre 

tlie book, le livre 

but, metis 

diligent, applique 

the garden, le jardin 

good, bon 

happy, heureux 

here, ici 

how, comment 

in, dans , en 

John, Jean 

kind, bienveillant 

Lucy, Lucie 

madam, madame 

the merchant, le marchand 

no, non 


I. C. S. (International Correspondence 
Schools) Cylindre d’Anglais No. 1 

not, ne . . .pas 

old, vieux * 

the painter, lepeintre 

the pen, la plume 

the physician, le medecin 

poor, pauvre 

the pupil, Veleve 

quite, tout a fait 

rich, riche 

sir, monsieur 

the teacher, le maitre, le 
professeur 
there, la 
too, aussi, trop 
very, trhs 
well, bien 
where, ou. 
yes, oui 
young, jeune 


PHRASES ET 
I am 10 a teacher.” 

I am old. 

I am an 12 old teacher. 

I am here. 

He is a merchant. 

She is young- and happy. 13 
It 14 is a good book. 

We are quite well. 

You are rich. 

You are very kind. 

They are in the garden. 

Am I 15 a diligent pupil? 


Je suis professeur. 

Je suis vieux. 

Je suis un vieux professeur. 
Je suis ici. 

II est marchand. 

Elle est jeune et heureuse. 
C’est un bon livre. 

Nous sommes tout a fait 
bien. 

Vous etes riche. 

Vous etes tres bon. 

Ils sont dans le jardin. 

Suis-je un eleve applique? 





§1 


PREMIERE LECON 


5 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


No, sir; you are not 16 a dili¬ 
gent pupil. 

Are you well? —No, madam; 
I am not quite well. 

Is he a physician? 

No, sir; he is not. 17 

Is she young? —No, madam; 

she is not. 

Is it a good pen? 

Yes; it is a very good pen. 

Are we too old? 

Yes; you are too old. 

Are you rich? 

Yes; we are. 

Are they young? 

Yes; they are quite young. 
Are you well, madam? 

O yes, sir; I am well. And 
how are you? 

I am not quite well. Where 
is Lucy? 

Lucy is in the garden. 

Is John 18 there also? 

Yes, sir; John and the teacher 
are there also. 

Are they well? 

Yes, sir; they are quite well. 

*** 

Am I not 19 a good pupil? 

No; you are not. 

Are you not happy? 


Non, monsieur; vous n’etes 
pas un eleve applique. 

Etes-vous bien? —Non, ma- 
dame je ne suis pas tout a 
fait bien. 

Est-il medecin? 

Non, monsieur; il n’est pas 
medecin. 

Est-elle jeune? — Non, ma- 
dame; elle n’est pas jeune. 

Est-ce une bonne plume? 

Oui; c’est une tres bonne 
plume. 

Sommes-nous trop ages? 

Oui; vous etes trop ages. 

Etes-vous riches? 

Oui; nous sommes riches. 

Sont-ils jeunes? 

Oui; ils sont tout a fait jeunes. 

Etes-vous bien, madame? 

Oh! oui, monsieur; je suis 
bien; et comment etes- 
vous? 

Je ne suis pas tres bien. Ou 
est Lucie? 

Lucie est dans le jardin. 

Jean est-il la aussi? 

Oui, monsieur; Jean et le 
maitre sont la ausssi. 

Sont-ils bien? 

Oui, monsieur; ils sont tout 
a fait bien. 

*** 

Ne suis-je pas un bon eleve? 

Non; vous n’etes pas un bon 
eleve. 

N’etes-vous pas heureux? 




6 


ANGLAIS 


§1 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION—(Continuees) 


No, madam; I am not. 

Is he not a painter? 

No, madam; he is not a 
painter; he is a physician. 
Is she not in the garden? 
Yes, madam; she is there. 

Is it not a good pen? 

Yes, John; it is. 

Are we not diligent? 

Yes; you are. 

Are you not well? 

No, sir; we are not-. 

Are they not kind? 

O, yes; they are very kind. 

Be happy. 20 
Be diligent. 

Is it well to be rich? 


Non, madame; je ne suis pas 
heureux. 

N’est-il pas peintre? 

Non, madame; il n’est pas 
peintre; il est medecin. 

N’est-elle pas dans le jardin? 

Oui, madame; elle est la (elle 
y est). 

N’est-ce pas une bonne 
plume? 

Oui, Jean; c’est une bonne 
plume. 

Ne sommes-nous pas ap¬ 
pliques. 

Oui; vous etes appliques. 

N’etes-vous pas bien? 

Non, monsieur; nous ne 
sommes pas bien. 

Ne sont-ils pas bienveillants? 

Oh! oui; ils sont tres bien¬ 
veillants. 

Soyez heureux. 

Soyez appliqu^. 

Est-ce bien d’etre riche? 


REMARQUES 

10. Le principal objet de cette legon est de donner la 
conjugaison du verbe to be , etre. Ce verbe est beaucoup 
plus important en anglais qu’en frangais, aussi est-il de 
toute necessity d’en apprendre les formes tres soigneuse- 
ment. Le present, a la forme affirmative, est comme suit: 
to be, ttre 
Present—Affirmatif 
I am, Je suis 




§1 


PREMIERE LEQON 


7 


We 

You 


Nous sommes 



Tliey 


La deuxieme personne du singulier est omise de ces 
legons de conversation, parce que le tutoiemdnt n’est 
d’usage en anglais que dans la poesie, dans le style eleve, 
ou en s’adressant a Dieu. Dans le langage ordinaire, on se 
sert de la deuxieme personne de pluriel. 

11. Contrairement au frangais, Particle indefini a , un, 
ou une, est employe en anglais entre le verbe to be et le nom 
qui denote une profession. 

I am a teacher, Je suis professeur. 

He is a physician, II est docteur. 

12. Devant une voyelle, Particle indefini a, un, une, 
s’ecrit an , par euphonie. 

He is an old physician, C'est un vieux medecin (litteralement, II est 
un vieux medecin .) 

13. Remarquez qu’en anglais l’adjectif ne s’accorde ni 
en genre, ni en nombre avec le nom qu’il qualifie. 

John is happy, Jean est heureux. 

Lucy is happy, Lucie est heureuse. 

John and the teacher are happy, Jean et le maitre sont heureux. 

Madam and Lucy are happy, Madame et Lucie sont heureuses. 

14. II y a en anglais trois genres, le masculin, le 
fdminin et le neutre: Les noms de males sont masculins, 
et le pronom sujet correspondant est he, il; les noms de 
femelles sont feminins et le pronom sujet est she , elle; 
enfin lorsque le sexe n’est pas exprime, et les noms des 
objets inanimes sont du neutre, avec le pronom sujet it, qui 
est traduit par il ou elle en frangais, selon que ce meme nom 
est masculin ou feminin. A cette regie, il y a tres peu 
d’exceptions qui seront 6tudiees plus tard. L’article, le, la, 
ou les n’a qu’une forme en anglais the. 


15. La forme interrogative du verbe to be, etre, est 
une traduction litt^rale de la meme forme en francais. Le 


8 


ANGLAIS 


1 


pronom sujet est place apres le verbe. Le modele de cette 
conjugaison est comme suit: 


to be, etre 


Present—Interrogate 
Am I? Suis-je? 

f he? EstV l? 

Is she? \elle? 

[it? 


( we? 
you? 

they? 


Somme s-nous ? 
Etes-vous ? 
c , S ils? 

Son ‘-\ellesr 


16. La negation en anglais est un mot simple, not qui 
traduit notre expression composee ne ... . pas. La forme 
negative du verbe to be s’obtient en ajoutant not apres le 
verbe de la forme affirmative. 


to be, itre 
Present—N egatif 


I am not, 
He I 

She >is not, 
It J 
We 
You 

They 


are 


Je ne suis pas. 
^ \n’est pas. 

J 


mot 


Elle 


Nous ne sommes pas. 
Vous n'ites pas. 

\nesontpas. 
Elies J 


17. Une grande difference existe entre le frangais et 
l’anglais dans la construction de la reponse. Tandis qu’en 
frangais nous sommes obliges de repeter le verbe et tous les 
complements exprimes, il suffft de repeter le verbe en 
anglais. 


Is he old? —Yes; he is, Est-il vieux? — Oui , il est vieux. 

Are you a merchant? —No; I am not, Etes-vous marchand?—Non, 
je ne suis pas marchand. 


18. Lorsque le sujet du verbe to be est un nom, dans une 
interrogation, le verbe se place le premier, et il est suivi de 
ce nom. 

Is John a merchant?— Jean est-il marchand? 

Is Lucy a teacher 1 —Lucie est-elle professeur? 




§1 


PREMIERE LEQON 


9 


19. La forme interrogative-negative dn verbe to be 
s’obtient en ajoutant la negation not apres la forme interro¬ 
gative, comme on peut le voir dans le tableau suivant: 


to be, itre 

Present—Interrogate-Negatif 
Am I not? Ne suis-je pas. 




Ne sonimes-nous pas? 
Netes-vous pas? 



Lorsque le sujet du verbe to be est un nom, a la forme 
interrogative-negative, le verbe suivi de not est place devant 
ce nom. 

Is not John a physician? Jean n'est-il pas medecin? 

Is not Lucy diligent? Lucie n’est-ellepas appliquee? 

20. Comme on le voit, la deuxifeme personne de l’impera- 
tif se forme de l’infinitif par la suppression de la preposition 
to qui est le signe de l’infinitif. 

Be good, Sois ou Soyez bon. 

Be kind, Sois, ou Soyez bienveillant. 


EXERCICE ORAL 


21. Cette division est de la plus haute importance, et 
doit etre etudide avec le plus grand soin. Elle a pour but 
de faire acquerir a l’eleve l’habitude de penser en anglais. 
On remarquera que beaucoup de mots et de formes sont 
repdtds un grand nombre de fois. II ne faut pas penser 
qu’une telle rdpdtition soit inutile. Chaque phrase doit etre 
lue distinctement et a haute voix, et l’exercice entier doit 
etre compris sans effort aucun. 

22. Diffdrentes phrases sont donn^es dans cet exercice 
avec leur traduction. Elies sont suivies d’autres phrases de 
meme construction. Elies en different cependant par le 
changement de certains mots, quelquefois par des differences 



10 


ANGLAIS 


§1 


dans la personne ou dans le temps du verbe. En dtudiant 
soigneusement cette partie, l’eleve s’habituera graduellement 
a construire d’autres phrases semblables a la phrase donnee, 
et arrivera ainsi a parler la langue anglaise avec facilite, sans 
avoir besoin d’en traduire les expressions en frangais. 

Am I a diligent pupil?-Yes, sir; you are a 
diligent pupil.—Yes, sir; you are. 

Suis-je un Hive diligent? — Oui, monsieur; vous etes un 
Hive diligent. 

Am I a good teacher?—Yes, madam; you are a good 
teacher.—Yes, madam; you are. 

Am I a good painter? —Yes; you are a good painter.—Yes; 
you are. 

Am I too old? —Yes; you are too old. —Yes; you are. 

Am I very rich? —Yes; you are very rich.—Yes; you are. 

Are you a teachei’? —Yes, sir; I am a teacher. 
-Yes, sir; I am. 

Etes-vous professeur?— Oui , monsieur; je suis professeur. 

Are you a merchant? —Yes, sir; I am a merchant.— Yes, 
sir; I am. 

Are you a physician? —Yes, sir; I am a physician. —Yes, 
sir; I am. 

Are you too young?—Yes, sir; I am too young.—Yes, sir; 

I am. 

Are you very happy?—Yes, sir; I am very happy.— Yes, 
sir; I am. 

Is he in the garden?-Yes, madam; he is in 
the garden.—Yes, madam; he is there. 

Est-il dans le jar din ?— Oui, madame; il est dans le jardin. 

— Oui, madame; il y est. 

Is Lucy in the garden? —Yes, madam; she is in the garden. 
—Yes, madam; she is there. 

Is the teacher in the garden? —Yes, madam; he is in the 
garden.—Yes, madam; he is.—Yes, madam; he is there. 

Is the physician there? —Yes, madam; he is there.—Yes; 
he is. 


§1 PREMIERE LEQON 11 

Are we diligent?-Yes; you are diligent. 

Yes; you are. 

Sommes-nous appliques? — Oui; vous etes appliques. 

Are we kind?—Yes; you are kind.—Yes; you are. 

Are we happy? —O, yes; you are happy. —O, yes; you are. 
Are we too young? —Yes; you are too young.—Yes; you 
are. 

Are you quite well?—Yes; we are quite well.— Yes; we 
are. 

Are they too young?—Yes, madam; they are 
too young. - Yes; they are. 

Sont-ils trop jeunesf—Oui, madame; ils sont trop jeunes. 

Are they very happy? —Yes, sir; they are very happy. 

— Yes, sir; they are. 

Are they diligent? —Yes, madam; they are very diligent. 
Yes; they are. 

Are they rich?—Yes, madam; they are very rich. Yes, 
madam; they are. 

Are they well? —Yes, madam; they are well.— Yes; they 
are. 

Am I not a diligent pupil?—No; you are not 
a diligent pupil. —No, sir; you are not. 

Ne suis-je pas un 6five applique?—Non; vous n'etes pasun 
Stive appliquS. 

Am I not a good teacher? —No, madam; you are not a 
good teacher. —No, madam; you are not. 

Am I not a good painter? —No; you are not a good painter. 

— No; you are not. 

Am I not too old? —No; you are not too old. —No; you 
are not. 

Am I not very rich? —No; you are not very rich. —No; 
you are not. 

Are you not a teacher?—No; I am not a 
teacher.—No, sir; I am not. 

NStes-vous pas professeur?—Non ; je ne suis pas profes- 
seur. 

Are you not too young? —No; I am not too young. —No, 
sir; I am not. 


12 


ANGLAIS 


§1 


Are you not a merchant? —No, sir; I am not a merchant. 

— No, sir; I am not. 

Are you not a physician? —No, sir; I am not a physician. 

— No, sir; I am not. 

Is lie not in the garden? —No, madam; he 
is not in the garden. — No, madam; he is 

4k not - 

Nest-il pas dans le jar din?—Non, madame; il n'est pas 
dans le jardin. 

Is not Lucy in the garden? —No, madam; she is not in the 
garden. —No, madam; she is not. —No, madam; she is not 
there. 

Is not the teacher in the garden? —No, madam; she is not 
in the garden. —No, madam; she is not. —No, madam; she is 
not there. 

Is not the physician there? —No, madam; he is not there. 

— No, madam; he is not. 

Are we not diligent?-No; you are not dili¬ 
gent.—No; you are not. 

Ne sommes-nous pas appliques? — Non; vous n'ttes pas 
appliques. 

Are we not kind? —No; you are not kind. —No; you are 
not. 

Are we not happy?—O, ho; you are not happy. —O, no; 
you are not. 

Are we not too young? —No; you are not too young. —No; 
you are not. 

Are you not quite well? —No; we are not quite well. —No; 
we are not. 

Are they not too young?-No, madam; they 
are not too young. —No; they are not. 

Ne sont-ils pas trop jeunesf—Non , madame; ils ne sont 
pas trop jeunes. 

Are they not happy? —No; they are not happy. —No; they 
are not. 


1 


PREMIERE LE'QON 


13 


Are they not very rich? —No, madam; they are not rich. 

— No; they are not. 

Are they not well? —No, sir; they are not well. —No; they 
are not. 

Are they not diligent? —No; they are not very diligent. 

— No; they are not. 

Is John a diligent pupil?—Yes, sir; lie is a 
diligent pupil. - Yes, sir; he is. 

Jean est-il un Hive applique:?— Oui, monsieur; il est un 
elive applique. 

Is Lucy in the garden?—Yes, sir; she is in the garden. 
—Yes; she is. 

Is the physician happy? —Yes, sir; he is happy.—Yes, sir; 
he is. 

Is the painter rich?—Yes, sir; he is rich.—Yes, sir; he is. 
Is the merchant old? —Yes, sir; he is old.—Yes, sir; he is. 
Is the teacher young?—Yes, sir; he is young.—Yes, sir; 
he is. 

Is not John a physician?—No, sir; he is not 
a physician, he is a merchant. 

Jean n'est-il pas medecin f — Non, monsieur; il n'est pas 
midecin, il est marchand. 

Is not Lucy a teacher? —No, sir; she is not a teacher, she 
is a merchant. 

Is not the physician happy?—No, sir; he is not happy. 

Is not the merchant rich? —No, sir; he is not rich. —No; 
he is not. 

Is not the pupil diligent? —No, sir; he is not diligent.— No, 
sir; he is not. 

Is the pen good?-Yes, sir; it is good.-Yes; 
it is. 

La plume est-elle bonne? —Oui, monsieur; elle est bonne. 

Is not the pen good?—No, sir; it is not good. —No, sir; 
it is not. 

Is the book there?—Yes, sir; it is there. —Yes, sir; it is. 

Is not the book there? —No, sir; it is not there. —No, sir; 
it is not. 


14 


ANGLAIS 


§1 


Where are you?—I am in tlie garden. 

O'u etes-vous?—Je suis dans le jardin. 

Where is he? —He is there. 

Where is she? —She is in the garden. 

Where is it? —It is in the garden. 

Where are you? —We are here. 

Where is John? —He is in the garden. 

Where are John and Lucy? —They are in the garden. 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


I am a physician. 

John is a painter. 

Lucy is a painter. 

Lucy is a diligent pupil. 

I am not rich. 

Where are you? 

I am here. 

John is here also. 

The teacher is not here; he is in 
the garden. 

Are you well, madam? 

Yes; I am quite well. 

The physician is very kind. 

Be good, John. 

Lucy is very young, but the 
teacher is very old. 

Lucy is happy and diligent. 

You are very kind, John. 

Where are they? 

They are in the garden. 

Is he a bad painter? 

No, sir; he is not a bad painter. 

Are you well, madam? 

No, sir; I am not quite well. 

Is John a physician? 

No, sir; he is not; he is a mer¬ 
chant. 

Is Lucy very young? 

Yes, madam; she is quite young. 
Is it a good book? 

Yes; it is a very good book. 


Je suis medecin. 

Jean est peintre. 

Jean est peintre. 

Lucie est une eleve appliquee. 

Je ne suis pas riche. 

Ou etes-vous. 

Je suis ici. 

Jean est ici aussi. 

Le maitre n’est pas ici; il est dans 
le jardin. 

Etes-vous bien, madame? 

Oui; je suis tout a fait bien. 

Le medecin est tres bienveillant. 
Sois bon, Jean. 

Lucie est tres jeune, mais le 
maitre est tres age. 

Lucie est heureuse et appliquee. 
Vous etes bien bon, Jean. 

Ou sont-ils? 

Us sont dans le jardin. 

Est-il mauvais peintre? 

Non, monsieur; il n’est pas 
mauvais peintre. 

Etes-vous bien, madame? 

Non, monsieur; je ne suis pas 
tres bien. 

Jean est-il medecin? 

Non, monsieur; il n’est pas 
medecin, il est marehand. 

Lucie est-elle tres jeune? 

Oui, madame; elle est tres jeune. 
Est-ce un bon livre? 

Oui; c’est un tres bon livre. 




1 


PREMIERE LEQON 


15 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continiiees) 


Are we diligent? 

No; you are not. 

Are they old? 

Yes; they are. 

Are you rich, John? 

No; I am not. 

Are you well, John? 

O, yes; I am quite well, and how 
are you? 

I am quite well. 

Where is the teacher? 

He is in the garden; Lucy is in 
the garden also. 

Are they well? 

No, madam; they are not. 

Am I not happy? 

Yes; you are. 

Is not the teacher kind? 

O, yes; he is very kind. 

Is not John a physician? 

No; he is not; he is a painter. 

Is not Lucy in the garden? 

No, madam; she is not. 

Where is she? 

She is here. 

Is not the teacher in the garden? 

Yes, madam; he is. 

Is it not a good book? 

O, yes; it is a very good book. 
Are you not diligent? 

Yes; I am. 

Is not Lucy well? 

Yes, madam; she is very well. 

Be good, Lucy. 

Is not the teacher in the garden? 

No, sir; he is not there; he is 
here. 

Is he not a bad painter? 


Sommes-nous diligents? 

Non; vous n’etes pas diligents. 
Sont-ils vieux? 

Oui; ils sont vieux. 

Etes-vous riche, Jean? 

Non; je ne suis pas riche. 
Etes-vous bien, Jean? 

Oh! oui; je suis tout a fait bien, et 
comment etes-vous? 

Je suis tout a fait bien. 

Ou est le maitre? 

II est dans le jardin; Lucie est 
aussi dans le jardin. 

Sont-ils bien? 

Non, madame; ils ne sont pas 
bien. 

Ne suis-je pas heureux? 

Oui; vous etes heureux. 

Le maitre n’est-il pas bienveil- 
lant? 

Oh, oui; il est tres bienveillant. 
Jean n’est-il pas medecin? 

Non; il n’est pas medecin; il est 
peintre. 

Lucie n’est-elle pa's dans le jar¬ 
din? 

Non, madame; elle n’y est pas. 
Ou est-elle? 

Elle est ici. 

Le maitre n’est-il pas dans le 
jardin? 

Oui, madame; il y est. 

N’est-ce pas un bon livre? 

Oh! oui; c’est un tres bon livre. 

N’etes-vous pas applique? 

Oui; je suis applique. 

Lucie n’est-elle pas bien? 

Oui, madame; elle est tres bien. 
Soyez bonne, Lucie. 

Le maitre n’est-il pas dans le 
jardin? 

Non, monsieur; il n’y est pas; il 
est ici. 

N’est-il pas mauvais peintre? 



16 


ANGLAIS 


1 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION— (Continuees) 


No, madam; he is not. 

Are you not well, sir? 

No; I am not. 

Is not Lucy very young? 

No; she is not young; she is old. 

Is it not a very good book? 

O, yes; it is a very good book. 
Are we not diligent? 

Yes; you are.. 

Is he not very rich? 

No; he is not. 

You are not very diligent, John. 

Lucy is not a very diligent pupil. 

Where are John and Lucy? 

John is in the garden, and Lucy 
is here. 

The teacher is here too. 

Is not the merchant old? 

No, madam; he is not; he is quite 
young. 

Is not Lucy happy? 

No, madam; she is not, but John 
is very happy. 

Are you not a teacher? 

No, madam; I am not; I am a 
physician. 

It is good to be rich. 

Where are we? 

You, the painter, and I are in the 
garden. 


Non, madame; il n’est pas mauvais 
peintre. 

N’etes-vous pas bien, monsieur? 

Non; je ne suis pas bien. 

Lucie n’est-elle pas tres jeune? 

Non; elle n’est pas jeune, elle est 
vieille. 

N’est-ce pas un tres-bon livre? 

Oh! oui; c’est un tres bon livre. 

Ne sommes-nous pas'appliques? 

Oui; vous etes appliques. 

N’est-il pas tres riche? 

Non; il n’est pas riche. 

Vous n’etes pas tres applique, 
Jean. 

Lucie n’est pas une eleve ap- 
pliquee. 

Ou sont Jean et Lucie? 

Jean est dans le jardin, et Lucie 
est ici. 

Le maitre est aussi ici. 

Le marchand n’est-il pas flge? 

Non, madame; il n’est pas age; il 
est tres jeune. 

Lucie n’est-elle pas heureuse? 

Non, madame; elle n’est pas 
heureuse, mais Jean est tres 
heureux. 

N’etes-vous pas professeur? 

Non, madame; je ne suis pas pro¬ 
fesseur; je suis medecin. 

Il est bon d’etre riche. 

Ou sommes-nous? 

Vous, le peintre et moi sommes 
dans le jardin. 


EXERCICE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 
23. Exercice Preparatoire. — Prenez un des cylindres 
vierges qui vous est envoye (Introduction, Art. 20 ) et 
placez-le sur le mandrin. Lisez attentivement les directions 
donnees pour reproduire la parole dans le phonographe 
(Voyez Arts. 30 a 37). Parlez une ou deux phrases 






1 


PREMIERE LEQON 


17 


devant le tube; remplacez le diaphragme enregistreur par le 
diaphragme reproducteur et ecoutez ces phrases. Vous 
pourrez juger alors si vous avez parle trop fort ou trop 
faiblement, ou si vous vous etes trop 61oigne du tube. 
Vous arriverez bien vite, de cette maniere, par experience, 
a determiner la position que vous devez occuper devant 
votre instrument pour faire un cylindre distinct et que l’on 
puisse comprendre facilement. 

24. E’Exercice. — Vous etes maintenant pret a enregis- 
trer votre exercice sur le second cylindre vierge. Avant de 
commencer cependant, il est important que vous appreniez a 
lire votre exercice sans hesitation. Pour cela, il faut que 
vous l’etudiiez soigneusement. Si vous n’etes pas sur de la 
prononciation d’un mot, 6coutez de nouveau le cylindre du 
maitre. 

Placez votre livre de maniere a ce que vous puissiez lire 
l’exercice facilement, sans changer votre position. Si, 
pendant que vous parlez vous 6prouvez de la difficult^ a pro- 
noncer un mot, ou s’il faut que vous vous interrompiez pour 
une cause ou pour une autre, arretez votre phonographe, et 
lorsque vous etes pret a parler de nouveau, faites marcher 
le phonographe sans changer la position du bras des 
diaphragmes. Dans ce cas, il est bon d’attendre que le 
mandrin ait fait deux tours avant de recommencer a parler, 
afin qu’il ait le temps de reprendre sa vitesse. 

25. Comment On Dolt Envoyer Ees Cylindres 4 
l’Ecole. — L’un des cylindres que vous recevez dans votre 
premier envoi est renferme dans une boite speciale. Pour 
envoyer votre cylindre, enveloppez-le dans le coton, 
placez-le dans la boite cylindrique et renfermez-le dans la 
boite speciale. Ecrivez vos nom et adresse, les lettres 
denotant le cours que vous suivez et votre numero d’ordre. 
Adressez la boite comme suit: 

International Correspondence Schools, 

School of French, 

Scranton, Pa. 


18 


ANGLAIS 


1 


26. Premier Exercice Anglais. —Rdcitez les phrases 
suivantes sans donner les numeros qui les precedent, car ils 
ne sont ici que pour reference. 

1. Are you a teacher? —No, sir; I am not a teacher; I am 
a merchant. 

2. Is Lucy very happy? —No, madam; she is not very 
happy. 

3. Is it a good book? —Yes; it is a very good book. 

4. Are they quite well?—Yes; they are quite well. 

5. The physician is very kind. 

6. Where is the painter? —He is in the garden. 

7. Is the merchant old? —No, madam; he is not old; he 
is quite young. 

8. Is the pupil very diligent? —Yes, sir; he is very 
diligent. 

9. Is John in the garden?—Yes, madam; John is in the 
garden, and the teacher is there too. 

10. Are you not a painter? —No, madam; I am not a 
painter; I am a physician. 

11. Are they not diligent?—Yes, sir; they are. 

12. Be good and kind. 

13. The physician, the painter, and the merchant are in 
the garden; the teacher and the pupil are there also. 

14. The physician is very rich and happy. 

15. Is not Lucy in the garden? —No, madam; she is not. 

16. Are they not very rich? —No, sir; they are not. 

17. Are you well? Yes, madam; I am quite well. 

18. Where is the teacher? —He is here. 

19. Is not John happy? —No, sir; he is not. But Lucy is 
very happy. 

20. Am I not a bad painter? —O, no; you are not; you 
are a very good painter. 


1 


SECONDE LEQON 


19 


SECONDE LECON 


CYLINDRE PHONOGRAPIIIQUE 

1. Remarques sur la Prononciation. — a se prononce 
comme a en frangais dans dark, glad, large, warm. 

a a le son de e dans late, table. 

La combinaison ea a le son de ie dans dear; celui de eur 
dans early; et de ai dans weather. 

i a le son frangais dans indeed, interesting, little, mister, 
morning; celui de aille dans light, et de cu dans thirsty. 

y a le meme son qu’en frangais, excepte dans why ou il se 
prononce comme aille. 

oy dans boy est une diphtongue qui a le son compose 
de o-ie. 

eau dans beautiiul est une autre diphtongue qui equivaut 
a i-ou. 

Ecoutez avec attention la prononciation de la lettre r qui 
est differente de la notre. 

2. Accentuation. —En anglais, les syllabes d’un mot 
ne sont pas toutes egales, ou a peu pres comme dans notre 
langue. Une de ces syllabes, au contraire, est ordinairement 
plus accentuee que les autres. Comme il est impossible de 
donner des regies pratiques pour reconnaitre quelle syllabe 
est accentuee dans un mot, vous devez ecouter soigneuse- 
ment le cylindre du maitre, et imiter cette accentuation 
lorsque vous apprenez un nouveau mot. 


VOCABULAIRE 


I. c. s. 

English Record No. 2 

beautiful, beau 
because, parce que 
tbe boy, le gargon 


i. c. s. 

Cylindre d'Anglais No. 2 

but, mais 
cold, froid 
dark, sombre 





‘20 


ANGLAIS 


§1 


TO C ABUT, AI RE—(Continuees) 


dear, cher 

early, de bonne heure 

for, pour 

French, irangais 

glad, content 

the house, la maison 

hungry, faim 

indeed, vraiment 

interesting, interessant 

Jones, Jones 

large, grand 

late, tard , en retard 

light, clair 

little, petit 

mister, monsieur 


the morning, le matin 
the mother, la mere 
Mr., (abreviation de Mister ) 
new, neuf , nouveazi 
on, sur 

the room, la chambre 
small, petit 
sorry, fixchP 
the table, la table 
thirsty, soif 
warm, chaud 

the weather, le temps (tem¬ 
perature) 
why, pourquoi 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION 


I am a good pupil, am I not , 3 
Mr. A? 

Yes; you are a good pupil, 
John. 

I am very glad indeed. 

Lucy is well, is she not? 

No, madam; she is not quite 
well. 

I am very sorry. 

You are hungry , 4 are you not? 

No, sir; we are not hungry, 
but we are very thirsty. 

They are cold, are they not? 

O, no, madam; they are quite 
warm. 

Lucy is not diligent, is she ? 5 


Je suis un bon eleve, n’est-ce 
pas, M. A? 

Oui; vous etes un bon eleve, 
Jean. 

J’en suis vraiment bien con¬ 
tent. 

Lucie se porte bien (est bien) 
n’est-ce pas? 

Non, madame; elle n’est pas 
tres bien. 

J’en suis bien fache. 

Vous avez faim, n’est-ce pas? 

Non, monsieur; nousn’avons 
pas faim, mais nous avons 
bien soif. 

Ils ont froid, n’est-ce pas? 

Oh! non, madame; ils ont 
bien chaud. 

Lucie n’est pas appliquee, 
n’est-ce pas? 





1 


SECONDE LEQON 


21 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


O, yes; she is very diligent. 

The house is not too“ small, 
is it? 

No, sir; it is quite large. 

They are not in the garden, 
are they? 

Yes, madam; they are. 

Is it late? 8 

No; it is quite early. 

*** 

Good morning, dear mother. 
Are you well? 

Yes, dear; I am quite well. 

Is not the weather bad? 9 

Yes, indeed; it is. 

Where are John and Lucy? 

There they 10 are in the garden. 

And where is the teacher? 
Is he there too? 

No; he is not there. 7 He” and 
Mr. Jones are in the new 
house. 

Is not the new 12 house too 
small, mother? 

O, no; it is quite large. 

Are not the rooms 13 too dark? 

No; they are quite light. 

Where are the French books, 
mother? 

Here they are on the table. 


Oh! oui; elle est tres appli- 
quee. 

La maison n’est pas trop 
petite, n’est-ce pas? 

Non, monsieur; elle est tout 
a fait grande. 

Ils ne sont pas dans le jardin, 
n’est-ce pas? 

Oui, madame; ils y sont. 

Est-il tard? 

Non; il est de tres bonne 
heure. 

*** 

Bonjour, chere mere. Vous 
portez-vous bien? (Etes- 
vous bien?) 

Oui, mon cher; je suis tout a 
fait bien. 

Ne fait-il pas mauvais temps? 

Oui, vraiment; il fait tres 
mauvais. 

Oh sont Jean et Lucie? 

Les voila dans le jardin. 

Et ou est le professeur? 
Est-il la aussi? 

Non; il n’est pas la. Lui et 
M. Jones sont dans la 
maison neuve. 

La maison neuve n’est-elle 
pas trop petite, mere? 

Oh! non; elle est grande. 

Les chambres ne sont-elles 
pas trop sombres? 

Non; elles sont bien claires. 

Oh sont les livres frangais, 
maman? 

Les voici sur la table. 



22 


ANGLAIS 


§1 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION— (ContinttSes) 


Are they very interesting-? 
Yes; they are quite interest¬ 
ing; but not for Lucy. 

Why not? 

Because she is too young. 
Are they interesting for John? 

Yes, they are. John is not a 
little boy. 


Sont-ils tres interessants? 
Oui; ils sont tres interes¬ 
sants; mais pas pour Lucie. 
Pourquoi pas? 

Parce qu’elle est trop jeune. 
Sont-ils interessants pour 
Jean? 

Oui, ils le sont. Jean n’est 
pas un petit gargon. 


REMARQUES 

3. II n’y a pas d’expression en anglais qui corresponde 
litteralement a la locution n'est-ce pas? tres usitee en frangais 
dans les interrogations. Avec le verbe to be , on traduit 
n'est-ce pas en repetant ce verbe sous une forme interrogative¬ 
negative et a la meme personne. 

He is a painter, is he not? II est pemtre, n'est-ce pas? 

They are old, are they not? Ils sont dges, n'est-ce pas? 

You are sorry, are you not? Vous en etes fache, n'est-ce pas? 

4. Les mots hungry , thirsty , warm , cold sont des adjectifs 
en anglais; c’est pourquoi on les emploie avec to be , etre, au 
lieu de avoir comme en frangais. 

Are you hungry? — No; I am not hungry; I am thirsty. Avez-vous 
faim?—Non; je n'ai pas faim; j'ai soif. 

Is he warm? No; he is not warm; he is cold. A-t-il chaud?—Non; 
it n'a pas chaud; it a froid. 

5. Si la premiere partie de la phrase est negative, pour 
traduire n'est-ce pas en anglais, on repete le verbe to be sous 
la forme interrogative-affirmative au lieu de la forme inter¬ 
rogative-negative comme il est expliqu£ plus haut (Art. 3). 

John is not a painter, is he? Jean n' est paspeintren' est-ce pas ? 

They are not here, are they? Ils ne sont pas id, n'est-ce pas? 

6. Lorsque le mot too est place devant un adjectif, il se 
traduit par trop . Il est employ^ pour also, et signifie aussi. 

He is too kind, Il est trop bon. 

I speak a little French too, Je parle aussi un peu frangais, 




§1 SECONDE LEQON 23 


7. Remarquez la place de there , y, dans la phrase anglaise; 
il est place apres le verbe, au lieu de le preceder comme en 
frangais. 

Is he in the garden? —Yes; he is there. Esl-il dans le jardinf—Oui; 
il y est. 

Are they in the garden?-Yes; they are there. -Sont-ils dans le 
jardinf—Oui; ils y sont. 

8. Le mot late , en anglais traduit a la fois tard et en 
retard. 


It is late, Il est tard. 

He is late, 11 est en retard. 


9. Le verbe faire que nous employons en frangais en par- 
lant de la temperature ou des conditions du temps se traduit 
en anglais par le verbe to he , etre. 


It is bad weather, 
The weather is bad, 


Il fait mauvais temps. 


10. Void et voilh avec un pronom se traduisent en 
plagant respectivement here et there devant le verbe to be a la 
meme personne que le pronom. 

Here I am, Me void. 

There he is, Le voila. 

There she is, La voila. 

Here they are, Les void. 

11. En anglais, lorsque le pronom est sujet d’un verbe, 
il a toujours les memes formes, celles qui ont ete donnees 
dans la conjugaison du verbe to be , lors meme que la forme 
disjonctive du pronom est employee en frangais. 

He and 1 are cold, Lid et moi avons froid. 

They and I are very sorry, Eux et moi en sommes bien faches. 

12. Le mot new en anglais se traduit par nouveau ou 
neuf. 

He is in the new house, Il est dans la maison neuve, ou nouvelle. 

Il faut aussi remarquer que l’adjectif en anglais se place 
avant le nom qu’il qualifie. 

the new house, la maison neuve 

an interesting book, un livre interessant 


24 


ANGLAIS 


1 


13. La regie generate pour former le pluriel dans les 
noms est la meme en anglais qu’en frangais, c’est-a-dire 
qu’on ajoute s au singulier. Comme dans notre langue, 
cependant, il y a bien des exceptions qui seront etudiees 
plus tard. La lettre s, signe du pluriel, est toujours pro- 
noncee en anglais. 

The room is dark, La chambre est sombre. 

The rooms are dark, Les chambres sont sombres. 

The book is interesting, Le livre est interessant. 

The books are interesting, Les livres sont interessants. 


EXERCICE ORAE 

I am a good pupil, am I not?—Yes; you are. 

Je suis un bon Sieve, n'est-ce pas? — Out; vous etes un bon 
Sieve. 

I am very diligent, am I not? —Yes; you are. 

I am late, am I not? —Yes; you are. 

I am too old, am I not?—Yes; you are. 

You are a ricli merchant, are you not?—Yes; 
I am. 

Vous etes un riche marchand, n'est-ce pas? —Old; je suis 
un riche marchand. 

You are an old physician, are you not? —Yes; I am. 
You are a good pupil, are you not? —Yes; I am. 

You are happy, are you not? —Yes; I am. 

He is an old merchant, is he not? —Yes; he is. 

C'est un vieux marchand, n'est-ce pas? — Oui; c'est un 
vieux marchand. 

He is a good physician, is he not? —Yes; he is. 

He is a kind teacher, is he not? —Yes; he is. 

He is in the new house, is he not? —Yes; he is. 

He is old, is he not? —Yes; he is. 

The teacher is very kind, is he not?-No; he 
is not. 

Le maltre est Ms bon, n'est-ce pas?—Non; iln'estpas bon. 

The merchant is very rich, is he not? —No; he is not. 
The pupil is quite diligent, is he not? —No; he is not. 



§1 


SECONDE LEQON 


25 


Mr. Jones is a good physician, is he not? —No; he is not. 
Lucy is in the garden, is she not? —No; she is not there. 
It is a beautiful garden, is it not?-Yes; it is. 

C'est un beau jar din , n’est-ce pasf—Oui; c'est un beau 
jardin. 

It is a large house, is it not? —No; it is not. 

It is an interesting book, is it not? —Yes; it is. 

It is a small room, is it not?—Yes; it is very small. 

It is a good pen, is it not?—Yes; it is. 

Tbe new bouse is quite large, is it not?-Yes; 
it is. 

La maison neuve est bien large, n'est-ce pasf—Oui; elle 
Vest. 

The French book is very interesting, is it not? —Yes; it is. 
The room is too dark, is it not? —Yes; it is. 

The pen is on the table, is it not? —Yes; it is. 

You are diligent pupils, are you not?-Yes; 
we are. 

Vous ites des Hives appliques, n r est-ce pasf—Oui; nous 
sommes appliques. 

You are old pupils are you not? —Yes; we are. 

You are quite well, are you not?—Yes; we are. 

You are rich merchants, are you not?—Yes; we are. 

They are kind boys, are they not?-Yes; they 
are. 

Ce sont de bons garqons, .n' est-ce pasf—Oui; ils sont bons. 

They are diligent pupils, are they not? —Yes; they are. 
They are young and happy, are they not?—Yes; they are. 
They are in the house, are they not? —Yes; they are. 

The books are very interesting, are they not? —Yes; they 
are. 

The rooms are quite light, are they not? —Yes; they are. 
The houses are large and beautiful, are they not? —Yes; 
they are. 

John and Lucy are in the garden, are they not? —Yes; 
they are. 

The pens are on the table, are they not? —Yes; they are. 


26 


ANGLAIS 


1 


I am a bad pupil, am I not ?-No; you are not. 

Je suis mauvais Hive, n'est-ce pas?—Non; vous n'ites pas 
mauvais Hive. 

I am not too young, am I?—No; you are not. 

I am not too old, am I? —No; you are not. 

I am not old, am I? —No; you are not. 

You are not quite well, are you? —No; we 
are not. 

Vous ne vous portez pas bien, n'est-ce pas?—Non; nous ne 
nous portons pas bien. 

You are not late, are you? —No; we are not. 

You are not happy, are you? —No; we are not. 

You are not too late, are you? —No; we are not. 

He is not a bad physician, is he?—No; he 
is not. 

II n'est pas mauvais mbdecin , n'est-ce pas?—Non; it n'est 

pas mauvais. 

He is in the garden, is he not? —No; he is not. 

The merchant is not very rich, is he? —No; he is not. 

The teacher is not very kind, is he? —No; he is not. 

Mr. Jones is not a bad physician, is he? —No; he is not. 
John is not quite well, is he? —No; he is not. 

Lucy is not in the garden, is she? —No; she is not. 

She is not a very good pupil, is she? —No; she is not. 

It is not a large garden, is it? —No; it is not. 

Ce n'est pas un grand jar din, n'est-ce pas?—Non; ce n'est 
pas un grand jardin. 

It is not a very beautiful garden, is it? —No; it is not. 

It is not an interesting book, is it? —No; it is not. 

It is not a good room, is it? —No; it is not. 

It is not a good pen is it? —No; it is not. 

The new house is not very lax*ge, is it? —No; 
it is not. 

La maison neuve n'est pas trbs grande , n'est-ce pas?—Non; 
elle n'est pas grande. 

The weather is not very good, is it? —No; it is not. 

The French book is not very interesting, is it? —No; it is 
not. 


§1 


SECONDE LEQON 


27 


The pen is not on the table, is it? —No; it is not. 

We are not too late, are we?-No; you are 
not. 

Nous ne sommes pas en retard , n'est-ce pas?—Non; vous 
n'etes pas en retard. 

We are not very rich, are we? —No; you are not. 

We are not very diligent, are we? —No; you are not. 

We are not bad pupils, are we? —No; you are not. 

They are not very happy, are they ? —No; they 
are not. 

Its ne sont pas Ms heureux, n'est-ce pas? — Non; its ne 
sont pas Ms heureux. 

They are not good teachers, are they? —No; they are not. 
The books are not very interesting, are they? —No; they 
are not. 

The rooms are not light, are they? —No; they are not. 
John and Lucy are not in the garden, are they? —No; 
they are not. 

The pens are not on the little table, are they? —No; they 
are not. 

Are you hungry?—Yes; I am hungry.—Yes; I 
am. 

Avez-vous faim?—Oui; j'ai faim. 

Is he hungry also?—Yes; he is hungry. —Yes; he is. 

Is not John thirsty? —Yes; he is thirsty.— Yes; he is. 

You are cold, are you not? —Yes; I am cold.—Yes; I am. 
They are very warm, are they not? —Yes; they are very 
warm.—Yes; they are. 

Are you not hungry?—No; I am not hungry. 

—No; I am not. 

N’avez-vous pas faim? — Non; je if ai pas faim. 

Are you not thirsty? —No; I am not thirsty. — No; I am not. 
Is not John very warm? —No; he is not warm. —No; he 
is not. 


28 


ANGLAIS 


§1 


Is not Lucy cold? —No; she is not cold. —No; she is not. 
They are not thirsty, are they? —No; they are not thirsty. 
-No; they are not. 

Where are you?—Here I am. 

Oil etes-vous?—Me void. 

Where is he? —Here he is 
Where is she?—Here she is. 

Where are you? —Here we are. 

Where are they? —Here they are. 

Where are you?—Here I am. 

Oil etes-vous ?—Me voilh. 

Where is he? —There he is. 

Where is she? —There she is. 

Where are you? —There we are. 

Where are they? —There they are. 

Is it late, sir?—No, madam; it is not late; it 
is quite early. 

Est-il tard , monsieur?—Non, madame; ii n'est pas tard; 
il est de tres bonne heure. 

Is it warm, madam? —No, sir; it is not, it is very cold. 

It is late, madam, is it not? —No, sir; it is quite early. 

It is cold, sir, is it not? —No, madam; it is not cold, it is 
quite warm. 

It is not late, madam, is it? —O, yes; it is very late. 

It is not warm, sir, is it? —O, yes; it is very warm. 

Is not the weather beautiful? 

Ne faii-il pas beau temps ? 

Is not the merchant rich? 

Is not the house large? 

Are not the teachers kind? 

Are not the pupils diligent? 

Is it not warm here? 

Is it not cold in the garden? 


1 


SECONDE LEQON 


29 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


I am a diligent pupil, am I not, 
Mr. Jones? 

Yes; you are indeed a very diligent 
pupil. 

I am very glad, Mr. Jones. 

The boy is very late, is he not? 

Yes, madam; he is quite late. 

The physician is very old, is he 
not? 

O, yes, sir; he is very old. 

The mother is very glad, is she 
not? 

Yes, indeed; she is very glad. 

Lucy is very sorry, is she not? 

Yes, madam; she is very sorry. 

The house is very small, is it not? 

O, no; it is not small. It is quite 
large. 

Is not the house too dark? 

No, madam; the house is not 
dark, it is quite light. 

Is the house old or new? 

It is new. 

Is John hungry? 

Yes; he is very hungry. 

John is hungry, is he not? 

No, madam; he is not hungry, 
but he is thirsty. 

You are hungry, are you not? 

Yes; we are very hungry. 

Are you not cold, John? 

No, madam; I am not cold, I am 
quite warm. 

John and Lucy are in the garden, 
are they not? 

No; they are not. They are in 
the new house. 


Je suis un eleve applique, n’est-ce 
pas, M. Jones? 

Oui; vous etes vraiment un eleve 
tres applique. 

J’en suis bien content, M. Jones. 

Le gargon est bien en retard, 
n’est-ce pas? 

Oui, madame; il est bien en retard. 

Le medecin est tres age, n’est-ce 
pas? 

Oh! oui, monsieur; il est tres fige. 

La mere est tres contente, n’est-ce 
pqs? 

Oui; elle est vraiment tres contente. 

Lucie en est bien fachee, n’est-ce 
pas? 

Oui, madame; elle en est bien 
fachee. 

La maison est tres petite, n’est-ce 
pas. 

Oh! non; elle n’est pas petite. 
Elle est tres grande. 

La maison n’est-elle pas trop 
sombre? 

Non, madame; la maison n’est pas 
sombre; elle est bien claire. 

La maison, est-elle vieille ou 
neuve? 

Elle est neuve. 

Jean a-t-il faim? 

Oui; il a bien faim. 

Jean a faim, n’est-ce pas? 

Non, madame; il n’a pas faim, 
mais il a soif. 

Vous avez faim, n’est-ce pas? 

Oui; nous avons bien faim. 

N’avez-vous pas froid, Jean? 

Non, madame; je n’ai pas froid; 
j’ai bien chaud. 

Jean et Lucie sont dans le jardin, 
n’est-ce pas. 

Non; ils n’y sont pas. Us sont 
dans la maison neuve. 



30 


ANGLAIS 


§1 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION—(Continuees) 


The weather is very beautiful, is 
it not? 

Yes; it is. 

Is it late? 

Yes; it is late. 

Good morning, John; how are 
you? 

I am quite well. 

I am not too old, am I? 

No; you are not. 

The boy is not hungry, is he? 

No, madam; he is not. 

The French book is very interest¬ 
ing, is it? 

Yes; it is quite interesting. 

The mother is not hungry, is she? 

No, madam; she is not. 

The weather is not very warm, 
is it? 

No, madam; it is not warm, it is 
quite cold. 

The room is not very large, is it? 

No, sir; it is not large, it is quite 
small. 

You are not hungry, are you? 

No; I am not, but I am very 
thirsty. 

Where is Mr. Jones? He is not in 
the garden, is he? 

No; there he is in the new house, 
and the teacher is there too. 

Is not the new house too small, 
mother? 

No; it is not small, it is large and 
beautiful. 

The rooms are not very light, are 
they? 

O, yes; they are quite light. 

Where is the French book? 


Le temps est bien beau, n’est-ce 
pas? 

Oui; il est bien beau. 

Est-il tard? 

Oui; il est tard: 

Bonjour, Jean; comment vous 
portez-vous? 

Je suis tout a fait bien. 

Je ne suis pas trop vieux, n’est-ce 
pas? 

Non; vous n’etes pas trop vieux. 

Le gargon n’a pas faim, n’est-ce 
pas? 

Non, madame; il n’a pas faim. 

Le livre frangais n’est pas tres 
interessant, n’est-ce pas? 

Oui; il est bien interessant. 

La mere n’a pas faim, n’est-ce 
pas? 

Non, madame; elle n’a pas faim. 

Il ne fait pas tres chaud, n’est-ce 
pas? 

Non, madame; il ne fait pas chaud; 
il fait bien froid. 

La chambre n’est pas tres grande, 
n’est-ce pas? 

Non, monsieur; elle n’est pas 
grande, elle est tout a fait petite. 

Vous n’avez pas faim, n’est-ce 
pas? 

Non; je n’ai pas faim, mais j’ai 
bien soif. 

Ou est M. Jones? Il n’est pas 
dans le jardin, n’est-ce pas? 

Non; le voila dans la maison 
neuve, et le maitre est laaussi. 

La maison neuve n’est-elle pas 
trop petite, maman? 

Non; elle n’est pas trop petite; 
elle est grande et belle. 

Les chambres ne sont pas tres 
claires, n’est-ce pas? 

Oh! oui; elles sont bien claires. 

Ou est le livre frangais? 



1 


SECONDE LEQON 


31 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


There it is on the table. 

Where is the teacher? 

There he is in the garden. 

Where is mother? 

There she is in the new house. 
Where are you? 

Here I am in the room. 

John is not a little boy, is he? 

No; he is quite large. 

He is a painter, is he not? 

Yes; he is. 

You are sorry, are you not? 

Yes; I am sorry indeed. 

Are they not hungry? 

No; they are not; but they are 
very thirsty. 

They are not here, are they? 

No; they are not. They are in the 
garden. 

The teacher is too kind, is he not? 

Yes; he is very kind. 

It is very late. 

He is late. 

The weather is beautiful, is it not? 
Yes; it is very beautiful. 

He and I are cold. 

They and I are very sorry. 


Le voila sur la table. 

Ou est le maitre. 

Le voila dans le jardin. 

Ou est maman? 

La voila dans la maison neuve. 

Ou etes-vous? 

Me voici dans la chambre. 

Jean n’est pas un petit garjon, 
n’est-ce pas? 

Non; il est bien grand. 

C’est un peintre, n’est-ce pas? 
Oui; il est peintre. 

Vous en etes fache, n’est-ce pas? 
Oui; j’en suis vraiment bien fache. 
N’ont-ils pas faim? 

Non; ils n’ont pas faim, mais ils 
out bien soif. 

Ils ne sont pas ici, n’est-ce pas? 
Non; ils ne sont pas ici. Ils sont 
dans le jardin. 

Le maitre est trop bon, n’est-ce 
pas? 

Oui; il est tres bon. 

Il est tres tard. 

Il est en retard. 

Il fait beau temps, n’est-ce pas? 
Oui; il fait tres beau temps. 

Lui et moi avons froid. 

Eux et moi en sommes bien f&ches. 



32 


ANGLAIS 


1 


EXERCICE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 

Avant de reciter cet exercice, lisez attentivement les direc¬ 
tions qui ont ete donnees dans la premiere legon (Art. 23 
a 26,) et suivez-les lorsque vous arrivez aux exercices pho- 
nographiques de chaque legon. 

1. The weather is very beautiful, is it not?—Yes, madam; 
it is. 

2. The pupil is a very good pupil, is he not? —Yes; indeed 
he is. 

3. The French book is not very interesting, is it? —O 
yes; it is quite interesting. 

4. Mr. Jones is not very hungry, is he? —No, madam; he 
is not, but he is thirsty. 

5. You are not cold Lucy, are you? —No, mother; I am 
not cold, I am warm. 

6. Is not John very sorry? —Yes, sir; he is very sorry. 

7. The new house is not small; it is quite large. 

8. The new house is not dark; it is quite light. 

9. John is an old boy, is he not? —No; he is not; he is 
quite young. 

10. Why are you late, Mr. Jones? —I am not late; it is 
quite early. 

11. Where is the French book, mother? —There it is on 
the small table. 

12. Good morning, Mr. Jones; are you well?—Yes; I am 
quite well, and how are you? —I am well. 

13. John is not here, is he? —No; he is not. 

14. Are John and Lucy here? —No; they are not here. 

15. Where are you, John? —I am in the garden. 

16. Is the teacher there too? —Yes, sir; he is. 

17. You are not thirsty, are you? —No; I am not very 
thirsty. 

18. Is Lucy cold? —No; she is not very cold. 


ANGLAIS 

(PARTIE 2) 


TROISIEME LECON 


CYLINDRE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 


YOCABULAIKE 


/. c. s. 

English Record No. 3 


the brother, le frere 
the cane, la canne 
certainly, certainement 
charming, charmant 
the color, la couleur 
the cousin, le cousin 
the daughter, la Rile 
Edward, Edouard 
the estate, les biens (com- 
posant la fortune d’une 
personne) 
the friend, Vami 
the gentleman, le monsieur 
German, allemand 
the glove, le gant 
great, grand 
the hat, le chapeau 
to have, avoir 
her, son, sa, ou ses 
his, son, sa, ou ses 
the home, la maison 
its, son, sa, ou ses 
the lady, la dame 


/. c. s. 

Cylindre d’Anglais No. 3 

London, Londres 
many, beaucoup , 

Miss, mademoiselle 
mistress, madame 
Mrs. (abreviation de mis¬ 
tress) 

much, beaucoup 

the music, la musique 

my, mon, ma, ou mes 

the name, le nom 

near, pres de 

not at all, pas du tout 

one, un, une 

the painting, la peinture 
Paris, Paris 

pleasant, plaisant, agreable 
the relative, le parent 
the rose, la rose 
the sister, la soeur 
Smith, Smith 
the son, le fils 
the talent, le talent 
their, leur, leurs 


For notice of copyright, see page immediately following the title page 

§2 






2 


ANGLAIS 


§2 


YOCABULAIEE—(Continue) 


tliis, ce , cet, cette 
the umbrella, le parapluie 
the uncle, Voncle 
the voice, la voix 


the widow, la veuve 
with, avec 
your, votre , vos 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION 


I have 1 your 2 hat, and you 
have my gloves. 

He has her umbrella, and she 
has his cane. 

Have you German books? 
No; but I have a French one. 3 


I have a rose; it has a beau¬ 
tiful color, has it not? 4 

Yes; its color is indeed very 
beautiful. 

Have you a brother in Paris, 
Mr. Jones? 

Yes, madam; I have one 
there. 

Has he not a young daughter? 

No, madam; my brother has 
no 5 daughter, but he has a 
son. 

Have I a good voice? 

O, yes, madam; you have a 
charming voice. Your sis¬ 
ter also has a pleasant 
voice, has she not? 

Yes, sir; her voice is very 
pleasant indeed. 

You have my umbrella, Lucy, 
have you not? 


J’ai votre chapeau et vous 
avez mes gants. 

II a son parapluie, et elle a 
sa canne. 

Avez-vous des livres alle- 
mands? 

Non; mais j’en ai un frangais. 

* 

* * 

J’aiune rose; elle a une belle 
couleur, n’est-ce pas? 

Oui; sa couleur est vraiment 
tres belle. 

Avez-vous un frere a Paris, 
M. Jones? 

Oui, madame; j’en ai un (a 
Paris). 

N’a-t-il pas une jeune fille? 

Non, madame; mon frere n’a 
pas de fille, mais il a un 
fils. 

Ai-je une bonne voix? 

Oh! oui, madame; vous avez 
une voix charmante. Votre 
soeur a aussi une voix agre- 
able, n’est-ce pas? 

Oui, monsieur; sa voix est 
vraiment tres agreable. 

Vous avez mon parapluie, 
Lucie, n’est-ce pas? 





§2 TROISIEME LECON 3 

PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-^Continuees) 


No; I have not; it is in your 
room. 

And where is my hat? 

John has your hat. 

*** 

Have you a brother in London, 
Edward? 

No, madam; I have no brother 
there, but I have one in 
Paris. 

Have you no relatives 6 at all 
in London? 

I have only an old uncle there, 
a rich merchant. He has a 
large estate near London. 

Is not his name Mr. Jones? 

Yes, madam; it is. 

Your uncle, Mr. Jones, has a 
son, a great painter, has he 
not? 

No, madam; my uncle has no 
son, but he has a charming 
young daughter; her name 
is Lucy. She has talent 7 
for painting and is now in 
Paris with our friends, Mr. 
and Mrs. Smith and their 
daughter Mrs. A., a young 
widow- Mrs. A. has a 
charming voice and much 
talent for music. 


Is this gentleman 9 Mr. Jones? 


Non; je ne . l’ai pas; il est 
dans votre chambre. 

Et ou est mon chapeau? 

Jean a votre chapeau. 

*** 

Avez-vous un frere a Londres. 
Edouard? 

Non, madame; je n’ai pas de 
frere a Londres, mais j’en 
ai un a Paris. 

N’avez-vous aucun parent a 
Londres? 

J’y ai seulement un oncle, un 
riche marchand. II a de 
vastes propri^tes pres de 
Londres. 

Son nomn’est-ilpasM. Jones? 

Oui, madame; c’est son nom. 

Votre oncle, M. Jones, a un 
fils, un grand peintre, n’est- 
ce pas? 

Non, madame; mon oncle 
n’a pas de fils, mais il a 
une charmante jeune fille; 
elle s’appelle Lucie. Elle 
a du talent pour la pein- 
ture, et elle est main- 
tenant a Paris avec nos 
amis, M. et Mme. Smith, 
et leur fille, Mme. A., une 
jeune veuve. Mme. A. a 
une voix charmante, et 
beaucoup de talent pour la 
musique. 

Ce monsieur s’appelle-t-il M. 
Jones? 



4 


ANGLAIS 


§2 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continiiees) 


No; he is not; his name is 
Mr. Smith. 

Has this lady 10 many 11 friends 
in Paris? 

Certainly she has, madam. 

Is not this young lady 12 her 
daughter? 

Yes, madam; she is. 


Non; ce n’est pas lui; il 
s’appelle M. Smith. 

Cette dame a-t-elle beaucoup 
d’amis a Paris? 

Oh! certainement, madame; 
elle en a beaucoup. 

Cette demoiselle n’est-elle 
pas sa fille? 

Oui, madame; c’est sa fille. 


REMARQUES 

1. Le verbe to have , avoir, est comme en frangais d’un 
usage frequent dans la langue anglaise. II est done impor¬ 
tant de l’etudier soigneusement dans le modele suivant qui 
donne les quatre formes du present (affirmatif, n6gatif, inter- 
rogatif-affirmatif, et interrogatif-n6gatif). 


to Rave, avoir 


Affirmatif 


Present 


Negatif 


I have. 

He 1 

She [has, 

It J 

We \ 

You lhave, 
They J 


J’ai 

/I 

Elle 


}a 


Nous avons 
Vous avez 
Ils 


Elies 


>ont 


I have not, 

He 1 

She >has not, 

It J 

We j 

You | have not 
They] 


Je n'aipas 



Nous n'avons pas 
Vous n’avez pas 

files}*’™**’™ 


Interrogatif-Affirmatif 


Interrogalif-Negatif 


Have I? 

] he? 

Has[ she ? 
Jit? 


Ai-je? 



il? 

elle? 


Have I not? 

N ai-je pas? 

[he 1 

Na-t-W } 

Hasl she >not? 

lit J 

[elle] 


1 we * f > Avons-nous? f-vve 1 N avons-nous pas? 

you? Avez-vous? Have] you [not? N ' avez ^ ous P as ? 
they? Ont-yj les? [theyj ^ dnt -{eUes} pas? 




§2 


TROISIEME LEQON 


5 


2. Cette legon contient aussi les adjectifs possessifs en 
anglais. En voici la liste: 

my, won, ma, rues 

liis, son, sa, ses (si le possesseur est masculin ) our, notre, nos 

her, son, sa, ses (si le possesseur est feminin) your, votre, vos 

its, son, sa, ses (si le possesseur est neutre) their, leur, leurs 

Comme on le voit, ces adjectifs possessifs sont invariables 

quant au nombre. Les trois formes his, her , its, tout en 
etant invariables aussi pour le nombre, varient quant au 
genre, et il y a ici entre le frangais et l’anglais une difference 
capitale a observer. 

En frangais, nos adjectifs possessifs s’accordent avec le 
nom possede; en anglais, c’est avec le nom du possesseur. 
Ainsi, prenons le mot name, nom, par exemple, avec l’adjec- 
tif possessif. En parlant du nom d’un homme, on dira liis 
name, de celui d’une femme, her name, et de celui d’une 
chose, d’une fleur par exemple, its name. 

Here is a gentleman; his name is Mr. Hull, Void un monsieur; 
son nom est M. Hull. 

Here is a lady; her name is Mrs. Hull, Void une dame; son nom 
est Mine. Hull. 

Here is a rose; its color is beautiful, Voici une rose; sa couleur est 
belle. 

3. One, au singulier; ones, au pluriel, s’emploient en 
anglais pour eviter la repetition d’un nom. C’est surtout le 
cas lorsque nous employons en devant un verbe suivi d’un 
adjectif en frangais. 

I have a rose; I have a beautiful one, J’ai une rose; j'en ai une 
belle. 

I have two books. You have a Russian one, J'ai deux livres, vous 
en avez un russe. 

Have you a painting? I have three beautiful ones, Avez-vous line 
peinture? J'en ai trois belles. 

4. Avec le verbe to have, l’expression n'est-ce pas ? se 
traduit en anglais en repetant ce verbe a la forme interroga¬ 
tive-negative et a la meme personne que dans la phrase. 
Cependant comme il a ete explique deja avec le verbe to be, 


6 


ANGLAIS 


§2 


si la phrase est negative, n'est-ce pas? se traduit par le verbe 
r^pete a la meme personne, mais a la forme interrogative- 
affirmative. . 

He has a beautiful rose, has he not? II a une belle rose , 
n'est-ce pas? 

She has a charming voice, has she not? Elle a une voix 
charmante , n'est-ce pas? 

You have no daughter, have you? Vous n'avez pas de fille , 
n'est-ce pas? 

They have no friends, have they? Ils n'ont pas d’amis, n'est-ce 
pas? 

5. Le mot no en anglais se traduit par non , ou pas de en 
frangais. II s’emploie devant un substantif quand la nega¬ 
tion tombe sur ce substantif. 

I have no pen, Je n'ai pas de plume. 

He has no cane, II n'a pas de canne. 

They have no son, Ils n'ont pas de fils. 

6. Le mot parent en frangais a deux equivalents en 
anglais: parent quand on parle du pere et de la mere; rela¬ 
tive si on designe les personnes unies par les liens du sang. 

7. L’article partitif est d’un usage beaucoup plus restreint 
en anglais qu’en frangais. Lorsqu’on parle des objets en 
general, sans vouloir les designer d’une maniere particuliere 
et distincte, 1’article partitif est supprime en anglais. 

She has talent for painting, Elle a du talent pour la peinture. 

He has friends in Paris, II a des amis a Paris. 

8. Le mot cousin en anglais, ayant la meme forme pour 
le masculin et le feminin, il s’ensuit que se mot traduit a la 
fois cousin , et cousine, en frangais. 

9. Le mot gentleman , a l’origine, servait seulement a 
designer les nobles. II s’applique aujourd’hui a un homme 
bien eieve, honorable. Dans son sens ordinaire, il designe 
un homme respectable et s’emploie de la meme maniere que 
notre mot monsieur. Comme on a pu le voir dans les legons 
precedentes, le mot monsieur est traduit en anglais de trois 
manieres differentes: (1) par sir, en parlant a quelqu’un 
sans le nommer; (2) par Mister (abreviation Mr.) devant le 


§2 


TROISIEME LEQON 


7 


nom d’une personne; (3) par gentleman dans le sens de 
homme pour designer une personne respectable. 

Are you cold, sil*? — Yes, sir; I am -very cold, Avez-vous froid, 
monsieur? —Old, monsieur; j’ai bien froid. 

Is Mr. Jones in the garden? —Yes; he is, M. Jones est-il dans le 
jar din ? — Old; il y est. 

This gentleman is very hungry, Ce monsieur a bien faim. 

Enfin, il faut dire aussi que le mot sir s’emploie en Angle- 
terre devant le nom d’une personne possedant certains titres 
de noblesse. 

10 . Les mots madame et dame sont comme le mot 
monsieur traduits de trois manieres differentes en anglais: 
(1) par madam si le nom n’est pas exprime; (2) par mistress 
(abreviation Mrs.) devant le nom de la personne; (3) par 
lady , pour designer une femme qui occupe un certain rang 
social. 

Are you hungry, madam? —Yes, madam; I am very hungry, 
Avez-vous faim, madame? — Oui, madame; j'ai bien faim. 

Where is Mrs. Jones? —She is in the garden, Oil est Mme. Jones? 
Elle est dans le jardin. 

Is this lady cold? —Yes; she is very cold, Cette dame a-t-elle froid? 
Oui; elle a Iris froid. 

Enfin, en Angleterre, le mot lady se place devant le nom 
d’une personne qui possede des titres de noblese. 

11 . Many et much sont tous deux traduits par beaucoup 
en franqais, mais on ne doit pas les employer indifferemment 
l’un pour l’autre. On se sert de many pour designer le 
nombre, et de much pour la quantite; il s’ensuit que many est 
toujours place devant un nom au pluriel, et much devant un 
nom au singulier. 

I have many friends in Paris, J'ai beaucoup d’amis a Paris. 

He has many books in his room, Il a beaucoup de livres dans sa 
chambre. 

She has much talent for music, Elle a beaucoup de talent pour la 
musique. 

He has not much voice, Il n'a pas beaucoup de voix. 

12 . Les mots mademoiselle et demoiselle sont comme les 
mots madame et dame traduits de trois manieres en anglais: 


8 ANGLAIS § 2 

(1) par madame si on ne nomme pas la personne a qui 
on parle; (2) par Miss devant le nom de la personne; 
(3) par young lady (littdralement jeune dame) pour designer 
une demoiselle. 

Are you hungry, madam? Avez-vous faim , mademoiselle? 

Are you hungry, Miss Jones? Avez-vous faim, Mile. Jones? 

Is this young lady hungry? Cette demoiselle a-t-elle faim? 


EXERCICE ORAL 

I have a brother, a physician. 

Jai un frbre, un medecin. 

I have a beautiful rose. 

I have a relative in London. 

I have much talent for music. 

I have a friend, a merchant. 

He has a large estate in London. 

II a une grande propriety a Londres. 

He has a sister in Paris. 

He has a cousin, a good painter. 

He has a daughter, a young widow. 

He has a sister in Paris. 

She has much talent for painting. 

Elle a beaucoup de talent pour la peinture. 

She has a charming voice. 

She has a beautiful home. 

She has a brother, a physician. 

We have no daughter. 

Nous n'avons pas de fille. \ 

We have a cousin, a good painter. 

We have a relative in Paris. 

We have an uncle in London. 

You have a charming young daughter. 

Vous avez une charmante jeune fille. 

You have a beautiful cane. 

You have much talent for music. 

You have a beautiful painting. 



§2 


TROISIEME LECON 


9 


They have many friends and relatives in Paris. 

Ils ont beaucoup d'amis et de parents a Paris. 

They have a very pleasant home. 

They have beautiful voices. 

They have a charming daughter. 

They have a young brother in London. 

Have you a daughter, Mr. Smith?—Yes; I have. 

Avez-vous une title , M. Smith? —Oui; j'en ai une. 

Have you friends in Paris? —Yes, sir; I have. 

Have you a pleasant home? —Yes, sir; I have. 

Have you a sister in London? —Yes, sir; I have. 

Has he a sister in Paris?—Yes; he has. 

A-t-il une seeur a Paris? —Oui; it en a une. 

Has Mr. Jones a sister in Paris also?—Yes; he has. 

Has your uncle an estate near Paris? —Yes; he has. 

Has this gentleman a daughter?—Yes; he has. 

Has Mrs. Smith a beautiful rose?—Yes; she~has. 

Mme. Smith a-t-elle une belle rose? — Oui; elle en a une. 

Has Mrs. Smith a cousin in London? —Yes; she has. 

Has she a beautiful voice?—Yes; she has. 

Has she much talent for music?—Yes; she has. 

Have they a daughter?—Yes; they have. 

Ont-ils une title ?—Oui; ils en ont une. 

Have Mr. Jones and Mr. Smith a beautiful home? —Yes; 
they have. 

Have they a French book?—Yes; they have. 

Have they relatives in Paris? —Yes; they have. 

Have I a pleasant voice?—Yes, madam; you 
have a pleasant voice.—Yes, madam; you 
have. 

Ai-je une voix agrtable?—Oui, madame; vous avez une 
voix agrtable. 

Have you a son in Paris, Mr. Smith? —Yes, sir; I have a 
son in Paris.—Yes, sir; I have. 

Have you many friends in London? —O, certainly; I have 
many friends there. —O, certainly; I have. 


10 


ANGLAIS 


2 


Has he much talent for music? O, yes, madam; he has 
talent for music. —O, yes, madam; he has. 

Has your little brother a good teacher? —Yes, sir; my little 
brother has a good teacher.— Yes, sir; he has. 

Has Mr. Smith a brother, a physician? —Yes; he has. 

Have you many pupils, Mr. Jones? —Yes, sir; I have many 
pupils.—Yes, sir; I have. 

Have they many relatives there? — O, yes; they have many 
relatives there. —O, yes; they have. 

Have they a large estate near Paris? —Yes, sir; they have 
a large estate there. —Yes, sir; they have. 

Have the teachers many good pupils? —Yes; they have 
many good pupils. —Yes; they have. 

I have not your French book. 

Je n'ai pas votre livre frangais. 

I have no brothers in Paris. 

You have not much talent for music. 

He has no relatives in London. 

Mr. Smith the physician has no sisters. 

We have not many friends there. 

Have they no mother? 

John and Lucy have no teacher. 

Have I not a pleasant voice? —Yes; you cer¬ 
tainly have. 

N'ai-je pas une voix agrtable ? — Oui; votre voix est 
certainement agrtable. 

Have I not much talent for music? —You certainly have. 
Have you not a rich uncle in London? —No; I have not. 
Has he not a brother, a physician? —His brother is not a 
physician, he is a painter. 

Has not Mr. Jones a son, a good painter?—Yes; he has; 
his name is Edward. 

Has not Lucy a French book?—No; she has 
not, but she has a Russian book. 

Lucie n'a-t-elle pas un livre frangais? — Non; elle n'en a 
pas, mais elle a un livre russe. 

Has not your uncle an estate near Paris? —No; he has not. 


§2 TROISIEME LEQON 11 

Have you not many good and kind friends? —We certainly 
have. 

Have you not a son in Paris? —Nof I have not. 

Have they not a large house, and a beautiful garden? 

— Yes; they have. 

Have not John and Lucy a very good teacher? —No; they 
have not. 

You have an uncle in Paris, have you not? 
—Yes; I have. 

Vous avez un oncle a Paris , n'est-ce pas? — Oui; j'en ai un. 

You have many brothers and sisters, Mr. Smith, have 
you not? — I have many sisters, madame, but I have no 
brothers. 

Mr. Jones has many friends and relatives in London has 
he not? —He has many friends, but no relatives there. 

Your sister has talent for music and painting, has she not? 

— She has talent for painting, but she has no talent for 
music. 

Lucy has a French book, has she not? —Yes; she has. 

Mr. and Mrs. Jones have relatives in London and Paris, 
have they not? —They have no relatives in London, but they 
have many in Paris. 

John and Lucy have a good teacher, have they not? —Lucy 
has a very good teacher, but John has not a good teacher. 

You have no brother in Paris, have you? —No, madam; I 
have no brother there. 

You have no gloves, John, liave you?—No, 
Lucy; I have no gloves. 

Vous n'avez pas de gants,. Jean, n'est-ce pas?—Non, Lucie; 
je n'ai pas de gants. 

Mr. Jones has not many friends here, has he? —No, sir; 
Mr. Jones has no friends here at all. 

Your uncle has no relatives in London, has he? —No, 
madam; he has no relatives there. 

Mrs. Smith has no son, has she? —No, sir; she has no son, 
but she has a charming daughter. 


12 


ANGLAIS 


§2 


Have you a pen, John? —Yes, sir; I have one. 

Avez-vous une plume , Jean? —Oui, monsieur; fen ai une. 

Has Lucy a French book? —Yes, madam; she has one, but 
it is not very interesting. 

Has your uncle an estate near London? —Yes, Mr. Jones; 
he has one there, but it is not very large. 

Have you a garden? —O, certainly; we have one, but it is 
not very large. 

You have a Russian book, have* you not?—I have a 
Russian book, but it is not very interesting. 

John has a new umbrella, has he not?-He 
has an umbrella, but it is not a new one. 

Jean a un parapluie neuf , n’est-cepas?—II a un parapluie , 
mais il n'est pas neuf. 

Mrs. Smith has a beautiful garden, has she not? —She has 
a large garden, but it is not a very beautiful one. 

Mr. and Mrs. Jones have an estate in Paris, have they not? 
— Yes, sir; they have an estate there, but it is not a very 
large one. 

Lucy has a good pen, has she not? —She has a pen, but it 
is not a very good one. 

Your new gloves are beautiful, but your old ones are not. 

Lucy has a Russian book, and I have French one. 

Is this gentleman your cousin? —No; he is 
not; he is my brother. 

Ce monsieur est-il votre cousin?—Non; ce n'est pas mon 
cousin; c'est mon frlre. 

Is this lady your sister?—No; she is not; she is my 
daughter. 

Is this young lady your daughter? —No; she is not; she is 
my cousin. 

Have you an umbrella, John? —No; I have not; I have no 
umbrella at all. 

Have you my gloves, Lucy? —No; they are in the room on 
the table. 

Has your brother a son? —Yes; he has; his son is in Paris. 

This gentleman is Mr. Smith; his gloves are on the table, 
and his hat is in the room. 


§2 


TROISIEME LEQON 


13 


This lady is Mrs. Smith; her gloves are on the table, and 
her hat is in the garden. 

Have they relatives in Paris? —No; they have not; they are 
in London. 

Your cousins have a very good teacher, have they not? 
— Yes; they have. 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


Have you my hat, John? 

No, sir; I have not your hat; it is 
in your room on the small table. 

Where are my gloves? 

They are in the room also. 

Is not Mrs. Smith in the garden? 

No; she is not there. She is in her 
room. 

Has Mrs. Smith your umbrella? 

No; she has not. She has no um¬ 
brella. 

Have you my French book, Lucy? 

Yes, sir; I have, it is very inter¬ 
esting. 

Have you an uncle in London? 

Yes, madam; I have; he is a rich 
merchant and has a large estate 
near London. 

Is your uncle old? 

Yes; he is quite old. 

Is he well? 

O, yes; he is quite well. 

Has he a son? 

No; he has no sons, but he has a 
daughter; her name is Lucy. 

You have a rose. 

Its color is very beautiful. 

I have a son in Paris. 

He has much talent for music. 

Mrs. Smith is here. 


Avez-vous mon chapeau, Jean? 

Non, monsieur; je n’ai pas votre 
chapeau; il est dans votre 
chambre, sur la petite table. 

Ou sont mes gants? 

Ils sont aussi dans la chambre. 

Mme. Smith n’est-elle pas dans le 
jardin? 

Non; elle n’y est pas. Elle est 
dans sa chambre. 

Mme. Smith a-t-elle votre para- 
pluie? 

Non; elle ne l’a pas. Elle n’a pas 
de parapluie. 

Avez-vous mon livre frangais, 
Lucie? 

Oui, monsieur, je l’ai; il est tres 
interessant. 

Avez-vous un oncle a Londres? 

Oui, madame; j’en ai un; c’est un 
riche marchand et il a une 
grande propri6te pres de Lon¬ 
dres. 

Votre oncle est-il vieux? 

Oui; il est bien vieux. 

Se porte-t-il bien? 

Oh! joui, il se porte tout a fait bien. 

A-t-il un fils? 

Non; il n’a pas de fils, mais il a 
une fille; elle s’appelle Lucie. 

Vous avez une rose. 

Sa couleur est tres belle. 

J’ai un fils a Paris. 

Il a beaucoup de talent pour la 
musique. 

Mme. Smith est ici. 




14 


ANGLAIS 


2 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION—(Contiimees) 


Her daughter is here also. 

Is not her son here? 

No; he is not here, he is in Paris 
with Mr. and Mrs. Smith and 
their daughter Mrs. Jones. 

Is not Mrs. Jones a young widow? 

Yes; she is. 

Has she not much talent for paint¬ 
ing? 

O, yes, she has. And also much 
talent for music. 

Has this gentleman friends in 
Paris? 

Yes; he has many friends there. 

Has he relatives also? 

No; he has no relatives in Paris, 
but he has an uncle in London; 
his uncle has a large estate and 
is very rich. 

Is not this lady Mrs. Smith? 

No, she is not. Her name is Mrs. 
Jones. 

This young lady is our daughter. 
Her name is Lucy. 

She has a very pleasant voice. 

You have a beautiful home, Ed¬ 
ward. 

Yes, madam; my home is beauti¬ 
ful. 

Have you many friends, John? 

Your cousin has a charming voice, 
has she not? 

Yes; she has; and much talent for 
music also. 

Are you not hungry, Mr. Smith? 

No, sir, I am not; but Mrs. Smith 
is. 

Mother, where is my umbrella? 

It is in your room, dear. 

Has youLold teacher many pupils? 


Sa fille est ici aussi. 

Son fils n’est-il pas ici? 

Non; il n’est pas ici; il est a Paris 
avec M. et Mme. Smith et leur 
fille Mme. Jones. 

Mme. Jones n’est-elle pas une 
jeune veuve? 

Oui; elle est veuve. 

N’a-t-elle pas beaucoup de talent 
pour la peinture? 

Oh! oui; elle en a. Aussi beau- 
coup de talent pour la musique. 

Ge monsieur a-t-il des amis a 
Paris. 

Oui; il en a beaucoup. 

A-t-il aussi des parents? 

Non; il n’a pas de parents a Paris 
mais il a un oncle a Londres; 
son oncle a une grande pro- 
priete, et il est tres riche. 

Cette dame n’est-elle pas Mme. 
Smith? 

Non; ce n’est pas elle. Son nom 
est Mme. Jones. 

Cette demoiselle est notre fille. 
Elle s’appelle Lucie. 

Elle a une voix tres agr6able. 

Votfs avez une belle maison, 
Edouard. 

Oui, madame; ma maison est 
belle. 

Avez-vous beaucoup d’amis, Jean? 

Votre cousine a une voix char- 
mante, n’est-ce pas? 

Oui; et aussi beaucoup de talent 
pour la musique. 

N’avez-vous pas faim, M. Smith? 

Non, monsieur; je n’ai pas faim, 
mais Mme. Smith a faim. 

Maman, ou est mon parapluie? 

Il est dans votre chambre, ma 
chere. 

Votre vieux maitre a-t-il beaucoup 
d’eleves? 




§2 


TROISIEME LEQON 


15 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Yes, he has many. 

Is your son here? 

Yes; he is. 

He is in his room. 

Where is your daughter? 

She is in the garden with her 
friends, Lucy and Mrs. Smith. 

It is very warm and the morning 
is beautiful. 

Is Lucy your relative? 

Yes; she is my cousin. 

You have my gloves, Edward, 
have you not? 

No, I have not; I have no gloves 
at all. 

Your sister has no daughter, has 
she? 

Yes; she has one daughter. Her 
name is Mrs. Jones; she is a 
young widow and is now in 
Paris with her friends, Mr. and 
Mrs. Jones. 

This gentleman has a beautiful 
garden, has he not? 

He has a large garden, but it is 
not very beautiful. 

Have you a garden also? 

Yes, I have one; but it is not very 
large. 

Have you an estate in London? 

Yes, sir; we have an estate there, 
but it is not a large one. 

You have a pen, have you not? 

Yes; I have a pen, but it is not a 
very good one. 

Is this lady your cousin? 

No, she is not; she is my sister. 

Has not Lucy a French book? 

Yes, madam; she has one, and it 
is very interesting. 


Oui; il en a beaucoup. 

Votre fils est-il ici? 

Oui; il y est. 

II est dans sa chambre. 

Ou est votre fille ? 

Elle est dans le jardin avec ses 
amies Lucie et Mme. Smith. 

Il fait tres chaud, et le temps est 
magniflque. 

Lucie est-elle votre parente? 

Oui; c’est ma cousine. 

Vous avez mes gants, Edouard, 
n’est-ce pas? 

Non; je ne les ai pas; je n’ai pas 
de gants. 

Votre soeur n’a pas de fille, 
n’est-ce pas? 

Oui; elle a une fille. Son nom est 
Mme. Jones; c’est une jeune 
veuve, et elle est maintenant a 
Paris avec ses amis M. et Mme. 
Jones. 

Ce monsieur a un beau jardin, 
n’est-ce pas? 

Il a un grand jardin, mais il n’est 
pas beau. 

Avez-vous aussi un jardin? 

Oui, j’en ai un; mais il n’est pas 
grand. 

Avez-vous une propriete a Lon- 
dres? 

Oui, monsieur; nous en avons une, 
mais elle n’est pas grande. 

Vous avez une plume, n’est-ce 
pas? 

Oui; j’en ai une, mais elle n’est 
pas tres bonne. 

Cette dame est-elle votre cousine? 

Non; elle n’est pas ma cousine; 
c’est ma soeur. 

Lucie n’a-t-elle pas un livre fran- 
gais? 

Oui, raadame; elle en a un, et il 
est tres interessant. 



16 


ANGLAIS 


§2 


EXERCICE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 

1. My brother has much talent for music. 

2. This gentleman has a charming daughter; her name 
is Lucy Smith. 

3. Has not your cousin a son in Paris? —Yes, he has; his 
name is Edward. 

4. My friend Mrs. Smith has a beautiful home. 

5. Our old uncle has a large estate near London. 

6. Where is my hat, my friend? —It is on the table in 
your room. 

7. This gentleman and this lady have many friends. 

8. Has not your cousin much talent for painting? —Yes; 
she has. 

9. Your relatives have large estates near Paris, have 
they not?—Yes; they have. 

10. Where are my gloves and my umbrella? —There they 
are on this large table. 

11. This young lady is my cousin; she is charming, is 
she not?—Yes, indeed; she is charming. 

12. This young widow has a very pleasant voice, and 
much talent for music. 

13. This painter is very poor, but his cousin is very rich; 
he has a large estate near Paris. 

14. Your rose has a very beautiful color. 

15. Your brother has no daughter, has he? —Yes; he has 
one daughter. Her name is Lucy. 

16. You have my umbrella, have you not? —No; I have 
not; I have no umbrella at all. 

17. They have no relatives in London, have they?— O, 
yes; they have. They have an old uncle, a rich merchant. 

18. Where is your daughter Lucy? —She is now in Paris 
with her friends Mr. and Mrs. Smith. 


2 


QUATRIEME LEgON 


17 


QUATRIEME LECON 


CYLINDEE PHONOGEAPIIIQUE 


VOCABTTEAIRE 


• I. c. s. 

English Record No. 4 

about, a peu pres 

always, ton jours 

as, comme , aussi , que 

to count, compter 

to do, faire 

eight, huit 

English, anglais 

five, cinq 

four, quatre 

Prance, France 

from, de 

gladly, volontiers 

to intend, avoir Vintention 

to know, connaitre 

the letter, la lettre 

the life, la vie 

to like, aimer 

to live, vivre , demeurer 

long, long 

loud, haut 

nine, neuf 

now, maintenant 


PHRASES ET 
You speak 1 English, and I 
speak Russian. 

He writes well. 

She intends to remain here 
until winter. 


/. c. s. 

Cylindre d'Anglais No. 4 

often, souvent 
only, seulement 
the parents, les parents 
to prefer, preferer 
to read, lire 
to receive, recevoir 
to remain, res ter 
to return, retourner 
Russia, Russie 
seven, sept 
six, six 
soon, bieniot 
to speak, parler 
St. Petersburg, St. Peters- 
bourg 
ten, dix 
three, trois 
to, a 

two, deux 
until, jusque 
the winter, Vhiver 
to write, Scrire 


CONVERSATION 

Vous parlez anglais, et je 
parle russe. 

II ecrit bien. 

Elle a l’intention de resterici 
jusqu’en hiver. 







18 


ANGLAIS 


2 


PHRASES ET CONVEIlSATION-(Coiitmuees) 


They live in London, 2 but we 
live in Paris. 

Ils demeurent a Londres, mais 
nous demeurons a Paris. 

*** 

*** 

Do I read 3 too loud. 

O, no; you do not read 4 loud 
at all. Do you intend 8 to 
read here very long? 

Est-ce que je lis trop haut? 

Oh! non; vous ne lisez pas 
haut du tout. Avez-vous 
l’intention de lire long- 
temps ici? 

No, madam; I do not. 8 

Non, madame; je n’en ai pas 
l’intention. 

* 

* * 

*** 

Do you speak English? 

No, madam; I do not; I speak 
German and French only. 

Parlez-vous anglais? 

Non, madame; je ne le parle 
pas; je parle seulement 
allemand et frangais. 

Does your brother speak 7 
French as well as you do? 8 
My brother does not speak 
French at all. 

Votre frkre parle-t-il frangais 
aussi bien que vous? 

Mon frere ne parle pas du 
tout frangais. 

*** 

*** 

Speak English. 9 

Do not read so loud. 10 

Parlez anglais. 

Ne lisez pas si haut. 

* 

* * 

*** 

Do you always 11 live in Paris, 
Mr. Warren? 

Yes, madam; I do. 

Demeurez-vous toujours a 
Paris, M. Warren? 

Oui, madame; j’y demeure 
toujours. 

Does your brother live there 
also? 

No, madam; my brother does 
not; he lives in St. Peters¬ 
burg. 

Do you not like 12 to live in 
France? 

Votre frere y demeure-t-il 
aussi? 

Non, madame; mon frere n’y 
demeure pas; il demeure a 
St. Petersbourg. 

N’aimez-vous pas demeurer 
en France? 



§2 


QUATRIEME LEQON 


19 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


O, yes, madam; I like to live 
there very much, but my 
brother does not; he pre¬ 
fers to live in Russia. 

Why does not your brother 13 
like to live in France? 

He does not like to live there, 
because he does not speak 
French; he speaks Russian 
only. 

You speak French very well, 
Mr. Warren, do you not? 14 

I speak French quite well, 
and a little English also. 

Count from one to ten in 
English. 

Gladly: one, two, three, four, 
five, six, seven, eight, nine, 
ten. 

Do you not speak German 
at all? 

No, madam; I do not. 

Do you know my cousin Mr. 
Reed? 

O, yes, madam; I know Mr. 
Reed quite well; he is in 
Paris now, is he not? 

Yes, sir; he is there with his 
parents now. 

Do your cousin and his parents 
intend to remain in France 
very long? 

Mr. Reed intends to remain 
there until winter, but his 
parents do not; they intend 


Oh! oui, madame; j’aime 
beaucoup y demeurer, mais 
mon frere ne l’aime pas; il 
prefere demeurer en Rus- 
sie. 

Pourquoi votre frere n’aime- 
t-il pas demeurer en France? 

II n’aime pas y demeurer, 
parce qu’il ne parle pas 
frangais; il parle seulement 
russe. 

Vous parlez tres bien frangais, 
M. Warren, n’est-ce pas? 

Je parle trks bien frangais et 
aussi un peu anglais. 

Comptez de un a dix en an¬ 
glais. 

Volontiers: un, deux, trois, 
quatre, cinq, six, sept, huit, 
neuf, dix. 

Ne parlez-vous pas du tout 
allemand? 

Non, madame; pas du tout. 

Connaissez-vous mon cousin 
M. Reed? 

Oh! oui, madame; je connais 
M. Reed parfaitement bien; 
il est maintenant a Paris, 
n’est-ce pas? 

Oui, monsieur; il y est avec 
ses parents maintenant. 

Votre cousin et ses parents 
ont-ils l’intention de rester 
longtemps en France? 

M. Reed a l’intention d’y 
rester jusqu’en hiver, mais 
il n’en est pas de meme de 



20 


ANGLAIS 


§2 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


to return to Russia very- 
soon. 

Do you often receive letters 
from your relatives in 
France, madam? 

Yes, sir; I do. They write so 
much about their life in 
Paris. 


ses parents: ils ont l’inten- 
tion de retourner bientot 
en Russie. 

Recevez-vous souvent des 
lettres de vos parents de 
France, madame? 

Oui, monsieur; j’en regois 
souvent. Ils dcrivent beau- 
coup au sujet de la vie a 
Paris. 


REMARQUES 

1. Cette legon traite de la maniere d’exprimer le present 
d’un verbe en anglais. Les formes des verbes donnees dans 
le vocabulaire to count , to like, to live, etc., sont les formes 
de l’infinitif. Elies sont d’une grande importance dans la 
conjugaison des verbes en anglais. Ainsi, pour former le 
present, il suffit de joindre les pronoms personnels I, he, she, 
etc., a l’infinitif sans la preposition to. Pour la troisieme 
personne, cependant on ajoute un s au verbe. Le present 
des verbes to speak et to live sera done comme suit: 


Present 


to speak, parler 


I speak, 

He 1 

She 1 speaks, 

It J 

We 1 

You [ speak, 
They J 


Je parle 
^parle 


II 
Elle 


Nous parlous 
Vous parlez 

I Eltes} ( ’ arlent 


to live, demeurer 


I live, 

He 1 

She [lives, 

It J 

We 1 
You [live, 
TheyJ 


Je demeure 


II 1 
Elle I 


demeurs 


Nous demeurons 
Vous demeurez 
Ils 1 
Elies I 


\demeurent 


Notez qu’en anglais, sauf quelques rares exceptions 
etudiOes plus tard, l’infinitif d’un verbe est toujours precede 
de la proposition to. 

I desire to live in Paris, Je desire demeurer a Paris. 

I desire to speak, Je desire parler. 




2 


QUATRIEME LEQON 


21 


2. La traduction litterale de la phrase, They live in London , 
est, Ils demeurent dans Londres. Lorsqu’il n’y a pas de mouve- 
ment exprimd, la preposition cl est traduite par in en anglais 
devant les noms de villes. 

I live in Paris, in Rome, in Berlin, Je demeure d, Paris , a Rome, a 
Berlin. 


3. En anglais, pour former une question au present, on 
se sert de l’auxiliaire to do , faire. Pour cela, on place do 
pour toutes les personnes, does pour la 3 eme personne du sin- 
gulier, devant le verbe, sans changer l’ordre des mots. Ce 
do, ou does equivaut done a l’expression est-ce que en frangais. 
La comparaison suivante de la forme affirmative et de la 
forme interrogative, montre clairement le moyen de faire une 
question. 

to live, demeurer 
Prbsent 


I live. 


Affirmatif 

Je demeure 




He 

She [lives, 

It J 


II 1 
Elle\ 


demeure 


We 1 
Yon [live, 
TheyJ 


Nous demeurons 
Vous demeurez 
Ils 


Elies 


\ demeurent 


Ho I live? 

The 1 

Does she [live? 

[it J 

fwe 1 

Hoi yon [live? 

[ they J 


Interrogatif 

Est-ce que je demeure? 


Demeure-t- 


f il? 
\elle? 


Demeurons-nous ? 
Demeurez-vous ? 

jils? 


Demeurent- 


\elles? 


Remarquez aussi qu’a la forme interrogative, 3* personne 
du singulier, la lettre s de la forme affirmative du verbe dis- 
parait puisqu’on ajoute does (qui cont-ient un s ). 

He speaks, II parle. I He receives, II reQoit. 

Hoes he sytesik.?Parle-t-il? | Hoes he receive? Reqoit-il? 


22 


ANGLAIS 


2 


4. La forme negative du present se forme aussi a l’aide 
de l’auxiliaire to do. On ajoute do not pour toutes les person- 
nes, does not pour la troisieme personne du singulier entre le 
sujet et le verbe, comme on peut le voir dans le modele 
suivant, ou la forme affirmative et la forme negative sont 
comparees: 

to live, demeurer 


Present 


Affirmatif 


I live, 

He 1 

She [lives, 

It J 

We | 

You [live, 
They J 


Je demeure 


It 

Elle 


\ demeure 


Nous demeurons 
Vous demeurez 
Its 


Elies 


> demeurent 


Negatif 


I do not live, 

He 1 

She [does not live, 

It J 

We 1 

You [do not live, 
TheyJ 


je ne aemeure pas. 


Jne demeure pas 


It 

Elle 

Nous ne demeurons pas 
Vous ne demeurez pas 

^ S ,, 1 ne demeurent pas *■ 
Elies J 


5. L’expression avoir Vintention en frangais se traduit 
par un simple verbe to intend en anglais. 

6. Une grande difference existe entre le frangais et 
l’anglais dans la construction de la reponse. Tandis que 
dans notre langue, non seulement le verbe doit etre repete 
dans la reponse, mais aussi les complements eux-memes ou 
les pronoms equivalents, en anglais la reponse affirmative 
peut etre simplement I do , et la reponse negative I do not , 
ou son abreviation I don't. 

Do you speak French?—I do. Parlez-vous frangais?—Je parle 
fran gats. 

Do you live in Paris? —I do. Demeurez-vous a Paris? J'y demeure. 


2 


QUATRIEME LECON 


23 


Do you speak German? —I do not, ou, I don’t. Parlez-nous alle- 
mand? Je ne parle pas allemand. 

Do you live in London? —I do not, ou, I don’t. Demeurez-vous d 
Londres? — Je n'y demeure pas. 


7 . Lorsque le sujet d’un verbe est un nom, pour former 
la phrase interrogative-affirmative, on place do, ou does (troi- 
sieme personne du singulier), devant la phrase affirmative, 
l’ordre des mots ne changeant pas. II faut aussi remarquer 


qu a la troisieme personne 
does, le verbe ne prend pas la 

Affirmatif 

Mrs. Jones speaks French, Mme. 
Jones parle frangais. 

John lives in Paris, Jean demeure 
a Paris. 

John and Lucy live in Paris, 
Jean et Lucie demeurent a Paris. 


du singulier, lorsqu’on ajoute 
terminaison .?. 

Interrogatif-Affirmatif 
Does Mrs. Jones speak French? 
Mme. Jones parle-t-elle fran¬ 
gais ? 

Does John live in Paris? Jean 
demeure-t-il a Paris? 

Do John and Lucy live in Paris? 
Jean et Lucie demeurent-ils d 
Paris ? 


8. Le comparatif d’egalite aussi ... que en frangais se 
traduit en anglais par as . . . as. 

He is as young as you, II est aussi jeune que nous. 

They are as rich as we are, Its sont aussi riches que nous. 

She counts as well as you do, Elle compte aussi bien qzie nous. 

Lucy counts as well as John does, Lucie compte aussi bien que Jean. 

Remarquez qu’en anglais, l’auxiliaire peut etre rep£td 
apres le pronom ou le nom qui vient apres le second membre 
as de la comparaison. 


9 . L’imperatif a, en anglais la meme forme que l’infini- 
tif, avec cette difference que l’on supprime la preposition to 
qui se trouve presque toujours devant cet infinitif. 


Infinitif 
to speak, par ter 
to count, compter 
to write, ecrire 


Imperatif 

speak, parle, ou parlez 
count, compte, ou comptez 
write, ecris, ou ecrinez 


24 


ANGLAIS 


§2 


10. L’imperatif a la forme negative s’exprime en 
plagant do not devant l’imperatif affirmatif. 


Imperatif 


Affirmatif 


Negatif 


Do not speak, ne parlez pas 
Do not count, ne comptez pas 
Do not write, n'lcrivez pas. 


Speak, parte, ou parlez 
Count, compte , ou comptez 
Write, ecris, ou ecrivez 


11. Les adverbes de temps comme always, often, etc. se 
placent ordinairement aprds le sujet dans les temps simples. 

Do you always live in Paris? Demeurez-vous ton jours & Paris? 

I always live in Paris, Je demeure toujours & Paris. 

I often receive letters from Paris, Je regois souvent des lettres de 


Paris. 


12. La forme interrogative-ndgative d’un verbe au 
present se construit avec la forme interrogative-affirmative 
par l’addition de la negation not que l’on place entre le sujet 
et le verbe, comme on peut le voir dans le modele suivant: 


to speak, parler 
Present 

Interrogatif- Affirmatif 


Do I speak? Est-ce que je parte? 



you 1 speak? Parlez-vous? 
tlieyj Parlent- 


speak ? Parle-t- 


Parlons-nous ? 



fit? 1 
\elle? J 


Interrogatif-Negatif 

Do I not speak? Est-ce que je ne parte pas? 



Do 



not speak? Ne parlez-vous pas? 


Ne parlons-nous pas ? 


Ne parlent-^j^past 


§2 


QUATRI&ME LEQON 


25 


13. Si rinterrogation est negative, et que le sujet 
soit un nom, on place do not ou does not devant la phrase 
affirmative. 

Present 


Affirmatif 

Mr. Jones speaks French, M. 
Jones parle frangais. 

Lucy and John speak English, 
Lucie et Jean parlent anglais. 


Interrogatif-Negatif 
Does not Mr. Jones speak 
French ? M. Jones ne parle- 
t-il pas frangais? 

Do not Lucy and John speak 
English ? Lucie et Jean ne 
parlent-il pas anglais? 


14. L’expression frangaise n'est-cepas, apres un verbe au 
present se traduit par do, ou does suivi d’un pronom a la 
meme personne que le sujet de la phrase, si cette phrase 
est negative; par do, ou does, le pronom et la negation not si 
la phrase est affirmative. 

I do not speak French well, do I?— Je ne parle pas bien frangais , 
n'est-ce pas? 

John does not live in Paris, does he?— Jean ne demeure pas & 
Paris, n'est-ce pas? 

Lucy counts very well, does she not?— Lucie compte tris bien, 
n'est-ce pas? 

We speak English well, do we not? — Nous parlous bien anglais, 
n'est-ce pas? 


EXERCICE ORAE 

Do yon speak English?—Yes, sir; I speak 
English.—Yes, sir; Ido. 

Parlez-vous anglais? Oui, monsieur; je parle anglais. 

Do you write many letters?—Yes, sir; I write many letters. 
—Yes, sir; I do. 

Do you count in French? —Yes, sir; I count from one to 
ten. —Yes, sir; I do. 

Do you intend to live in London?—Yes, sir; I intend to 
live there.—Yes, sir; I do. 

Do you like to live in Russia?—Yes, sir; I like to live 
there.—Yes, sir; I do. 

Do you live in Paris?—Yes, sir; I live there.—Yes; sir; 
I do. 



26 


ANGLAIS 


2 


Do you read French?—Yes, sir; I do. 

Do you receive many letters? —Yes, madam; I receive 
many letters. —Yes, madam; I do. 

Does lie speak French? — Xes; lie speaks 
French.—Yes; he does. 

Parle-t-il frangais?—Oui; il parle frangais. 

Does he write many letters? —Yes; he writes many letters. 
—Yes; he does. 

Does he live in Paris now? —Yes; sir; he lives there.— 
Yes, sir; he does. 

Does he prefer to live in Paris?—Yes, sir; he prefers to 
live there.—Yes, sir; he does. 

Does he intend to return soon? —Yes, sir; he does. 

Does he like this painting?—Yes, sir; he likes this paint¬ 
ing.—Yes; he does. 

Does she remain inParis in the winter?—Xes; 
she remains there in the winter.—Yes; 
she does. 

Reste-t-elle a Paris pendant Vhiverf—Oui; elle y reste 
pendant Vhiver. 

Does she like Paris very much? —Yes; she does. 

Does she like to live in Paris?—Yes; she likes to live 
there.—Yes; she does. 

Does she speak French and English? —Yes; she speaks 
French and English —Yes; she does. 

Does she read too loud?—Yes; she reads too loud.—Yes; 
she does. 

Does John receive many letters?—Xes; he 
receives many letters.—Xes; he does. 

Jean regoit-il beaucoup de lettres?—Oui; il regoit beaucoup 
de lettres. 

Does Mr. Warren like to speak French? —Yes; he likes to 
speak French.—Yes; he does. 

Does Mrs. Reed remain in London in winter? —Yes; she 
remains there. —Yes; she does. 

Does your mother receive many letters?—Yes; she receives 
many letters.—Yes; she does. 


§2 QUATRIEME LEQON 27 

Do I count well in French?-Yes, you count 
very well in French?-Yes; yon do. 

Est- ce que je compte bien en franqais? — Oui; vous comptez 
Ms bien en frangais? 

Do I write English very well?—Yes; you write English 
very well.—Yes; you do. 

Do I read German well?—Yes; you read German very 
well.—Yes; you do. 

Do I receive many letters?—Yes; you receive many letters. 
— Yes; you do. 

Do you always live in Paris? —Yes; we always live there. 
—Yes; we do. 

Do they like to live in St. Petersburg?-Yes; 
they like to live there. - Yes; they do. 

Aiment-ils demeurer a St. PHersbourg? — Oui; its aiment 
y demeurer. 

Do they write to their uncle in London?—Yes; they do. 

Do they intend to remain in France very long? —Yes; they 
intend to remain there during the winter. 

Do they often receive letters from their relatives?—Yes; 
they do. 

Do Mr. and Mrs. Smith intend to return to Russia?—Yes; 
they do. 

Do yon not speak English? —No, madam; I 
do not speak English.—No, madam; I do 
not. 

Ne parlez-vous pas anglais?—Non , madame; je ne parle 
pas anglais? 

Do you not write in French? —No, sir; I do not write in 
French. —No, sir; I do not. 

Do you not count in French? —No, sir; I do not. 

Do you not like to live in Paris? —No, sir; I do not like to 
live there. —No, sir; I do not. 

Do you not receive many letters? —No, sir; I do not 
receive many letters. —No, sir; I do not. 

Do you intend to live in London? —No, sir; we do not 
intend to live there. —No, sir; we do not. 


28 


ANGLAIS 


2 


Does lie not count well in French?—No, sir; 
lie does not count well in French.—No, 
sir; he does not. 

Ne compte-t-il pas bien en frangais ?—Non , monsieur, il ne 
compte pas bien en frangais. 

Does he not receive letters from Paris? —No, sir; he does 
not receive letters from Paris. —No, sir; he does not. 

Does he not read too loud? —No, sir; he does not read too 
loud. —No, sir; he does not. 

Does she not speak English? —No, madam; 
she does not speak English; she speaks 
Russian and French only. 

Neparle-t-elle pas anglais? — Non, madame; elle ne parle 
pas anglais; elle parle seulement russe et frangais. 

Does she not speak French so well as you do? —No, sir; 
she does not speak French so well as I do. —No, sir; she 
does not. 

Does she not speak Russian at all? —No. sir; she does not 
speak Russian at all. —No, sir; she does not. 

Does she always live in Paris? —No, sir; she does not 
always live there. —No, sir; she does not. 

Does your brother like to live in France? —No, madam; he 
does not like to live there.— No, sir; he does not. 

Does not Mr. Reed prefer to live in Russia? —No, sir; he 
does not; he prefers to live in France. 

Does not Mrs. Smith like to live in Paris also?—No, 
madam; she does not like to live there, because she does not 
speak French. 

Does not Mr. Warren speak French very well? —No, 
madam; he does not; he does not speak French at all. 

Do I not speak French well?—No, sir; yon do 
not speak Frencli very well. - No, sir; you 
do not. 

Est-ce que je ne parle pas bien frangais?—Non, monsieur; 
vous ne parlez pas tris bien frangais. 

Do I not count well in German? —No, sir; you do not 
count well in German.— No, sir; you do not. 


§2 


QUATRI^ME LEQON 


29 


Do you not know my uncle? —No; we do not know your 
uncle, but we know your cousin very well. 

Do you not intend to live in Paris soon? —No; we do not 
intend to live there now.— No, sir; we do not. 

Do not Mr. and Mrs. Reed live in Paris?—No; 
they do not live in Paris.—No; they do 
not. 

M. et Mme. Reed ne demeurent-ils pas a Paris ? — Non ; ils 
n'y demeurent pas. 

Do they not know our uncle there? —No; they do not know 
your uncle, but they know your cousin very well. 

Do they not speak German at all? —No; they do not speak 
German at all. —No; they do not. 

Do they not intend to remain in France very long? —No; 
they do not intend to remain there very long: they intend to 
return to Russia very soon. 

Do you speak German as well as I do? —No; I 
do not speak German so well as you do. — 

No; I do not. 

Parlez-vous allemand aussi bien que moi?—Non; je ne 
parle pas allemand aussi bien que vous. 

Does she speak French as well as we do? —Yes; she 
does. 

Does my brother speak Russian as well as Mr. Reed 
does? 

— Yes; he speaks Russian as well as he does. —Yes, sir; he 
does. 

Do they read French as well as I do?—Yes; they read 
French as well as you do.—Yes; they do. 

Do they read German as well as Mr. and Mrs. Smith do? 
—Yes; they read German as well as Mr. and Mrs. Smith do. 
—Yes; they do. 

Count in French from 1 to 10. 

Compte , ou comptez en franqais de 1 & 10. 

Do not Mr. and Mrs. Warren live in London? 

Do not read English. 


30 


ANGLAIS 


2 


Write a letter to my uncle. 

Speak French. 

Do not count in German, count in French. 

No comptez pas en allemand, comptez en frangais. 

Do not live in London, live in Paris. 

Do not read too loud. 

Do not read too long. 

Do not remain in Paris during the winter. 

Do not return to London. 

Do not write to my uncle. 

Do not speak English. 

I speak French very well, do I not?—Xes; 
you speak French very well.—Xes; you 
do. 

Jeparle trbs Men frangais n'est-cepas?—Oui; vous parlez 
tris Men frangais. 

I read French well, do I not? —Yes; you read French very 
well. —Yes; you do. 

He likes to live in Paris, does he not?—Yes; he likes to 
live in Paris very much.—Yes; he does. 

Your uncle always lives in London, does he not?—Yes; he 
always lives there.—Yes; he does. 

Mr. Warren knows our uncle, does he not? —Yes; he 
knows our uncle very well.—Yes; he does. 

Mr. Reed prefers to live in Paris, does he not?—Yes; he 
prefers to live there—Yes; he does. 

We speak English very well, do we not? —Yes; you speak 
English very well.—Yes; you do. 

We receive many letters, do we not? —Yes; we receive 
many letters.—Yes; we do. 

You intend to live in St. Petersburg, do you not? —Yes; 
we intend to live there.—Yes; we do. 

She writes many letters, does she not? — O, yes; she writes 
many letters. —O, yes; she does. 

They know Mr. Warren, do they not? —Yes; they know 
Mr. Warren very well.—Yes; they do. 


2 


QUATRIEME LEQON 


31 


You do not speak French, do you?-No, 
madam; I do not speak French at all. 

No, madam; I do not. 

Vous ne parlez pas frangais, n'est-ce pas?—Non, madame; 
je ne parle pas du tout frangais. 

You do not know my cousin, do you? —No; I do not know 
your cousin. —No; I do not. 

I do not speak English very well, do I? —Yes; you speak 
English quite well. 

I do not read English well, do I? —Yes; you read English 
quite well.—Yes; you do. 

He does not know my brother, does he? —No; he does not. 

She does not intend to live in Paris soon, does she? —No; 
she does not intend to live there at all. —No; she does not. 

She does not write many letters, does she? —No; she does 
not write many letters. —No; she does not. 

They do not speak English as well as we do, do they? — 
No; they do not speak English as well as you do. —No; 
they do not. 

When they are in Paris, they do not write to their relatives 
often, do they? —No; they do not write often. —No; they 
do not. 

They do not like to live in London in the winter, do they? — 
No; they do not like to live there in the winter; they prefer 
to live in Paris. 


REYUE ET CONVERSATION 


Do you speak English, Mr. Reed? 

Yes, sir; I speak English very 
well. 

Does your brother speak English 
also? 

No, sir; he does not, but he speaks 
French and German very well. 

Your uncle does not speak Ger¬ 
man at all, does he? 

No, madam; he does not, he 
speaks Russian only. 

Do you know Mr. Warren, Lucy? 


Parlez-vous anglais, M. Reed? 

Oui, monsieur; je parle tres bien 
anglais. 

Votre frere parle-t-il aussi anglais? 

Non, monsieur; il ne parle pas 
anglais, mais il parle tres bien 
frangais et allemand. 

Votre oncle ne parle pas du tout 
allemand, n’est-ce pas? 

Non, madame; il ne parle pas alle- 

- mand; il parle seulement russe. 

Connaissez - vous M. Warren, 
Lucie? 




32 


ANGLAIS 


2 


RETUB ET CONVERSATION - (Continuees) 


O, yes; I know Mr. Warren very I 
well. 

You know Miss Warren also, do 
you not? 

Yes; I do. 

Do Mr. and Mrs. Warren live in 
Paris? 

No, they do not live there; they 
prefer to live in London, be¬ 
cause they do not speak French 
at all. But they speak English 
very well. 

You speak French, do you not? 

O, yes; I speak, read, and write 
French very well. 

Do you always live in London? 

O, no; we do not always live 
there; we live in Paris in the 
winter. 

You intend to write to your uncle 
soon, do you not? 

Yes; I do. 

Does he read French well? 

Yes; he reads very well. 

Does he not read too loud? 

No; he does not. 

Do they receive many letters? 

Yes; they do. 

Do you often read in French? 

Yes; we do. 

Do you know this gentleman? 

Yes; I do, but I do not know him 
so well as you do. 

Do you read German as well as 
your mother? 

O, no; I do not read German so 
well as she does. 

Does your brother write as well in 
French as you do? 

No; he does not write so well in 
French as I do. 


Oh! oui; je connais tres bien M. 
Warren. 

Vous connaissez aussi Mile. War¬ 
ren, n’est-ce pas? 

Oui; je la connais. 

M. et Mme. Warren demeurent-ils 
a Paris? 

Non; ils n’y demeurent pas; ils 
preferent demeurer a Londres„ 
parce qu’ils ne parlent pas du 
tout frangais. Mais ils parlent 
tres bien anglais. 

Vous parlez frangais, n’est-ce 
pas? 

Oh! oui; je parle, je lis, et j’ecris 
tres bien le frangais. 

Demeurez-vous toujours a Lon- 
dres? 

Oh! non; nous n’y demeurons 
pas toujours; nous demeurons 
a Paris en hiver. 

Vous avez l’intention d’ecrire 
bientot a votre oncle, n’est-ce 
pas? 

Oui; j’en ai l’intention. 

Lit-il bien le frangais? 

Oui; il le lit tres bien. 

Ne lit-il pas trop haut? 

Non; il ne lit pas trop haut. 

Regoivent-ils beaucoup de lettres? 

Oui; ils en regoiveut beaucoup. 

Lisez-vous sou vent en frangais? 

Oui; nous lisons souvent. 

Connaissez-vous ce monsieur? 

Oui; je le connais, mais pas aussi 
bien que vous. 

Lisez-vous l’allemand aussi bien 
que votre mere? 

Oh! non; je ne lis pas l’allemand 
aussi bien qu’elle. 

Votre frere ecrit-il en frangais 
aussi bien que vous? 

Non; il n’ecrit pas en frangais 
aussi bien que moi. 





2 


QUATRIEME LEQON 


33 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION — (Continuees) 


Do they count as well in German 
as we do? 

No; they do not count so well in 
German as we do. 

Do you not like to live in St. 
Petersburg? 

No; we do not, because we do not 
speak Russian at all. We prefer 
to live in Paris, because we 
speak French very well. 

Have you relatives in Paris? 

Yes, we have; our uncle and two 
cousins live there. Our uncle 
is a rich merchant; he has a 
large estate near Paris. 

Do not read so loud, Lucy. 

Do not speak French, Edward; 
speak English. 

Do not live in London in the win¬ 
ter, Mr. Warren; live in Paris. 

Count in English from one to ten, 
John. 

Gladly, Mr. Reed: one, two, three, 
four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, 
ten. 

You count from one to ten very 
well in English, John. 

I am very glad, Mr. Reed. 

Where does Mr. Warren live? 

He lives in London, but he re¬ 
turns to Russia in the winter. 

Where is Lucy now? 

She is in the garden with her 
teacher. 

Does your cousin intend to live in 
France very long? 

She intends to remain there until 
winter. 

Do her parents also intend to 
remain there? 


Comptent-ils en allemand aussi 
bien que nous? 

Non; ils ne comptent pas en alle¬ 
mand aussi bien que nous. 

N’aimez-vous pas demeurer a St. 
Petersbourg? 

Non; nous n’aimons pas y demeu¬ 
rer, parce que nous ne parlons 
pas du tout russe. Nous prefe- 
rons demeurer a Paris, parce 
que nous parlons tres bien 
frangais. 

Avez-vous des parents a Paris? 

Oui; nous en avons; notre oncle 
et deux cousins demeurent la. 
Notre oncle est un riche mar- 
chand; il a de vastes proprietes 
pres de Paris. 

Ne lisez pas si haut, Lucie. 

Ne parlez pas frangais, Edouard, 
parlez anglais. 

Ne demeurez pas a Londres en 
hiver, M. Warren, demeurez a 
Paris. 

Comptez en anglais de un a dix, 
Jean. 

Volontiers, M. Reed: un, deux, 
trois, quatre, cinq, six, sept, 
huit, neuf, dix. 

Vous comptez tres bien de un a 
dix en anglais, Jean. 

J’en suis bien content, M. Reed. 

Ou demeure M. Warren? 

II demeure a Londres, mais il 
retourne en Russie en hiver, 

Ou est Lucie maintenant? 

Elle est dans le jardin avec son 
maitre. 

Votre cousine a-t-elle l’intention de 
demeurer longtemps en France? 

Elle a l’intention d’y rester jus- 
qu’en hiver. 

Ses parents ont-ils aussi l’inten- 
tion d’y rester? 



34 


ANGLAIS 


2 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION—(Continuees) 


No; they do not. They intend to 
return to Russia soon. 

Does your uncle often receive let¬ 
ters from his daughter in Paris? 

Yes; he does; she writes so much 
about her life in Paris. 

Do you know my uncle, Mr. War¬ 
ren? 

O, yes; I know Mr. Smith quite 
well. He is in London now, is 
he not? 

Yes, sir; he is there with my 
parents now. 

Do they intend to remain there 
long? 

My parents intend to remain there 
until winter, but my uncle does 
not like to live in London, be¬ 
cause he does not speak English 
at all; he intends to return home 
very soon. 

Do not your parents like to live in 
France? 

Yes; they do, but they prefer to 
live in London. 


Non; ils n’en ont pas l’intention. 
Ils pensent retourner bientot en 
Russie. 

Votre oncle regoit-il souvent des 
lettres de sa fille a Paris? 

Oui; il en regoit souvent; elle ecrit 
beaucoup au sujet de la vie a 
Paris. 

Connaissez-vous mon oncle, M. 
Warren ? 

Oh! oui; je connais tres bien M. 
Smith. II est a Londres main- 
tenant, n’est-ce pas? 

Oui, monsieur; II est la mainte- 
nant avec mes parents. 

Ont-ils l’intention d’y rester long- 
temps? 

Mes parents ont l’intention d’y 
rester jusqu’en hiver, mais mon 
oncle n’aime pas demeurer a 
Londres, parce qu’il ne parle 
pas du tout anglais; il a l’inten¬ 
tion de retourner bientot a la 
maison. 

Vos parents aiment-ils demeurer 
en France? 

Oui; ils aiment y demeurer, mais 
ils preferent vivre a Londres. 


EXERCICE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 

1. Do you speak English, Mr. Warren? 

2. Yes, sir; I speak English quite well. 

3. Do you speak German also? 

4. No, sir; I do not; I speak English only. 

5. Where do you live, Mr. Reed? 

6. I live in London, where I have a large estate. 

7. Does your brother intend to remain in Paris long? 

8. Yes, madam; he does; he intends to remain there 
until winter. 

9. Do they know our uncle? 

10. O, yes; they do. They know your cousins also. 




§2 


QUATRIEME LEQON 


35 


11. Do you count in English? 

12. Yes, Miss Reed; I do. 

13. Count from one to ten in English. 

14. Gladly: one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, 
nine, ten. 

15. You count from one to ten very well in English. 

16. Does Miss Warren speak English as well as you do? 

17. No, sir; she does not; she does not speak English at all. 

18. Do not live in London in the winter. 

19. Do they not live in St. Petersburg now? 

20. O, yes; they do, but my cousin does not like to live 
there; she prefers to live in Paris or London. 

21. Why does not your uncle like to live in France? 

22. He does not like to live there, because he does not 
speak French at all. 

23. You always receive many letters, madam, do you not? 

24. O, yes, sir; I receive many letters from my relatives 
in Paris. My cousin writes often, and she always writes so 
much about her life in Paris. 









































* 



















































' 







ANGLAIS 

(PARTIE 3) 


CINQUIEME LECON 


CYLINDRE PIION OGRAPIIIQUE 


YOCABULAIRE 


I. C. S. 

English Record No. 5 

already, deja 

to ask, demander 

to attain, atteindre 

before, avant 

can, present depouvoir 

the dinner, le diner 

eighteen, dix-huit 

eleven, onze 

to envy, envier 

tlie feeling, le sentiment 

fifteen, quinze 

to find, trouver 

to finish, finir 

Florence, Florence 

for, pour, car 

fourteen, quatorze 

to give, donner 

to go, aller 

to hope, esperer 

just now, immediatement 

the knowledge, les connais- 

sances 

the language 

la langue 


/. c. s. 

Cylindre d' Anglais No. 5 

to learn, apprendre 
the lesson, la le(on 
to let, laisser, loiter (une 
maison) 

to long, tai r der, desirer vive- 
ment 

to make, {aire 
may, pouvoir (avoir la per¬ 
mission) 
me, me, ou moi 
must, devoir 

the musician, le musicien, 
la musicienne 
nineteen, dix-neuf 
of, de 

to paint, peindre 

to permit, permettre 

to play, jouer 

to possess, posseder 

the professor, le professeur 

to progress, faire des progres 

ready, Pret 

the result, le re suit at 

to say, dire 


le langage. 


For notice of copyright, see page immediately following the title page 

§3 






2 


ANGLAIS 


3 


VOCABUEAIRE—(Continue) 


to see, voir 
seventeen, dix-sept 
sixteen, seize 
Spanish, espagnol 
splendid, splendide 
to study, etudier 
to take, prendre 
to teach, enseigner 
to thank, remercier 
that, que 


them, eux r, elles , les 
thirteen, treize 
to try, essayer 
twelve, douze 
twenty, vingt 
us, nous 

the violin, le violon 
to walk, marcher 
to wish, disirer , souhaiter 


PHRASES ET 

May 1 I ask you, madam, to 
permit^Lucy to take a walk 3 
with me? 4 

I am sorry to say, dear Flor¬ 
ence, that she cannot 8 go 
with you just now, because 
she must 8 finish her Span¬ 
ish lesson. 7 She wishes 8 to 
have it ready before dinner. 

Does Lucy study Spanish? 

Yes, dear; she does. 9 

I hope that she likes it, 
madam. 

O, yes, dear; and she already 
possesses a good knowl¬ 
edge of the language. She 
is a good musician also. 
Professor Smith says that 
she has much talent for 
music. He gives her les¬ 
sons on the violin and finds 


CONVERSATION 

Oserais-je vous demander, 
madame, de permettre a 
Lucie de se promener avec 
moi? 

Je suis fachee de dire, chere 
Florence, qu’elle ne peut 
pa's aller immediatement 
avec vous, parce qu’elle 
doit finir sa legon d’espa- 
gnol. Elle veut l’avoir 
prete avant le diner. 

Lucie dtudie -1 - elle l’espa- 
gnol? 

Oui, ma chere; elle l’etudie. 

J’espere qu’elle l’aime, 
madame. 

Oh! oui, ma chere, et elle 
possede ddja de bonnes con- 
naissances de la langue. 
Elle est aussi bonne musici- 
enne. Le professeur Smith 
dit qu’elle a beaucoup de 
talent pour la musique. II 
lui donne des legons de 





§3 


CINQUIEME LECON 


3 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION—(Continuees) 


that she plays it with much 
feeling. Lucy tries to paint 
also, and takes lessons of 
John. I must say that she 
envies him very much be¬ 
cause he paints so well. 

Does John also play the 
violin?. 

Yes, dear; he plays it quite 
well, but not with so 10 much 
feeling as Lucy does; he 
takes 11 lessons with her of 
Professor Smith. 

Does the professor teach 
them languages too? 

No, dear; he does not; he 
teaches music only, and 
Mr. A. teaches them lan¬ 
guages. John studies 
French now; he tries to 
learn to speak it well, for 
we intend to go to Paris 
soon. Mr. A., our French 
teacher, goes with us; he 
wishes to see his relatives 
there. 

I envy you, madam, very 
much, for I long to be in 
France. 

Ask your parents to permit 
you to go with us. 


violon, et trouve qu’elle en 
joue avec beaucoup de senti¬ 
ment. Lucie essaye aussi 
de peindre et elle prend des 
legons de Jean. Jedoisdire 
qu’elle l’envie beaucoup 
parce qu’il peint si bien. 

Est-ce que Jean joue aussi 
du violon? 

Oui, ma chere; il en joue tout 
a fait bien, mais pas avec 
autant de sentiment que 
Lucie; il prend des legons 
avec elle du professeur 
Smith. 

Le professeur leur enseigne- 
t-il aussi les langues dtran- 
geres? 

Non, ma chere; il ne les en- 
seigne pas; il n’enseigne 
que la musique et M. A. 
leur enseigne les langages. 
Jean etudie le frangais m ain- 
tenant; il essaye d’appren- 
dre a le bien parler, car 
nous avons l’intention 
d’aller bientot a Paris. M. 
A., notre professeur de 
frangais vient avec nous; il 
d6sire voir ses parents. 

Je vous envie beaucoup, 
madame, car je desire vive- 
ment (il me tarde) etre 
en France. 

Demandez a vos parents de 
vous permettre d’y aller 
avec nous. 



4 


ANGLAIS 


3 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION—(Continuees) 


I thank you very much; I 
cannot go to France with 
you, for my parents intend 
to go to London and wish 
to take me with them. 

Let us count 12 from ten to 
twenty: ten, eleven, twelve, 
thirteen, fourteen, fifteen, 
sixteen, seventeen, eigh¬ 
teen, nineteen, twenty. 


Je vous remercie beaucoup, 
je ne puis aller en France 
avec vous, car mes parents 
ont l’intention d’aller a 
Londres, et desirent m’em- 
mener avec eux. 

Comptons de dix a vingt: 
dix, onze, douze, treize, 
quatorze, quinze, seize, 
dix-sept, dix-huit, dix-neuf, 
vingt. 


REMARQUES 

1. Ce qui distingue essentiellement la conjugaison des 
verbes anglais de la notre, c’est l’emploi de certains auxili- 
aires au moyen desquels on peut exprimer toutes les nuances 
de temps et de modes. Tandis qu’en frangais nous ne pos- 
sedons comme auxiliaires qu 'avoir et Hre, la langue anglaise 
en a un plus grand nombre qui influent sur le sens du verbe 
qu’ils accompagnent. Cette legon en contient quelques- 
uns; les autres seront etudies plus tard. 

May renferme ordinairement une idee de permission, aussi 
la possibility qu’une chose se fasse, qu’un evenement arrive. 
II s’emploie aussi bien pour exprimer une action presente, 
passee ou future, comme on peut le voir dans les exemples 
suivants: 

It may be, Cela peut etre {il est probable qice cela est). 

I may play, Je puis jouer (c’est-a-dire, /’ai la permission dejoner). 

You may go, Vous pouvez vous en aller (je vous donne la permission 
de vous en aller). 

It may rain tomorrow, 11 pourra pleuvoir demain. 

I may go out tomorrow, II est possible que je sorte demain. 

May s’emploie aussi dans les phrases elliptiques pour 
exprimer un souhait: 

May you be happy! Puissiez-vous etre heureux! 

May you always be what you are now! Puissiez-vous rester toujours 
ce que vous lies maintenant! 




3 


CINQUIEME LEQON 


5 


Dans les propositions subordonnees, may se traduit sou- 
vent par puisse, et comme ce mot exprime le doute par excel¬ 
lence, il s’emploie sou vent comme auxiliaire du subjonctif: 

We wish that they may succeed, Nous souhaitons qu’ils reussissent 
(ou, qu'ils puissent reussir). 

2. Les verbes to permit , permettre, to ask, demander, ne 
prennent pas de preposition devant un complement, alors 
qu’en frangais nous les faisons suivre de la preposition d. 

Ask Lucy to go with you, Demandez a Lucie d'alter avec vous. 

Do you permit John to study French? Permettez-vous d Jean 
d'etudier le franqais. 

3. L’expression frangaise se promenerh pied, se traduit en 
anglais par to take a walk, litteralement, prendre une marche. 

4. Cette legon contient les pronoms personnels employes 
comme complements. En anglais, la meme forme existe 
pour le pronom personnel complement direct, et pour le 
pronom personnel complement indirect, alors que nous avons 
generalement deux formes en frangais. Ces pronoms sont 
les suivants: 

Singulier 

1 ire. personne me, me, ou, mot 

2 ime. personne d’un emploi rare 

3 ime. personne him (masculin) le, lui 

her (feminin) la, lui, elle 
it (neutre) le, la, lui, elle 

Pluriel 
us, nous 
you, vous 

them, les, eux, elles 

Les pronoms personnels complements ne sont jamais, 
comme en frangais places avant le verbe, mais ils le suivent 
toujours. 

Ces pronoms de la troisieme personne peuvent presenter 
quelques difficult6s dans leur emploi. Considerez avec soin 
les exemples suivants: 

I thank him, Je le remercie. 

I speak to him, Je lui parle. 

I walk with him, Je marche avec lui. 


6 


ANGLAIS 


§3 


I wish her to be happy, Je Ini (fem.) souhaite d'etre heureuse. 

I study with her, J'Uudie avec elle. 

I thank her, Je la remercie. 

Do you study French? —I study it, Etudiez-vous le frangais?—Je 
Vetudie. 

I thank them, Je les remercie. 

I walk with them, Je marche avec eux , ou avec elles. 

5. Can est encore un auxiliaire en anglais; comme may , il 
se traduit aussi ordinairement par le verbe pouvoir’Z n fran¬ 
gais. II faut cependant observer une difference entre les 
deux. Can indique la possibility de faire une chose, et par 
suite le pouvoir physique ou moral, la possibility ou le savoir- 
faire, tandis que may, comme nous l’avons vu n’indique que 
la probability, la permission. 

I can speak French, Je puis parler frangais (c’est-a-dire, Je sais 
parler frangais). 

Can your brother read? Votre frbre peut-il lire? 

Can et not ne font qu’un mot, cannot. 

I cannot speak English, Je ne peux pas parler anglais. 

He cannot read in French, II ne pent pas lire en frangais. 

6. Must , qui est toujours invariable, exprime la nycessity 
absolue de faire une chose, l’obligation ou la supposition. 
II se rend en frangais par devoir , mais le plus souvent par 
falloir qui n’existe pas en anglais: 

Must you go? Devez-vous partir? 

I must go, Je dois partir , ou II faut que je parte. 

You must be happy, Vous devez etre heureux 

You must be good, II faut ttre bon. 

He must study, II faut qu'il Hudie. 

7 . Une construction familiere a la langue anglaise con- 
siste a combiner ensemble deux mots dont l’un qualifie 
1’autre, alors que ces deux mots sont souvent sepals par la 
preposition de en frangais. Le mot qualificatif precede 
toujours le mot qualifie en anglais, et comme il devient un 
veritable adjectif, il est toujours invariable. 

a German lesson, une legon d’allemand 

a French teacher, un maitre de frangais 


3 


CINQUIEME LEQON 


7 


8. Nous avons dit qu’a la troisieme personne du singu- 
lier on ajoute un 5 au verbe. Cette regie presente quelques 
exceptions: Lorsque l’infinitif d’un verbe est termine par y 
precede d’une consonne, on change y en ies a la troisieme 
personne. 

To study— He studies French, II etudie le frangais. 

To envy — She envies him, Elle I'envie. 

Mais si Yy est precede d’une voyelle, cette troisieme per¬ 
sonne se forme regulierement par l’addition d’un 

To play — lie plays with me, II joue avec moi. 

9. Lorsque l’infinitif d’un verbe est termine par s, x, z, 
ch , sit, ou o, au lieu d’ajouter seulement ^ a la troisieme 
personne du singulier il faut ajouter^y. 

He goes with you, II va avec vous. 

She finishes her lesson, Elle Unit sa legon. 

He progresses very well, II fait beaucoup de progrls (litteralement II 
progresse Ires bien ). 

She teaches English, Elle etiseigne Vanglais. 

He wishes to go, II dhire s'en alter. 

10. Le comparatif d’egalite que nous avons donne 
comme as . . . as, devient so . . . as si la phrase est negative. 

I am not so old as you, Je ne suis pas aussi dge que vous. 

He does not speak French so well as she does, II ne parle pas aussi 
bien frangais qu'elle. 

L’expression autant de . . . que en frangais est traduite en 
anglais dans une phrase affirmative, par as many ... as pour 
le nombre, et par as much . . . as, pour la quantite; dans 
une phrase negative, les memes expressions deviennent so 
many . . . as et so much ... as. 

I have as many friends as you have, J’ai autant d'amis que vous. 

He has as much talent as she has, II a autant de talent qu'elle. 

We have not so many books as you, Notts n'avons-pas autant de 
livres que vous. 

They have not so much voice as you, Ils n'ont pas autant de voix 
qne vous. 

11 . Le verbe to take , prendre, est aussi employe dans le 
sens d 'emmener et de conduire. 


8 


ANGLAIS 


3 


Take me with you, Emmenez-moi avec vous. 

Where do you take me? Oil me conduisez-vous? 

Take me home, Reconduisez-moi (litteralement, Emmenez-moi a la 
maison ). 

12. L’imperatif n’a, a proprement parler, que la deu- 
xieme personne du singulier et la deuxieme personne du 
pluriel, exprimees en anglais par une seule et meme forme. 

Cependant, la langue anglaise complete toutes les person- 
nes de l’imperatif a l’aide de l’auxiliaire let , laisser. Pour 
cela, on place le pronom personnel complement entre let et 
l’infinitif du verbe. 

Let us count, Comptons. 

Let him count, Qu'il compte. 

Let me count, Que je compte , Laissez-moi compter. 

Let them count, Qu'ils comptent , qu'elles comptent. 

13. Dans 1’ exercice oral, on trouvera de nombreuses 
phrases sur la maniere de traduire 71 'est-ce pas lorsque Pun 
des auxiliaires may , can , must est employe dans la phrase. 
La regie est la meme que celle qui est donnee dans la legon 
precedente avec do (Art. 14, Legon 4), seulement, au lieu 
de do, nous repetons l’auxilliaire qui est employe dans la 
phrase. 

I may go, may I not? Je puis partir , n'est-ce pas? 

I can speak French very well, can I not? Je puis parler trbs bien 
franqais, n'est-ce pas? 

He cannot speak German well, can he? II ne peut pas bien parler 
allemand , n'est-ce pas? 

You must study very much, must you not? II faut que vous etudiiez 
beaucoup, n'est-ce pas? 

They must not go, must they? Ils ne doivent pas s'en aller, n'est-ce 
pas? 


EXERCICE ORAL 

May I take a walk, mother ?—Yes, dear; you 
may take a walk.—Yes, dear; you may. 

Puis-je faire une promenade a pied , maman?—Oui, ma 
chlre; vous pouvez faire une promenade a pied. 

May I ask mother to go with you? —Yes; you may ask her. 
— Yes; you may. 



3 


CINQUIEME LEQON 


9 


May I read this French book, mother? —Yes; you may 
read it.—Yes; you may. 

May we study French, uncle?—Yes; you may study it. 

— Yes; you may. 

May he play with me, Mr. Reed?—Yes; he may play with 
you.—Yes; he may. 

May you go with your uncle? —Yes; I may go with him. 
—Yes; I may. 

May they finish their French lesson?—Yes; they may 
finish it. —Yes; they may. 

May you be happy, Mr. Reed! 

Puissiez-vous etre heureux, M. Reed! 

May you always be kind, Mrs. Reed! 

May he always live happy! 

I wish she may always remain with her parents! 

May they always be well! 

May you always live happy with us! 

Do you often take a walk? —O, yes; I often 
take a walk. — Yes; I do. 

Vous promenez-vous souvent & pied?—Oh! oui, je me 
promhie souvent a pied. 

Does he often take a walk? —O, yes; he often takes a 
walk. — O, yes; he does. 

Does she often take a walk? —O, yes; she often takes a 
walk. —O, yes; she does. 

Do you often take a walk? —O, yes; we often take a walk. 

— O, yes; we do. 

Do they often take a walk? —O, yes; they often take a 
walk. — O, yes; they do. 

Does Mr. Reed often take a walk? —O, yes; he often takes 
a walk. —O, yes; he does. 

Does Mrs. Reed often take a walk? —O, yes; she often 
takes a walk. —O, yes; she does. 

Do you read French as well as I do?—No; I 
do not read French so well as you do. — No; 

I do not. 

Lisez-vous le frangais aussi bien que moi?—Non; je ne lis 
pas le frangais aussi bien que vous. 


10 


ANGLAIS 


3 


Does he read French as well as I do? —No; he does not 
read French so well as you do. —No; he does not. 

Does she read French as well as 1 do? —No; she does not 
read French so well as you do. —No; she does not. 

Do you read French as well as I do? —No; we do not read 
French so well as you do. —No; we do not. 

Do they read French as well as I do? —No; they do not 
read French so well as you do. —No; they do not. 

Does John read French as well as I do? —No; he does not 
read French so well as you do. —No; he does not. 

Does Lucy read French as well as I do? —No; she does not 
read French so well as you do. —No; she does not. 

Do John and Lucy read French as well as I do? —No; they 
do not read French so well as you do. —No; they do not. 

Have you as many friends as I have?—No; I 
have not so many as yon have.—No; I 
have not. 

Avez-vous autant d' amis que moi? — Non; je n'ai pas au- 
tant d' amis que vous. 

Has he as many friends as I have? —No; he has not so 
many friends as you have.— No; he has not. 

Has she as many friends as I have? —No; she has not so 
many friends as you have. —No; she has not. 

Have you as many friends as I have? —No; we have not 
so many friends as you have. —No; we have not. 

Have they as many friends as I have? —No; they have not 
so many friends as you have. —No; they have not. 

Has John as many friends as I have? —No; he has not so 
many friends as you have. —No; he has not. 

Has Miss Warren as many friends as I have? —No; she has 
not so many friends as you have. —No; she has not. 

Have John and Lucy as many friends as I have? —No; they 
have not so many friends as you have. —No; they have not. 

Have you as much talent as I have?—No; I 
have not so much talent as you have.—No; 

I have not. 

Avez-vous autant de talent que moi?—Non; je n'ai pas 
autant de talent que vous. 


§3 


CINQUI^ME LEQON 


11 


Has he as much talent as I have? —No; he has not so 
much talent as you have. -r- No; he has not. 

Has she as much talent as I have?—No; she has not so 
much talent as you have. —No; she has not. 

Have you as much talent as I have? No; we have not so 
much talent as you have. —No; we have not. 

Have they as much talent as I have? —No; they have not 
so much talent as you have. —No; they have not. 

Has John as much talent as I have? —No; he has not so 
much talent as you have. —No; he has not. 

Has Mrs. Warren as much talent as I have? —No; she 
has not so much talent as you have.— No; she has not. 

Have John and Lucy as much talent as I have? —No; they 
have not so much talent as you have. —No; they have not. 

Can lie receive me?—Xes; lie can receive 
you.—Xes; lie can. 

Peut-il me recevoir? — Out; il pent vous recevoir. 

Can you receive him? —Yes; I can receive him.—Yes; 
I can. 

Can he receive her?—Yes; he can receive her.—Yes; 
he can. 

Can they receive us?—Yes; they can receive you.—Yes; 
they can. 

Can John receive them?—Yes; he can receive them. —Yes; 
he can. 

Can you study it?—Yes; I can study it. —Yes; I can. 

Do yon not see me?—No; I do not see yon. 

—No; I do not 

Ne me voyez-vous pas?—Non; je ne vous vois pas. 

Do you not see him? —No; I do not see him. —No; I 
do not. 

Does he not see her? —No; he does not see her. —No; he 
does not. 

Do you not see it? —No; I do not see it. —No; I do not. 

Do they not see us? —No; they do not see us. —No; they 
do not. 


12 


ANGLAIS 


3 


Does he not see you? —No; he does not see us. —No; he 
does not. 

Does she not see them? —No; she does not see them. —No; 
she does not. 

Do you speak to me? —Yes, sir; I speak to 
you.-Yes, sir; I do. 

Me parlez-vous? — Oui, monsieur; je vous parle. 

Do you go with him? —Yes; I go with him. —Yes; I do. 

Do you count for her? —Yes; I count for her. —Yes; I do. 

Does he live with you? —Yes; he lives with us.—Yes; 
he does. 

Do they make it for them? —Yes; they make it for them. 
— Yes; they do. 

Do you not play with liim? —No; I do not 
play with him.—No; I do not. 

Ne jouez-vous pas avec lui? — Non; je ne joue pas avec lui. 

Do you not paint the painting for her? —No; I do not paint 
it for her. —No; I do not. 

Does he not read French for you? —No; he does not read 
French for us. —No; he does not. 

Does she not study German with them? —No; she does 
not study German with them. —No; she does not. 

Do you not write this letter for Mr. Reed?—No; I do not 
write it for him. —No; I do not. 

Do you not often walk with Mr. and Mrs. Warren? —No; I 
do not often walk with them. —No; I do not. 

Can you speak French, sir? —Yes; I can 
speak French very well.—Yes; I can. 

Pouvez-vous parler frangais , monsieur? — Oui; je puis 
parler tr'es bien frangais. 

Can you speak German also? —Yes; we can speak German 
also. —Yes; we can. 

Can she write in English? —O, yes; she can write in Eng¬ 
lish very well. —O, yes; she can. 

Can John play the violin? —O, yes; he can play the violin 
very well.—O, yes; he can. 


§3 CINQUIEME LEgON 13 

Can we teach Spanish? —Yes; you can teach Spanish.—Yes; 
you can. 

Can John and Lucy write in German? —Yes; they can write 
in German. —Yes; they can. 

Can I not speak French well? —No; you can¬ 
not speak it well.—No; you cannot. 

Ne puis-je pas bien parler frangais ? — Non; vous ne pouvez 
pas bien_ le parler. 

Can I not learn German? —No; you cannot learn it. —No; 
you cannot. 

Can he not find his friend? —No; he cannot find him. —No; 
he cannot. 

Can she not play the violin? —No; she cannot play it. —No; 
she cannot. 

Can we not write a letter in French? —No; we cannot write 
a letter in French. —No; we cannot. 

Can they not teach languages? —No; they cannot teach 
them. —No; they cannot. 

Can John speak English? — No; he cannot 
speak it.—No; he cannot. 

Jean peut-il parler anglais? — Non; il ne peut pas le 
parler. 

Cannot Mr. Reed play the violin? —No; he cannot play it. 
— No; he cannot. 

Cannot their sister count in Spanish? —No; she cannot 
count in Spanish. —No; she cannot. 

Cannot Mr. and Mrs. Warren see us? —No; they cannot see 
us. —No; they cannot. 

Cannot John and Lucy go with their relatives? —No; they 
cannot go with their relatives. —No; they cannot go with 
them. —No; they cannot. 

Must you go John?—Yes, sir; I must go. 

— Yes, sir; I must. 

Faut-il que vous vous en alliez , Jean ? — Oui , monsieur; il 
faut que je m'en aille. 

Must you remain in Paris in the winter? —Yes; I must 
remain there.—Yes; I must. 


14 


ANGLAIS 


3 


Must your daughter return to Paris before winter? —Yes; 
she must return there. —Yes; she must. 

Must we speak French to Mr. Warren? —Yes; you must 
speak French to him. —Yes; you must. 

Must they finish their French lesson soon? —Yes; they 
must finish it soon.—Yes; they must. 

Must Mrs. and Miss Warren go to London this winter? — 
Yes; they must go there this winter.—Yes; they must. 

Must I not go to London? —No; you must not 
go there.—No; you must not. 

Ne dois-je pas aller a Londres? — Non; vous ne devez pas 
y alter. 

Must you not see your brother?—No; we must not see 
him. —No; we must not. 

Must he walk? —No; he must not walk. —No; he must not. 
Must he not write to his relatives? —No; he must not 
write to them. —No; he must not. 

Must they not play in the garden? —No; they must not 
play in the garden. —No; they must not. 

John studies English and he progresses 
very well. 

Jean etudie l'anglais, et il fait beaucoup de progres. 

Lucy studies French and she progresses very well. 

Mr. Reed teaches them languages. 

Mr. Warren tries to learn painting. 

She envies her teacher very much because he paints 
so well. 

She finishes her lesson. 

Where do you take me? —I take you home. 

Oh me conduisez-vous?—Je vous conduis chez vous. 

Where does he take her? —He takes her home. 

Where do they take us? —They take us home. 

Take me with you, Mr. Reed? 

Do not take me home now. 

Let us play the violin in the garden. 

Jouons du, violon dans le jar din. 


3 


CINQUIEME LEQON 


15 


Let him finish his German lesson. 

Let her remain in Paris until winter. 

Let me see your French book now. 

Let us not go tliere. 

N'allons pas Id. 

Let us not live there. 

Let him not remain there very long. 

Let them not thank us. 

Let me not walk too long. 

I am sorry to say tliat I cannot go with you 
just now. 

Je suis bien fache de votls dire que je ne puis alter avec 
vous h present. 

He is sorry to say that he cannot go with us just now. 

She is sorry to say that she cannot go with us just now. 
She is sorry to say that she cannot study her lesson 
just now. 

We are sorry to say that we cannot finish our German 
lesson before dinner. 

They are sorry to say that they cannot play just now. 

Professor Smith says that I have much tal¬ 
ent for music; he teaches me to play the 
violin and finds that 1 play it with much 
feeling. 

Le professeur Smith dit que f ai beaucoup de talent pour la 
musique; it in'enseigne a jouer du violon , etil trouve 
que j'en joue avec beaucoup de sentiment. 

Professor Smith says that John has much talent for 
music; he teaches him to play the violin and finds that he 
plays it with much feeling. 

I say that Lucy has much talent for music. I teach her 
to play the violin and find that she plays it with much 
feeling. 

You say that they have much talent for music; you teach 
them to play the violin and find that they play it with much 
feeling. 


16 


ANGLAIS 


3 


I study French now; I try to learn to speak 
it well for I intend to go to Paris soon. 

J’etudie le frangais maintenant; j'essaye d'apprendre a le 
bien parler car j'ai Vintention d'alter bientot a Paris. 

Mrs. Warren studies French now; she tries to learn to 
speak it well for she intends to go to Paris soon. 

We are studying English now; we try to learn to speak it 
well for we intend to go to London soon. 

Mr. and Mrs. Reed study Russian now; they try to learn 
to speak it well for they intend to go to St. Petersburg soon. 

I wish to see my relatives in Paris. 

Je desire voir mes parents a Paris. 

He wishes to see his parents in Paris. 

She wishes to see her relatives in London. 

We wish to see our relatives there. 

You wish to see your uncles in St. Petersburg. 

They wish to see their sisters in London. 

Count from ten to fifteen.—Gladly; 10, 11, 

12, 13, 14, 15. 

Comptez de dix a quinze. — Volontiers: 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15. 

Count from twelve to seventeen. —Gladly: 12, 13, 14, 15, 
16, 17. 

Count from fifteen to twenty.—Gladly: 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20. 
Count from twenty to fifteen.— Gladly: 20, 19, 18, 17,16, 15. 
Count from fifteen to ten. —Gladly: 15, 14, 13, 12, 11, 10. 
Count from twenty to one. —Gladly: 20, 19, 18, 17, 16, 15, 
14, 13, 12, 11, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. 

Read in English: 4, 9, 17, 3, 20, 14, 5, 8, 3, 7, 19, 2, 18, 1, 
6, 12, 10, 16, 4, 13, 8, 11, 15. 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


Good morning, Mrs. Warren. 

How are you this morning? 

I am very well, thank you, Mrs. 
Smith. Where are John and 
Lucy? I do not see them. 


Bonjour, Mme. Warren. Com¬ 
ment vous portez-vous ce matin? 

Je me porte tres bien, je vous 
remercie, Mme. Smith. Ou 
sont Jean et Lucie? Je ne les 
vois pas. 




3 


CINQUIEME LEQON 


17 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


They are in their room with their 
French teacher. 

Do they study French? 

Yes; they do. You know that we 
intend to go to Paris soon, and 
they wish to speak French very 
well before we go there. 

Do they make good progress? 

Yes; they do. The professor says 
that John can speak French 
very well now. Lucy does not 
speak it so well as John, because 
she does not study so much as 
he does. You do not study 
languages, do you? 

No; I am sorry to say that I do 
not. But I intend to study 
French very soon now, because 
I long to go to France. Mr. 
Reed is the French teacher, is 
he not? 

Yes; he is. He is a very good 
teacher and he has many pupils, 
because he speaks French so 
well, and knows how to teach. 

Here are John and Lucy with 
their teacher. Good morning, 
John. Good morning, Lucy. 

No, no, Edward; not “Good 
morning.’’ You must say 
“Bonjour.” 

But, my dear friend, I cannot; I 
do not speak French. 

O, you must say it. 

Well! “Bonjour.’’ Now, Mrs. 
Warren, that I speak a little 
French, may I ask you to per¬ 
mit John and Lucy to take a 
walk with me. 


Ils sont dans leur chambre avec 
leur professeur de frangais. 

Etudient-ils le frangais? 

Oui; ils l’etudient. Vous savez 
que nous avons l’intention 
d’aller bientot a Paris, et ils 
desirent parler tres bien fran¬ 
gais avant que nous y allions. 

Font-ils beaucoup de progres? 

Oui; ils en font beaucoup. Le 
professeur dit que Jean peut 
tres bien parler frangais main- 
tenant. Lucie ne parle pas 
aussi bien que Jean, parce 
qu’elle n’etudie pas autant que 
lui. Vous n’etudiez pas de 
langues etrangeres, n’est-ce pas? 

Non; je suis fache de dire que je 
n’en etudie pas. Mais j’ai l’in¬ 
tention d’etudier le frangais 
bientot maintenant, parce qu’il 
me tarde d’aller en France. M. 
Reed est le professeur de fran¬ 
gais, n’est-ce pas? 

Oui; il l’est. C’est un tres bon 
maitre, et il a beaucoup d’eleves 
parce qu’il parle si bien frangais 
et qu’il sait (comment) en- 
seigner. 

Voici Jean et Lucie avec leur pro¬ 
fesseur. Bonjour, Jean. Bon¬ 
jour, Lucie. 

Non, non, Edouard; pas “Good 
morning.’’ Vous devez dire 
“Bonjour.’’ 

Mais, mon cher ami, je ne peux 
pas, je ne parle pas frangais. 

Oh! il faut que vous le disiez. 

Eh bien! “Bonjour.’’ Mainte¬ 
nant, Mme. Warren, que je 
parle un peu frangais, puis-je 
demander de permettre a Jean 
et a Lucie de faire une prome¬ 
nade a pied avec moi. 



18 


ANGLAIS 


3 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION—(Continuees) 


Yes; they may go with you, but 
they must return before dinner. 

O, thank you, mother; we are so 

glad to go with Edward! 

* 

* * 

Do you see the gentleman, there? 

Yes; he is Mr. Reed, is he not? 

O, no; his name is Mr. Jones; he 
lives in St. Petersburg, but is 
always in Paris in winter. He 
has a daughter, Miss Florence. 
She studies painting here, and 
the professor says that she has 
much talent for it. 

I know her very well. She studies 
English with my professor, Mr. 
Smith, and I often see her there. 

Does she speak English well? 

O, yes; she speaks it very well. 
She likes to learn languages, 
and she speaks Russian, French, 
German, and English very well, 
and also a little Spanish. 

John, let us go into the garden. It 
is warm and the weather is fine. 

I am sorry I cannot go just now. 
Mother wishes me to study my 
Spanish lesson. I must study 
it before dinner. But Edward 
is in his room. He has no les¬ 
son to study; he may play with 
you. 

* 

* * 

Where are you, Edward? 

Here I am, in my room. 

Let us go into the garden; it is 
warm, and the weather is fine. 

Do you wish to play with me? 

Gladly; let us go. Where is John? 
Ask him to play with us. 


Oui; je leur permets d’aller avec 
vous, mais il faut qu’ils revien- 
nent avant le diner. 

Oh! merci, maman; nous sommes 

contents d’aller avec Edouard! 

* 

* * 

Voyez-vous ce monsieur, la? 

Oui; c’est M. Reed, n’est-ce pas? 

Oh! non; il s’appelle M. Jones; il 
demeure a St. Petersbourg, mais 
il est toujours a Paris en hiver. 
Il a une fille, Mile. Florence. 
Elle etudie la peinture ici, et le 
professeur dit qu’elle a beau- 
coup de talent. 

Je la connais tres bien. Elle etu¬ 
die 1’anglais avec mon profes¬ 
seur, M. Smith, et je la vois 
souvent chez lui. 

Parle-t-elle bien anglais? 

Oh! oui; elle le parle tres bien. 
Elle aime a apprendre les lan- 
gues etrangeres, et elle parle tres 
bien russe, frangais, allemand et 
anglais, et aussi un peu espa- 
gnol. 

Jean, allons dans lejardin. Il fait 
chaud, et le temps est beau. 

Je suis f&che de ne pas pouvoir y 
aller a present. Maman veut 
que j’etudie ma legon d’espa- 
gnol. Je d'ois l’etudier avant le 
diner. Mais Edouard est dans 
sa chambre; il n’a pas de legon a 

etudier; il peut jouer avec vous. 

* 

* * 

Ou etes-vous, Edouard? 

Me voici, dans ma chambre. 

Allons dans le jardin; il fait chaud, 
et le temps est beau. 

Desirez-vous jouer avec moi? 

Volontiers; allons. Ou est Jean? 
Demandez-lui de jouer avec 
nous. 



3 


CINQUIEME LEQON 


19 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION — (Confirmees) 


He cannot play just now, and he 
is very sorry for it. He has his 
Spanish lesson to study; his 
mother wishes him to have it 

ready before dinner. 

* 

* * 

Mother, 1 know my Spanish les¬ 
son. May I ask you to permit 
me to go into the garden? Ed¬ 
ward and Smith are there. I 
wish to play with them. 

Yes, dear; you may go, but do 
not remain too long; you must 
be here for dinner. 

Yes, mother. 


II ne peut pas jouer a present, et 
il en est bien fache. II a sa 
legon d’espagnol a etudier; sa 
mere veut qu’il l’ait prete avant 
le diner. 

* 

* * 

Maman, je sais ma legon d’espa¬ 
gnol. Puis-je vous demander 
la permission d’aller dans le 
jardin? Edouard et Smith sont 
la. Je desire jouer avec eux. 

Oui, mon cher; vous pouvez y 
aller, mais ne restez pas trop 
longtemps; vous devez etre ici 
pour le diner. 

Oui, maman. 


EXERCICE PHONOGRAPHIQITE 

1. May I ask you to play in the garden with John? 

2. Yes; you may play with him there. 

3. John is very sorry to say that he cannot play with you 
just now, Lucy; he must finish his French lesson; he wishes 
to have it ready before dinner. 

4. Does John study French? 

5. O, yes, Lucy; he studies it with Mr. Reed, the French 
professor, and he progresses very well indeed. 

6. I am very glad of it. I intend to study French also 
very soon. 

7. Do you not study music, Lucy? 

8. Yes, sir; I study it with Professor Smith. He says 
that I attain splendid results and that I have much talent 
for it. 

9. Professor Smith plays the violin, does he not? 

10. Yes; he plays the violin very well, and with much 
feeling. He is also a very good teacher, and his pupils 
make very good progress with him. 

11. Why does John study French? 

12. He studies it because he intends to go to Paris very 
soon, and he tries to speak French well. 




20 


ANGLAIS 


§3 


13. Can you count in English? 

14. O, yes, madam; very well, from one to twenty. 

15. Read in English: 15, 14, 2, 19, 6, 5, 17, 8, 20, 1, 4, 
18, 3, 16, 10, 7, 11, 9, 13, 12. 

16. I take lessons of Mr. Warren in painting and music; 
my professor says that I have much talent for them. 


§3 


SIXIEME LECON 


21 


SIXIEME LECON 


CYLINDRE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 


VOCABTJXA1RE 


I. c. s. 

English Record No. 6 

acquainted, connu, familier 
after, apres 
afternoon, apres-midi 
any one, quelqu'un 
at, <X 

the bank, la banque 
to believe, croire 
between, entre 
the business, les affaires 
the cashier, le caissier 
the city, la ville 
to come, venir 
to come in, entrer 
the confidence, la confiance 
constantly, constamment 
continually, continuellement 
the day, le jour 
to doubt, douter 
eighty, quatre-vingts 
to enter, entrer 
to expect, attendre 
fast, vite 

the father, lepere 

fifty, cinquante 

forty, quarante 

the furniture, les meubles 

the future, Vavenir 

George, Georges 


i. c. s. 

Cylindre d'Anglais No. 6 

the goods, les marchandises 

to grow, croitre 

half, demi 

Hallo! Alio 

Henry, Henri 

him, lui 

hundred, cent 

to identify, etablir Videntite 

the industry, /’ Industrie 

into, dans 

to invest, placer (des capi- 
taux) 

the investment, le place¬ 
ment 

to know, connaitre 

known, connu 

main, important 

men, pluriel de man, homme 

million, million 

the minute, la minute 

to need, avoir besoin 

ninety, quatre-vingt-dix 

to open, ouvrir 

our, notre 

the partnership, Vassocia- 
tion 

past, passe, apres 
plenty, beaucoup , bien 





22 


ANGLAIS 


YOCABULAIRE—(Continue) 


the present, le present 

pretty, jolt 

the quarter, le quart 

right, raison 

real estate, immeubles 

seventy, soixante-dix 

sixty, soixante 

to start, partir , commencer 

the store, le magasin 

the street, la rue 

the success, le succes 


then, alors 
thirty, trente 
thousand, mille 
the time, le temps 
the town, la ville 
the venture, Ventreprise 
well! eh bien! 
what, quel 
William, Guillaume 
with, avec 


PHRASES ET 

Good afternoon , 1 William. 

Hallo! How are you, George? 

I am pretty 2 well, thank you. 
Where are you going ? 3 

I am going to 4 the bank. Are 
you not coming with me? 

I am sorry; I cannot. I am 
expecting my brother. 

At what time do you expect 
him? 

Between a quarter after and 
half-past three . 6 

O, you have plenty of time. 
It is only twenty minutes 
of three now. 

Well! Let us go. 

*** 

Is not Henry 6 to open a store 
on Main street? 

Yes; he is entering into part¬ 
nership with Mr. Hull. 
They are expecting their 


CONVERSATION 

Bonjour, Guillaume. 

Alio! Comment allez-vous, 
Georges? 

Je vais assez bien, merci. 
Oh allez-vous? 

Je vais a la banque. Ne 
venez-vous pas avec moi? 

Je suis bien fachd de ne pas 
pouvoir y aller. J’attends 
mon frere. 

A quelle heure l’attendez- 
vous? 

Entre trois heures et quart, 
et trois heures et demie. 

Oh! Vous avez le temps; 
il n’est que trois heures 
moins vingt maintenant. 

Eh bien! allons! 

* 

* * 

Henri ne va-t-il pas ouvrir un 
magasin sur la Grande Rue? 

Oui; il s’est associe avec M. 
Hull (Il est entrd en asso¬ 
ciation) Ils attendent leurs 





§3 


SIXIEME LEQON 


23 


PHRASES ET. CONVERSATION—(Continuees) 


goods from day to day. I 
do not doubt the success of 
their venture; they are 
good business men 7 and 
have many friends. 

We need a good furniture 
store. The town is grow¬ 
ing very fast, and we are 
continually starting new 
industries. 

You are right. 8 I* also have 
great confidence in the 
future of our city. Father 
is constantly speaking 
about it. He is investing 
in real estate now. 

I believe it is a splendid in¬ 
vestment at the present 
time. 

Here is 11 the bank. 

Are you known at the bank? 

No; do you know any one 
there? 

I am well acquainted with the 
cashier. 

Come in, then, and identify 
me. 

*** 

Ten, twenty, thirty, forty, 
fifty, sixty, seventy, eighty, 
ninety, hundred, thousand, 
million. 1 * 


marehandises de jour en 
jour. Je n’ai pas de doute 
au sujet du succes de leur 
entreprise; ils sonthommes 
d’affaires, et ils ont beau- 
coup d’amis. 

Nous avons besoin d’un bon 
magasin de meubles. La 
ville grandit trbs vite, et 
de nouvelles industries s’y 
6tablissent continuelle- 
ment. 

Vous avez raison. Moi aussi, 
j’ai une grande confiance 
dans l’avenir de notre ville. 
Mon pere en parle con- 
stamment. II place ses 
capitaux dans l’achat de 
proprietes maintenant. 

Je crois que c’est un splen- 
dide placement en ce mo¬ 
ment (au temps present). 

Voici la ban que. 

Vous connait-on (Etes-vous 
connu) a la banque? 

Non; connaissez-vous quel- 
qu’un? 

Je connais bien le caissier. 

Entrez alors, et faites con- 

naitre mon identity. 

* 

* * 

Dix, vingt, trente, quarante, 
cinquante, soixante, soi- 
xarite-dix, quatre-vingts, 
quatre-vingt-dix, cent, mil- 
le, million. 



24 


ANGLAIS 


3 


REMARQUES 

1. Le mot bonjour se traduit de trois manieres en anglais; 
par good day , qui est la traduction litterale, et qui s’emploie 
gdn^ralement en prenant congd de quelqu’un pendant le 
jour; par good morning (litteralement bon matin ) et par good 
afternoon (litteralement bon apres-midi) lorsqu’on salue une 
personne. 

2. Le mot pretty , joli, place devant well , bien, se traduit 
par assez. 

This house is very pretty, is it not?—Yes; it is very pretty. Cette 
maison est Ms jo lie, n' est-ce-pasf — Oui; elle est Ms jolie. 

How are you? —I am pretty well, thank you. Comment allez-vous?— 
Je vais assez bien, merci. 

3. Cette legon a pour but d’introduire une forme du 
present particuliere a la langue anglaise. Elle se compose 
du present du verbe to be , etre, et du participe present du 
verbe que l’on conjugue. Ce participe present est facile a 
former. II suffit d’ajouter la terminaison ing a l’infinitif du 
verbe sans la preposition to. Ainsi, to finish , finir, fait fin¬ 
ishing , finissant; to go, aller, devient going, allant; to enter, 
entrer, nous donne entering, entrant, etc. En ajoutant ce 
participe present au verbe to be etre, nous avons, I am going, 
je vais, (litteralement, je suis allant); I am entering, j’entre 
(litteralement, je suis entrant); I am finishing, je finis (lit¬ 
teralement, je suis. finissant). 

Ces deux formes du present, comme / finish, et I am fin¬ 
ishing ne s’emploient pas indifferemment. 

La premiere, I finish exprime une action ouun etat habituel 
et reitere; la seconde I am finishing indique une action qui 
dure, qui se prolonge, qui n’est pas terminee au moment oil 
l’on parle. I am finishing veut done dire, Je finis, je finis en 
ce moment, je suis en train de finir. Cette forme du present 
est appel6e forme progressive en anglais; on veut dire par 
lk que l’action est en progres au moment oil l’on parle. 

Les quatre formes du present progressif du verbe to go, 
aller, peuvent etre etudiees dans le modele suivant: 


3 


SIXIEME LEQON 


25 


to go, aller 
Present Progressif 
Affirmatif 


I am going, 

He 1 

She [is going, 

It J 

We 1 

Yon are going, 
They J 

Neg at if 

I am not going, 

He 1 

She >is not going, 

It J 
We 1 

Yon are not going, 
They] 


Je vais 


II 

Elle 


■ va 


Nous allons 
Vous allez 
Ils 


Elies 


> vont 


Je ne vais pas 

Ell^\ ne va P as 

Nous n'allons pas 
Vous n'allez pas 

ElleA nemntpas 


Interrogatif- Affirmatif 


Am I going? 

[he 1 

Isl she > going? 

[it J 

f we ] 

Are 1 yon > going ? 
[they] 


Vais-je 

Va-t\ U l 9 
1 elles ? 

A llons-nous ? 
Allez-vous? 
fils? 


Vont- 


1 elles ? 


Interrogate-Negatif 

Am I not going? Ne vais-je pas? 


[he | 

Isl she >not going? 

[it J 


Ne va-t- 


f il 
1 elle 


! > Nallons-nous pas? 

we I r 

. 0 Nallez-vous pas? 

yon [not going? ^ 

they J lx. 


Ne vont- 


1 elles 


| pas ? 


4. Les deux propositions to et at en anglais se 
sent generalement par la preposition d, en frangais. 


tradui- 
II est 


26 


ANGLAIS 


3 


important de faire la difference entre les deux. To exprime 
un mouvement, tandis que at indique le repos. 

I am going to Paris, Je vais h Paris. 

He is at home, It est chez lui. 

5. Pour exprimer les heures en anglais, on se sert du 
mot o'clock (prononcez, o-klok ) qui est une abreviation de on 
the clock , sur l’horloge, pour traduire le mot heure en fran- 
qais. Cependant on n’exprime generalement le mot o'clock 
que si on a un nombre exact d’heures; avec des minutes, un 
quart ou une demi -heure, on le supprime. 

It is three o’clock, It est trois heures. 

It is twelve o’clock, II est midi , minuit. 

Pour designer la premiere moitie de l’heure, on se sert du 
mot past , pass6, ou after, apres, que l’on place apres la frac¬ 
tion de Pheure, et le nombre entier s’exprime le dernier. 

It is five minutes past, ou, after three, It est trois heures cinq. 

It is a quarter past, ou after two, It est deux lieu-res et quart. 

Quand on veut designer la seconde moitie de l’heure, on 
emploie of, ou to apres la fraction, et le nombre entier 
s’exprime aussi le dernier. 

It is a quarter of, ou to six, It est six heures moins un quart. 

It is twenty minutes of, ou to ten, It est dix heures moins vingt. 

Pour designer Pheure des chemins de fer, cependant, on 
donne d’abord le nombre d’heures, et on le fait suivre du 
nombre de minutes, sans employer les mots half et quarter. 

Six —fifteen, six—thirty, six —forty-five, six —fifty, litteralement Six 
heures quinze, six heures trente , six heures quarante-cinq , six heures 
cinquante. 

Le mot heure ne se traduit par o'clock que lorsqu’il s’agit 
du temps designe par l’horloge. Dans les autres cas, on 
emploie hour (prononcez, a-our). 

I am expecting my brother in three hours, J'attends mon frire dans 
trois heures. 

I have two hours yet to wait, J’ai encore deux heures a attendre. 


3 


SIXI&ME LEQON 


27 


6. Avec la forme progressive interrogative, si le sujet du 
verbe est un nom, la phrase commence avec l’auxiliare to be , 
et le sujet est place entre cet auxiliaire et le participe 
present lorsque la phrase est affimative. 

Is John going to the bank? Jean va-t-il a la banque? 

Are John and Lucy studying their lesson? Jean et Lucie etudient-iis 
leur leqon? 

Si la phrase est negative, l’auxiliaire est immediatement 
suivi de la negation not , plac6e avant le nom sujet. 

Is not John going to the bank? Jean ne va-t-il pas a la banque? 

Are not John and Lucy studying their lesson? Jean et Lucie n'Hu- 
dient-ils pas leur leqon ? 

7. Nous appelons encore votre attention sur une forme 
particuliere a la langue anglaise, qui consiste a employer un 
nom adjectivement, alors qu’en frangais nous employons le 
nom avec la preposition de , pour exprimer le complement 
determinatif d’un nom. Ce determinatif, dtant un veritable 
adjectif en anglais, precede toujours le nom. 

a business man, un homme d’affaires 

a furniture store, un magasin de meubles 

8. Le mot right , raison, dtant un adjectif en anglais, 
s’emploie avec le verbe to be , et non avec avoir comme en 
frangais. 

You are right, Vous avez raison. 

He is always right, II a toujours raison. 

9. Rappelez-vous qu’en anglais nous ne pouvons jamais 
employer comme en frangais les pronoms personnels dis- 
jonctifs lorsqu’ils sont sujets d’un verbe. On ne peut pas 
non plus rep^ter le pronom deux fois devant le verbe. 

I also have many friends, Moi aussi, fai beaucoup d’atnis. 

They also live in Paris, Eux aussi demeurent a Paris. 

10. L’adjectif demonstrate en anglais ne s’accorde pas 
avec le nom qu’il determine, comme c’est le cas en frangais 
This traduit done les differentes formes ce , cet et cette. 

La construction frangaise avec les adverbes ci et Ih places 
apres le nom est aussi differente en anglais. Cette langue 


28 ANGLAIS §3 

emploie deux formes: this , pour designer les objets placds 
pres de nous, et that pour les objets dloignes. 

this book, ce livre-ci 

this happy boy, cet heureux gargon-ci 

this table, cette table-ci 

that book, ce livre-lct 

that happy boy, cet heureux gargon-lct 

that table, cette table-let 

Enfin; this et that lorsqu’ils ne precedent pas un nom se 
traduisent respectivement par ceci et cela\ souvent aussi par 
ce en frangais. 

That is beautiful! Cela est beau! 

This is pretty! Ceci est joli! 

That is right! C’est juste! 

11. Notre verbe impersonnel il y a , se traduit par l’ad- 
verbe there , la, suivi du verbe to be au singulier ou au pluriel, 
selon que le nom qui suit est singulier ou pluriel. 

There are eight rooms in my house, II y a huit chambres dans ma 
maison. 

There is no book on the table, II n’y a pas de livre sur la table. 

Les deux mots void et voilct se traduisent en anglais de la 
maniere suivante: 

Void devient here' is au singulier, et here are au pluriel; 
voilct se traduit par there is au singulier, et par there are au 
pluriel. 

Here is my brother John, Void mon frlre Jean. 

■. Here are my French books, Void mes livres frangais. 

There is the cashier of the bank, Voilct le caissier de la banque. 
There are your cousins, Voilct vos cousins. 

12. Les nombres, bien plus que les mots, offrent une 
meilleure occasion d’apprendre a penser dans une langue 
etrangere. Ecrivez souvent des nombres en chiffres; pro- 
noncez-les en laissant entierement de cote les noms frangais. 

Les nombres sont formes en anglais a peu pres de la 
meme maniere qu’en frangais. Les nombres de 1 a 9 servent 
a former les autres de 20 a 30, de 30 a 40, etc. L’article 


§3 SIXIEME LECON 29 

indefini a ou le mot one s’emploie avec les poids et mesures 
devant hundred et thousand, et le mot one avec les dates 
devant les memes mots. La conjonction and s’emploie 
aussi entre le nombre des centaines et celui des unites: 
three hundred and seventy-two. 

Vous devez compter frequemment de 1 a 100 en anglais, 
jusqu’a ce que vous puissiez le faire couramment et sans 
hesitation. 


1, one 

2, two 

3, three 

4, four 

5, five 

6, six 

7, seven 

8, eight 

9, nine 

10, ten 

11, eleven 

12, twelve 

13, thirteen 

14, fourteen 

15, fifteen 

16, sixteen 

17, seventeen 

18, eighteen 

19, nineteen 

20, twenty 

21, twenty-one 

22, twenty-two 

23, twenty-three 

24, twenty-four 

25, twenty-five 

26, twenty-six 

27, twenty-seven 

28, twenty-eight 

29, twenty-nine 

30, thirty 

31, thirty-one 

32, thirty-two 

33, thirty-three 

40, forty 

41, forty-one 


42, forty-two 

50, fifty 

51, fifty-one 

52, fifty-two 

60, sixty 

61, sixty-one 

65, sixty-five 

67, sixty-seven 

70, seventy 

71, seve'nty-one 

72, seventy-two 

80, eighty 

88, eighty-eight 

89, eighty-nine 

90, ninety 

91, ninety-one 

92, ninety-two 

100, one hundred 

200, two hundred 

101, one hundred and one 

542, five hundred and forty-two 

1,006, one thousand and six 

2,735, two thousand seven hun¬ 
dred and thirty-five 

3.745, three thousand seven hun¬ 
dred and forty-five 

23.745, twenty-three thousand 
seven hundred and forty-five 

623.745, six hundred and twenty- 
three thousand seven hundred 
and forty-five 

8.623.745, eight million six hun¬ 
dred and twenty-three thou¬ 
sand seven hundred and forty- 
five 


30 


ANGLAIS 


3 


Les nombres peuvent etre appris plus facilement si on les 
dispose horizontalement, de la maniere suivante, car les dif¬ 
ferences entre les noms des unites et des dizaines apparais- 
sent d’une fagon plus frappante: 


1 , 

10, 

100, 

1000, 


2, 

12, 

20, 

22, 

222 

3, 

13, 

30, 

33, 

333 

4, 

14, 

40, 

44, 

444 

5, 

15, 

50, 

55, 

555 

6, 

16, 

60, 

66, 

666 

7, 

17, 

70, 

77, 

777 

8, 

18, 

80, 

88, 

888 

9, 

19, 

90, 

99, 

999 

les 

nombres 

suivants: 

35; 635; 

2,635; 


Lisez les nombres suivants: 35; 635; 2,635; 872,635; 
9,872,635; 47; 347; 6,347; 56,347; 456,347; 5,456,347; 79; 
479; 9,479; 69,479; 569,479; 8,569,479. 


EXERCICE ORAL 
I am living in London just now. 

Je demeure a Londres a present. 

I am asking Jean to come to the bank with me. 

I am counting my books. 

I am coming to see you. 

I am expecting your uncle. 

I am finishing my French lesson. 

I am going to see my brother. 

John is growing very fast. 

Jean grandit tres vite. 

He is investing in real estate. 

Mr. Reed is learning Spanish. 

William is opening a store on Main street 
He is reading French now. 

She is exx>ecting you from day to day. 

Elle vous attend de jour en jour. 

She is speaking about (de) you from day to day. 

She is studying her German lesson with her teacher. 
She is teaching music. 



3 SIXIEME LEQON 

She is writing to her mother in Paris. 

We are walking too fast. 

Nous mar chons drop vite. 

We are wishing you a pleasant time. 

We are living with our uncle just now. 

We are writing our letters. 

We are coming to see you. 

You are counting your books. 

Vous comptez vos livres. 

You are walking in the garden. 

You are going to the bank. 

You are teaching languages. 

You are starting late. 

They are playing in the garden with their 
friends. 

Ils jouent dans le jardtn avec leurs amis. 

They are painting in their room. 

They are coming in. 

They are expecting relatives from London. 

They are learning their lessons well. 

I am not living in London just now. 

Je ne demeure pas cl Londres cl present. 

I am not asking Jean to come to the bank with me. 

I am not counting my books. 

I am not coming to see you. 

I am not expecting your uncle. 

I am not finishing my French lesson. 

I am not going to see my brother. 

John is not growing very fast. 

Jean ne graudit pas tr&s vite. 

He is not investing in real estate. 

Mr. Reed is not learning Spanish. 

William is not opening a store on Main street. 

He is not reading French now. 

She is not expecting you from day to day. 

Elle ne vous attend pas de jour en jour , 


31 


32 


ANGLAIS 


§3 


She is not speaking about (de) you from day to day. 

She is not studying her German lesson with her teacher. 
She is not teaching music. 

She is not writing to her mother in Paris. 

We are not walking too fast. 

Nous ne marchons pas trop vite. 

We are not wishing you a pleasant time. 

We are not living with our uncle just now. 

We are not writing our letters. 

We are not coming to see you. 

Yon are not counting your books. 

Vous ne comptez pas vos livres. 

You are not walking in the garden. 

You are not going to the bank. 

You are not teaching languages. 

You are not starting late. 

Tliey are not playing in tbe garden with 
their fi'iends. 

Ils ne jouent pas dans le jardin avec leurs amis. 

They are not painting in their room. 

They are not coming in. 

They are not expecting relatives from London. 

They are not learning their lessons well. 

Where are you going, John?—I am going to 
see my friends. 

Oil allez-vous, Jean t—Je vais voir mes amis. 

Are you expecting your relatives from London? —Yes; I 
am expecting them. —Yes; I am. 

What language are you studing? —I am studying French 
now. 

Are you finishing your English lesson? —Yes; I am finish¬ 
ing it.—Yes; lam. 

Are you progressing well in your studies? —Yes; I am 
progressing very well. —Yes; I am.. 

Are you living with your uncle now? —Yes; I am living 
with him.—Yes; I am. 


§3 


SIXIEME LEQON 


33 


Is lie playing with his cousins? —Yes; he is 
playing with them in the garden-Yes; 
he is. 

Joue-t-il avec ses cousines ? — Oui; il joue avec elles dans 
le jardin. 

Is he speaking to you? —Yes; he is speaking to me. —Yes; 
he is. 

Is he going to the bank? —Yes; he is going there. —Yes; 
he is. 

Is Mr. Warren taking us home? —Yes; he is taking us 
home. —Yes; he is. 

Is your uncle starting this new industry? —Yes; he is start¬ 
ing it. —Yes; he is. 

Is the professor teaching a lesson now?—Yes; he is teach¬ 
ing Edward. 

Is Miss Reed studying her French lesson? — 

Yes; she is studying it.—Yes; she is. 

Mile. Reed Hudie-t-elle sa lefon de frangais? — Oui; elle 
VUudie. 

Is Mrs. Smith teaching her? —Yes; she is teaching her.— 
Yes; she is. 

Is she coming to see you? —Yes; she is coming to see me. 
—Yes: she is. 

Is she trying to learn English? —Yes; she is trying to learn 
it?—Yes; she is. 

Is your cousin writing a letter now? —Yes; she is writing 
a letter.—Yes; she is. 

Am I reading French well?—Yes; you are 
reading it very well. — Yes; you are. 

Est-ce que je Its bien le franqais? — Oui; vous le lisez trbs 
bien. 

Am I coming too late? —Yes; you are coming too late.— 
Yes; you are. 

Am I writing too fast? —Yes; you are writing too fast.— 
Yes; you are. 

Am I trying to do well? —Yes; you are trying to do well. 
—Yes; you are. 


34 


ANGLAIS 


3 


Am I walking too fast? —Yes; you are walking too fast.— 
Yes; you are. 

Are you expecting a lettex* from your 
parents?-Yes; we are expecting a lettei* 
from them. —Yes; we are. 

Attendez-vous une lettre de vos parents? — Oui; nous en 
attendons une. 

Are you studying your lesson? —Yes; we are studying it. 

— Yes; we are. 

Are you going to the garden? —Yes; we are going there. 

— Yes; we are. 

Are you painting? Yes; we are painting. —Yes; we are. 

Are you returning home? —Yes; we are returning home.— 
Yes; we are. 

Are they asking you to read in Frencli?- 
Yes; they ai'e asking me to i*eacl in French. 
—Yes; they ai*e. 

Vons deniandent-ils de lire en frangais? — Oui; its me 
demandent de lire en frangais. 

Are they speaking to me? —Yes; they are speaking to you. 

— Yes; they are. 

Are they walking too fast for you? —Yes; they are walk¬ 
ing too fast for me. —Yes; they are. 

Are they reading that letter? —Yes; they are reading it.— 
Yes; they are. 

Are Mr. and Mrs. Smith remaining in Paris this winter? — 

— Yes; they are remaining there in winter.— Yes; they are. 

Are you not expecting youi* i*elatives fi*om 
London? —No; I am not expecting them. — 

No; I am not. 

A 1 attendez-vous pas vos parents de Londres? — Non; je ne 
les attends pas. 

Are you not studying French now? —No; I am not study¬ 
ing it. —No; I am not. 

Are you not finishing your English lesson? —No; I am not 
finishing it. —No; I am not. 

Are you not progressing well in your lessons? —No; I am 
not progressing very well. —No; I am not. 


§3 


SIXI^ME LECON 


35 


Are you not living with your uncle now? —No; I am not 
living with him now. —No; I am not. 

Is lie not playing with his cousins?—No; he 
is not playing with them. —No; he is not. 

Ne joue-t-il pas avec ses cousines?—Non; il ne jone pas 
avec elles. 

Is he not speaking to you? —No; he is not speaking to 
me. —No; he is not. 

Is he not going to the bank? —No; he is not going there. 

— No; he is not. 

Is he not taking us home? —No; he is not taking us home. 

— No; he is not. 

Is he not starting this new industry? —No; he is not start¬ 
ing it. —No; he is not. 

Is she not studying her French lesson?-No; 
she is not studying it.—No; she is not. 

N’etudie-t-elle pas sa legon de frangais?—Non; elle ne 
VUadie pas. 

Is she not teaching her? —No; she is not teaching her.— 
No; she is not. 

Is she not coming to see you? —No; she is not coming to 
see me. —No; she is not. 

Is she not trying to learn French? —No; she is not trying 
to learn it. —No; she is not. 

Is she not writing a letter now? —No; she is not writing a 
letter.— No; she is not. 

Am I not reading French well?—No; you are 
not reading it very well. — No; you are not. 

Est-ce que je ne lis pas bien le frangais? — Non; vous ne le 
lisezpas trbs bien. 

Am I not coming too late? —No; you are not coming too 
late. —No; you are not. 

Am I not writing too fast? —No; you are not writing too 
fast. —No; you are not. 

Am I not trying to do well? —No; you are not trying to do 
well.— No; you are not. 

Am I not walking too fast? —No; you are not walking too 
fast.— No; you are not. 


36 


ANGLAIS 


§3 


Are you not expecting a letter from your 
parents?—No; we are not expecting a 
letter from them. —No; we are not. 

N'attendez-vous pas une lettre de vos parents?—Non; nous 
n'en attendons pas. 

Are you not studying your lesson? —No; we are not study¬ 
ing it, —No; we are not. 

Are you not going to the garden? —No; we are not going 
there. —No; we are not. 

Are you not painting? —No; we are not painting. —No; we 
are not. 

Are you not returning home? —No; we are not returning 
home. —No; we are not. 

Are they not asking you to read in French?— 

No; they are not asking me to read in 
French.—No; they are not. 

Ne vous demandent-ils pas de lire en frangais f—Non; ils 
ne me demandent pas de lire en frangais. 

Are they not speaking to me? —No; they are not speaking 
to you. —No; they are not. 

Are they not walking too fast for you? —No; they are not 
walking too fast for me. —No; they are not. 

Are they not reading that letter? —No; they are not read¬ 
ing it. —No; they are not. 

Are they not remaining in Paris in winter? —No; they are 
not remaining in Paris in winter.— No; they are not. 

Is not Mr. Reed learning German now?—No; 
he is not learning German; he is learning 
English. 

M. Reed n'apprend-il pas Vallemand maintenant? — Non; 
il n'apprendpas Vallemand; il apprend Vanglais. 

Is not Mr. Smith living in Paris? —No; he is not living 
there now; he is living in London. 

Is not Mrs. Smith speaking French well?—Yes; she is 
speaking it very well indeed. 

Are not Edward and William playing in the garden?—No; 
they are not playing now; they are studying their Spanish 
lesson. 


3 


SIXIEME LECON 


37 


Are not Lucy and Miss Smith progressing very well? — 
Yes; they are progressing very well indeed. 

What time is it?—It is twelve o’clock. 

Quelle heure est-il?—Il est midi , minuit. 

What time is it? —It is five minutes after three. 

What time is it? —It is ten minutes after three. 

What time is it? —It is a quarter after three. 

What time is it?—It is twenty minutes after three. 

What time is it? —It is twenty-five minutes after three. 
What time is it? —It is half past three. 

What time is it? —It is twenty-five minutes of four. 

What time is it? —It is twenty minutes of four. 

What time is it? —It is a quarter of four. 

What time is it? —It is ten minutes of four. 

What time is it? —It is five minutes of four. 

What time is it? —It is four o’clock. 

Read in English: 12, 612, 2,612, 42,612, 842,612, 3,842,612; 
75, 475, 9,475, 89,475, 389,475, 7,389,475; 48, 548, 6,548, 
16,548, 716,548, 2,716,548; 91, 391, 4,391, 44,391, 644,381, 
5,644,391. _ 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


Good afternoon, William. What 
are you doing? 

Good afternoon, Edward. I am 
studying my English lesson. 

O, you study English! And how 
do you like it? 

I like it very much indeed. My 
teacher says that I am progress¬ 
ing very well. I know it, be¬ 
cause I can speak English with 
my friends from London. 

Well, I am very glad of it. Mr. 
Smith is your English teacher 
is he not? 

Yes; he is; he is from London, 
and speaks English very well. 


Bonjour, Guillaume. Que faites- 
vous? 

Bonjour, Edouard. J’etudie ma 
leqon d’anglais. 

Oh! vous etudiez 1’anglais! Et 
comment l’aimez-vous? 

Je l’aime vraiment beaucoup. 
Mon maitre dit que je fais 
beaucoup de progres. Je le 
sais, parce que je puis parler 
anglais avec mes amis de Lon- 
dres. 

Eh bien! J’en suis bien content. 
M. Smith est votre professeur 
d’anglais, n’est-ce pas? 

Oui; c’est mon professeur; il est 
de Londres et parle tres bien 
anglais. 






38 ANGLAIS §3 

REVUE ET CONVERSATION — (Continuees) 


Can you write in English now? 

O, yes; I can speak, read, and 
write English very well. 

Do you always speak English with 
the professor? 

Yes; I always speak English with 
him. 

Do you expect to live in London 
soon? 

Yes; my parents and I expect to 
live there in winter. 

Here is your cousin Lucy. Good 
afternoon, Lucy. How are you? 

I am very well, thank you, Ed¬ 
ward. Are you studying Eng¬ 
lish with cousin William? 

No, Lucy; I am sorry to say I am 

' not. 

William, your mother is asking 
for you. 

Very well, Lucy. I am going to 
see her. 

* 

* * 

Mother wishes me to take a walk 
before dinner. Are you coming 
with me? 

What time is it? 

It is five minutes of five now. 

Well! I have one hour yet before 
dinner. I am going with you. 

Where are we going? 

Let us go to see the new store 
Henry is opening on Main 
Street. 

Are his goods there? 

Not yet, but he is expecting them 
from day to day. 

He has a beautiful store, has he 
not? 


Pouvez-vous ecrire en anglais 
maintenant? 

Oh! oui; je puis parler, lire et 
ecrire tres bien en anglais. 

Parlez-vous toujours anglais avec 
le professeur? 

Oui; jeparle toujours anglais avec 
lui. 

Esperez-vous bientot demeurer a 
Londres? 

Oui; mes parents et moi esperons 
y demeurer en hiver. 

Voici votre cousine Lucie. Bon- 
jour Lucie. Comment vous por- 
tez-vous? 

Je me porte tres bien, je vous re- 
mercie, Edouard. Etudiez-vous 
V anglais avec mon cousin Guil¬ 
laume? 

Non, Lucie; je suis fache de dire 
que je ne Petudie pas. 

Guillaume, votre mere vous . de- 
mande. 

Tres bien, Lucie. Je vais la voir. 
* 

* * 

Maman desire que je me promene 
avant le diner. Venez-vous avec 
moi? 

Quelle heure est-il? 

II est cinq heures moins cinq main- 
tenant. 

Eh bien! J’ai encore une heure 
avant le diner. Je vais avec 
vous. 

Ou allons-nous? 

Allons voir le nouveau magasin 
que Henri ouvre sur la Grande 
Rue. 

Ses marchandises sont-elles la? 

Pas encore, mais il les attend tous 
les jours. 

II a un beau magasin, n’est-ce 
pas? 



§3 


SIXIEME LECON 


39 


REYUE ET CONVERSATION - (Continuees) 


Yes; and a very large one too. I 
do not doubt the success of his 
venture. Our city is growing 
very fast, and we need a good 
furniture store. 

You are right. I also have confi¬ 
dence in his venture. Henry is 
a good business man, and he 
has many friends. 

Here is the store, and our friend 
Henry. Let us enter. 

Good afternoon, Henry. My friend 
and I are coming to wish you 
success in your new venture. 

I am very glad to see you, and I 
thank you very much for your 
kind wishes. 

Our city is beautiful; it is not very 
large yet, but it is growing very 
fast. New industries are start¬ 
ing continually, and new stores 
are opening. Real estate in our 
town is indeed a good invest¬ 
ment. We have one bank, many 
large stores on Main Street, and 
beautiful homes. I have much 
confidence in the future of our 
city. 

* 

* * 

I am studying French, now, be¬ 
cause I expect to go to France 
very soon. My uncle and cous¬ 
ins are there. They live near 
Paris. I intend to live with 
them, and to remain there until 
winter. I am studying very 
much, and my teacher says that 
I am progressing very well. He 
is coming now. I am glad to 


Oui; et avec cela tres grand. Je 
n’ai aucun doute au sujet du 
succes de son entreprise. Notre 
ville grandit tres vite, et nous 
avons besoin d’un bon magasin 
de meubles. 

Vous avez raison. Moi aussi j’ai 
une grande confiance dans 
son entreprise. Henri est un 
homme d’affaires, et il a beau- 
coup d’amis. 

Voici le magasin et notre ami 
Henri. Entrons. 

Bonjour, Henri. Mon ami et moi 
sommes venus vous souhaiter 
succes dans votre nouvelle en¬ 
treprise. 

Je suis bien content de vous voir, 
et je vous remercie beaucoup 
pour vos bienveillants souhaits. 

Notre ville est belle; elle n’est pas 
encore tres grande, mais elle 
grandit rapidement. De nou- 
velles industries s’etablissent 
continuellement, et on ouvre de 
nouveaux magasins. L’achat 
de proprietes dans notre ville est 
un bon placement. Nous avons 
une banque, beaucoup de grands 
magasins dans la Grande Rue et 
de belles maisons particulieres. 
J’ai une grande confiance dans 

l’avenir de notre ville. 

* 

* * 

J’etudie le frangais a present, 
parce que je m’attends a aller 
bientot en France. Mon oncle 
et mes cousins sont la. Ils de- 
meurent pres de Paris. J’ai 
l’intention de demeurer avec 
eux, et d’y rester jusqu’en hiver. 
J’etudie beaucoup, et mon mai- 
tre dit que je fais des progres 
satisfaisants Ilvient maintenant. 



40 


ANGLAIS 


§3 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION—(Continuees) 


see him, because I know my | 
lesson. We are always speaking | 
French; he does not speak Eng- j 
lish at all. I am always studying 
music, and I can play a little on 
the violin. 


Je suis content de le voir, parce 
que je sais ma legon. Nous 
parlons toujours frangais; il ne 
parle pas du tout anglais. J’etu- 
die aussi la musique, et je peux 
jouer un peu du violon. 


EXERCICE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 

1. Good afternoon, William. I am coming- to see you. 

2. I am very glad of it, Henry. How are you? 

3. I am very much better, thank you. What are you 
doing there? 

4. I am studying my English lesson. My parents and I 
intend to go to London very soon, and I desire to speak 
English very well. 

5. Mr. Reed is your English teacher, is he not? 

6. No; he is not. He is not teaching now. Edward and 
he are entering into partnership, and they intend to open a 
furniture store on Main Street. 

7. We intend to invest in real estate, because the town 
is growing very fast. 

8. Mr. Smith is cashier at the bank. He is walking 
from his home to the bank. 

9. I am reading a very interesting English book. 

10. I am sorry to say that I have not time to go to the 
bank with you. I know the cashier very well. 

11. I have no confidence in the future of that town. It 
is not growing very fast, and no new industries are starting. 

12. Where are you living now? 

13. We are living in Paris with our uncle. He is an old 
merchant, and he has many estates in France. 

14. Your music teacher has much talent for music. He 
is playing on the violin now. 

15. Read in English: 67, 32, 43, 29, 8, 79, 82, 54, 94, 192, 
875, 429, 619, 802, 47, 222, 627, 726, 267, 8, 18, 318, 4,318, 
24,318, 624,318, 8,624,318. 





ANGLAIS 

(PARTIE 4) 


SEPTIEME EECON 

v# 


CYLINDRE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 


VOCABULAIRE 


i. c. s. 

English Record No. 7 

tlie appetite, P appetit 
tlie apple, la povime 
tlie beef, le bceuf 
tlie bread, le pain 
tlie breakfast, le dejeuner 
to bring, apporter 
tlie butter, le beurre 
tlie clierry, la cerise 
the coffee, le cafe 
tlie cream, la creme 
the cup, la tasse 
to eat, manger 
the egg, Vceuf 
either, ou, non plus 
fresh, frais , fratche 
the fruit, le fruit 
to get, obtenir , avoir 
the glass, le verre 
to go for, aller , c here her 
Mary, Marie 


/. c. s. 

Cylindre d'anglais No. 7 

the milk, le lait 

neither, ni , ni Pun ni Vautre 

none, aucun 

to offer, offrir 

the pear, la Poire 

to please, plaire 

the pleasure, le plaisir 

ripe, m fir 

seldom, rarement 

some, en, du, de la , de V , des 

the soup, la soupe 

sour, aigre 

the tea, le the 

the tree, Parbre 

usually, ordinairement 

the vegetables, les legumes 

the water, Peau 

the wine, le vin 

without, sans 


PHRASES ET 

Have we no 1 butter, Mary? 
There is not any 2 on the 
table. 

We have some, 3 but it is not 
very fresh. 


CONVERSATION 

N’avons-nous pas de beurre, 
Marie? II n’y en a pas sur 
la table. 

Nous en avons, mais il n’est 
pas bien frais. 


For notice of copyright, see page immediately following the title page 

24 










2 


ANGLAIS 


4 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Well, bring in the coffee and 
go and get 4 some butter 
and some eggs, please. 

Here is the coffee, madam. 

Very well; now, Mary, you 
may go for 5 the butter and 
the eggs. 

Do you wish a cup of coffee, 
Mr. Jones? 

Thank you, madam; I do not 
drink coffee. 6 

Have a glass of wine, 7 then. 

You are very kind; I do not 
drink wine either; 8 I prefer 
water, milk, or tea. 

May I offer you a cup of tea 
with cream,* then? 

If you please, madam, but I 
prefer it without cream. 

Why do you eat so little? 
Have you no appetite? 

I seldom 10 eat much for 
breakfast. I usually take 
a cup of milk, some bread 
and butter, and some fruit; 
for dinner, I have soup, 
beef, and vegetables. 

Have some fruit, Mr. Jones; 
I know you like it. 

With pleasure, madam; I like 
it very much indeed. 

You have some fruit trees in 
your garden, have you not? 


Alors, apportez le caf6 et 
allez chercher du beurre et 
des oeufs, s’il vous plait. 

Voici le caf6, madame. 

Tresbien; maintenant, Marie, 
vous pouvez aller chercher 
le beurre et les oeufs. 

D6sirez-vous une tasse de 
cafe, M. Jones? 

Merci, madame, je ne prends 
(bois) pas de cafe. 

Prenez (ayez) un verre de 
vin, alors. 

Vous etes bien bonne; je ne 
bois pas de vin non plus; 
je prefere l’eau, le lait, ou 
le the. 

Puis-je vous offrir une tasse 
de th6 a la creme, alors? 

S’il vous plait, madame, mais 
je le pr6fere sans creme. 

Pourquoi mangez-vous si peu? 
N’avez-vous pas d’appetit? 

Je mange rarement beaucoup 
a dejeuner. Je prends or- 
dinairement une tasse de 
lait, du pain et du beurre, 
et des fruits; pour le diner, 
de la soupe, du boeuf et 
des legumes. 

Prenez des fruits, M. Jones; 
je sais que vous les aimez. 

Avec plaisir, madame; je les 
aime rdellement beaucoup. 

Vous avez des arbres a fruits 
dans votre jardin, n’est-ce 
pas? 



4 SEPTIEME LEQON 3 

PHRASES ET CONVERSATION—(Continuees) 


Yes, madam; we have some 
apple 11 trees there. 

Are the apples in your gar¬ 
den ripe already? 

Some 13 are ripe and some are 
not, but none 13 are good, 
for they are too sour. 

Have you any pear or cherry 
trees? 

No, madam; we have neither. 
* 

* * 

Do you intend to take a walk 
after dinner, John? 

No; I do not. I intend to 
write some letters or to 
read a book. 

Do you read any French 
books? 

I am not reading any, but 
Charles is ; 14 he has some 
very good ones. 

Have you none? 

No, madam; I have not, be¬ 
cause I read none; I 15 read 
only English 16 and Russian 
books. 


Oui, madame; nous avonsdes 
pommiers. 

Les pommes de votre jardin 
sont-elles ddja mures? 

Quelques-unes sont mures, et 
les autres ne le sont pas, 
mais aucunes ne sont bon¬ 
nes, car elles sont tres 
aigres. 

Avez-vous des poiriers ou 
des cerisiers? 

Non, madame; nous n’avons 
ni l’un ni l’autre. 

*** 

Avez-vous l’intention de vous 
promener apres diner, J ean? 

Non; j’ai l’intention d’ecrire 
des lettres ou de lire un 
livre. 

Lisez-vous des livres frangais? 

Je n’en lis pas, mais Charles 
en lit; il en a de trfes bons. 

N’en avez-vous pas? 

Non, madame; je n’en ai pas, 
parce que je n’en lis pas; 
je lis seulement des livres 
anglais et russes. 


REMARQUES 

1. Ainsi qu’il a deja ete dit, le mot no traduit pas de , place 
devant un substantif, si la negation tombe sur ce substantif. 

Have we no butter? —No; we have no butter, N'avons-nous pas de 
beurre? — Non; nous n'avons pas de beurre. 

She has no appetite, Elle n'a pas d'appetit. 





4 


ANGLAIS 


4 


2. Awy s’emploie comme article partitif, et traduit par 
consequent du, de la, de V, des places devant le nom si la 
phrase est interrogative. 

Have you any butter? — Avez-vous du, beurre? 

Has he any milk? — A-t-il du lait? 

Have they any water?— Ont-ils de Veaut 

Have we any vegetables? — Avons-nous des legumes? 

II peut aussi traduire de devant le nom si la phrase est 
negative. 

I do not eat any bread, Je ne mange pas de pain. 

He is not reading any book, II ne lit pas de livre. 

Any n’est pas necessairement place devant un nom. II 
rend aussi notre pronom en lorsqu’il remplace un nom pris 
dans un sens partitif. 

Have we any butter? —No; we have not any, Avons-nous du beurre? 
Non; nous n'en avons pas. 

Has he any talent? — No; he has not any, A-t-il du, talent? — Non; 
il n'en a pas. 

3. Au lieu de any , on emploie some dans les phrases 
affirmatives. 

I have some English books, J’ai des livres anglais. 

We have some butter, Mary, have we not? Nous avons du beurre , 
Marie , n'est-ce pas? 

Have you any fresh milk? — Yes; I have some, Avez-vous du laid 
frais? — Oui; j'en ai. 

4. Le verbe to get est d’un usage tres frequent dans la 
conversation anglaise. II est impossible de le traduire par 
un seul mot; il a surtout la propriete de s’allier avec certains 
adverbes et prepositions pour former differentes expressions. 
Nous en etudierons les diverses acceptions dans le cours 
de cet ouvrage. Pour le moment considerons settlement les 
suivantes: 

1. Lorsqu’il est employe avec to go et separe par la con¬ 
junction and, il signifie alter chercher: 

Go and get some butter, Allez chercher du beurre. 

Go and get a physician, Allez chercher un docteur. 


4 


SEPTIEME LEQON 


5 


2. II se traduit par faire quand il est suivi d’un infinitif: 

Try to get him to come, Tachez de. le faire venir. 

3. Lorsqu’il est suivi d’un adjectif ou d’un participe passe, 
il a le sens de devenir: 

He gets tired, Il devient fatigue (Il se fatigue ) . 

He is getting old, Il devient vieux (Il vieillit). 

5. To go for comme to go and get sont equivalents a alter 
chercher en frangais: 

I am going for the butter now, Je vais chercher le beurre maintenant. 

You may go for the eggs, Mary, Votes poitvez aller chercher les 
oeufs, Marie. 

6. Lorsqu’on parle des objets en general, sans vouloir les 
designer d’une fagon particuliere et distincte, l’article partitif 
du , de la, de V, des n’est pas traduit en anglais: 

I do not drink wine, Je ne bois pas de vin. 

He does not eat fruit, Il ne mange pas de fruit. 

7. Lorsque vous offrez quelque chose a quelqu’un, le 
verbe prendre souvent employe a l’imperatif en frangais, se 
traduit generalement par l’imperatif du verbe to have , avoir: 

Have a glass of wine, John, Prettez ( Ayez) un verre de vin , Jean. 

Have a cup of tea, Lucy, Prenez (Ayez) une tasse de the, Lucie. 

8. L’expression frangaise non phis se traduit en anglais 
par un seul mot, either: 

I do not drink wine, do you? —No; I do not either. Je ne bois pas 
de vin, en buvez-vous ? — Non; je n'en bois pas non plus. 

My uncle does not drink any either, Mon oncle n'en boit pas non plus. 

Cette expression peut encore etre traduite d’une autre 
maniere et les phrases precedentes peuvent aussi s’exprimer: 

I do not drink wine, do you? —No; neither do I. —Neither does my 
uncle. 

9. En termes culinaires, la preposition a que nous 
employons en frangais se traduit generalement par with 
en anglais: 

coffee with cream, cafe a la crime 

coffee with milk, cafl au lait 

soup with vegetables, potage aux legumes 


6 


ANGLAIS 


4 


10 . Les adverbes de temps, always, toujours, often, 
souvent, seldom, rarement, soon, bientot, etc. se placent tres 
souvent apres le sujet dans les temps simples; entre l’auxiliaire 
et le participe dans les temps composes. 

I seldom drink wine, Je bois rarement du vin. 

He often speaks English, II nous parte souvent anglais. 

She is seldom reading French, Etle lit rarement en frangais. 

They are often coming to see ns, Its viennent souvent nous voir. 

II faut en excepter le verbe to be. Lorsqu’il est employe 
seul, il precede toujours ces adverbes: 

He is often at home, II est souvent b lamaison. 

She is seldom late, Etle est rarement en retard. 

11. Le nom des arbres fruitiers se forme en anglais en 
ajoutant le mot tree, arbre, apres le nom du fruit qu’ils 
portent: 

the apple tree, le pommier 

the cherry tree, le cerisier 

the pear tree, le poirier 

12 . Le mot anglais some peut s’employer pour traduire 
quelques-uns ou quelqties-unes en frangais. Dans le cas ou 
some est repete dans la meme phrase, le second se traduit 
generalement par les autres: 

We have books; some are interesting, some are not, Nous avons 
des livres, quelques-uns sont interessants, les autres ne le sont pas. 

Are the apples in your garden ripe? —Some are ripe and some are 
not, Les pommes de votre jar din sont-elles nvtires? — Quelques-unes sont 
mitres, les autres ne le sont pas. 

13 . Le mot 7ione en anglais est la contraction de no o?ie, 
et se traduit generalement par le pronom en et la negation 
en frangais: 

Have you any eggs? —No; I have none, Avez-vous des ceufs? — Non; 
je n'en ai pas. 

Has he any French books? —No; he has none, A-t-il des livres fran- 
gais?—Non; il n'en a pas. 

Le mot none, signifiant ?io one, pas un, ne s’emploie ge¬ 
neralement que pour designer le nombre. Lorsqu’on designe 


4 


SEPTIEME LEQON 


7 


la quantite, il est mieux d’employer not any. Cette dis¬ 
tinction n’est cependant pas toujours observee. II faut aussi 
remarquer que not any est une expression plus emphatique 
que none. 

Have we no butter? —No; we have not any, N'avons-nous pas de 
beurre? — Non; nous n'en avons pas. 

Have we any books? —No; we have none, Avons-nous des livres?— 
Non; nous n'en avons pas. 

Enfin, le mot none peut etre sujet d’un verbe; il traduit 
dans ce cas notre expression aucun . . . ne: 

We have many apples, but none are good, Nous avons beaucoup de 
pommes , mats aucunes ne sont bonnes. 

Here are some eggs, but none are fresh, Void des ceufs , mats 
aucuns ne sont frais. 

14 . Avec la forme progressive, il n’est pas necessaire de 
repeter le verbe en anglais; il suffit d’exprimer l’auxiliaire 
to be: 

I am not reading, but Charles is, Je ne lis pas , mats Charles lit. 

He is eating, but we are not, Il mange, mats nous ne mangeons pas. 

15 . Remarquez qu’en anglais le pronom personnel /, je, 
s’ecrit toujours avec une lettre majuscule: 

John and I are good friends, Jean et moi sommes bons amis. 

He is going to London, and I am going to Paris, Il va d Londres, et 
je vais a Paris. 

16 . Les adjectifs qui denotent la nationality sont appeles 
adjectifs propres en anglais, et comme nos norns propres, ils 
s’ecrivent toujours avec une lettre majuscule: 

I speak French and German, Je parte frangais et allemand. 

He does not speak Spanish, Il ne parte pas espagnol. 


EXERCICE ORAL/ 

Have we no butter? —No; we have not any. 

N'avons-nous pas de beurre? Non; nous n'en avons pas. 

Have you no bread? —No; I have not any. 

Has he no wine? —No; he has not any. 

Has she no water? —No; she has not any. 

Have they no cream? —No; they have not any. 



8 


ANGLAIS 


4 


Tliere is no butter on the table. —I have some 
here. 

II n'y a pas de beurre stir la table. —Ten ai ici. 

There is no bread on the table. —We have some here. 
There is no milk on the table. —I have some. 

There is no tea on the table. —Here is some. 

There is no water on the table. —Mary is bringing some. 

Have you any bread?—No; I have not any. 

Avez-vous du pain?—Non; je n'en ai pas. 

Has John any talent for music? —No; he has not any. 

Has Lucy any coffee? —No; she has not any. 

Have they any milk? —No; they have not any. 

Have you any relatives? —No; we have not any. 

I do not read any French books, do you? — 

No; I do not. 

Je ne /is pas de livres frangais, en lisez-vous?—Non; je 
n'en lis pas. 

He does not eat any bread, does he? —No; he does not. 
She does not take any lessons, does she? —No; she 
does not. 

We do not take any wine, do you? —No; we do not. 

They do not take any tea, do they? —No; they do not. 

I have some very good tea, do you wish any ? — 

Yes; I wish for some. 

J'ai de Ires bon the , en desirez-vous ? — Otii; j'en desire. 

He writes some French letters, do you write any? —Yes; I 
write some. 

She takes some of our tea, do you wish for any? —Yes; I 
wish for some. 

We expect some good coffee, do you expect any? —Yes; we 
expect some. 

They are expecting some wine from France. —We are 
expecting some also. 

Go and get my umbrella in my room, John. 

Allez chercher mon parapluie dans ma chambre, Jean. 

Mary, go and get some wine for Mr. Warren, if you please. 
Bring the coffee here, and go and get some fresh eggs. 



4 


SEPTIEME LECON 


9 


Go and get some vegetables for dinner, Lucy. 

Henry, go and get some milk for me, please. 

He is going for a physician now. 

They are going for the eggs now. 

Have a cup of tea witli me, Mr. Reed. 

Prenez une tasse de the avec moi, M. Reed. 

Have a cup of coffee with Lucy, Mrs. Warren. 

Have a glass of wine with Mr. Smith, Mr. Jones. 

Have a cup of coffee with cream. 

Have some fruit, Mrs. Jones; here are apples and pears. 

You know where I live, Mr. Warren, do you 
not?—Yes, six*; I do. 

Vous savez oil je demeure , M. Warren , n'est-ce pas? — Oui , 
monsieur; je le sais. 

You know where our friend Mr. Reed lives, do you not? — 
Yes; we do. 

The physician knows where my brother lives, does he 
not? —O, yes; he does. 

They know where you live, do they not? —Certainly, 
they do. 

Mr. and Mrs. Smith know where your sister lives, do they 
not? —Yes, madam; they know where she lives. 

Ho you know where Lucy is? —No; I do not 
know where she is, but John does. 

Savez-vous oil est Lucie? — Non; je ne sais pas oil elle est, 
mais Jean le sait. 

Do you know where my teacher is? —No, John; I do not, 
but my brother does. 

Does Miss Jones know where my sister is? —No; she does 
not know where she is, but Lucy does. 

Does your brother know where we are? —No; he does not, 
but my sister does. 

Do they know where my books are? —No; they do not, but 
Mr. Warren does. 

Do John and Lucy know where we are? —John does not 
know where we are, but Lucy does. 


10 


ANGLAIS 


4 


Do you not wish to live in Paris, madam? — 

O, yes, sir; and so do my parents. 

Ne desirez-vous pas demeurer & Paris, madame? — Oh! out, 
monsieur; je desire y demeurer, et mes parents aussi. 

Do you not wish to write your letters now? —Yes; I do, 
and so does my sister. 

Do you not wish to know where Mr. Smith, the physician, 
lives? —Yes, sir; I do, and so does my brother. 

Does not Miss Warren wish to remain in the garden? — 
Yes, madam; she does, and so do John and Lucy. 

Does not your friend wish to study English? —Certainly, 
madam; she does, and so do I. 

Does not your uncle wish to breakfast now? —O, yes; he 
does, and so do we. 

Do not Mr. and Mrs. Smith wish to live in their new 
house? —Certainly, they do, and so does their daughter. 

I do not speak English so well as John does, 
but he does not speak French so well 
as I do. 

Je ne parle pas anglais aussi bien que Jean, mais il ne parle 
pas frangais aussi bien que moi. 

You do not speak French so well as Lucy does, but she 
does not speak German so well as you do. 

Miss Jones does not speak Spanish so well as our teacher 
does, but he does not speak English so well as Miss 
Jones does. 

My cousin does not speak so many languages as Mr. Smith 
does, but Mr. Smith does not speak so many as your 
brother does. 

Lucy does not read so well as John does, but John does 
not write so well as Lucy does. 

May I take a walk with Florence, mother?- 
Yes, John; you may take a walk with 
her.—Yes, John; you may. 

Puis-je me promener avec Florence, maman ?— Oui, Jean;- 
nous pouvez vous promener avec elle. 

May I go to see Miss Reed now? —Yes, Lucy, you may go 
to see her. —Yes, Lucy; you may. 


§4 


SEPTIEME LEQON 


11 


May I read your German book? —O, certainly you may 
read it. —O, certainly you may. 

May I play with John in the garden? —Yes; you may play 
with him there.—Yes; you may, 

May I study in your room, Florence?—Yes; you may study 
there.—Yes; you may. 

May John play the violin now? —Certainly he may, if 
he wishes. 

May we stay there very late? —Yes; you may, if you wish. 

May John and I study here?— Yes; you may. 

Can you speak English., Mr. Jones?-No, sir; 

I am sorry to say that I cannot speak it. 

Pouvez-vous parler anglais , M. Jones? — Non, monsieur; je 

suis fache de dire que je ne puis le parler. 

Can you not speak English so well as your sister does? — 
No, madam; I cannot speak it so well. 

Can you not take a walk with me now? —I am sorry to say 
I cannot do it just now. 

Cannot your cousin paint well, Miss Warren? —No, sir; my 
cousin cannot paint at all. 

Can they not tell me where Professor Smith lives? —No, 
sir; I am sorry to say they cannot. 

I must learn to speak English, because I 

intend to go to London soon. 

II faut que fapprenne a parler anglais , parce que i’ai Vin¬ 

tention d’alter bientdt a Lofidres. 

I must go to Paris, for my old friend Mr. Smith longs to 
see me. 

I must find my hat, for I wish to take a walk with Lucy. 

You must find her book, for she wishes to read it now. 

John must study very much, if he wishes to attain good 
results. 

Florence must take lessons in music, for she possesses 
much talent for it. 

We must live in St. Petersburg, for our parents and rela¬ 
tives live there. 

They must always speak English, if they wish to speak it 
well. 


12 


ANGLAIS 


§4 


They must remain here, for the weather is very bad. 

I must not stay there very long-, for I must go to see my 
friend. 

Lucy must not read now, because it is very dark. 

We must not remain in the garden, because it is too cold 
now. 

They must not go to see Mr. Jones now, for they must 
finish their French lesson. 

Do you wish to have some bread and butter? 
—Yes, madam; I wish to have some. 

Desirez-vous du pain et du beurre?—Oui, madame; j'en 
desire. 

Do you wish to have some tea with cream? —Thank you; 
I wish to have some tea, but I prefer it without cream. 

Do you wish to have some wine, Mr. Warren? —No, thank 
you; I do not drink wine; I prefer to have some cold water. 

Does he wish to have some milk? —Yes; he wishes to have 
some milk, and also some bread and butter. 

Does John wish to have some beef and veg-etables? —Yes; 
he wishes to have some. Please give him some soup also. 

Do John and Lucy wish to have some coffee? —John 
wishes to have a cup of coffee, but Lucy prefers to have 
some cold milk. 

Can you not get me some bread and milk?—I 
can get you some milk, but I am sorry to 
say that I cannot get you any bread. 

Ne pourriez-vous pas me trouver {in'obtenir) du pain et du 
lait?—Je puis vous trouver du I ait, mais je suis fbche 
de vous dire que je ne puis vous trouver du pain. 

Can you not get us some milk and cream for breakfast? 
— I can get you some milk, but I cannot get you any 
cream. 

Can you not get butter and eggs? —We can get some 
eggs, but we cannot get any butter. 

Can Mary get some fruit and vegetables for dinner? —She 
can get some fruit, but she cannot get any vegetables just 

now. 


§4 


SEPTIEME LEQON 


13 


Cannot your brother get some interesting French and 
English books? —He can get some English books, but he 
cannot get any French books. 

Cannot John get us any good apples? —He can get us 
some very good pears, but I am sorry to say he cannot get 
any apples. 

Ho youi* relatives live in Paris? — Some live 
there, and some live in London. 

Vos parents demeurent-ils a Paris? — Quelques-uns y demeu- 
rent , et les autre s demeurent a Londres. 

Do your pupils study well, Professor?—Some of my pupils 
do; and some of them do not study at all. 

Are your new books very interesting? —Some of them are 
very interesting and some are not. 

Are the apples in your garden ripe already? —Some of 
them are quite ripe, and some are not. 

Are the pens good, Charles? —Some of them are good, 
and some are bad. 

Do you know my relatives, Mr. Smith? —No; I have not 
that pleasure. 

Do any of your relatives live in Paris? — No, 
sir; none of my relatives live there. 

Avez-vous des parents qui demeurent a Paris? — Non, mon¬ 
sieur; aucun de mes parents n’y demeure. 

Do any of your pupils speak French as well as Mr. Jones 
does? —No, sir; none of them speak it so well. 

Are any of my books in your room, Florence? —No, John; 
none of your books are in my room. 

Does your cousin know any of my relatives? — No, madam; 
he knows none of them. 

Do any of your sisters take lessons in English? — No, sir; 
none of them do. 

Let him ask his mother to permit him to 
take a walk with us. 

Qu'il demands d sa mere de lui permettre de se promener 
avec nous. 

Let him speak English with Charles, if he desires to speak 
it well. 


14 


ANGLAIS 


§4 


Let him try some of our old wine. 

Let him bring us some milk and some bread and butter. 
Let Florence take lessons of Professor Smith, for he is a 
splendid teacher. 

Let John get some fresh eggs for breakfast. 

Do not let her read so loud. 

Qu'elle ne Use pas si haut. 

Do not let her stay in the garden now, for it is too cold 
there. 

Do not let h$r drink the milk, for it is sour. 

Do not let them eat the apples, for they are not quite ripe. 
Do not let Florence drink so much cold water. 

Do not let Mary go to see Mrs. Jones now, for the 
weather is very bad. 

Please let me have my gloves, Charles. 

S’il vous plait, donnez-moi ( laissez-moi avoir) mes gants, 
Charles. 

John, let me have my hat, please, for I intend to take a 
walk. 

If you please, ■ let me have a cup of coffee, some eggs, 
and bread and butter, for I am quite hungry. 

Let me have a glass of water, please, for I am very 
thirsty. 

Let him have your book, if he wishes to read it. 

Let her have a pen, Charles, for she has none. 

Let them have some soup, beef, and vegetables for dinner. 

Have a cup of tea with me, Mr. Jones, I 
know you like it. 

Prenez une tasse de thk avecmoi , M. Jones\ je sais quevous 
Vaimez. 

Have some beef and vegetables, John, I know you are 
hungry. 

Have a glass of wine, Mr. Reed, I know you are thirsty. 
Have some bread and butter with your coffee. 

Have a glass of milk, if you are thirsty. 


4 


SEPTIEME LEQON 


15 


Are you studying English?-No; 1 am not, 
but my brother is. 

Etudiez-vous Vanglais? — Non; je ne V etudie pas, mats mon 
frire Vetudie. 

Are you eating your breakfast now? —No; I am not, but 
my parents are. 

Are you investing in real estate? —No; we are not, but our 
friends are. 

Is he living with you now? —No; he is not, but my cousins 
are. 

Is he opening a store on Main Street? —No; he is not, but 
Mr. Smith is. 

Is she playing on the violin? —No; she is not, but her 
teacher is. 

Are they starting this new industry? —No; they*are not; 
our father is starting it. 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


Have we no cream for breakfast, 
Mary? I do not see any on the 
table. 

I am sorry to say, madam, that 
I cannot find any cream this 
morning, but we have very 
good milk. 

I cannot take coffee without cream. 
Ask John to try to get some 
for breakfast. I wish to have 
some coffee with cream, and 
some bread and butter. 

Here is John, madam. 

Have you no cream, John? 

Yes, madam; here is some. 

Thank you, John. 

Now, Mary, bring in the coffee 
and some bread and butter. 

Very well, madam. 

Where is Edward? Is he not 
here? 

He is in his room, madam. 


N’avons-nous pas de creme pour 
le dejeuner, Marie? Je n’en 
vois pas sur la table. 

Je suis fachee de dire, madame, 
que je ne peux pas trouver de 
creme ce matin, mais nous 
avons de tres bon lait. 

Je ne puis prendie mon cafe sans 
creme. Demandez a Jean de 
tacher d’en trouver. Pour mon 
dejeuner je desire du cafe a la 
creme et du pain et du beurre. 

Voici Jean, madame. 

N’avez-vous pas de creme, Jean? 

Oui, madame; en voici. 

Merci, Jean. 

Maintenant, Marie, apportez le 
cafe, du pain et du beurre. 

Tres bien, madame. 

Ou est Edouard? N’est-il pas ici? 

11 est dans sa chambre, madame. 




16 


ANGLAIS 


4 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION—(Continuees) 


Ask him to come to breakfast, 
please. 

Mr. Edward is sorry to say that 
he cannot come, madam; he is 
not well this morning, and can¬ 
not eat. He prefers to remain 
in his room. 

This butter is not good, Mary; it 
is not fresh. 

I am sorry, madam, but we can¬ 
not get fresh butter in the win¬ 
ter. Do you wish for some fruit? 
I have some very good apples. 

Yes, Mary; let me have some 
apples. 

Are you going for a walk after 
breakfast, madam? 

Yes, Mary; I am going to the 
bank, but I intend to return 
before dinner, because I expect 
Mr. Smith at eleven o’clock. 

Do you intend to study English 
with him? 

Yes, Mary; I do. We expect to 
go to London soon, and I wish 
to speak English well before we 
go there. 

Are your parents going with you? 

No; they are not. Mother says 

she is too old to go. 

* 

* * 

Where are you going, Charles? 

I am going into the garden. It is 
too warm here. Are you not 
coming with me? 

Yes; with pleasure. O, you have 
a large garden! 

Yes; it is quite large. See the 
beautiful fruit trees we have. 

Yes, I see. Are the apples ripe 
already? 


Demandez-lui de venir dejeuner, 
je vous prie. 

M. Edouard est bien fache de dire 
qu’il ne peut pas venir, ma- 
dame; il ne se porte pas bien, 
et il ne peut pas manger. II 
p re fere rester dans sa chambre. 

Ce beurre n’est pas bon, Marie; il 
n’est pas frais. 

J’en suis fachee, madame, mais 
nous ne pouvons pas avoir de 
beurre frais en hiver. Desirez- 
vous des fruits? J’ai de tres 
bonnes pommes. 

Oui, Marie; donnez-moi quelques 
pommes. 

Allez-vous vous promener apres 
dejeuner, madame? 

Oui, Marie; je vais a la banque, 
mais j’ai l’intention d’etre de 
retour avant le diner, parce que 
j’attends M. Smith a onze 
heures. 

Avez-vous l’intention d’etudier 
l’anglais avec lui? 

Oui, Marie; j’en ai l’intention. 
Nous esperons aller bientot a 
Londres, et je desire bien parler 
anglais avant d’y aller. 

Vos parents vont-ils avec vous? 

Non; ils n’y vont pas. Maman 

dit qu’elle est trop vieille. 

* 

* * 

Ou allez-vous, Charles? 

Je vais dans le jardin; il fait trop 
chaud ici. Ne venez-vous pas 
avec moi. 

Oui, avec plaisir. Oh! vous avez 
un grand jardin! 

Oui; il est assez grand. Voyez 
les beaux arbres fruitiers que 
nous avons. 

Oui, je vois. Les pommes sont- 
elles deja mures? 




4 


SEPTIEME LEQON 


17 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION - (Continuees) 


Some are ripe, but they are not 
good; they are too sour. The 
apples of this tree are very good, 
but they are not ripe now. 

Have you any vegetables in your 
garden? 

O, yes; -we have. 

* 

* * 

I am very cold, Charles. And 
you, are you not cold? 

No; not at all. If you are cold, 
you wish for a cup of coffee, do 
you not? 

Yes; I wish for a cup of very 
warm coffee. Do you also wish 
for some? 

No, thank you. I do not like cof¬ 
fee, but give me a cup of tea, 
if you please. 

* 

* * 

My brother wishes to breakfast 
here. He likes beef and vege¬ 
tables. Have you any? 

Yes; I have some cold beef. 

Bring him bread and butter, then, 
some cold beef, vegetables, and 
a cup of very warm coffee. 

I have no coffee now, but I have 
some very good tea. 

Very well, bring him tea with 
cream. 

Here is your brother; I am bring¬ 
ing his breakfast. 

Do you wish to eat here? 

No; we wish to eat in the garden. 
It is too warm here. 

* 

* * 

Does not Edward wish to break¬ 
fast now? 


Quelques-unes sont mures, mais 
elles ne sont pas bonnes; elles 
sont trop aigres. Les pommes 
de ce pommiersont tres bonnes, 
mais elles ne sont pas mures 
maintenant. 

Avez-vous des legumes dans votre 
jardin? 

Oh! oui; nous en avons. 

* 

* * 

J’ai bien froid, Charles. Et vous, 
n’avez-vous pas froid? 

Non; pas du tout. Si vous avez 
froid, vous desirez une tasse de 
cafe, n’est-ce pas? 

Oui; je desire une tasse de cafe 
bien chaud. En desirez-vous 
aussi? 

Non, merci. Je n’aime pas le cafe, 
mais donnez-moi une tasse de 
the, s’il vous plait. 

* 

* * 

Mon frere desire dejeuner ici. II 
aime le boeuf et les legumes. 
En avez-vous? 

Oui; j’ai du boeuf froid. 

Alors, apportez-lui du pain et du 
beurre, du boeuf froid, des le¬ 
gumes et une tasse de cafe bien 
chaud. 

Je iTai pas de cafe maintenant, 
mais j’ai de tres bon the. 

Tres bien, apportez-lui du the a 
la creme. 

Voici votre frere; j’apporte le 
dejeuner. 

Desirez-vous manger ici? 

Non; nous desirons manger dans 
le jardin. II fait trop chaud ici. 
* 

* * 

Edouard ne desire-t-il pas dejeuner 
maintenant? 



18 


ANGLAIS 


§4 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Yes, sir; he wishes to breakfast. 
Give him a cup of coffee—a 
glass of milk for me, if you 
please. 

Do you not desire to eat? 

Only a little bread and butter. I 
do not eat much for breakfast, 
but I eat soup, beef, and vege¬ 
tables for dinner. I usually eat 
an apple also. 


Oui, monsieur; il desire dejeuner. 
Donnez-lui une tasse de cafe, et 
un verre de lait pour moi, s’il 
vous plait. 

Ne desirez-vous pas manger? 

Seulement un peu de pain et de 
beurre. Je ne mange pas beau- 
coup a dejeuner, mais je mange 
de la soupe, du boeuf, et des 
legumes a diner. Je mange 
aussi generalement une pomme. 


EXERCICE PIIONOGRAPHIQUE 

1. Have they no bread? There is not any on the table. 

2. They have some, but it is not very fresh. 

3. I wish to breakfast now. Bring me a cup of coffee 
with cream, some bread and butter and some fruit. 

4. Do you wish a cup of coffee also, Florence? 

5. No, thank you; I do not drink coffee; I prefer a cup of 
tea with milk. 

6. Have some bread and butter also. 

7. No, thank you; I do not eat bread for breakfast; I 
usually take only a cup of tea with milk. 

8. May I offer you a glass of wine, Mr. Reed? 

9. No, thank you. I do not drink wine. I take coffee, 
tea, or milk only. 

10. Why do you eat so little? Have you no appetite? 

11. I cannot eat just now. I am not at all hungry. 

12. Have you any fruit trees in your garden? 

13. O, yes; we have. We have four apple trees, two pear 
trees, and one cherry tree. 

14. Are the pears in your garden ripe already? 

15. Some of them are ripe, but some are not. Our apples 
are all ripe, but none of them are good. They are all too sour; 
we do not eat them. 

16. Are you not coming with me to the bank, John? 

17. I am very sorry to say that I cannot just now. I am 
finishing my English lesson, and I am expecting my teacher. 




§4 


SEPTIEME LEQON 


19 


18. May I go and get some fresh butter, mother? 

19. Bring in the coffee, and then you may go for the 
butter. 

20. Can you get fresh butter in the winter? 

21. No, we cannot. In winter the butter is not fresh. 

22. Mr. Reed cannot come to see you this morning, 
because he is not well; he prefers to remain in his room. 

23. Are you not going for a walk after breakfast, uncle? 

24. Yes, I am. Are you not coming with me? 

25. No; I cannot, uncle; I expect a friend from London. 


20 


ANGLAIS 


4 


HUITIEME LECON 


CYLINDRE PIIONOGRAPHIQUE 


VOCABULAIRE 


I. C. S. 

English Record No. 8 

again, encore , de nouveau 
to assist, aider 
the basket , le panier 
the berry, la baie 
the boy, le gargon 
to call, appeler 
Charles, Charles 
the chicken, le poulet 
the child, Venfant 
to come back, revenir 
the cornei*, le coin 
the cupboard, Varmoire, le 
buffet 

the dessert, le dessert 
the difficulty, la difficult$ 
the dining room, la salle a 
manger 

the dish, le plat 

the drawer, le tiroir 

the duty, le devoir 

the Englishman, VAnglais 

the foot, le pied 

to forget, oublier 

the form, la forme 

the Frenchman, le Frangais 

the German, VAllernand 


/. c. s. 

Cylindre d'Anglais No. 8 

the goose, Voie 
the key, la clef 
the knife, le couteau 
the leaf, la feuille 
the lettuce, la laitue 
the man, Vhomme 
to meet, rencontrer 
the mouse, la souris 
nice, bon 

the number, le nombre 

the ox, le boeuf 

the pantry, Voffice 

the park, le pare 

the peach, la peche 

the penny, deux sous, decime 

the plural, lepluriel 

to put, mettre 

the question, la question 

the radish, le rad is 

the raspberry, la framboise 

the rest, le repos 

the Roman, le Romain 

the season, la saison 

to set, mettre (la table) 

the shelf, le rayon 

sure, sfer 





4 


HUITIEME LEQON 


21 


V OCABULAIRE—(Continue) 


to tell, dire 

the thief, le voleur 

to think, penser 

those, ces 

today, aujourd' hui 

the tomato, la tomate 

the tooth, la dent 


to trouble, diranger 
to wait, attendre 
the wife, la femme {mariee ), 
I’ipouse 

the woman, la femme 
the word, le mot 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION 


Dear Lucy, please tell 1 Mary 
to set the table. The din¬ 
ner dishes and the wine 
glasses 2 are on the shelves 3 
in the cupboard, and the 
dessert knives are in those 4 
drawers, in boxes. 5 

Mary, put the cold chicken 
on the table, and bring the 
lettuce, the tomatoes, 6 and 
the radishes 7 from the 
pantry. 

And where is the dessert, 
mother? 

The peaches 8 and the cher¬ 
ries are in that large basket 
in the corner. 

Have we. no raspberries* at 
all? They are so nice this 
season! 

No, dear; we have no ber¬ 
ries 10 today. 

May I trouble you for the 
keys of the pantry, mother? 

Here they are. Where is 
Charles? Dinner is waiting 
for him. 11 


Chere Lucie, veuillez dire a 
Marie de mettre le couvert. 
Les assiettes (les plats pour 
le diner) et les verres a vin 
sont sur les rayons dans le 
buffet, et les couteaux a 
dessert sont dans ces ti- 
roirs dans des boites. 

Marie, mettez le poulet froid 
sur la table, et apportez la 
laitue, les tomates et les 
radis de l’office. 

Et ou est le dessert, maman? 

Les peches et les cerises sont 
dans ce grand panier dans 
le coin. 

N’avons-nous pas du tout de 
framboises? Elies sont si 
bonnes dans cette saison! 

Non, ma chere, nous n’avons 
pas de framboises au¬ 
jourd’hui. 

Puis-je vous ddranger pour 
les clefs de l’ofiice, maman? 

Les voici. Oh est Charles? 
Le diner est la qui l’attend. 





22 


ANGLAIS 


4 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Contimiees) 


He is in the park with his 
friends, two gentlemen 
from London. O, he is 
coming now. 

*** 

May I go for a walk in the 
park with uncle John, 
mother? It is so pleasant 
there now, and I need a 
little rest this afternoon. 

Yes; if you wish, but do no,t 
forget your English lesson. 
If you meet with any diffi¬ 
culties, ask your friends 
the young ladies to assist 
you. 

O, mother, I am sure that I 
know my lesson well; 
please, ask me some ques¬ 
tions. 

Very well; tell me the plural 
number of the three words 
life, wife, and thief. 

Lives, wives, and thieves. 

Quite right; now, of the six 
words ox, mouse, goose, 
tooth, duty, and penny. 

Oxen, mice, geese, teeth, 
duties, and pennies, or the 
old form pence. 

Now Lucy, tell me the plural 
number of the four words 
man, woman, child, foot. 

Men, women, children, feet. 


II est au pare avec ses amis, 
deux messieurs de Londres. 
Oh! le voila qui vient. 


Puis-je aller me promener 
au pare avec mon oncle 
Jean, maman? II y fait si 
bon maintenant, et j’ai 
besoin d’un peu de repos 
cet apres-midi. 

Oui; si vous voulez, mais 
n’oubliez pas votre legon 
d’anglais. Si vous £prou- 
vez des difficultes, deman- 
dez a vos amies de vous 
aider. 

Oh! maman, je suis sure que 
je sais bien ma legon. 
Faites-moi des questions, 
je vous prie. 

Tres bien; dites-moi le pluriel 
des trois mots life, wife, 
et thief. 

Lives, wives, and thieves. 

Tout a fait juste. Mainte¬ 
nant, des six mots ox, 
mouse, goose, tooth, duty, 
and penny. 

Oxen, mice, geese, teeth, 
duties, et pennies, ou la 
vieille forme pence. 

Maintenant, Lucie, dites-moi 
le pluriel des quatre mots 
man, woman, child, foot. 

Men, women, children, feet. 




4 


HUITIEME LEQON 


23 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Quite so; and of the words 
Englishman, Frenchman, 
German, and Roman. 

Englishmen, Frenchmen, 
Germans, and Romans. 

Right again; yes, Lucy, I 
think you know your lesson 
quite well. Call uncle John, 
and you may go with him 
now. When you come 
back, bring me some pretty 
leaves for the dining-room 
table. 


C’est tout a fait cela; et des 
mots Englishman, French¬ 
man, German, et Roman. 

Englishmen, Frenchmen, 
Germans, et Romans. 

Tres bien encore; oui, Lucie, 
je pense que vous savez 
tres bien votre legon. Ap- 
pelez votre oncle Jean, et 
vous pouvez aller mainte- 
nant aveclui. Quandvous 
reviendrez, apportez-moi 
de joli feuillage pour la 
table de la salle a manger. 


REMARQUES 

1. Les prepositions gouvern^es parun verbe ne sont pas 
les memes en anglais qu’en frangais. Les quatre verbes 
suivants que vous avez etudies, et qui demandent la preposi¬ 
tion a en frangais, sont employes sans pr6position en anglais: 
to tell , dire; to ask , demander; to give , donner; to permit , 
permettre. 

Tell John to come, Dites a Jean de venir. 

Ask Lucy to play with you, Demandez a Lucie de jouer avec vous. 

Give John a cup of tea, Donnez une tasse de the a Jean. 

Permit Lucy to take a walk, Permettez a Lucie de se promener. 

2. La langue anglaise contient un grand nombre de mots 
composes. La plupart seront etudies plus tard. Cette legon 
en contient trois qui sont donnes ici comme exemple de la 
regie qui preside a leur formation. En general, on peut dire 
que les Anglais commencent par le mot qui s’^nonce le 
dernier en frangais. Les trois exemples de cette legon a wine 
glass, un verre a vin, a dessert knife , un couteau a dessert, et 
a dining-room , une salle a manger, nous montrent que l’on 
met en tete du nom compos6 tout mot qui en indique l’usage, 




ANGLAIS 


24 


§4 


alors qu’en frangais ce meme mot est place le dernier, et 
joint a l’autre nom par la preposition a. 

En parlant de la regie generale pour former le pluriel des 
noms, il a ete dit que cette regie avait plusieurs exceptions. 
Elies sont donnees dans cette legon, et le mot glass, verre, en 
est un exemple. Lorsqu’un nom se termine au singulier par 
un s, on ajoute es pour former le pluriel: 

one glass, two glasses, un verre , deux verres 

3. Quelques noms qui se terminent par //, changent 
au pluriel / en v, auquel on ajoute es: 

the shelf, the shelves, le rayon , les rayons 
the half, the halves, la moitie, les moities 

II faut aussi y ajouter un certain nombre de mots qui se 
terminent par /. Parmi ces noms, les suivants ont ete don- 
nes dans les legons precddentes: 

the leaf, the leaves, la feuille , les feuilles 
the thief, the thieves, le voleur , les voleurs 
the beef, the beeves, le bceuf, les boeufs 

Enfin, les noms qui se terminent par fe prennent s pour 
former leur pluriel, mais changent aussi / en v: 

the knife, the knives, le couteau , les couteaux 

the life, the lives, la vie , les vies 

the wife, the wives, la femme ( epouse ), les femmes 

4. Those est le pluriel de that , et s’emploie comme notre 
adjectif demonstratif ces , pour designer les objets eloignes de 
nous: 

Those houses are small, Ces maisons-la sont petites. 

Those books are not interesting, Ces livres-lane sontpas interessanls. 

5. Les mots termines au singulier par x prennent ordi- 
nairement es pour former leur pluriel: 

one box, two boxes, une boite , deux boites 

6. La plupart des noms terminds par o (il y a des excep¬ 
tions etudiees plus tard) forment leur pluriel en ajoutant es: 

one tomato, two tomatoes, une toniate , deux tomates 


4 


HUITIEME LECON 


25 


7. Lorsqu’un nom se termine au singulier par sk, il prend 
aussi es pour former le pluriel: 

the wish, the wishes, le souhait, les souhaits 
one radish, two radishes, un radis, deux radis 
the dish, the dishes, le plat, les plats 

8. La terminaison ch a, en anglais, deux sons different^, 
celui de tch et celui de k en frangais. Dans le premier cas, 
les noms qui se terminent ainsi prennent es pour former le 
pluriel, tandis que ceux du second cas prennent seulement s. 

one peach, two peaches, une piche, deux p£ches 

9. Quand les noms se terminent par y precede d’une con- 
sonne, on forme le pluriel en changeant y en ies. 

the berry, the berries, la bale, les bales 

the raspberry, the raspberries, la framboise, les framboises 

the city, the cities, la ville, les villes 

the duty, the.duties, le devoir, les devoirs 

the lady, the ladies, la dame, les dames 

Mais si Yy est prec6d6 d’une voyelle, le pluriel se forme 
regulierement par l’addition d’un s: 

the day, the days, le jour, les jours 
the boy, the boys, le gargon, les gargons 
the key, the keys, la clef, les clefs 

10. Tous les fruits a baies, comme les fraises, les fram¬ 
boises, etc. peuvent en anglais se designer sous le terme 
general de berry. 

11 . Le verbe to wait , attendre, qui ne veut pas de pre¬ 
position en frangais, demande la preposition for en anglais: 

I am waiting for him; Je Vattends. 

He is not waiting for you, II ne vous attend pas. 

12 . Ces mots, et ceux qui suivent forment leur pluriel 
irregulierement. II est inutile de les etudier ici, puisqu’ils 
sont donnas dans votre cylindre phonographique. Comme 
ces mots sont tres importants, il est n6cessaire que vous les 
appreniez par coeur avec leur pluriel. 


26 


ANGLAIS 


§4 


13. Le mot that , que, toujours exprime en frangais, sur- 
tout apres le verbe to think , penser, est souvent sous-entendu 
en anglais: 

I think you are right, Je pense que vous avez raison. 

He thinks he is coming, It pense qu'il vient. 

14. Apres when , quand, pour exprimer une action future, 
on n’emploie pas le futur en anglais comme nous le faisons 
en frangais, mais simplement le present: 

Tell him when he comes, Dites-lui quand it viendra. 

Call him when you see him, Appelez-le quand vous le verrez. 

II faut aussi remarquer qu’en anglais les prepositions se 
combinent avec une foule de verbes, dont elles etendent 
ainsi la signification, et en font, pour ainsi dire, des verbes 
nouveaux. Cet emploi des verbes avec les prepositions est 
tres frequent en anglais; c’est meme la un des caracteres 
distinctifs de cette langue, et une des plus grandes sources 
de richesse et d’dnergie. Prenons le verbe to come par 
exemple. Avec les mots que nous avons etudids, nous 
pouvons former: 

to come in, (venir dedans ), entrer 
to come again, {venir encore ), revenir 
to come back, {venir en arriere ), retourner 
to come for, {venir pour ) venir chercher 


EXERCICE ORAL 

Can you permit Lucy to take a walk with 
me ? 

Voulez-vous permettre a Lucie de se proinener avec moi? 

Permit me to assist you, Charles. 

He permits me to see my friends. 

They do not permit you to play in the garden. 

She permits John to drink one cup of coffee only. 

What does he say ? - He is telling Mary to set 
the table. 

Que dit-il?—It dit a Marie de mettre le convert. 

Tell John that I am going to the park now. 



§4 HUITIEME LECON 27 

I am telling you that I cannot come to see you this 
afternoon. 

They are telling us that those eggs are not fresh. 

Tell Mr. Reed that I wish to see him. 

May I ask John to take dinner with ns? 

Puis-je demander a Jean de diner avec nous ? 

What are you asking? —I am asking Mrs. Reed if she 
wishes to take a walk in the park with me. 

He is asking John to take English lessons from him. 
Mary, please ask mother to give you the keys of the 
pantry. 

We are asking Mr. Smith to teach us German. 

I wish to ask this gentleman the name of that young lady. 

Mary, please give John a cup of coffee with 
cream. 

Marie , donnez h Jean une tasse de cafb a la crbme, je vous 
prie. 

Why do you not give John some bread and butter also? 
Mr. Smith is giving Charles an English lesson. 

Take this pear, John, and give Lucy the apple. 

He gives my friends many words to study. 

This hook is interesting, and that hook is not. 

Ce livre-ci est interessant, et ce livre-lct, ne Vest pas. 

This house is beautiful, but that house is not. 

This pen is good, but that pen is very bad. 

That gentleman is a German, but this gentleman is a 
Frenchman. 

This boy is very diligent, but that boy is not diligent 
at all. 

This room is light and large, but that room is dark and 
very small. 

Is this the key of the pantry ?-No, Mary; this 
is the key of my room. 

Est-ce la clef de Voffice?—Non, Marie; c'est la clef de ma 
chambre. 

Is this your book Charles? —No, Florence; this is not 
my book. 


28 


ANGLAIS 


§4 


Is this good coffee, John? —No; I do not think it is. 

Is that Mr. Jones, your teacher? —No, madam; that is 
Mr. Smith. 

Is that your cup, Lucy? —No, dear; I think it is your cup. 

Is that an apple tree, Mr. Jones? —No; that is a peach tree. 

Do you wish any tomatoes?—No; thank you, 

I do not wish for any, but let me have 
some radishes, please. 

Desirez-vons des tomatesf—Non; merci, je n'en desire pas, 
niais donnez-moi ( laissez-moi avoir) des radis , s'il 
vous plait. 

Do you wish any raspberries, Mr. Reed? —No, madam, 
thank you; I seldom eat berries.' 

Do you wish to get some peaches, madam? —No, Mary, I 
do not wish for any peaches; get me some apples, please. 

Do you eat berries? —Yes, madam; I usually eat them 
with cream. 

Do you wish for the keys of the pantry? —Yes, madam; I 
wish to have them, for I wish to get some peaches for 
the children. 

Do you wish to get the boxes from the shelves? —Yes, John, 
get them for me, if you please. 

Where are the dessert knives?—I think they 
are in that box. 

Oil sont les couteaux a dessert?—Je crois qu'ils sont dans 
cette botte. 

Where are the wine glasses? —There they are on the table. 

Where are the new dinner dishes? —They are in the 
cupboard. 

Where are the peaches? —They are in that basket in the 
corner. 

Where are the radishes? —They are in the pantry with 
the tomatoes. 

Where are the raspberries? —We have not any berries 
today. 

Where are the keys of the pantry?—I think Edward has 
them. 


§4 huitieime LEQON 29 

Where are the cherries? —I think they are in that large 
dish on the shelf. 

Do tliose gentlemen wish to see me, John? — 

Yes, sir; they wish to see you. 

Ces messieurs desirent-ils me voir, Jean? — Oui, monsieur; 
ils desirent vous voir. 

Do the ladies intend to go with us? —Yes, madam; I think 
they do. 

Do the children wish to remain in the park?—Yes; they do; 
they wish to play with their friends. 

Do the gentlemen wish to have some wine? —Yes; they do; 
please give them some. 

Do you wish to have some wine, gentlemen? —Yes; we do; 
please give us some. 

Do the ladies wish to have some coffee? —No, Mary;- they 
do not want any coffee; give them some tea. 

Do the children wish for any berries with cream? —Yes; 
they do? 

Wliy do yon not offer the gentlemen some 
wine? They are thirsty. 

Pourquoi n’offrez-vous pas de vin aux messieurs; ils ont 
soif? 

Why do you not offer the ladies some tea? They are 
thirsty. 

Why do you not offer the children some peaches. They 
like them very much. 

Why do you not ask those men to assist you, John? 

Why do you not ask your friends, the young ladies from 
Paris, to speak French with you? 

Why do you not ask those women to play on the violin 
for us? 

Why do you not tell Mary to bring us some dessert knives? 
There are none on the table. 

Why do you not wish to go to the park with the children, 
the weather is so beautiful? 

Why do you not try to find the keys of the pantry? I must 
get some vegetables for dinner. 


30 


ANGLAIS 


4 


Are the peaches good?-I think they are very 
good, and so are the pears. 

Les peches sont-elles bonnes?—Je crois qu'elles sont tres 
bonnes, et aussi {sont) les poires. 

Are the cherries ripe? —O, yes; they are quite ripe, and so 
are the berries. 

Are the tomatoes in the pantry, Mary? —Yes, madam; the 
tomatoes are there and so are the radishes. 

Are the tea dishes in the cupboard? —Yes, they are in the 
cupboard, and so are the wine glasses. 

Does your friend know those gentlemen? — 

No, sir*; I do not think he knows them. 

Votre ami connatt-il ces messieurs? — Non, monsieur; je ne 
crois pas qu’il les connaisse. 

Do your sisters and those young ladies study English? — 
No, madam; I do not think they do. 

Does Mr. Jones teach your children music?—No, madam; 
he does not. 

Do those gentlemen from Paris speak English? —No, 
madam; I do not think they do. 

Do your children study well? —Florence studies very well, 
but Lucy, I am sorry to say, does not. 

Those leaves have a beautiful color, have 
they not? —O, yes; indeed they have. 

Ces feuilles ont une belle couleur , n’est-ce pas?—Oh! oui, 
vraiment, elles ont une belle couleur. 

Florence has beautiful teeth, has she not? —Yes, indeed; 
her teeth are very beautiful. 

Mary has some peaches for us, has she not? —Yes, children; 
she has some peaches for you. 

Mr. Jones has the keys of our old house, has he not? —Yes; 
he has them. 

You have some beautiful fruit trees in your garden, have 
you not? —Yes, madam; we have some very beautiful fruit 
trees there. 

There is a letter for you, Mr. Jones. 

II y a ( Voild ) une lettre pour vous, M. Jones. 

There is a bottle of good old wine in the cupboard. 


4 


HUITI&ME LECON 


31 


There is a book on the table for Charles. 

There is some cold milk in the pantry. 

There are some fruit trees in our garden. 

There are many large rooms in our new house. 

There are some very interesting books on those shelves. 

There are many children in the park. 

Are there many Frenchmen in London ? 
—Yes; there are many Frenchmen there, 
but not so many as there are in St. 
Petersburg. 

Y a-t-il beaucoup de Franqais a Londres? — Oui; il y en a 
beaucoup, mais pas autant qu'd. St. Pttersbourg. 

Are there many Germans in Paris? —Yes, madam; there 
are many Germans there, but not so many, I think, as there 
are in London. 

Are there many Englishmen in St. Petersburg?— Yes; 
there are many Englishmen there, but not so many as there 
are in Paris. 

Are there many Germans in France? —Yes; there are many 
Germans in France, but not so many as there are in Russia. 

Are you waiting for your cousin?—Yes; 1 am 
waiting for him. 

Attendez-vous votre cousin?—Oui; je Vattends. 

Are you waiting for your friends? —Yes; we are waiting 
for them. 

Is he waiting for you? —No; he is not waiting for me; he 
is waiting for his uncle from Paris. 

Is she waiting for her teacher? —O, no; her teacher cannot 
come this morning. She is waiting for her sister. She is 
taking a violin lesson with Mr. Jones. 

Is John waiting for us?—No; he is not; he must go to the 
bank before three o’clock. 

Why is not Lucy waiting for us? —She cannot; 'she wishes 
to finish her English lesson before dinner. 

John is there waiting for you. 

Jean est Id, qui vous attend (attendant pour vous). 

Your mother is here waiting for you, Lucy. 


32 


ANGLAIS 


§4 


Mr. Reed is in his room waiting for him. 

Your brother is in the garden waiting for those gentlemen. 
Lucy is in the dining room waiting for her friends, the 
young ladies from London. 

They are there waiting for us. 

I am here waiting for Mr. and Mrs. Smith. 

May I trouble you for tbe keys of the pantry? 

Puis-je vous deranger pour avoir les clefs de Voffice? 

You do not trouble me at all; I have very little to do. 

Why do you trouble me so? —I have no time to go with 
you. 

Do not trouble Edward; he is studying his lesson. 

I cannot write this letter, Edward troubles me all the time. 

You do not need any rest at all. 

Vous n'avez pas besoin de repos du tout. 

He needs a good rest this afternoon. 

He does not need to wait for my cousin. 

Do you need your French book? —No; we do not need it. 
Do they need you? —No; they do not need us. 

She needs a good English teacher. 

They do not need to thank me. 

I do not need to go before three o’clock. 

At what time does your brother need his book? —He needs 
it about half past five. 

Bring me some pretty leaves when you come 
back. 

Apportez-moi de joli feuillage quand vous reviendrez. 

Bring us some fresh eggs when you come back. 

Tell Lucy to bring them some French books when she 
comes back. 

Tell those gentlemen to see our friends when they are in 
Paris. 

Tell Mrs. Smith to come to see us when you see her. 

Try to be very diligent when you study your lesson. 

Te.ll me what time it is when you go into the dining room. 
Give John a penny when he comes. 


4 


HUITIEME LECON 


33 


Speak to your parents about it when they are here. 

Assist your poor cousin when you can. 

Please come in, Mr. Jones, your cousin is 
waiting for you. 

Entrez, je vous prie , M. Jones; votre cousine votes attend. 

Why do you not come in, John, your friend is here. 

Tell Lucy to come in; I wish to see her. 

Those gentlemen are coming in; tell Edward to come. 

He is not coming in now, he is playing with his friends. 

At what time is John coming hack? —He is 
coming back at half past three. 

A quelle heure Jean revient-il?—II revient a trois heures et 
demie. 

I wish to see you when you come back. 

He wishes to see her when he comes back. 

She wishes to see her when she comes back. 

Do you wish to see me when I come back? 

We wish to see them when we come back. 

They wish to see us when we come back. 

Bring me some fresh eggs when you come 
again. 

Apportez-moi des ceufs frais quand vous reviendrez. 

I expect to come again very soon. 

He intends to come again at eight o’clock. 

She thinks he is coming again. 

Tell them to bring us some fresh butter when they come 
again. 

Try to make them come again. 

John is coming for the French book. 

Jean vient chercher le livre frangais. 

I am coming for Lucy; she says she wishes to go to 
the park. 

He is coming for William; he is waiting for him. 

We have your English book; please come for it. 

They are coming for us. 


34 


ANGLAIS 


4 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


I wish to have a good dinner to¬ 
day; what have you to eat, 
Mary? I must tell you that I 
am very hungry. 

Well, I have soup, beef, chicken, 
vegetables, and lettuce, also 
some tomatoes and radishes. 
For dessert I have berries and 
peaches. 

O, that is a plenty. Please give 
me some soup and bread and 
butter. 

Do you wish for beef and chicken? 

No, Mary; I do not wish for any 
beef, give me some chicken only. 

You wish for some vegetables also, 
do you not? 

If you please. Bring in the let¬ 
tuce and put it on the table. 

Do you wish for tea or coffee? 

No, thank you; I do not drink 
either. There is some old wine 
in that cupboard. Give me a 
glass of it, if you please. Do 
not bring any berries for my 
dessert. I prefer one or two 
peaches. 

Do you not like berries? Those 
raspberries are so nice this 
season. 

O, I like them, but I prefer 
peaches. 

Please give me a knife, Mary; 
there are some in that drawer. 

Are you going to see John after 
dinner? 

No; I am not. I intend to remain 
at home. I have many letters 
to write, and I need a little rest. 


Je desire un bon diner aujour- 
d’hui; qu’avez-vous a manger, 
Marie? Je dois vous dire que 
j’ai bien faim. 

Eh bien! j’ai de la soupe, du 
boeuf, du poulet, des legumes et 
de la laitue, aussi des tomates 
et des radis. Pour dessert, j’ai 
des framboises et des peches. 

Oh! c’est assez. Donnez-moi de 
la soupe, du pain et du beurre, 
je vous prie. 

Desirez-vous du boeuf et du poulet. 

Non, Marie; je ne desire pas de 
boeuf, donnez-moi seulement du 
poulet. 

Vous desirez aussi des legumes, 
n’est-ce pas? 

Shi vous plait. Apportez la laitue, 
et mettez-la sur la table. 

Desirez-vous du the ou du cafe. 

Non, merci; je ne bois ni l’un ni 
l’autre. II y a de vieux vin 
dans ce buffet. Donnez-nPen un 
verre, je vous prie. N’apportez 
pas de framboises pour mon 
dessert. Jeprefere une ou deux 
peches. 

N’aimez-vous pas les framboises? 
Elies sont si bonnes pendant 
cette saison. 

Oh! je les aime, mais je prefere 
les peches. 

Donnez-moi un couteau, je vous 
prie, Marie; il y en a dans ce 
tiroir. 

Irez-vous voir Jean apres diner? 

Non; je n’irai pas. J’ai Pin¬ 
tention de rester a la maison. 
J’ai beaucoup de lettres a 
ecrire, et j’ai besoin d’un peu 
de repos. 





4 


HUITIEME LEQON 


35 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Have you the key of my room, 
Mary? 

Yes, sir; there it is on the shelf in 
the cupboard. 

O, I see it. I am going into my 
room, now. If John comes tell 
him where I am. 

Very well, sir. 

* 

* * 

Good afternoon, Mary. How are 
you today? 

I am pretty well, thank you, 
John. And how are you? 

I am not very well, I have a cold. 

I am sorry for you. 

Is Charles expecting me? 

Yes, John; he is. He is in his 
room; he says that he has many 
letters to write. 

I do not wish to trouble him, then. 

O, Mr. Charles is always very 
glad to see you. He is expect¬ 
ing you. 

Very well, then. 

* 

* * 

Hallo, Charles! What are you 
doing? 

I am writing some letters. My 
uncle is coming to France soon. 
I ask him to come to see me 
when he is in Paris. 

Am I troubling you? 

Not at all, my friend. I am very 
glad to see you. I have time 
to write my letters. 

Are you not writing to Henry? 

Yes; I am. I have a letter here 
for him. He says he is to open 
a store in his town, and asks 
me to assist him in his venture. 


Avez-vous la clef de ma chambre, 
Marie? 

Oui, monsieur; la voila sur le 
rayon dans le buffet. 

Oh! Je la vois. Je vais dans ma 
chambre, maintenant. Si Jean 
vient, dites-lui ou je suis. 

Tres bien, monsieur. 

* 

* * 

Bonjour, Marie. Comment allez- 
vous aujourd’hui? 

Je vais assez bien, merci, Jean. 
Et vous-meme? 

Je ne suis pas tres bien; je suis 
enrhume. 

J’en suis fache pour vous. 

Est-ce que Charles m’attend? 

Oui, Jean; il vous attend. II est 
dans sa chambre; il dit qu’il a 
beaucoup de lettres a ecrire. 

Je ne veux pas le deranger, alors. 

Oh! M. Charles est toujours tres 
content de vous voir. Il vous 
attend. 

Tres bien, alors. 

* 

* * 

Alio, Charles! Que faites-vous? 

J’6cris quelques lettres. Mon 
oncle viendra bientot en France. 
Je lui demande de venir me 
voir quand il sera a Paris. 

Est-ce que je vous derange? 

Pas du tout, mon ami. Je suis 
bien content de vous voir. J’ai 
bien le temps d’ecrire mes let¬ 
tres. 

N’ecrivez-vous pas a Henri? 

Oui; je lui ecris. J’ai ici une 
lettre de lui. Il me dit qu’il va 
ouvrir un magasin dans saville, 
et il me demande de Paider 
dans son entreprise. 



36 


ANGLAIS 


4 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continiiees) 


Do you intend to do it? 

Certainly. I have great confidence 
in Henry. He is a good busi¬ 
ness man, and he has many 
friends. I am only too glad to 
assist him. It is also a good 
investment, because the town 
where he lives is growing very 
fast. 

You are right. But what time is 
it now? 

It is about five o’clock. 

I must go, then. Father is wait¬ 
ing for me. Good afternoon, 
Charles. 

Good day, John. Come again. 

Yes, thank you, but you must 
come and see me also. 


Avez-vous l’intention de le faire? 

Certainement. J’ai beaucoup de 
confiance en Henri. II est 
hommes d’affaires, et il a beau- 
coup d’amis. Je suis seulement 
tres content de l’aider. C’est 
aussi un bon placement, parce 
que la ville ou il demeure gran- 
dit tres rapidement. 

Vous avez raison. Mais quelle 
heure est-il a present? 

Il est a peu pres cinq heures. 

Alors, il faut que je m’en aille. 
Papa m’attend. Bonjour, 
Charles. 

Bonjour, Jean. Revenez me voir. 

Oui, merci, mais vous devez aussi 
venir me voir. 


PHRASES USTJELLES 

Note.— Sous ce titre nous donnerons dans chaque legon quelques-unes des 
expressions le plus souvent employees dans la conversation ordinaire. Nous 
aurons soin de n’en donner aucune qui contienne des mots dont vous n’avez pas 
entendu la prononciation. Ces phrases sont donnees avec leur traduction idioma- 
tique. Comme l’eleve connait la signification litterale de chaque mot, il lui sera 
facile de trouver par lui-meme la construction idiomatique de chaque phrase. Enfin, 
les phrases suivantes etant d’un emploi extremement frequent dans la conversation, 
il est important que l’eleve les etudie avec le plus grand soin. 


I wish to speak to you. 

Do you know me? 

Sir? 

What do you say? 

What is it? 

What do you wish? 

What do you ask for? 

What can I offer you ? 

What do you prefer? 

Do me the pleasure. 

I am sorry to trouble you. 

If you need me, let me know. 

I am as sorry for it as you can be. 
I thank you many times. 

You are too kind. 

What must I do? 


J’ai besoin de vous parler. 

Me connaissez-vous? 

Plait-il? 

Que dites-vous? 

Qu’est-ce que c’est? 

Que desirez-vous? 

Que demandez-vous? 

Que puis-je vous offrir? 

Que preferez-vous? 

Faites-moi ce plaisir. 

Je suis fache de vous deranger. 

Si vous avez besoin de moi, faites- 
moi prevenir. 

J’en suis aussi fache que vous. 

Je vous fais mille remerciements. 
Vous etes trop bon. 

Que faut-il que je fasse? 





4 


HUITIEME LEQON 


37 


PHRASES USUELLES—(Continuees) 
What do you think of it? 


I think you are right. 

What are we going to do? 

I tell you it is right. 

I am sure of it. 

It cannot be. 

I do not say that. 

Are you sure of it? 

That is very beautiful. 

I am glad of it. 

I have all I wish for. 

I am very sorry for you. 

How do you do? (Forme employee 
dans la conversation ordinaire .) 
Very well, thank you, madam. 

And how are you? 

I have a cold, but am quite well 
today. 

What is your name? 

My name is N. 

Why do you not call him? 

I do not know where he is. 

Can you give me what I ask? 

What can I do for you? 

I am doing all I can. 


Qu’en pensez-vous? 

Que pensez-vous de cela? 

Je crois que vous avez raison. 
Qu’allons-nous faire? 

Je vous dis que c’est juste. 

J’en suis sur. 

Je suis sur de cela. 

Cela ne se peut pas. 

Je ne dis pas cela. 

En etes-vous bien sur? 

Voila qui est bien beau. 

J’en suis bien aise. 

J’ai tout ce que je desire (Je suis 
au comble de mes vceux). 

J’en suis bien fache pour vous. 
Comment vous portez-vous? 

Tres bien, je vous remercie, 
madame. 

Et vous-meme? 

Je suis enrhumee, mais je vais 
tres bien aujourd’hui. 

Comment vous appelez-vous? 

Je m’appelle N. 

Pourquoi ne l’appelez-vous pas? 
Je ne sais pas ou il est. 
Pouvez-vous me donner ce que je 
demande? 

Que puis-je faire pour vous? 

Je fais tout ce que je peux. 


EXERCICE PIIONOGEAPHIQUE 

1. Mary, please set the table; we have some gentlemen 
for dinner. 

2. Where are the dinner dishes and the wine glasses? 

3. They are there in the cupboard, on those shelves. 

4. Are not the knives in those drawers? 

5. Yes; they are there. 

6. Do you wish for cold chicken for dinner? 

7. Yes; we do; bring the lettuce also, the radishes, and 
the tomatoes. All are in the pantry. 




38 


ANGLAIS 


4 


8. I have not the key. 

9. Here it is. There are some peaches and raspberries 
there also. Put them on the table. 

10. Where is your brother? John is waiting for him. 

11. I do not know where he is. Call him, please. 

12. Do you find any difficulties in your English lessons? 

13. No; I do not find any, because my teacher is very 
kind, and he assists me. 

14. Uncle John, let us go for a walk in the park. It is so 
pleasant there. 

15. Gladly, Lucy, but do you know your English lesson? 

16. O, yes, uncle, I know it very well. Ask me some 
questions. 

17. I cannot. I do not speak English. 

18. The plural forms of life, wife, mouse, tooth, child, 
and foot are lives, wives, mice, teeth, children, and feet. 

19. The plural forms of gentleman, German, duty, ox, 
thief, woman, and Roman are gentlemen, Germans, duties, 
oxen, thieves, women, and Romans. 

20. Mother, I am very hungry. Give me some cold beef, 
bread, and butter, and a cup of tea with cream if you please. 

21. John tells me he is coming to see us this afternoon. 

22. Tell your uncle to call me when he comes back. 

23. Do you know those gentlemen? Their names are 
Mr. Jones and Mr. Smith. They are coming in now. 

24. Are you waiting for me, John? No, I am not. 

25. I am very sorry to say we have no berries for dinner 
today. 


ANGLAIS 

(PARTIE 5) 

NEUVIEME LECON 

CYLINDRE PHONOGKAPHIQUE 


VOCABULAIRE 


I. C. S. 

English Record No. 9 

to attend, frequenter,assis/era 
to close, termer 
tlie country, la campagne, 
le pays 

to deserve, meriter 
excellent, excellent 
the family, la tamille 
far, loin 

first, premier , d'abord 
the gardener, le jardinier 
to go away, s'en aller 
the gratitude, la reconnais¬ 
sance 

the holidays, les vacances 
the husband, le mari 
important, important 
to keep, tenir 
the lake, le lac 
at least, au moins 
the love, Vamour 


/. c. s. 

Cylindre d'Anglais No. 9 

the manager, le gerant 
the mile, le mille (distance) 
the month, le mois 
the neighbor, le voisin 
obliged, oblige 
once, une fois 
private, prive , particulier 
the school, Vecole 
the servant, le, ou la domes- 
tique 

to spend, depenser, passer 
to stay, rester 
still, encore 
the summer, Pete 
to transact, faire (des af¬ 
faires) 

Webster, Webster 
the week, la semaine 
the year, Vamiee > 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION 


Uncle John’s 1 wife is coming 
to see us for the holidays. 


La femme de l’oncle Jean 
vient nous voir pendant les 
vacances. 


For notice of copyright, see page immediately following the title page 

§5 







2 


ANGLAIS 


5 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Is that so? I hope to see 
her. How long 2 is she 
going to stay? 

About a month. I think 
uncle John cannot come 
just yet; he has some 
important business to trans¬ 
act first, but he may be 
here in two or three weeks. 

Is he still 3 living in Mr. 
Smith’s house? 

No, sir; he is now living in 
my brother’s house. 

Is your brother’s house as 
large as Mr. Smith’s? 4 

Yes, sir; it is as large and 
beautiful as Mr. Smith’s. 6 

Is Mr. Jones the manager of 
your uncle’s business? 

No, sir; Mr. Webster, our 
neighbor’s son, is the man¬ 
ager of my uncle’s busi¬ 
ness. He lives with my 
uncle’s family in the win¬ 
ter, and spends his sum¬ 
mers here at home. 6 


Does Mr. Jones teach your 
brother’s children? 

My brother’s children have 
no private teacher; they 
are attending Professor 
Brown’s school. Mr. 


Vraiment? J’espere la voir. 
Combien de temps va-t-elle 
rester? 

A peu pres un mois. Je 
pense que notre oncle Jean 
ne pent pas venir a present; 
il a d’importantes affaires 
a terminer d’abord, mais 
il s6ra peut-etre ici dans 
deux ou trois semaines. 

Demeure-t-il encore chez M. 
Smith? 

Non, monsieur; il demeure 
maintenant chez mon frere. 

La maison de votre frere est- 
elle aussi grande que celle 
de M. Smith? 

Oui, monsieur; elle est aussi 
grande et aussi belle que 
celle de M. Smith. 

M. Jones est-il le gerant des 
affaires de votre oncle? 

Non, monsieur; M. Webster, 
le fils de notre voisin est le 
gerant des affaires de mon 
oncle. Il demeure avec la 
famille de mon oncle pen¬ 
dant l’hiver, et passe ses 
dtes ici chez lui. 


M. Jones est-il le professeur 
des enfants de votre frere? 

Les enfants de mon frere 
n’ont pas de pr6cepteur; 
ils vont a l’dcole du Pro¬ 
fesseur Brown. M. Brown 



5 NEUVIEME LEQON 3 

PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Brown is an excellent 
teacher and a very kind 
man. He deserves the 
pupils’ love and the grati¬ 
tude of their parents. 

I know the professor quite 
well; he is an old friend of 
our family. 

My sister’s children attend 
his school, too, and so do 
our neighbor’s daughters 
also. 

Is not Mr. Brown’s school 
too far from 7 your sisters’ 
homes? 8 

No, madam; not at all; it is 
only about half a mile. 9 

Are you going to the country 
when the school year 
closes? 

Yes; we intend to spend the 
vacation at my parents’ 
house. It is not far from 
Lake George. 

Do you close your house 
when you go away? 

No, madam; we do not; our 
gardener and one of the 
servants’ relatives keep the 
house open, because my 
husband is obliged to come 
to town at least once a 
week. 10 


est un excellent maitre, et 
un tres bon homme; il 
merite l’amour de ses 
dleves, et la reconnais¬ 
sance de leur parents. 

Je connais trks bien le pro- 
fesseur; c’est un vieil ami 
de notre famille. 

Les enfants de ma soeur vont 
aussi a son ecole, ainsi que 
les filles de notre voisin. 

L’ecole de M. Brown n’est- 
elle pas trop loin des mai- 
sons de vos soeurs? 

Non, madame; pas du tout; 
elle t est seulement a peu 
pres a un demi mille de dis¬ 
tance. 

Allez-vous a la campagne a 
la fin de l’annee scolaire. 

Oui; nous avons l’intention 
de passer les vacances chez 
mes parents. Ils ne de^ 
meurent pas loin du lac 
George. 

Fermez-vous votre maison 
quand vous vous en allez? 

Non, madame; nous ne la 
fermons pas; notre jardi- 
nier et des parents de l’un 
de nos domestiques y habi- 
tent, parce que mon mari 
est oblige de venir en ville 
au moins une fois par 


semame. 



4 


ANGLAIS 


§5 


REMARQUES 

1. Le rapport de possession qui est exprime en frangais 
par la preposition de s’exprime de deux manieres en anglais: 

1. Par la traduction litterale de la construction frangaise, 
en employant la preposition of , de: 

He deserves the gratitude of the parents, II merite la reconnaissance 
des parents. 

He is the manager of this business, II est legerant de cette affaire. 

2. Par une forme particuliere a la langue anglaise appelee 
possessif ou genitif saxon. Cette forme consiste a ajouter 
la lettre s precede d’une apostrophe, apres le nom du pos- 
sesseur. De plus, ce nom du possesseur precede toujours le 
nom de l’objet possede, si bien que la construction anglaise 
intervertit l’ordre des mots, tel que nous l’avons en frangais: 

my father’s house, la maison de mon pfre 
your sister’s children, les enfants de votre sceur 

Notez que l’on retranche la preposition of du substantif 
possesseur et Particle the du substantif possede. 

Ce genitif saxon s’emploie surtout lorsque le substantif 
possesseur est une personne ou une chose personnifiee. 
Cependant cette forme est aussi d’usage dans un certain 
nombre d’expressions, comme dans les suivantes: 

Come back in an hour’s time, Reve7iez d'ici a une heure. 
in a month’s time, dans Vespace d'un mois 

Le nom de l’objet possede est quelquefois sous-entendu, 
comme dans: 

St. Stephen’s (church), {L'fglise de) Si. Etienne 

near St. Paul’s (cathedral), Pres de {la cathedrale de) St. Paul 

at St. James’s (palace), Au (palais de) St. Jacques 

Lorsque le meme objet appartient a plusieurs possesseurs, 
c’est a la suite du dernier qu’on met s: 

John, Charles, and Henry’s house is too small, La maison de Jean, 
de Charles et de Henri est trop petite. 

2 . Notre mot combien se traduit en anglais de differentes 
manieres: 


§5 NEUVIEME LEQON 5 

Lorsqu’il designe la quantite, on le traduit par how 
much : 

How much wine do you drink? —I do not drink any, Combien de vin 
buvez-vous?—Je n'en bois pas. 

How much coffee do you wish for? —I do not wish for any, Combien 
de cafe desirez-vous?—Je n'en desire pas? 

Si on designe le nombre, combien se traduit par how 
many •' 

How many brothers have you? Combien de hires avez-vous? 

I do not know how many children they have, Je ne sais pas combien 
ils ont d’enfants. 

La distance s’exprime en anglais par how far. 

How far is it from Paris to London? Combien y a-t-il de Parish 
Londres? 

How far is it from here to your house? Combien y a-t-il d'ici chez 
vous? 

Pour designer l’espace de temps, combien et combien de 
temps se traduisent par how long: 

How long do you intend to stay? Combien de temps pensez-vous 
rester? 

How long does she usually remain? Combien de temps reste-t-elle 
ordinairement? 

3. Le mot encore a plusieurs equivalents en anglais: 

1. On 1’exprime par still quand on veut marquer la con¬ 
tinuation d’une action: 

He is still in France, II est eticore en France. 

She is still attending school, Elle va encore a Vfcole. 

2. S’il agit d’une chose qui n’est pas encore arrivee, on 
emploie yet. C’est surtout le cas dans une phrase negative: 

It is not yet three o’clock, II n'est pas encore trois heures. 

Is your friend here? —No; not yet, Votre ami est-il ici? — Non; pas 
encore. 

3. Pour indiquer la repetition d’une action, on se sert de 
again , qui a aussi le sens de de nouveau: 

He is going away again, II s'en va de nouveau ( encore ). 

He is living with us again, It demeure de nouveau ( encore) avec 


nous. 


6 


ANGLAIS 


5 


Enfin, dans le sens de en plus , encore se traduit par more 
(prononcez maur). 

Give me three more of them, Donnez-m'en encore trois. 

Bring two more knives, Apportez encore deux couteazix. 

4. En anglais, l’objet possede est souvent sous-entendu. 
Dans ce cas, on ajoute la desinence ’s du possessif au nom 
du possesseur, de la metne maniere que si l’objet possede 
etait exprime. Ceci a lieu specialement lorsque l’objet 
possede est un nom indiquant une idee de domicile, lorsque 
nous traduisons par la preposition chez: 

I am going to my uncle’s (ou, to my uncle’s house), Je vais chez 
mon oncle. 

I am coming from the painter’s, Je viens de chez le peintre. 

He is at John’s, II est chez Jean. 

5. Quand les pronoms demonstratifs celui, celle, ceiix, 
celles, marquent un rapport de possession, on ne les traduit 
pas en anglais, et on exprime le rapport de possession en 
ajoutant ’s au nom du possesseur. 

My house is as large as your father’s, Ma maison est aussi grande 
que celle de votre pere. 

This ximbrella is as good as John’s, Ce parapluie est aussi bon que 
celui de Jean. 


Le mot house est sous-entendu dans la premiere phrase, 
your lather's house , et le mot umbrella dans la seconde, as 
John's umbrella. 


6. II n’y a pas, en frangais, de mot correspondant exacte- 
ment au mot anglais home. Nous le traduisons generalement 
comme suit: 


at home!^ maison , au foyer , chez moi, chez nous , chez vous, 

\ch 


I am going home 


■t 


chez lui, chez elle, chez eux. 

\ Je vais chez moi. 

\Je vais a la maison. 

He likes his home, II aime son interieur. 

The pupils are returning to their homes, Les ettves rentrent dans 
leurs foyers. 

Are you going home, Allez-vous chez vous? 


5 


NEUVIEME LECON 


7 


7 . La preposition from., de, en anglais s’emploie surtout 
apres les adjectifs qui renferment une idee d’eloignement; 
c’est pourquoi nous en faisons usage apres far, loin: 

It is not far from here, Ce n'est pas loin d'ici. 

He is very far from us, II est bien loin de nous. 

8. Lorsque le substantif possesseur est au pluriel, et 
se termine par s, on ajoute simplement l’apostrophe, au 
lieu de ’ s: 

I like my brothers’ homes, J'aime les maisons de mes frbres. 

My sisters’ children are still very young, Les enfants de mes sczurs 
sont encore tres petits. 

9 . Avec hall, demi, l’article indefini a , ou an, se place 
apres l’adjectif: 

It is only half a mile, II y a settlement un demi-mille. 

He is coming for half an hour, II vient pour une demi-heure. 

Mais lorsque half est accompagne d’un autre adjectif, ou 
lorsqu’il est place apres un nombre entier, 1’article indefini a 
ou an precede half au lieu de le suivre: 

He is coming in two hours and a half, II va venir dans deux heures 
et demie. 

10 . All lieu de par, on emploie l’article indefini a ou an 
devant les noms de division du temps: 

He comes once a week, II vient une fois par semaine. 

I see him once a year, Je le vois une fois par annee. 

How much do you spend a day? Combien depensez-vous par jotir? 


EXEECICE ORAL 

Is Mr. Webster, your brother’s friend, a 
teacher of languages?—No, sir; he is not 
a teacher of languages; he is a music 
teacher. 

M. Webster, I'ami de votre frere, est-il un professeur de 
langues etrangeres? — Non , monsieur; il n'est pas 
professeur de langues etrangeres , il est professeur de 
musique. 

Is your uncle’s winter residence vacant in summer? —No, 
sir; it is not. 



8 ANGLAIS § 5 

Is your neighbor’s son as old as Charles? —No, madam; I 
do not think he is. 

Is Mr. Smith’s house very large?—No, sir; it is a small 
house. 

Is her father’s estate far from London? —No, sir; it is not. 

Is Mr. Brown your children’s teacher?—No, madam; he is 
not; Professor Smith is their teacher. 

Are your sister’s children in the park now? —No, madam; 
I do not think they are. 

Are Lucy’s gloves in your room, Florence? —No, dear; 
they are not in my room. 

Are Mr. Webster’s pupils diligent? —Some of them are 
quite diligent, but some are not. 

Are Mrs. Webster’s parents in the city now? —No, sir; 
they are not here. They are still in Paris. 

Are my neighbor’s children your pupils, Professor? —No, 
madam; they are not. 

Are John’s new books on that shelf? —No, Lucy. They 
are in my room. 

Are there any fruit trees in your uncle’s garden?—No; 
there are not. 

Is Lucy’s teacher living in Mr. Smith’s 
house?—Yes, madam; he is living there. 

Le professeur de Lucie demeiire-t-il chez M. Smith?— Oui, 
madame; il y demeure. 

Does your uncle’s friend intend to spend the winter in 
London? —Yes, sir; I think he does. 

Does Mr. Webster’s son speak English as well as Charles 
does? —Certainly, he does. 

Has Miss Smith, your niece’s friend, much talent for 
music?—Yes, she has. 

Does Florence wish to see John’s new vio¬ 
lin?—Yes, dear. 

Florence desire-t-elle voir le nouveau violon de Jean?—Oui, 
ma chh'e; elle desire le voir. 

Does Charles know where Mr. Brown’s uncle lives? —I 
think he does. 

Do your sister’s children attend this school? —Yes, they do. 


5 


NEUVI^ME LEQON 


9 


Do Mr. Jones’s parents always live in the country? —Yes. 
Are Lucy and your neighbor’s daughter studying with the 
same teacher? —Yes, they are. 

Do your friend’s relatives intend to come to see you? 

— Certainly. 

Do Mr. Smith’s children take lessons of Professor Brown? 

— Yes, they are taking lessons of him now. 

This gentleman’s 'friend is a Frenchman, is 
he not? —No, he is not a Frenchman; he 
is an Englishman. 

L'anii de ce monsieur est Frangais, n'est-ce pas?—Non, il 
n'est pas Frangais; il est Anglais. 

This woman’s husband is a painter, is he not? —No, he is 
not a painter; he is a merchant. 

The boy’s name is Charles, is it not? —No; I think his 
name is John. 

The physician’s wife is French, is she not? — O, no; she is 
a Russian. 

Florence’s teeth are very beautiful, are they not? —Very 
beautiful, indeed. 

Your daughter’s friend is that gentleman’s sister, is she 
not? —No, indeed; she is only a cousin. 

The professor’s relatives live in this city, do they not? 
Only in the winter. 

Your husband’s friend intends to return to London very 
soon, does he not? —I think not; he wishes to remain here. 

Is your neiglibor’s country house as large 
as Mr. Jones’s? —I think it is. 

La maison de campagne de votre voisin est-elle aussigrande 
que celle de M. Jones? —Oui, monsieur; je crois 
qu'elle Vest. 

Is that lady’s voice as pleasant as Lucy’s? —No; not quite 
so pleasant. 

Is your uncle’s country home as beautiful as Professor 
Brown’s?—Yes; it is just as beautiful. 

Is Charles’ book as interesting as John’s? —Quite as inter¬ 
esting. 


10 


ANGLAIS 


5 


Is your neighbor’s son as good a pupil as 
John?—Xes; why not? 

Le fils de votre voisin est-il aussi bon el eve que Jean?- 
Oui: pourquoi pas? 

Is Mrs. Smith’s sister as kind a woman as Mrs. Smith? 
— Yes; why do you ask? 

Is Mr. Webster’s brother as good a teacher as Professor 
Brown?—Yes; I think he is. 

Are there as many rooms in your brother’s house as there 
are in Mr. Smith’s? —There are. 

Are Mr. Brown’s relatives as rich as Mr. Jones’s? —I 
think so. 

Does your brother’s teacher speak as many languages as 
Charles’s teacher does? Yes; quite as many. 

Do your sister’s children study as well as your cousin’s 
children do? —Do you not know that they do? 

Are not the gentlemen’s hats in the dining 
room?—I do not know where they are. 

Les chapeaux de ces messieurs ne sont-ils pas dans la salle 
a manger?—Non, monsieur; ils n’y sont pas. Je ne 
sais pas oil ils sont. 

Are not the ladies’ gloves in the dining room? —No, 
madam; they are not there: I do not know where they are. 

Are not the children’s books on these shelves? —No; I 
think they are in your room. 

Are not your sisters’ homes too far from Professor 
Brown’s school? —Not at all, sir; they are very near it. 

Is not Mr. Smith the manager of your parents’ estate.— 
No. 

Do not your brothers’ children take lessons in music of 
Professor Jones? —Not now. 

My friend is at your house now, is he not? — 

No he is not. I do not know where he is. 

Mon ami est chez vous maintenant, n’est-ce pas?—Non; il 
n'est pas chez nous-, je ne sais pas oil il est. 

Mr. Jones is at their house now, is he not —No, sir; he is 
at home. 


§5 NEUVIEME LEQON 11 

My little daughter is at your friend’s house, is she not? — 
I think so. 

John is at your uncle’s house, is he not? —No; he is at 
school. 

Lucy intends to spend the day at your house, does she 
not? —No, dear; she intends to spend it at my uncle’s. 

My children are at your house, are they not? —No; they 
are at your neighbor’s. 

Florence is at our house now, is she not? —No; I think she 
is at Mrs. Smith’s. 

Is the professor at home? —Yes; he is at dinner now.— 
Yes; he is taking dinner now. —Yes; he is having dinner 
now. 

Are John and Lucy in the dining room? —Yes; they are 
at breakfast. —Yes; they are taking their breakfast. —Yes; 
they are having their breakfast. 

Let us go home, for It is quite late. 

A lions chez nous , car il est bien lard. 

Let him go to his room, for he is not well. 

Let the children go to school now. 

Let me go to my friend’s. 

Let them finish their English lesson. 

How many brothers and sisters have you, 
John?—I have three brothers and one 
sister, madam. 

Combien de Mres et de sceurs avez-vous, Jean?—J’ai trois 
frhres et une sceur, madame. 

How many languages do you speak, Mr. Reed? —I speak 
two, French and English. 

How many servants are there in your house, Lucy? —Two. 

How many English words do you know now, John? —O, I 
know a great many —about five hundred. 

How many banks are there in your city? —There are 
three, sir. 

How many children have they? —They have five, two sons 
and three daughters. 

How many minutes are there in an hour?—Sixty. 


12 


ANGLAIS 


5 


How many pupils are there in your school, John? —There 
are about two hundred and fifty. 

How many months are there in a year? —There are twelve. 

How mueli coffee (lo you wisli for?—I do not 
wish for any. 

Combien de cafe-desirez-vous ?—Je n'en desire pas. 

How much real estate does he possess? —I do not know, 
but I think he has much. 

How many pennies have you? —Six. 

How much tea have you? —We have none. 

How much wine do you drink at dinner? — I do not drink wine. 

How far is it from here to your house?—It is 
about a mile. 

Quelle distance y a-t-il d'ici chez vous?—Il y a a peu pres 
un mille. 

How far is it from here to that apple tree? —It is about a 
hundred and fifty feet. 

Howfar is John’s house from his school? —About half a mile. 
How far are we from London? —We are two miles and a 
half from London now. 

How far can you walk? —I can walk ten miles. 

How far are you going? —I am not going very far. 

How long do you intend to stay? —Until winter. 

Combien de temps avez-vous Vintention de rester? — J’ai 
V intention de rester jusqu ’en hiver. 

How long do you expect to remain in Paris? —I do not 
know yet, but I expect to be there two or three weeks. 

How long do they intend to stay? —About a week. 

How long does it take to go from here to your sister’s? — 
O, about an hour and a half. 

How long do you wish to rest? —I wish to rest an hour.— 
Call me at half past three. 

How long is she going to stay? —She cannot stay very 
long.— She must be at her uncle’s before four o’clock. 

Are you still asking that question?—Yes; I 
am still asking it. 

Demandez-vous encore cette question? — Oui; je la demande 


encore. 


§5 


NEUVIEME LEQON 


13 


Is she still waiting?—Yes. 

Is he still obliged to attend school? —Yes; he is. 

Are you still at breakfast? —Can you not see that we are? 
Do you still expect to go to Paris? —Certainly. I hope to 
be there soon now. 

Do they still hope to meet us? —Yes; they still hope to 
meet you. 

I am not yet acquainted with this gentleman. 

Je n'aipas encore fait la connaissance de ce monsieur. 

Does not John speak French yet? —No, not yet: but he is 
Studying it. 

Is not Lucy a good musician? —No; she is not. 

They are not studying English yet. 

John is not here yet; he is always late. 

You do not know your lesson well; study it 
again. 

Vous ne savez pas bien votre le$on; etudiez-la encore. 

If he comes again, tell him where I am. 

I am at home in the afternoon; come and see me again. 
He is again obliged to stay at home. 

If you see them, tell them to come again. 

Is this your umbrella, Mr. Webster?—No; it 
is my wife’s. 

Est-ce votre parapluie, M. Webster? — Non; c'est celui de 
ma femme. 

Is this your cup of tea? —No, madam; it is my husband’s. 
Where are your children? —They are at Mrs. Reed’s. 

Are those gentlemen your relatives? —No; they are rela¬ 
tives of Mr. Warren. 

Lucy is not here, is she? —No; she is at Florence’s. 

Where are you going?-I am going to my 
parents’. 

' Ou allez-vous?—Je vais chez mes parents. 

Where are you going? —We are going to the physician’s. 
Where is John going? —He is going to your uncle’s. 
Where is Lucy going? —She is going to her mother’s. 
Where are they going? —They are going to the Professor’s. 


14 


ANGLAIS 


5 


Where are those ladies going? —They are going to Mrs. 
Webster's. 

Is Mr. Reed at liome?-Yes, sir; lie is at home. 

Do you wish to speak to him? —Yes; if you 
please. 

M. Reed est-il chez lui?— Oui, monsieur; il est chez lui. 
Desirez-vous lui purler— Oui; s'il votes plait. 

Is Mrs. Reed at home? —Yes, madam; she is at home. Do 
you wish to speak to her? —Yes; if you please. 

Are John and Charles at home? —Yes. Do you wish to 
speak to them? —Yes; thank you. 

Are Lucy and Florence at home? —Yes. Do you wish to 
see them?—If you please. 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


Is Mrs. Webster at home? 

Yes, madam; she is. Do you wish 
to speak to her? 

If you please. 

Come in then.—Madam; a lady 
wishes to speak to you. 

Do you know her name? 

No, madam; I do not. 

Very well, Mary, say that I am 
coming. 

O, it is you Mrs. Reed! I am 
so glad to see you! How do 
you do? 

I am pretty well now, thank you. 
And how are you and dear little 
Florence? 

I am very well, but Florence has 
a cold; she is obliged to stay in 
her room. 

I am very sorry. You know that 
we intend to go to our country 
home in a week or two. When 
we are there, we expect to see 
you. 


Mme. Webster est-elle a la maison. 

Oui, madame; elle est a la maison. 
Desirez-vous lui parler? 

S’il vous plait. 

Entrez, alors. Madame; une dame 
desire vous parler. 

Savez-vous son nom? 

Non, madame; je ne le sais pas. 

Tres bien, Marie, dites-lui que je 
descends. 

Oh! e’est vous Mme. Reed! Je 
suis si contente de vois voir! 
Comment-vous portez-vous? 

Je me porte assez bien mainte- 
nant, je vous remercie. Com¬ 
ment allez-vous vous-meme et 
votre chere petite Florence? 

Je vais tres bien, mais Florence 
est enrhumee; elle est obligee de 
garder la chambre. 

J’en suis bien fachee. Vous savez 
que nous avons l’intention dul¬ 
ler dans notre maison de cam- 
pagne dans une semaine ou 
deux. Quand nous y serons, 
nous esperons vous voir. 




5 


NEUVIEME LEQON 


15 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


I thank you very much, my dear 
Mrs. Reed, but I am sorry to 
say that we cannot go so soon. 
Florence is attending school, 
and my husband has very im¬ 
portant business to transact. 
He is obliged to stay here for at 
least one month more. 

Well, come and see us in about a 
month, when the school year 
closes. You cannot stay in 
town all summer. It is too 
warm here. Mr. Webster needs 
a rest, I am sure. My husband 
is always so glad to see him. 
Come, give me that pleasure. 

Once more, I thank you very 
much Mrs. Reed; but I must 
speak to my husband first. You 
know he likes the country very 
much, and is always glad to get 
away from business for a little 
while. But here he comes now. 
Why not ask him about it? 
You speak to him first. 

O, Mrs. Reed! How are you, 
and how is Mr. Reed? 

Quite well, thank you. Now Mr. 
Webster, we expect to be in our 
new country home in about two 
weeks, and we expect to see all 
your family there. We wish 
you to spend a month with us. 


Thank you very much, Mrs. Reed. 
You know that I am always 
glad to be with you and Mr. 
Reed. But I am sorry to say | 


Je vous remercie beaucoup, ma 
chere Mme. Reed, mais je suis 
fachee de dire que nous ne pou- 
vons pas y aller de si tot. Flo¬ 
rence va a l’ecole, et mon mari a 
d’importantes affaires a termi¬ 
ner. II est oblige de rester ici 
pour au moins encore un mois. 

Eh bien! venez nous voir dans un 
mois a peu pres, quand l’annee 
scolaire flnira. Vous ne pouvez 
pas rester en ville tout Fete. II 
fait trop chaud ici. M. Web¬ 
ster a besoin de repos, je suis 
sure. Mon mari est toujours si 
content quand il peut le voir. 
Venez, faites-moi ce plaisir. 

Une fois de plus, je vous remercie 
beaucoup, Mme. Reed, mais il 
faut que je parle d’abord a mon 
mari. Vous savez qu’il aime 
beaucoup la campagne, et qu’il 
est toujours content quand il 
peut s’en aller loin de ses af¬ 
faires pour quelque temps. 
Mais voici mon mari qui arrive. 
Pourquoi ne lui parleriez-vous 
pas vous-meme? 

Oh Mme. Reed! Comment vous 
portez-vous, et comment se 
porte M. Reed? 

Nous nous portons tres bien, je 
vous remercie. Maintenant, M. 
Webster, nous nous attendons a 
etre dans notre nouvelle maison 
de campagne dans environ deux 
semaines, et nous esperons y 
voir toute votre famille. Nous 
desirons que vous passiez un 
mois avec nous. 

Merci bien, Mme. Reed. Vous 
savez que je suis toujours tres 
heureux d’etre avec vous et M. 
Reed. Mais je suis fache de 



16 


ANGLAIS 


§5 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION — (Continuees) 


that we cannot come for a 
month at least. 

O, I am so glad that you are com¬ 
ing! Write to me when you are 
ready to come, Mrs. Reed. 

Certainly. Now, you are going 
to take dinner with us, are you 
not? 

No, my dear, I cannot. Mr. 
Reed is coming home at twelve 
o’clock. He expects me to be 
there for dinner. I must not be 
late. 

But it is only a quarter after 
eleven. Come and see Florence; 
I know she likes you. 

Not now, madam; I must speak 
to the servants before dinner, 
but this afternoon I may come 
again to see her, and to spend 
some time with her. 


dire que nous ne pouvons pas 
y aller avant au moins un mois. 

Oh! je suis si contente que vous 
veniez! Ecrivez —moi quand 
vous serez prete a venir Mme. 
Reed. 

Certainement. Maintenant, vous 
allez diner avec nous, n’est-ce 
pas? 

Non, ma chere, je ne peux pas. 
M. Reed rentre a midi. II 
m’at tend pour diner. Je ne 
veux pas etre en retard. 

Mais il n’est que onze heures et 
quart. Venez voir Florence; je 
sais qu’elle vous aime. 

Pas maintenant, madame; il faut 
que je parle aux domestiques 
avant le diner, mais je revien- 
drai probablement la voir cet 
apres-midi, et passer quelque 
temps avec elle. 


PHRASES USIJELLES 


I expect to see you. 

How much do you spend a day? 
Can you spend the afternoon with 
us? 

Gladly, if that does not trouble 
you. 

I am in trouble. 

Where do you spend your time? 
What do you hope for? 

This house is to be let. 

I think you are not right in that. 

I long to see my mother. 

He longs to be rich. 

Please, do not trouble yourself. 

Not in the least. 


Je compte vous voir. 

Combien depensez-vous par jour? 

Pouvez-vous passer l’apres-midi 
avec nous. 

Volontiers si cela ne vous derange 
pas. 

Je suis dans l’embarras. 

Ou passez-vous votre temps? 

Qu’est-ce que vous esperez? 

Cette maison est a louer. 

Je trouve que vous n’avez pas 
raison en cela. 

Il me tarde de voir ma mere. 

Il lui tarde d’etre riche. 

Je vous en prie, ne vous derangez 
pas. 

Pas le moins du monde. 





5 


NEUVIEME LECON 


17 


PHRASES USUELLES—(Continuees) 


I am going to start. 

My business is doing well. 
Business is bad. 

Return my letter. 

I am coming to see you all. 

What do you come here for? 

Why do you not keep your word? 

Let me see! 

It takes a long time. 

Very far from it. 

Must I wait for you here or at 
your house? 

At what time must we go? 

How long does it take to go there? 

It takes three hours and a half. 
You must know, once for all, 
that. 

Do you know where Main street 
is? 

It must be so. 

She must be English. 

She does not know what to say. 

I know all your family. 

Tell them to come in. 

Tell my wife I wish to speak to 
her. 

You please him or her. 

You are doing some good. 

They are doing what they can. 
What do you do, then? 

Let me know where you live. 

I have no need of it. 

How is it? 

Give my love to Lucy. 

I need to rest. 

Why do you go away so soon? 

I must go away at once. 


Je vais partir. 

Mes affaires vont bien. 

Les affaires ne vont pas. 

Renvoyez-moi ma lettre. 

Je viens vous voir tous. 

Qu’est-ce que vous venez chercher 
ici? 

Pourquoi ne tenez-vous pas votre 
parole ? 

Voyons! 

II faut longtemps. 

11 s’en faut de beaucoup. 

Faut-il que je vous attende ici ou 
chez moi. 

A quelle heure faut-il que nous 
partions? 

Combien de temps faut-il pour 
y aller? 

11 faut trois heures et demie. 

II faut que vous sachiez cela une 
fois pour toutes. 

Savez-vous ou est la Grande Rue? 

Cela doit etre ainsi. 

Elle doit etre Anglaise. 

Elle ne sait que repondre. 

Je connais toute votre famille. 

Dites-leur d’entrer. 

Dites a ma femme que je veux lui 
parler. 

Vous lui plaisez. 

Vous faites du bien. 

Ils font ce qu’ils peuvent. 

Que faites-vous done? 

Faites-moi savoir ou vous de- 
meurez. 

Je n’en ai que faire. 

Comment se fait-il? 

Faites mes amities a Lucie. 

J’ai besoin de me reposer. 

Pourquoi vous en allez-vous si 
tot? 

II faut que je m’en aille imme- 
diatement. 






18 


ANGLAIS 


5 


PHRASES TJSUEEEES—(Continuees) 

Ne vous eloignez pas tant de nous. 
Je me m 61 e de mes affaires. 


Do not go so far away from us. 

I am attending to my business. 
You may come. 

I am very much obliged to you. 
What am I to do? 

Remain at home as long as you 
can. 

How is the weather? 

It is still early. 

How old are you? 

How does your mother like Paris? 

What do you think of this old 
lady? * 

I want the cashier. 


Vous pouvez venir. 

Je vous suis bien oblige. 

Que dois-je faire? 

Restez a la maison le plus long- 
temps possible. 

Quel temps fait-il? 

II est encore de bonne heure. 

Quel &ge avez-vous? 

Comment votre mere trouve-t-elle 
Paris? 

Que pensez-vous de cette vieille 
dame? 

Je demande le caissier. 


EXERCICE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 

1. Are you attending Professor Brown’s school, Mary? — 
No, sir; I am attending Professor Smith’s. 

2. I am going to the country in two or three weeks; I 
need a good rest. 

3. This teacher deserves the love of his pupils, and the 
gratitude of their parents. 

4. How far is your parents’ house from the school? —I do 
not know, but I think it is about half a mile. 

5. Is your gardener going away this month? —Yes; he 
and one of our servants are going away. 

6. My husband says we must spend the holidays in the 
country. 

7. Our new country home is a very beautiful house. It 
is about a quarter of a mile from Lake George. 

8. Our neighbor’s children and your daughter are great 
friends. 

9. I have some important business to transact. I cannot 
stay in the country all the time; I am obliged to come to 
town at least once a week. 

10. Have your children a private teacher? —No; they have 
not; they are attending Professor Webster’s school. 




5 


NEUVIEME LECON 


19 


11. Are you still investing in real estate, Mr. Jones? — 
Yes, I am. I think it is a good investment because our city 
is continually growing. 

12. How many English words do you know now, George? 
— 0,1 do not know, but I think I know at least four hundred. 

13. How far is your house from the city? —O, it is not 
far; it is about half a mile. 

14. How much wine do you drink at dinner? —I do not 
drink any; I do not drink wine at all. I take only tea 
or coffee. 

15. Why do you not take some dessert, Edward? There 
are some very good apples, peaches, and pears. —Thank you, 
•I am not at all hungry. 

16. Is not this country home pretty? —It is indeed. 

17. When you come back from the park, bring some 
pretty leaves for our dining-room table. 

18. I do not like to meet that man; he always asks too 
many questions. 


20 


ANGLAIS 


§5 


DIXIEME LECON 


CYLINDEE PIIONOGRAPIIIQUE 


VOCABULAIRE 


I. c. s. 

English Record No. 10 

to accommodate, accom- 
moder, obliger, faire plaisir 
tlie advice, I’avis, le ren- 
seignement 

to advise, conseiller, in¬ 
former, donner avis 
tlie anteroom, /’antic ham- 
bre 

to apply, s'adresser 
the assistant, Vassistant 
to believe, avire 
to call on, passer chez 
the call, la visite 
the card, la carte 
concerning, au sujet de,con- 
cernant 

to desire, desirer 
the draught, le courant d’dir 
the floor, Vetage, le plancher 
to furnish, fournir , meubler 
further, autre 
to grant, donner, accorder 
ill, malade 

the information, le ren- 
seignement 


i. c. s. 

Cylindre d'Anglais No. 10 

to inspect, inspecter , exa¬ 
miner, visiter 

the inspection, Vexamen, 
la visite 

the institution, V institu¬ 
tion 

the interest, Vinteret 
kindly, bon, s'il vous plait 
the left, la gauche 
the liberty, la liberte 
merely, simplement, seule- 
ment 

the message, le message 
necessary, necessaire 
the object, Vobjet 
to occupy, occuper, s'occuper 
de, employer 
the office, le bureau 
to pardon, pardonner, ex¬ 
cuser 

the public, le public 
to request, demander, prier 
the right, la droite, le droit, 
la raison 
to say, dire 





5 


DIXIEME LEQON 


21 


VOCABUL AIRE— (Continue) 


the secretary, le secretaire 
to shut, fermer 
to step in, entrer (pour un 
temps tres court) 
strong, fort 

the superintendent, lechef, 
le superieur 

to trouble, deranger, impor- 
tuner, embarrasser 
valuable, precieux 
the visitor, le visiteur 


to want, desirer, vouloir, 
avoir besoin de 

the way, le chemin, la ma- 
niere, le moyen 

which, quel, lequel, que, qui 
who, qui 

whom, que, qui, lequel, la- 
quel le, lesquels, etc. 
whose, duquel, de qui, dont, 
a qui 

the window, la lenetre 


PHRASES ET 

Who is there? 

There is a young man in the 
anteroom who desires to 
see Mr. Clay. 

Which Mr. Clay does he want, 
the old gentleman or his 
son, and what is the object 
of his call? 

He wishes to speak to the 
young Mr. Clay, for whom 
he has an important mes¬ 
sage. 

Very well; tell Mr. Clay, 
whom, I believe, you can 
find in his private room. 

Whose card is this? 

That is the card of a gentle¬ 
man who wants some in¬ 
formation about our insti¬ 
tution. 

What does he want to know? 

He wishes to inspect our in- 


CONVERSATION 

Qui est la? 

II y a un jeune homme dans 
l’antichambre qui desire 
voir M. Clay. 

Lequel des MM. Clay veut-il 
voir, le pere ou le fils, et 
quel est le motif de sa 
visite? 

II veut parler au jeune M. 
Clay, pour qui il a un 
message important. 

Tres bien; prevenez M. Clay 
que vous trouverez je crois 
dans son cabinet. 

A qui est cette carte? 

C’est la carte d’un monsieur 
qui demande des renseigne- 
ments surnotre institution. 

Que desire-t-il savoir? 

II veut visiter notre institu- 





22 


ANGLAIS 


5 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION—(Continuees) 


stitution, and see just what 
we are doing. 

What a strong draught there 
is here! Shut this window, 
please, and ask that gentle¬ 
man kindly to step in. 

How are you, sit? What can 
I do for you? 

Pardon my liberty. I do not 
intend to occupy much of 
your time, which I know 
is very valuable. What 
I wish to say is merely 
this: Professor Harrison, 
whose secretary I am, and 
who takes much interest in 
the schools of this country, 
asks you kindly to furnish 
him with some information 
concerning your institu¬ 
tion. I am sorry to trouble 
you, but as your superin¬ 
tendent is very ill at pres¬ 
ent, I do not know to 
whom to apply for the 
necessary information. 


We are glad to grant any 
request from Professor 
Harrison, and I advise 
you to apply to Mr. Hard¬ 
ing, the assistant superin¬ 
tendent, who is always 


tion et connaitre exacte- 
ment ce que nous faisons. 

Quel grand courant d’air il y 
a ici! Fermez cette fene- 
tre, je vous prie, et dites a 
ce monsieur de vouloir 
bien entrer. 

Monsieur, je vous salue. 
Qu’y a-t-il pour votre 
service? 

Excusez ma liberty. Je n’ai 
pas l’intention d’occuper 
beaucoup de votre temps 
que je sais tres pr^cieux. 
Ce que je veux dire est 
simplement ceci: Le Pro- 
fesseur Harrison dont je 
suis le secretaire, et qui 
prend beaucoup d’interet 
aux ecoles de ce pays, 
vous demande d’avoir la 
bonte de lui fournir quel- 
ques renseignements con- 
cernant votre institution. 
Je regrette de vous de¬ 
ranger, mais comme votre 
directeur est tres malade 
a present, je ne sais pas a 
qui m’adresser pour ob- 
tenir les renseignements 
n6cessaires. 

Nous sommes heureux de 
pouvoir etre agreables au 
Professeur Harrison et je 
vous conseille de vous 
adresser a M. Harding, le 
sous-directeur qui est tou- 




§5 DIXIEME LEQON 23 

PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


glad to receive visitors. 
His office is on this floor. 

Which way is it, please, to 
the right, or to the left? 

It is on your left, sir. 

Your institution is open to 
the public for inspection 
today, is it not? 

No, sir; it is not, but it gives 
me pleasure to accommo¬ 
date you. Is there any 
further advice that I can 
give you? 

No, sir; thank you. You are 
very kind. 


jours content de recevoir 
des visiteurs. Son bureau 
est a cet etage. 

De quel cote est-ce, s’il vous 
plait, a droite ou a gauche? 

C’est a votre gauche, mon¬ 
sieur. 

Votre institution est ouverte 
aux visiteurs aujourd’hui, 
n’est-ce pas? 

Non, monsieur; elle ne Test 
pas, mais c’est un plaisir 
pour moi de vous obliger. 
Y a-t-il d’autres renseigne- 
ments que je puisse vous 
donner? 

Non, monsieur; merci. Vous 
etes bien bon. 


REMAKQbES 

1. L’objet de cette legon est de donner l’emploi des 
pronoms relatifs et des pronoms interrogatifs. Les 
premiers sont ainsi appeles parce qu’ils se rapportent 
(relatif veut dire qui se rapporte a) a un nom ou a un pronom 
qui precede. Les seconds sont appeles interrogatifs parce 
qu’ils servent a interroger. Les pronoms relatifs ont une 
double fonction dans la phrase: Ils represented un nom, et 
ils joignent deux ou plusieurs propositions ensemble: 

Cet homme est mon ami] 

+ > = Cet homme qui parle est mon ami. 

Cet homme parle J 

Dans cette phrase, qui est mis a la place du mot homme et 
il joint en meme temps les deux propositions. Le mot 
homme , auquel se rapporte le pronom relatif, est appele 
Vantecedent (qui est place avant) de qui. 




24 


ANGLAIS 


§5 


Dans la lecon que nous etudions maintenant, vous trou- 
verez des exemples de pronoms relatifs et de pronoms 
interrogates. Pour plus de clarte, nous les etudierons dans 
l’ordre qui suit: 


Pronoms relatifs simples: 


wlio 

wliicli 

what 

tliat 


Who , which , et what sont aussi pronoms interrogates. 


2. Le Pronom Relatif Who. — Who est employe pour les 
personnes, aussi pour les animaux ou les choses que l’on 
personnifie, c’est-a-dire dont on parle comme s’ils etaient 
des personnes: 

The man who is speaking is my friend, L'homme qui parle est 
moil ami. 

I have a friend who speaks French, J'ai tin ami qui parle frangais. 

Lorsque plusieurs verbes se suivent, et qu’ils ont le meme 
sujet who , il n’est pas necessaire de le repeter devant chaque 
verbe comme en frangais: 

John is a man who eats and drinks all day long, Jean est un homme 
qui mange et qui boit toute la jour nee. 

I have a friend who speaks, reads, and writes English, J'ai un 
ami qui parle, qui lit , et qui ecrit Vanglais. 

3. Le Pronom Interrogate Who. — Le pronom interrogate 
who ne peut aussi se rapporter qu’aux personnes ou aux 
choses personnifiees. II doit etre toujours dans cette forme 
le sujet du verbe. Dans ce cas, c’est reellement un pronom 
indefini, car la personne qui s’informe ne sait rien des per¬ 
sonnes dont elle s’informe: 

Who is coming? Qui vient? 

Who is that gentleman near Lucy? Qui est ce monsieur pres de 
Lucie? 

4. Le Pronom Relatif Which. —Le pronom relatif which 
est employe de la meme maniere que who , lorsque son 
antecedent est un nom d’animal ou de chose inanimee. 
Which est aussi employe lorsqu’il a pour antecedent une 
proposition toute entiere deja enoncee: 



5 


DIXIEME LEQON 


25 


The apples which are on that tree are very sour, Les pommes qui 
sont sur cet arbre sont tres aigres. 

My son is good and diligent, which pleases me very much, Mon 
fils est bon et applique , ce qui me plait beaucoup. 

5. Le Pronom Interrogate Which.—Which, comme pro- 
nom interrogatif,. peut se rapporter aux personnes ou aux 
choses; il peut etre sujet ou complement, mais il s’emploie 
toujours pour un objet choisi entre plusieurs autres: 

Which of those books do you like? Lesquels de ces livres aimez- 
vous? 

Which of the men are ready? Lesquels de ces hommes sont prets? 

6. Le Pronom Relatif What. — Le pronom relatif what 
correspond a ce qui ou ce que en frangais pour le sujet, et a 
ce qtie pour le complement direct. What est dans ce cas un 
double pronom relatif. La raison en est qu’il joue a la fois 
le role de l’antecedent et du pronom relatif, etant equivalent 
aux expressions that which , ou the thing which, dans 
lesquelles that ou thing est l’antecedent de which: 

I want what pleases me, Je veux ce qui me plait. 

Tell me what you want, Dites-moi ce que vous voulez. 

What he says is right, Ce qu'il dit est juste. 

Lorsqu’il est suivide l’infinitif, il sert a traduire le que 
frangais entre deux verbes: 

I do not know what to say, Je ne sais que dire. 

She does not know what to do, Elle ne sait que faire. 

What of, suivi d’un pronom forme une locution elliptique 
tres elegante en anglais: 

You speak of Mr. Clay, what of him? Vous parlez de M. Clay, 
que dites-vous de lui? 

Your brother is 'going, what of that? Voire fibre s'en va, que 
voulez-vous dire par la? 

What s’emploie aussi comme exclamation: 

What! You are not ready yet? Comment! Vous n'etes pas encore prit? 

What! She is here? Quoi! Elle est ici? 

7. Le Pronom Interrogatif What. — Le pronom interro¬ 
gatif what ne se rapporte qu’aux choses, et se traduit en fran¬ 
gais par que ou quoi : 


26 


ANGLAIS 


§5 


What do you say? Que dites-vous? 

What do you want? Que de-mandez-vous? 

Of what are you thinking? A ( De ) quoipensez-vous? 

D’apres ce qui precede, et pour faire un distinction entre 
who et what lorsqu’on s’informe d’une personne, on emploie 
who s’il s’agit du nom de cette personne, et de what si on a 
en vue son etat: 

Who is this gentleman? —It is Mr. Smith, Quel est ce monsieur?— 
C'est M. Smith. 

What is this gentleman? —He is a physician. Quel est ce monsieur? 
C'est un medecin. 

Remarquez aussi que dans le premier cas, on traduit c'est 
par it is, parce qu’on a le nom du monsieur en vue, tandis 
que dans le second c'est est he is, parce qu’on envisage 
l’homme. 

8. Les Inflexions de Who. — Lorsque le relatif who sert a 
exprimer un rapport de possession, il devient whose , qui n’est 
en realite que le pronom who avec le signe de possession 's. 
II traduit dans ce cas dont, de qui, duquel , etc. en frangais. 
Whose comme le pronom who s’emploie surtout pour les 
personnes, et il est dans ce cas immediatement suivi du 
substantif dont il est le complement: 

The man whose garden I see, is very rich, L' homme dont je vois le 
jar din est tr'Cs riche. 

These are the children whose father is ill, Void les enfants dont le 
p'ere est malade. 

Si Ton n’a pas a exprimer un rapport de possession, dont, 
de qui, duquel , etc. se traduisent par whom precede ou non 
d’une preposition, pour les personnes: 

The man of whom I speak is here, L'homme dont je parte est ici. 

The lady whom I know is a good musician, La dame que je connais 
est une bonne musicienne. 

Le pronom interrogate who a les memes inflexions que le 
pronom relatif, comme on peut le voir dans les phrases 
suivantes: 

Who is there? Qui est la? 

Whom do you see? Qui voyez-vous? 

Whose book is this? A qui est ce livre? 


5 


DIXIEME LEQON 


27 


9. Le pronom which n’a aucune des inflexions du pronom 
who; il est invariable. Quoiqu’il puisse dans certains cas se 
rapporter aux personnes, il est surtout employe pour les 
choses: 

Which of those gentlemen is Mr. Harrison? Lequel de ces messieurs 
est M. Harrison ? 

In which city do you wish to live? Dans quelle ville voulez-vous 
demeurer? 

My uncle’s estate, of which I am the manager, is very large, Les 
proprietes de mon oncle, dont je suis le gerant sont tops gran des. 

10. Le mot way , chemin, s’emploie en anglais pour 
traduire notre expression De quel coti? qui se rend par Which 
rvayf litteralement Quel chemin ? Les reponses de ce cote-ci, 
de ce cote-la sont respectivement this way et that way. 

Which way are you going? De quel coti allez-vous? 

I am going this way, but he is going that way, Je vais de ce c6ti-ci , 
mais il va de ce cote-la. 

11. Le dernier des pronoms relatifs dont nous avons a 
nous occuper dans cette leqon est le pronom that qui 
s’emploie a la place de who et which dans certains cas. Il 
se dit des personnes et des choses. 

That ne peut pas etre precede d’une preposition quand il 
est pronom relatif. Mais comme en anglais l’usage permet 
de rejeter une preposition apres le verbe, on peut alors 
employer that si la preposition est placee apres le verbe: 

The man that I speak of is here, L'homme dont je parle est id. 

The lady that he is speaking with is very beautiful, La dame avec 
laquelle il parle est tops jolie. 

II est assez difficile de faire la distinction de who , which , et 
that. Pour le present, nous nous en tiendrons au principe 
suivant: 

Lorsqu’une preposition subordonnee joue le role d’un 
adjectif, il faut l’introduire au moyen du pronom relatif that: 

The man that is ill cannot be happy, L'homme qui est malade ne 
pent pas Hre heureux. 

The teacher that is kind deserves the love of his pupils, Le maitre 
qui est bienveillant nitrite l'amour de ses llives. 


28 


ANGLAIS 


5 


Dans la premiere phrase, la proposition that is ill a la 
fonction d’un adjectif; elle sert a restreindre le sens du mot 
man; c’est comme si l’on disait the ill man , c’est pourquoi 
cette proposition commence par that. II en est de meme 
dans la seconde phrase, the teacher that is kind etant equiva¬ 
lent a the kind teacher. 

Mais lorsque la proposition ajoute une circonstance a la 
proposition principale, et que son rang est a peu pres egal 
a celui de cette principale, on emploie who ou which: 

He is reading a letter from Mr. Harrison, who is his brother, It 
lit une lettre de M. Harrison qui est son fr'ere. 

I am going to offer him some apples, which come from our garden, 
Je vais lui offrir des pcmmes qui viennent de noire iardin. 


EXERCICE ORAL 

The children who are studying well are 
sure to make progress. 

Les enfants qui etudient bien sont stirs de faire des progrhs. 

Henry, who is very happy today, may be very sorry soon. 

John, who has an important message for you, is waiting 
in the dining room. 

My cousin who plays so well is very ill. 

That gentleman who is speaking to your sister comes to 
see us quite often. 

Who is the manager of your uncle’s estate? — 

My brother is the manager of it. 

Qui est le gbrant des propriHes de votre oncle?—Mon frere 
en est le gerant. 

Who is the superintendent of this institution? —Mr. Har¬ 
rison is the superintendent. 

Who is your teacher, Miss Clay? —Professor Brown is my 
teacher at present. 

Who are those gentlemen? —They are visitors; they wish 
to inspect our institution. 

Who are you? —I am one of Mr. Smith’s servants; he asks 
you kindly to come and see him. 



§5 DIXIEME LEQON 29 

Who has Lucy’s book? —Charles has it; I think he is read¬ 
ing it now. 

Who has my pens?—I have them, John; here they are. 

Who is living in that house? —Our gardener. 

Who wants tea? —Florence wants some, I believe; she is 
very thirsty. 

Who can tell me where my sister is? —Your sister is at my 
aunt’s now. 

Who knows where the physician lives? —Ask Mary; I 
think she knows where he lives. 

What is Charles doing now? —He is studying 
in liis room. 

Que fait Charles maintenant?—II etudie dans sa chambre 

What is Lucy reading? —She is reading a very interesting 
German book. 

What is this young lady’s name? —Her name is Florence; 
she is one of fny pupils. 

What is there in that basket? —Some peaches, I think. 

What are you doing, Charles? —I am writing a letter. 

What have we for dinner?—We have cold beef, vegetables, 
coffee, and fruit. 

What can I do for you, Mr. Smith? —Please, tell me where 
Mr. Clay’s office is. 

What do you intend to do after dinner, Lucy? —I intend to 
take a walk with Florence. 

What does the gentleman want? —He desires to get some 
information about our institution. 

What do the children want? —They want some peaches. 

What does Professor Harrison teach? —French, German, 
and Spanish. 

Which of your cousins intend to go to Paris? 

—My cousins Florence and Huey intend to 
go there. 

Lesquelles de vos coiosines ont Vintention d’alter a Paris?— 

Mes cousines Florence et Lucy , ont Vintention d’y 
alter. 

Which of these books do you wish to read? —I wish to 
read the English book. 


30 


ANGLAIS 


5 


Which of those gentlemen is Mr. Jones? —The gentleman 
with the cane is Mr. Jones. 

Which language do you prefer to speak, English or French? 
— I prefer to speak English. 

Which of those houses does Mr. Harding occupy? —He 
occupies the small house on the corner. 

Which of your sisters speaks English, Lucy or Mary? — 
My sister Mary does. 

In which city do you prefer to live, in Paris or in London? 
I prefer to live in Paris. 

Which gentleman do you wish to see, the old gentleman 
or his son? —I wish to see the young Mr. Harding. 

Whose hat is this? -I think it is my brother’s. 

A qui est ce chapeau?—Je crois que c'est celui de mon frbre. 

Whose children are they? —They are my neighbor’s. 

Whose card is this? —It is the card of a gentleman who 
desires to see you. 

Whose voice do you think it is? —I believe it is Lucy’s. 

Whose estate are you manager of? —Mr. Harding’s. 

Do you know whose umbrella this is? —It is my sister’s. 

Can you tell me whose house this is?—It is my uncle’s. 

To whom are you writing, Charles? — I am 
writing to a friend. 

A qui ecrivez-vous , Charles? — J ’Scris d un ami. 

Of whom are you taking lessons in French, Lucy? —I am 
taking them of Professor Harding. 

For whom are those beautiful roses? —They are for my 
dear little sister Lucy. 

To whom do you advise me to apply for information 
concerning this school? —I advise you to apply to Mr. 
Harrison. 

With whom do you intend to take dinner today?—I intend 
to take dinner with Mr. Clay, our assistant superintendent. 

Whom do you wish to see, madam? —I wish to see the 
secretary of this institution. 

Do you know to whom I can give this book? —Why, give 
it to Lucy’s friend. 


§5 DIXIEME LEQON 31 

Wliat languages do you speak?-I speak Eng¬ 
lish, French, and German. 

Quelles langues parlez-vous?-Je parle anglais , franqais 
et allemand. 

What information do you want? —I merely wish to know 
when the teacher is coming. 

What school do your children attend? —They are attending 
a private school? 

What kind of fruit do you wish for breakfast, madam? — 
Please, get some peaches and some pears. 

In what city does your brother live? —He lives in London. 

What relatives have you in this city? —I have a brother 
and an uncle here. 

What kind of a pupil is John? —John is an excellent pupil, 
for he is very diligent. 

What a draft there is here! Please shut the 
window. 

Quel courant d'air il y a ici! Fermez la fengtre, je vous 
prie. 

What a large city London is! —How large, indeed! 

What splendid wine this is, Mr. Jones! —You are right, 
it is fine! 

What a charming voice you have, my dear! —Have I? 

What splendid English your brother speaks!—Yes; does 
he not? 

The gentleman in whose house you live, is 
my cousin. 

Le monsieur chez qui vous demezirez est mon cousin. 

My sister, whose children are taking lessons of Professor 
Clay, says that he is an excellent teacher. 

A visitor, whose object is to inspect our institution, 
desires to see the superintendent. 

Mr. Jones, the gentleman of whose estate you are the 
manager, is my uncle. 

Mr. Harrison, whose country residence is not far from 
here, comes to see us quite often. 

Professor Brown, whose secretary I am, is now writing a 
book about our country. 


32 


ANGLAIS 


5 


My friend, Mr. Jones, whom I believe you 
know quite well, intends to go to Russia 
tliis winter. 

Mon ami M. Jones , que votes connaissez tres bien, je crois, 
a Vintention d’ alter en Rnssie cet hiver. 

The young- lacly to whom you are giving lessons in French 
is my cousin. 

I want to see Mr. Harding, for whom I have an important 
message. 

The gentleman whom you. wish to see is not in town 
today. 

Professor Smith, of whom also I am taking music lessons, 
says that you play the violin with much feeling. 

John’s friend, from whom you wish to get certain infor¬ 
mation concerning your brother, is at my uncle’s now. 

The house in which we live is not very large. 

La maison dans laquelle nous demeurons n'est pas tres 
grande. 

The French book which my brother is reading is very 
interesting. 

The wine which you offer me is too sour; I cannot drink it. 

The school which our children attend is not far from our 
house. 

Mr. Webster can furnish you the information which you 
desire concerning your friends in Paris. 

My uncle’s estate, of which I am the manager, is very 
large. 

The beautiful house which Mr. Clay occupies in winter is 
usually vacant in summer. 

The gentleman of whom you are speaking is 
my friend. — The gentleman whom you are 
speaking of is my friend.—The gentleman 
yon are speaking of is my friend. 

Le monsieur dont vous parlez est mon ami. 

The house in which we live is very large. 

The house which we live in is very large. 

The house we live in is very large. 

The pen with which you are writing is very bad. 


5 


DIXIEME LEQON 


33 


The pen which you are writing with is very bad. 

The pen you are writing with is very bad. 

The boy to whom I intend to give this book is my pupil. 
The boy whom I intend to give this book to is my pupil. 
The boy I intend to give this book to is my pupil. 

The gentleman whom you wish to see is at my friend’s 
house. 

The gentleman you wish to see is at my friend’s. 

Please, give Jolm what he asks for. 

Donnez a Jean ce qu'il demande , je vous prie. 

I am sorry I cannot do as I wish. 

What I wish to know is where Mr. Harding lives. 

I always think of what I say. 

I eat what I like. 

Eat what pleases you. 

Which way are you going, John?—! am going 
this way. 

De quel cote allez-vous, Jean?—Je vais de ce cdte. 

Which way is your friend going? —He is going that way. 
Do you know which way she usually goes?—She usually 
goes that way. 

Which way are those gentlemen going? —They are coming 
our way. 

I do not know which way to go. 

Do you know the way to Mr. Harding’s country home? — 
No, sir; I do not. 

You are speaking of Mr. Harding, what of 
him? 

Vous parlez de M. Harding , que dites-vous de lui ? 

You are speaking of Mrs. Harding, what of her? 

You are speaking of those gentlemen, what of them? 

You say that your sister is coming, what of that? 

What! she is not ready yet? 

What! is she not coming? 

I have to go to see my friend, Mr. Harding. 

II faut que j'aille voir (J’ai a aller voir) mon ami , M. 

Harding. 


34 


ANGLAIS 


5 


I have to tell Mrs. Smith where my uncle lives. 

You have to speak French very well, if you can speak it as 
well as your brother does. 

He has to find his hat, for he wishes to take a walk now. 

Mr. Clay has to return to St. Petersburg. 

John has to finish his music lesson before dinner. 

We have to walk from our house to mother’s every 
morning. 

Usually they have to stay here until quite late. 

My parents have to remain in London. 

l)o you wish to see my new gloves?—Yes, 
dear; I wisli to see them. 

Desirez-vous voir mes gants neufsf —Oui, rna chore; je 
desire les voir. 

Do you know your English and French lesson? —Yes; I 
am glad to say that I know them quite well. 

Do you like to read my new books? —Yes, Lucy; I like 
very much to read them. 

Does your friend often receive letters from his relatives in 
France? —Certainly; he receives letters from them quite often. 

Does Miss Jones desire to ask them about her brother and 
his life in Paris? —Yes, sir; she does. 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


Come in. What is it, Mary? 

Here is the card of a gentleman 
who wants to see you. He says 
he has an important message 
for you. 

Thank you, Mary. I do not know 
this gentleman. Tell him to 
come in. 

Very well, sir. 

* 

* * 

Good afternoon, sir. What can I 
do for you? 

I am sorry to trouble you. I am 
Mr. Harding’s secretary. He 
wishes to know if you can come 


Entrez. Qu’y a-t-il, Marie? 

Voici la carte d’un monsieur qui 
demande a vous voir. II dit 
qu’il a un message important 
pour vous. 

Merci, Marie. Je ne connais pas 
ce monsieur. Dites-Jui d’entrer. 

Tres bien, monsieur. 

* 

* * 

Bonjour, monsieur. Qu’y a-t-il 
pour votre service? 

Je suis bien fache de vous dei'an- 
ger. Je suis le secretaire de M. 
Harding. II desire savoir si 




5 


DIXIEME LEQON 


35 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION—(Continuees) 


to the bank this afternoon at 
three o’clock. He sajs there is 
much to do and that you must 
be there. 

Tell Mr. Harding I cannot be 
there at three, for I am expect¬ 
ing a visitor at half past two. 

Can you come after three? 

Yes; I think so, if my visitor is 
not late. Tell Mr. Harding he 
can expect me at about half 
past three. 

Very well. Good day, sir. 

Good day. 

* 

* * 

Mary, I am going to the store on 
the corner. I want to get a | 
hat. Now, I expect Mr. Har- I 
rison. If he is here before I am, j 
tell him kindly to come in and 
wait for me; I expect to return 
very soon. You know him, do 
you not? 

Yes, sir. 

* 

* * 

Good afternoon, Mr. Clay. I 
want to try on the hat that you 
have in the window. 

With pleasure, Mr. Smith. Here 
it is. 

It is a little too small for me. 

Try this one, then. 

Yes; I prefer this one. How much 
is it? 

Two dollars and a half. 

Two dollars and a half, Mr. Clay! 
That is too much. 

Not at all, Sir. 


vous pouvez venir a la banque 
cet apres midi a trois heures. 
II dit qu’il y a un certain nom- 
bre d’affaires importantes a 
terminer, et qu’il faut que vous 
soyez la. 

Dites a M. Harding que je ne 
puis etre la a trois heures, parce 
que j’attends quelqu’un a deux 
heures et demie. 

Pouvez-vous venir apres trois 
heures? 

Oui; je pense que oui; si mon, 
visiteur n’est pas en retard. 
Dites a M. Harding qu’il peut 
m’attendre a trois heures et 
demie a peu pres. 

Tres bien. Bonjour, monsieur. 

Au revoir. 

* 

* * 

Marie, je vais jusqu’au magasin 
du coin acheter un chapeau. 
J’attends M. Harrison. S’il est 
ici avant moi, dites-lui de vou- 
loir bien entrer et de m’atten¬ 
dre. Je ne veux pas rester 
longtemps. Vous connaissez 
M. Harrison, n’est-ce pas? 

Oh! oui, monsieur; je le connais. 
* 

* * 

Bonjour, M. Clay. Je voudrais 
essayer (to try on) ce chapeau 
que vous avez dans la vitrine. 

Avec plaisir, M. Smith. Le voici. 

II est un peu petit pour moi. 

Essayez celui-ci, alors. 

Oui; je prefere celui-ci. De com- 
bien est-il? 

Deux dollars et demi. 

Oh! deux dollars et demi, M. 
Clay! C’est trop. 

Oh, non, monsieur! 






36 


ANGLAIS 


5 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION—(Continuees) 


Well, here are your two dollars 
and a half. 

Thank you, sir. 

* 

* * 

Mary, is Mr. Harrison here? 

Yes, sir;- he is. 

He is not late, I see; it is only 
twenty minutes after two. 

How are you, Mr. Harrison? 

Quite well, thank you. How are 
you yourself? 

Very well, —I am a little tired. I 
have so much to do. 

Yes; I believe it. I am sure you 
deserve a good rest. 

Yes; but in business we must not 
think of that. Now, Mr. Har¬ 
rison let us talk about this 
matter. I have very little time 
today. Mr. Harding is expect¬ 
ing me at the bank at about 
three o’clock. 

I do not want to take much of 
your time. I am entering into 
a partnership with Mr. Jones, 
whom you know well. We wish 
to open a furniture store on 
Main Street. We need about 
five thousand dollars more to 
start with. Can-you assist us? 

About what time do you need it? 

In about a mouth, when our 
goods come. 

All right, Mr. Harrison, I can as¬ 
sist you. I have confidence in 
you and your friend. You are 
young and are good business 
men. I have no doubt of your 
success. Come and see me in 
about a month. 


Eh bien! Voici vos deux dollars 
et demi. 

Merci, monsieur. 

* 

* * 

Marie, M. Harrison est-il ici? 

Oui, monsieur; il est ici. 

II n’est pas en retard, je vois; II 
estseulement deux heures vingt. 

Comment allez-vous, M. Harrison? 

Tout a fait bien, merci, et vous- 
meme? 

Tres bien; je suis seulement un 
peu fatigue. J’ai tant a faire. 

Oui; je le crois. Je suis sur que 
vous meritez un bon repos. 

Oui; mais en affaires, il ne faut 
pas penser a cela. Maintenant 
M. Harrison, parlons de cette 
affaire. J’ai tres peu de temps 
aujourd’hui. M. Harding m’at- 
tend a la banque vers trois 
heures. 

Je ne veux pas prendre beaucoup 
de votre temps. Je forme une 
association avec M. Jones que 
vous connaissez bien. Nous 
voulons ouvrir un magasin de 
meubles sur la Grande Rue. 
Nous avons besoin d’apeu pres 
cinq mille dollars de plus pour 
commencer. Pouvez-vous nous 
aider? 

Dans combien de temps en avez- 
vous besoin? 

Dans un mois a peu pres, lorsque 
jios marchandises arriveront. 

Tres bien, M. Harrison. Je puis 
vous assister dans votre entre- 
prise. J’ai confiance en vous et 
votre ami. Vous etes jeunes, 
vous vous entendez aux affaires, 
je ne doute pas de votre succes. 
Venez me voir dans un mois 
environ. 




5 


DIXIEME LECON 


37 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION - (Continuees) 


How can we thank you Mr. 
Smith? You are always so kind 
to us. 

I always try to be kind to those 
who deserve kindness. 


Comment pouvons-nous vous re- 
mercier, M. Smith. Vous etes 
toujours si bienveillant pour 
nous. 

J’essaie toujours d’etre bienveil¬ 
lant envers ceux qui le meritent. 


PHRASES 

Who is there? 

Who are you? 

What do you desire? 

I have a request to make to you. 
Can you grant me what I ask? 

Excuse me, please. 

I am very sorry for the trouble I 
give you. 

If you believe me, that is what 
you must do. 

What do you advise me to do? 
You may believe me as to that. 
That may very well be. 

Who is there? Can it be Mr. B.? 
What! you are still here? 

So it is. 

You can think what you like of 
me. 

I think only good of you. 

Am I in the right way? 

This window opens into the gar¬ 
den. 

You cannot go that way; go this 
way. 

Can you find your way? 

That man is in my way. 

I am always going my way. 

We all grow old. 

What do you come here for? 
Whom are you waiting for? 

I know her by name. 

You must tell me what you are 
doing. 


USUELLES 

Qui est la? 

Qui etes-vous? 

Que desirez-vous? 

J’ai une priere a vous faire. 
Pouvez-vous m’accorder ce que je 
demande? 

Excusez-moi, je vous prie. 

Je suis bien fache de la peine que 
je vous donne. 

Si vous m’en croyez, voila ce que 
vous ferez. 

Que me conseillez-vous de faire? 
Vous pouvez m’en croire. 

Cela se peut bien. 

Qui est la? Serait-ce M. B.? 
Comment! Vous etes encore ici? 
II en est ainsi. 

Vous pouvez penser de moi ce que 
vous voulez. 

Je ne pense que du bien de vous. 
Suis-je dans le bon chemin? 

Cette fenetre donne sur le jardin. 

Vous ne pouvez pas passer par 
la, passez par ici. 

Pouvez-vous trouver votrechemin? 
Cet horn me me gene. 

Je vais toujours mon train. 

Nous vieillissons tous. 

Que venez-vous chercher ici? 

Qui attendez-vous? 

Je la connais de nom. 

II faut que vous me disiez ce que 
vous faites. 





38 


ANGLAIS 


§5 


PHRASES USUELLES — (Continuees) 


It is getting late. 

To whom must I apply? 

Pardon me. 

I am saying no more about it. 
That is saying much. 

Let us say no more about it. 

That is to say. 

He keeps house. 

I keep a servant. 

He always keeps his word. 

Those apples do not keep. 

What is it about? 

Ask him to come in. 

What is that to you? 

How is business? 

He is as good as she is. 

I am in business. 

I must get a new hat. 

Give my love to your sister. 

Give me half of it. 

Half wine and half water. 

Half way. 

He is without a home. 

He always keeps me waiting. 

Do as you like. 

Do as you please. 

That man has a good name. 

To play cards. 

Why do you ask me that question? 
That is not the question. 

I must look into it. 

Who is to speak now? 

He is walking this way. 

He is coming our way. 

In which way am I to do it? 

Do it in my way. 

That is my business. 

Do you want me to get into 
trouble with him? 

He may say what he likes; I do 
not believe him. 

There is good and bad in that 
business. 


II se fait tard. 

A qui faut-il que je m’adresse? 

Je vous demande pardon. 

Je n’en dis pas plus. 

C’est beaucoup dire. 

N’en parlons plus. 

C’est-a-dire. 

II tient maison. 

J’ai un domestique. 

II tient toujours sa parole. 

Ces pommes ne se conservent pas. 
De quoi s’agit-il? 

Priez-le d’entrer. 

Qu’est-ce que cela vous fait? 
Comment vont les affaires? 

II la vaut bien. 

Je suis dans le commerce. 

II faut que j’achete un chapeau 
neuf. 

Faites mes amities a votre soeur. 
Donnez-moi la moitie. 

Moitie eau et moitie vin. 

A moitie chemin. 

II est sans asile. 

II me fait toujours attendre. 

Faites comme vous voudrez. 

C’est un homme honorable. 

Jouer aux cartes. 

Pourquoi me demandez-vous cela? 
II ne s’agit pas de cela. 

II faut que je l’approfondisse. 

Qui est-ce qui a la parole? 

II vient par ici. 

II vient de notre cote. 

Comment faut-il le faire? 

Faites-le a ma maniere. 

C’est mon affaire. 

Voulez-vous que je me fasse une 
affaire avec lui? 

II a beau dire, je ne le crois pas. 


II y a a boire et a manger. 



5 


DIXIEME LEQON 


39 


PHRASES USUEELES—(Continuees) 


He has a good time of it. 

What good can it do to speak 


II se donne du bon temps. 
A quoi bon en parler? 


about it? 

Are in good time! 

I do not find it to my interest. 


A la bonne heure! 

Je n’y trouve pas mon compte. 


r 


EXERCICE ECRIT 


Note. — Repondez aux questions suivantes en anglais. Ecrivez les 
questions et les reponses en double expedition, et envoyez-nous les 
deux copies en meme temps. L’une vous sera retournee aussitot que 
possible avec nos corrections, et nous garderons l’autre afin de bien 
suivre vos progres. N’enregistrez pas cette legon a present sur un 
cylindre phonographique, mais etudiez la legon suivante. Quand vous 
aurez fini de l’etudier, nous vous aurons retourne votre copie corrigee; 
c’est alors que nous vous demanderons de l’enregistrer sur un cylindre, 
d’apres les directions donnees a la fin de la legon suivante. 

1. How are you today? 

2. What is the name of your friend? 

3. Do you still attend school? 

4. Do you go to the country in summer? 

5. How far do you live from the city? 

6. Are you often ill? 

7. Tell your friend to come in. 

8. Do you take a walk in the afternoon? 

9. Where do you live? 

10. What do you take for breakfast? 

11. Do you not drink wine? 

12. Can you speak English now? 

13. Can you write a letter in English? 

14. Do you not like coffee with milk? 

15. Can your friend play the violin? 

16. Which do you prefer, tea or coffee? 

17. Offer your friend a cup of tea. 

18. What time is it now? 

19. Do you know how to count from one to a hundred in 


English? 

20. How many banks are there in your city? 












. ' 







% 


t 


✓ 





































* 
























/ 














ANGLAIS 

(PARTIE 6) 


ONZIEME LECON 


CYLINDRE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 


V OC ABU IjAIRE 


I. c. s. 

English Record No. 11 

to accompany, accompagner 

to address, adresser 

to arrive, arriver 

tlie ball, le bal 

tlie church, Veglise 

the concert, le concert 

of course, naturellement 

delighted, enchante 

delightful, charmant 

did, passe de do 

directly, directement 

to enjoy, jouir de 

enough, assez 

exactly, exactement 

to explain, expliquer 

fortunate, heureux 

the girl, la fille 

had, imp art ait de to have 

the health, la sante 

the idea, V idee 

to induce, engager , induire 

mine, le m ien 

the monument , le monument 
most, la plupart 


/. c. s. 

Cylindre d'Anglais No. 11 

needless, inutile 
the nephew, le neveu 
the niece, la niece 
the opera, Vopera 
originally, originairement , 
d'abord 
other, autre 
ours, le ndtre 
out, dehors , hors 
to part, se separer 
the passenger, le passager 
the pier, /’ embarcadere, le 
quai 

the place, la place 
to promise, promettre 
to regret, regretter 
to sail, naviguer , s’embarquer 
several, plusieurs 
the ship, le bateau 
to show, montrer 
the spring, le printemps 
the steamship, le bateau a 
vapeur 

to stop, s’arreter 


For notice of copyright, see page immediately following the title page 
~ §6 






2 


AXGLAIS 


§6 


VOC'ABELAIRE— (Continue) 


tlie surprise, la surprise 
the theater, le theatre 
therefore, par consequent 
tlie tiling, la chose 


tlie trip, le voyage 
to visit, visiter 
was. were, imparfait de to be 
yesterday, hier 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION 


O, what a surprise! 1 I am so 
delighted to see you! 
When did* you return? 

I arrived 1 in'Xew York yes¬ 
terday on the steamship 4 
“America.” Did you not 
receive my letter in which 
I explained that I was to 
be 5 a passenger on that 
ship? 

Xo, I did not;* and I regret it 
very much, for I intended 
to meet you at the pier. 
But you received mine, 1 did 
you not? 8 

Yes; the day before we sailed. 
I did not know exactly 
where you were, 9 and had 1 * 
no idea that you were out 11 
of the city; therefore I 
addressed my letter to your 
office. Did you come here 
early in the spring? 

I did; my niece and some of 
her friends induced me to 
come with them. Well, 


Oh! quelle surprise! Je suis 
si heureux de vous voir! 
Ouand etes-vous arrive? 

Je suis arrive hier a Xew- 
York par le bateau a vapeur 
“Amerique.” X’avez-vous 
pas regu ma lettre dans 
laquelle je vous expliquais 
que je serais un passager 
sur ce bateau? 

Xon; je ne l’ai pas recue, et je 
le regrette beaucoup, parce 
que j’a\~ais l’intention 
d’aller a votre rencontre 
jusqu'au quai. Mais a^ous 
avez recu la mienne, n’est- 
ce pas? 

Oui; le jour avant notre 
depart. Je ne savais pas 
exactement oil vous etiez, 
et je n’avais aucune idee 
que vous ainez quitte la 
ville; par consequent j’ai-ais 
adresse ma lettre a A T otre 
bureau. Etes-vous venu 
ici de bonne heure au prin- 
temps? 

Oui; ma niece et quelques- 
unes de ses amies m’ont 
engage a venir avec elles. 



§6 


ONZIEME LEQON 


3 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


how did you enjoy your 
trip? 

We had a delightful time. 
We did not go directly to 
Rome, as we originally in¬ 
tended, but stopped on our 
way at several places. We 
visited Madrid and other 
cities of Spain, then Italy, 
Switzerland, and Germany. 
In Berlin we were fortunate 
enough 12 to meet with some 
friends of ours , 13 who ac¬ 
companied us as far as 
Paris. We parted there. 


How long did you stay in 
Paris? 

Twelve days exactly. 

I hope you did not forget to 
call on 14 my nephew, as you 
promised. 

Of course not. I called on 
him as soon as we reached 
Paris. He was with us 
most of the time, and 
showed us many of the 
interesting things in Paris: 
theaters, concerts, balls, 
operas, churches, monu¬ 
ments, etc. (and so forth). 


Eh bien! avez-vous eu 
beaucoup de plaisir dans 
votre voyage? 

Nous avons eu beaucoup de 
plaisir. Nous ne sommes 
pas alles directement a 
Rome, comme nous en 
avions l’intention d’abord, 
mais nous nous sommes 
arretes a divers endroits. 
Nous avons visite Madrid 
et d’autres villes d’Es- 
pagne, puis ITtalie, la 
Suisse, et l’Allemagne. A 
Berlin nous avons eu la 
bonne fortune de rencontrer 
de nos amis qui nous ont 
accompagnes jusqu’a Paris. 
La nous nous sommes 
separes. 

Combien de temps etes-vous 
restes a Paris? 

Douze jours exactement. 

J’espere que vous n’avez pas 
oublie de visiter mon neveu 
comme vous me l’aviez 
promis. 

Certainement non. J’ai ete 
le voir aussitot que nous 
sommes arrives a Paris. 
II a ete avec nous la plu- 
part du temps, et nous a 
montre bien des choses in- 
teressantes de Paris; les 
theatres, les concerts, les 
bals, les opdras, les eglises, 
les monuments, etc. 




4 


ANGLAIS 


§6 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


How is he doing, and how is 
his health? 

He is quite well, and is quite 
successful in business. His 
wife and little girl are also 
in good health, and it is 
needless to say that they 
all send their love to you. 


Comment va-t-il en affaires, 
et comment est sa sante? 

II se porte bien, et il reussit 
bien en affaires. Sa femme 
et sa petite fille ont aussi 
une bonne sante, et il est 
inutile de dire qu’ils vous 
envoient leurs meilleurs 
compliments (litterale- 
ment, leur amour). 


REMARQUES 

1. Notez qu’en anglais on fait usage de l’article indefini 
a , an , dans les propositions exclamatives apres What , quel, 
alors que ce meme article indefini est supprime en frangais. 

What a beautiful city! Quelle belle ville! 

What an interesting book! Quel livre interessant! 

2. Le mot did est le passe de do, et est employe dans la 
phrase negative et interrogative du passe comme il est dit 
dans 1’article suivant. 

3. Cette legon contient une autre forme du verbe anglais 
appelee imperfect, imparfait. Ce temps s’emploie comme 
l’imparfait en frangais pour exprimer une action passee que 
l’on considere comme presente relativement a une autre 
action ega 1 ement passee, avec laquelle elle coincide: 

At that time, I expected to see him, En ce moment, je m'attendais 
a le voir. 

I was in Paris then, J'etais alors a Paris. 

Ce temps traduit aussi notre passe defini (qui n’existe pas 
en anglais,) et meme quelquefois notre passe indefini, 
lorsqu’on veut exprimer une action entierement ecoulee: 

I finished that lesson last week, J’ai fini cette le$on la semaine 
dernibre. 

I inspected that institution yesterday, Je visitai cette institution hier. 




§6 


ONZIEME LECON 


5 


Formation de V Imparfait. — Si nous exceptons la deuxieme 
personne du singulier, d’un emploi fort rare en anglais, le 
verbe est toujours invariable a 1’imparfait, et se forme en 
ajoutant la terminaison ed a l’infinitif: 


Infinitif 
to finish, finir 


Imparfait 

I ffnished, je finissais, je finis 
fai fini 

I called, j'appelais, j'appelai , 
fai appele 


to call, appeler 


Cette regie est sujette a bien des exceptions. Pres de 
deux cents verbes anglais sont irreguliers. Les plus 
importants vous seront donnes et signales dans les legons 
suivantes, et vous en trouverez une liste complete dans la 
grammaire. 

A cette liste, il faut ajouter les irrdgularites suivantes: 
Lorsqu’un verbe se termine par une consonne precddee 
d’une voyelle simple a l’infinitif, on double cette consonne 
avant d’ajouter ed: 

to stop, arreter I stopped, J'arretais 

to regret, regretter I regretted, Je regrettais 

On ajoute simplement d, au lieu de ed si l’infinitif se 
termine par e quand on veut former l’imparfait: 

to receive, recevoir I received, Je recevais 

to please, plaire I pleased, Je plaisais 

On change y en i avant d’ajouter ed a l’imparfait, lorsque 
l’infinitif se termine par y precede d’une consonne: 

to try, essayer I tried, J’essayais 

to envy, envier I envied, J'enviais 

Mais si y est precedd d’une voyelle, on ne change pas 
y en i: 

to play, jouer I played, Je jouais 

to enjoy, avoir du plaisir I enjoyed, J'avais du plaisir 

Quelques-uns de ces derniers sont cependant irreguliers. 

Modele dfun Verbe a VImparfait. — Cette forme telle que 
nous venons de la decrire n’est cependant employee qu’a la 
forme affirmative. Pour la forme negative, et les deux 


6 


ANGLAIS 


§6 


formes interrogatives, on fait usage de did , qui est le passe 
de do. Comme did est une forme du passe, le verbe employe 
avec did ne change pas, et a les memes formes que l’infinitif, 
comme on peut le voir dans le modele suivant: 

to finish, finir 
Imparfait 


Affirmatif 

I finished, Je finissais 


He 1 

She [finished, 


II 


[ fini. 


finissaient 


> finissait 

It J Elle J 

We 1 Nous finissions 

You [finished, Vo us finissiez 

They ) Ils 

Elies i 

Negatif 

I did not finish, Je ne finissais pas 

He ] II 1 

She [did not finish, [ ne finissait pas 

Elle ] 

Nous ne finissions pas 
did not finish, Vous ne finissiez pas 



I/s 1 
Elies J 


ne finissaient pas ‘ 


hi terrogatif-A ffirmatif 
Did I finish? Finissais-je? 


the | 

Did! she [finish? 


ilf 


Did 


[it 
we 
you 




they 


Finissait- > 

J elle? 

Finissions-nous? 
finish? Finissiez-vous? 

\ i/s ? 


Finissaient- 


l elles ? 


Interrogatif-Negatif 

Did I not finish? Ne finissais-je pas? 


[he | 

Did< she [not finish? 


Ne finissait- 


1 it 
f we 




\il 

elle 


\pas? 




Ne finissions-nous pas? 


Did J you [not finish? Ne finis siez-vous pas? 

f ils 
\etles 


[they] 


Ne finissaient- 


[ pas ? 




§6 


ONZIEME LEQON 


7 


4. Steamship est encore un exemplc de nom compose, 
forme d’apres la regie que nous avons deja donnee, de steam, 
vapeur, et de ship, bateau. 

5. Le verbe to be au present, suivi d’un infinitif peut etre 
employe en anglais pour rendre le futiir en franqais; il 
montre aussi quelquefois une obligation, et peut etre traduit 
par notre verbe devoir. 

I am to be a passenger on that ship, Je serai un passager sur ce bateau. 

He is to go to Paris, IL doit alter a Paris. 

Si le verbe to be est au passe, et suivi d’un infinitif, il rend 
le conditionnel, ou l’imparfait de devoir: 

I was to be a passenger on that ship, Je devais etre un passager sur 
ce bateau. 

I received a letter from him, in which he explained that he was to 
be here at four o’clock, J’ai refu une lettre de lui, dans laquelle it 
expliquait qu'il serait ici a qnaire heures. 

0. La reponse, en anglais, au passe peut etre s ; mple- 
ment I did , pour l’affirmation, et / did not pour la negation, 
comme nous avons deja explique avec la forme do du 
present. 

Did you write a letter yesterday? —I did, Avez-vous ecrit une lettre 
hier?—J'en ai ecrit une. 

Did she go to her uncle’s? —No; she did not, Est-elle allee chez son 
oncle?—Non, elle n'y est pas allee. 

7. Cette leqon contient aussi quelques pronoms posses¬ 
ses comme mine, ours; les autres sont faciles a former. Il 
suffit d'ajouter s aux adjectifs our , your , her , et their , et Ton 
a ours, yours , hers , et theirs. LL ainsi ajoute est toujours 
fortement accentue en anglais. His et its sont a la fois 
adjectifs et pronoms possessifs, et my devient mine. Nous 
avons ainsi la liste complete de ces pronoms: 

mine, le mien, la mienne, les miens, les miennes 
his, le sien, la sienne, les siens, les siennes (lorsque le 
nom du possesseur est masculin) 
hers, le sien, la sienne, les siens, les siennes (lorsque le 
nom du possesseur est feminin) 
its, le sien, la sienne, les siens, les siennes (lorsque le 
nom du possesseur est neutre) 


8 


ANGLAIS 


§6 


ours, le ndtre, la ndtre, les notres 
yours, le vdtre, la vdtre, les votres 
tlieirs, le leur, la leur, les leurs 


Ces pronoms s’emploient toujours sans article en anglais. 
Notez aussi que c’est toujours le nom du possesseur qui 
determine le genre du pronom, tandis qu’en frangais, c’est le 
substantif possede. 

Here is your book, where is mine? Void votre livre, ou est le 
mien ? 

Which book do you prefer, his or hers? —I prefer hers, Quel livre 
preferez-vous , le sien (M. Webster, par exemple) ou le sien? (Mme. 
Webster, par exemple) —Je prefire le sien. 

Their wine is too sour; ours is very good, Leur vin est trop aigre; 
le ndtre est tr'es bon. 

This is my hat, yours is in the corner, C’est mon chapeau, le vdtre 
est dans le coin. 

Our children study French, theirs study English, Nos en fonts 
etudient le frangais, les leurs Hudient l'anglais. 

8. Lorsque le verbe est au passe, n'est-ce pas se traduit 
comme il a ete explique avec do, mais en employant did au 
lieu de do. 

You arrived yesterday, did you not? Vous etes arrives hier, n'est- 
ce pas? 

They did not come, did they? Ils ne sont pas venus, n'est-ce pas? 

9. Were est une forme de l’imparfait du verbe to be. 
Ce temps dans son entier peut etre etudie dans le modele 
suivant. On remarquera que did n’est pas employe avec 
to be. 


to be, itre 
Imparfait 
Affirmatii 



II 

Elle 


J'etais, je his ou j'ai ete 


| etait 


We 

You 

Tliey 



Nous etions 
vous etiez 
Ils 
Elies 



§6 


ONZIEME LECON 


9 


I was not, 
lie I 

She was not. 

It J 


Negatif 

Je n'etais pas, je ne fus pas, on je n'ai pas He 
II 

Elle 


jn’etai, 


etait pas 


We 1 
You 
They J 


were not. 


Nous n'Hions pas 
Vous n'Hiez pas 

Its 1 , 

Elies [ n latent pas 

Interrogatif- Affirmatit 


Was I? 

I he ? 

Was she? 
[it? 

( we? 
Were | you? 


Etais-je? 
Etait- 


\il? 

[elle? 


Etions-vous? 

Etiez-vous? 

f ils ? 


I they ? Etaient- 


1 elles 


,} 


Interrogatif-Negatif 
Was I not? N'etais-je pas? 

\ lie 1 


Was j she } not ? 


N'Hait- 




we ] 


[‘elleV as - 


Were you > not ? 
[they] 


N’ etions-nous 
N' etiez-vous 

N’etaient- ^ 


1 elles } 


pas? 


10. Comme le verbe to be, le verbe to have n’emploie 
pas l’auxiliaire did. Excepte a la deuxieme personne du 
singnlier que nous n’etudierons que plus tard, to have a la 
meme forme a toutes les autres personnes de Timparfait, 
comme on peut le voir dans le modele suivant: 

to have, avoir 
Imparfait 
Affirmatif 

■ J'avais, j'eas ou j'ai ea 


I had, 

He 1 

She[had, 
It J 

We j 
You [had, 
They J 


II 1 
Elle I 


avail 


Nous avions 
Vons aviez 
I/s 


Elles 


> avaient 



10 


ANGLAIS 


§6 


Negatif 

I had not, Je n’avais pas , je n'eus pas ou je n'ai pas eu 

He 1 II 1 

She >had not, \n’avait pas 


It 
We 1 

Yon [had not 
TheyJ 


Nous n'avions pas 
Vo us n'aviez pas 

\n' avaient pas 
hlles J 


Interrogatif-Affirmatif 
Had I? Avais-je? 


A vait- 


The? 

Had <she ? 

[it? 

f we? 

Had|you? .^ 

[they? Avaient-' 


Hit 
\elle? 

Avion s-nous ? 
Aviez-vous? 


1 elles ? 


In terrogatif-Negatif 
Had I not? Navais-je pas? 

Had|she|not? N'avait- j | pas? 

N' avion s-nous pas? 

Naviez-vous pas? 

r j P^? 


[it J 

! we not? 

yon not? , ^ 

they not? Navaient -< 


\elles \ 


11. Le mot out, dehors, s’emploie avec le verbe to be 
ou le verbe to go pour traduire sortir ou quitter. 

He is out, II est sorti (litteralement, it est dehors ). 

I was out of the city, J’avais quitte la ville (litteralement, j'etais 
hors de la ville). 

When are you going out? Quand sortez-vous (litteralement, Quand 
allez-vous dehors)? 

12. L’adverbe enough , contrairement au frangais, se 
place apres le mot qu’il modifie. 

Your house is large enough, Voire maison est assez grande. 

I was fortunate enough to find him at home, J'ai etc la bonne fortune 
de le trouver chez lui (litteralement, J'etais fortune assez de le trouver 
a la maison). 


§6 


ONZIEME LEQON 


11 


13. Comme nous l’avons vu (Art. 7) les pronoms 
possessifs sont generalement formes des adjectifs pos¬ 
sesses par l’addition de la lettre s. Get 5 est reellement 
le signe de possession ’s. Cette raison explique une con¬ 
struction tout a fait particuliere a la langue anglaise. Elle 
consiste a deplacer le pronom possessif, et a le rejeter apres 
le nom, qui en frangais est generalement precede de l’adjectif 
possessif: 

He is a brother of mine, C'est un de mes freres. 

It was an idea of ours, C’etait une de nos idees. 

Louis is a friend of mine, Louis est un de mes amis. 

La meme construction qu’en frangais pourrait aussi etre 
employee. La derniere phrase par exemple peut s’exprimer: 
Louis is a friend of mine , ou Louis is one of my friends. II y 
a cependant une petite nuance a observer entre ces deux 
expressions: Quand je dis, Louis is a friend of mine , je ne 
parle que d’un ami, sans faire connaitre si j’en ai plusieurs; 
dans Louis is one of my friends , j’indique positivement que 
j’en ai plus d’un. 

14. To call on est en anglais employe dans le sens de 
visiter: 

I am going to call on him, Je vais le visiter. 

Did he call on you? Vous a-t-il rendu visite? 


EXERCICE ORAL 

Did you stay at home yesterday? —Yes; I 
stayed at home.—Yes; I did. 

Etes-vous reste chez vous hier? — Old; je sins reste chez moi. 

Did you stay long at Mr. Smith’s? —O, yes; I stayed there 
some time. 

Did your sisters stay late at the ball? —Yes; they stayed 
there very late. 

Did Charles stay all day at Mr. Clay’s? —He stayed at his 
house until ten o’clock in the evening. 

Did your uncle stay long in Switzerland? —He stayed there 
a month. 



12 


ANGLAIS 


§6 


Wlien did your niece return from Madrid? — 

She returned from Madrid day before 
yesterday. 

Qiiand votre niice est-elle revenue de Madrid?— Elie est 
revenue de Madrid (le jour) avant-hier. 

When did your brother return from the concert? —He 
returned at eleven o’clock. 

When did Mr. Clay return from his trip? —He returned 
yesterday at half past four. 

Did Mr. Harrison promise your friend to meet him at your 
house? —Yes, madam; he did. 

Did you promise John to give him this beautiful book? — 
Yes; I promised to give it to him. 

Did not Mi*. Smith live in Berlin?-No, sir; 
he did not live there.—No, sir; he did not. 

11/. Smith n’a-t-ilpas demeure a Berlin? — Non, monsieur; 
il n'y a pas demeure. 

Did not yopr uncle live in this city? —No, madam; he did 
not live here. —No, madam; he did not. 

Did not your parents go to Germany? —No, sir; they did 
not go there. —No, sir; they did not. 

Did not Mr. Harrison meet you on the street? —No; he did 
not meet me there. —No; he did not. 

Did not Mr. Harding induce you to do this? —No; he did 
not induce me to do it. —No; he did not. 

What countries did you visit? —We visited 
Spain, Italy, and Switzerland. 

Quels pays avez-vous visiles?—Nous avons visite VEspagne, 

1' It a lie et la Suisse. 

When did he arrive? —He arrived at three o’clock. 

How far did she accompany you?—She accompanied me as 
far as Berlin. 

How did you enjoy your trip? —I enjoyed it very much. 

Where did they part? —They parted in Madrid. 

On what ship did they sail? —They sailed on the steamship 
“America.” 


§6 


ONZIEME LEQON 


13 


/ Charles received some letters from his 
friends this morning, did he not? — No; 
he did not. 

Charles .a regu des lettres de ses amis ce matin , n'est-ce 
pas?— Non; il n'en a pas regu. 

She visited Switzerland with you, did she not? — No; she 
did not. 

You stopped at different places, did you not? —No; we 
did not. 

They walked as far as your house, did they not? —No; they 
did not. 

They invested in that business, did they not? —No; they 
did not. 

You received some information concerning- her son, did 
you not? —No; I did not. 

Why did yon remain at home?—I remained at 
home because I had to learn my lesson. 

Pourquoi ites-vous resti a la maison?—Je suis reste cl la 
maison parce que j' avals a apprendre ma legon. 

Why did your uncle remain in London in the winter? 
— He remained there because, he had to transact some 
important business. 

Why did Charles remain at your house last night? —He 
remained at our house because the weather was very bad. 

Why did they remain in Paris? —They remained there 
because they like that city very much. 

Did you go to church yesterday?—Yes; I did. 

You did not study Spanish at school, did 
you?—No, madam; I did not; I studied it 
here. 

Vous n'avez pas etudie Vespagnol a l' ecole, n'est-ce pas? 
—Non, madame; je ne I'ai pas Hudie a l' ecole; je t'ai 
etudie ici. 

Your friend did not study German in Berlin, did she? — 
No, sir; she did not; she studied German in this country. 

Mr. Smith did not study French, did he? — No; he did not, 
but he is studying English now. 


14 ANGLAIS § 6 

You did not arrive yesterday, did you? —No; I did not; 
I arrived this morning-. 

Where were you yesterday?—I was at the 
theater with Mr. Harrison. 

Ou etiez-vous hier?—J'etais au the&ire avec M. Harrison. 

Where was your cousin? —He was at the concert with my 
sister. 

Where were Charles and Lucy this morning? —They were 
at the park. 

When were you at my uncle’s?—I was there day before 
yesterday. 

When was Mr. Clay here? —He was here this morning. 

Why were you not at school yesterday?-I 
did not go to school yesterday because 
I was not quite well. 

Pourquoi n*etiez-vous pas a V ecole hier?—Je ne suis pas 
aide a Vecole hier, parce que je n'etais pas tries bien. 

Why was not Charles at your house yesterday? —He was 
not at my house because he had to call on a friend of his. 

Why was not Mr. Harding here this morning? —He was 
not here because he was not in town today. 

Were you at the theater? —No; I was not there; I had to 
stay at home. 

Why were you not at the ball? — I was not there because 
I preferred to go to the concert. 

Were you at Mr. Clay’s yesterday? —No, sir; I was not 
there; I was at home. 

Was Miss Smith at the opera? —No, sir; she was not at 
the opera; she was at the ball. 

Were you at my uncle’s yesterday? —No, John; I was not 
there; I stayed at home all day. 

Was your friend Mr. Harding here? —No, madam; he was 
not here this morning. 

You were at my cousin’s yesterday, were 
' you not?—Yes, madam; I was. 

Vo ns Hiez chez ma cousine hier , n'est-ce pas? —Oui, 
madame; j'y etais. 


§ 6 


ONZIEME LECON 


15 


My friend was at your house yesterday, was he not? —Yes; 
he was at our house. 

Mr. Jones was in Paris, was he not? —Yes, sir; he was. 

You were in the park, children, were you not? —Yes; we 
were there. 

You were at church, Florence, were you not? —Yes; I was 
there. 

Your brother was at the opera, was he not? —Yes; he was. 

Mi*. Harrison was not at your house this 
morning, was lie? —No, sir; he was not. 

M. Harrison n’etait pas chez vous ce matin , n'est-ce 
pas? — A T on, monsieur; it n'y etait pas. 

You were not in town yesterday, were you? —No; I 
was not. 

My cousin was not at church with you, was she? —No; she 
was not. 

Mr. and Mrs. Clay were not at home, were they? —No; 
they were not. 

My friend was not at school this morning - , was she? —No; 
she was not. 

You were not at the concert, were you? —No; we were not. 

What a surprise to see you this morning! 

Quelle surprise de votes voir ce matin! 

What a good gardener you have! 

What an interesting book this is! 

What a beautiful city Paris is! 

What a fine season we have! 

I was to go to the theater with him, hut I 
had to stay at home. 

Je devais aller au theatre avec lui, mais j'ai dil rester a la 
maison. 

He was to be here at four o’clock, but he did not come 
until five. 

She was to arrive yesterday, but the ship was late. 

We were to sail on the steamship “America,” but we 
were late. 


16 ANGLAIS §6 

They were to part in Rome, but John induced them to 
accompany themselves as far as Paris. 

We were to occupy this house, but my parents did not 
like it. 

They were to walk with us, but we parted at the corner. 

Had you fine weather when you were in 
Paris? — O, yes; we had delightful 
weather. 

Faisait-il beau temps quand vous etiez a Paris?—Oh! oui; 
il faisait un temps splendide. 

Had he to wait long? —No; he waited a quarter of an 
hour only. 

Had she much pleasure from her trip? —Yes; she said that 
she had a very pleasant time. 

Had Mr. Clay his nephew with him? —Yes; he had. 

Had Mr. and Mrs. Harding time to call on our friend in 
Madrid? —No; they had not; they had to sail on the steam¬ 
ship “America.” 

We had a good dinner, had we not? —Yes; we 
certainly had. 

Notts avons eu un bon diner , n'est-ce pas?— Oui; nous avons 
certainement eu un bon diner. 

They had some wine, had they not? —Yes; they had. 

You had a desire to go to Paris, had you not? —Yes; I 
wished to go there very much. 

He had to write to his friends, had he not? —Yes; he had. 

Your cousin had to stay at home, had she not? —Yes; she 
had; and she regretted it very much. 

You had no letter yesterday, had yon? —No; 

I had none. 

Vous n'avez pas eu de lettre hier , n'est-ce pas?—Non; je 
n'en ai pas eu. 

He had no friends there, had he? —No; he had none. 

She had no liberty at all, had she? —No; she did not have 
any. 

Mr. and Mrs. Harrison had no gardener, had they? —No; 
they had none. 


§6 ONZIEME LECON 17 

You had no wine at dinner, had you?—No; we did not 
have any. 

Let us take our umbrellas; hei*e is yours, 
and tliere is mine. 

Prenons nos parapluies; void le votre , et voild le mien. 

I prefer my house; yours is too small. 

Your book is in English, and mine is in French. 

Which wine do you prefer, yours or mine?—I prefer mine; 
yours is too sour. 

We have very good butter, but theirs is not fresh. 

Your neighbors live in the country in summer, but ours 
always stay in the city. 

John, bring Edward’s gloves and Mary’s; bis are on the 
table, but I do not know where hers are. 

When are you going out, John? — I am going 
out now. 

Quand sortirez-vous , Jean?—Je sors maintenant. 

Speak to Florence when she comes out. 

Why do you not come in, Edward? —I prefer to stay out, 
the weather is so fine. 

Is Mr. Harding in? —No, sir; he is out. 

If you go out, go to the bank for me. 

Did they go out this morning? —No, sir; they did not. 

I do not like this hook; it is not interesting 
enough. 

Je n'aime pas ce livre; il n’est pas assez interessant. 

Give me that umbrella; it is good enough for me. 

Do not go away now, you have time enough. 

They cannot take lessons; they are not rich enough. 

He cannot see it well; he is not near enough. 

She does not want that room; it is not large enough. 

Do you know this gentleman? —Certainly; he 
is a friend of mine. 

Coimaissez-vous ce monsieur?— Certainement; c'est tin de 
mes amis. 

Do you know this lady? —I do; she is a friend of ours. 


18 


ANGLAIS 


6 


Does John know my cousin? —Yes; he does; your cousin 
is a friend of his. 

Does Lucy know that young- lady? —She certainly does; 
she is a friend of hers. 

Do they know you? —Yes; they do; I am a friend of theirs. 

I called on some friends of mine when I was in Paris. 

Call on me wlien you go out, John. 

Passez chez moi quand vous sortirez , Jean. 

Did you call on your cousins when you were in Berlin? — 
Yes; I did. 

I called on him yesterday morning, but he was not at 
home. 

Tell her I am going to Germany when you call on her. 

They called on us yesterday, but we were not at home. 

Did you call on those gentlemen? Yes; we called on them 
yesterday, but they were not at home. 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


Are you ready, Florence? 

Not quite. I cannot find my 
gloves. You did not see them? 

No; are they not in the dining 
room? 

No; they are not there. 

They must be in your room, then. 
Go and see. 

I have them now; they were on 
the small table in the corner. 

Where are we to go first? 

To a furniture store. I must get 
a dining-room table. 

But we have not very much time. 
We must be at the pier by ten 
o’clock. And I must make that 
call on Main street. Come for 
me in half an hour. 


Etes-vous prete, Florence? 

Pas tout a fait. Je ne peux pas 
trouver mes gants. Vous ne 
les avez pas vus? 

Non; ne sont-ils pas dans la salle 
a manger? 

Non; ils n’y sont pas. 

Ils doivent etre dans votre 
chambre, alors; allez voir. 

Je les ai maintenant; ils etaient 
sur la petite table dans le coin. 

Ou devons-nous aller d’abord? 

Dans un magasin de meubles; 
j’ai besoin d’une table de salle a 
manger. 

Mais nous n’avons pas beaucoup 
de temps. Nous devons etre 
sur le quai a dix heures. Et 
j’ai une visite a faire dans la 
Grande Rue. Venez me cher- 
cher dans une demi-heure. 




6 


ONZIEME LEQON 


19 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Very well; expect me in half an 
hour. 

* 

* * 

We cannot be at the pier in time. 
I am sure the ship is there now. 
Why did you not come before? 
You are always late. 

• 

I am sorry if I am late, and you 
must excuse me. I did not 
know what time it was, and the 
merchant had so many tables 
that I did not know which one 
to take. 

This way —the pier is out there. 

' We are too late. I can see no 
passengers. We must go to 
John’s house; he must be there 
now. I am very sorry that we 
were not there when he arrived. 

* 

* * 

Hallo! How are you, John? We 
are very sorry that we did not 
arrive in time to meet you at 
the pier. 

I am very glad to see you. Are 
you all well? 

Yes; thank you. Well, how 
did you enjoy your trip; and 
where did you go? 

I enjoyed it very much. I intend¬ 
ed to go directly to Berlin, but 
when I was in London, I was 
fortunate enough to meet with 
a friend of mine, Mr. Clay, 
whom you know well; he in¬ 
duced me to go to Paris with 
him. I was delighted, because 
I always desired to see that 
beautiful city, and as Mr. Clay 


Tres bien; attendez-moi dans une 
demi-heure. 

* 

* * 

Nous ne pouvons pas etre a temps 
sur le quai. Je suis sure que 
le bateau est la maintenant. 
Pourquoi n’etes-vous pas venue 
avant? Vous etes toujours en 
retard. 

Je suis fachee d’etre en retard et 
je vous prie de m’excuser. Je 
ne savais pas quelle heure il 
etait, et ce marchand avait tant 
de tables que je ne savais pas 
laquelle prendre. 

De ce cote; le quai est la-bas. 
Nous sommes en retard. Je ne 
puis voir aucun passager. II 
nous faut aller chez Jean; il 
doit etre la maintenant. Je 
suis bien fachee que nous 
n’ayons pas ete la quand il est 
arrive. 

* 

* * 

Alio! Comment allez-vous, Jean? 
Nous sommes bien fachees de 
n’etre pas arrivees a temps pour 
vous rencontrer sur le quai. 

Je suis bien content de vous voir 
Tout le monde se porte bien? 

Oui; merci. Eh bien! Avez- 
vous eu beaucoup de plaisir 
dans votre voyage, et ou etes- 
vous alle? 

J’ai eu beaucoup de plaisir. 
J’avais l’intention d’aller di- 
rectement a Berlin, mais lors- 
que j’etais a Londres, j’ai eu la 
bonne fortune de rencontrer un 
de mes amis, M. Clay, que vous 
connaissez bien; il m’a engage 
a aller a Paris avec lui. J’etais 
enchante parce que j’ai tou¬ 
jours desire voir cette belle ville, 




20 


ANGLAIS 


6 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION— (Continuees) 


is well acquainted with Paris, 
he showed me all that is inter¬ 
esting: balls, concerts, theaters, 
stores, churches, etc. 

How long did you stay? 

Ten days exactly, and then 1 
started for Berlin where I stayed 
all the time that we were in 
Germany. 

Which do you prefer, London or 
Paris? 

Well, London is a very large 
city; but I do not like it very 
well. It is not so beautiful as 
Paris. But what did you do 
when I was there? Did you 
stay in town all the time? 

O, no; it was too warm here, and 
Mr. and Mrs. Harrison invited 
us to go to the country with 
them. We were at their coun¬ 
try house for a month. 


et comme M. Clay connait tres 
bien Paris, il m’a montre tout 
ce qui est interessant: les bals, 
les concerts, les theatres, les 
magasins, les eglises, etc. 

Combien de temps y etes-vous 
reste ? 

Dix jours exactement, et je suis 
parti poftr Berlin ou je suis 
reste tout le temps-que nous 
etions en Allemague. 

Que preferez-vous, Londres ou 
Paris? 

Oh! Londres est une tres grande 
ville, mais je ne l’aime pas 
beaucoup. Elle n’est pas aussi 
belle que Paris. Mais qu’avez- 
vous fait pendant que j’etais 
la? Etes-vous restees en ville 
tout le temps? 

Oh! non; il faisait trop chaud 
ici, et M. et Mme. Harrison 
nous ont invitees a aller a la 
campagne avec eux. Nous 
avons ete un mois a leur mai- 
son de campagne. 


PHRASES 

Did you ask for Mrs. A? 

You had no business to go there. 
Can you call on me tonight? 

In the course of the day. 

We did not expect that. 

He always does things by halves. 
How much did you make? 

Those are places I do not go to. 

Please, till me where he lives. 

I stop here. 


USUELLES 

Vous etes-vous informe de Mme. 
A? 

Vous n’aviez que faire d’y aller. 

Pouvez-vous venir me voir ce soir? 

Dans le courant de la journee. 

Nous ne nous attendions pas a 
cela. 

Il fait toujours les choses a demi. 

Combien avez-vous gagne? 

Voila des lieux que je ne fre- 
quente pas. 

Ayez la bonte de me dire ou il 
demeure. 

Je m’arrete ici. 






6 


ONZIEME LEQON 


21 


PHRASES USUERLES — (Continuees) 


We stopped a month with them. 

How far did you walk? 

I walked ten miles. 

One does not know how to take 
him. 

Take it, if you have an appetite 
for it. 

Do you go his way? 

Put it down in writing. 

That is far from being right. 
Always think of what you do. 

Who is wanted? 

What is wanted? 

Must I wait for you here or at 
your house? 

I'have not time to do it. 

I see no difficulties in it. 

I am happy to tell you so. 

Your idea is a very good one. 
Have you all you want? 

Whose son is he? 

He does not know to whom he is 
speaking. 

Do as you please. 

I wish you to remain here. 

Do you think that he knows it? 

It is time for you to go out. 

He did that without my knowl¬ 
edge. 

He was much like him. 

Go and meet him. 

All is well. 

I do not know what I am about. 
Do you still believe that? 

I know that as well as you. 

As well not go at all. 

I did not expect it. 

In my old age. 

What remains for me to do? 

Let us stop there. 

Drink my health. 

For what reason? 


Nous avons passe un mois avec 
eux. 

Jusqu’ou etes-vous alle? 

J’ai fait dix milles a pied. 

On ne sait par quel bout le 
prendre. 

Prenez-le, si le coeur vous en dit. 

Allez-vous de son cote? 

Mettez-le par ecrit. 

II y a bien a dire la-dessus. 

Pensez toujours a ce que vous 
faites. 

Qui demande-t-on? 

Que demande-t-on? 

Faut-il que je vous attende ici ou 
chez vous? 

Je n’ai pas le temps de le faire. 

Je n’y vois pas d’ inconvenients. 
Je suis heureux de vous le dire. 
Votre idee est tres bonne. 
Avez-vous tout ce qu’il vous faut? 
Le fils de qui est-il? 

II ne sait pas a qui il parle. 

Faites com me il vous plaira. 

Je desire que vous restiez ici. 
Croyez-vous qu’il le sache? 

Il est temps que vous sortiez. 

Il a fait cela a mon insu. 

Il etait a peu pres comme lui. 
Allez au-devant de lui. 

Tout va bien. 

Je ne sais pas ou j’en suis. 

En etes-vous encore la? 

Je sais cela aussi bien que vous. 
Autant ne pas y aller du tout. 

Je ne m’y attendais pas. 

Sur mes vieux jours. 

Que me reste-t-il a faire? 
Restons-en la. 

Buvez a ma sante. 

A cause de quoi? 



22 


ANGLAIS 


6 


PHRASES TJSUELEES—(Continuees) 


I wish I had it. 

Is there any water in my room? 

It is dark. 

I know him only by name. 

Go your way. 

I may not do it. 

I cannot do it. 

Come to see me; I am always at 
home after four o'clock. 

It is a pleasure to see that garden. 
This Is no great thing. 

Do what I tell you. 

How so? 

We expect him to dinner. 

What is the good of that? 

What do you expect to do? 

How kind you are! 

It is getting late. 

I do not believe a word of it. 

He did not find what he expected. 
It is to my interest to do it. 

In the first place. 

Well, what is it about? 

Ask him to come in. 

Who goes there? 

It is dinner time. 

We had some words. 

You had information concerning 
it. 

He has a wife and children. 

I do not know what to think of 
that. 

We do not know what to think of 
him. 

He gives me much trouble. 

I do not want her. 

It is all one to him. 

How far did you go? 

How long do we stop here? 


Je voudrais Tavoir. 

Y a-t-il de l’eau dans machambre? 
II fait nuit. 

Je ne le connais que de 110 m. 
Passez votre chemin. 

Je puis ne pas le faire. 

Je ne puis pas le faire. 

Venez me voir; je suis toujours 
chez moi apres quatre heures. 
Ce jardin fait plaisir a voir. 

Ce n’est pas grand'chose. 

Faites ce que je vous dis. 
Comment cela? 

Nous l'attendons a diner. 

A quoi bon? 

Que comptez-vous faire? 

Que vous etes bon! 

II se faittard. 

Je n’en crois rien. 

II n'y a pas trouve son compte. 

II est de mon interet de le faire. 
En premier lieu. 

Eh bien! de quoi s’agit-il? 

Priez-le d’entrer. 

Qui va la? 

II est l’heure de diner. 

Nous avons eu des paroles. 

On vous en avait prevenu. 

II a femme et enfants. 

Je ne sais que penser de tout cela. 

On ne sait a quoi s'en tenir sur 
son compte. 

II me donne fort a faire. 

Je n'ai que faire d’elle. 

Tout lui est egal. 

Jusqu’ou etes-vous alle? 

Combien de temps s’arrete-t-on 
ici? 



§6 


ONZIEME LEQON 


23 


EXERCICE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 

Apres avoir termine cette legon, vous devez avoir regu de 
nous votre exercice ecrit de la lOeme legon avec nos correc¬ 
tions. Enregistrez-le sur un cylindre vierge, et envoyez-le- 
nous en suivant les directions donndes pour envoyer les 
exercices phonographiques precedents. 

En attendant nos corrections, etudiez la legon douzieme 
soigneusement. 


24 


ANGLAIS 


6 


DOU.ZIEME LECON 


CYLINDRE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 


VOCABULAIRE 


I. C. S. 

English Record No. 12 

ago, il y a 

the appointment, le rendez¬ 
vous 

the balance, la balance , le 
solde 

the balance sheet, le bilan 
the bathroom, la salle de 
bains 

the bedroom, la chambre a 
coucher 

to begin, commencer 
the hell, la cloche , la sonnette 
the bookkeeper, le teneur 
de livres 

carefully, soigneusement 
the cent, le sou 
certain, certain 
to cheek, verifier 
the check, le cheque 
clear, net, clair 
the cigar, le cigare 
the column, la colonne 
down, en bas 
during, pendant 
encoura gi n g, encouragean t 
to examine, examiner 


/. c. s. 

Cylindre d'Anglais No. 12 

the figure, le chiffre 
the file, la liasse, le dossier 
the hand, la main 
the inventory, Vinventaire 
just, exactement 
the kitchen, la cuisine 
the ledger, le Grand-Livre 
the library, le bibliotheque 
to look, regarder 
the loss, la perde 
monthly, men sue l lenient 
at once, immidiatement 
to order, commander, ordon- 
ner 

over, au-dessus, entierement 
the parlor, le salon 
to prepare, prfpurer 
to profit, le profit 
to remember, se rappeler 
to ring, sonner 
the safe, le coffre-fort 
the season, la saison 
to serve, servir 
since, depuis 
to sit, s'asseoir 
to smoke, turner 





25 


6 DOUZIEME LECON 

VOC A BTJRAIRE — (Continue) 


tlie stall’s, I’escalier 
the stock, les marchandises 
en magasin. 
to talk, causer 
these, ces, pluriel de this 
tomorrow, demain 


the trade, le commerce 
unusually, rarement 
up, en haut 

the voucher, le re<;u, le 
papier d'affaires 
to work, travailler 


PHRASES ET 

Your bookkeeper is in the 
parlor, sir. He says he 
has an appointment with 
you. 

So he has. 1 Show him up' 2 
into 3 the library. 

Come in, Mr. Perkins, and 
sit down. 4 

Thank you. Is your wife 
well? And the little girls? 

O, yes; we are all well. Let 
us see, Mr. Perkins, it is 
just 5 a year ago 6 today, is it 
not, since I began 7 busi¬ 
ness here? Have a cigar. 

No, thank you; I do not 
smoke. Just a year, sir. 
There were 8 a few losses 
last September, 9 as you 
know, but the balance for 
the year shows an unusu¬ 
ally good profit. 

Are you certain about that? 
You examined the books? 


GONVERSATION 

Votre teneur de livres est 
dans le salon, monsieur. 
II dit qu’il a un rendez¬ 
vous avec vous. 

En effet. Faites-le monter 
dans la bibliotheque. 
Entrez, M. Perkins, et as- 
seyez-vous. 

Merci. Madame se porte-t- 
elle bien? Et vos petites 
filles? 

Oh! oui; nous sommes tous 
en bonne sante. Voyons, 
M. Perkins; il y a aujour- 
d’huiexactement une annee, 
n’est-ce pas, que j’ai com¬ 
mence en affaires ici? 
Prenez un cigare. 

Non, merci; je ne fume pas. 
Une annee exactement, 
monsieur. Nous avons eu 
quelques pertes en septem- 
bre dernier, comme vous 
le savez, mais la balance 
pour P annee m outre un 
profit exceptionnel. 

En etes-vous certain? Vous 
avez examine les livres? 





26 


ANGLAIS 


§6 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION—(Continuees) 


Yes; I worked on them on 10 
Sunday and I find a clear 
profit of eight thousand 
seven hundred and forty 
dollars and fifty-five cents. 13 

Good; I did not expect so 
much. Kindly ring the 
bell, Mr. Perkins. We 
have much to talk about 
and you must take dinner 
with me. Did you make an 
inventory of the stock on 
hand? Bridget, serve din¬ 
ner in an hour, and when 
you go down-stairs, ask 
Grace to bring me the 
ledger. It is on the safe in 
my bedroom. Now, Mr. 
Perkins, I am ready to look 
at your balance sheet. 

These 11 figures show the 
monthly balances during 
the year. Those 11 in that 
column — 

Let me read, Mr. Perkins. 
Ah, yes; the figures cer¬ 
tainly are encouraging. 
And you found 14 all the 
vouchers on file? 

I did, sir. 

Did you check them with the 
ledger? 

All of them, sir. 


Oui; jeles ai examines. J’ai 
travaille dimanche et je 
trouve un profit net de huit 
mille sept cent quarante 
dollars et cinquante-cin^ 
“cents.” 

Bien; je n’en attendais pas 
autant. Sonnez, je vous 
prie, M. Perkins. Nous 
avons beaucoup a parler, 
et vous dinerez avec moi. 
Avez-vOus fait l’inventaire 
des marchandises en ma- 
gasin? Brigitte, vous pou- 
vez nous servir a diner 
dans une heure, et quand 
vous descendrez, demandez 
a Grace de m’apporter le 
Grand-Livre. II est sur le 
coffre-fort dans ma chambre 
a coucher. Maintenant, M. 
Perkins, je suis pret a 
regarder le bilan. 

Ces chiffres-ci montrent les 
balances mensuelles. de 
l’annee; ceux-la,, dans cette 
colonne^— 

Laissez-moi lire, M. Perkins. 
Ah! oui; ces chiffres sont 
certainement encoura- 
geants. Et vous avez 
trouve toutes les pieces au 
dossier? 

Oui, monsieur. 

Les avez-vous comparees 
avec le Grand-Livre? 

Toutes, monsieur. 



6 


DOUZIEME LEQOff 


27 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION- (Continuees) 


Good; now tomorrow, Friday, 
I want you to put the 
checks back into the check¬ 
book and to go over our 
stock very carefully. Then 
see what we need to order 
at once. Remember we 
have only sixty days more 
before the season’s trade 
begins and we must prepare 
for it. 


The days of the week are: 
Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, 
Wednesday, Thursday, 
Friday, and Saturday. 

The months of the year are: 
January, February, March, 
April, May, June, July, 
August, September, Octo¬ 
ber, November, and De¬ 
cember. 


Bien; maintenant, demain 
vendredi vous remettrez les 
cheques dans le livre de 
cheques, et vous exami- 
nerez soigneusement les 
marchandises en magasin. 
Prenez note de ce dont nous 
avons besoin de comman¬ 
der imm^diatement. Rap- 
pelez-vous que nous n ’ avons 
que soixante jours de plus 
avant que la vente de la 
saison commence, et nous 
devons nous preparer pour 
cela. 

*** 

Les jours de la semaine sont: 
dimanche, lundi, mardi, 
mercredi, jeudi, vendredi et 
samedi. 

Les mois de l’ann6e sont: 
janvier, f^vrier, mars, avril, 
mai, juin, juillet, aout, sep- 
tembre, octobre, novembre 
et decembre. 


REMARQUES 

1. La traduction litterale de so he has est ainsi il a; elle 
6quivaut a notre expression en effet. 

Mrs. Clay says she has an appointment with you.—So she has. 
Mme. Clay dit qu'elle a un rendez-vous avec vous.—En effet. 

2. Le verbe to show avec une preposition est souvent 
employ^ en anglais pour traduire notre verbe faire. Avec 
la preposition in , il a le sens de faire entrer; avec up, celui 





ANGLAIS 


28 


§6 


de faire monter, en priant une personae d’entrer ou de 
monter. 


Show her in, Faites-la entrer. 

Show them up, Faites-les monter. 

II peut aussi s’allier aux adverbes out , et down , et a dans 
ce cas les significations suivantes: 

Show him out, Reconduisez-le a la porte , ou accompagnez-le jusqu’a 
la porte (litteralement, montrez-lui dehors'). 

Show him down (or down-stairs), Reconduisez-le jusqu'en das. 

Comme il a deja ete dit, les verbes anglais ont la faculte 
de s’unir aux adverbes ou aux prepositions pour former une 
sorte de verbe compose qui a un sens tout a fait different de 
l’original. En voici des exemples: 

to go up, monter [alter en haut) 
to go down, descendre [alter en das) 
to go back, revenir [aller en arriere) 
to go in, entrer [aller dedans) 
to go out, sortir , [alter dehors) 
to get up, se lever , [se mettre en haut) 

3. In et into se traduisent tous deux en fran^ais par en 
ou dans. Le premier cependant s’emploie lorsqu’aucun 
mouvement n’est exprime, et le second lorsqu’on indique un 
mouvement, le passage d’une chose dans une autre: 

Were you in the garden when I called you 1 — Etiez-vous dans le 
jardin quand je vous ai apjele? 

No; I was in my room, Non; j'etais dans nui chamdre. 

Come into the room, Entrez dans la chamdre. 

No; let us go into the garden, Non; allons dans le jardin. 

4. Notre verbe s’asseoir est traduit litteralement par to 
sit, mais ce verbe est generalement suivi de l’adverbe down , 
en bas: 

Sit down, Mr. Perkins, Asseyez-vous, M. Perkins. 

Let us sit down, I am tired, Asseyons-nous , je suis fatigue. 

5. Just , exactement, s’emploie en anglais avec le verbe 
to have pour exprimer venir de en franqais, c’est-a-dire pour 
indiquer qu’une action vient d’avoir lieu: 


DOUZIEME LECON 29 

He just passed your house, II vient de passer devant votre maison. 

They just ordered some goods, Ils viennent de commander des 
merchandises. 

(). Le mot anglais ago traduit notre expression il y a 
que nous employons devant une periode de temps: 

I-arrived three days ago, Je sms arrive il y a trois jours. 

I began a year ago, J'ai commence il y a un an. 

7 . Nous avons dit qu’il y avait a peu pres deux cents 
exceptions a la regie de formation de l’imparfait que nous 
avons donnee. Le verbe to begin , commencer, en est un 
exemple. Au lieu d’ajouter ed comme il a ete dit, l’imparfait 
de to begin est I began , invariable a toutes les personnes: 

He began a year ago today, Il a commence il y a un an anjourd'hui. 

They began when I was in Paris, Ils out commence quand j'etais a 
Paris. 

8. Le verbe impersonnel y avoir fait au present, en 
anglais there is, ou there are selon que le nom qui suit est au 
singulier ou au pluriel. L’expression frangaise il y avait 
devient there was au singulier, et there were au pluriel: 

There is a gentleman down-stairs, Il y a un monsieur en bas. 

There are three ladies up-stairs with mother, Il y a trois dames en 
haut avec maman. 

There was a house to let, Il y avait une maison a loner. 

There were many children there, Il y avait beaucoup d’enfants Id. 

9 . Les noms des mois de l’annee, et des jours de la 
semaine etant consideres comme noms propres en anglais, 
s’ecrivent toujours avec une lettre majuscule. 

10 . La preposition on se met en anglais devant les jours 
de la semaine lorsque nous mettons Particle en frangais: 

He called on Sunday, Il est venu le dimanche. 

On Sunday you must go to church, Le dimanche vous devez aller d 
! eg Use. 

11 . These est le pluriel de this, et s’emploie pour deter¬ 
miner les objets places pres de nous. Nous avons ainsi la 
liste complete des adjectifs et des pronoms demonstratifs: 



30 


ANGLAIS 


§6 


Singulier Pluriel 

tliis, ce, cet, cette .... ci. tliese, ces ... . ci. 

that, ce , cet , cette . ... la. those, ces . ... la. 

Ces adjectifs demonstrates sont aussi pronoms lorsqu’ils 
ne sont pas places devant tin nom. 

12. Emploi des Pronoms Demonstratifs. 

1. This et that traduisent respectivement ceci et cela: 

Do you believe that? Croyez-vous cela? 

Give me this, Donnez-moi ceci. 

2. Celui-ci, celui-la , etc. se traduisent par this one et that 
one , mais ceux-ci et ceux-la , etc. par these et those respective¬ 
ment: 

Did you see this one, or that one? Avez-vous vu celni-ci ou celui-la? 

These books are very interesting, but I prefer those, Ces livres-ci 
sont Iris interessants , mais je prefire ceux-la. 

See these two houses: this one is mine, and that one is my brother’s, 
Voyez ces deux maisons: celle-ci est a moi , et celle-lct est a mon frere. 

3. Lorsque les pronoms demonstratifs frangais celui , celle, 
ceux , celles sont antecedents d’un pronom relatif et se rappor- 
tent aux personnes, on les traduit en anglais par les pronoms 
personnels he , she, they , ou those s’ils sont sujets, et par him , 
her , them or those s’ils sont complements: 

He who studies makes progress, Celui qui etudie fait des progris. 

She who studies makes progress, Celle qui Hudie fait des progris. 

They who study make progress, Ceux ou celles qui etudient font des 
progris. 

Those who study make progress, Ceux ou celles qui Hudient font 
des progres. 

I do not like him (her, them, ou those) who is coming, Jen'aime 
pas celui ( celle , ceux ou celles ) qui vient. 

4. Void et voilct se traduisent aussi souvent par this et 
that suivis du verbe etre: 

This is my brother, Void mon frire. 

That is your sister, Voila votre soeur. 

5. Quand les pronoms demonstratifs celui , celle , ceux , celles 
marquent un rapport de possession, on ne les traduit pas ne 


9 6 DOUZIEME LEQON 31 


anglais, mais on ajoute la marque’s du cas possessif au nom 
du possesseur: 

Your house is not so large as my brother’s, Votre niaison n'est pas 
si grande que celle de mon fr'ere. 

Your children are not so old as my uncle’s, Vos enfants ne sont pas 
aussi ages que ceux de mon oncle. 


13. L’unite de monnaie americaine est le dollar qui vaut 
theoriquement cinq francs. Le dollar est divise en 100 cents. 
Le cent a par consequent la meme valeur que le sou de la 
monnaie frangaise (ancienne denomination). On exprime 
une somme d’argent en dollars et cents, comme nous le 
faisons en francs et centimes, avec cette difference que les 
dollars et cents ont cinq fois plus de valeur que les francs et 
centimes. De la, si nous voulons convertir une somme 
exprimee en dollars et cents en monnaie frangaise, nous 
multiplions par 5. On fait preceder la somme par le 
signe ($) qui veut dire dollar. Ainsi $3.15 = 3.15 X 5. 
= 15 frs. 75; 85 cents = 85 X 5 = 4 frs. 25. Au contraire, si 
nous avons une somme exprimee en francs et centimes, nous 
divisons par cinq pour en avoir l’equivalent en dollars et 


1.25 


cents. Par exemple: 1 fr. 25 = = 25 cents; 13 frs. 85 


13.85 

i5 


$2.77. 


Cette valeur de 5 frs. que nous donnons pour le dollar 
n’est que theorique. En fait, cette valeur varie continuelle- 
ment avec le change. En ce moment, la valeur du franc, 
qui doit etre theoriquement de 20 cents, n’est r£ellement 
que de 19 cents .3. 


14. Le verbe to find , trouver, forme aussi l’imparfait 
irregulierement, et devient I found. 

I arrived yesterday and found my brother at the pier, Je sms arrivl 
hier, et j'ai trouve mon frere au quai. 

He found us at John’s, II nous a trouves chez Jean. 




32 


ANGLAIS 


$3 


EXERCICE ORAL 

It serves him right. 

C'est bien fait pour lui. 

It serves me right. 

It serves her right. 

It serves us right. 

It serves them right. 

It serves you right. 

Mr. Clay says he has an appointment with 
you.—So he has. Show him up into the 
parlor. 

M. Clay dit qu'il a un rendez-vous avec vous.—En effet. 
Faites-le monter dans le salon. 

Mrs. Clay says she has an appointment with her. —So she 
has. Show her into the parlor, and tell my wife. 

Miss Clay says she has an appointment with your daugh¬ 
ter at half past ten. —So she has. Show her into the library 
and tell Lucy to come down-stairs. 

These gentlemen say they have an appointment with your 
bookkeeper. — So they have. Show them into the office and 
tell my bookkeeper to meet them. 

Have you not an appointment with the cashier of the 
bank? —So I have, but I have time enough. 

Wlien you go up, bring me the ledger; it is 
on the safe in my bedroom. 

Quancl vous monterez , apportez-moi le Grand-Livre; il est 
sur le coffre-fort dans in a chambre a coucher. 

When she goes up, tell her to bring my hat; it is on the 
table in the library. 

When your brother comes down, tell him I want to speak 
to him. 

When I am tired, I get up very late. 

Go up, John, and tell Mary to come down. 

When Mr. Clay comes back, tell him to come up to see me. 

Where is your friend? —She is in her room. 

Oil est votre amie?—Elle est dans sa chambre. 


9242 


§6 


DOUZIEME LEQON 


33 


Let us go into her room. I want to speak to her. 

Where are they going? —They are going into the garden. 
When I was in my room, I smoked a cigar. 

Let them come into the parlor, I want to speak to them. 

Sit down, Mr. Perkins, you must be tired. 

Asseyez-vous, M. Perkins, vous devez etre fatigue. 

Sit down to the table and have dinner with us. 

I cannot sit down; I must go. I have an appointment 
with a friend of mine. 

She did not sit down; she had to go to the bank. 

Why do you not sit down with us? You must be tired. 

I liave to go to see my friend Mi*. Harrison. 

II faut que f aille voir mon ami M. Harrison. 

I have to tell Mrs. Clay where my uncle lives. 

He has to find his hat, because he wishes to take a 
walk now. 

Mr. Perkins has to return to St. Petersburg. 

John has to finish his music lesson before dinner. 

We have to learn to speak English as well as John does. 
They have to stay here very late. 

My parents have to remain in London. 

I liad to go to see my friend, Mr. Harrison. 

Je devais alter voir mon ami, M. Harrison . 

I had to tell Mrs. Clay where my uncle lives. 

He had to find his hat, because he wished to take a walk. 
Mr. Perkins had to return to St. Petersburg. 

John had to finish his music lesson before dinner. 

We had to learn to speak English as well as he did. 

They had to stay here very late. 

My parents had to remain in Berlin. 

When did you begin this business? —I began 
a year ago today. 

Quand avez-vous commence cette affaire?—J’ai commence 
it y a un an aujourd'hut. 

When did you begin this business? —We began two years 
ago today. 


34 ANGLAIS §6 

When did he begin this business? —He began eight months 
ago today. 

When did she begin this business? —She began three 
weeks ago today. 

When did they begin this business? —They began three 
years ago yesterday. 

When did these gentlemen begin this business? —They 
began six months ago yesterday. 

There were many passengers on that ship. 

II y avait beaucoup de passagers sur ce bateau. 

There was a young man who did not speak English at all. 
Were there many ladies? —No; not many. 

Were there many children? —O, yes; a great many. 

There was a very good teacher in that school. 

There were many Englishmen in Paris when I was there. 

He usually comes to see me on Monday. 

It vient ordinairement me voir le lundi. 

Go to see your friend on Tuesday. 

Why do you not come to see me on Wednesday? I am 
always at home. 

Do not come on Thursday; I am never at home on that day. 
On Sunday I go to church with my parents. 

I do not go to school on Saturday; it is a holiday. 

We do not go out on Friday. 

How many days has February this year?-It 
has twenty-eight days. 

Combien de jours a fevrier cette annee?—II a vingt-huit 
jours. 

How many days have January, March, May, July, August, 
October, and December? —They all have thirty-one days. 

How many days have April, June, September, and 
November? —They all have thirty days. 

Here are two books: this one is in French, 
that one is in German. 

Void deux livres: celui-ci est en frangais; celui-la est en 
allemand. 


6 


DOUZIEME LEQON 


35 


Here are two tables: this one is small, that one is large. 
There are two houses: this one is mine, that one is my 
uncle’s. 

Here are two gentlemen: this one is Mr. Clay, that one is 
Mr. Harrison. 

There are two ladies: this one is Mrs. Clay, that one is 
Mrs. Harrison. 

Here are two rooms: this one is light, that one is dark. 

Here are books: these are in French, those 
are in German. 

Void des livres: ceux-d so?it en franqais; ceux-lct. sont en 
allemand. 

Here are tables: these are small, those are large. 

There are houses: these are mine, those are my uncle’s. 
Here are gentlemen: these are my friends, and those are 
my uncle’s cousins. 

There are rooms: these are light, those are dark. 

Whose hook is this? Is it yours?-No; it is 
not mine. 

A qui est ce livre? Est-il a vous?—Non; il n'est pas 
a moi. 

Whose pen is this? Is it his? —No; it is not his; it is hers. 
Whose house is this? Is it yours? —No; it is not ours. 
Whose estates are these? Are they theirs? —No; they are 
not theirs. 

Whose rooms are these? Are they John’s? —No; they are 
not his. 

Hid he come this morning;? —No; he did not. 

Est-il venu ce matin?—Non; il n'est pas venu. 

Did you come this morning? —No; I did not. 

Did you come this morning? —No; we did not. 

Did she come this morning? —No; she did not. 

Did they come yesterday? —No; they did not. 

Are you going out this morning? —Yes; lain 
going out at once. 

Sortez-vous ce matin? — Oui; je sors tout de stiite. 


36 ANGLAIS §6 

Is he also going out this morning? —Yes; he is going out 
at once. 

Is she going out with you? —No; she is not going out 
with me. 

Are they not going out with them? —No; they are going 
out with us. 

We are going out, and these gentlemen are coming 
with us. 

The house out of which he is coming, is his 
father’s. 

La tnaison d'ou il sort est celle de son plre. 

The house out of which she is coming, is her uncle’s. 

The house out of which I am coming, is mine. 

The house out of which we are coming, is our cousin’s. 
The house out of which these gentlemen are coming, is 
their mother’s. 

How much does your brother want? —He 
wants a hundred dollars. 

Combien faut-il a votre frIre? — II lui faut cent dollars. 

How much do you want? —I want a thousand dollars. 

How much does Lucy want? —She wants fifty cents. 

How much do you want, ladies? —We want fifty-five 
dollars. 

How much do these gentlemen want? —They want five 
hundred dollars. 

I was very glad to make his acquaintance. 

J'itais trbs content de faire sa connaissance. 

He was very glad to make my acquaintance. 

We were very glad to make their acquaintance. 

She was very glad to make your acquaintance. 

You were delighted to make her acquaintance. 

He was delighted to make our acquaintance. 

Which do you prefer, tea or coffee?—I prefer 
tea. 

Que preferez-vous, le the ou le cafe?—Je prefbre le the. 


6 


DOUZIEME LEQON 


37 


Which do you prefer, tea or coffee? —We prefer coffee. 
Which does he prefer, milk or water? —He prefers milk. 
Do they not prefer a glass of water? —No; they prefer a 
glass of milk. 

Do you expect to go to Paris soon? —Yes; I do. 

Sliow me the way, if you please. 

Montrez-moi le chemin , sHl vous plait. 

Show me the dining room, if you please. 

Show him into the parlor, please. 

Show her into the library, please. 

Show them up into the dining room, please. 

1 do not know how to say that word in 
French. 

Je ne sais pas dire ce mot en frangais . 

We do not know how to count in German. 

John does not know how to read in English. 

She does not know how to write in Spanish. 

They do not know how to count in French. 


REVUE FT CONVERSATION 


Good morning, papa; how do you 
do this morning? 

Good morning, my child. I am 
very well, thank you. How are 
you? 

Very well, papa. 

Why did you get up so early? 

I am going to tell you, papa. 
Last night, my cousin Edward 
was here, and I had no time to 
study my lessons. I want to 
study them this morning before I 
go to school. I have time now 
to learn them well. 

Very well. Sit in the parlor to 
do your work. I must go into 
the library because I have many 
letters to write, and I cannot 


Bonjour, papa; comment, vas-tu 
ce matin? 

Bonjour, mon enfant. Je vais 
tres bien, merci. Et comment 
vas-tu? 

Tres bien, papa. 

Pourquoi t’es-tu leve si matin? 

Je vais te dire, papa. Hier soir 
mon cousin Edouard etait ici, et 
je n’ai pas eu le temps d’etudier 
mes legons. Ce matin je veux 
les etudier avant d’aller a 
recole. J’ai le temps de bien 
les apprendre. 

Tres bien. Assieds-toi dans le 
salon pour faire ton ouvrage. 
II faut que j’aille dans la biblio- 
theque, parce quej’ai beaucoup 




38 


ANGLAIS 


6 


HEYUE ET CONVERSATION — (Continuees) 


work when you are there; you 
talk all the time. 

Very well, papa, I do not want to 
trouble you. 

I expect Mr. Perkins and Charles. 
When they come, show them 
into the library. 

Yes, papa. 

And tell mamma, please, that I had 
a letter from cousin William this 
morning, in which he writes 
that uncle John and his two 
nieces are coming next week to 
spend some time with us. 

Yes, papa. How delighted I am 
to have Mary and Alice here! 
We must keep them a month. 

* 

* * 

Come in, Mr. Perkins; come in, 
Charles, and sit down. Put 
your books on the table, Mr. 
Perkins. Now Charles, take 
that box of cigars; they are 
there on the shelf. Do you 
smoke, Mr. Perkins? Have a 
cigar. They are very good. 

No, thank you, I cannot smoke 
in the morning. I usually 
smoke one cigar after dinner. 

Well, Mr. Perkins, I called you 
today because I wanted you to 
be here when Charles reads the 
results of our first year in part¬ 
nership. You know that we 
started this business a year ago 
yesterday. I am happy to tell 
you we were very successful. 


de lettres a ecrire, et que je ne 
peux pas travailler quand tu es 
la; tu paries tout le temps. 

Tres bien, papa, je ne veux pas 
te deranger. 

J’attends M. Perkins et Charles. 
Quand ils viendront, fais-les 
entrer dans la bibliotheque. 

Oui, papa. 

Et dis a maman, je te prie, que 
j’ai eu une lettre ce matin de 
notre cousin Guillaume, dans 
laquelle il ecrit que Poncle Jean 
et ses deux nieces viendront 
nous voir la semaine prochaine 
et passer quelque temps avec 
nous. 

Oui, papa. Que je serai content 
d’avoir Marie et Alice ici! II 
faudra les garder un mois. 

* 

* * 

Entrez, M. Perkins; entrez-, 
Charles, et asseyez-vous. Met- 
tez vos livres sur la table, M. 
Perkins. Maintenant, Charles, 
prenez cette boite de cigares, la 
sur Petagere. Fumez-vous, M. 
Perkins? Prenez un cigare; ils 
sont tres bons. 

Non, merci; je ne peux pas fumer 
le matin. Je fume habituelle- 
ment un cigare apres mon 
diner. 

Eh bien, M. Perkins, je vous ai 
appele aujourd’hui parce que 
je voulais que vous fussiez ici 
quand Charles lirait les resul- 
tats de la premiere annee de 
notre association. Vous savez 
que nous avons commence en 
affaires il y a un an hier. Je 
suis heureux de vous dire que 
nous avons tres bien reussi. 



6 


DOUZIEME LECON 


39 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION — (Continuees) 


Good; what are the clear profits 
of the year? 

Charles, did you make out your 
balance sheet? 

Yes, sir; here it is. It shows a 
clear profit of twenty-nine 
thousand seven hundred forty- 
five dollars and eighty-five 
cents. 

These figures are indeed very en¬ 
couraging. I did not expect so 
much. Now let us see’ the 
monthly business. Give me the 
balance sheet. Why! this is 
very good. We are growing 
constantly. Are you sure of 
these figures. 

Yes, sir; I examined the stock 
carefully, and checked all the 
vouchers. 

What is our balance at the bank? 

About twenty-three thousand dol¬ 
lars, sir. 

Very well; go over the stock to¬ 
morrow, and see what we need 
to order. We must prepare for 
the summer’s trade, and have 
our goods in the store by next 
month. 

Now, this is work enough for 
today. It is nearly eleven o’clock. 
Let us go into the garden and 
smoke a cigar there. The 
weather is very fine. You must 
stay to dinner with me. 

I am sorry, Mr. Webster, but I 
have an appointment with a 
gentleman at the store, at a 
quarter after eleven. I must go. 


Tres bien; quels sont les profits 
nets de Pannee? 

Charles, avez-vous etabli le bilan? 

Oui, monsieur; le voici. II mon- 
tre un profit net de vingt-neuf 
mille sept cent quarante-cinq 
dollars et quatre-vingt-cinq 
cents. 

Ces chiffres sont vraiment tres 
encourageants. Je ne m’atten- 
dais pas a autant. Maintenant 
voyons les balances mensuelles. 
Donnez-moi la balance generale. 
C’est vraiment bon! Nous aug- 
mentons nos profits constam- 
ment. Etes-vous sur de vos 
chiffres? 

Oui, monsieur. J’ai examine les 
marchandises en magasin soi- 
gneusement, et verifie tous les 
regus. 

Quelle somme avons-nous a la 
banque? 

A peu pres vingt-trois mille dol¬ 
lars, monsieur. 

Tres bien; examinez les marchan¬ 
dises en magasin demain, et 
voyez ce dont nous avons besoin. 
II faut nous preparer pour le 
commerce de l’ete, et avoir nos 
marchandises en magasin le 
mois prochain. 

Maintenant, c’est assez d’affaires 
pour aujourd’hui. II est pres 
de onze heures. Allons dans 
le jardin et fumons un cigare. 
II fait tres beau. II faut que 
vous restiez a diner avec moi. 

Je suis fache, M. Webster, mais 
j’ai rendez-vous avec un mon¬ 
sieur au magasin a onze heures 
et quart. II faut que je m’en 
aille. 




40 


ANGLAIS 


6 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION — (Continuees) 


But, my dear Charles, you can 
come back at twelve for dinner, 
can you not? 

I think so. 

Very well. Come as soon as you 
can. I am going to tell Bridget 
to have dinner ready by half 
past twelve. 


Mais, mon cher Charles, vous 
pourrez etre ici pour le diner a 
midi, n’est-ce pas? 

Je pense que oui. 

Tres bien. Venez aussitot que 
vous pourrez. Je vais dire a 
Brigitte de preparer le diner 
pour midi et demi. 


PHRASES 

How did that come about? 

Give us a hand. 

On the one hand; on the other 
hand. 

It serves him right. 

Sit down to the table. 

I was there two months ago. 
Work as much as you can. 

He did not know how to manage it. 
Are we in time for the train? 

Have any letters arrived for me? 
I am up in the morning at five 
o’clock. 

He looks like a rich man. 

He is up-stairs. 

My mistress is not at home. 

He is in business. 

Come, my friends, to work. 

We stayed with them a month. 

He writes a good hand. 

He knows it quite as well as you. 
The weather is not certain. 

Are you going my way? 

How much do you ask for those 
gloves? 

He speaks well. 

He is a man of his word. 

He does as he pleases. 

In the first place. 


USUELLES 

Comment cela est-il arrive? 
Donnez-nous un coup de main. 
D’une part; d’une autre* part. 

C’est bien fait pour lui. 
Mettez-vous a table. 

J’etais la il y a deux mois. 
Travaillez autant que vous pour¬ 
rez. 

II lie savait comment s’y prendre. 
Sommes-nous a temps pour le 
train? 

Est-il arrive une lettre pour moi? 
Je suis sur pied le matin a cinq 
heures. 

II a la mine d’etre riche. 

II est en haut. 

Madame n’y est pas. 

II est dans le commerce. 

Allons! mes amis, au travail! 

Nous avons passe un mois avec 
eux. 

II a une belle ecriture. 

II le sait tout aussi bien que vous. 
Le temps n’est pas sur. 

Allez-vous de mon cote? 

Com bien faites-vous ces gants? 

II a la parole facile. 

II est horn me de parole. 

II n’en fait qu’a sa tete. 

En premier lieu. 





§6 


DOUZIEME LEQON 


41 


PHRASES USUEELES—(Continuees) 


Tell me where you are going. 

I am sure of what I say. 

That is a loss for me. 

If you like it. 

How much you like to talk. 

You see how he works. 

He walked before me. 

He was to start this morning. 

I expect you to remain with me. 

I think of those who are dear to 
me. 

What do you think of this old 
lady? 

You must give up your intention 
of going to Italy. 

Where did you spend your time 
yesterday? 

Where did you find that? 

I found it on the street. 

That surprises me. 

I am delighted to see you well 
again. 

To whom do you say that? 

What! are you still in bed? 

I do not know how you can stay 
in bed so long. 

I do not know how to spend my 
time when I am up. 

What troubles you so much? 

I started just in time. 

It must be so. 

She must be English. 

Do you know Harrison Street? 
Tell them to go in. 

Tell my wfife I wish to speak to 
her. 

I cannot tell you. 

Let me know where you live. 

He who counts ten friends has not 
one. 

What are you thinking of? 

There is the man I speak of. 


Dites-moi ou vous allez. 

Je suis sur de mon fait. 

Cela me porte dommage. 

Si le coeur vous en dit. 

Que vous aimez a parler! 

Vous voyez comme il travaille. 

II marchait devant moi. 

II devait partir ce matin. 

Pen tends que vous restiez avec 
moi. 

Je pense a ceux qui me sont chers. 

Que pensez-vous de cette dame 
agee? 

II faut que vous abandonniez votre 
intention d’alleren Italie. 

Ou avez-vous passe votre temps 
hier? 

Ou avez-vous trouve cela? 

Je l’ai trouve dans la rue. 

Voila qui me surprend. 

Je suis charme de vous voir 
retabli. 

A qui le dites-vous? 

Quoi! vous etes encore au lit? 

Je ne sais comment vous pouvez 
rester si longtemps au lit. 

Je ne sais a quoi passer le temps 
quand je suis leve. 

Qu’est-ce qui vous embarrasse 
tant? 

Je suis parti juste a temps. 

Cela doit etre ainsi. 

Elle doit etre Anglaise. 

Connaissez-vous la rue Harrison? 

Dites-leur d’entrer. 

Dites a ma femme que jeveux lui 
parler. 

Je ne peux pas vous le dire. 

Faites-moi savoir ou vous restez. 

Celui qui compte dix amis n’en a 
pas un. 

A quoi pensez-vous? 

Voila l’homme dont je parle. 



42 


ANGLAIS 


§6 


PHRASES USXJELLES —(Continuees) 


The city in which I live is far 
from here. 

The house out of which he is 
coming, is his father’s. 

There are many days that he does 
not come to see us. 

It does not do for me to live in 
that way. 

I do not know what to think of it. 

They know it just as well as you. 

I see him from time to time. 

The train is half an hour late. 

Please tell me what you think of 
that. 

When you like. 

Do what you like. 

I stop there. , 

I have the right time. 

She does as she pleases. 


La ville ou je demeure est loin 
d’ici. 

La maison d’ou il sort est celle de 
son pere. 

II se passe bien des jours sans 
qu’il vienne nous voir. 

Cela ne me va pas de vivre 
comme cela. 

Je ne sais qu’en penser. 

Ils le savent tout aussi bien que 
vous. 

Je le vois de temps en temps. 

Le train est en retard d’une demj- 
heure. 

Veuillez me dire ce que vous 
pensez de cela. 

Quand vous voudrez. 

Faites ce que vous voudrez. 

Je m’en tiens la. 

J’ai l’heure juste. 

Elle n’en fait qu’a sa tete. 


EXERCICE ECRIT 

Repondez en anglais aux questions suivantes. Ecrivez 
les questions et les reponses en double expedition, et 
envoyez-les-nous pour correction, mais ne les enregistrez 
pas sur un cylindre avant d’avoir requ une copie corrigee 
par nous. 

1. How many bedrooms have you in your house? 

2. At what time do you usually get up? 

3. What is your name, and where do you live? 

4. Are you always in good health? 

5. Do your friends often come to see you? 

6. Do you live far from the city? 

7. Do you speak English with your friends? 

8. Do you hope to go to the country in summer? 

9. How many rooms are there in your house? 

10. Can you write a letter in English? 

11. Which fruit do you prefer? 




§6 DOUZIEME LEQON 

12. Do you write many letters? 

13. Do you like music, and do you play on the piano? 

14. Have you a garden? 

15. What day is it today? 

16. What day was it yesterday? 

17. What are the days of the week? 

18. What are the months of the year? 


43 












































































* 

























♦ 




\ 










•• 














ANGLAIS 

(PARTIE 7) 


TREIZIEME LECON 


CYLINDRE PHON OGRAPHIQUE 


VOCABULAIRE 


I. C. S. 

English Record No. 13 

the account, le compte 
to account, rendre compte, 
expliquer 

to afford, Procurer, avoir le 
moyen 

the amount, le montant, la 
valeur 

to amount, se monter a 
the answer, la reponse 
to answer, repondre 
the apology, Vexcuse 
to apologize, ldire des excuses 
the attention, Vattention 
away, loin, au loin 
the bill, la {acture 
busy, occupy 
to buy, ache ter 
the chance, la chance, Vop¬ 
portunity, le temps 
the clerk, le comm is 
closely, attentivement 
a great deal, beaucoup, sou- 
vent 

the debt, la dette 


/. c. s. 

Cylindre d’Anglais No. 13 

the delay, le delai, le retard 
to delay, retarder , remettre 
every, chaque, tous les 
full, plein, entier, total 
good by, au revoir 
to hear, entendre 
to help, aider 
to hurry, se depecher 
last, dernier 
to leave, quitter, laisser 
lately, dernierement 
the matter, la mature, la 
chose, 1'affaire 

in the meantime, en atten¬ 
dant, dans 1' intervalle 
to miss, manquer 
the money, Vargent (en es- 
peces) 

the nature, la nature 
the opportunity, /’ oppor¬ 
tunity, Voccasion 
to owe, devoir (une dette) 
the paper, le papier, le jour¬ 
nal. 


For notice of copyright , see page immediately following the title Page 

§7 






2 


ANGLAIS 


7 


VOCABULAIRE- (Continue) 


to pay, payer 
the people, on , le monde 
probably, probablement 
to require, demander , exiger 
the road, le chemin 
to run, courir 
satisfactory, satis faisant 
tlie second, le second, le 
deuxieme 


the silence, le silence 
the stranger, Vetranger 
to suppose, supposer 
the third, le troisieme 
tiresome, fatigant, ennuyeux 
the train, le train 
twice, deux fois 
to understand, comprendre 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION 


It affords 1 me much pleasure 
to see you, Mr. Franklin. 
You are quite a stranger. 
What is keeping you away 
so much? 

Why, Mr. Cleveland, I called 
on you three times 2 last 
week, once on Monday and 
twice on Thursday. Your 
manager told 3 me that you 
were out of town. 4 He said 
that you went away 5 on the 
twentieth 6 of last month and 
that he expected you every 
day. 

Yes; I was away for some 
time, but returned day be¬ 
fore yesterday. 7 I intend to 
leave again on the first or 
the second of next month. 

And how soon are you com¬ 
ing back, if I may ask? 8 


C’est un bien grand plaisir 
pour moi de vous voir, 
M. Franklin. Vous etes 
presque un etranger. 
Qu’est-ce qui vous retient 
si longtemps loin de moi? 

Mais, M. Cleveland, je suis 
venu vous voir trois fois la 
semaine derniere, une fois 
lundi et deux fois jeudi. 
Votre gerant m’a dit que 
vous etiez en voyage. II 
m’a dit que vous etiez parti 
le vingt du mois dernier et 
qu’il vous attendait tous 
les jours. 

Oui; j’etais parti pour quelque 
temps, mais je suis re venu 
avant-hier. Je m’attends a 
partir de nouveau le pre¬ 
mier ou le deux du mois 
prochain. 

Et dans combien de temps 
reviendrez-vous, si je ne 
suis pas indiscret? 





§7 TREIZIEME LEgON 3 

PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Probably not before the ninth. 
I have to be out of town a 
great deal. The nature of 
my business requires me to 
be on the road 9 much of the 
time. 

Do you not find it very tire¬ 
some? 

Yes; I do, but I cannot help 10 
it. If you want people to 
buy from you, you must 
pay attention to your busi¬ 
ness. Did you hear 11 any¬ 
thing from Mr. Grant? 

No; not lately. I heard that 
he was in London. One of 
his clerks gave me his 
address there. I wrote to 
him about a month ago, 
but as yet have no answer. 12 
I cannot understand his 
• silence. 

Probably he is very busy. 
What papers have you 
there? 

The bills for the goods I 
bought of you. I wish to 
pay the debt I owe you. 
These bills run from the 
third day of April to the 
fifth day of May. On 
the twelfth of May, I sent 
you a check for four hun¬ 
dred dollars on account. 
That leaves a balance of 


Probablement pas avant le 
neuf. II faut que je voya¬ 
ge beaucoup. La nature 
de mes affaires demande 
que je sois en voyage la 
plupart du temps. 

Ne trouvez-vous pas cela 
tres fatigant? 

Oh! oui; mais je n’y puis rien. 
Si vous voulez qu’on vous 
achete des marchandises, 
il faut que vous fassiez 
attention a vos affaires. 
Avez-vous eu des nou- 
velles de M. Grant? 

Non; pas dernierement. On 
m’a dit qu’il dtait a Lon- 
dres. Undesescommis m’a. 
donn6 son adresse. Je lui 
ai ecrit il y a a peu pres un 
mois, mais je n’ai pas en¬ 
core regu de reponse. Je 
ne puis comprendre son 
silence. 

Il est probablement tres oc- 
cupe. Quels papiers avez- 
vous la? 

Les factures des marchan¬ 
dises que j’ai achetees de 
vous. Je veux payer la 
dette que je vous dois. 
Ces factures datent du trois 
avril au cinq mai. Le douze 
mai, je vous ai envoyd un 
cheque de quatre cents dol¬ 
lars en compte. Il reste une 
balance de cent dix dollars; 



4 


ANGLAIS 


7 


PHRASES ET CONV 

one hundred and ten dol¬ 
lars; here is the money for 
the full amount.. Give me 
a receipt, if you please, and 
pardon my delay in the 
matter. 

You owe me no apology. 
How do you like the goods 
I sent you on Tuesday? 

I did not receive them until 
Saturday, and had no op¬ 
portunity to examine them 
closely. I suppose they are 
satisfactory. You may ex¬ 
pect my check about the 
twentieth. I must hurry 
in order not 13 to miss my 
train. Call on Sunday, if 
you can. 

Very well, Mr. Franklin. 

Meantime, good by. 

Goodby. 


ERSATION—(Continuees) 

| en voici l’argent pour le 
montant entier. Donnez- 
m’en un regu, s’il vous 
plait, et pardonnez le re¬ 
tard que j’ai apporte dans 
cette affaire. 

Vous ne me devez pas d’ex- 
cuses. Comment trouvez- 
vous les marchandises que 
je vous ai envoyees mardi? 

Je ne les ai regues que samedi, 
et je n’ai pas eu le temps 
de les examiner soigneuse- 
ment. Je suppose qu’elles 
sont satisfaisantes. Vous 
pouvez compter sur mon 
cheque vers le vingt. II 
faut que je me depeche 
pour ne pas manquer mon 
train. Venez me voir di- 
manche, si vous pouvez. 

Tres bien, M. Franklin. 

Au revoir en attendant. 

Au revoir. 


REMARQUES 

1. Le mot afford a deux significations: Dans la phrase de 
votre cylindre phonographique, il a le sens de dormer, procurer, 
et la phrase entiere est traduite litteralement, cela me procure 
beaucoup de plaisir de vous voir. 

Lorsque afford est precede de can, il signifie avoir les 
moyens. 

I cannot afford it, Je n'en ai pas les moyens. 

He who works can afford to play, Celui qtn travaille a le moyen de 
jouer {pent se permettre de jouer ). 




7 


TREIZIEME LECON 


5 


2. Les nombres de repetition ou nombres multiplicatifs 
se forment comme en frangais, en ajoutant le mot times, fois, 
apres le nombre cardinal, excepte pour les expressions une 
fois et detcx fois, qui se disent en anglais once et twice. 

once, une fois three times, trois fois (ou thrice) 

twice, deux fois four times, quatre fois 


3. L’imparfait des verbes suivants contenus dans “les 
Phrases et Conversation,” est forme irregulierement en 
anglais. Etudiez-les soigneusement dans la liste suivante, 
car ils sont d’un usage frequent dans la conversation. 


Infinitif 

Imparfait 

to tell, dire 

I told 

to go, alter 

I went 

to hear, entendre 

I heard 

to give, donner 

I gave 

to write, ecrire 

I wrote 

to send, envoyer 

I sent 

to say, dire 

I said 

to buy, acheter 

I bought 


Ces formes de l’imparfait sont invariables a toutes les 
personnes; vous en trouverez la prononciation dans votre 
cylindre phonographique, et beaucoup d’exemples de leur 
emploi dans l’exercice oral qui suit. 


4. L’expression to be out of town , signifie litteralement 
etre en dehors de la ville et s’emploie pour fire en voyage. 

5. L’adverbe away, loin, ou far away, bien loin, s’ajoute 
souvent aux verbes pour en former d’autres qui ont un sens 
different. II denote toujours /’ eloignement au propre et au 
figure. De la, il se rend assez souvent, mais pas toujours, 

(porter au loin ) 

{voter au loin) 

{alter au loin) 

{prendre d'un endroit et Veloigner) 
{envoyer au loin) 


en frangais par en (de la). 

to carry away, emporter, 
to fly away, s’envoler, 
to go away, s'en alter, 
to take away, enlever, 
to send away, renvoyer, 
to be away, itre absent 


6 


ANGLAIS 


§7 


6. Cette legon traite aussi des nombres ordinaux. Nous 
avons ici deux choses a considerer: 

1. Leur Formation —'Lo. s trois premiers nombres ordinaux 
ont une formation particuliere: first, premier; second , second 
ou deuxieme; third , troisieme. 

A partir du quatrieme, on les forme des nombres cardinaux 
auxquels on ajoute th. 


Cardinaux 
four, quatre 
sixteen, seize 
seven, sept 


Ordinaux 
fourth, quatrihne 
sixteenth, seizihne 
seventh, septiime 


Les nombres cardinaux five , eight , nine, twelve , se changent 
en fif, eigh , nin , twelf , avant l’addition du th. 

fifth; cinquihne ninth, neuviime 

eighth, huitihne twelfth, douzQme 


Pour les noms de dizaines termines en ty, on change y en 
ie et on ajoute th. 


Cardinaux 
twenty, vingt 
thirty, trente 
forty, quarante 


Ordinaux 
twentieth, vingtiime 
thirtieth, trentihne 
fortieth, quarantihne 


Les nombres interm^diaires de chaque dizaine sont formas 
du nombre cardinal de la dizaine suivi du nombre ordinal de 
l’unit6. 


twenty-first, vingt et unieme 
thirty-second, trente-deuxihme 
forty-fifth, quarante-cinquieme 


the hundred and eighth, 
le cent-huitieme 
the hundred and twenty-ninth 
le cent vingt-neuvieme 


2. Leur Emploi—Yjn anglais, on emploie le nombre ordinal 
pour exprimer le quantieme du mois, les noms des souve- 
rains, les divisions d’un livre, et ce nombre est prec^dd de 
Particle the. 


the tenth day of August: le dix aoitt 
Henry the Third, Hetiri III 
Book the fourth, Livre IV 


§7 TREIZIEME LEQON 7 

Dans les dates, on place ordinairement la proposition on 
devant 1’article. 

He went on the sixth of September, 1902, II est parti le 6 septembre 

1902. 

Par abreviation, dans les lettres, on met ordinairement la 
date comme suit. 

Scranton, Pa., February the 14th, 1903; ou Scranton, Pa., Feb. 14, 

1903. 

7. L’expression avant-hier se traduit par day before yester¬ 
day et apres-demain par day after tomorrow. 

8. If I may ask, litteralement, si je puis demander, signifie 
a peu prOs la meme chose que notre expression, si je ne suis 
pas indiscret. 

9. L’expression to be on the road , etre sur le chemin, est 
tres communement employee pour designer les voyages 
d’affaires que font les voyageurs de commerce. 

10. Le verbe to help, forme un idiome en anglais comme 
dans l’expression I cannot help it pour rendre je n'y puis rien, 
litteralement je ne puis Vaider. 

11. Pour rendre notre expression recevoir des nouvelles, 
on emploie le verbe to hear, entendre, suivi de la preposition 
from en anglais, litteralement, entendre de. 

Did you hear from your uncle? Avez-vous regu des nouvelles de 
votre oncle? 

No; I did not hear from him, Non; je n'ai pas regu de ses nouvelles. 

Si ce verbe est suivi de la preposition of, on le traduit par 
entendre parler. 

Do you know him? —No; but I heard of him, Le connaissez-vous? 
Non; mais j'ai entendu parler de lui. 

I never heard of her before, Je n'ai jamais entendu parler d'elle 
avant. 

12. Remarquez qu’en anglais un grand nombre de noms 
sont aussi des verbes, comme the answer, la reponse, et to 
answer, repondre; the delay , le retard, et to delay, retarder, etc. 


ANGLAIS 


§7 


Le verbe to answer qui veut la prepositions en frangais, ne 
demande pas de preposition en anglais. 

I am answering your letter of yesterday, Je reponds a votre lettre 
d'hier. 

Answer John, Repondez d Jean. 

13. La negation devant un infinitif se place generalement 
devant la preposition to qui accompagne presque toujours 
cet infinitif. 

He told me not to come, II m'a dit de ne pas venir. 

I wrote to him not to leave the city, Je lui ai ecrit de ne pas quitter 
la ville. 


EXERCICE ORAL 

I cannot afford to pay so nincli for tliat 
house. 

Je n'ai pas les moyens de payer autant pour cette maison. 

He cannot afford to pay so much money. 

Give him twenty dollars; you can very well afford it. 

I worked all day; I can very well afford to play tonight. 

She cannot afford it; she is not very rich. 

They did not spend a great deal of money; they can well 
afford to pay one hundred dollars. 

We cannot afford it; we have to spend a great deal of 
money every day. 

If you can afford it, .buy that house; it is a good 
investment. 

If you cannot afford it; do without it. 

Do you know Paris well? —No, I do not; I 
went there once only. 

Connaissez-vous bien Paris?—Non, je ne le connais pas; ie 
n’y suis allt qu’une fois. 

Did Mr. Clay answer you? —No, he did not, and I wrote 
to him twice. 

I like that theater very much; I went there three times 
last week. 



§7 TRE1ZIEME LEQON 9 

They cannot find him at home; they called on him twenty 
times. 

How much is eight times seven? —Eight times seven is 
fifty-six. 

She did not know how much five times six is. 

I called on you twice, but I did not find you at home. 

We called on you three times last week. 

What did he tell you?-lie told me to come 
at half-past four. 

Que vous a-t-il dit?—Il in'a dit de venir a quatre heures et 
deinie. 

Did she tell you that I was here? —She told me to come 
here to see you. 

I told John to meet us at the theater tonight. 

They told me that you cannot afford to buy that house. 
You did not understand me; I told you not to speak to him. 
We told him to wait here for us. 

She told me you were a friend of hers. 

She went to the bank at half-past one. 

Elle est allee a la bunque a une heure et demie. 

Where did you go last night? —I went to the theater with 
Lucy. 

I did not go to London; I went to Paris. 

When I was young, I went to school with y?nr friend 
Charles. 

Which way did they go? —They went that way. 

Is Mr. Clay at home now? —O, no; he went far away 
from home. 

Last Sunday he went to church with me; he is a good boy. 

Did you hear from your uncle? —Not lately; 

I heard from him last month. 

Avez-vous requ des nouvelles de votre oncle?—Pas derni'e- 
rement: i'ai requ de ses nouvelles le mois dernier. 

They did not hear from their friends and they did not 
understand their silence. 

If you hear from mother let me know. 


10 


ANGLAIS 


§7 


I heard that Florence is coming here today. 

Who told you?—Lucy; she heard it from my cousin. 

If you do not hear from him, write again. 

You were away for three months, and during that time I 
did not hear from you. 

Mr. Clay is very poor now. Jolin gave him a 
hundred dollars yesterday; lie can very 
well afford it. 

M. Clay est tres pauvre maintenant. Jean lui a donne 
cent dollars liter; il en a bien les moyens. 

Mr. Harrison is always very kind to me. I needed two 
hundred dollars yesterday, and he gave it to me. 

I gave him a dollar to buy his dinner with. 

I am bookkeeper for Harrison & Son. They are well 
satisfied with the profits of this year, and they gave me a 
check for fifty dollars. 

He said he was hungry, and she gave him two dollars. 

To whom did you write yesterday? —I wrote 
to my friend. 

A qui avez-vous ecrit hier?—J'ai ecrit a mon ami. 

He wrote to me last week to be in Paris in time to meet 
him. 

They wrote us to send the goods before the first of the 
month. 

I told her what he wrote me. 

Did you write to them? —O, yes; we did. 

They wrote me that they did not receive your letter. 

Did you send me tlie goods I ordered on the 
fifteenth of this month? —Yes; we sent 
them the day after. 

M' avez-vous envoy £ les marchadises que je vous ai dernan- 
dees le quinze de ce mois? — Oui; nous les avons envoyees 
le jour apres. 

He sent me some goods that were not satisfactory. 

They sent John to school, then they went to their uncle’s. 
You sent me a bill, but I did not receive the goods. 


§7 


TREIZIEME LEgON 


11 


We sent for a physician, but it was too late. 

Do you know her address? —Yes; she sent it to me in her 
last letter. 

What did lie say? — He said lie expected liis 
friend at eight o’clock. 

Qu’a-t-il ditf — // a dit qu'il attendait son ami a huit heures. 

They said you were not here in time. 

She said that she is at home every day after four o’clock. 
We told that to John, but he did not believe us. 

He did not believe me when I told him that. 

What did she think when you told her that? 

Where did you buy these gloves? — ! bought 
them at Harrison’s. 

Oil avez-vous achete ces gantsf—Je les ai achetes chez 
Harrison . 

He bought a hat that was too small for him. 

She was sorry after she bought it. 

They bought a beautiful country house near my uncle’s. 
He was glad that we bought it. 

We bought a country house of that merchant, but we were 
very sorry. We paid a thousand dollars too much for it. 

I am out of town a great deal, because the 
nature of my business requires it. 

Je suis souvent en voyage, parce que la nature de mes 
affaires le demande . 

He is out of town a great deal, because the nature of his 
business requires it. 

She is out of town a great deal, because the nature of her 
business requires it. 

We are out of town a great deal, because the nature of our 
business requires it. 

You are out of town a great deal, because the nature of 
your business requires it. 

They are out of town a great deal, because the nature of 
their business requires it. 


12 


ANGLAIS 


7 


I am going away tomorrow morning on the 
half-past-eight train. 

Je m'en vais demain matin par le train de huit heures 
et demie. 

When is he going away? —He is going away at once. 
Please let me know when you go away. 

It was not ten o’clock when she went away. 

Did they go away early this morning? —No; they went 
away after half-past nine. 

He is not here often; he is away much of the time. 

How can you talk to him, if he is away? 

I did not see him; he was away on business. 

Take this cup away, Mary, and bring some fruit. 

He was not well, so I sent him away into the country. 

On the fifth (lay of January he wrote to me 
to buy these goods for him. 

Le cinq janvier , it in'a ecrit d'acheter ces marchandises 
pour lui. 

Your cousin sent me that book the first of this month. 

I have an appointment with them in Berlin on the 
twentieth of next February. 

They answered my letter on the second of March, 1902. 
These bills run from the third of April to the fifteenth of 
June. 

I was in America on the twenty-first of last month; from 
there I went to Canada for two weeks. 

She did not leave before the tenth of last month. 

Two-fifths of these gentlemen are Frenchmen. 

New York, December the 25th, 1902. 

Paris, November the 7th, 1901. 

What day was it yesterday?—It was Monday, the 9th of 
February, 1903. 

I received a letter from my cousin day before yesterday; I 
expect her to be here tomorrow or day after tomorrow. 

Your nephew is not often at home; he is on 
the road much of the time. 

Votre neveu n'est pas souvent chez lui; it est en voyage la 
plupart du temps. 


§7 


TREIZIEME LEQON 


13 


How do you like to be on the road? —I do not like it very 
much; it is very tiresome. 

When he was on the road. I was a bookkeeper for Mr. 
Harrison. 

Is John a bookkeeper? —No; he is on the road for Mr. 
Perkins, the furniture merchant. 

The nature of his business requires him to be on the road - 
much of the time. 

The nature of their business requires them to be on the 
road much of the time. 

Do you hear* from your uncle often? —I did 
not hear from him for over a month. 

Avez-vous souvent des nouvelles de votre oncle?—Je n'en 
ai pas regu depuis plus d'uii mois. 

Do you often hear from our friend John? —O, yes; quite 
often; I had a letter from him yesterday. 

I heard he was in Paris, is that so? —He was there two or 
three weeks, but went to Berlin the first of the month. 

I did not hear from my niece for over two months; I wrote 
her two letters but she did not answer them. I cannot 
understand her silence. Let me know when you hear from 
her. 


How can I help it? —I cannot help it. 

Que puis-je y faire?—Je ne peux rien y faire. 

How can he help it? —He cannot help it. 

How can she help it? —She cannot help it. 

How can we help it? —We cannot help it. 

How can you help it? —You cannot help it. 

How can they help it? —They cannot help it. 

I cannot understand why he did not answer 
my letter. 

Je ne peux pas compre?idre pourquoi il n ’a pas repondu a 
ma lettre. 

I was so busy last week, that I did not find time to answei 
her letter. 

He answered my letter yesterday. 


14 


ANGLAIS 


7 


She answered my letter and gave me the address of the 
merchant. 

Did they not answer you? —No; they did not. 

I told him not to go there. 

Je lui ai dit de ne pas alley lei. 

He wrote me not to come. 

He hurried in order not to miss the train. 

They promised not to do it again. 

We wrote to them not to buy these goods. 

I advised him not to speak to that man. 

Her father told her not to stay too long. 

You induced me not to answer his letter. 

I told him not to invest in that business. 

I give as much as I can afford. 

Je donne selon mes moyens (autant que je puis donner). 

She gave me as much as she can afford. 

We gave them one hundred dollars; that is as much as we 
can afford. 

You can well afford to give more. 

They gave ten dollars only; that is not so much as they 
can afford. 

He said he cannot afford to give more. 

I called for my money. 

Je suis venu chercher mon argent. ■*. 

He calls for his money. 

She called for her money 
We call for our money. 

You called for your money 
They call for their money. 

1 heard him say so. 

Je le lui ai entendu dire. 

We heard her say so. 

He heard us say so. 


7 


TREIZIEME LECON 


15 


She heard me say so. 

You heard them say so. 

They heard you say so. 

If I want to make money, I have to be on the 
road much of my time. 

Si je veux faire de Vargent, il faut que je voyage la plu- 
part du temps. 

If she wants to make money, she has to be on the road 
much of her time. 

If he wants to make money, he has to be on the road 
much of his time. 

If we want to make money, we have to be on the road 
much of our time. 

If you want to make money, you have to be on the road 
much of your time. 

If they want to make money, they have to be on the road 
much of their time. 

Do you know him?—No; I never heard of 
him before. 

Le connaissez-vous?—Non; je n'ai jamais entendu parler 
de lui avant. 

Does he know her? —No; he never heard of her before. 

Does she know him? —No; she never heard of him before. 

Do you know them? —No; we never heard of them before. 

Do you know Mr. Clay? —No; I never heard of him before. 

Do you know Mrs. Clay? —No; we never heard of her 
before. 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


Is Mr. Franklin in? 

No, sir; he is not. He is out of 
the city. 

When is he coming back, if I may 
ask? 

We do not know exactly; probably 
not before the first of the month. 
He is in Paris now. He went 
there to buy some goods for 


M. Franklin est-il chez lui? 

Non, monsieur. II n’y est pas; il 
est en voyage. 

Quand reviendra-t-il, si je ue suis 
pas indiscret? 

Nous ne savons pas exactement; 
probablement pas avant le pre¬ 
mier du mois. Il est maintenant 
a Paris. Il est alle acheter des 




16 


ANGLAIS 


7 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION— (Continuees) 


next season’s trade. We had a 
letter from him yesterday in 
which he says that he does not 
know exactly when he can sail. 
But excuse me, are you not Mr. 
Cleveland? 

That is my name. 

I asked you because in his letter, 
Mr. Franklin says, if you call, 
to tell you to invest some of his 
money in that new industry of 
which he spoke to you. Here 
is the letter. He did not write 
to you because he did not have 
your address. 

* 

* * 

Paris, April 5, 1903. 
My Dear Mr. Cleveland, 

I expect to sail tomorrow on 
the steamship America and to be 
in New York about the twelfth. 
Please call at my office about the 
fifteenth. I wish to talk with 
you about the investment of my 
money. 

Hoping to find you in good 
health, I remain, 

Very truly yours, 

A. Franklin. 

* 

* * 

Is Mr. Franklin back? 

Yes, sir; he returned day before 
yesterday. He is in his office 
now. 

Very well. Please tell him that 
Mr. Cleveland wants to speak 
to him. 

I do not think that you can see 
him, sir. Mr. Franklin is very 


marchandises pour la saison pro- 
chaine. Nous avons regu une 
lettre de lui hier, dans laquelle 
il dit qu’il ne sait pas exacte- 
ment quand il pourra s’embar- 
quer. Mais, pardonnez-moi 
n’etes-vous pas M. Cleveland? 
C’est moi-meme. 

Je vous ai demande, parce que 
dans cette lettre, M. Franklin 
dit que si vous venez ici, de 
vous prier de placer une partie 
de ses capitaux dans cette nou- 
velle industrie dont il vous a 
parle. Voici la lettre. Il ne 
vous a pas ecrit parce qu’il 
n’avait pas votre adresse. 

* 

* * 

Paris, le 5 avril 1903. 
Mon cher M. Cleveland, 
J’espere m’embarquer demaiu 
par le bateau a vapeur Amerique 
et etre a New-York vers le douze. 
Venez a mon bureau, je vous prie, 
vers le quinze. Je desirerais vous 
parler au sujet du placement de 
mes capitaux. 

Dans l’espoir de vous trouver 
en bonne sante, je reste, 

Votre bien devoue 
(Le votre tres fidelement) 

A. Franklin. 

* 

* * 

M. Franklin est-il de retour? 

Oui, monsieur; il est revenu avant- 
hier. Il est dans son bureau 
maintenant. 

Tres bien. Veuillez lui dire que 
M. Cleveland demande a lui 
parler. 

Je ne pense pas que vous puissiez 
levoir, monsieur. M. Franklin 




§7 


TREIZIEME LEQON 


17 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION — (Continuees) 


busy, and gave orders not to 
trouble him. 

I have an appointment with him. 
Mr. Franklin wrote me from 
Paris that he wanted to see me 
today. 

Very well, sir, please sit down. 

■* 

* * 

Mr. Franklin is waiting for you, 
sir; please come this way. 

My dear Mr. Franklin, I am very 
glad to see you back. 

How do you do, Mr. Cleveland? 
Come and sit down. Have a 
cigar. They are very good. I 
just received them from Cuba. 

Thank you. Well, how did you 
enjoy your trip? 

Very much, indeed. But I am 
glad to be back in America 
again. 

Was it your first visit to Paris? 

The first, sir; that is why it was 
so interesting for me. I visited 
all the monuments and the 
churches; I went to many 
theaters; but what interested 
me very much were the stores 
of the city. 

Did you do much business there? 

O, yes; I ordered my goods for 
next season’s trade. I expect 
them here in two or three weeks. 
I want you to see them when 
they come. I expect to make 
money on them, because they 
are really beautiful. But I 
wanted to see you today con¬ 
cerning that investment of 


est tres occupe, et a donne 
l’ordre de ne pas le deranger. 

J’ai un rendez-vous avec lui. M. 
Franklin m’a ecrit de Paris qu’il 
voulait me voir aujourd’hui. 

Tres bien, monsieur; asseyez-vous. 
* 

* * 

M. Franklin vous attend, mon¬ 
sieur, veuillez passer de ce cote. 

Mon cher M. Franklin, je suis 
enchante de vous voir de retour. 

Comment allez-vous, M. Cleve¬ 
land? Entrez et asseyez-vous. 
Prenez un cigare; ils sont tres 
bons. Je viens de les recevoir 
de Cuba. 

Merci. Eh bien? Avez-vous eu 
beaucoup de plaisir dans votre 
voyage? 

Beaucoup, je vous assure. Ce- 
pendant, je suis content d’etre 
de retour en Amerique. 

Etait-ce votre premiere visite a 
Paris? 

La premiere, oui, monsieur; c’est 
pourquoi c’etait si interessant 
pour moi. J’ai visite tous les 
monuments et les eglises; je 
suis alle dans un grand nombre 
de theatres; mais ce qui m’a 
surtout interesse, ce sont les 
magasins de la ville. 

Avez-vous fait beaucoup d ’ affaires ? 

Oh! oui; j’ai commandemes mar- 
chandises pour la saison pro- 
chaine. Je les attends dans 
deux ou trois semaines. Je 
veux que vous les voyiez quand 
elles seront ici. Je m’attends a 
faire beaucoup de profit, car 
elles sont reellement tres bel¬ 
les. Mais je voulais vous voir 



18 


ANGLAIS 


§7 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


which I spoke to you. What 
did you do about the matter? 

1 did as you ordered me. I in¬ 
vested all the money you gave 
me in that new industry. I 
think it is a good investment 
and sure to be profitable. Here 
are all the papers; please ex¬ 
amine them. 

Very well, put them on that table. 
I cannot see them now, I am 
too busy. Please excuse me 
while I finish my letters. I 
want you to stay to dinner with 
me. 

Very well. 


aujourd’hui par rapport a ce 
placement dont je vous ai parle. 
Qu’avez-vous fait a ce sujet? 

J’ai fait ce que vous m’aviezcom- 
mande de faire. J’ai place tout 
Pargent que vous m’aviez donne 
dans cette nouvelle industrie. 
Je crois que c’est un bon place¬ 
ment qui est sur de rapporter 
beaucoup d’argent. Voici tous 
les papiers; examinez-les, je 
vous prie. 

Tres bien; mettez-les sur la table; 
je ne puis les voir maintenant, 
je suis trop occupe. Veuillez 
m’excuser pendant que je finis 
mes lettres. Je veux que vous 
restiez a diner avec moi. 

Tres bien. 


PHRASES 

I have no money about me. 

He has five hundred dollars in 
paper money. 

Do they put money out? 

Time is money. 

On my account. 

He is a man of no account. 

On no account. 

By all accounts. 

I cannot afford to do it. 

What can you afford to give? 

Give as much as you can afford. 
I told him again and again. 

There is a bill on the house. 

He is calling for his money. 

I expect to pay him a visit. 

Your letter came to hand. 

I leave these papers with you. 

I leave it to you. 

He missed the train. 


[TSUELLES 

Je n’ai pas d’argent sur moi. 

II a cinq cents dollars en billets 
de banque. 

Placent-ils de Pargent? 

Le temps est de Pargent. 

A cause de moi. 

C’est un homme de rien. 

En aucune maniere. 

Au dire de tout le monde, 

Je n’ai pas les moyens de le faire. 
Combien pouvez-vous donner? 
Donnez selon vos moyens. 

Je le lui ai repete vingt fois. 

II y a un ecriteau sur la maison. 

II vient chercher son argent. 

Je me propose d’aller le voir. 
Votre lettre nPest parvenue (est 
venue en main). 

Je laisse ces papiers entre vos 
mains. 

Je nPen rapporte a vous. 

II a manque le train. 





§7 


TREIZIEME LEQON 


19 


PHRASES USUERLES—(Continuees) 


It does not pay. 

I heard him say so. 

He sat an hour with us. 

He walked up to her. 

Morning (evening) paper. 

To run up and down. 

He is running away. 

He understands his business. 

Help her up. 

Help him down. 

Help them in. 

Help me on. 

Help us out. 

Help! Help! 

I can do it without your help. 

Call for help. 

What is the amount of my bill? 

I am in a hurry. 

We have received your order. 

It is the second street on your 
right. 

What can I show you this morn- 
• ing? 

Here is the very thing for you. 

In about three weeks I can send 
you all the goods you ordered. 

Please walk this way. 

Be kind enough to come in and 
sit down. 

I cannot do two things at once. 

Let us get ready to go out. 

Let us be friends. 

I go to bed late and get up early. 

They do not speak very w T ell of 
him. 

Florence, here is a letter; you are 
to take it to Mrs. Clay. You 


Le jeu ne vaut pas la cliandelle. 

Je le lui ai entendu dire. 

II a passe une heure avec nous. 

II s’avanga vers elle. 

Le journal du matin (du soir). 

Courir 5a et la. 

II s’enfuit. 

II entend son affaire. 

Aidez-la a monter, ou a se 
relever. 

Aidez-le a descendre. 

Aidez-les a entrer. 

Aidez-moi a avancer. 

Aidez-nous a sortir. 

Au secours! 

Je puis le faire sans votre assis¬ 
tance. 

Appelez au secours. 

Quel est le montant de ma fac- 
ture? 

Je suis presse. 

Nous avons re<ju votre commande. 

C’est la seconde rue a droite. 

Que puis-je vous montrer ce 
matin? 

Voila juste ce qui vous convient. 

Je puis vous envoyer toutes les 
marchandises que vous avez 
commandees dans environ trois 
semaines. 

Veuillez passer de ce cote. 

Donnez-vous la peine d’entrer et 
de vous asseoir. 

Je ne peux pas faire deux choses 
a la fois. 

Appretons-nous a sortir. 

Soyons amis. 

Je me couche tard et je me leve 
de bonne heure. 

On ne dit pas beacoup de bien de 
lui. 

Florence, voici une lettre; vous 
allez la porter a Mme. Clay. 



20 


ANGLAIS 


§7 


PHRASES USTJEELES—(Continuees) 


know where she lives, do you 
not? You must not be long, 
because I need you. 

At what time does the train leave? 
In ten minutes, I believe. 

What day of the week is it? 

Today is Tuesday. 

Let us hurry. Let us go down. 
What is the matter? 

Let us go back home. 

How long ago? 

Do not keep me waiting. 

How he looks! 

Have you still many visits to pay? 

I do not think as you do. 

That does not matter to me. 

Does he know how to keep books? 
He understands people. 

She wants a servant of all work. 
My mistress is not at home. 

I miss my mother. 

My mother misses me. 

I miss you. 

You miss me. 

He went up to his room. 

They are up-stairs. 

We French people eat a great 
deal of bread. 

Do you want him to get into 
trouble with them? 

I must have some money. 

He does not know what to think 
of that? 

How can he help it? 

He has not much money. 

It is all one to her. 

Send in your name. 

A friend in need is a friend in¬ 
deed. 

A good name is better than riches. 


Vous savez bien oil elle de- 
meure, n’est-ce pas? Ne restez 
pas longtemps, parce que j’ai 
besoin de vous. 

A quelle heure part le train? 

Dans dix minutes, je crois. 

Quel jour de la semaine avons- 
nous? 

C’est aujourd’hui mardi. 
Depechons-nous. Descendons. 
Qu’y a-t-il? 

Rentrons chez nous. 

Combien de temps y a-t-il? 

Ne me faites pas attendre. 

Comme le voila fait! 

Avez-vous encore beaucoup de 
visites a faire? 

Je ne pense pas comme vous. 

Cela ne me fait rien. 

Sait-il tenir les livres? 

II connait son monde. 

Elle veut une bonne a tout faire. 
Madame n’y est pas. 

Ma mere me manque. 

Je manque a ma mere. 

Vous me manquez. 

Je vous manque. 

II est monte a sa chambre. 

Ils (Elies) sont en haut. 

Nous autres Frangais, nous man- 
geons beaucoup de pain., 
Voulez-vous qu’il se fasse une 
affaire avec eux? 

II me faut de V argent. 

II ne sait que penser de tout cela. 

Que voulez-vous qu’il y fasse? 

II n’a pas grand argent. 

Tout lui est egal. 

Faites-vous annoncer. 

On connait Pami au besoin. 

Bonne renommee vaut mieux que 
ceinture doree. 





§7 


TREIZIEME LEQON 


21 


EXERCICE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 

Aussitot que vons aurez regu votre exercice ecrit de la 
douzieme legon corrige par nous, enregistrez-le sur un 
cylindre vierge et envoyez-le-nous en suivant les directions 
donnees precedemment, puis passez a la legon suivante. 


22 


ANGLAIS 


7 


\ 


QUATORZIEME LECON 


CYLINDRE PHONOGRAPHIQUP 


VOCAliULAIRE 


/. c. s. 

English Record No. 14 


/. C. S. 

Cylindre d'Anglais No. 14 

to investigate, faire une 


agricultural, cigricole, 
d’ agriculture 

to anticipate, anticiper, 
s'attendre a 

anxious, desireux. impatient 
the article, Particle 
the company, la compagnie 
the contract, le contrat 
correct, correct, exact, juste 
the cotton, le coton 
the courtesy, la courtoisie, 
la politesse 

the development, le deve- 
loppement 
to die, mourir 
doubtless, sans doute 
especially, specialement 
to extend, etendre, donner 
few, pen 
the gold, Vor 
the guide, le guide 
to hasten, se hater 
the hotel, Vhotel 
immense, immense 
instructive, instructif 


enquete sur 

the iron, le her 
the journey, le voyage. 
manufacturing, manufac- 
turier, industriel 
the mill, la manufacture, le 
moulin 

the mine, la mine 
mining, minier, miniere 

the mourning, le deuil 
no longer, ne . . . plus 
to organize-, organiser 
the packing house, /’ abat¬ 
toir 

the plant, la plante, la manu¬ 
facture 

the porter, le garqon, le com- 
missionnaire 

the presence, la presence 
the president, le president 
the property, la propriete 
to prove, se montrer, etre 
the resources, les ressources 
to sell, vendre 





7 


QUATORZIEME LEQON 


23 


YOCABULAIEE- (Continue) 


signed, signi 

tlie silver, Vargent {metal) 
to spare, ePargner 
tlie steel, Vacier 
to subscribe, souscrire 


such, tel 
vast, vaste 
to will, vouloir 
the wool, la laine 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION 


So you are going to America 
next month? 

Yes, Mr. Josselyn, I am. I 
shall 1 stop 2 only a few 3 days 
in New York, and shall 
then hasten to Chicago. I 
thought 4 to go to Boston 
first, but yesterday we re¬ 
ceived our signed contract, 
and my presence there is 
no longer 6 necessary. You 
spoke to me some time ago 
about the United States. 
When do you expect to 
sail? 

I shall sail from Liverpool' 
on the twenty-first. 

Shall you, indeed? Harry 
and I shall leave from 
Hamburg, and will be in 
Chicago about the second 
of September. 

Shall we meet there? You 
will stop at one of the 
large hotels, I suppose? 

Doubtless. 6 But Harry 7 will 
not stay with me; he will 
go to Denver to investigate 
some Colorado mining 
property. You know he is 


Alors, vous allez en Amerique 
le mois prochain? 

Oui, M. Josselyn, j’y vais. 
Je ne m’arreterai que quel- 
ques jours a New-York, et 
je m’empresserai de ga- 
gner Chicago. Je pensais 
d’abord aller a Boston, mais 
hier, nous avons regu notre 
contrat signe, et ma pre¬ 
sence n’est plus necessaire. 
Vous m’avez parl6 d’aller 
aux Etats-Unis il y a quel- 
que temps. Quand esperez- 
vous vous embarquer? 

Je m’embarquerai le vingt et 
un de Liverpool. 

Vraiment? Henri et moi 
partirons de Hambourg, et 
nous serons a Chicago vers 
le deux septembre. 

Nous y rencontrerons-nous? 
Vous descendrez al’undes 
grands hotels, je suppose? 

Sans doute; mais Henri ne 
restera- pas avec moi; il ira 
a Denver faire une enquete 
sur des proprietes minieres 
du Colorado. Vous savez 





24 


ANGLAIS 


7 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION— (Continuees) 


the president of a company 
that is working several 
gold and silver mines there. 

Yes; I knew that. He came 
to see me last month, and 
sold me some stock. 8 Did 
he sell you any? 

No; I subscribed for some 
when they organized the 
company. Will this be 
your first trip to the United 
States? 

The first, yes. I shall be 
glad to have you for a 
guide, if you can sparq 
some of your time. Yes¬ 
terday I read such an in¬ 
teresting article about the 
large packing houses 9 there 
that I am very anxious to 
see them. But will they 
permit us to inspect them? 

O, yes; they will extend 
every courtesy to us, be¬ 
cause I am doing business 
with them. 

Let us hope that we shall 
meet in Chicago, for then 
I shall ask you to take me 
with you. 

I will do so gladly. I am 
sure your journey will 
prove very instructive. 
What we, on this side of 
the Atlantic, read about 


qu’il est president d’une 
compagnie qui exploite 
plusieurs , mines d’or et 
d’argent. 

Oui; je le savais. II est venu 
me voir le mois dernier et 
m’a vendu des actions. 
Vous en a-t-il vendu aussi? 

Non; j’ai souscrit pour des 
actions quand on organisait 
la Compagnie. Sera-ce. 
votre premier voyage aux 
EtatSrUnis? 

Le premier, oui; je serai con¬ 
tent de vous avoir pour 
guide si vous pouvez me 
donner un peu de votre 
temps. J’ai lu hier un ar¬ 
ticle si int^ressant sur les 
grands abattoirs de Chicago 
que je suis impatient de les 
voir. Mais nous permet- 
tront-ils de les inspecter? 

Oh! oui; ils feront tout pour 
nous etre agreables, parce 
que je suis en affaires avec 
eux. 

Esperons que nous nous ren- 
contrerons a Chicago, cat 
alors je vous demanderai 
que vous me preniez avec 
vous. 

Je le ferai avec plaisir. Je 
suis sur que votre voyage 
sera tres instructif. Ce que 
nous lisons au sujet de 
l’Amerique, de ce cotd de 



7 


QUATORZIEME LEQON 


25 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


America, can give us no 
correct idea of the im¬ 
mense development of the 
industries of the country, 
of its cotton and woolen 10 
mills, of its iron and steel¬ 
manufacturing plants, nor 
especially of its vast agri¬ 
cultural resources. 

I suppose not. I am antici¬ 
pating a great deal of 
pleasure from my trip. 
Shall I see you at the 
theater tonight? 

No; I cannot go to the 
theater now. I am in 
mourning; my uncle died 
three weeks ago. 

O, excuse me; I did not 
think about that. I shall 
see you in the morning 
then. 

Yes; I think you will. Good 
night. 

Good night. O, by the way, 
when you go to the office, 
will you 11 tell the porter to 
come up to my room? 

Certainly. 


l’Atlantique, ne peut pas 
nous donner une idee juste 
de l’immense d^veloppe- 
ment des industries du 
pays, de ses manufactures 
de coton et de laine, de ses 
etablissements manufactu- 
riers du fer et de l’acier, et, 
sp^cialement de ses vastes 
ressources agricoles. 

Je suppose que non. Je m’at- 
tends a avoir beaucoup de 
plaisir dans mon voyage. 
Vous verrai-je ce soir au 
theatre? 

Non; je ne puis aller au 
theatre maintenant. Je 
suis en deuil; mon oncle est 
mort il y a trois semaines. 

Oh! pardonnez-moi; je n’y 
pensais pas. Je vous ver- 
rai demain matin alors. 

Oui; je pense que vous me 
verrez. Bonne nuit. 

Bonne nuit. Oh! a propos, 
quand vous descendrez au 
bureau, voulez-vous dire 
au garQon de monter dans 
ma chambre? 

Certainement. 



26 ANGLAIS §7 

REMARQUES 

1. Cette legon traite de la maniere d’exprimer le futur 
en anglais. Nous avons vu que les verbes anglais avaient 
des formes speciales ou inflexions pour exprimer le present 
ou le passd. Ainsi, les verbes / have , et I intend sont au 
present, tandis que I had, et / intended sont au passe. 

En franqais, notre futur est forme de meme par l’addition 
d’une terminaison, inais en anglais, nous sommes obliges de 
nous servir d’un auxiliaire pour le former. Le futur frangais 
est un temps simple; le futur anglais est un temps compose. 
Les phrases suivantes sont au futur: 

I shall visit Paris next week, Je visiterai Paris la seniaine prochaine. 

You will find Louis in his room, Vous trouverez Louis dans sa 
chanibre. 

We shall die, Nous mourrons. 

Florence will sail on* Saturday, Florence s’embarquera samedi. 

Dans ces phrases, shall visit, will find, shall die, zvill jail, 
sont employes pour exprimer le futur, et nous voyons par la 
que chaque expression se compose d’un auxiliaire (shall ou 
will) et de l’infinitif du verbe (visit, find, die, sail ) sans 
la preposition to. 

Shall et will ne s’emploient pas indifferemment l’un pour 
l’autre, et la distinction a observer entre les deux est assez 
difficile a saisir. 

Le modele suivant donne la regie generate a suivre dans 
l’emploi de ces deux auxiliaires pour exprimer un simple 
futur: (1) dans les declarations; (2) dans les interrogations: 

to go, alter 

Futur — Declarations 
Singulier Pluriel 

I shall 1 J’irai AYe shall j Nour irons 

. [go, You will [go, Vous irez 

He will J It ira They will J Its iront 

Futur — Interrogations 
Singulier , Pluriel 

Shall I 1 Irai-je? Shall we 1 Irons-nous? 

.j go, Shall yo u i go ? Irez-vous ? 

Will he J Ira-t-il? Will they J Iront-ils? 




§7 


QUATORZIEME LECON 


27 


On fait souvent erreur dans- l’emploi de shall et de will-. 
(1) a la premiere personne dans les declarations et dans les 
questions, et (2) dans la deuxieme personne dans les ques¬ 
tions. Les phrases suivantes sont formees correctement a la 
premiere personne avec shall: 

I shall go, J'irai. Shall I go? Irai-je? 

I shall come tonight, Je vien- Shall I come tonight? Viendrai-je 
drai ce soir. ce soir? 

Notez que dans ces phrases, on n’a en vue que d’exprimer 
le futur simplement, et qu’aucune idee de volonte ou de desir 
de la part du sujet n’est exprimee. 

Comparez, avec les premieres, les phrases suivantes dans 
lesquelles / will est employe avec l’infinitif. 

I will give you a dollar, Je vous donnerai un dollar. 

I will go in spite of you, J’irai malgre vous. 

I will not submit, Je ne me soumettrai pas. 

I will do all I can, Je ferai tout ce que je pourrai. 

Dans ces phrases, / will et l’infinitif du verbe n’expriment 
plus un simple futur comme c’etait le cas avec I shall des 
phrases precedentes. Ils expriment le desir, la volonte, 
la determination du sujet d’accomplir une chose dans le 
futur. On peut done dire que will a la premiere personne 
n’est reellement pas une forme du futur, mais plutot une 
forme qui exprime la volonte ou le desir de faire une chose. 
Will est employe a la premiere personne pour promettre, 
menacer, consentir, ou pour exprimer la resolution: 

I will give him ten dollars to do this, Je lui donnerai dix dollars pour 
faire ceci. (promesse) 

I will investigate your accounts, Je ferai une enquete survos comptes. 
(menace) 

I will speak, if he wants me to, Je parlerai s'il le veut. (consente- 
ment) 

I will say what I have to say, Je dirai ce que j’ai a dire, (resolution) 

On voit done par la que e’est une erreur d’employer will 
pour shall a la premiere personne. II est incorrect de dire, 
par exemple. 


28 


ANGLAIS 


§7 


We will all die some day,' Nous mourrons tons tin jour , car cela 
signifie: Nous sommes determines cl mourir tous un jour. Si on veut 
simplement exprimer le futur, c’est-a-dire l’idee que tous nous sommes 
condammes a mourir un jour, il faut dire: 

We shall all die some day, Nous mourrons tous un jour. 

On remarquera cependant une idee de volonte ou de con- 
sentement dans des expressions comme: / shall be glad , je 
serai content; I shall be delighted , je serai enchante, etc. II 
semble a premiere vue qu’on doive employer wilt au lieu 
de shall. II n’en est rien. Ces expressions expriment la 
volonte, non pas par l’usage de shall , mais par les adjectifs 
glad , delighted eux-memes. Ainsi, si nous disions I will be 
glad , cela equivaudrait a, Je suis determine h etre content. 
C’est done I shall qu’il faut. 

Dans les interrogations, a la seconde personne, c’est shall 
you? qu’il faut employer, si l’on veut exprimer un simple 
futur, et will you? quand on veut exprimer la volonte, le 
consentement ou la determination, comme on peut le voir 
dans les exemples suivants: 

Simple Futur 

Shall you come to see me today or tomorrow? Viendrez-vous me 
voir aujourd'hui ou demain? 

Shall you try to write in French? Essaierez-vous d'icrire en 
frangais ? 

Consentement, Determination, Etc. 

Will you give him five dollars? Voulez-vous lui donner cinq dollars? 

Will you oblige him to do this? L'obtigerez-vous a faire ceci? 

A la deuxieme personne et a la troisieme, si l’on veut 
exprimer un commandement , une menace , une promesse ou une 
resolution , on emploie shall, et non will: 

You shall not steal, Vous ne volerez point (commandement). 

He shall have this book if he studies well, Je lui donnerai {It aura ) 
ce livre s’il etudie bien (promesse). 

They shall be punished, Its seront punis (menace). 

She shall never see me again, Elle ne me reverra jamais (determi¬ 
nation) . 

En rdsume, tous les cas que nous avons exposes dans les 
exemples precedents peuvent etre etudies dans le tableau 
suivant: 


7 


QUATORZIEME LECON 


29 


SlNGULIER PLURIEL 


'Declarations 



Simple Futur< 


. Interrogations < . . . . [go? Shall you [go? 


VOLONTE CONSENTE- 

ment, Resolu¬ 
tion, Etc. De- 
Faire Une Chose 
Dans le Futur 


Declarations 


Interrogation si . . . . [go? Will you 
[shall heJ Shall they 


2. Le verbe to stop, arreter, s’emploie aussi dans le sens 
de descendre dans un hotel lorsqu’on est en voyage. 

Where do you stop in New York? Oil descendez-vous a New-York? 

I stop at the Harrison Hotel, Je descends a t'hdtel Harrison. 

3. II y a deux mots en anglais pour traduire le mot peu 
en frangais: little et few. II faut noter qu’ils ne sont pas 
suivis de la preposition of, de, comme en frangais. La dis¬ 
tinction a faire entre les deux est que little s’emploie pour 
la quantite, et est suivi d’un nom au singulier, tandis que 
few s’emploie pour le nombre, et le nom suivant est toujours 
au pluriel. 

I have a little time this morning, J’ai un peu de temps ce matin. 

He gave me a few apples, II m’a donne quelques pommes (litterale- 
ment, un peu de pommes). 

4. L’imparfait des verbes suivants, contenus dans les 
“Phrases et Conversation” est forme irregulierement en 
anglais. Etudiez-les soigneusement, car ils sont d’un usage 
frequent dans la conversation: 


Present 


Imparfait 
I thought, ie pensais 
I spoke, je parlais 
I knew, je savais, je co?maissais 


I think, je pense 
I speak, je parte 
I know, je sais, je connais 
I come, je viens 
I sell , je vends 
I die, je meurs 


I came, je venais 
I sold, je vendais 
I died, je mourais 


Enfin le verbe to read , lire, s’ecrit de meme au present et a 
l’imparfait, mais la prononciation est differente dans ces 




30 


ANGLAIS 


7 


deux temps. Au present, on prononce comme ried, et a 
l’imparfait comme red. 

5. Notre expression ne ... . plus se traduit par no more 
ou par not any more; mais s’il s’agit du temps, on emploie 
no longer: 

He will speak no more, II ne parlera phis. 

She is no longer there, Elle n'est plus Id. 

6. Sans devant un nom est souvent traduit en anglais en 
ajoutant le suffixe less, moins, a ce nom: 

He is homeless, II est sans asile. 

We are penniless, Nous sommes sans le sou. 

7 . Harry est un diminutif pour Henry. 

8. Le mot stock qui a ete traduit par marchandises en 
magasin signifie aussi les actions d’une compagnie. 

9. Le mot abattoir ne rend pas exactement le sens de 
Packing-houses mais la langue francaise n’a pas d’expression 
equivalente pour traduire ce mot. Les packing-houses sont 
une institution americaine. Dans ces immenses etablisse- 
ments se trouvent des abattoirs, toutes sortes de machines 
pour preparer les differentes parties d’un animal pour le 
marche, des appareils frigorifiques pour conserver la viande 
et l’expedier au loin, etc. Les packing-houses de Chicago 
sont les plus grands du monde. 

10. Souvent, en anglais, on fait usage d’un veritable 
adjectif pour exprimer la matiere dont se compose un objet. 
Ainsi le nom wool, laine, devient woolen, de laine: 

a woolen mill, une manuiacture de laine 

11 . Le verbe to will, vouloir, peut comme en frangais 
etre employe comme verbe principal, ou independant. Si on 
excepte la seconde personne du singulier, will est invariable 
a toutes les personnes du singulier et du pluriel. II n’a, 
dans ce cas, aucun rapport avec la formation du futur. 

Will you tell John to come here/please, Voulez-vous dire d Jean de 
venir ici, je vous prie. 

Will they bring their French books with them? Veulent-ils apporter 
leurs livres frangais avec euxf 


§7 


QUATORZIEME LECON 


31 


EXEllCICE ORAL 

I shall go to town this morning; will you go 
with me? —No; I shall go this afternoon. 

J'irai en ville ce matin; voulez-vous venir avec moif— 

Non; j'irai cet apres-midi. 

1 shall be in New York next month; shall you be there 
too? —No; I shall be in Denver, Colorado. 

I will prepare my lesson well; will you prepare yours 
too? —No; I shall not; I am too busy. 

I shall sail on the twenty-first; shall you sail the same 
day?—No; I shall not sail before the first of next month. 

I shall sell my stock; shall you sell yours too? —No; I 
shall not sell mine now. 

I shall buy some of that mining- stock when I have money 
enough. 

I shall come early tonight. 

He will go to town tomorrow morning or 
afternoon. 

It ira en ville demain matin on demain soir. 

She will leave by the five-o’clock train. 

They will investigate some mining property. 

You will hear from him very soon. 

They will extend every courtesy to you. 

He will visit your mill when he comes to town. 

They will examine our books the first of the month. 

She will subscribe for some stock if you go to see her. 

It will prove very instructive to you, I am sure. 

It will require a great deal of money to finish it. 

Shall you go to town tonight? —I do not know 
yet; 1 have very much to do. 

Irez-vous en ville ce soir?—Je ne sais pas encore; j'ai 
beaucoup a faire. 

Shall we play on the violin for you? —I hope you will. 
Shall you spend your vacations in the country this sum¬ 
mer?—We shall if Mr. Clay invites us. 


32 


ANGLAIS 


.7 


Shall you stay here a long time? —I think I shall. 

Shall I study this lesson? —Yes. 

I sliall see her tomorrow. 

Je la verrai demain. 

I will go to Paris with them. 

Will they go? —Yes; if you say so. 

Will he go? —I cannot tell; ask him. 

As you are going out, will you take that letter with you 
and give it to Mr. Harrison. 

Let liim go. — He will not go. 

Qu'il s’en aille.—Il ne veut pas s’en alter. 

Will he not go? —He shall go. 

He will go now. 

We shall go to Paris this year; will you go with us? —No; 
I shall go next year. 

Not next year, if you please. —Why not? 

Ask no questions, you shall not go. 

Excuse me, we will go. 

John will not study his French lesson.— Why? —He shall 
study it. 

I promise you that I will take dinner with 
you tonight. 

Je vous promets de diner avec vous ce soir. 

We shall hear from our friend very soon. 

Shall we take the steamship or the train? —We will take 
the train; we shall arrive at three o’clock. 

Shall they write this in French or in English? —They shall 
write in English. 

How shall I finish the letter I have to write in English? 
Will it be warm tomorrow? 

Will his exercise be correct? 

I shall miss my train if I do not hurry. 

Je manquerai mon train , si je ne me depeche pas. 

I shall be very tired tonight, if I have to finish this. 

We shall try to study our lessons well. 


QUATORZIEME LEQON 


33 


7 


We will give him what he needs. 

I will write to him at once if you say so. 

He will not help me. 

They shall come at once to see me. 

I will meet them, if I have to stay here all day. 

I shall be delighted to make his acquaint¬ 
ance. 

Je serai enchante de faire sa connaissance. 

We shall be delighted to make their acquaintance. 

I shall be glad to see you at the concert tonight. 

We shall be pleased to meet them. 

I shall be delighted to go to the theater with you. 

We shall be glad to see America again. 

Shall we go day aftex* tomorrow ? 

Irons-nous apres-demain ? 

I shall be glad to see her. 

They say they will not forget your kindness (bonte). 

Shall we ask him to come with us? 

I shall probably be out of town at that time. 

I shall be twenty-one next September. 

John thinks your cousin will be ill tomorrow. 

How shall we send that book? 

They ask you how they shall send that book. 

If you do not hurry, you will be late. 

Shall I give an apple to that child? 

I hope I shall not be so late as that. 

He says he will be glad to see us. 

We will never forget how kind you were. 

What shall you do without friends? 

Note. —Dans les phrases suivantes, shall et will peuvent etre 1’um 
et l’autre employes. Le sens est cependant different selon que l’on 
emploie l’un ou l’autre des auxiliaires. Par exemple dans la premiere 
phrase, She will not see me , on veut dire qu’elle ne meverra pas, pour 
une cause ou pour une autre, independante de sa volonte; en un mot, 
c’est le simple futur exprime ici. Mais si je dis: She shall not see me , 
l’idee emise est qu’elle ne doit pas me voir, parce que je ne veux pas 
qu’elle me voie. Raisonnez de meme avec les autres phrases qui 
suivent, de maniere a bien sentir les differences qui existent entre 
shall et will. 


34 


ANGLAIS 


7 


Slie will not see me. — She shall not see me. 

Elle ne me verra pas. —II ne faut pas qu'elle me voie. 

She will (shall) not go. 

Will (shall) you be with your friend? 

I will (shall) not speak to you. 

They will (shall) know my answer today. 

Where do you stop in New York?—I stop at 
the Harrison House. 

Oil descendez-vous a New-York?—Je descends a Vhdtel 
Harrison. 

Where does he stop in New York? —He stops at the Har¬ 
rison House. 

Where does she stop in New York? —She stops at the 
Harrison House. 

Where do you stop in New York? —We stop at the Har¬ 
rison House. 

Where do they stop in New York? —They stop at the 
Harrison House. 

He has a little money. - He has little money. 

II a un peu d'argent. —II a peu d'argent. 

He has a few apples. — He has few apples. 

It a quelques pommes.—Il a peu de pommes. 

I have very few books, but I can give you a few. 

She has very little butter, but she can give you a little. 
They eat very little bread, but we eat a great deal. 

We do not speak English very well. 

I will eat a few peaches, if you please. 

I always thought that investment was a good 
one. 

J'ai toujours pense que c'etait un bon placement. 

We often thought of you when we were in Germany. 

He thought his friends were here tonight. 

She thought the vegetables we had for our dinner were 
from our garden. 

They thought their bookkeeper was in the store. 


§7 QUATORZIEME LEQON 35 

1 thought these figures were correct, so I did not examine 
them. 

They thought that the house was too small for their family. 

I found Harry in his room; lie spoke to me 
about that matter. 

J'ai trouve Henri cleans sa chambre; il m’a parle de cette 
affaire. 

She spoke to me about you yesterday. 

I spoke to her about my uncle who died a year ago 
yesterday. 

They spoke to us yesterday for the first time. 

He spoke to you about that mining property he bought 
last year in Colorado. 

I was not acquainted with Mr. Perkins, but I 
knew him to be very rich. 

Je ne connaissais pas M. Perkins , mais je savais qu'il etait 
Iris riche. , 

Did you know that he was President of a company that is 
working gold mines in Colorado? —O, yes; I knew it. 

I did not know her, but she knew me. 

He knew I was in Paris last summer. 

They knew I had to sell that stock. 

When he came, I was in the library with a 
friend. 

Quand il est venu,j'etais dans la bibliotheque avec nn ami. 

That night he came very late. 

Were my friends here when she came? 

They came from London about a year ago and began 
business here. 

I was still in Paris when you came to America. 

To whom did you sell your stock? —I sold it 
to Mr. Perkins. 

A qui avez-vous vendu vos actions?—Je les ai vendues a 
M. Perkins. 

Who sold you those gloves? —Mr. Clay; he sold me that 
cane also. 

They went to Paris to live, and so they sold their house. 


36 ANGLAIS §7 

How much did they get for their house? —They sold it for 
eight thousand five hundred dollars. 

She sold her stock last week to your cousin. 

Whose house is this? —Is it Mr. Clay's? —It was, but he 
sold it. 

When did your uncle die? —He died about a 
year ago. 

Quand votre oncle est-il mortf—II est mort it y a a peu pris 
un an . 

When did Victor Hugo die? —He died in eighteen hundred 
and eighty-five. 

She died in Germany last month. 

They died in America, two years after they were there. 

He was very rich when he died. 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


Is Mrs. Clay at home? 

Mrs. Clay is not at home, madam; 
she went to New York, and 
will not return before tomorrow. 
She will come back on the four- 
ten train tomorrow afternoon. 
If you will leave your card, 
madam, I will give it to Mrs. 
Clay when she comes. 

Are you sure that she will come 
back on the four o’clock train? 

I am quite sure, madam. 

Then I will go to meet her. Did 
she take Florence with her? 

No, madam; Florence is here. 
She was in her room when I 
came down. Do you wish to 
see her? 

Yes; please ask her if she can 
receive me. 

Very well, madam. Come into 
the parlor. I will call Miss 
Florence. 

Yes; I will sit down a moment. 


Mme. Clay est-elle chez elle? 

Mme. Clay n’y est pas, madame; 
elle est allee a New-York et ne 
reviendra pas avant demain. 
Elle arrivera par le train de 
quatre heures dix demain apres- 
midi. Si vous voulez laisser 
votre carte, madame, je la re- 
mettrai a Mme. Clay quand elle 
reviendra. 

Etes-vous sure qu’elle arrivera 
par le train de quatre heures? 

Tres sure, madame. 

Alors, j’irai Tattendre. A-t-elle 
pris Florence avec elle? 

Non, madame; Florence est ici. 
Elle etait dans sa chambre 
quand je suis descendue. D6- 
sirez-vous la voir? 

Oui; demandez-lui si elle peut 
me recevoir, je vous prie. 

Tres bien, madame. Entrez dans 
le salon; je vais appeler Mile. 
Florence. 

Oui; je vais m’asseoir un moment. 




7 


QUATORZIEME LEgON 


37 


REVUE ET CONVERS 

How happy I am to see you! It 
is such a long time since we 
had the pleasure of a visit from 
you. You were not ill? 

No, my dear; I was out of town. 

I assure you that mother will 
very much regret that she was 
not here. They told you she 
was in New York? 

Yes; I am very sorry not to find 
her, but I intend to meet her at 
the train tomorrow. 

I will go with you if you will call 
here on your way. 

I will do so gladly, and you may 
expect me about three o’clock. 

Very well; I will be ready. 

I am anxious to see your mother. 
We intend to leave for France 
about the first of next month. 
We shall sail from New York, 
and as your mother often speaks 
to me about Paris, I shall try to 
induce her to accompany us. 

And will you ask her to take me 
with you? 

Certainly. 

O, what a delightful trip! If 
mama will only say yes! I 
cannot tell you how much I 
long to see Paris; I read so 
much about it that I am very 
anxious to see it. 

I am sure it will be very easy to 
induce your mother to go with 
us. She is quite anxious to go. 
She told me so several times, 
and she is always happy when 
she can please you. 


4.TIONT — (Continuees) 

Que je suis heureuse de vousvoir! 
II y a si longtemps que nous 
n’avons pas eu le plaisir de 
recevoir une de vos visites. 
Vous n’avez pas ete malade? 

Non, ma chere; j’etais en voyage. 

Je vous assure que ma mere 
regrettera beaucoup de n’avoir 
pas ete ici. On vous a dit 
qu’elle etait a New-York? 

Oui; je regrette aussi beaucoup 
de ne pas la trouver, mais j’ai 
l’intention d’aller l’attendre au 
train demain. 

J’irai avec vous si vous venez me 
chercher ici en passant. 

Je le ferai avec plaisir, et vous 
pouvez m’attendre vers les trois 
heures. 

Tres bien; je serai prete. 

Je suis impatiente de voir votre 
mere. Nous avons l’intention 
d’aller en France vers le pre¬ 
mier du mois prochain. Nous 
nousembarqueronsaNew-York, 
et comme votre mere m’a sou- 
vent parle de Paris, j’essaierai 
de la decider a nous accom- 
pagner. 

Et lui demanderez-vous de me 
prendre avec vous? 

Certainement. 

Oh! quel voyage agreable! Si 
seulement maman disait oui! 
Je ne saurais vous dire combien 
je desire voir Paris. Je lis tant 
au sujet de cette ville que je 
suis impatiente de la voir. 

Je suis sure que ce sera facile de 
decider votre mere avenir. Elle 
a un grand desir de faire ce 
voyage. Elle me l’a dit plusieurs 
fois et elle est toujours heureuse 
quand elle vous fait plaisir. 




88 


ANGLAIS 


§7 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION — (Contixmees) 


O, yes; mother is very kind to me. 
You were in Colorado lately, 
were you not? ^ 

Yes; we came back day before 
yesterday; we were away three 
months. We went to Denver, 
because my husband had to in¬ 
vestigate some mining properties 
there. You know he is president 
of a company that is working 
gold mines there. I enjoyed that 
trip very much. We came back 
by way of Chicago, and I found 
it very interesting to visit those 
immense packing houses. You 
cannot get a correct idea of what 
they are merely by reading about 
them. You must see them to 
understand what immense plants 
they are. But I anticipate still 
more pleasure from my trip to 
Paris, because it will be my first 
visit there. Just one thing trou¬ 
bles me. I have a very poor 
knowledge of French, and it is 
very tiresome to have a guide 
constantly with one. But if you 
come, as I expect, you shall 
speak for us all. 


Certainly. I think I shall have no 
difficulty with French, for my 
teacher tells me that I speak it 
very well. 

Then I will be with you all the 
time, and you shall speak for 
me. Now, I must say good by. 

Do not go yet, please. 


Oh! oui; maman est tres bonne 
pour moi. Vous etiez au Colo¬ 
rado dernierement, n’est-ce pas? 

Oui; nous sommes rentres avant- 
hier; nous avons ete absents 
trois mois. Nous sommes alles 
a Denver, parce que mon mari 
avait a faire une enquete sur 
quelques proprietes minieres. 
Vous savez qu’il est president 
d’une compagnie qui exploite 
des mines d’or la-bas. J’ai eu 
beaucoup de plaisir dans ce 
voyage. Nous sommes revenus 
par Chicago, et cela m’a beau- 
coup interesse de visiter ces im- 
menses“packinghouses.’’ Vous 
ne pouvez vous faire une juste 
idee de ce qu’ils sont, simple- 
ment par la lecture. II faut les 
voir pour comprendre quelle 
immense entreprise c’est. Mais 
je m’attends a encore plus de 
plaisir de mon voyage a Paris, 
parce que ce sera ma premiere 
visite. Une seule chose m’em- 
barrasse. J’ai de pauvres con- 
naissances en frangais, et c’est 
tres ennuyeux d’avoir constam- 
ment un guide avec soi. Mais 
si vous venez, comme je Pespere, 
vous parlerezpour tout le monde. 

Certainement. Je ne pense pas 
que j’aurai aucune difficulty a 
parler frangais, parce que le 
professeur m*assure que je parle 
tres bien. 

Alors, je serai avec vous tout le 
temps, et vous parlerez pour 
moi. Maintenant, il faut que je 
vous quitte (il faut que je dise 
“good by"). 

Ne vous en allez pas encore, je 
vous prie. 



QUATORZIEME LE^ON 


39 


/ 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


I must, my dear. I have several 
things to buy before dinner, and 
I must be at home at twelve; my 
husband comes home at that 
hour. 


J’y suis obligee, ma chere. J’ai 
plusieurs choses a acheter avant 
diner, et je dois etre a la maison 
a midi; mon mari rentre a cette 
heure-la. 


PHRASES 

Will you show me the way to Har¬ 
rison Street? 

Take this street (which is Main 
Street), and turn to the right 
four blocks down. 

It will not be easy. 

I shall be happy to see him again. 

If you wish, I will take you home. 

I have a call to make. Will you 
excuse me? 

They will come presently. 

He will make his way. 

I shall be at your service in a 
moment. 

Come to see me; you will find me 
at home every day after four 
o’clock. 

I shall do without him. 

Well, we will do without it. 

Will you be kind enough to do 
that? 

What will you give me for it? 

If you eat of it, it will make you 
ill. 

That will do just as well. 

I will let you know who I am. 

You shall answer for it. 

Will you give us the pleasure of 
your company this evening? 

Will you take a hand at cards? 

He will not be sorry for it, you 
may be sure. 

I shall have company tonight. 


USUELLES 

Voulez-vous, je vous prie, me mon- 
trer le chemin qui conduit a la 
rue Harrison? 

Prenez cette rue qui est la Grande 
Rue, et tournez a droite apres la 
quatrieme rue. 

Ce ne sera pas facile. 

Je serai heureux de le revoir. 

Si vous voulez, je vous conduirai 
chez vous. 

J’ai une visite a faire. Voulez- 
vous m’excuser? 

11s vont venir. 

II ira son chemin. 

Je suis a vous dans un moment. 

Venez me voir; vous me trouverez 
chez moi tous les jours apres 
quatre heures. 

Je me passerai de lui. 

Eh bien! nous nous en passerons. 

Voulez-vous avoir la bonte de 
faire cela? 

Que m’en donnez-vous? 

Si vous en mangez, cela vous 
rendra malade. 

Cela fera aussi bien. 

Je vous apprendrai qui je suis. 

Vous m’en rendrez compte. 

Voulez-vous nous faire le plaisir 
de passer la soiree avec nous? 

Voulez-vous faire une partie de 
cartes? 

II n’en sera pasfache, allez. 

J’aurai du monde ce soir. 





40 


ANGLAIS 


§7 


PHRASES USUELLES—(Continuees) 


He will not do it. 

I shall look to it. 

You will hear from me. 

He will keep his word. 

I knew as much. 

# 

I thought so. 

I am finding out when the first 
train leaves for New York. 

Will you be one of us? 

I will have if so. 

A woman must have her way. 

He asked us what we wanted of 
him. 

I will come for you. 

It is there that I shall have him. 
She speaks well of you. 

He thinks he can do it. 

Do you think he*will do it? 

I shall make it my business. 

I shall call on you when I come 
back. 

I shall call on him today. 

I shall call on you when I pass 
by. 

That came in his way. 

First come, first served. 

She does not go into company. 

He sees good company. 

That will not do for me. 

He intends to go on a journey. 
Will you let him go with us? 

This is where we parted. 

I will put this money away. 

I will see you home. 

Will you see her to the pier? 

I will see about that. 

Sit down by me. 

I will come and sit with you. 

It was when I was about to start. 


II ne le fera pas. 

J’y mettrai ordre. 

Vous aurez de mes nouvelles. 

11 tiendra parole. 

Je le savais bien. 

Je Fai bien pense. 

Je cherche l’heure du depart du 
premier train pour New-York. 
Voulez-vous etre de la partie? 

Je le veux ainsi. 

Ce que femme veut, Dieu le veut. 
II nous demanda ce que nous 
voulions. 

Je viendrai vous chercher. 

C’est la ou je Tattends. 

File dit du bien de vous. 

II croit pouvoir le faire. 
Croyez-vous qu’il le fasse? 

Je m’en ferai une obligation. 

Je passerai chez vous en revenant. 

J’irai le voir aujourd’hui. 

Je vous prendrai en passant. 

Cela lui est tombe dans la main. 
Aux premiers venus les premiers 
morceaux. 

Elle ne va pas dans le monde. 

II frequente la bonne societe. 

Cela ne me va pas. 

II se propose de faire un voyage. 
Voulez-vous lui permettre de nous 
accompagner? 

Voici l’endroit ou nous nous som- 
mes separes. 

Je mettrai cet argent de cote. 

Je vous reconduirai chez vous. 
Voulez-vous l’accompagner jus- 
qu’a l’embarcadere. 

Je m’en occuperai. 

Asseyez-vous pres de moi. 

Je viendrai vous tenir compagnie. 
C’etait au moment ou j’allais 
partir. 






7 


QUATORZIEME LEQON 


41 


PHRASES TJSUELLES —(Continuees) 


I do not like to have you do that. 

Tell me who you are, and I will 
tell you who I am. 

Where am I to find those people? 
I think I know that lady. 

I hasten to answer that letter. 

I shall send for some money. 

I heard of that man in Denver. 

I heard from home. 

I heard my father say so. 

Let me hear from you. 

I come from Mr. Clay’s. 

I come from Mr. Clay’s to ask you 
to call on him. 

Ill as he is, he wants to go out. 
Why does she not come? 

What a beautiful country France 
is! 

What shall I think of you? 

How long will you stay here? 

When will you pay me my bill? 
When shall you come again? 

You will be obliged to start at 
five exactly. 

I will do all I can to help you. 


11 ne me plait pas que vous fas- 
siez cela. 

Dites-moi qui vous etes, et je vous 
dirai qui je suis. 

Ou aller pour trouver ces gens? 

Je crois connaitre cette dame. 

Je m’empresse de repondre a 
votre lettre. 

J’enverrai chercher de 1*argent. 

J’ai entendu parler de cet homme 
a Denver. 

J’ai des nouvelles de chez moi. 

Je l’ai entendu dire a mon pere. 

Envoyez-moi de vos nouvelles. 

Je viens de chez M. Clay. 

Je viens de la part de M. Clay vous 
prier de passer chez lui. 

Malade qu’il est, il veut sortir. 

Que ne vient-elle? 

Quel beau pays que la France! 

Que faudra-t-il que je pense de 
vous? 

Combien de temps resterez-vous 
ici? 

Quand me paierez-vous ma note? 

Quand reviendrez-vous? 

Vous serez oblige de partir a cinq 
heures precises. 

Je ferai tout mon possible pour 
vous aider. 


EXERCICE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 

Ecrivez les questions suivantes avec leurs rdponses en 
double expedition, et envoyez-nous les deux copies. Nous 
en conserverons une, et V autre vous sera retournee avec nos 
corrections. 

N’enregistrez pas cette legon sur un cylindre vierge avant 
d’avoir regu nos corrections, mais etudiez la legon suivante. 

1. Do you write many letters every day? 

2. Are you very tired after your long journey? 





42 


ANGLAIS 


§7 


3. At what time do you receive your letters? 

4. Do you prepare your lessons well? 

5. Can you afford to pay two dollars a day for your room? 

6. Do you go to church every Sunday? 

7. Are there any manufactures in your city? If so, what 
are they? 

8. Do you know how to keep books? 

9. About how much are thirty-eight dollars and fifty-five 
cents in French money? How much are eight hundred and 
forty-six francs and twenty-five centimes in American money? 

10. At what time are you coming back from work? 

11. Is the study of English interesting? How do you 
like it? 

12. How many floors has the house you live in? 

13. Have you an appointment with your friend this 
afternoon? 

14. Do you live far from your work? 

15. Do you like to go to the theater? 

16. When did you go last? 

17. Are there many strangers where you live? 

18. Who is president of the United States? 

19. What will you do tomorrow? 

20. When will your friend come to see you? 


ANGLAIS 

■ (PARTIE 8) 


QUINZIEME LECON 


CYLINDRE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 


VOCABULA1RE 


/. C. S. 

English Record No. 15 

although., quoique 
another, un autre 
best, le meilleur, le mieux 
tlie bit, le morceau, taut soit 
peu 

bitter, amer 

the block, espace compris 
entre deux rues 
the bottle, la bouteille 
the breath, Vhaleine 
to breathe, respirer 
bright, brillant 
the change, la monrtaie 
the cheek, la joue 
the chest, la poitrine 
the complexion, le teint 
conscientious, consciencieux 
the crown, la couronne (5 
shellings) 
deep, profond 

to direct, diriger , montrer le 
chemin 


i. c. s. 

Cylindre d’Anglais No. 15 

the direction, la direction 
the doctor, le docteur 
dreary, triste 

the drug store, la phar- 

macie 

the egg, Vceuf 

the errand, la commission 

even, merne 

to exhale, respirer l'air 
the eye, Vceil 
fair, beau 
to fear, craindre 
the fever, la Hbvre 
to fill, remplir, preparer 
to follow, suivre 
the food, la nourriture 
hard, dur, fort 
to imagine, imaginer 
the label, Vetiquette 
the least, le moins 
less, moins 
to lie, se coucher 


For notice of copyright , see page immediately following the title page 

§8 






2 


ANGLAIS 


§8 


YOCABULAIEE-(Continue) 


low, bas 

tlie lungs, les poumons 
tlie medicine, la medecine 
to obtain, obtenir 
tlie pain, la douleur 
the patient, le malade 
the pharmacy, la pharmacie 
the pill, la pilule 
the pound-sterling, lalivre 
sterling 

the powder, la poudre 
the prescription, Vordon- 

nance 

the pulse, le pouls 


to relieve, soulager, adoucir 

to seem, sembler 

several, plusieurs 

the shilling, le shelling 

to sleep, dormir 

slowly, lentement 

steady, ferme, rtgulier 

strong, fort 

the tongue, la langue 

upper, superieitr, d'en haut 

weak, faible 

welcome, bienvenu 

worse, pire 

worst, le pire 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION 


I am so glad that you came 
early, doctor. I fear that 
I am much weaker 1 than I 
was yesterday. 

O, no; you imagine that. 
You have a little appetite? 

Very little, doctor; I ate 2 one 
egg yesterday and drank a 
small glass of wine. 

That food probably gave you 
a little fever, but your eye 
is brighter and clearer than 
for several days, so I know 
that you are sleeping well. 
Your complexion is fairer 
too, and there is even just 
the least bit of color in 
your cheek. In a few days 


Je suis bien contente que 
vous soyez venu de bonne 
heure, docteur. Je crains 
que jene sois beaucoupplus 
faible aujourd’hui qu’hier. 

Oh! non; vous vous imaginez 
cela. Vous avez un peu 
d’appetit? 

Tres peu, docteur; j’ai mange 
un oeuf hier, et j’ai bu un 
petit verre de vin. 

Cette nourriture vous a pro- 
bablement donne un peu de 
fievre, mais votre oeil est 
plus brillant et plus clair 
qu’il ne l’a ete pendant 
plusieurs jours, et vous 
avez du bien dormir. Votre 
teint est aussi meilleur, et 
il y a meme un tant soit 





3 


8 QUINZIEME LEQON 

PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


you will be quite strong 
again. 

O, I hope so! It is so hard 
to lie in bed day after day! 
Those last pills you gave 
me were not so bitter as 
the first ones, and they 
seemed to do me more 
good. 

Yes; now let me see your 
tongue. Good, it is quite 
clear this morning. Your 
pulse is stronger and stead¬ 
ier today than yesterday. 
Do you still have that pain 
in your lungs? Now breathe 
very deep —deeper. Take 
a good long breath, filling 
the lower part of the lungs. 
Now exhale slowly —more 
slowly. That is right. Does 
that pain you? 


Yes; a little in the upper 
part of the chest, —but less 
than for several days. 

I will give you a prescription 
that I think will relieve you. 
It will be best for you to 
go for it to Newell’s phar- 


peu de couleur sur vos 
joues. Dans quelques 
jours, vous serez tout a 
fait forte de nouveau. 

Oh! je l’espere! C’est si 
desagreable de rester au lit 
jour apres jour! Ces der- 
nieres pilules que vous 
m’avez donn^es n’etaient 
pas si ameres que les pre¬ 
mieres, et il me semble 
qu’elles m’ont fait plus de 
bien. 

Oui; maintenant voyons votre 
langue. Bien, elle est bien 
moins chargee (plus claire) 
ce matin. Votre pouls est 
plus fort et plus regulier 
aujourd’hui qu’hier. Avez- 
vous encore cette douleur 
dans vos poumons? Main- 
tenant respirez tres fort- 
plus fort. Aspirez forte- 
mi ent, de maniere a remplir 
la partie inferieure des pou¬ 
mons. Maintenant, expirez 
l’air lentement — plus lente- 
ment. C’est bien. Eprou- 
vez-vous des douleurs? 

Oui; un peu dans la partie 
superieure de la poitrine; 
mais moins que les jours 
derniers. 

Je vais vous faire une ordon- 
nance qui vous soulagera, je 
crois. II sera mieux pour 
vous de la faire preparer ^ 




4 


ANGLAIS 


§8 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION— (Continuees) 


macy, which is the largest 
in the city, 3 although you 
can probably obtain it at 
any 4 drug store. 

I am following your direc¬ 
tions very carefully, doctor. 
Do you think I shall be ill 
long? 

O, no, the worst is over now. 
You are one of the most 
conscientious patients that 
I have, and you will be one 
of the first to get well. Is 
it not a dreary day —even 
worse than yesterday? 
Shall I ask Johnnie to go 
for this medicine? 

Yes; please. 

*** 

Pardon me, sir; can you direct 
me to Newell’s drug store? 

To Newell’s pharmacy? O, 
yes; it is three blocks 6 to 
the left from the next cor¬ 
ner. 

Is there no drug store nearer 
than that? 

No; Newell’s is the nearest. 

Thank you, sir. Good day. 

You are quite welcome. Good 
morning. 


la pharmacie Newell, qui 
est la plus grande de la 
ville, quoique vous puis- 
siez probablement l’avoir 
dans n’importe quelle phar¬ 
macie. 

Je suis vos directions tres 
soigneusement, Docteur. 
Croyez-vous que je sois 
malade longtemps? 

Oh! non; le pire est passd. 
Vous etes une de mes ma- 
lades les plus consciencieu- 
ses, et vous serez une des 
premieres a vous rdtablir. 
N’est-ce pas un jour triste 
aujourd’hui, meme plus 
triste qu’hier. Dois-je de- 
mander a Jean d’aller cher- 
cher cette mddecine? 

Oui; s’il vous plait. 

***' 

Pardonnez-moi, monsieur; 
pouvez-vous me montrer 
le chemin pour aller a la 
pharmacie Newell? 

A la pharmacie Newell? Oh! 
oui; c’est trois rues a 
gauche, depuis le coin. 

Y a-t-il des pharmacies plus 
prks que celle-la? 

Non; Newell est le plus pres. 

Merci. Bonjour, monsieur. 

A votre service. (Vous etes 
le bienvenu.) Bonjour, 
monsieur. 



QUINZIEME LECON 


5 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Here is a prescription from 
Doctor Johnson. How long 
will it take to fill it? 

About half an hour, sir. 

Very well; I have another 
errand to do. I will call 
on my way back. 

*** 

Here is the medicine, sir. 
You will find the directions 
on the label. 

How much is it? 

Let me see: one shilling 6 
(Is.) and sixpence (6d.) for 
the powder, and two shil¬ 
lings (2s.) for the bottle. 
That makes three shillings 
and six pence. 

I have no change. Here is a 
pound sterling (£l). 


Voici une ordonnance du Doc- 
teur Johnson. Combien de 
temps vous faut-il pour la 
preparer? 

A peu pres une demi-heure, 
monsieur. 

Tres bien; j’ai encore une 
autre commission a faire. 
J’entrerai en passant. 

*** 

Voici la medecine, monsieur. 
Vous trouverez les direc¬ 
tions sur l’etiquette. 

Combien est-ce? 

Voyons: un shelling et six 
pence pour la poudre, et 
deux shellings pour la bou- 
teille; cela fait trois shel¬ 
lings et six pence. 

Je n’ai pas de monnaie. 
Voici une livre sterling. 


REMARQUES 

1. Cette legon traite de la comparaison des adjectifs. Un 
grand nombre d’exemples vous sont donnas dans les 
“Phrases et Conversation”, et dans “l’Exercice Oral”. Pour 
bien comprendre ce sujet, il est d’abord important d’etudier 
attentivement les remarques suivantes: 

1. Comparaison des adjectifs, — La plupart des adjectifs 
qualificatifs ont une inflexion pour marquer le degre de qualite 
qu’ils represented. Les qualites par lesque-lles nous dis- 
tinguons une chose d’une autre sont generalement presentees 
a des degres diff^rents parmi les choses qui ont ces qualites. 
Ainsi, nous pouvons dire d’un objet qu’il est grand, ou petit, 
ou beau; d’un autre qu’il est plus grand, ou plus petit , ou 




ANGLAIS 


6 


§8 


plus beau que le premier; d’un autre qu’il est le plus grand , 
ou le plus petit, ou le plus beau parmi d’autres objets. 

Tous les adjectifs cependant ne sont pas susceptibles de 
marquer ainsi des degres differents: quelques-uns ne peuvent 
pas etre compares. Par exemple, les adjectifs qui s’appli- 
quent a des termes geometriques comme carre, rond, circu¬ 
late^ etc., sont incomparables. Si un objet est carre ou 
rond, ou circulaire, il ne peut pas l’etre plus ou moins. 
D’autres adjectifs dans le meme cas, sont ceux qui ddnotent 
une qualite qui ne peut etre ni augmentee, ni diminude, 
comm e,parfait, complet , absolu, infini, mort, endormi , etc. 

Les adjectifs qui peuvent etre compares ont trois degr6s 
de comparaison: le positif, le comparatif, le superlatif. 

2. Le Positif. — Nous connaissons les objets par le moyen 
de leurs qualites, ou par leurs relations avec d’autres objets. 
Ainsi, lorsque nous disons orange , ce mot rappelle a l’esprit 
certaines idees de forme , de couleur , de dimension , de gofit, 
etc. Nous connaissons l’objet par ses qualites sensibles. 

Le mot JionnHetS est le nom d’une qualitd rationnelle qui 
appartient a la conduite d’un homme que nous comparons a 
celle des autres hommes. Si en effet un homme agit habi- 
tuellement de telle maniere, dans des circonstances particu- 
li&res, sa conduite ddnote une qualite comme l’honnetetd, et 
nous parlons de lui comme d’un honnHe homme. 

C’est par ces qualitds sensibles ou rationnelles que nous 
pouvons reconnaitre les objets, et les distinguer les uns des 
autres. En d’autres termes c’est par leurs differences, ou 
leurs ressemblances, ou leur relations que nous les connaissons. 

Mais avant que nous puissions dire que quelque chose est 
grand, par exemple, nous devons connaitre la grandeur 
moyenne des objets qui appartiennent a cette classe. C’est 
1’experience qui nous l’indique en comparant plusieurs objets 
de la meme classe. Quand nous disons, une grande maison, 
un grand arbre, une grande ville, ces expressions supposent 
que nous avons vu et compare beaucoup de maisons, beau- 
coup d'arbres, beaucoup de villes, et que nous avons une 
idie gfnSrale, ou type se rapportant aux dimensions de ces 
differentes choses. Ce type differe souvent avec differentes 


QUINZIEME LEQON 


7 


personnes parce qu’il est acquis par l’experience, et par con¬ 
sequent variable. La plus grande experience forme le type 
moyen le plus parfait. 

Cette idee type de la qualite d’un objet est le positif de cette 
qualite, et comme il est represente par l’adjectif, lui-meme, 
sans aucune inflexion, on l’a souvent defini comme l’adjectif 
dans sa forme simple. 

3. Le Comparatif. — Dans le positif, la comparaison est 
seulement supposfe; dans le comparatif, la comparaison d’une 
chose avec une autre doit etre faite. Deux objets ou deux 
groupes d’objets seulement sont consideres, l’un ayant une 
certaine qualite, l’autre l’ayant au meme degrf, ou a un degrf 
supirieur, ou a un degre inferieur. Ainsi, une chose peut 
etre grande; une autre peut etre aussi grande, ou plus grande, 
ou moins grande. De la, en comparant deux objects, ou deux 
groupes d’objets, nous avons trois degres; egalite, superiorite, 
inferiority. 

4. Le Superlatif.-Qua.nd. on emploie le superlatif en 
anglais le plus petit nombre d’objets ou de groupes d’objets 
que l’on puisse considerer est trois. L’un de ces objets, 
compard avec au moins deux autres, possede le plus haut 
ou le plus bas degre de quelque qualitd, et pour l’exprimer, 
on emploie une certaine forme de l’adjectif appelee super¬ 
latif. Comme le comparatif, il faut qu’une comparaison soit 
exprimde. 

5. Formation du Comparatif de Superiority et du Superlatif. 
Les formations du comparatif de superiorite et du superlatif 
ayant de grandes ressemblances, sont dtudides ensemble ici. 

(a) Les adjectifs d’une syllable se comparent comme suit. 


Positif + 


er + than = comparatif : small, petit; smaller 
than, plus petit que; great, grand; greater than, plus 
grand que 

est = superlatif: small, petit; smallest, le plus petit; 
great, grand; greatest, le plus grand 


( b) Les adjectifs de plus d’une syllable forment gendrale- 
ment le comparatif de superiorite et le superlatif de la 
manidre suivante: 



ANGLAIS 


8 


§8 


more + positif + than = comparatif: more beautiful than; 

more instructive than 

least} + positif = superlatif: } beautiful; instructive 

(c) Regie Speciale. — 'Les adjectifs de deux syllabes qui se 
terminent en y, beaucoup en ow ou en e, prennent ordinaire- 
ment er et est pour former le comparatif de superiorite et le 
superlatif: 


easy, facile 
sorry, fachf 
narrow, etroit \ 
polite, poli 


+ 


_ f comparatif: easier, sorrier, nar- 
f rower, politer 

^ _ fsuperlatif: easiest, sorriest, nar- 

1 row est, politest 


Bien d’autres adjectifs de deux syllabes sont compares avec 
er et est. II est impossible de donner une regie generale 
a ce sujet. Tout ce qu’on peut dire, c’est qu’on ajoute, er et 
est lorsque cette addition n’est pas desagreable a l’oreille. 

( d ) Observations. — Quand les adjectifs se terminent par un 
e muet, on supprime cet e devant er ou est: nice, nicer, ?iicest. 

Si un adjectif se termine par y precede d’une consonne, on 
change y en i: easy, easier, easiest. 

Si l’adjectif d’une syllabe se termine par une consonne 
precedee d’une seule voyelle, on double cette consonne avant 
d’ajouter er et est: glad, gladder, gladdest. 

(e) Comparaison IrregulPere. — Les adjectifs suivants sont 
les plus importants de ceux qui se comparent irregulierement. 
La liste complete en sera donnee dans la grammaire: 


Positif 

Comparatif de Superiorite 

Superlatif 

bad, mauvda 

worse 

worst 

far, loin 

farther 

farthest 

little, peu 

less 

least 

many, much, bien, 

• 


beaucoup 

more 

most 

good, bon 

better 

best 


6. Formation du Comparatif d'Egalite. — Ce comparatif 
d’egalite se forme ainsi dans les phrases affirmatives: 

as + positif + as = comparatif, 
et dans les phrases negatives: 


8 


QUINZIEME LECON 


9 


so + x>ositif + as = comparatif. Ainsi: 

He is as strong as John, II est aussi fort qzie Jean. 

She is as young as your sister, II est aussi jeune que votre sceur. 

I am not so rich as you, Je ne suis pas aussi riche que vous. 

On emploie aussi quelquefois so .... as, dans une 
phrase interrogative pour donner plus de force a 1’adjectif: 

She cannot be so rich as you think, Elle ne pent pas etre aussi riche 
que vous croyez. 

Can he be so poor as that? Peut-il etre aussi pauvre que cela? 

7. Formation du Comparatif c! Inferiority. — Le comparatif 
d’inferiorite se forme ainsi: 

less + positif + than = comparatif: 

She is less beautiful than her sister, Elle est moins belle que sa sceur. 

Our last trip was less instructive than the one before, Notre dernier 
voyage a ete moins instructif que celui d'avant. 

8. Comparaison de Deux Objets. — Lorsqu’on compare deux 
objets ou deux groupes d’objets settlement, c’est le com¬ 
paratif qu’il faut toujours employer en anglais, alors qu’on 
emploie quelquefois le superlatif en frangais: 

Mary is the prettier of the two, Marie est la plus belle des deux. 

Mr. Clay is the richer of the two, M. Clay est le plus riche des deux. 

9. Pronoms Comme Membres d'Une Comparaison, —Si le 
second membre d’une comparaison est un pronom, c’est 
toujours le pronom sujet qu’on emploie en anglais, alors 
qu’on emploie le pronom objet en frangais: 

He is richer than I, It est plus riche que moi. 

I am younger than he, Je suis plus jeune que lui. 

10. Recaptildtion . — Les differentes manieres de com¬ 
parer les adjectifs reguliers en anglais sont donnees dans le 
tableau suivant: 


10 


ANGLAIS 



05 
S 3 

<0 I 

« + „ 

•H ^ *H ,- A -> 

^ -S 'P ^ 

05 ^ "§ 02 ^ 

£•§1 

-+- <3 T -o 



fa 

O 

a 

3 

OQ 



•H 

fa 





o 

-p 

•H 

0 

•M 

mm 

£ 


<0 

•« :r> 

>0 Co 

rH 

a3 

be 

O 

«H 

a 

H 



41 

Vj ^ ►•Q 

.*> c « 




* 

^ •$ * 


4) 

fa 

fa 

b 

l 

fa 

M 

fa 

M 

03 

fa 

«J 

fa 

<1 

PM 

§ 

fa 

< 

fa 

fa 

fa 

fa 

o 

O 

P 

Ph 

o 

CO 


o 


03 

'W 


O 

fa 


< 

e 

fa 

fa 

w 

Q 

«! 

Q 


fa 

8 

CO 


O 



u 


2. Deux autres verbes qui forment leur imparfait irr6gu- 
likrement sont donnes ici. Ce sont: to eat , manger, et 








9242 


§8 QUINZI^ME LEQON ii 

to drink , boire, dont les imparfaits sont respectivement I ate, 
et I drank. 

I had little appeftite, I ate only one tgg,J’avais peu d'appetit,je n'ai 
mange qu'un ceuf. 

He was very thirsty, he drank two glasses of water, It avait bien 
soif , il a bu deux verres d'eau. 

3. Le complement des superlatifs est souvent, comme 
en frangais, precedd de la preposition of, de: 

The rose is the most beautiful of flowers, La rose est la plus belle 
des fleurs. 

John is the richest of his family, Jean est le plus riche de sa famille. 

Cependant, lorsque le complement d’un superlatif est un 
nom de lieu, c’est la preposition in, dans, qui precede ce 
complement en anglais: 

He is the richest man in the city, C'est Vhomme le plus riche de 
la ville. 

She is the happiest woman in the world, C’est la femme la plus 
heureuse du monde. 

4. Le mot any , repond aussi aux mots frangais tout, 
quelconque, le premier .... venu, n'importe lequel, etc.: 

Any man can do that, Tout homme peut faire cela. 

I can read any English book, Je puis lire n'importe quel livre 
anglais. 

5. II n’y a pas de mot frangais qui rende exactement 
le mot block. Comme les rues et les avenues, dans les 
villes americaines sont generalement droites, et se coupent a 
angles droits, il en resulte que le terrain a batir d’une ville 
se forme de carrds ou de rectangles compris entre quatre rues. 
Ce sont ces carres ou ces rectangles qu’on appelle blocks. 

6. La monnaie anglaise n’est pas fondee sur le systeme 
decimal. L’unitd de monnaie est la livre sterling qui vaut 
20 shellings. Le shelling vaut 12 pence (au singulier penny). 
La valeur theorique du shelling est de 1 fr. 25, et celle de la 
livre sterling est done de 25 francs. Cette valeur varie 
cependant selon le cours (aujourd’hui, la livre sterling vaut 


12 


ANGLAIS 


reellement 25 frs. 20 centimes). Dans la conversation ordi¬ 
naire, on emploie aussi le mot crown, couronne, qui vaut 5 
shellings, et half-crown ou 2 shellings 2 , c’est-a-dire 2 shel¬ 
lings 6 pence. 

Pour additionner, on fait 3 colonnes- comme suit; on 
ajoute les pence, et en divisant par 12, on inscrit le reste 
sous cette colonne, tandis que le quotient est ajoute a la 
colonne suivante des shellings. On additionne ensuite cette 
colonne, et on 6crit le reste de la division par 20 sous Cette 
colonne, tandis que le quotient qui represente des livres 
sterlings est ajoute a la colonne de gauche, 

Aditionnez: £8 4s. 6d.; £20 8s. 7d.; /13 9s. 6d. 

£ s. d. 

8 4 6 

20 8 7 

13 9 6 

42 2 7 = £42 2s. 7d. 

Pour convertir la monnaie anglaise en monnaie frangaise il 
faut reduire la somme en shellings, (en multipliant les livres 
sterlings par 20 et en ajoutant le nombre des shellings) puis 
ajouter i de ce qu’on trouve. La somme sera le nombre de 
francs et centimes: 

Reduire £8. 5. 0 en monnaie frangaise. 

^8. 5 

(Multiplier par 20)20 
165 

Ajouter 1 41-1 

206 frs. 1 ou 206 frs. 25 

Au contraire, pour reduire une somme exprimee en francs 
et centimes, en monnaie anglaise, on diminue de i le nombre 
de francs, et le reste donne le nombre de shellings. 

Reduire 2785 frs. en monnaie anglaise: 

2785 frs. 

a retrancher i 557 

OOOO 

Reste 2228 shellings, ou = /'111. 8 

£\J 




§8 


QUINZIEME LEQON 


13 


EXERCICE ORAE 

Our house is newer than Mr. Newell’s. 

Notre maison est plus neuve que celle de M. Newell. 

The school is nearer to your house than to ours. 

This property is much better than that we saw last week. 
Your son is older than mine. 

Mary is prettier than her sister. 

Give him five dollars; you will not be poorer for that. 

You are much richer than our uncle. 

If you follow my directions you will be stronger soon. 

Of the two, Florence was the sorrier. 

This is too large for me; give me a smaller one. 

John is very bad, but Edward is worse. 

I like your coffee very much, but I find that mine is better. 
Your complexion is much clearer today than it was 
yesterday. 

It is much colder today than it was day before yesterday. 
Your room is darker than mine. 

Come earlier than you did yesterday. 

Our city is growing faster than yours. 

My table cost three dollars more than yours, but it is 
heavier. 

Of the two, John was the happier. 

The days are longer now than they were last month. 

Is not John here yet? —No; he will come later. 

Our house is larger and lighter than your parents’. 

Florence is more charming than her sister. 

Florence est plus charmante que sa sceur. 

Do as he told you; it is more important than you think. 

Is there anything more splendid than that? 

He was more thirsty than hungry. 

He worked more than you did, and he is more tired than 
hungry. 

Your house is more valuable than ours. 

He is more anxious than you to go there. 


14 


ANGLAIS 


§8 


This monument is more beautiful than that one. 

These pills are more bitter than the ones you gave me 
before. 

Your children are more diligent than mine. 

It is more expensive to live in the city than in the country. 
In that matter, he was more fortunate than you. 

My book is more interesting than John’s. 

Of tliese houses, John’s is the smallest. 

De toutes ces mais&ns, celle de Jean est la plus petite. 

Which is the nearest drug store? —Newell’s is the nearest. 
They have three children; John is the oldest. 

Of their children, Florence is certainly the prettiest. 

They had three children; John and Edward are the richest, 
and George the poorest. 

This is certainly the warmest day of the summer. 

He gave me the best wine he had. 

John is the brightest boy in his school. 

Yesterday was the coldest day of the winter. 

He gave us the darkest room in his house. 

He bought the heaviest table the merchant showed him. 
Mr. Perkins was the happiest man in the city today. 

Now we are having the longest days of the year. 

Try to be here by four o’clock at the latest. 

He gave us the largest room in the house. 

Mr. Clay lias the most beautiful house in the 
city. 

M. Clay a la plus belle maison de la ville. 

This is the most important thing in the affair. 

He gave me the most interesting book he had. 

She is the most charming girl in the family. 

He said this was the most valuable property that he had 
to sell. 

John is bad, but Edward is worse; he is the 
worst pupil in the school. 

Jean est mauvais , mats Edouard est plus mauvais; c’est le 
plus mauvais Heve de V Hole. 


QUINZIEME LEQON 


15 


Our house is far from the school, yours is farther, but my 
cousin’s is the farthest. 

I have little money, you have less, and John has the least. 
I have many books, John has more, but you have the most. 
We have a good house, Edward has a better one, but your 
uncle has the best of all. 

I am as anxious as lie to go to tlie country 

this summer. 

Je suis aussi impatient que lui d' alter a la campagne cet ete. 

He is as old as your uncle. 

We are as near to the school as you are. 

Our city is growing as fast as is yours. 

I will come as early as I can. 

It is just as cold today as it was yesterday. 

Our property is as valuable as his. 

Their house is as pretty as his. 

Is your uncle as rich as Mr. Clay? —O, he is richer. 

It is not so expensive to live in the country 
as it is to live in the ci^y. 

It ne fait pas si cher vivre a la campagne qu'a la ville. 

My children are not so diligent as yours. 

His house is not so new as ours. 

Florence is not so pretty as her sister. 

These gentlemen are not so rich as Mr. Perkins. 

Our property is not so beautiful as our neighbor’s. 

This room is not so dark as the one you showed me before. 
It is -not so Cold today as yesterday. 

He does not come so early as you do. 

Our city is not growing so fast as theirs. 

He is not so anxious to go to Paris as you are. 

It is less expensive to live in the country 
than in the city. 

II fait moins cher vivre cl la campagne qu’d la ville. 

Your property is less valuable than your uncle’s. 

These pills are less bitter than the ones I had before. 


16 ANGLAIS §8 

This book is less interesting than the one I read last week. 
My children are less diligent than yours. 

I was less fortunate than you. 

My last trip was less instructive than the one before. 
Florence is less beautiful than her sister. 

Mx*. Clay is tlie richer of the two. 

M. Clay est le plus riche des deux. 

Florence is the prettier of the two. 

My room is the smaller and darker of the two. 

My little friend is the happier of the two. 

Of these two tables, this one is the heavier. 

Edward is the stronger of the two. 

I am younger than he. 

Je suis plus jeune que lui. 

He is richer than I. 

She is more charming than you. 

You are worse than she. 

They are stronger than we. 

What did you eat yesterday ? — I had no appe¬ 
tite; I ate bread and butter only. 

Qu’avez-vous mangS hier?—Je n'avais pas d'appetit; je 
n'ai mange que du pain et du beurre. 

He was so hungry that he ate all the chicken. 

I ate two eggs at dinner today. 

We were hungry; we had a good appetite. 

They were hungry. 

He drank a bottle of wine at dinner yester¬ 
day. 

II a bu une bouteille decvin a diner hier. 

She drank a cup of tea at four o’clock. 

I was so thirsty that I drank three glasses of water. 

We called on him, and drank wine with him. 

Do not give him anything to drink; he drank too much 
yesterday. 


§8 


QUINZIEME LECON 


17 


lie studied English last year, now he can 
read any English book. 

II a Hit die V anglais Vannee dernibre, et il pent lire n'itn- 
porte quel livre anglais maintenant. 

You can buy French books in any store in the city. 

He can buy these pills in any drug store in town. 

Any physician will give you a prescription for your cold. 
Come any day; I am always at home. 

They are selling any article in this window for ten cents. 
Any clerk will tell you where Mr. Clay’s office is. 

Any guide will tell you all about this monument. 

He is one of the most conscientious x>atients 
that I have. 

II est le plus consciencieux de ines malades. 

You are one of the most conscientious patients that he has. 
I am one of the most conscientious patients that you have. 
She is one of the most conscientious patients that we have. 
They are the most conscientious patients that they have. 
We are the most conscientious patients that the doctor has. 

Newell’s pharmacy is the largest in the city. 

La pharmacie Newell est la plus grande de la ville. 

John is the most intelligent pupil in the school. 

Your house is the prettiest in that street. 

My room is the darkest in the house. 

This hotel is the most expensive in town. 

This table is the prettiest and most expensive in the store. 
This is the most interesting book in my library. 

When Mary goes up, tell her to bring me the 
ledger; it is on the safe in my bedroom. 

Quand Marie moil ter a, dites-lui de in' apporter le Grand- 
Livre; il est sur le coffre-fort dans ma chambre a 
coucher. 

When you go up, bring me my hat, please; it is on my bed. 
When these gentlemen come down, show them into the 
library; I wish to speak to them. 


18 


ANGLAIS 


§8 


When he is tired, he usually gets up very late. 

When my wife comes back, ask her where the key of the 
pantry is. 

Wliy did slie remain at home?-Because slie 
had to learn her English lesson. 

Pourquoi est-elle restke a la maisonf—Elle y est restee 
parce qu'elle avait a apprendre sa leqon d'anglais. 

Why did you remain in Paris for the winter? —I remained 
there because I had to transact some important business. 

Why did they remain at your house last night? —Because 
the weather was very bad. 

Why did they remain in Rome? —Because they like the city 
very much. 

Why did he not go to church last Sunday? —He did not go 
because he was not at all well. 

Which of these houses do you occupy?—I 
occupy that small one on the corner. 

Laquelle de ces maisons occupez-vous? — J'occupe cette 
petite maison sur le coin. 

In which city does he prefer to live? —He prefers to live in 
Paris in the winter. 

Which gentleman do they wish to see, the old gentleman 
or his son? —They wish to see the young Mr. Perkins. 

Which of the books does she wish to read?—She wishes to 
read a French book. 

Whose children are they? —They are Mr. Harrison’s. 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


Will you meet me at the pier, Mr. 
Josselyn? 

No; I shall not be there in time, 
but I will see you on the ship. 
Will you stay at the hotel this 
evening? 

Yes; I suppose I shall see you 
there? 


Viendrez-vous jusqu’a l’embar- 
cadere, M. Josselyn? 

Non; je ne puis arriver a temps, 
mais je vous verrai sur le 
bateau. Resterez-vous a l’hotel 
ce soir? 

Oui; je suppose que je vous y 
verrai? 




§8 


QUINZIEME LEQON 


19 


REA^UE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


I think not; this is my last even¬ 
ing at home, and I wish to be 
with my father and mother. 

-x- 

* * 

Is it not a beautiful morning? 
So you are going to Chicago? 
Your trip is merely a business 
one, I suppose? 

Yes; I go to Chicago every year 
to place my orders for spring. 

The Chicago packing houses 
must be immense. You have 
seen them, of course? I hope 
to visit them some day. 

Yes, indeed; there is nothing like 
them in the Old World. You 
shall inspect them with me 
some day. When are you go¬ 
ing to be in Chicago? 

I am going to New York and 
Denver first. I shall remain in 
Denver about two months, but 
shall stop only a few days in 
New York. So I expect to be 
in Chicago about the first of 
October. 

You have some property in Colo¬ 
rado, have you not? 

Yes; I have a good deal of mining 
property there. But what is 
that? 

The ship is going to sail. I must 
leave you. Well, goodby. 

Goodby. I will write to you when 
I am in Chicago. 

Very well. 

* 

* * 

How are you, Mr. Josselyn? 
Where do you come from? 

I went to the pier with a friend 
of mine who is going to the 


Je ne pense pas. C’est ma 
derniere soiree a la maison, et 
je veux la passer avec mon pere 
et ma mere. 

* 

* * 

Ne fait-il pas beau temps ce 
matin? Ainsi, vous allez a Chi¬ 
cago? Votre voyage est seule- 
ment un voyage d’affaires, je 
suppose? 

Oui; je vais a Chicago tous les 
ans pour placer mes ordres 
pour le printemps. 

Les “packing houses” de Chicago 
doivent etre immenses. Vous 
les avez vus, sans doute? J’es- 
pere les visiter un jour. 

Oui, certainement; il n’y a rien qui 
leur ressemble dans le Vieux 
Monde. Vous les visiterez un 
jour avec moi. Quand serez- 
vous a Chicago? 

Je vais d’abord a New-York et a 
Denver. Je resterai a peu pres 
deux mois a Denver, mais je ne 
m’arreterai que quelques jours 
a New-York. De sorte que 
j’espere etre a Chicago vers le 
premier octobre. 

Vous avez des proprietes au Colo¬ 
rado, n’est-ce pas? 

Oui; j’y ai beaucoup de propri6tes 
minieres. Mais qu’est-ce que 
cela? 

Le bateau va partir. II faut que 
je vous quitte. Alors, au revoir. 

Au revoir. Je vous ecrirai quand 
je serai a Chicago. 

Tres bien. 

* 

* * 

Comment allez-vous, M. Josselyn? 
D’ou venez-vous? 

Je suis alle a l’embarcadere, avec 
un de mes amis qui va aux 




20 


ANGLAIS 


§8 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


United States. My office is just 
here. Come in, Mr. Cleveland. 

Yes; I have only a few moments 
before I leave, for I really must 
take that six o’clock train. 

A few days ago you told me that 
you wished to visit our plant. 
Have you time for such a visit 
today? 

O, no, Mr. Josselyn. I have but 
twenty minutes. What a charm¬ 
ing'office you have! You must 
like these rooms. 

Yes; they are not much like the old 
ones. Here we are in the main 
street, which of course is very 
pleasant. Well, Mr. Cleveland, 
when are you coming to spend 
Sunday with us? You know 
you promised us a visit more 
than a year ago. Come today 
and stay until Monday, do. 


Really, I cannot today. But I 
must come to see you; look for 
me next week. This evening I 
must take the six o’clock train, 
for I cannot disappoint Mrs. 
Cleveland. We have some friends 
coming to dinner, so I must be 
at home. 


Well then, we will expect you next 
week. Now I do not wish to 
hurry you, but if you must go, 
it is time. 

Yes; thank you; good by. 


Etats-Unis. Mon bureau est 
ici. Entrez, M. Cleveland. 

Oui; jen’ai que quelques moments 
avant de partir, car il faut reel- 
lement que je prenne le train 
de six heures. 

Vous m’avez dit, il y a quelques 
jours, que vous desiriez visiter 
notre manufacture. Avez-vous 
le temps de faire cette visite 
aujourd’hui? 

Oh! non, M. Josselyn. Je n’ai 
que vingt minutes. Quel char- 
mant bureau vous avez! Vous 
aimez ces chambres. 

Oui; elles ne ressemblent pas 
beaucoup aux anciennes. Nous 
sommes ici sur la rue principale, 
ce qui est naturellement tres 
agreable. Eh bien, M. Cleve¬ 
land, quand viendrez-vous pas¬ 
ser le dimanche avec nous? 
Vous savez que vous nous avez 
promis une visite il y a plus 
d’un an. Venez aujourd’hui, 
et restez jusque lundi, voulez- 
vous? 

Reellement, je ne peux pas au¬ 
jourd’hui. Mais il faut que je 
vienne vous voir; attendez-moi 
la semaine prochaine. Ce soir, 
il faut que je prenne le train de 
six heures, car je ne peux pas 
desappointer Mme. Cleveland. 
Nous avons des amis a diner, 
par consequent il faut que je 
sois a la maison. 

Eh bien, alors, nous vous atten- 
drons la semaine prochaine. 
Maintenant, je ne veux pas 
vous chasser, mais s’il faut que 
vous partiez, il est temps. 

Oui; merci; au revoir. 




§8 


QUINZIEME LEgON 


21 


PHRASES 

Will you have the kindness? 

I Will do my best. 

How much is it a pound? 

It is three shillings a pound. 

The last order was small, the next 
will be large. 

Will he have any next week? 

Yes; I think he will have some. 

I came from London. 

What has the porter to do? 

Here is an article for which there 
is much demand. 

There is no profit on this article. 

I will pay you the next time you 
come. 

A two month’s bill. 

He is a clerk in a banking house. 

We shall send them by train on 
Saturday. 

Here is the very thing for you. 

I will pay you in English money. 

They do not say when we must 
send ,them. 

Where shall I meet you? 

We cannot do any business with 
them. 

We are happy to say that the 
goods arrived in time. 

You will see him when you go to 
Paris. 

You may send us some. 

I went to his office yesterday by 
appointment, but did not find 
him. 

I did not know him at all. 

You must not send the goods; 
they will not pay you for them. 

The goods are here, and shall be 
sent at once. 


USUELLES 

Aurez-vous cette bonte? 

Je ferai tout mon possible. 

Quel est le prix de la livre? 

C’est trois shellings la livre. 

La commande derniere etait pe¬ 
tite, la prochaine sera grosse. 

En aura-t-il la semaine prochaine? 

Oui; je crois qu’il en aura. 

Je viens de Londres. 

Le gargon, qu’a-t-il a faire? 

Voici un article fort demande. 

Nous n’avons aucun profit sur 
cet article. 

Je vous paierai la prochaine fois 
que vous viendrez. 

Une traite a 60 jours de date. 

II est employe dans une maison 
de banque. 

Nous les enverrons samedi par 
chemin de fer. 

Voila juste ce qui vous convient. 

Je vous donnerai de la monnaie 
anglaise. 

Ils ne disent pas quand il faudra 
les envoyer. 

Ou vous trouverai-je? 

Nous ne pouvons pas faire d’af¬ 
faires avec eux. 

Nous sommes heureux de dire que 
les marchandises sont arrivees 
a temps. 

Vous le verrez quand vous irez a 
Paris. 

Vous pouvez nous en envoyer. 

Je suis alle a son bureau hier 
ayant rendez-vous avec lui, mais 
je ne l’ai pas trouve. 

Je ne le connaissais pas du tout. 

Ne leur envoyez pas ces marchan¬ 
dises; ils ne vous les paieront pas. 

Les marchandises sont ici, et 
seront envoyees immediatement. 




22 


ANGLAIS 


8 


PHRASES USUEEEES — (Continuees) 


We can promise them in a week 
or two. 

Do you think they will send 
them ? 

The wool you sent last week ar¬ 
rived this morning. 

Do you like these any better? 

I can stay no longer. 

I have an appointment for four 
o’clock. 

Now get my bill receipted, please. 

We have some in stock, but not 
many. 

Here are some very fine ones of 
wool. 

It must be done. 

We must have some for the be¬ 
ginning of the week. 

Do you think you can send them 
in time? 

Can you wait a little longer for 
the goods? 

I must have some by Saturday. 

You will send a check on London, 
will you not? 

We shall see you again in a few 
weeks, shall we not? 

They paid last month's account, 
did they not? 

If you go to our house at six 
o’clock this evening, you will 
see the gentleman of whom we 
spoke the last time that you 
were in Paris. 

She has no money now, but her 
parents are very rich. 

Please do not speak so fast,—or 
speak English, I know very lit¬ 
tle French. 

Take this one, I think you will 
like it. 


Nous pouvons les promettre dans 
une semaine ou deux. 

Pensez-vous qu’ils les envoient? 

La laine que vous avez envoyee la 
semaine derniere est arrivee ce 
matin. 

Aimez-vous mieux celles-ci? 

Je lie peux plus rester. 

J’ai un rendez-vous pour quatre 
heures. 

Maintenant, veuillez m’apporter 
ma facture acquittee. 

Nous en avons en magasin, mais 
pas beaucoup. 

En voici de tres beaux en laine. 

II faut absolument le faire. 

II nous en faut pour le commence¬ 
ment de la semaine. 

Pensez-vous pouvoir les envoyer a 
temps? 

Pouvez-vous attendre vos mar- 
chandises un peu plus long- 
temps? 

II m’en faut samedi. 

Vous enverrez un cheque sur 
Londres, n’est-ce pas? 

Nous vous reverrons dans quel- 
ques jours, n’est-ce pas? 

Ils ont paye le compte du mois 
dernier, n’est-ce pas? 

Si vous allez chez nous a six 
heures ce soir, vous verrez le 
monsieur de qui nous avons 
parle la derniere fois que vous 
etiez a Paris. 

Elle n’a pas d’argent maintenant, 
mais ses parents sont tres riches. 

Ne parlez pas si vite, je vous prie, 
ou parlez anglais, je sais tres 
peu de francais. 

Prenez celui-ci, je crois que vous 
l’aimerez. 





§8 


QUINZIEME LEQON 


23 


PHRASES USUELRES—(Confirmees) 


No; I prefer that one, the color is 
brighter. 

This is not the one that we 
ordered. 

I will pay the person whom you 
send. 

You will have every reason to be 
satisfied. 

Which will you take? 

The first time I saw him, I was in 
France; he was on his way to 
America. 

I cannot wait after four o’clock, 
because my train leaves at ten 
minutes past four. 

I will give you the prettiest of 
them all. 

We like small ones; the smaller 
they are, the better they sell. 


Non; je prefere celui-la, la cou- 
leur est plus brillante. 

Ce n’est pas celui que nous avons 
commande. 

Je paierai la personne que vous 
enverrez. 

Vous aurez tout lieu d’etre con¬ 
tent. 

Lequel prendrez-vous? 

La premiere fois que je l’ai vu, 
j’etais en France; il etait en 
route pour l’Amerique. 

Je ne peux pas attendre apres 
quatre heures, parce que mon 
train part a quatre heures dix. 

Je vous donnerai le plus joli de 
tous. 

Nous aimons les petits; plus ils 
sont petits, et mieux nous les 
vendons. 


EXERCICE PIIONOGRAPHIQUE 

Aussitot que vous aurez requ votre copie de la quator- 
zieme lecon corrigee par nous, enregistrez-la sur un cylindre 
vierge, et envoyez-le-nous, en suivant les directions donnees 
precedemment. 




24 


ANGLAIS 


§8 


SEIZIEME LECON 


CYLINDRE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 


VOCABULAIRE 


I. C. S. 

English Record No. 16 

the accident, Vaccident 
actual, actuel 
the agent, Vagent 
anything, quelque chose 
the avenue, Vavenue 
to belong, appartenir 
the birthday, Vanniversaire 
de naissance 

to break, casser, briser 
the cab, le fiacre 
to care, se soucier 
the chain, la chahie 
to charge, faire payer 
the coachman, le cocker 
the cost, le prix 
darling, cheri, cherie 
to drive, conduire 
to drop, laisser tomber 
ever, jamais 
expensive, cher 
fortunately, heureusement 
free, lib re 

the glasses, le lorgnon, les 
lunettes 

to handle, toucher, manier 

the hansom, le cab 


i. c. s. 

Cylindre d'Anglais No. 16 

heavy, lourd 
to include, renfermer 
to learn, apprendre 
the locket, le medaillon 
to lose, perdre 
never, ne ... . jamais 
perfectly, parfaitement 
perhaps, peut-etre 
the piece, le morceau 
the price, le prix 
the ring, la bague 
to satisfy, sat is faire 
the shame, la honte 
to show, montrer 
somewhere, quelque part 
the statement, le compte, 
V expose 

the stone, la pierre 

the thread, le fid 

to touch, toucher 

the trolley, le tramway 

the turquoise, la turquoise 

to wander, errer 

whether, si 

to be worth, valoir 





§8 


SEIZIEME LEQON 


25 


PHRASES ET 

O, what have you done, 1 
Alice? 

O, mamma, I had that beauti¬ 
ful vase in my hands, but 
it dropped on the floor, and 
it has broken into a hun¬ 
dred pieces. 

What a shame! And you 
broke one last Monday, too! 
What will Mr. Coudert say? 
It must be very expensive. 
When will you learn not to 
handle things, Alice, that 
do not belong to you? 

I am very sorry, mamma; I 
will never 2 touch anything 3 
again. Shall you pay for it? 

Of course, Alice. Here comes 
the clerk now. 4 My little 
girl has broken one of your 
vases. I regret it very 
much, but if you will tell 
me what its price was, I 
will pay for 6 it. 

Fortunately, this vase was 
not worth very much, and 
we shall charge you only 
the actual cost price to us; 
it was an accident. I will 
include it in your bill, if 
you like. 

But I have never received a 
bill from you. I wish you 
to send me a statement of 
my account every month. 


Oh! qu’as-tu fait, Alice? 

Oh! maman, j’avais ce beau 
vase dans mes mains, mais 
je l’ai laisse tomber sur le 
plancher, et il s’est brise 
en mille (cent) morceaux. 

Quelle 6tourdie! Et tuen as 
deja cassd un lundi dernier! 
Que dira M. Coudert? Ce 
vase doit etre tres cher. 
Quand apprendras-tu a ne 
pas toucher les choses qui 
ne t’appartiennent pas, 
Alice? 

J’en suis bien fach^e, maman; 
je ne toucherai jamais plus 
rien. Faut-ilquetulepaies? 

Naturellement, Alice. Voici 
le commis maintenant. Ma 
petite fille a casse un de 
vos vases. Je le regrette 
beaucoup, et si vous me 
dites son prix, je le paierai. 

Heureusement, ce vase n’a- 
vait pas une grande valeur; 
nous vous le compterons 
au prix courant parce que 
c’est un accident. Je le 
mettrai sur votre facture si 
vous voulez. 

Mais je n’ai pas jamais recu 
de facture de vous. Je 
desire que vous m’envoyiez 
mon compte tous les mois. 



26 


ANGLAIS 


§8 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION— (Continuees) 


We have so many things 
to think of! Have those 
rings come that you sent 
for last month? 

No; they have not. I am 
looking for them every 
day. Have J ever shown 
you these turquoises? 

Yes, I have seen them. 
Your agent showed them 
to me last week. I do not 
like them very well. They 
are too dark —much darker 
than I care for. But have 
you not heard from New 
York about that locket? I 
must have it tomorrow. 


I do not know whether 8 it 
arrived this morning or not. 
I will see. Yes; here it is. 
We have had a great deal 
of trouble with this, but I 
think it will satisfy you 
now. 

How perfectly beautiful! 

Have you bought it, mamma? 

Yes, dear; and you shall have 
it to send to Helen. 

O, mamma; it is Helen’s 
birthday Sunday! How 
happy she will be! 

Yes. Can you show me a 
fine gold chain not too 


Nous avons tant de choses 
a penser! Ces bagues que 
vous avez commandees le 
mois dernier sont-elles 
arriv^es? 

Non; pas encore. Je les at¬ 
tends tous les jours. Est- 
ce que je vous ai jamais 
montre ces turquoises? 

Oui; je les ai vues. Votre 
agent me les a montr6es 
la semaine derniere. Je 
ne les aime pas beaucoup. 
Elle sont trop foncees, je 
ne me soucie pas de pier- 
res aussi foncees. Mais 
n’avez-vous pas requ de 
nouvelles de New-York au 
sujet du medaillon? II me 
le faut demain. 

Je ne sais pas s’il est arrive 
ce matin ou non. Je vais 
voir. Oui; le voici. Nous 
avons eu beaucoup de 
peine a ce sujet, mais je 
crois qu’il vous satisfera. 

Oh! qu’il est joli! 

L’as-tu achete, maman? 

Oui, cherie; et tu l’auras 
pour l’envoyer a H61ene. 

Oh! maman; c’est dimanche 
l’anniversaire de la nais- 
sance d’Helene! Qu’elle 
sera heureuse! 

Oui. Pouvez-vous me mon- 
trer une chaine d’or, pas 



§8 


SEIZIEME LEQON 


27 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Conthmees) 


heavy for these glasses? 
I have lost mine some¬ 
where. 

Certainly, madam. How do 
you like this one? This is 
a little heavier. Perhaps 
this one will please you 
better. 

No; this one seems to be 
just what I want. Now, 
let us go, darling. Papa 
will think we have wan¬ 
dered out of town. 

Mamma, have you not for¬ 
gotten the thread? You 
told me to remind you of it. 

O, no; I got 7 some yesterday. 
Now as we are late, let us 
take a trolley. 

O, no, mamma; can we not 
take a cab? There is a 
hansom on the corner. 

Coachman, are you free? 

Yes, madam. 

Come, Alice; get in. 8 Drive 
us to number 193 Columbus 
Avenue. 


trop lourde pour ces lor- 
gnons? J’ai egare la mien- 
ne quelque part. 

Certainement, mad a me. 
Comment trouvez-v o u s 
celle-ci? Celle-la est un 
peu plus lourde. Peut-etre 
celle-ci vous plaira mieux. 

Non; celle-ci semble me con- 
venir exactement. Main- 
tenant, allons-nous-en 
cherie. Papa pensera que 
nous sommes sorties de la 
ville. 

Maman, n’as-tu pas oubli6 le 
fil? Tu m’as dit de t’y 
faire penser. 

Oh! non; j’en ai achet6 hier. 
Maintenant, comme nous 
sommes en retard, prenons 
le tramway. 

Oh! non, maman; ne pou- 
vons-nous prendre un 
fiacre? Voila un cab au 
coin. 

Cochef, etes-vous libre? 

Oui, madame. 

Viens, Alice, monte. Con- 
duisez-nous au numero 193 
de P Avenue Colomb. 


REMARQUES 

1. Cette legon introduit un nouveau temps du verbe en 
anglais qui correspond par la forme a notre passe indefini. 
On l’appelle le parfait indPfini. Ce temps est employe pour 
exprimer le r6sultat present d’une action pass£e, c’est-a-dire 
complete au moment oh l’on parle. 




28 


ANGLAIS 


8 


Nous avons a considerer les points suivants: 

1. Formation du Par fait Indefini. — Ce temps est forme du 
present du verbe to have et du participe passe du verbe que 
Lon conjugue. Dans les verbes reguliers le participe passe 
est toujours semblable a l’imparfait du verbe. Le verbe to 
live , par exemple, peut etre etudie dans les quatre formes 
du Parfait Indefini dans le modele suivant. 

to live, demeurer 
Parfait Indkfini 


I have lived. 
He 1 

She has lived, 

It J 


Affirmatif 

J'ai demeure 


II 

Elle 


a demeure 


We ] 
You I 

They I 


have lived, 


Nous avons demeure 


Its 1 
Elies) 


ont 'demeure 


Negatif 


I have not lived, 


He ] 

She | lias not lived, 

It J 


Je n'ai pas demeure 


It 

Elle 


n’a pas demeure 


We 

You 

They 


have not lived, 


Nous n'avons pas demeure 
Vous n'avez pas demeure 
Ils I , 

Eiies | 11 on * P as demeure 


Interrogatif- Affirmatif 


Have I lived? 


the 

Has < she 

lit 


lived? 


Ai-je demeure? 



demeure? 


Have 


we 


Avons-nous ■ 

you 

lived? 

Avez-vous 

■ fils 

Ont- < 

Velles 

they 



demeure? 





8 


SEIZIEME LECON 


29 


Interrogatif-Negatit 


Have I not lived? 
[he 1 

Has slie >not lived? 

[it J 

we 
you 

they 


Have 


N’ ai-je pas demeuref 
it 

elle I 


N'a-t- 


pas demeuref 


not lived? 


N’avons-nous pas demeuref 
N’avez-vous pas demeuref 

pas demeuref 


f ils I 
N'ont-l } 
yelles \ 


2. Verbes Irreguliers—X5n certain nombre de verbes 
anglais torment leur participe passe irregulierement. La 
liste complete vous sera donnee dans la grammaire. Nous 
en introduirons aussi tin certain nombre dans chaque legon, 
choisis parmi les plus importants. 

L’irregularite dans la formation des temps en anglais 
n’existe qu’a l’imparfait et au participe passe. De la, si 
nous connaissons l’infinitif, l’imparfait et le participe passe 
d’un verbe en anglais, nous pouvons le conjuguer dans tous 
ses temps. A cause de l’importance de ces trois formes, on 
les appelle les parties principales du verbe. 

Dans les verbes reguliers, ces trois parties sont faciles a 
trouver. II suffit d’ajouter d ou ed a l’infinitif pour avoir les 


deux autres. 

Infinitif 

Imparfait 

Participe: Passb 

to live, demeurer 

lived 

lived 

to finish, finir 

finished 

finished 

Les parties principales des verbes 

irreguliers doivent etre 

apprises par coeur. 

Les suivantes 

sont celles de verbes 

irreguliers contenus 

dans cette legon ou dans les legons 

precedentes: 

# 


Infinitif 

Imparfait 

Participe Passe 

to begin, commencer 

I began 

begun 

to find, trouver 

I found 

found 

to tell, dire 

I told 

told 

to lose, perdre 

I lost 

lost 

to go, alter 

I went 

gone 

to hear, entendre 

I heard 

heard 

to give, dormer 

I gave 

given 

to write, ecrire 

I wrote 

written 




30 


ANGLAIS 


8 


Infinitif 

Imparfait 

Participe Passe 

to send, envoyer 

I sent 

sent 

to say, dire 

I said 

said 

to buy, acheter 

I bought 

bought 

to think, penser 

I thought 

thought 

to forget, oublier 

I forgot 

forgotten 

to speak, parler 

I spoke 

spoken 

to know, savoir 

I knew 

known 

to read, lire 

I read 

read 

to come, venir 

I came 

come 

to sell, vendre 

I sold 

sold 

to die, mourir 

I died 

died 

to eat, manger 

I ate 

eaten 

to get, avoir 

I got 

got 

to drink, bo ire 

I drank 

drunk 

to do, faire 

I did 

done 

to break, casser 

I broke 

broken 

to pay, payer 

I paid 

paid 

to show, montrer 

I showed 

shown 

to see, voir 

I saw 

seen 

Son Emploi. — 

Le parfait indefini a, 

comme nous l’avons 


dit, les memes formes que notre passe indSfini , puisqu’il est 
forme du verbe to have et du participe passe du verbe que 
l’on conjugue. Mais ces deux temps different essentielle- 
ment dans leur emploi. Notre passe indefini peut en effet 
s’employer pour exprimer une action passee dans une periode 
completement passee, comme: J'ai vu votre ami hier; ou pour 
exprimer une action qui a eu lieu dans une periode qui n’est 
pas entierement ecoulee, -comme dans la phrase: Je Vai vu 
aujourd'hui. C’est ici que la difference existe entre les deux 
temps, en ce que le parfait indefini anglais fait toujours allu¬ 
sion au temps present; il denote que Faction, recente ou non, 
a eu lieu dans le siecle, l’annee, le mois, la semaine ou le 
jour present, et qu’une partie de ce siecle, de cette annee, de 
ce mois, de cette semaine ou de ce jour n’est pas ecoulee. 

I have seen him today, Jel'aivu aujourd'hui. 

He has played with us this week, II a joue avec nous cette semaine. 

Quand une periode precise d’un temps passe est exprimee, 
c’est l’imparfait anglais qu’il faut employer. Ainsi il serait 
incorrect de dire, I have seen him yesterday , car Faction a ici 


8 


SEIZIEME LEgON 


31 


eu lieu dans un temps entierement ecoule. C’est I saw him 
yesterday qu’il faut dire. 

Le parfait indefini anglais s’emploie comme notre passe 
indefini peut etre employe lorsqu’on ne fait aucune allusion 
a une portion definie d’un temps passe, et que l’on veut 
exprimer ce qui continue encore dans ses effets: 

He has read much, II a beaucoup lu. 

She has been here, Elle a He ici. 

En resume, on peut dire que le passe indefini franqais et le 
parfait indefini anglais sont equivalents sous tous les rap¬ 
ports, excepte que le dernier ne peut etre employe que 
lorsqu’une periode precise d’un temps passe est exprimee, 
tandis qu’on peut se servir du premier. 

4. Distinctions Entre VImparfait et le Parfait Indefini. 
Considerons les phrases suivantes; elles sont toutes au Par¬ 
fait indefini. Les verbes qu’elles contiennent marquent done 
une action complete au moment ou l’on parle, mais qui se 
continue dans le present, au moins par ses consequences, ou 
qui appartient a une periode de temps qui n’est pas com¬ 
pletement ecoulee: 

He has lost his book, It a perdu son livre. 

(II n’en a plus maintenant. L’action d'avoir perdu le livre se continue done dans 
le present par ses consequences.) 

They have lived here two years, Its restent ici depuis deux ans. 

(Ils demeurent encore ici, apres y etre restes deux ans; consequence continuee 
dans le present.) 

He has seen him today, It l'a vu aujourd'hui. 

(La periode de temps n’est pas completement ecoulee.) 

Si nous mettons ces memes phrases a l’imparfait, toute 
relation au temps present cesse, et l’action a eu lieu dans un 
temps entierement ecoule: 

He lost his book, It perdit son livre. 

(II peut l’avoir retrouve depuis, done les consequences ne se prolongent pas dans 
le present.) 

They lived here two years, Ils ont demeure deux ans ici. 

(Ils n’y demeurent plus aujourd’hui.) 

He saw him yesterday, It l'a vu hier. 

(Temps completement ecoule.) 


32 


ANGLAIS 


8 


5. N’est-ce Pas au Parfait Defini. — Lorsque le verbe de la 
proposition est au parfait defini, 7i'est-ce pas se traduit par 
verbe to have pronom repete -f- not, si la phrase est affirma¬ 
tive, et par verbe to have + pronom repite si la phrase est 
negative, comme on peut le voir dans les exemples suivants: 

He has bought that house, has he not? It a achete cette maison, 
n’est-ce pas? 

She has not broken that vase, has she? Elle n'a pas casse ce vase, 
n’est-ce pas? 

You have not sold your house, have you? Vous n'avez pas vendu 
votre maison, n’est-ce pas? 

6. La Reponse au Parfait Defini. —Si le verbe de la ques¬ 
tion est au Parfait Defini, il n’est pas necessaire de repeter le 
participe passe dans la reponse, et celle-ci est simplement 
formee du pronom et du verbe to have dans les phrases 
affirmatives; du pronom, du verbe to have et de la negation 
not dans les phrases negatives: 

Have you sold your house? —Yes; I have, Avez-vous vendu votre 
maison?— Oui; je I’ai vendue. 

Have they written to you? —No; they have not, Vous ont-ils Scrit?— 
Non; its ne m’ont pas ecrit. 

2. Notre expression ne . . . jamais se traduit en anglais 
par never, et jamais sans ne par ever. 

Have you ever seen Paris? Avez-vous jamais vu Paris? 

No; .1 have never seen it, Non; je ne I’ai jamais vu. 

Dans le cas d’une phrase elliptique, lorsque nous emplo- 
yons jamais sans 7ie, on traduit jamais aussi par never , mais 
dans ce cas la negation est reellement sous-entendue: 

Does he drink wine? —Never, Boit-il du vin?—Jamais. 

Does she speak French with you? —Never, Parle-t-elle franfais avec 
vous ?—Jamais. 

3. Rien se rend en englais par nothing; mais si la phrase 
est negative, il se rend par 7iot . . . anything (pas quelque 
chose), car si Ton employait 7iothing dans ce cas, il y aurait 
une double negation exprimee: 

I can see nothing, 

I cannot see anything, 


Je fie puis meii voir. 


§ 8 


SEIZIEME LECON 


33 


4 . Remarquez la construction particuliere de la phrase, 
Here comes the clerk , litteralement Ici vient le commis. Elle 
equivaut a Void le commis qui vient. On peut commencer 
une phrase avec la plupart des adverbek en anglais, et dans 
ce cas, le sujet est rejete apres le verbe: 

There goes Mr. Clay, Voild, M. Clay qui passe. 

Here comes my friend, Void mon ami qui vient. 

5 . Notez que le verbe to pay , payer, demande la prepo¬ 
sition for devant le complement: 

I paid three dollars for it, Je Vai payl trois dollars. 

He has not paid for his hat, II n'a pas paye son chapeau. 

6 . Si que nous avons jusqu’ici traduit par if , se rend 
aussi par whether pour exprimer une alternative: 

I do not know whether I shall go or not, Je ne sais pas si j'irai 
ou non. 

He told me he did not know whether his friend was ill or not, II 
m'a dit qu'il ne savait pas si son ami etait malade ou non. 

7 . Voici encore quelques expressions fortunes a l’aide du 
verbe to get et de certaines prepositions ou adverbes: 

to get away, s'esquiver , faire partir - 

He got away as soon as I came, II s'esquiva aussitdt que j'arrival 

She got her children away, Elle fit partir ses enfants. 

to get back, revenir , recevoir 

They hope to get back tomorrow in time for the dinner, Ils espdent 
revenir a temps demain pour le diner. 

We hope to get back the money that we lent you, Nous esperons 
recevoir l'argent que nous vous avons prete. 

to get down, descendre 

Get down there, Descendez. 

Tell the servant to get my things down, Dites a la servante de des¬ 
cendre mes affaires. 

Avec le verbe to have , le verbe to get est en quelque sorte 
expldtif. Dans ce cas, il est toujours au participe passe: 

What has he got in his hand? Qu'a-t-il dans la main? 

Have you got any French books? Avez-vous des livres franqais? 


34 


ANGLAIS 


8 


Enfin, le verbe to get , se prete a une foule de locutions 
trbs usitees en anglais. En voici quelques-unes: 

to get over, frcinchir , surmonter 

to get free, etre libre 

to get into bed, se mettre au lit 

to get out of bed, sortir du lit 

to get home, rentrer chez soi 

to get warm, cold, avoir chaud, froid 

to get well, se retablir 

to get the better of, prendre le dessus 

to get at, atteindre , avancer a 

8. Pour nionter en voiture, on se sert de l’expression to 
get in: 

Here is our cab; get in, Voici notre fiacre; montez: 

I got into the cab at the corner of Main Street and Columbus 
Avenue, Je suis monte dans ce fiacre au coin de la Grande Rue et de 
V avenue Colomb. 


EXERCICE ORAL 

Is your friend Here? —No; lie lias not arrived 
yet. 

Voire ami est-il id?—Non; il n'est pas encore arrive. 

Has he answered your letter? —No; not yet. 

He has anticipated a great deal of pleasure from this trip. 
Has mother called me? —No; she has not called you. 

I have not yet corrected your exercise, so I cannot tell you 
whether or not it is good. 

They have delayed their journey for another month. 

Has any one directed you to do that? 

That little girl has dropped a beautiful vase on the floor. 
Have you not finished your lesson? 

Have they helped you? —No; they have not. 

He has invested all his money in that enterprise. 

We have not 'yet investigated that mining property, but 
we intend to do so before long. 

I have lived three years in this house. 

He has learned English and German. 

I have needed money all my life. 



§3 


SEIZ1EME LECON 


35 


She has not obtained what she wanted. 

They have occupied this office two years and a half. 

He has asked me to smoke. 

My pupils have progressed very satisfactorily. 

They have prepared a statement. 

He has received a letter from his mother. 

She has requested me to speak to you about this matter. 
She has studied English with me for a year. 

I have not troubled you too much, I hope. 

She has not worked this week. 

I liave just seen your brother; he has not 
begun his work yet. 

Je viens de voir votre frbre; il n'a pas encore commend 
son travail. 

We have begun to learn French. 

1 have never found my friend at home. 

He says they have found their friends in the garden. 

She has told me this several times. 

Have you told Mary to set the table? —O, yes; she is setting 
it now. 

I have lost my pen, John; will you let me take yours? 

He cannot go with us; he has lost his hat. 

They have lost a great deal of money in that investment. 
He has gone to town to buy some thread for his mother. 
Where has she gone? —She has gone to her uncle’s. 

I have not yet heard fro m my daughter, but 
I expect a letter from her every day. 

Je n’ai pas encore regu de nouvelles de ma fille , mais f at¬ 
tends une lettre d'elle tons les jours. 

Where have you ever heard it? 

Give me your French book, please. —I am sorry, I have 
none; I have given it to your cousin. 

He has given me that beautiful locket for a birthday 
present. 

They have written us about the matter. 

He has written a very long letter to his parents, in which 
he says he will spend the holidays with them. 


36 


ANGLAIS 


8 


I have just sent the goods to Mr. Perkins. 

They have sent me a beautiful ring for my birthday. 

I have not said such a thing. 

We have not said that he was here. 

I have bought a country house near yours. 

Has he bought this house? —No; he has not. 

They have not forgotten you; they will 
write soon. 

/Is ne vous ont pas oublie; ils vous ecriront bientdt. 

John is not reading; he has forgotten his book. 

Excuse me a minute, I have forgotten to tell Mary to set 
the table. 

She has not spoken to me about it. 

Have they not spoken to you about that matter? 

This gentleman has already talked for two hours. 

I have not eaten anything this morning. 

Have you eaten the apples we sent you last week? 

I am very sorry —I have broken that beautiful vase. 

Our servant has broken another glass. 

Since I came here, I have often thought of 
you. 

Depuis que je suis id , j'ai souvent pense a (de) vous. 

Do you know Mr. Cleveland? —O, yes; I have known him 
for the past ten years. 

We have known her for the last three years. 

What have you done this morning? 

We have not read the morning paper (journal) yet. 

I have come to say good by to you. 

They have come here to get their money. 

He has not sold his property; he wants too 
much for* it. 

II n'a pas vendu sa propriety; il la fait trop cher (il en veut 
trop). 

He has sold all he had, because he intends to live in 
London. 


§8 


SEIZIEME LEQON 


37 


What have you got? —I have a very interesting French 
book. 

He was very thirsty; he has drunk two glasses of wine. 

I have not drunk any wine for the last two years. 

What does she want? —I have paid her. 

They paid eight thousand dollars for that house. 

She has shown me the beautiful locket her uncle sent her 
for her birthday. 

Has he seen our new house yet? —Yes; he has. 

I have not seen your sister this morning. Where is she? 

Note. —Dans les phrases suivantes, vous pouvez employer l’impar- 
fait ou le parfait defini. II y a cependant une difference dans le sens, 
selon que vous employez l’un ou l’autre de ces deux temps. Par 
exemple, dans la premiere phrase they have lived here two years , le 
parfait defini employe ici indique que la periode de temps n’est pas 
completement ecoulee, et qu ’its restent encore ici. Si on emploie 
l’imparfait, they lived here two years , l’action a eu lieu dans un temps 
completement ecoule, et its ne demeurent plus ici maintenant; its ont 
demenagk . Raisonnez de meme avec toutes les phrases, de maniere a 
bien saisir la difference qui existe entre l’imparfait et le parfait defini: 

They have lived here two years. 

Its restent ici depuis deux ans. 

They lived here two years. 

Its ont demeure deux ans ici. 

He has studied (studied) that lesson. 

We have come (came) to see you. 

She has gone (went) to church. 

They have known (knew) me since I was a child. 

Your sister has studied (studied) English. 

John has followed (followed) them. 

You have known that man, have yon not? — 

O, yes; I have. 

Vouz avez connu cet homme , n'est-ce pas?—Oh! oui; je 
I'ai connu. 

They have sold their house, have they not? —Yes; they 
have. 

I have paid you, have I not? —Yes; you have. 

We have shown you our new house, have we not? —Yes; 
you have. 

He has written to you, has he not? —Yes; he has. 


38 


ANGLAIS 


8 


She has told you she is going to Paris, has she not? — 
Yes; she has. 

They have not seen your new house, have 
they?-No; they have not. 

Ils n’ont pas vu votre nouvelle maison, n'est-cepas?—Non; 
ils ne Vont pas vue. 

They have not found their check have they? —No; they 
have not. 

I have not broken that vase, have I? —No; you have not. 
He has not eaten too much, has he? —No; he has not. 

You have not heard from your uncle, have you? —No. 

She has not gone to church, has she? —She has not. 

We have not lost our money, have we? —You have not. 

Have you ever seen Mr. Clay? —No; I liave 
never seen him. 

-Avez-vous jamais vu M. Clay?—Non; je ne I'ai jamais vu. 

Have you ever heard of that man? —No; I have never 
heard of him. 

Has he ever written to your cousin? —No; he has never 
written to her. 

Has she ever spoken to you? —No; she has never spoken 
to me. 

Have you ever read this book? —No; I have never read it. 
Have they ever drunk wine? —No; they have never 
drunk any. 

He has not found anything. 

II n'a rien trouve. 

She has not told me anything about it. 

I have not lost anything. 

They have not heard anything from their parents. 

We have not sent him anything. 

He has not said anything to his cousins yet. 

We have not bought anything from that store. 

I do not know whether or not she will come. 

Je ne saispas si elle viendra ou non. 


§8 


SEIZIEME LEQON 


39 


He did not tell me whether or not he had sold his house. 
I shall write him I do not know whether I shall be there 
or not. 

He does not know whether they will be there or not. 

We do not know whether or not he bought it. 

They do not know whether or not John has arrived. 

He got away easily. 

II s'est enfui facilement. 

They got her away before he arrived. 

At what time do you expect to get back? —I cannot get 
back before three o’clock. 

I got home very late last night. 

Tell my wife to get my things down. 

Have you got any German books? 

He will get over this difficulty. 

When he got free, he returned to his country. 

I got into bed early last night. 

Why do you not get out of bed? 

It is time for me to get home. 

I am not well; I got cold last night. 

We are getting warm now. 

She expects to get well soon. 

I do not care for liini. 

Je ne me soucie pas de lui. 

We do not care for her. 

They do not care whether he is here or not. 

She does not care for it. 

He does not care for his dinner. 

We slaall do our best to please you. 

Nous ferons de notre mieux pour vous satisfaire. 

I shall do my best to please him. 

He will do his best to please us. 

She will do her best to please them. 

They will do their best to please her. 


40 


ANGLAIS 


§8 


How much is this house worth?—It is worth 
five thousand dollars. 

Combien vaut cette maison?—Elle vaut cinq mille dollars. 

How much is he worth? —He is worth a great deal. 
Give me twenty-five cents’ worth of this powder. 

This is too dear; it is not worth half of it. 

My house is not worth so much as yours. 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


Excuse me, sir; can you show me 
the way to Harrison Avenue, 
please? 

With pleasure. Follow this street, 
Main Street, two blocks. The 
second street that leads to the 
right is Harrison Avenue. What 
number are you looking for? 

I want to go to number 624. 

You will find that number in the 
third block from Main Street. 

Thank you, sir. 

You are welcome. 

* 

* * 

Is Mr. Grant at home? 

Mr. Grant has not come down yet. 
Please come into the parlor and 
sit down. 

What name shall I give? 

My name is Abbot, but Mr. Grant 
does not know me. Tell him I 
read in the paper that he wishes 
to sell his house, and that I 
have come to inspect it. 

Very well. 

* 

* * 

Come in. O, it is you, Harry. 

What time is it? 

It is ten o’clock, sir. 


Pardon, monsieur; pouvez-vous 
m’indiquer le chemin pour aller 
a l’avenue Harrison, s’il vous 
plait? 

Avec plaisir. Prenez cette rue qui 
est la Grande Rue, jusqu’a la 
deuxieme rue a droite. C’est 
1’avenue Harrison. Quel numero 
cherchez-vous? 

Je veux aller au numero 624. 

Vous trouverez ce numero dans 
le troisieme, “block” apres la 
Grande Rue. 

Merci, Monsieur. 

A votre service (Vous etes bien- 
venu). 

* 

* * 

M. Grant est-il chez lui? 

M. Grant n’est pas encore des- 
cendu, monsieur. Donnez-vous 
la peine d’entrer dans le salon 
et de vous asseoir. 

Qui dois-je annoncer? 

Je m’appelle Abbot, mais M. 
Grant ne me connait pas. Dites- 
lui que j’ai lu dans le journal 
qu’il veut vendre sa maison, et 
que je viens la visiter. 

Tres bien. 

* 

* * 

Entrez. Oh! c’est vous, Henri. 

Quelle heure-est-il? 

II est dix heures, monsieur. 




8 SEIZIEME LECON 41 

REVUE ET CONVERSATION - (Continuees) 


Ten o’clock! I must get up then. 

There is a gentleman downstairs, 
sir, who wishes to speak to 
you. He has come to buy the 
house. 

Very well, show him the first floor 
while I get dressed; I will come 
down soon. 

* 

* * 

Mr. Grant will be down soon, sir; 
he told me to show you the first 
floor in the meantime. As you 
see, the parlor is very large, and 
so is the dining-room, and the 
windows look toward the street. 
Here is the library. 

It is not so large as the other 
rooms. 

No; but it is a very pleasant room. 
The kitchen is also large. 

How many rooms are there up¬ 
stairs? 

Five bedrooms, sir, and a large 
bathroom. 

How much does Mr. Grant ask for 
this house? 

I do not know, sir; but here is 

Mr. Grant; he will tell you. 

* 

* * 

Well, sir; how do you like this 
house? 

I like it, Mr. Grant. How much 
do you ask for it? % 

Five thousand dollars. 

O, that is too much! I will never 
pay such a price for a house. 

I assure you that this house is not 
too expensive at that price. Last 
week my neighbor sold that old 
house, which you see there, for 


Dix heures! II faut que je me leve 
alors. 

Un monsieur est en bas qui de- 
mande a vous parler. II vient 
pour acheter la maison. 

Tres bien. Montrez-lui le premier 
etage pendant que je me leve. 

Je vais descendre. 

* 

* * 

M. Grant va descendre, monsieur; 
il m’a dit de vous montrer le 
premier etage en attendant. 
Comme vous voyez, le salon est 
tres grand, ainsi que la salle a 
manger, et les fenetres donnent 
sur la rue. Voici la bibliothe- 
que. 

Elle n’est pas si grande que les „ 
autres chambres. 

Non,mais c’estune chambre bien 
agreable. La cuisine est grande 
aussi. 

Combien de chambres y a-t-il en 
haut? 

Cinq chambres a coucher et une 
grande salle de bains. 

Combien M. Grant fait-il cette 
maison? 

Je ne sais pas, monsieur, mais 

voici M. Grant; il vous le dira. 

* 

* * 

Eh bien! monsieur; comment . 
trouvez-vous cette maison? 

Je l’aime assez, M. Grant. Quel 
en est le prix? 

Cinq mille dollars. 

Oh! c’est trop! Je ne paierai 
jamais un tel prix pour une 
maison. 

Je vous assure que cette maison 
n’est pas trop chere a ce prix. 
Mon voisin a ven,du la semaine 
derniere cette vieille maison que 



42 


ANGLAIS 


8 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


four thousand five hundred 
dollars. 

Well, I want my wife to see it; I 
will come this afternoon with 
her, then we will try to agree 
about the price. 


vous voyez la pour quatre mille 
cinq cents dollars. 

Eh bien! je veux que ma femme 
la voie; je viendrai avec elle cet 
apres-midi, alors nous essaie- 
rons de nous arranger pour le 
prix. 


PHRASES 

We have written him several times, 
but have received no answer. 

We have not yet received the 
goods you sent last week. 

He has not answered our last 
letter. 

I have never spoken to him. 

We have traded largely with them. 

We have not sold so many of your 
goods this year as last. 

He wrote twice last month, once 
on the 14th, and again on the 
20th. 

We shall do our best to please you. 

We shall let you know at once. 

Drop me a word a day or two 
before. 

It is no business of mine. 

Will you send me word as to 
whether or not they have already 
placed their season’s order? 

If you are going home, I will 
accompany you; I intended to 
go to your house this evening. 

I have delayed doing so. 

He has just gone out; he will not 
be back until half past four. 


USUELLES 

Nous lui avons ecrit plusieurs fois, 
mais nous n’avons pas regu de 
reponse. 

Nous n’avons pas encore regu les 
marchandises que vous avez en- 
voyees la semaine derniere. 

II n’a pas repondu a notre derniere 
lettre. 

Je ne lui ai jamais parle. 

Nous avons fait beaucoup d’af¬ 
faires avec eux. 

Nous n’avons pas vendu autant 
de vos marchandises cette annee 
que l’annee derniere. 

II a ecrit deux fois le mois dernier 
une fois le 14, et de nouveau 
le 20. 

Nous ferons de notre mieux pour 
vons satisfaire. 

Nous vous le ferons savoir imme- 
diatement. 

Envoyez-moi un mot, un jour ou 
deux avant. 

Ce n’est pas mon affaire. 

Veuillez m’envoyer un mot pour 
me dire s’ils ont deja place leur 
commande de la saison ou non? 

Si vous rentrez chez vous, je vous 
accompagnerai; j’avais reten¬ 
tion d’aller chez vous ce soir. 

J’ai tarde a le faire. 

II vient de sortir; il ne sera pas 
de retour avant quatre heures 
et demie. 





§8 


SEIZIEME LEQON 


43 


PHRASES TJSUELLES—(Continuees) 


I am afraid I cannot do them at 
that price. 

I have lost no time. 

You will get them at Cleveland’s. 

I have none in stock, but will get 
you some from London. 

We have a very large stock, in¬ 
deed, but there is little trade. 

We have sent for the thread, but 
have not yet received it. 

Is your partner in Paris? 

That will do, thank you. 

It is not very good, but it will do. 

You must take him for what he 
is. 

He is worth a great deal. 

You will be the better for it. 
Better late than never. 

Will you call at the office? 

Take good care of your health. 

I do not care for it. 

What do I care about it? 

The work is done by hand. 

You are looking well. 

There were three people at dinner. 
There were very few people at 
church. 

That cannot all be done at once. 
The cost is a thousand dollars. 

One has to do without many 
things. 

There is the last cent I have. 

Wanted, a clerk well acquainted 
with French. 

I give it up. 

Never break your word. 

I have delayed too long to answer. 
He has gone on an errand. 


J’ai peur de ne pouvoir les faire a 
ce prix. 

Je n’ai pas perdu de temps. 

Vous vous les procurerez chez 
Cleveland. 

Je n’en ai pas en magasin, mais 
j’en ferai venir de Londres. 

Nous en avons reellement beau- 
coup en magasin, et nous en 
vendons tres peu. 

Nous avons commande le fil, 
mais nous ne l’avonspas encore 
regu. 

Votre associe est-il a Paris? 

Cela suffit, merci. 

II n’est pas tres bon, mais il 
suffira. 

II faut le prendre tel qu’il est. 

II est tres riche. 

Vous vous en trouverez mieux. 

Mieux vaut tard que jamais. 

Voulez-vous passer au bureau? 

Ayez bien soin de votre sante 

Je ne m’en soucie pas. 

Qu’est-ce que cela me fait? 

L’ouvrage se fait a la main. 

Vous avez bonne mine. 

II y avait trois personnes a diner. 

II y avait fort peu de monde a 
l’eglise. 

Tout cela ne se fait pas d’un coup. 

Les frais se montent a mille 
dollars. 

II faut se passer de bien des choses. 

Voila le dernier sou que je pos- 
sede. 

On demande un commis sachant 
bien le frangais. 

J’abandonne la partie. 

Ne manquez jamais a votre parole. 

J’ai trop tarde a reprondre. 

II est alle en course. 




44 


ANGLAIS 


§8 


PHRASES USUEELES—(Continuees) 


He has always lived well. 

This is the child whose mother 
died this morning. 

Has he no money, no friends? 

When shall I see you? 

I shall send for her. 

Which of you will accompany us? 

The young lady of whom you 
speak has just gone out. 

There is the gentleman whose 
brother I knew in London. 

He made us many apologies. 

I paid him what I owed him. 

You will stay here and study. 

I shall see them as soon as they 
come. 

This is the best book I have read. 

If you come and I am not in, 
wait for me. 

I think I heard it. 

You are very kind to have thought 
of me. 

How are we to get over so many 
difficulties? 

I have just seen them. 


II a toujours fait bonne chere. 

C’est l’enfant dont la mere est 
morte ce matin. 

N’a-t-il pas d’argent, pas d’amis? 

Quand vous verrai-je? 

Je la ferai appeler. 

Qui de vous veut nous accom- 
pagner? 

La demoiselle dont vous parlez 
vient de sortir. 

Voila le monsieur dont j’ai connu 
le frere a Londres. 

II nous a fait mille excuses. 

Je lui ai paye ce que je lui devais. 

Vous resterez ici a etudier. 

Je les verrai assitot qu’ils vien- 
dront. 

C’est le meilleur livre que j’aie lu. 

Si vous venez et que je ne sois 
pas chez moi, attendez-moi. 

Je crois l’avoir entendu. 

Vous etes bien aimable d’avoir 
pense a moi. 

Comment surmonter tant d’ob- 
stacles? 

Je viens de les voir. 


EXEJRCICE ECRIT 

Repondez en anglais aux questions suivantes. Ecrivez les 
questions et les reponses en double expedition, et envoyez- 
nous les deux copies pour correction, mais n’enregistrez pas 
cette legon sur un cylindre vierge jusqu’a ce que nous vous 
ayons retourne une copie corrigee. 

1. How long have you lived in the house where you are 
now? 

2. Shall you be glad to see your professor when you 
come to Scranton? 

3. How long since you heard from your friend? 

4. Does the house you are living in belong to you? 

5. How many letters have you written this morning? 




8 


SEIZIEME LEQON 


45 


6. When is your birthday? 

7. How much are thirty-three francs in English money? 
in American money? 

8. Where do you buy your tea and coffee? 

9. Have you seen your cousin lately? 

10. Does your servant break many things? 

11. Tell us about any trip that you have made. 

12. Do you always sleep well? 

13. Can you understand a little English now? 

14. Have you much time to spare? 

15. Whom do you call when you are ill? 

16. What did you eat at dinner today? 

17. How much does that gentleman owe you? 

18. Where does your doctor live? 

19. How much is your house worth? 

20. How long is it since that merchant started in business? 

21. What book are you reading now? 

22. Have we not had fine weather lately? 

23. On what street do you live? 

24. At what time do you usually get up in the morning? 















* 











» 





































/ 







% 



I 


























ANGLAIS 

(PARTIE 9) 


DIX-SEPTIEME LECON 


CYLINDEB PHONOGEAPHIQFB 


VOCABULAIRE 


/. C. S. 

English Record No. 17 

the activity, V activite 
another, un autre 
to approach, approcher 
the bay, la baie 
below, en bas, au-dessous 
the boat, le bateau 
the bridge, le pout 
the building, le bdtiment 
central, central 
the city hall, VHbtel de 
ville 

the crowd, la foule 
to crowd, se presser 
the description, la descrip¬ 
tion 

the desk, le bureau 
due, dd 

each, chacun , chaque 

the east. Vest {pointcardinal) 

elevated, elevi 

the elevator, Vascenseur 

else, autre 

everything, tout 

fanions, iameux 


i. c. s. 

Cylindre d'Anglais No. 17 

the ferry, le bateau-mouche 
geographical, geographique 
the harbor, le port 
the haste, la hdte 
high, haut 
Holland, la Hollande 
the inhabitant, Vhabitant 
to lead, mener, pousser, in- 
duire 

like, comme 

magnificent, magnifiqUe 
nobody, ne . . . personne 
nor, ni 

nothing, ne . . . rien 
numerous, nombreux 
the people, lepeuple , les per¬ 
sonnes, on 

the position, la position 
the post office, le bureau de 
poste 

the railroad, le chemin de fer 
regular, regulier 
the rest, le reste, le repos 
the river, la riviere, le fleuve 


For notice of copyright, seepage immediately following the title page 
§9 






2 


ANGLAIS 


9 


VOCABTJLAIRE-(Continue) 


the roof, le toit 
safe, stir 

somebody, quelqu'un 
the spectacle, le spectacle 
strange, Hrange 
the station, la gare 
the syndicate, le syndicat 
tall, haut , grand 
the ticket, le billet {de che- 
min de fer, de theatre, etc .) 


upon, sur 
the view, la vue 
the waiter, le gar^on ( decade , 
d'hbtel) 

while, pendani que , le temps 
{espace de temps) 
wonderful, merveilleux 
the world, le monde 
yonder, IcL-bas 


PHRASES ET 

Let us take the elevated rail¬ 
road 1 at Sixty-third Street. 

Do you think we shall find 
any one 2 at home? 

Somebody will be there. If 
not, we will go down town. 
Have you been about New 
York very much? 

No; very little; however, 3 I 
have seen Central Park, 
the Post Office, the City 
Hall, and many of your 
tall building's. New York 
is the easiest city in the 
world to find one’s 4 way in. 

Yes; the blocks are very 
regular. 

Here is the station and our 
train is approaching. Come 
on; I have some tickets. 


ONVERSATIOS' 

Prenons le chemin de fer 
£leve a la soixante-troi- 
sieme rue. 

Pensez-vous que nous trou- 
verons quelqu’un a la 
maison? 

Quelqu’un sera la. Sinon, 
nous irons dans le bas de 
la ville. Vous etes-vous 
beaucoup promen6 dans 
New-York? 

Non, tres peu; cependant, 
j’ai vu le Parc Central, le 
Bureau de Poste, l’Hotel 
de Ville, et beaucoup de 
vos hauts batiments. New- 
York est la ville la plus 
facile du monde pour y 
trouver son chemin. 

Oui; les “blocks” sont tres 
r£guliers. 

Voici la gare, et notre train 
approche. Venez; j’ai des 
billets. 





9 


DIX-SEPTIEME LECON 


3 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Here is the Holland House. 
Come, the desk is this way. 
Give me your card. Waiter, 
will you kindly send our 
cards up to Mr. and Mrs. 
Jewell? Thank you. 

*** 

There is no one in, sir. 

Nobody 5 at all? 

No; neither 8 Mr. nor Mrs. 
Jewell is there. Can I do 
anything else 7 for you? 

Nothing, thank you. Shall 
we walk down Broadway? 
Have you ever seen such 
high buildings? 

No; there are none like these 
either 8 in Paris or in Lon¬ 
don. How many stories 
have your highest build¬ 
ings? 

We have many in New York 
and Chicago that have at 
least thirty floors. There 
are some too that have 
thirty-eight or thirty-nine. 

These are the highest build¬ 
ings in the world, are they 
not? 

Yes. Shall we take one of 
the fast elevators in the 
Syndicate Building and go 
out upon 8 the roof? You 
will get a magnificent view 
of the city. 


Voici l’Hotel de Hollande. 
Venez, le bureau est de ce 
cotd. Donnez-moi votre 
carte. Gargon, faites mon- 
ter nos cartes a M. et 
Mme. Jewell, je vous prie. 
Merci. 

*** 

II n’y a personne, monsieur. 

Personne du tout? 

Non; ni M. ni Mme. Jewell 
ne sont la. Puis-je faire 
autre chose pour vous? 

Rien, merci. Allons-nous 
marcher dans Broadway? 
Avez-vous jamais vu d’aus- 
si hauts batiments? 

Non; il n’y en a pas comme 
ceux-la ni a Paris ni a Lon- 
dres. Combien d’etages 
ont vos plus hauts bati¬ 
ments? 

Nous en avons beaucoup a 
New-York et a Chicago 
qui ont au moins trente 
etages. II y en a aussi 
qui en ont trente-huit ou 
trente-neuf. 

Ce sont les plus hauts bati¬ 
ments du monde, n’est-ce 
pas? 

Oui. Voulez-vous prendre un 
de ces ascenseurs rapides 
du “Syndicate Building” 
et monter sur le toit? 
Vous aurez une vue ma- 
gnifique de la ville. 



4 


ANGLAIS 


§9 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Everything 10 is far below ns, 
is it not? How small the 
people 11 seem to be! 12 And 
how they seem to be 
crowding one another! 
Every one seems to be in 
such haste! Is there any 
one in America who has 13 
nothing to do? Each 14 new 
thing that you show me 
leads me to believe that all 
things in America are new 
and strange to all the rest 
of the world. New York 
is certainly a wonderful 
city. 

Yes; and this is due chiefly 
to the energy of its inhab¬ 
itants, of which you spoke 
a little while 16 ago; partly 
also to its geographical 
position, and to its harbor, 
which is one of the largest, 
deepest, and safest in the 
world. See its magnificent 
bay with its numerous 
ships, boats, and ferries of 
all descriptions. From 
here you can see the 
famous Brooklyn Bridge 
over East River, and yon¬ 
der the Hudson. 


Tout est loin au-dessous de 
nous, n’est-ce pas? Queles 
personnes semblentpetites, 
et comme elles paraissent 
se presser les unes contre 
les autres! Chacun semble 
etre en hate! Y a-t-il quel- 
qu’un en Amerique qui 
n’ait rien a fairer? Chaque 
nouvelle chose que vous me 
montrez me porte a croire 
que tout en Amerique est 
nouveau et etrange pour 
le reste du monde. New- 
York est certainement une 
ville merveilleuse. 

Oui; et ceci est du surtout a 
l’activit6 de ses habitants 
dont vous parliez tout a 
l’heure; aussi en partie a 
sa position geographique 
et a son port qui est un des 
plus grands, des plus pro- 
fonds et des plus surs du 
monde. Voyez la ma- 
gnifique baie, avec les nom- 
breux bateaux et bateaux - 
mouches de toutes sortes. 
D’ici vous pouvez voir le 
fameux Pont de Brooklyn 
sur la Riviere de l’Est, et 
la-bas le Hudson. 




§9 


DIX-SEPTIEME LEQON 


5 


REMARQUES 


1. Les chemins de fer eleves sont un des moyens de 
transport de la ville de New-York. C’est une ligne de 
chemin de fer construite au milieu de certaines avenues et 
sur piliers en fer, a la hauteur d’environ le deuxieme etage 
d’une maison. 

2. Some et any sont des equivalents pour notre article 
partitif, du, de la, de V, des, de, aussi pour quelques, certains, 
tout, etc. On ne saurait cependant les employer indifferem- 
ment l’un pour l’autre. Quelques-unes des distinctions a 
faire sont trop compliquees pour prendre place dans cette 
partie du cours, et seront etudiees dans la grammaire. Nous 
nous en tiendrons ici a quelques regies generates. La dis¬ 
tinction a faire entre some et any est que le premier est plus 
determine que le second, et que some implique une certitude 
plus grande que any. Dans les phrases interrogatives et 
negatives, il y a souvent une idee de doute exprimee. C’est 
pourquoi, dans ce cas nous ferons plutot usage de any. Au 
contraire, dans les phrases affirmatives qui n’expriment aucun 
doute nous nous servons le plus souvent de some. 

Bring some wine, Apportez du vin. 

I have not received any money for a week, Je n'ai pas regie d’argent 
depuis une semaine. 

Have you any friends in Paris? Avez-vous des amis a Paris. 

Les mots some et any peuvent s’unir a one, un, body, corps, 
et thing, chose, et nous avons. 



some one, any one 
somebody, anybody 


On observe dans leur emploi la regie donnee plus haut 
pour some et any. 

Did you see anybody, ou any one? Avez-vous vu quelqu'unf 
I have not seen anybody, ou any one, Je n'ai vu personne. (Je n' ai 
pas vu quelqu’un.) 

Somebody, ou some one came to see you, Quelqu'un est venu vous 


voir. 


6 


ANGLAIS 


9 


Do you want anything? Desirez-vous quelque chose? 

I do not want anything, Je lie desire rien. 

He wants something, II veut quelque chose. 

Some et any se joignent aussi a how, way, where, pour 
former les expressions suivantes. 


anyway, quand mime 
somehow, de quelque maniire 



some way, de quelque maniere anyhow, quand mime 

Shall you go anywhere tonight? Irez-vous quelque part ce soir? 

He bought it somewhere, II l'a achete quelque part. 

Anyhow, they want to go, Ils veulent quand mime s'en aller. 

Anyway, I will do it, Je le feral quand mime. 

I must do it somehow, II faut que je trouve le moyen de le faire. 

3. Le mot however, lorsqu’il est employe seul signifie 
cependant, pourtant, mais lorsqu’il est suivid’un adjectif, d’un 
participe ou d’un adverbe, nous le rendons par quelque . . . que. 
Le que qui suit en frangais ne se traduit pas en anglais. 

However rich he may be, he is not satisfied, Quelque riche qu'il soil, 
il n' est pas satis fait. 

However bad the weather may be, I go out every day, Quelque man¬ 
uals que le temps puisse etre , je sors tons les jours. 

Lorsque notre mot quelque est suivi d’un nom, il se traduit 
generalement par whatever. S’il s’agit d’un objet entre 
plusieurs, on emploie whichever. Dans les deux eas, le que 
suivant ne se traduit pas en anglais. 

Whatever talents he may have, he is not a great musician, Quelques 
talents qu'il puisse avoir, il n'est pas grand musicien. 

Whichever book you take, bring it back, Quelque livre que vous 
preniez, rapportez-le. 

4. Le mot one s’emploie souvent en anglais pour notre 
pronom indefini on. 

One must not always do the same thing, On ne doit pas toujours 
faire la meme chose. 

What must one do when one has not what one likes? Que doit-on 
faire quand on n'a pas ce qu'on aime? 


§9 


DIX-SEPTIEME LEQON 


7 


Le mot one, avec la forme possessive one's place devant 
un nom se traduit generalement en frangais par son, sa 
ou ses. 

It is not very pleasant to lose one’s umbrella, II n'est pas trbs agre- 
able de perdre son parapluie. 

One must not speak ill of one’s friends, On ne doit pas mat parley 
de ses amis. 

5. Les mots one, body et thing s’ajoutent aussi a no pour 
former no one, nobody, ne ... personne, et nothing, ne ... rien. 

I see no one, ou nobody, Je ne vois personne. 

No one, ou nobody sees me, Personne ne me voit. 

I eat nothing, Je ne mange rien. 

Si la phrase est negative, on ne peut employer nobody ni 
nothing car alors on aurait une double negation; c’est anybody 
ou anything qu’il faut employer. Ainsi, c’est une faute de 
dire I cannot see nobody, car on aurait deux negations, mais / 
cannot see anybody, I cannot see anything. 

Le mot where s’ ajoute aussi a no pour former nowhere, 
nulle part. 

I am going nowhere, Je ne vais nulle part. 

I can find it nowhere, Je ne puis le trouver nulle part. 

6. L’expression ne.. . ni se traduit en anglais par neither 
.. . nor. Lorsque le ni est repete, le premier se traduit aussi 
par neither, les autres par nor. 

I drink neither wine nor beer, Je ne bois ni vin ni Here. 

Neither you, nor she, nor I am happy, Ni vous, ni elle , ni moi ne 
sommes heureux. 

7. Le mot autre, qui se traduit generalement par other, 
se rend par else quand il signifie en phis. 

Give me something else, Donnez-moi autre chose. 

Take this and nothing else, Prenez ceci, et rien d’autre. 

8. Dans le cas de ni repete, le premier se traduit par 
either, les autres par or, si la phrase est negative, car neither 
contient une negation. 


8 ANGLAIS §9 

I cannot see either your brother or your sister, Je ne puis voir ni 
votre frere ni votre sceur. 

I have never seen either Paris or London, Jen'ai jamais vu ni Paris 
ni Londres. 

9. II n’y a aujourd’hui qu’une difference bien faible 
entre on et upon, et l’on peut dire qu’on les emploie indifferem- 
ment Tun pour l’autre. 

10 . Lorsque tout a le sens de chaque, il se traduit en 
anglais par every: 

I see him every day, Je le vois chaque jour, ou tons les jours. 

I write every week, J'ecris toutes les semaines, ou chaque semaine. 

Le not every peut aussi se joindre aux mots one, body, 
thing, where, pour former les expressions suivantes. 

every one 1 tout le monde, everything, tout 

everybody] chacun everywhere, partout 

Every one, ou everybody says so, Chacun le dit. 

Every one, ou everybody knows it, Tout le monde le sait. 

He gave me everything he had, II m'a donnt tout ce qu’il avait. 

He seems to be everywhere, II semble etre partout. 

11 . Le mot people ne prend jamais la marque du pluriel. 
Cependant comme c’est un nom collectif, il est toujours con- 
sidere comme un nom pluriel, et lorsqu’il est sujet d’un 
verbe, ce verbe se met toujours au pluriel. 

What people were there? Quelles personnes etaient la? 

People say, On dit. 

12. Remarquez la construction particuliere de la phrase 
“How small the people seem to be!” et vous verrez que 
notre que ou combien dans une exclamation se rend par how; 
aussi que l’adjectif precede le nom. 

How beautiful Paris is! Que Paris est beau! 

How rich this gentleman is! Que ce monsieur est riche! 

13 . Il n’y a pas, en anglais, de forme qui corresponde 
exactement au subjonctif frangais. Souvent, quand nous 
nous servons du subjonctif, les Anglais emploient les temps 
de l’infinitif, ou du conditionnel. 


§9 DIX-SEPTIEME LECON 9 

Do you think Mr. Grant is rich? Pensez-vous que M. Grant soit 
riche? 

I do not believe that he has much money, Je ne crois pas qu'il ait 
beaucoup d'argmt. 

14 . Chaque , chacun se traduisent par every ou par each; 
mais tandis que every accompagne toujours un nom, each peut 
s’employer seul. Lorsqu’on ne parle que de deux personnes 
ou de deux choses, c’est toujours each qu’il faut employer. 

He has two sons, and each of them is a physician, It a deux fils , et 
chacun d'eux est medecin. 

How much did you pay for each? Combien avez-vous paye chacun? 

15 . Le mot while a deja ete traduit par pendant que. II 
peut aussi etre un nom, et a dans cette fonction le sens de 
temps. II peut entrer alors dans les combinaisons suivantes: 

a little while, un peu de temps , un moment, un instant 

a long while, longtemps 

all the while, pendant tout le temps 

for a while, pendant un temps 

between whiles, par intervalles 

to be worth while, valoir la peine 

L’expression a little while ago , il y a peu de temps, rend 
tres bien notre expression tout a Vheure que nous employons 
pour exprimer un temps passe recemment. Lorsque tout h 
Vheure s’applique a une periode de temps futur, il faut le 
traduire cependant par in a little while: 

I saw him a little while ago, Je I’ai vu tout a Vheure. 

I shall see you in a little while, Je vous verrai tout a Vheure. 


EXERCICE ORAE 

Did you meet any one on your way home ? 

Avez-vous rencontre quelqu'un en allant chez vous? 

I did not meet any one on my way to his house. 

Has any one called for me? —No; no one has. 

Has any body found my book? —No; nobody has. 

Has anybody spoken to you about this matter? —No 
nobody has. 



10 


ANGLAIS 


9 


Does she want anything? —Yes; she wants something. 

Did you see anything strange in that? —No; I did not. 

Has anybody come for the tickets? —No; nobody has come 
for them. 

Do you know anybody in this city? — O, yes; we know 
many people. 

Have you seen John? —No; I cannot find him anywhere. 
Somebody wants to speak to you in the parlor. 

Anyhow, he wants to go. 

Anyway, I will do it. 

Can I help you anyway? 

The doctor gave him something for his cold. 

Did they find any one at home? —Yes; some one was there. 
I have seen him somewhere. 

May I trouble you for some bread? 

Oserai-je vous prier de me donner du pain ? 

You have some oranges before you; will you give him some? 
They have not eaten any fruit for a month. 

I have bought no chicken; have you bought any? 

Bring us some oranges; there are some on the table. 

We have many French books; we will send you some. 

I have not bought any wine for a year. 

However interesting: this book may be, I do 
not want to read it. 

Quelqu’interessant que ce livre puisse etre, je ne veuxpas 
le lire. 

✓ 

However difficult this lesson may be, I will learn it. 
However hurried he may be, he calls on us on his way to 
his office. 

However busy I may be, I always find some time to study 
French. 

However high may be your position, always be kind to 
everybody. 

I have seen nobody.-I have not seen any¬ 
body. 

Je n'ai vu personne. 


9 


DIX-SEPTIEME LEGON 


11 


Has anybody spoken to you about the matter? 

Nobody knows more about this than I do. 

There is nobody in this house. 

I have seen no one on my way home. 

Nothing is more magnificent than this city. 

What Is the matter with you?—Nothing is 
the matter with me. 

Qu'avez-vous?—Je n'ai rien. 

What is the matter with you? —Nothing is the matter 
with us. 

What is the matter with him? —Nothing is the matter 
with him. 

What is the matter with her? —Nothing is the matter 
with her. 

What is the matter with them? —Nothing is the matter 
with them. 

If anybody has anything to say about the 
matter, I shall be glad to hear him. 

Si quelqu'un a quelque chose a dire sur cette affaire, je 
■ serai content de Ventendre. 

If you have any money, lend me a dollar. 

He has not received any money for a month. 

She has no change; have you any? 

He doubts whether any man can do it so well as I. 

Bring any friend with you. 

What! have you not any of your friends with you? 

Shall I send,you some of these oranges? 

This bill is not due before the first of next 
month. 

Ce billet n'est pas dft avant le premier du tnois prochain. 

When will this bill be due? —It will be due on the fifteenth 
of March. 

We will do this in due time. 

I thought my bill was not due before the first. 

Pay him what is due him. 

Give every one his due. 


12 


ANGLAIS 


§9 


I saw him a little while ago; he was not ill 
then. 

Je Vai vu tout a Vheure; it n'etait pas malade alors. 

He came a little while ago, and told me to see you. 

I received a letter from him a little while ago. 

My cousins arrived from Chicago a little while ago. 

He paid his bill a little while ago. 

Wait a moment, Mr. Grant; I will see you in 
a little while. 

Attendez un moment , M. Grant; je vous verrai tout a 
Vheure. 

He says he will be back in a little while. 

Wait a moment; he will be here in a little while. 

Return soon; my friends will be here in a little while. 

We shall breakfast in a little while. 

While I was in Paris, I often saw Ameri¬ 
cans. 

Pendant que j'Hais a Paris, j'y voyais souvent des Ameri- 
cains. 

You must work while you are young. 

I shall write that letter while you are here. 

While I was in town, I bought a great many things. 

He cannot speak to you while he is working. 

I shall not speak to him; it is not worth 
while. 

Je ne lui parlerai pas; ce n'est pas la peine. 

It is not worth while to come for one day only. 

Is it worth while to go there? —No; it is not worth while. 
This is such a small affair that it is not worth while to 
talk about it. 

It is worth while to investigate that matter. 

Neither you nor I can do this. 

Ni vous ni moi ne pouvons faire ceci. 

I have seen neither John nor Lucy. 

He has neither friends nor money. 


§9 


DIX-SEPTIEME LEQON 13 

She has neither French nor English books. 

They have neither time nor money to set out on so long a 
journey. 

Either yon or I will have to go and speak 
to her. 

Vous ou moi devrons aller lui parler. 

I have not seen either John or Lucy. 

I do not drink either wine or beer. 

Do you know where Mr. Grant is? —He is either in his 
room or in the garden. 

Do as I tell you, neither more nor less. 

He told me what he told you, neither more nor less. 

Whose book is this?—Is it hers?-No; it is 
not hers. 

A qui est ce livre? — Est-ce le sien?—Non; ce n'est pas 
le sien. 

Whose book is this? Is it his? —No; it is not his. 

Whose house is this? Is it yours? —No; it is not ours. 
Whose gloves are these? Are they theirs? —No; they are 
not theirs. 

Whose account is that? Is it Mr. Grant’s? —No; it is 
not his. 

Whom are you going to meet at the station ? 

— I am going to meet my mother. 

Au-devant de qui allez-vous a lagaref—Je vais au-devant 
de ma mire. 

You must go to meet your father at the station. 

Will you go to meet her at the station? —I shall go to 
meet her if I know at what time she arrives. 

If you do not stay too late, I will come to meet you. 

Come to meet me; I will come back early. 

Why are you sorry? —I am sorry not to see 
him any more. 

De quoi etes-vous fache?—Je suis fdche de ne plus le voir. 

Are you not glad to do nothing? —Yes; I am glad to do 
nothing. 


14 ANGLAIS § 9 

Did you tell him never to enter your house again?—Yes; 
I told him never to enter my house again. 

What did he promise you? —He promised me never again 
to speak about that. 

Does your cousin work much? —No; he does not like to 
work; he prefers to do nothing. 

I saw him yesterday, hut I preferred not to speak to 
him. 

I promised you never to see them again. 

I told him never to ask for money again. 

Is there anybody in this house?-No; there 
is nobody here. 

Y a-t-il quelqu'un dans cette maisonf—Non; il n’y a 
personne id. 

Do you see anybody? —No; I do not see anybody. 

Does he bring anybody with him? —No; he brings nobody. 

Shall you receive anybody tonight? —No; I shall receive 
nobody. 

Do you know anybody here? —No; I do not know anybody. 

Did yon ever go to Paris? —No; I never went 
to Paris. 

Etes-vous jamais alle a Paris?—Non; je ne suis jamais, 
alii■ a Paris. 

Has Louis ever studied French? —No; he has never 
studied it. 

Has this young lady ever studied German? —No; she has 
never studied it. 

Have these ladies ever studied Spanish? —No; they have 
never studied it. 

Do you ever take Charles with you? —No; I never take 
him with me. 

I am delighted to make yonr acquaintance. 

Je suis enchante de faire votre connaissance. 

I am sorry to leave you. 

I am obliged to go home. 


9 


DIX-SEPTIEME LEgON 


15 


He is always glad to see you. 

We are glad to see you well again. 

She will be delighted to make your acquaintance. 

I was delighted to see him when I was in Italy. 

You will be obliged to speak French when you live in Paris. 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


My dear Charles, I have come this 
morning to ask your advice. 

I am glad you have come, Edward. 
I shall try to give the best ad¬ 
vice I can. 

The matter is this: You know that 
my uncle, who lives in Chicago, 
has one of the most important 
glove factories in the city. He 
has succeeded very well in his 
ventures. He is rich now, and 
his house has a large business. 
After twenty years of work, he 
wishes to retire and wants me 
to manage his business. I re¬ 
ceived a letter from him this 
morning. I have thought very 
much about it, but I really do 
not know what to do. 

Why, my dear Edward, you must 
accept what your uncle pro¬ 
poses. Believe me, and answer 
your uncle’s letter today. 

I have had so little experience in 
business, and am so young that 
I am afraid to accept. 

I know that to succeed you need 
much experience. But your 
uncle will help you, you may be 
sure; he will not leave the direc¬ 
tion of his business to you until 
you understand it. I expect my 
father in a few minutes; you can 


Mon cher Charles, je suis venu ce 
matin vous demander conseil. 

Je suis content que vous soyez 
venu, Edouard. J’essaierai de 
vous donner le meilleur avis 
possible. 

Voici raffaire: Vous savez que 
mon oncle qui demeure a Chi¬ 
cago, a une des plus importantes 
manifactures de gants de la ville. 
II a tres bien reussi dans ses 
entreprises. II est riche main- 
tenant, et sa maison fait beau- 
coup d’affaires. Apres vingt ans 
de travail, il desire se reposer, 
et il me demande de diriger ses 
affaires. J’ai regu une lettre de 
lui ce matin. J’ai beaucoup 
pense a cette proposition mais 
vraiment, je ne sais que faire. 

Mais, mon cher Edouard, vous 
devez accepter ce que votre 
oncle vous propose. Croyez-moi; 
repondez a la lettre de votre 
oncle aujourd’hui. 

J’ai eu si peu d’experience en 
affaires, et je suis si jeune que 
j’ai peur d’accepter. 

Je comprends que pour reussir, il 
vous soit necessaire d’avoir une 
grande experience. Mais votre 
oncle vous aidera vous pouvez 
en etre sur; il ne vous laissera 
pas la direction de ses affaires 
avant que vous les compreniez. 




16 


ANGLAIS 


§9 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


ask his advice; but I am sure 
he will tell you the same thing 
that I have. 

I shall be very glad to know what 
your father thinks of it. 

My father will be here soon. Speak 
to him; he likes you and will be 
glad to give you his advice. 
Excuse me for a moment. Here 
is the morning paper. Have 
you seen it? You will not have 
to wait long. 

* 

* * 

How are you this morning, Ed¬ 
ward? 

Very well, thank you. 

It is a long time since we had the 
pleasure of seeing you. Where 
is Charles? Is he out? 

No, sir; he excused himself for a 
few minutes. He told me to 
ask your advice concerning a 
proposition made me by my 
uncle. 

I shall be pleased to tell you what 
I think of it. What is the propo¬ 
sition? 

The thing is very simple. My 
uncle, as you know, is well 
along in years, and he wants to 
make me the manager of his 
business. I do not know what 
to do, on account of the little 
experience I have had, and I 
am so young yet! 

Well, I believe that you must 
accept. It is a fine position for 
you; take it. Experience will 
come, for your uncle will help 
you with his advice. I know 
him. 


Tattends mon pere dans quel- 
ques instants; vous pouvez lui 
demander son avis, mais je suis 
sur qu’il vous dira la meme 
chose que moi. 

Je serai bien content de savoir ce 
qu’en pense votre pere. 

Mon pere sera ici bientot; parlez- 
lui; il vous aime beaucoup; il 
vous donnera ses conseils avec 
plaisir. Maintenant, excusez- 
moi un moment. Void le jour¬ 
nal du matin. L’avez-vous lu? 
Je ne vous ferai pas attendre 
longtemps. 

* 

* * 

Comment allez-vous ce matin, 
Edouard? 

Jevais tres bien, je vous remercie. 

Il y a longtemps que nous n’avons 
eu le plaisir de votre visite. Ou 
est Charles? Est-il sorti? 

Non, monsieur; il s’est excuse pour 
quelques minutes. Il m’a dit 
de vous demander conseil sur 
une proposition que me fait 
mon oncle. 

Je veux bien vous dire ce que j’en 
pense. Quelle est cette propo¬ 
sition? 

La chose est bien simple. Mon 
oncle, comme vous le savez, est 
bien vieux maintenant, et il 
veut me faire le gerant de ses 
affaires. Je ne sais que decider, 
a cause de mon peu d’experi- 
ence, et je suis si jeune encore! 

Eh bien! je crois que vous devez 
accepter. C’est une belle posi¬ 
tion pour vous, prenez-la. L’ex- 
perience viendra, car votre oncle 
vous aidera de ses conseils; je 
le connais. 




9 


DIX-SEPTIEME LEgON 


17 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION - (Continuees) 


That is what Charles told me. I 
thank you very much; I shall 
do as you advise. I will write 
to my uncle tonight. 

I wish you success in this new en¬ 
terprise. You will come to see 
us before you go, will you not? 

O, certainly, sir. 


C’est ce que Charles m’a dit. Je 
vous remercie beaucoup; jeferai 
comme vous me conseillez. 
J’ecrirai a mon oncle ce soir. 

Je vous souhaite succes dans cette 
nouvelle entreprise. Vous vien- 
drez nous voir avant votre de¬ 
part, n’est-ce pas? 

Oh, certainement, monsieur. 


PHRASES 

What is the matter with you? 
Nothing is the matter with me. 
Something is the matter with her. 
That is good for nothing. 

They say there is nothing new. 

Do you want anything? 

I want nothing. 1 

I do not want anything. J 

Everybody says so, but I do not 
believe it. 

How far do you go? 

I go as far as the church. 

Are you going anywhere? 

I am going nowhere. 

I do not advise you to go there. 

I advise you not to go there. 

Give me something to eat. 

Come, gentlemen, let us make 
haste. 

Take those letters to the post office. 
Let us see which of us plays the 
best. 

Are you on your way to town? 
Are we not in the way here? 

Is it so with you? 

I want nothing. 

It is all the same to me. 

I have thought better of it. 

He does not care for anybody. 

I have everything here at hand. 


USUELLES 

Qu’avez-vous? 

Je n’ai rien. 

Elle a quelque chose. 

Cela n’est bon a rien. 

On ne dit rien de nouveau. 
Avez-vous besoin de quelque 
chose? 

Je n’ai besoin de rien. 

Tout le monde le dit, mais je ne 
le crois pas. 

Jusqu’ou allez-vous? 

Je vais jusqu’a l’eglise. 

Allez-vous quelque part? 

Je ne vais nulle part. 

Je ne vous conseille pas d’y aller. 
Je vous conseille de ne pas y aller. 
Donnez-moi quelque chose a man¬ 
ger. 

Allons, messieurs, hatons-nous. 

Allez porter ces lettres a la poste. 
Voyons lequel de nous joue le 
mieux. 

Etes-vous en chemin pour la ville? 
Ne sommes-nous pas de trop ici? 
En est-il ainsi pour vous? 

Je ne manque de rien. 

Cela m’est egal. 

Je me suis ravise. 

II n’aime personne. 

J’ai tout sous la main. 





18 


ANGLAIS 


§9 


PHRASES USUELLES—(Continuees) 


He is at home everywhere. 

There is nothing unusual in that. 
The goods are still at the station. 

I have something to say to you. 

If anybody comes while I am out, 
tell them that I will be back at 
five. 

Is everybody here? 

Every one is well. 

Give us something to eat, to 
drink. 

I do my best; one does not always 
do what one wants. 

He runs up bills everywhere. 
Money is everything in this world. 
He is good for nothing. 

Today is my birthday. 

He understands people. 

One cannot be sure of anything. 
He is a man of his word. 

One is as good as the other. 

He does nothing else. 

He does nothing but eat and 
drink. 

There is nothing more to say. 

We must account to him for 
everything. 

Still less. 

Excuse me, sir; which is the way 
to the station? 

Excuse me; can you tell me where 
the post office is? 

He is happiest who makes most 
men happy. 

Do you know how to keep books? 
I expect you to remain with me. 

Like father, like son. 

A friend in need is a friend indeed. 
Better late than never. 

A good name is better than riches. 


II est sans gene partout. 

II n’y a rien de singulier en cela. 

Les marchandises sont encore a 
la gare. 

J’ai quelque chose a vous dire. 

Si on vient pendant que je suis 
sorti, vous direz que je rentrerai 
a cinq heures. 

Tout le monde est-il ici? 

Tout le monde se po r te bien. 

Donnez-nous quelque chose a 
manger, a boire. 

Je fais de mon mieux; on ne fait 
pas toujours ce qu’on veut. 

II fait des dettes partout. 

L’argent fait tout en ce monde. 

II n’est bon a rien. 

C’est le jour de ma fete aujour- 
d’hui. 

II connait son monde. 

II ne faut jurer de rien. 

II est homme de parole. 

L’un vaut l’autre. 

II n’en fait pas d’autre. 

II ne fait que boire et manger. 

C’est tout dire. 

II faut lui rendre compte de tout. 

Encore moins. 

Pardon, monsieur; le chemin de 
la gare, s’il vous plait? 

Pardon; pouvez-vous me dire ou 
est le bureau de poste? 

Celui-la est le plus heureux qui 
fait le plus d’heureux. 

Savez-vous tenir les livres? 

J’entends que vous restiez avec 
moi. 

Tel pere, tel fils. 

On connait l’ami au besoin. 

Mieux vaut tard que jamais. 

Bonne renommee vaut mieux que 
ceinture doree. 



§9 


DIX-SEPTIEME LEgON 


19 


PHRASES USUELRES —(Continuees) 


Will you go out while it is fine 
weather? 

Where do you come from? 

We come from America. 

I am quite willing. 

I must make haste. 

What are those gloves worth? 
They are worth more than you 
think. 

It is worth nothing. 

The train is due at noon exactly. 
This child must be ill. 

I have nothing to say. 

I heard nothing. 

Give me back my money. 

Your letter made us all happy. 

I have expected you for three 
hours. 

What do I hear of you? 

We have heard no more of him. 

I will answer it later. 

Do you know Harrison Avenue? 

You know nothing about it. 

May I read this letter? 

You shall read it after I do. 

This child will not live long. 

On what do poor people live? 


Voulez-vous sortir pendant qu’il 
fait beau? 

D’ou venez-vous? 

Nous venons d’Amerique. 

Je veux bien. 

II faut que je me depeche. 

Que valent ces gants? 

Ils valent plus quevous ne pensez. 

Cela ne vaut rien. 

Le train doit arriver a midi juste. 
Cet enfant doit etre malade. 

Je n’ai rien a dire. 

Je n’ai rien entendu. 

Rendez-moi mon argent. 

Votre lettre nous a tous rendus 
heureux. 

Je vous ai attendu pendant trois 
heures. 

Qu’est-ce que j’entends dire de 
vous? 

On n’a plus entendu parler de lui. 
J’y repondrai plus tard. 
Connaissez-vous l’Avenue Har¬ 
rison? 

Vous ne vous y connaissez pas du 
tout. 

Puis-je lire cette lettre? 

Vous la lirez apres moi. 

Cet enfant ne vivra pas longtemps. 
De quoi vivent les pauvres? 


EXERCICE PHONOGRAPIIIQUE 

Aussitot que vous aurez regu votre copie de la quatorzieme 
legon corrigee par nous, enregistrez-la sur un cylindre vierge, 
et envoyez-le-nous, en suivant les directions donnees 
precedemment. 




20 


ANGLAIS 


$9 


DIX-HUITIEME LECON 


CYLINDRE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 


VOCABULAIRE 


I. c. s. 

English Record No. 18 

the ability, V habilete 
able, capable 

abroad, au-dehors, cl Vetran¬ 
ger, en Europe 
to add, ajouter 
the advancement, Vavance- 
ment 

the advertisement, Van- 

nonce, V avertissement 
the banker, le banquier 
both, tons deux, a la fois 
the character, le caractere 
the college, le college 
commercial, commercial 
cordially, cordialement 
to correspond, corresponds 
the correspondence, la 
correspondance 

the correspondent, le cor¬ 
respondent 

to discontinue, discontinuer 
the employ, Vemploi 
entire, entier 

the establishment, VSta- 
blissement 


i. c. s. 

Cylindre d’Anglais No. 18 

European, d’Europe 
to feel, sentii 
financial, financier 
fluently, couramment 
foreign, Stranger 
to graduate, graduer 
the habits, les habitudes 
the introduction, Vintro- 
duction 

the kind, la sorte 

the mail, le courrier 

the opportunity, Voppor- 

t unite 

permanent, permanent 
to present, presenter 
the promotion, V avance- 
ment, la promotion 
the qualification, la capa- 
citS, la qualite requise 
to recommend, recomman¬ 
der 

the reference, la recomman- 
dation, le renseignement (sur 
la moralite, etc.) 
in reference to, cl propos de 





§9 


21 


DIX-HUITI&ME LEQON 

VOCABUEAIRE - (Continue) 


to report, rapporter, rendre- 
compte , apparaitre devant 
quelqu'un 
sole, seal 
the state, VEtat 
sufficient, suffisant 
the training, l'education 
(technique) 
the trial, Vessai 


unable, incapable 
undoubted, indubitable , hors 

de doute 

unimpeachable, inattaqua- 
ble , irreprochable 
to volunteer, offrir volon- 
tairement 

the war, la guerre 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION 


What can I do 1 for you? 

I have come to see you with 
reference to your adver-r 
tisement in yesterday’s 
morning paper. 

How old are you 2 ? 

I am twenty-seven. 

Are you a college graduate? 
What kind of business 
training have you had 3 ? 

I graduated from Harvard 
five years ago. Then I 
spent two years abroad in 
the study of European 
financial establishments, 
and during the past three 
years I have been 4 in the 
employ of Sanford and 
Company, the bankers. 

When did you say you en¬ 
tered the employ of San¬ 
ford and Co.? 

About three years ago; two 
years after I had' left col¬ 
lege. 


Que d6sirez-vous? 

Je suis venu vous voir a 
propos de votre annonce 
dans le journal d’hier 
matin. 

Quel age avez-vous? 

J’ai vingt-sept ans. 

Avez-vous des diplomes? 
Quelle sorte d’Education 
commerciale avez-vous 
regue? 

J’ai regu un diplome de Har¬ 
vard il y a cinq ans; ensuite 
j’ai passd deux ans en Eu¬ 
rope dans l’6tude des 6ta- 
blissements financiers, et 
pendant les trois dernieres 
annees, j’ai ete dans l’em- 
ploi de Sanford et Com- 
pagnie, les banquiers. 

Quand avez-vous dit que vous 
etes entre chez Sanford et 
Cie? 

II y a a peu pres trois ans; 
deux ans apres que j’eus 
quitt6 le college. 





22 


ANGLAIS 


§9 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION- Continuees) 


Have you any references 
from them? 

I have. As soon as I had 
told them that I had de¬ 
cided to apply for this 
position with you, they 
volunteered a letter of in¬ 
troduction. Here it is: 

Boston, March 12, 1902. 

Messrs . 8 H. L. Dawson and 
Co., 

210 State St., City. 

Gentlemen: 

This will present to you Mr. 
G. A. Larkin who has been 
with us about three years. 
He is a man of unimpeach- 
able character, of un- 

• doubted ability, and of 
good habits. He has been 
a valuable man to us, and 
we are sorry to lose him. 
We take special pleasure 
in recommending him to 
you, because he will find 
in your house better op¬ 
portunities for the advance¬ 
ment that he deserves, and 
that we are unable to give 
him. 

Cordially yours, 
Sanford and Co. 


Why did you leave them? 


Avez-vous des recomman- 
dations d’eux? 

J’en ai. Aussitot que je leur 
ai dit que j’avais ddcide de 
de m’adresser a vous pour 
cette position, ils m’ont 
offert volontairement une 
lettre d’introduction. La 
voici: 

Boston, le 12 mars 1902. 

M.M. H. L. Dawson et Cie., 

210, Rue d’Etat, En Ville. 

Messieurs: 

La presente vous sera remise 
par M. G. A. Larkin qui a 
et 6 avec nous a peu prks 
trois annees. C’est un 
homme d’un caractkre ir- 
r^prochable, d’un habilete 
indubitable, et d’une mo¬ 
rality excellente. II a 6t6 
pour nous un homme pre- 
cieux et nous sommes 
fachds de le perdre. C’est 
un plaisirexceptionnel pour 
nous de vous le recomman¬ 
der, car il trouvera dans 
votre maison de plus 
grandes chances d’avance- 
ment qu’il m6rite, mais que 
nous sommes incapables 
de lui donner. 

Cordialement a vous, 
Sanford et Cie. 

Pourquoi les avez-vous 
quittes? 




§9 


DIX-HUITIEME LECON 


23 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Contlnuees) 


Some time ago, 7 a commer¬ 
cial house in Pekin made 
me an offer of a better 
position, which I accepted. 
I was just 8 about to sail 
when the Chinese war 
broke out, and I found 
that the company had dis¬ 
continued its business in 
the East. 

Do you feel able to take en¬ 
tire charge of all our 
foreign correspondence? 

I do. Before I had been 
with my father a year he 
gave me charge of all the 
mail, and for two years my 
sole duties with Sanford 
and Co. were those of for¬ 
eign correspondent. I must 
add that I speak several 
languages fluently, and that 
I can correspond both 9 in 
French and in English. 


Your qualifications seem to 
be sufficient. We will give 
you a sixty days’ trial. 
Report for duty tomorrow 
at nine o’clock. If your 
work proves satisfactory, 
we will make a permanent 
contract with you. There 
will be 10 many opportunities 
for future promotion. 


II y a quelque temps, une 
maison de commerce de 
Pekin m’offrit une meil- 
leure position que j’accep- 
tai. J’etais sur le point 
de- m’embarquer quand la 
guerre de Chine commenga, 
et depuis la compagnie a 
discontinue ses affaires 
dans 1’Orient. 

Vous sentez-vous capable de 
prendre charge de notre 
correspondance 6trangere? 

Je m’en sens capable. Apres 
avoir et 6 moins d’une ann6e 
avec mon pere, il me donna 
la charge de tout son cour- 
rier, et depuis deux ans, 
ma seule occupation avec 
Sanford et Cie a 6te celle 
de correspondant etran- 
ger. Je dois ajouter que 
je parle couramment plu- 
sieurs langues, et que je 
puis correspondre en fran- 
gais et en anglais. 

Vos capacity semblent suf- 
fisantes. Nous vous pren- 
drons a l’essai pendant soi- 
xante jours. Venez vous 
presenter demain a neuf 
heures. Si votre travail 
est satisfaisant, nous vous 
donnerons une position 
permanente. II y aura 
beau coup d’opportunity s 
d’ avancement dans 1 ’ avenir. 



24 


ANGLAIS 


§9 


REMARQUES 

1. Les verbes anglais to do et to make ont tous deux €t€ 
traduits par faire en frangais. 

Quand le verbe faire est employe dans le sens de agir, 
c’est to do qu’il faut employer: 

He will do it with pleasure, II le tera avec plaisir. 

I am doing my best, Je fais mon possible. 

Ce verbe to do est aussi employe dans le sens de convenir, 
de suifire, comme on peut le voir dans les phrases suivantes: 

That will do, thank you, Cela suffit, merci. 

It is not very good, but it will do, II n’est pas trbs bon, mais il 
suffira. 

That will not do for me, Cela ne me convient pas. 

Enfin, le verbe to do, s’emploie dans nn certain nombre 
d’expressions ou le sens d'agir n’est pas aussi marque. En 
voici les principales: 

to do business, faire des affaires 
to do one’s duty, faire son devoir 
to do good, faire du bien 
to do a kindness, rendre service 

to do something, nothing, faire quelque chose, ne rien faire 
to do as one pleases, faire d son gre 

To make signifie plutot fabriquer, comme par exemple, 
faire un habit, un instrument: 

My uncle made that table, Mon oncle a fait cette table. 

Who made those shelves? Qui a fait cette etagbre? 

Le verbe to make est aussi employe dans un grand nombre 
d’expressions dont voici quelques-unes: 

to make an apology, faire des excuses 
to make haste, se depecher 
to make an offer, faire une offre 
to make use of, faire usage de 
to make a payment, faire un versement 
to make progress, faire des progrbs 
to make a trial, faire un essai 
to make a will, faire un testament 
to make a present, faire un cadeau 


9 


DIX-HUITIEME LEQON 


25 


2. Pour exprimer Page, en anglais, c’est de l’auxiliaire 
to be , etre, que l’on se sert, et non de avoir comme en 
frangais: 

He is twenty-seven years old, II a ring t-sept ans. 

She is not yet twenty years old, Elle n'a pas encore vingt ans. 

On peut supprimer le mot old et meme le mot years en 
anglais, et dire: 

She was sixteen, Elle avait seize ans. 

I was about thirty, J'avals d peu prds trente ans. 


La question: Quel dge avez-vous? se traduit How old are 
you?, litteralement: Comment age etes-vous? 


3. Les verbes suivants sont irreguliers, et d’un usage 
frequent dans la conversation. Vous devez apprendre par 
coeur les formes donnees ci-dessous qui vous permettront 
de les conjuguer dans tous les temps que nous avons appris 
jusqu’a present: 


Infinitif 
to have, avoir 
to be, itre 
to spend, degenser 
to leave, quitter 
to make, faire 
to tell, dire 


Imparfait 
I had, j’avais, j'eus 
I was, j'etais , je fus 
I spent, je depensais 
I left, je quittais 
I made, je faisais 
I told, je disais 


Participk Pass£ 
had, eu 
been, He 
spent, depen se 
left, quitte 
made, fait 
told, dit 


4. On emploie le parfait defini en anglais pour marquer 
une action ou un etat qui continue jusqu’au moment oil l’on 
parle, alors qu’en frangais nous nous servons souvent du 
present: 


We have been here since yesterday, Nous sommes ici depuis /tier. 

He has been in my employ for two years, It est d moil eniploi depuis 
deux ans. 


5. Cette legon introduit un nouveau temps du verbe; 
c’est le plus-que-parfait, qui correspond a notre plus-que- 
parfait et a notre passd anterieur. Nous avons a examiner 
deux choses: 

1. Formation du Plus-Que-Partait. — Le plus-que-parfait 
se forme comme en frangais de la forme de l’imparfait de 


26 


ANGLAIS 


§9 


l’auxiliaire to have , avoir, et du participe passd du verbe. 
II est a remarquer ici qu’il n’y a pas dans la conjugaison 
anglaise certains verbes qui se conjuguent avec Hre comme 
en franqais, mais que to have est d’un usage general. Le 
verbe to be employe en anglais comme auxiliaire ne sert que 
dans la conjugaison des verbes passifs comme on le verra 
plus tard. 

Prenant comme modele le verbe to expect , il est conjugue 
comme suit au plus-que-parfait dans ses quatre formes: 
affirmatif, negatif, interrogatif-affirmatif et interrogatif- 
negatif: 

to expect, esperer 

Plus-Que-Parfait 

Affirmatif 

I had expected, 

He 1 

She [had expected, 

It J 

We j 

You [had expected, 

TheyJ 


J'avais espere 

j avait espere 


II 
Elle 


Nous avions espere 
Vous aviez espere 

I Elies } ava i en t es pere 


Negatif 


I had not expected, 

He' j 

She [had not expected. 
It J 

We 1 

You [had not expected, 
TheyJ 


Je n'avais pas espere 
II 1 , 

r n avait pas espere 

Nous n'avions pas espere 
Vous ?i'aviez pas espere 
Us 1 , 

Elies I n avaien * P as es Pere 


Interrogate-Affirmatii 


Had I expected? 
fhe 1 

Had < she > expected? 

lit J 

fwe ] 

Had < you 1 expected? 
I they J 


Avals-je esperef 

| espere ? 


Avait- 

[elle 


Avions-nous espere? 
Aviez-vous espere? 

A vaient- j | espere? 


§9 


DIX-HUITI^ME LEQON 


27 


In terroga tif-Negatif 

Had I not expected? N’avais-ie pas esptre? 

( lie 1 

Had I slie |not expected? N'avait-^ /u ^pas esptre1 


lit J 

[we 1 N'avions-nous pas espere? 

Had| you >not expected? N' aviez-vous pas espert? 


1 they J 


N’avaient- 


{eLV™ eSpMf 


2. Emploi du Phis-que-Parfait. — Y^e plus-que-parfait en 
anglais correspond a notre plus-que-parfait et a notre passd 
anterieur. Comme en frangais, lorsqu’on exprime que deux 
actions ont eu lieu dans un temps passe, le premier verbe est 
au plus-que-parfait quand il denote que son action dtait dejk 
complete au moment ou l’autre action passee avait eu lieu. 
Par exemple: 

I had finished my book when you came, J'avais fini mon livre 
quand nous ties arrivts. 


Le premier verbe I had finished est au plus-que-parfait 
parce que 1’action de fi?iir le livre etait complete au moment 
ou 1’autre action passee when you came a eu lieu. Considerez 
de meme les exemples suivants: 

He had arrived when I left, II etait arrivl quand je suis parti-. 

He had sold his house before we knew him, II avait vendu sa 
maison avant que nous le connaissions. 

When you went into the library, he had finished his correspondence, 
Quand vous ites alles dans la bibliotheque, il avait fini sa cor- 
respondance. 

Contrairement au franqais, le plus-que-parfait est employ^ 
en anglais dans les cas suivants: 

(a) Pour indiquer certains etats passes qui se rendent en 
frangais par l’imparfait, surtout lorsqu’on veut marquer que 
l’action exprimee par le premier verbe durait encore lorsque 
Pautre a eu lieu: 

He had been a physician for twenty years, Depuis vingt ans il ttait 
medecin. 


28 ANGLAIS § 9 

The young man had traveled in Germany for a year when his father 
died and he had to return home, Le jeune homme voyageait en Alle- 
tnagne depuis une annee quand son pere mourut et il lui fallut revenir 
d la maison. 

( b ) Quelquefois on emploie la forme interrogative en 
anglais avec le plus-que-parfait au lieu de la preposition if 
qui est supprimee; dans ce cas aussi, le second plus-que-par¬ 
fait peut remplacer un conditionnel en frangais: 

Had I come sooner, he had not died, Si j'ttais verm plus tdt, il ne 
serait pas mort. 

Had I taken better care of my health, I had not been ill, St j’avais 
pris tneilleur soin de ma sante, je ne serais pas malade. 

(c) Notre expression il y avait .... que se rend en 
anglais par le plus-que-parfait, de meme que l’expression il 
y a ... . que se rend en anglais par le Parfait Ind6fini: 

I have been here for a year, Il y a un an que je suis ici. 

My parents have lived in this house for two years, Il y a deux ans 
que mes parents demeurent dans cette maison. 

He had been a month in Paris, Il y avait un rnois qu’il etait d 
Paris. 

How long had you been here when I came? Combien de temps y 
avait-il que vous etiez ici quand je suis arrive:? 

6. Devant les noms de plusieurs personnes, comme au 
commencement d’une lettre, ou sur une enveloppe, etc., on 
se sert du /not frangais Messieurs, que l’on £crit en abrevia- 
tion Messrs.: 

Messrs. Sanford and Company, MM. Sanford et Compagnie. 

Messrs. Perkins and Smith, MM. Perkins et Smith. 

Si le nom des personnes ne suit pas, en emploie gentlemen, 
le pluriel de gentleman. 

7. Nous avons vu que ago rend notre expression il y a 
devant une periode de temps. Au passd, cependant il y 
avait se traduit par before lorsque la locution ne se lie pas a 
la proposition principale par que: 


§9 


DIX-HUITIEME LEQON 


29 


I had seen my brother a few minutes before, J'avais vu mon frire il 
y avait quelques minutes. 

He had written home the month before, II avait bcrit chez lui il y 
avait un mots. 

8. Venir de, pour exprimer qu’une action vient ou venait 
d’avoir lieu, se traduit par le propre temps de to have suivi 
de just, et du participe passe du verbe qui exprime Taction. 

I have just read an interesting book, Je viens de lire un livre inte- 
ressant. 

I have just spoken to him, Je viens de ltd parley. 

He had just breakfasted when I saw him, Il venait de dejeilner 
quand je Vai vu. 

She had just finished her work when you saw her, Elle venait de 
fittir son travail quand vous t’avez vue. 

9. Le mot both, les deux, tous les deux, peut s’employer 
avec ou sans substantif: 

Here are two French books, take them both, Void deux livres 
Iran gats, prenez-les tous les deux. 

Both English and French are spoken in Canada, On parte le fran- 
gais et Vanglais au Canada. 

Lorsque le mot both est employe comme adjectif, l’article 
est ordinairement supprime en anglais: 

Both gentlemen were here, Les deux messieurs Haient ici. 

Both ladies will be here at twelve, Les deux dames seront ici a midi. 

10. Le verbe impersonnel y avoir en franqais est en 
anglais there to be. Nous avons deja vu deux formes de ce 
verbe, there is, ou there are, il y a, et there was , ou there were, 
il y avait, il y eut. Etudiez soigneusement ce verbe dans le 
modele suivant ou il est donne dans ses quatre formes, et a 
tous les temps que nous avons precedemment etudies: 

there to be, Yavoir 
Affirmatif 

Present: there is, there are, ily a 
Imparfait: there was, there were, ily avait, ily eut 
Parfait Indefini: there has been, there have been, il y a eu 
Plus-que-Parfait: there had been, il y avait eu, il y eut eu 
Futur: there will be, il y aura 


30 


ANGLAIS 


9 


Negatif 

Present: there is not, there are not, il n'y a pas 
Imparfait: there was not, there were not, il n’y avait pas, 
il n'y cut pas 

Parfait Indefini: there has not heen, there have not 
heen, il n'y a pas eu 

Plus-que-Parfait: there had not heen, il n’y avait pas eu, il 
n’y eut pas eu 

Futur: there will not be, il n'y aura pas 

Interrogate-Affirmatif 
Present: Is ou are there? Y a-t-il? 

Imparfait: Was ou were there? Y avait-il, y eut-il? 

Parfait Indefini: Has ou have there been? Y a-t-il eu? 
Plus-que-Parfait: Had there been? Yavait-il eu,y eut-il eu? 
Futur: Will there be? V aura-t-il? 

Interrogatif-Negatif 

Present: Is ou are there not? N’y a-t-il pas? 

Impafait: Was ou were there not? N'y avait-il pas, n'y eut-il 
pas? 

Parfait Indefini: Has ou have there not been? N'y a-t-il 
pas eu? 

Plus-que-Parfait: Had there not been? N'y avait-il pas eu, 
n'y eut-il pas eu? 

Futur: Will there not be? N'y aura-t-il pas? 

Vous remarquerez que ce verbe s’emploie surtout en 
parlant de la quantite et du nombre; mais comme ce verbe 
n’est pas impersonnel en anglais, il s’accorde en nombre 
avec le nom ou le pronom qui sert de sujet: 

There are two children at the door, Il y a deux enfants & la porte. 
There is some wine on the table, Il y a du vin sur la table. 

There was a young man in the library, Il y avait un jeune homme 
dans la bibliotheque. 

There were many people at church, Il y avait beaucoup de personnes 
a I'eglise. 

Lorsqu’on indique la distance ou le temps, on se sert en 
anglais de la forme impersonnelle it is pour traduire il y a: 

It is two miles from here to our house, Il y a deux milles d’ici 
chez nous. 

It is three hours since he came, Il y avait trois heures qu'il Hait venu. 


9 


DIX-HUITIEME LEgON 


31 


EXERCICE ORAE 

What are you going to do?-I do not know 
what to do. 

Qu'allez-vous faire?—Je ne sais que faire. 

Do you think he will do it? —I am sure that he will. 

What are you doing in the library? —I am doing nothing. 
I understand you now; that will do. 

He is not satisfied; that will not do for him. 

He is doing business on Main Street. 

It is well to do one’s duty. 

She always does as she pleases. 

Who made that table for you?—My uncle 
made it. 

Qui a fait cette table pour vous?—Mon oncle Va faite. 

Who made out that bill? —The clerk made it out this 
morning. 

I met Mr. Grant this morning; he made an apology to me. 
Why do you not make haste? You will be late this 
morning. 

Are you going to sell your house? —I do not know yet; 
Mr. Grant made me an offqr last night. 

I made another payment on my stock last month. 

That child is working very hard, and he is making 
progress. 

I made my will last week. 

Louisa is very happy; her mother made her a present. 

IIow old are you, John?—I shall be twenty- 
two years old next February. 

Quel Age avez-vous, Jean ?—J’ aurai vingt-deux ans en 
ttvrier prochain. 

How old is your brother? —He is twenty-nine years old. 
How old is Mary? —She will be fifteen next March. 

She was sixteen when I first saw her. 

I shall go to Paris when I am twenty-one, 

I was just thirteen when I left school. 


32 


ANGLAIS 


9 


Have you had a good time in the country ? — 

O, yes; I have had a delightful time. 

Avez-vous eu beaucoup de plaisir a la campagne?—Oh! 
oui; j'ai eu beaucoup de plaisir. 

Have you had time to see your friend?—Yes; I have. 
Have you been at church? —Yes; I have. 

Has he been here? —No; he has not. 

I have spent all my money. 

He has spent some time with us. 

He has left for America. 

Call Lucy; she has left her book on the table. 

I have told Mary to set the table. 

How long have you been here?-I have been 
here since yesterday. 

Depuis quand Hes-vous ici?—Je suis id depuis hier. 

How long has he been in your employ? —He has been in 
my employ for two years. 

We have been with your parents since this morning. 

They have been at church for two hours. 

The president of that company has been here for two days. 

Had she loved him, he had married her ten 
years ago. 

Si elle Vavait aime, il se serait marii avec elle ily a dix ans. 

Had he missed the boat, he had lost a fortune. 

Had they kept their contract, they had all been rich. 

Had we not taken our umbrellas, we had all been wet. 

Had you seen the train, the horse had not been killed. 

Had he run faster, he had arrived in time. 

We had just finished our work in the garden 
when Mary called us. 

Nous venions de finir notre ouvrage dans le jardin quand 
Marie nous appela. 

Did you see your cousin? —No; I did not; he had not 
arrived when I left. 

I had not read his advertisement when I saw him. 

I had not answered his letter when I received yours. 


§9 


DIX-HUITIEME LEgON 


33 


He had not arrived when you left. 

She had not broken that vase when we were there. 

We had not heard from our cousin when we last saw you. 
You had not sold your house when we called on you. 

You had examined the books before your bookkeeper 
came to see you. 

They had finished their breakfast when we came in. 

He had graduated from Harvard when I entered college. 
I had gone to London when you arrived in Paris. 

I had heard of him before you spoke to me about him. 

We liad carefully investigated those mines 
before we bought any stock. 

Nous avions examine ces mines soigneusement quand nous 
achetdines ces actions. 

We had lived two years in France when we went to the 
United States. 

She had left her home before you came. 

They had ordered their goods when your agent visited 
them. 

They had organized a company when we returned from 
England. 

We had parted when you wrote me about that matter. 
They had seen your uncle when he wrote to you. 

There is a gentleman downstairs who wants 
to speak to you. 

II y a un monsieur en bas qui veut vous parler. 

There is a great deal to say about him. 

There are a few French books in my library. 

There are many people who will not believe that. 

In my mail this morning, there was a letter from your 
cousin. 

There was no label on that bottle. 

There were two cigars on the table; where are they, Mary? 
There were several roads before us; we did not know 
which one to take. 

There has been an accident at the post office today. 


34 


ANGLAIS 


9 


There will be a mail at half past eleven. 

Is there any one in the parlor? 

Are there many mines in Colorado? 

Was there a cab at the corner? 

Were there many people when you came. 

Is there any wine on the table? —Yes; but there is neither 
cider nor beer. 

How far is it from your house to the school? 

—It is about two miles. 

Quelle distance y a-t-il de chez vous a Vecole?—Ily a a peu 
pres deux milles. 

It is a month since his son died. 

How long is it since Mr. Grant died? —It is not yet a 
month. 

It is about a mile from here to the church. 

It was about two miles from our house to the city. 

Are you as old as your friend?—Xes; I am. 

Etes-vous aussi age que votre ami?—Oui; je suis aussi age 
que lui. 

Is he as old as you? —Yes; he is as old as I. 

Are they as rich as you? —Yes; they are. 

Are you as old as these gentlemen? —No; we are not so 
old as they. 

Are you richer than these ladies? —No; we are not so rich 
as they. 

Who is the older, you or John? —John is older than I. 

How long since you saw your brother?—I 
saw him yesterday. 

Combien de temps y a-t-il que vous n'avez vu votre frlre? 

—Je Vai vu hier. 

Is it long since you saw your sister? —Yes; it is a long time 
since I saw her. 

Is it long since you heard from your father? —No; it is 
not long since. 

Is it long since you went to Pa~is? —Yes; it is. 

Is it long since he came to see you? —No; not long. He 
came yesterday afternoon. 


9 


DIX-HUITIl^ME LEQON 


35 


What is your name?—My name is Edward. 

Comment vous appelez- vousf—Je m'dppelle Edouard. 

What is your sister’s name? —Her name is Mary. 

What is the name of your sister? —Her name is Mary. 
What is the name of that gentleman? —His name is Mr. 
Perkins. 

What are these young ladies’ names? —Their names are 
Mary and Lucy. 

What are you doing? —We are calling that gentleman. 
Why do you not also call that lady? —Because we do not 
know her. 

Shall you call your brother? —Yes; we shall. 

Are you not afraid? —No; I am not. 

NTavez-vous pas peter?—Non; je n'ai pas peur. 

Is she not afraid of you? —No; she is not afraid of me. 

Is she not afraid at night? —No; she is not. 

Are you not afraid of him? —No; we are not afraid of him. 
Are they not afraid of you? —No; they are not afraid of us. 
What are you afraid of? —We are afraid of nothing. 

What is he afraid of? —He is afraid of nothing. 

Do you see him every day?—No; I do not. 

Le voyez-vous tons les jours?—Non; je ne le vois pas tons 
les jours. 

Do you often meet her?—Yes; I meet her every day. 

Are you not often going to your friend’s? —I am going 
there every week. 

Does he often come to see you? —He comes to see me 
every week. 

Does your father send you money? —He sends me twenty 
dollars every month. 

Do you travel often? —O, yes; I go to Paris every year. 

He who studies English much will soon 
speak it well. 

Celui qui Hudie beaucoup V anglais le parlera bientdt. 

He who expects to travel in France must study French. 
He who travels much, learns much. 

He who talks best is he who thinks most. 


36 


ANGLAIS 


9 


He who sleeps late loses much time. 

The woman there at the corner is Mrs. Grant, and she 
whom you see farther away is her mother. 

Those who speak much are not always those who speak 
best. 

Those who are rich are not always happy. 

He does not know what lie is saying. 

II ne salt pas ce qu'il dit. 

I do not know what you want. 

Eat what you wish. 

Do not tell him what I am doing. 

Speak to him about what you have seen. 

He does not hear what we are saying. 

She does not understand what you say. 

Show her what you are doing. 

She has not told me what you have told her. 

I shall eat what you will offer me. 

Show them to me. — Do not show them to me. 

Montrez-les-moi.—Ne me les montrezpas. 

» 

Sell them to him. —Do not sell them to him. 

Give them to him. —Do not give them to him. 

Send them to us. —Do not send them to us. 

Tell it to them. —Do not tell it to them. 

Let us show it to them. —Let us not show it to them. 

Let us buy it from him. —Let us not buy it from him. 

Let us give them back to them. —Let us not give them 
back to them. 

Give me some. —Do not give me any. 

Let us sell some to them. — Let us not sell any to them. 

Have you paid for the goods that you have 
just received? 

A vez-vous pay£ les marchandises que vous venez de recevoir? 

Have you received the goods that you bought last week? 
I regret t6 tell you that we cannot sell your goods. 

He has made a good deal of money with the goods that I 
sent him. 


9 


DIX-HUITIEME LEQON 


37 


When shall I send the goods that you have bought from me? 
Please send them as soon as you can. 

What do you need?-I need nothing. 

De quoi avez-vous besom?—Je n’ai besoin de rien. 

Do you need my friend? —No; I do not need him. 

If you need anything, ask me. 

This child needs everything. 

When you need him, you will call him. 

When they need you, they will call you. 

When they need us, they will call us. 

They will need me in a few days. 

I long to see again the friends who m I left 

so long ago. 

II me tarde de revoir mes amis que j'ai quittis depuis si 

longtemps. 

Do you not long to go to the country? 

He told me that he longed to start for Europe. 

She assured me that she longed to see you. 

I saw these gentlemen yesterday; they longed to receive 
their goods. 

Has nobody called for me?—Nobody has 
called for you. 

N'est-il venu personne me demander?—Personne n'est 
venu vous demander. 

Has nobody called for him? —Nobody has called for him. 
Has nobody called for her? —Nobody has called for her. 
Has nobody called for us? —Nobody has called for us. 

Has nobody called for you? —Nobody has called for me. 
Has nobody called for them? —Nobody has called for them. 

1 am very well placed here; nobody sees me. 

Je suis trbs bien place ici; personne ne me voit. 

You are not well placed there; nobody will see you. 

You are not well placed there; you will see nobody. 
Nobody is sure of the future. 

I know no one here. 

I know no one, and no one knows me. 


38 


ANGLAIS 


§9 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


Pardon me, please; what was the 
name of the station that we left 
just now? 

I did not understand the name 
either. But it must be the sta¬ 
tion just this side of Scranton, for 
it is now five forty-five, and at 
five fifty-five we must arrive at 
Scranton. 

Thank you. In that case, I must 
get ready, for I am going to 
leave the train at Scranton. 

Are you not going farther? 

Yes; I shall remain there only 
over night, and shall continue 
my journey tomorrow morning. 
Are you acquainted in Scranton? 

O, yes; I stop there quite often. 

Can you recommend me a good 
hotel? 

Yes; go to the “Syndicate Hotel”; 
it is not expensive, and you will 
at least get a good bed there. 

Is the hotel far from the station? 
I have a heavy valise. 

No; but you can take a cab. You 
will find some at the station. 

* 

* * 

Do you wish a cab? 

Yes. 

Which way? 

To the *‘Syndicate Hotel.” Wait 
until I get my valise. 

Just give me your check, I will 
attend to it. 

Are there no porters here? 

No; the station is too small for 
that. 

* 

* * 

You wish, sir? 


Pardonnez-moi, je vous prie; quel 
est le nom de la gare que nous 
venons de quitter? 

Je n’ai pas compris le nom non 
plus. Mais ce doit etre la gare 
juste en-dega de Scranton, car il 
est maintenant cinq heures 
quarante-cinq, et a cinq heures 
cinquante-cinq nous devons ar- 
river a Scranton. 

Merci. Dans ce cas, il faut que 
je m’apprete, car je vais quit¬ 
ter le train a Scranton. 

N’allez-vous pas plus loin? 

Oui; je resterai ici seulement pour 
la nuit, et je continuerai mon 
voyage demain matin. Connais- 
sez-vous la ville de Scranton? 

Oh! oui; je m’y arrete souvent. 

Pouvez-vous me recommander un 
bon hotel? 

Oui; allez a P Hotel du Syndicat; 
il n’est pas cher, et vous aurez 
au moins un bon lit. 

L’hotel est-il loin de la gare? 
J’ai une lourde valise. 

Non, mais. vous pouvez prendre 
un fiacre. Vous en trouverez a 
la gare. 

* 

* * 

Desirez-vous un fiacre? 

Oui. 

Ou allez-vous? 

A PHotel du Syndicat. Attendez 
que j’aie ma valise. 

Donnez-moi votre bulletin, je 
m’en occuperai. 

N’y a-t-il pas de commission- 
naires ici? 

Non; la gare est trop petite pour 
cela. 

* 

* * 

Vous desirez, monsieur? 




9 


DIX-HUITIEME LEGON 


39 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


I want a room. 

Very well, sir. We have a good 
room on the second floor, but 
in the rear. 

It does not matter. I shall stay 
only until tomorrow morning. 
Have my valise carried up and 
pay the coachman. I will re¬ 
turn in an hour or two; I am 
going to visit an old friend who 
lives here. By the way, do you 
know Mr. Jackson? 

Which Jackson? The one who 
keeps a furniture store? 

Yes; where does he live? 

His store is on the corner. You 
can see it from here. 

Thank you. 

You are welcome. 

* 

* * * 

Is Mr. Jackson at home? 

Yes, sir; I will go and call him. 

Is it possible? Where do you 
come from, my dear friend, tell 
me? 

I am coming from New York, and 
did not want to miss this oppor¬ 
tunity to see you. 

That is right. I have wanted to 
see you for a long time. 

Yes; that is true enough, but 
really I have not been able to 
do so until now. Even today, 
I shall remain in town but a 
few hours; I must continue my 
journey tomorrow morning. 

I am sorry for that. I thought to 
have you with me for a few days. 

Now, tell me how you are. How 
is business? 


Je desire une chambre. 

Tres bien, monsieur. Nous avons 
une chambre tres jolie au 
deuxieme 6tage, mais sur le 
derriere. 

Cela ne fait rien. Je ne resterai 
que jusque demain matin. 
Faites monter ma valise et 
payez le cocher. Je viendrai 
dans une heure ou deux. Je 
vais rendre visite a un vieil ami 
qui demeure ici. A propos, 
connaissez-vous M. Jackson? 

Quel Jackson? Celui qui tient 
un magasin de meubles? 

Oui; ou reste-t-il? 

Son magasin est au coin. Vous 
pouvez le voir d’ici. 

Merci. 

A votre service. 

* 

* * 

M. Jackson est-il visible? 

Oui, monsieur; je vais l’appeler. 

Est-ce possible? D’ou venez-vous 
mon cher ami, dites-moi? 

Je viens de New-York, et je n’ai 
pas voulu manquer l’occasion de 
vous voir. 

C’est bien. Je desirais vous voir 
depuis si longtemps. 

Oui; c’est assez vrai, mais reelle- 
ment je n’ai pas pu le faire 
jusqu’a present. Meme 
aujourd’hui je ne resterai en 
ville que quelques heures; il 
faut que je continue mon voyage 
demain matin. 

J’en suis fache. Je m’attendais a 
vous avoir pour quelques jours. 

Maintenant, dites-moi comment 
vous allez, comment sont les 
affaires? 



40 


ANGLAIS 


§9 


EEYUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Not very good. We have bad 
times just now, but I hope 
things will be better again in 
a few months. 

I hope so. Well, you know that 
business is always slow at this 
time of the year. 

What became of our friend 
Charles? 

I have not seen him for a long 
while, but I have heard it said 
that he lives in Boston, and is 
doing very well. 

What is he doing? 

He is a physician. 

My friend, it is.getting late. I 
must be out tomorrow by six 
o'clock, and I am very tired. 
I think I shall go to bed. 

So shall I. Good by, old friend. 

Good by. 

* 

* * 

I want to continue my journey 
tomorrow upon the first train. 
Have me called at six o'clock 
at the latest? How much is my 
bill? I wish to pay it now, that 
I may lose no time in the morn¬ 
ing. 

Very well. Two dollars and fifty 
cents, plea.se. 

Here is five dollars. 

Thanks. Here is your change. 
Do you wish for anything more? 

Yes; please have some fresh water 
sent up to my room. 

I will send some up to you. Any¬ 
thing else? 

Yes; can you nave a cab ready 
for me tomorrow? 


Pas tres bonnes. Nous avons un 
mauvais moment maintenant, 
mais j'espere que cela deviendra 
meilleur dans quelques mois. 

Je l'espere. Mais, vous savez que 
chaque annee, au meme mo¬ 
ment, les affaires sont toujours 
calmes. 

Qu'est devenu notre ami Charles? 

Je ne l'ai pas vu depuis long- 
temps, mais j'ai entendu dire 
qu’il demeure a Boston, et qu’il 
reussit tres bien. 

Que fait-il? 

II s'est fait medecin. 

Mon ami, il se fait tard. Je dois 
partir demain vers six heures, 
et je suis tres fatigue. Jepense 
que je vais aller me coucher. 

Et moi aussi. Au revoir, mon 
vieil ami. 

Au revoir. 

-* 

* * 

Je veux continuer mon voyage 
demain par le premier train. 
Faites-moi appeler a six heures 
au plus tard. Combien vous 
dois-je? Je veux payer mainte¬ 
nant afin de ne pas perdre de 
temps demain matin. 

Tres bien. Deux dollars et cin- 
quante ‘‘cents," s'il vous plait. 

Voici cinq dollars. 

Merci. Voici votre monnaie. De- 
sirez-vous autre chose? 

Oui; je vous prie de faire monter 
de l'eau fraiche dans ma cham- 
bre. 

Je vous en enverrai. Et apres? 

Oui; pouvez-vous faire venir un 
fiacre pour moi demain? 




9 


DIX-HUITIEME LECON 


4l 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


If you wish. 

Please. Good night. 

* 

* * 

Have you my valise, coachman? 

Yes, sir. 

How much time have we? 

Twenty minutes, at the most, 
before the train starts. 

Let us hasten, then. 

Do you wish to check your valise? 

Yes; but I must buy my ticket 
first. Where is the ticket office? 

Next to the first-class waiting 
room. 

Thanks; just put the valise there; 
I will check it. Here is your 
money. 

Thank you; good by. 

Give me a ticket to Denver, please. 

One way? 

No; give me one to Denver and 
return. 


Oui; si vous voulez. 

S’il vous plait. Bonne nuit. 

* 

* * v 

Avez-vous ma valise, cocher? 

Oui, monsieur. 

Combien de temps avons-nous? 

Vingt minutes au plus avant le 
depart du train. 

Hatons-nous, alors. 

Voulez-vous faire enregistrer votre 
valise? 

Oui; mais il faut que j’achete 
mon billet d’abord. Ou est le 
guichet? 

Pres de la salle d’attente des pre¬ 
mieres. 

« 

Merci. Mettez ma valise la; je la 
ferai enregistrer. Voici votre 
argent. 

Merci; au revoir. 

Donnez-moi un billet pour Denver 
s’il vous plait. 

Aller? 

Non; donnez-moi aller et retour. 


PHRASES 

This is not exactly what you or¬ 
dered, but perhaps it will do. 

If you have nothing better, I will 
try to make this do. 

That will do; I understand now. 

That will do, I will not take up 
any more of your time, and I 
am much obliged to you for the 
information. 

Can he correspond in English? 

Will the account be paid on Sat¬ 
urday? 

Will your agent be in London 
next month? 


TJSUELEES 

Ce n’est pas exactement ce que 
vous avez commande, mais peut- 
etre fera-t-il votre affaire. 

Si vous n’avez rien de meilleur, 
j’essaierai de m’en contenter. 

Cela suffit; je comprends main- 
tenant. 

Cela suffit; je ne veux pas prendre 
davantage de votre temps, et je 
vous suis bien oblige pour les 
renseignements. 

Peut-il corresponds en anglais? 

Le compte sera-t-il pay6 samedi? 

Votre agent sera-t-il a Londres le 
mois prochain? 





42 


ANGLAIS 


9 


PHRASES USUELEES—(Continuees) 


We are not quite sure; the goods 
we want to buy are either of 
English or German manufac¬ 
ture, so he will go to London 
or Berlin, as he may decide. 

It will not be worth quite so 
much in a month or two. 

It will be scarcely worth while, I 
am afraid. 

They cannot get better goods any¬ 
where. 

We think they are of American 
manufacture. 

I have just made up your account; 
it comes to ^46 8s. 6d. 

I cannot just now, but I hope to 
be able to do so in two or three 
days. 

I shall not be able to buy before 
next month. 

Give me as much again. 

They have agreed about the price. 

We will do nothing of the kind. 

How do you feel? 

They got what they deserved. 

This is all that I have left of it. 

They are hard to please. 

Is she pleased with that? 

He has what he wants. 

It does not work the same way 
here. 

It will last as long as it can. 

One never knows what he is after. 

He has taken French leave. 

That does not count. 

I received one hundred dollars on 
account. 

I have given him his due. 

They are people of our acquaint¬ 
ance. 

I am among acquaintances. 


Nous n’en sommes pas surs; les 
marchandises que nous voulons 
acheter sont anglaises ou alle- 
mandes, done il peut aller a 
Londres ou a Berlin selon qu’il 
decide. 

II ne vaudra pas tout a fait autant 
dans un mois ou deux. 

Lai bien peur que cela n’en vaille 
pas la peine. 

Ils ne peuvent pas trouver de 
meilleures marchandises nulle 
part. 

Nous croyons qu’ils sont de fabri- 
que americaine. 

Je viens de relever votre compte; 
il se monte a ^46 8s. 6d. 

Je ne puis en ce moment, mais 
j’espere pouvoir le faire dans 
deux ou trois jours. 

Je ne pourrai pas acheter avant le 
mois prochain. 

Donnez-m’en deux fois autant. 

Ils sont convenus du prix. 

Nous n’en ferons rien. 

Comment vous trouvez-vous? 

Ils out regu ce qu’ils ont merit6. 

Voila tout ce qu’il m’en reste. 

Ils sont diffleiles a contenter. 

Est-elle contente de cela? 

Il a son affaire. 

Il n’en va pas de meme ici. 

Au bout le bout. 

On ne sait jamais de quoi il re- 
tourne avec lui. 

Il a file a l’anglaise. 

Cela n’est pas de compte. 

J’ai regu cent dollars a-compte. 

Je lui ai donne son compte. 

Ce sont des gens de notre con- 
naissance. 

Je suis en pays de connaisances. 



9 


DIX-HUITIEME LECON 


43 


PHRASES TJSTJELLiES—(Continuees) 


From that direction, there is noth¬ 
ing to be afraid of. 

Put it down in writing. 

He is never satisfied with what 
one does for him. 

That is everything. 

That is a matter of course. 

It may be said by the way. 

He understands nothing about it. 
How far have you got with it? 
This is as far as I have got. 

I am not at home to anybody. 
How many are twice two? 

I do not know what to put him to. 
I shall do nothing of the kind. 

I have no business with him. 

He has but just come in. 
Opportunity makes the thief. 
From one thing to another. 

The hardest part of the business 
is over. 

That is too bad. 

Take care that you understand 
what she will say. 

Take care that he does not go 
out. 

He takes good care hot to go there. 
You come at the right time. 

I let that go. 

Why is it not so? 


De ce cdte, il n’y a rien a craindre. 

Couchez-le par 6crit. 

II n’est jamais satisfait de ce 
qu’on fait pour lui. 

C’est tout dire. 

Cela va sans dire. 

Soit dit en passant. 

II n’y entend rien. 

Ou en etes-vous? 

Voila ou j’en suis. 

Je n’y suis pour personne. 
Combien font deux fois deux? 

Je ne sais que faire de lui. 

Je n’en ferai rien. 

Je n’ai que faire de lui. 

II ne fait que d’entrer. 

L’occasion fait le larron. 

De fil en aiguille. 

Le plus fort de 1’affaire est pass6. 

Voila qui est fort. 

Ayez soin d’entendre ce qu’elle 
dira. 

Prenez garde qu’il ne sorte. 

II n’a garde d’y alter. 

Vous arrivez a la bonne heure. 

Je vous passe cela. 

A quoi tient-il que cela ne soit? 


EXERCICE ECRIT 

Repondez en anglais aux questions suivantes. Ecrivez 
les questions et les reponses en double expedition, et 
envoyez-nous les deux copies pour correction, mais n’enre- 
gistrez pas cette leqon sur un cylindre vierge jusqu’a ce que 
nous vous ayons retourne une copie corrigee: 

1. Has anybody come to see you this morning? 

2. Have you a permanent position at the present time. 

3. Is there a river near your home? 




44 


ANGLAIS 


9 


4. Will you recommend the English course to your 
friends? 

5. Is the station far from your house? 

6. At what time do you usually receive your mail? 

7. How many inhabitants are there in the city where 
you.live? 

8. Do you speak English fluently now? 

9. Give us a little description of your town. 

10. Are there many manufactories where you live? 

11. How old are you? 

12. Do you long to go to Paris? 

13. Do you speak English with your friends? 

14. Is it long since you heard from your friend? 

15. What time is it? 

16. Count from fifty-eight to sixty-seven. 

17. What do you drink at dinner? 

18. Have you ever missed your train? 

19. Have you invested any money in some enterprise? 

20. Suppose you are coming to a hotel to spend two days 
in the city; write out your conversation with the clerk. 


ANGLAIS 

(PARTIE 10) 


DIX-NEUVIEME LECON 


CYLINDEE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 


YOCABULAIEE 

Note. — A partir de cette legon, le vocabulaire ne sera plus enregistre 
sur votre cylindre phonographique. Vous devez maintenant etre assez 
familier avec les sons anglais pour qu’il soit inutile d’entendre la pro¬ 
nunciation des mots pris separement. II doit vous etre facile de les 
comprendre dans les “Phrases et Conversation.” Par la suppression 
du vocabulaire nous pouvons aussi enregistrer deux legons sur le meme 
cylindre, sans diminuer la longueur de la conversation. 


awful, terrible 
the ball, le bal, la balle 
the blow, le coup 
to carry, porter, -insur¬ 
ance, etre assure 
to carve, decouper 
the cliff, la falaise, le rocher 
the club, le club 
to commit, commettre 
to cut, couper 
the dress, la robe 
the duck, le canard 
each other, Vun V autre 
the edge, le bord, le tran- 
chant 

especially, specialement 
to fall, tomber 
the finger, le doigt 
frantic, fou {de douleur) 
the grief, la douleur{morale), 
le chagrin 


to happen, arriver 
herself, elle-meme, se 
himself, lui-mime, se 
horrible, horrible 
the insurance, Vassurance 
{sur la vie, contre Vincendie) 
to jump, sauter 
lively, vif, gai 
myself, moi-meme, me 
never mind, n'importe 
off, loin, de dessus 
one another, Vun Vautre 
oneself, soi-meme, se 
ourselves, nous-mimes , nous 
to practice, pratiquer, s'ex- 
ercer h 

the recital, la repetition, le 
concert (donnipar des Sieves) 
to slip, glisser 
to stumble, faire un faux 
pas, trSbucher 


For notice of copyright, see page immediately following the title page 

l 10 






2 


ANGLAIS 


§10 . 


VOCABtTLAIRE— (Continue) 


the suicide, le suicide 
to take care, avoir soin , 
prendre soin 

tea party, le thi {reunion) 
terrible, terrible 
tliemselves, eux-memes, elles- 
mentes, se 


to throw, jeter 
wealthy, riche 
to wear, porter (mettre les 
habits) 

to wonder, se demander, 
s’ imaginer 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION 


I. c. s. 

English Record No. 19 

O, I forgot 1 to bring your 
music, Isabel. 

Never mind ; 2 do not trouble 
yourself 3 about it. I shall 
not want it until the day 
before the concert. 

I must practice some myself. 
What are you going to 
wear, Isabel? 

The dress I wore at the last 
recital. I have not worn 
it much. Do you not like 
it? 

It is very pretty. I wish I 
had one that I liked so 
\yell. But one 4 cannot have 
everything that one wants. 

No, not everything; still one 
can do a great deal for 
oneself with but 6 little. 

Yes; and then we can help 
one another 6 in many ways. 
I am especially fortunate, 
for my sisters are such 7 
lively girls, and we all do 


i. c. s. 

Cylindre d’Anglais No. 19 

Oh, j’ai oublie d’apporter 
votre musique Isabelle. 

N’importe; ne vous mettez 
pas en peine a ce sujet. 
Je n’en ai pas besoin jus- 
qu’au jour avant le concert. 

II faut que je m’exerce un 
peuaussi. Comment allez- 
vous vous habiller, Isa¬ 
belle? 

Je mettrai la robe que j’avais 
au dernier concert; je ne 
l’ai pas beaucoup portee. 
Ne l’aimez-vous pas? 

Elle est tres jolie. Je vou- 
drais en avoir une que 
j’aime autant que celle-la. 
Mais on n’a pas toujours 
tout ce qu’on veut. 

Non, pas tout; cependant on 
peut s’aider beaucoup soi- 
meme avec peu de chose. 

Oui; nous pouvons nous aider 
les uns les autres de bien 
des manieres. Je suis 
specialement heureuse, car 
mes soeur-s sont si gaies et 





10 


DIX-NEUVIEME LECON 


3 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 
everything we can for each 
other. 


Yes, indeed; I know you do. 
What is the matter with 
your 8 hand, Emma? 

Why, I cut myself yesterday. 

I tried to carve a duck at 
the table; my knife slipped 
and cut my finger. 

I am so sorry. You must 
take better care of your¬ 
self. What a horrible ac¬ 
cident happened at the 
Country Club last Satur¬ 
day! 

Was it an accident? Someone 
told me that Mr. Bonner 
committed suicide. I heard 
that he threw himself off 9 
the cliff into the river. 

O, no; it was an accident. I 
saw it myself. Mr. Bonner 
jumped to stop a ball, 
stumbled, and fell over the 
edge. When they found 
him, he was dead. 10 It was 
awful. 

Isn’t 11 it terrible? I wonder 
what his family will do? 

It is a hard blow to all of 
them. Mrs. Bonner is 
almost frantic with grief. 
Happily, they are not in 
want. Mr. Bonner was 


nous, faisons tout ce que 
nous pouvons les unes pour 
les autres. 

Oui, vraiment; je sais que 
vous le faites. Qu’avez- 
vous a la main, Emma? 

Oh! je me suis coupee hier. 
J’ai essaye de decouper un 
canard a table; mon cou- 
teau a glisse, et je me 
suis coup6e au doigt. 

J’en suis bien fachee. Vous 
devez prendre plus de soins 
de vous-meme. Quel hor¬ 
rible accident est arrive au 
club champetre samedi 
dernier! 

Etait-ce un accident? Onm’a 
dit que M. Bonner s’6tait 
suicide. J’ai entendu dire 
qu’il s’dtait jete du rocher 
dans la riviere. 

Oh, non; c’etait un. accident. 
Je l’ai vu moi-meme. M. 
Bonner sauta pour arreter 
une balle, fit un faux pas, 
et tomba du bord. Quand 
on l’a trouvd, il etait mort. 
C’6tait horrible. 

N’est-ce pas que c’etait ter¬ 
rible? Je me demande ce 
que sa famille va faire. 

C’est un rude coup pour tous. 
Mme. Bonner est presque 
folle de douleur. Heureuse- 
ment, ils ne sont pas dans 
le besoin. M. Bonner 6tait 




4 


ANGLAIS 


10 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


quite wealthy, 12 you know, 
and besides he carried a 
large insurance. But I 
must say good by, Isabel. 
Mrs. Sloane asked Ethel 
and myself to come to her 
tea party this afternoon. 

You will come again soon, 
will you not? Good by. 


tres riche, vous savez, et 
de plus il etait assure pour 
une forte somme. Mais je 
dois vous dire au revoir, 
Isabelle. Mme. Sloane a 
demande a Ethel et a moi 
de venir a son the cet apres- 
midi. 

Vous reviendrez bientot, 
n’est-ce pas? Au revoir. 


REMARQUE S 

1. Les verbes suivants qui apparaissent dans cette legon 
sont irreguliers. Comme ils sont d’un usage frequent 
dans la conversation, il importe que vous les etudiiez 
soigneusement. 


Infinitif 
to bring, apporter 
to wear, mettre (des habits) 
to take, prendre 
to throw, jeter 
to fall, tomber 


Imparfait 

I brought, J’apportais 
I wore, Je mettais 
I took, Je prenais 
I threw, Je jetais 
I fell, Je tombais 


Participe Passe 
brought, apporte 
worn, mis 
taken, pris 
thrown, jeti 
fallen, tombl 


Les verbes suivants appartenant a cette legon ou aux 
legons precedentes restent invariables aux trois formes. 


Infinitif 
to cost, codter 
to cut, couper 
to let, laisser 
to put, mettre 
to set, mettre 
to shut, fermer 


Imparfait 
I cost, je codtais 
I cut, je coupais 
I let, je laissais 
I put, je mettais 
I set, je mettais 
I shut, je fermais 


Participe Passe 
cost, codtl 
cut, coupe 
let, laisse 
put, mis 
set, mis 
shut, ferme 


2. Le mot mind peut etre un nom ou un verbe en anglais. 
Comme nom, il a un sens tres etendu, et s’applique a l’intel- 
ligence, a la sensibilite et a la volonte. Il signifie dans cette 
fonction esprit , intelligence , sentiment , go tit, desir , envie , 
mimoire , etc. Notez ci-apres quelques-unes de ses differentes 
acceptions. 




10 


DIX-NEUVIEME LEgON 


5 


I have chahged my mind, Je me suis ravish. 

I have a mind to work, J’ai envie de travailler. 

That is what he had in mind, C’est ce qu'il avait present d I’esprit. 

That puts me in mind . . . , Cela me rappelle .... 

He does everything after his mind, II fait tout a son gre. 

I find this to my mind, Je trouve ceci d mon go fit. 

I spoke my mind to him, Je lui ai dit ma pen see. 

Comme verbe, to mind a aussi differentes acceptions, et se 
traduit par ecouter, regarder d, s'occuper de , rappeler , etc. comme 
on peut le voir dans les exemples suivants. 

He minds his business, II s'occupe de ses affaires. 

I do not mind the expense, Je ne regarde pas a la dfpense. 

This child does not mind his parents, Cet enfant 7i'obeit pas a ses 
parents. 

He did not mind what I said, It s'inquiUe peu de ce que je dis. 

I do not mind it, Je n’y fais pas attention, Cela m'est eg at. 

Nevermind! N'importe! 

Never mind her, Do not mind her, Ne /’ecoutez pas, Ne faites pas 
attention a elle. 

Do not mind that, Ne faites pas attention a cela. 

Mind that child , Faites attention a cette enfant. 

3. Les verbes reflectifs sont moins communs en anglais 
qu’en frangais. II n’y a en anglais de verbes reflectifs que 
ceux qui expriment reellement le retour du sujet sur lui- 
meme. Les pronoms reflectifs employes dans la conjugaison 
des verbes reflectifs sont formes des pronoms my, his, her, 
it, our, your, them, one, auxquels on ajoute la particule self, 
merne. II faut remarquer que ces pronoms se traduisent de 
deux manieres en frangais. Ainsi ?nyself signifle moi-meme 
mais dans la conjugaison d’un verbe, il se traduit par le 
pronom frangais reflectif me. II en est de meme des autres. 
En voici la liste. 

A 1’Infinitif: oneself, se, ou soi-mhne 

SlNGULIER 

litRE Personne: myself, me, ou moi-meme 

2eme Personne: youi'self, te, vous, toi-meme, ou vous-mime 

I liimself, se, ou lui-meme 
lierself , se, ou elle-meme 
itself, se, lui-meme ou elle-meme 


6 


ANGLAIS 


10 


Pluriel 

Iere Personne: ourselves, nous, ou nous-memes 
2:eme Personne: yourselves, vous, ou vous-memes 
3eme Personne: tliemselves, se, ou eux-memes 

Conjtigaison d’un Verbe Reflectif. —1\ est facile de conjuguer 
un verbe reflectif anglais. Cette conjugaison differe en deux 
points de la conjugaison frangaise: 

(a) Le pronom reflectif se place apres le verbe en anglais; 
en frangais il le precede. 

( b) L’auxiliaire to have , avoir, est employe dans tous les 
temps composes en anglais, au lieu que nous nous servons 
de l’auxiliaire etre en frangais. Etudiez les differentes formes 
d’un verbe reflectif dans les exemples suivants. 

Infinitif 

to dress oneself, s'habiller 
Present 

I dress myself, I am dressing myself, Je m'habille. 
You dress yourself, Tu t'habilles, Vous vous habillez (sing.). 
He di*esses liimself, II s'habille. 

She dresses herself, Elle s'habille. 

It di*esses itself, II , Elle s'habille. 

We dress ourselves, Nous nous habillons. 

You dress yourselves, Vous vous habillez (plur.). 

They dress themselves, Ils, elles s'habillent. 

Imparfait 

I dressed myself, Je m'habillais, Je m'habillai. 

He di*essed himself, II s'habillait. 

etc. 

Parfait Indefini 

I have dressed myself, Je me suis habille. 

She has dressed herself, Elle s'est habillee. 

You have dressed yourselves, Vous vous etes habilles. 

etc. 

Plus-oue-Parfait 

I had dressed myself, Je m'etais habille. 

They had dressed themselves, Ils s'Haient habilles. 

etc. 


§10 


DIX-NEUVIEME LEQON 


7 


Futur 

I sliall dress myself, Je m'habillerai. 
He will dress liimself, II s'habillera. 

etc. 


Imperatif 

Dress yourself, Habillez-vous (sing.), Habille-toi. 

Dress yourselves, Habillez-vous (plur.). 

Let us dress ourselves, Habillons-nous. 

Let him dress himself, Qu'il s’habille. 

Let her dress herself, Qu'elle s'habille. 

Let them dress themselves, Qu'ils, Qu’elles s'habillent. 


La formation de la phrase affirmative et de la phrase 
negative ne presente aucune difficulty. II suffit de suivre les 
regies donnees precedemment pour les verbes ordinaires, le 
pronom reflectif etant toujours place apres le verbe. Les 
quelques exemples qui suivent peuvent servir de moclele. 


Do you dress yourself? Are you dressing yourself? Vons habillez- 
vous ? 

I do not dress myself, I am not dressing myself, Je nem'habille pas. 

Do you not dress yourself? Ne vous habillez-vous pas? 

Did he dress himself? S'habillait-il? 

Did he not dress himself? Ne s'habillait-il pas? 

He did not dress himself, II ve s'habillait pas? 

Has she dressed herself? S'est-elle habillee? 

Had she not dressed herself? Ne s'Hait-ellepas habillee? 

She had not dressed herself, Elle ne s'etait pas habillbe. 

Shall we dress ourselves? Nous habillerons-nous? 

Shall we not dress ourselves? Ne nous habillerons-nous pas? 

He will not dress himself, II ne s’habillera pas. 

Do not dress yourself, Ne t'habille pas, Ne vous habillez pas. 

Let them not dress themselves, Qu’ils ne s’habillent pas. 

4. Le pronom indefini on, est traduit ici par one en 
anglais. II y a encore d’autres manieres de le rendre. 
Lorsque on est employe dans un sens universel, il peut se 
traduire par one, man, homme, we, you, people, etc.: 


One works to live, 
Man works to live, 
We work to live, 
People work to live,. 


On travaille pour vivre. 


When you are on the roof of this building, you can see all New York. 
Quand on est stir le toit de ce bdtimeut, on peut voir tout New-York, 



8 


ANGLAIS 


10 


Si on designe un certain nombre d’individus sans com- 
prendre celui qui parle, on le traduit par they. 

In that family, they work too much, On travaille trop dans cette 
famille. 

What language do they speak in Switzerland? Quelle langneparle- 
t-on en Suisse? 

Enfin, on se traduit souvent en anglais par la forme pas¬ 
sive, comme on le verra dans une des legons suivantes. 

5. Le mot but se traduit ordinairement par mais. II 
a aussi d’autres significations. II signifie seulemeut, ou 
ne ... . que. 

I have but one sister, Je n'ai qu'une soeur. 

He had but one dollar with him, II avait seulement un dollar sur lui. 

But, et but for ont le sens de sans, excepti, etc. 

But for him, I was dead, Sans lui/’etais mort. 

I gave her all my French books but one, Je lui ai donne tous mes 
livres franqais excepte un. 

6. Les verbes reciproques sont ceux qui ont deux sujets 
qui agissent reciproquement l’un sur l’autre. Si Louise, par 
exemple aime Marie, et que Marie aime aussi Louise, nous 
l’exprimons par el les s'aiment et le verbe s'aimer est appele 
verbe reciproque. En frangais, les verbes reflectifs et les 
verbes reciproques se conjuguent de la meme maniere, 
c’est-a-dire avec l’aide des memes pronoms reflectifs. II 
n’en est pas de meme en anglais. Pour les verbes recipro¬ 
ques, on remplace les pronoms myself, himself, etc. par les 
pronoms reciproques each other ou one a7iother, qui sont 
toujours invariables. Le premier s’emploie toujours quand 
il s’agit de deux personnes seulement ou de deux choses, 
quelquefois meme en parlant de plus de deux; le second 
ne peut s’employer que si on parle d’au moins trois person¬ 
nes. Comme le sujet est toujours compose, les verbes ne 
peuvent se conjuguer qu’au pluriel. La conjugaison des 
verbes reciproques ne presente aucune difficulty II suffit de 
mettre a la place des pronoms reflectifs each other ou one 
another selon le cas, comme on peut le voir dans les exemples 
suivants: 


10 


DIX-NEUVIEME LECON 


9 


We love each other, Nous nous aimons Pun Vautre. 

They will love each other, Its s'aimeront Pun Vautre. 

You have loved each other, Vous vous etes aimes Pun Pautre. 

Let' us love one another, Aimons-nous les tens les autres. 

7 . Tel que en frangais se traduit par such as. 

Such as they are, I love them, Tels qu’ils sont, je les aime. 

Such as it is, give it to me, Donnez-le-moi , tel qiPil est. 

Such as peut aussi traduire ceux qui , celles qui, etc.: 

Such as are rich must do good, Ceux qui sont riches doivent faire 
beaucoup de bien. 

Such as have true friends are happy, Ceux qui ont de vrais amis 
sont heureux. 

Lorsque tel precede un nom, il se traduit par such et 
l’article indefini se place entre such et ce nom; s’il est suivi 
de que , ce dernier se traduit par that. 

I cannot speak to such a man, Je ne peux pas par ter a un tel homme. 

He has such talent for music that everybody admires him, II a un 
tel talent pour la musique que tout le monde Padmire. 

Rien de tel , rien de pareil, se traduisent par no such thing , 
any such thing. 

I have had no such thing, 1 r , . , 

T . t n ° . }Jenai rien eu de pareil. 

1 have not had any such thing, J 

She says it is warm here; it is no such thing, Elle dit qiPil fait 
chaud ici; il n'en est rien. 

8. Quand il est question des parties du corps, au lieu 
d’employer l’article comme en frangais, on se sert de l’adjectif 
possessif en anglais. On emploie de meme l’adjectif pos- 
sessif en anglais au lieu de notre forme reflective dans les 
memes cas. 

I have cut my finger, Je me suis coupe le doigt. 

What is the matter with your hand? Qu'avez-vous a la main? 

9. Le mot off montre la separation, la distance. Il est 
souvent joint a un verbe, et entre dans un grand nombre de 
locutions. En voici quelques-unes. 

It is a little way off, C'est a peu de distance. 

I live two miles from this town, Je demeure a deux milles de cette 
ville. 


10 


ANGLAIS 


§10 


This is my day off, C’est mon jour de conge. 

They are well off, I Is sont tres riches. 

That matter is now entirely off my hands, Cette affaire n'est plus 
maintenant entre mes mains. 

Take this off the table, Otez ceci de la table. 

The affair is off, L'affaire est manquee. 

Off with you! Allez-vous-en! 

10. II ne faut pas confondre l’adjectif dead avec le par- 
ticipe passe died. Tous deux sont traduits en frangais par 
mort. 

He has died since, It est mort depuis. 

Did you know that Mr. Jackson is dead? Saviez-vous que M. 
Jackson est mort? 

11 . Isn't est l’abreviation de is not. 

12. La plupart des adverbes de maniere se forment des 
adjectifs en ajoutant le suffixe ly qui correspond a notre 
terminaison ment. 


Adjectifs 
rich, riche 
happy, heureux 
pleasant, agrtable 
splendid, splendide 
certain, certain 


Adverbes 


richly, richement 
happily, heureusement 
pleasantly, agreablement 
splendidly, splendidement 
certainly, certainement 


EXERCICE ORAL 


Please bring me some oranges, Mary.—I 
brought some yesterday; you will find 
them in the pantry. 

Apportez-moi des oranges , Marie.— J’en ai apporte hier; 
nous les trouverez dans Voffice. 

I am bringing you a basket of apples for the children. 

He brought her one of the prettiest rings that I have ever 
seen. 

If he has brought me anything, I shall bring it to you, 
mother. 

After he had brought her the roses, she spoke to him. 



11 


10 DIX-NEUVIEME LEQON 

If I am to wear this dress, I must finish my 
work. 

SHI me faut mettre cette robe , il faut que je finisse mon 
travail. 

She is wearing: the dress that she wore last year. 

He will wear a tall hat tonight. 

I have worn this dress for two years. 

When she had worn my dress twice, she returned it to me. 

I took him home in a cab. 

Je Vai reconduit chez lui en fiacre. 

Shall I take this with me? 

Are you taking anything for your cold? 

She has taken all of the fruit and some of the other things. 
He had taken ten dollars from the drawer. 

She threw the hall into my neighbor’s 
window. 

Elle a jete la balle dans la fenttre de mon voisin. 

I am throwing away all my old books. 

Why did you throw them away? 

We have thrown six men out of that window. 

He says he will throw himself from the top of that cliff. 
They had thrown away four boxes. 

It fell to the floor, I do not know where. 

II est tombS sur le plancher, je ne sais pas oil. 

She fell down-stairs yesterday. 

It is falling. 

We fell out of the window. 

I know I shall fall. 

We have fallen. 

They have fallen farther than you can imagine. 

Yes, but you had already fallen. 

It has already cost me fourteen dollars. 

Cela m’a deja codte quatorze dollars. 

It is costing too much. 

I am costing you a great deal. 

That will cost you a dollar and a half. 

They cost thirty dollars. 


12 


ANGLAIS 


They cost twenty-one cents apiece. 

They have cost but little. 

The hat cost a hundred dollars. 

I shall cut myself, if you do not help me. 

Je me couperai si vous ne m'aidez pas. 

She is cutting the table. 

Let him cut the paper. 

You will cut it, if you are not careful. 

She was so careless that she cut herself. 

We had cut them before you came. 

I have let the house. 

J’ai lout la maison. 

When did you let your rooms? 

Why did you let him do it? 

Shall you let him visit you? 

I will let Lucy in. 

We had let every room before you asked for them. 
He let me go. 

Please put that on the table.—Put it there 
yourself. 

Mettez cela sur la table, je vous prie.—Mettez-Vy vous- 
mtme. 

He is putting too much money into it. 

Did they put it there? 

She put the plates in the cupboard. 

He will put it where we cannot find it. 

They have put the little girl to bed. 

They had already put Lucy to bed. 

I am setting out some roses. 

Je replante quelques roses. 

Set it down then. 

Will they not set them on the table? 

Have you set the table as I told you to do? 

He sets everything in the right place. 

Had you set the table? 


13 


§10 DIX-NEUVI^ME LECON 

Will you not shut the door, if he comes to see 
you? 

Ne fermerez-vous pas la porte s’il vient vous voir? 

Shut the window, please. 

He is shutting all the doors in the house. 

She shut the door when we called yesterday. 

Will he shut the knife? 

He has shut out all his friends. 

They had shut the window before they saw us. 

The child will not mind his mother.—Never 
mind, she will have her way. 

L'enfant n'icoutera pas sa mire. —N’importe. Elle fera ce 
qu'elle voudra. 

Do you call to mind what I told you yesterday? 

I have a great mind to go home. 

He will call it to mind, if you ask him. 

Why do you not speak your mind? 

Mind your own business. 

Some people never will mind their own business. 

He did not mind what his father said. 

Have you anything in mind? 

She said she had half a mind to work. 

He can never call anything to mind. 

To mind one’s own business seems to be a difficult thing. 
Never mind if she did say unpleasant things about you. 
You do not need to mind a few dollars; you will not miss a 
hundred or two. 

Do not mind the price; it is nothing. 

He will not mind me. 

She never speaks her mind. 

He will not help himself; why do you do any¬ 
thing for him? 

II ne s'aidera pas lui-mime; pourquoi Vaidez-vous? 

God (Dieu) helps those who help themselves. 

She is helping herself. 

I have helped myself. 

She can never enjoy herself. 


14 


ANGLAIS 


10 


Those who cannot enjoy themselves will never please 
others. 

She is always looking at herself in the mirror. 

Why do you trouble yourself about so small a matter? 
Come, warm yourself by this fire. 

Man cannot see himself as others see him. 

Do not trouble me about that; go trouble yourself. 

Help yourself to the bread. 

Did you enjoy yourself at the theater? 

Do not cut yourself.—Be careful or you will cut yourself. 

Love one another. 

Aimez-vous les uns les autres. 

They love each other dearly. 

We are always looking to each other for help. 

Most brothers assist one another. 

We have known each other more than five years. 

They cannot help each other very much; they are too poor. 
We shall miss each other. 

We loved each other, although many did not believe it. 
Those girls are always talking about one another. 

We have enjoyed ourselves immensely. 

They warmed themselves by the fire in my room. 

One does not always work willingly. 

On ne travaille pas toujours volontiers. 

We cannot always read the same thing. 

When we have not what we like, we must like what we 
have. 

One is not always fortunate. 

Do they give many concerts this year? 

They told me that your uncle is ill. 

They do not teach French in that institution. 

What language do they speak in Holland? 

What do they drink in France? 

He read all your French books but two. 

II a lu tons vos livres frangais excepti deux. 

She was but twelve when she left school. 


§10 DIX-NEUVIEME LEQON 15 

I cannot pay my bill today, I have but a few dollars 
with me. 

But for your brother, I had lost my way. 

We have known him but a few weeks. 

She is not in want; she needs but little. 

There are but few days more before the holidays. 

But I will not pay sucli a price as that. 

Mais je ne paierai pas un tel prix. 

Such as he is, I love him still. 

I have never seen such a man. 

It is such a beautiful house that I must buy it. 

It is such a heavy ring that I cannot wear it. 

It is no such thing; I have sold my house. 

There is no such thing in the world. 

His office is not far off. 

Son bureau n'est qu'a peu de distance. 

She fell off the roof; she was dead when they found her. 
You went off and never came back. 

The pier is still about two miles off. 

Today is my day off duty. 

Never put off till tomorrow what you can do today. 

They say that Mr. Warren is well off. 

Do not carry off that basket. 

Sit by the window'and look as far off as you can. 

His business fell .off a good deal last year. 

I wonder where my friend has gone. 

Je me demande oil mon ami est alU. 

She wondered why he did not come home for dinner. 

But you will not wonder when I tell you about it. 

He is wondering what to do. 

He wondered where you were yesterday. 

They have wondered about it because we have not told 
them. 

Ho not trouble yourself about dinner; I shall 
not come home. 

Ne vous mettez pas en peine pour le diner; je ne ren- 
trerai pas. 


16 


ANGLAIS 


10 


Why does he trouble himself about his neighbor’s business? 
Why shall we trouble ourselves about your affairs? 

They are constantly troubling themselves about my success. 
Yes; but they trouble themselves too much. 

Take care, coachman, do not run over that 
little girl. 

Prenez garde , cocher, n’Scrasez pas cette petite fille. 

Take care or you will fall out of the window. 

He took care of me when I was ill. 

Will you take care of this for me? 

Take care of yourself, or you will take cold. 

I happened to be in the pantry just now, and 
I saw that all the eggs were gone. 

It m'est arrive d’alter dans Voffice tout a I'heure, et j'ai 
vu que les eeufs sont partis. 

I know it will happen some time. 

Mr. Grant happened in my office yesterday. 

Although it happens to be a very bad day, I intend to go 
down-town. 

It has already happened oftener than I expected. 

It had happened about an hour before the ship came in. 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


Where is this morning’s paper? 
I cannot find it anywhere. 

I am reading it now. Do you 
want it, father? 

No, Alice, I am in no hurry. Is 
there anything new? 

Not much. There is some talk 
about a war in Europe next 
spring. 

What? A war in Europe? That 
can never happen. 

Yes, and here is an account of an 
accident at the Country Club. 
Why, Mr. Jackson .... 


Ou est le journal du matin? Je 
ne puis le trouver nulle part. 

Je le lis maintenant. Le voulez- 
vous, papa? 

Non, Alice; je ne suis pas pressd. 
Y a-t-il quelque chose de nou¬ 
veau? 

Pas beaucoup. On parle d’une 
guerre en Europe pour le prin- 
temps prochain. 

Quoi? Une guerre en Europe? 
Cela ne peut pas §tre. 

Oh! voici le recit d’un accident 
au Club champetre. M. Jack- 
son .... 




10 


DIX-NEUVIEME LECON 


17 


REVUE ET CONYEES 

To Mr. Jackson? Read it out 
loud, Alice. 

“Yesterday afternoon a terrible 
accident happened to Mr. Jack- 
son and Mr. Grant near the 
Country Club. Mr. Grant 
nearly lost his life; the doctor 
says that Mr. Jackson will re¬ 
cover, but that Mr. Grant’s 
condition is doubtful.” 

I must go and see Mr. Jackson at 
once. 

“About half past five, on his way 
home from the club, Mr. Jack- 
son saw some one slip over the 
edge of the cliff above the river. 
He ran to the place and tried 
to catch the man, but he was 
too late. It was Mr. Grant. 
He had fallen into the river far 
below. With two others Mr. 
Jackson went down to assist 
Mr. Grant. The man was al¬ 
most dead when they found 
him. On their way back with 
Mr. Grant, Mr. Jackson slipped; 
he fell down, too, and was so 
unfortunate as to fall on a knife 
that he had in his hand and to 
cut himself badly. There were 
many people at the club at 
the time, and all were much 
broken up over the affair. Both 
men have many friends.” Isn’t 
it terrible, papa? 

Yes; indeed Alice. I have long 
thought that walk near the cliff 
was a bad one —a very bad one. 
You must not go near there 
again after dark, and you must 
never go near the edge again. 


ATIOX— (Continuees) 

M. Jackson! Lisez a haute voix, 
Alice. 

“Hier apres-midi un terrible acci¬ 
dent est arrive a M. Jackson et 
a M. Grant pres du Club cham- 
petre. M. Grant a manque de 
perdre la vie; le docteur dit que 
M. Jackson se retablira, mais 
que la condition de M. Grant 
est douteuse.” 

II faut que j’aille voir M. Jackson 
de suite. 

“Vers les cinq heures, en retour- 
nant chez lui du Club, M. Jack- 
son vit quelqu’un glisser du 
bord des rochers au-dessus de 
la riviere. II courut aussitot 
de ce cote, et essaya de saisir 
l’homme, mais il etait trop 
tard. C’etait M. Grant, il etait 
tombe dans la riviere au-des- 
sous. Avec deux autres per- 
sonnes, M. Jackson courut au 
secours de M. Grant. Il etait 
presque mort quand ils le trou- 
verent. En revenant charges 
de M. Grant, M. Jackson glissa 
et tomba; il eut le malheur de 
tomber sur un couteau qu’il 
tenait a la main et se coupa. 
Il y avait beaucoup de person- 
nes au club en ce moment, et 
tous out ete tres frappes par ces 
deux accidents. Ces deux hom¬ 
ines comptent beaucoup 
d’amis.” N’est-cepas terrible, 
papa? 

Oui; vraiment, Alice. Je pense 
depuis longtemps que cette 
promenade pres des rochers est 
tres mauvaise. Je neveux plus 
que vous y alliez lorsqu’il fait 
nuit; et je vous defends d’aller 
pres du bord. 



18 


ANGLAIS 


10 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION— (Continuees) 


No, papa. Here is the paper; I 
see nothing else that is interest¬ 
ing. 

Thank you. I will read this to 
your mama; she will want to 
know about it. Where is she — 
up-stairs? 

I think so. 

* 

* * 

Bridget, when Ethel comes in, will 
you tell her to come into the 
library? 

Yes, Miss Alice. 

* 

* * 

O, you were not gone long, Ethel. 

No, I hurried because I knew you 
wanted me. Well, what shall 
we do this morning? Suppose 
we go over to Anna’s; I think 
no one will be there this morn¬ 
ing. We will have an hour or 
two before she goes to take her 
music lesson. Then we can walk 
down-town with her. 


Are you ready? 

* 

* * 

Hello, Anna! Were you at the 
lunch at the club last night? 

No, did you girls both go? 

Yes. We had a delightful time. 
Harry Warren was there. He 
spoke of you so many times. 

Is that so? I want to see him. 
I have not seen him for two 
years. 

He is going back to school next 
week. Of course he will call on 
you before he goes. 


Non, papa. Voici le journal; je 
ne vois plus rien d’interessant. 

Merci. Je vais le lire a votre 
maman. Elle desire savoir 
quelque chose de cette affaire. 
Ou est-elle? En haut? 

Je pense que oui. 

* 

* * 

Brigitte, quand Ethel rentrera, 
voulez-vous lui dire de venir 
dans la bibliotheque? 

Oui; Mile. Alice. 

* 

* * 

Oh! vous n’etes pas sortie long- 
temps, Ethel. 

Non; je me suis depechee, parce 
que je savais que vous aviez 
besoin de moi. Eh bien! qu’al- 
lons-nous faire ce matin? Vou¬ 
lez-vous que nous allions jusque 
chez Anna? Je pense qu’elle 
n’aura personne ce matin. Nous 
aurons une heure ou deux avant 
qu’elle aille prendre sa legon de 
musique. Alors, nous pourrons 
marcher jusqu’en ville avec elle. 

Etes-vous prete? 

* 

* * 

A116, Anna! Etiez-vous au 
“lunch” au club hier soir? 

Non; y etes-vous allees toutes 
deux? 

Oui; nous nous sommes bien 
amusees. Henri Warren y etait. 
II nous a parle de vous plusieurs 
fois. 

Est-ce vrai? Je voudrais bien le 
voir. Je ne l’ai pas vu depuis 
deux ans. 

II retourne a l’ecole la semaine 
prochaine. II viendra sans doute 
vous voir avant de partir. 



19 


§10 DIX-NEUVIEME LEgON 

REVUE ET CONVERSATION - (Coutinuees) 


Can we not have a little party 
tonight ? 

Why of course. Will you give it, 
or shall I? 

It does not matter. Which shall 
it be? 

Just as you say. 

Well, come to my house. I will 
send Harry a note this after¬ 
noon. 

Yes; at what time? 

O, come early. Come at five. 

We will be on time. Now we must 
go; we will walk down-town 
with you. 


Ne pourrions-nous pas avoir une 
petite soiree aujourd’hui ? 

Mais certainement. Chez vous, ou 
chez moi? 

Cela m’est egal. Ou la voulez- 
vous? 

Comme vous voudrez. 

Alors, venez chez moi; j’enverrai 
un mot a Henri cet apres-midi. 

Oui; et a quelle heure? 

Oh! venez de bonne heure; venez 
a cinq heures. 

Nous y serons a temps. Mainte- 
nant, il nous faut partir. Nous 
marcherons jusqu’en ville avec 
vous. 


PHRASES 

How old may her brother be? 

Do you feel the draft when I open 
the window? 

How long does the train stop here? 

At least she told me so. 

He is leaving for England. 

In America, return tickets are 
good for a month. 

Give him your ticket; he will 
bring you your check at once. 

How much money have you with 
you? 

I have very little money with me. 

Does he understand everything I 
say? 

Can he understand you when you 
speak fast? 

Can you change a twenty-dollar 
bill for me? 

Do you want silver or paper? 


USUELLES 

Quel age peut avoir son frere? 

Sentez-vous le courant d’air quand 
j’ouvre la fenetre? 

Combien de temps s’arrete-t-on 
ici? 

Au moins me Pa-t-elle dit. 

II part pour l’Angleterre. 

Les billets d’aller et retour sont 
valables pour un mois en 
Amerique. 

Donnez-lui votre billet; il vous 
apportera votre bulletin tout de 
suite. 

Combien d’argent avez-vous sur 
vous? 

J’ai peu d’argent sur moi. 

Comprend-il tout ce que je dis? 

Peut-il vous comprendre quand 
vous parlez vite? 

Pouvez-vous me changer un billet 
de vingt dollars? 

Voulez-vous de Pargent ou des 
billets. 





20 


ANGLAIS 


10 


PHRASES USUELLES—(Continuees) 


How much does that amount to? 

It amounts to eight dollars and 
twenty-five cents. 

Is that all you need? 

No; I have some small things to 
buy yet. 

She is very tired and wishes to go 
to bed at once. 

What is the price of this room 
by the week? 

I do not like this room; show me 
another. 

No one knows it better than he. 

Put yourself in my place. 

Somebody is ringing. Somebody 
is knocking. Can it be Mr. 
Jackson? 

You are very kind to have thought 
of me. 

We do not know the value of 
health until we have lost it. 

So much the better. 

So much the worse. 

Such a one. 

Such as it is. 

Of the same mind. 

Keep this over night. 

He looked it all over. 

Make it over again. 

Over and over again. 

It is all over with him. 

I wonder why he came. 

He died in want. 

What do you want of me? 

I want Louis to do this for me. 

It is far better. 

Will that do? 

He is worth a great deal of 
money. 

They speak well of you. 

Much good may it do him. 


Combien cela fait-il en tout? 

Cela fait en tout huit dollars et 
vingt-cinq “cents.” 

Est-ce tout ce dont' vous avez 
besoin. 

Non; j’ai encore quelques petites 
choses a acheter. 

Elle est tres fatiguee, et elle desire 
se coucher immediatement. 

Quel est le prix de cette chambre 
par semaine. 

Je n’aime pas cette chambre; 
montrez-m’en une autre. 

Nul ne le sait mieux que lui. 

Mettez-vous a ma place. 

On sonne. On frappe. Serait-ce 
M. Jackson? 

Vous etes bien. aimable d* avoir 
pense a moi. 

On ne connait la valeur de la sante 
que lorsqu’on l’a perdue. 

Tant mieux. 

Tant pis. 

Un tel, une telle. 

Tel quel, telle quelle. 

Du meme avis. 

Gardez ceci pendant la nuit. 

II l’a regarde partout. 

Faites-le encore une fois. 

Sans cesse. 

C’en est fait de lui. 

Je me demande pourquoi il est 
venu. 

II est mort de misere. 

Que voulez-vous de moi? 

Je veux que Louis fasse ceci pour 
moi. 

C’est bien mieux. 

Est-ce bien comme cela? 

II a beaucoup de bien au soleil. 

Ils disent du bien de vous. 

Grand bien lui fasse. 




10 


DIX-NEUVIEME LEgON 


21 


PHRASES USUELLES—(Continuees) 


An accident happened to your 
uncle. 

What a horrible day! 

They received us kindly. 

We cannot do that ourselves. 

It happened as 1 say. 

She did it herself. 

Those reasons are sufficient in 
themselves. 

They are pleased with one an¬ 
other. 

He knows that better than any one. 

We see each other often. 

It must be lively there. 

It is a thing that happens every 
day. 

We have not spoken to each other 
for a year. 

Well! What is it about? 

He lives in the country not far 
from here. 

I shall do it not only for him, but 
also for his children. 

No one is ever too old to learn. 

I thank you for the trouble that 
you have given yourself. 

I have not seen him since his 
return. 

Those who will not work shall 
not eat. 

A man is known by the company 
he keeps. 

If you have a mind for it. 


II est arrive un accident a votre 
oncle. 

Quelle affreuse journee! 

Ils nous ont regus avec bonte. 

Nous ne sommes pas capables de 
faire cela nous-memes. 

Cela est arrive comme je le dis. 

C’est elle-meme qui l’a fait. 

Ces raisons sont suffisantes en 
elles-memes. 

Ils sont contents les uns des 
autres. 

II sait cela mieux que personne. 

Nous nous voyons souvent. 

II doit y faire gai. 

C’est une chose qui se fait tousles 
jours. 

II y a un an que nous ne nous 
parlons pas. 

Eh bien! De quoi est-il question? 

II demeure a la campagne non 
loin d’ici. 

Je le ferai non seulement pour 
lui, mais aussi pour ses enfants. 

Personne n’est jamais trop age 
pour apprendre. 

Je vous remercie de la peine que 
vous vous etes donnee. 

Je ne l’ai pas vu depuis son re¬ 
tour. 

Ceux qui ne veulent pas travailler 
ne doivent pas manger. 

Dis-moi qui tu hantes, je te dirai 
qui tu es. 

Si le coeur vous en dit. 


EXERCICE PIIONOGRAPIIIQUE 

Aussitot qtie vous aurez requ votre copie de la dix-huitieme 
legon corrigee par nous, enregistrez-la sur un cylindre 
vierge, et envoyez-le-nous en suivant les directions donnees 
precedemment. 




22 


ANGLAIS 


10 


VINGTIEME LECON 


CYLINDRE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 


VOCABULAIRE 


antique, antique, vieux 
the apartment, Vapparte- 
ment 

the architect, Varcliitecte 
the armchair, le fauteuil 
attractive, attractif 
the bed, le lit 
the bedstead, le bois de lit 
the brass, le cuivre 
the brick, la brique 
brown, bi'un ' 
the buffet, le buffet 
to build, bdtir 
the chair, la chaise 
the choice, le choix 
to choose, choisir 
to complete, completer , finir 
the contractor, /’ entre¬ 
preneur 

the cornice, la corniche 
the difference, la difference 
to display, montrer , etaler 
the disposition, la disposi¬ 
tion 

the door, la porte 
elegant, elegant 
the extension table, la 
table h 7-allonges 


the exterior, Vextdrieur 
the family, la fa7nille 
to forgive, pardonner 
the foundation, la fondation 
the frame, la cha7pe?ite, le 
cadre 

the frame house, la maison 
de bois 

to furnish, 7neubler 
the furniture, les meubles, 
Vameublenient, le mobilier 
generous, genereux 
the ground, la terre 
the ground floor, le rez-de- 
chaussee 

to harmonize, harmoniser 
to insist, insister 
the interior, Vinterieur 
the iron, le fer 
the mahogany, Vacajou 
the marriage, le mariage 
to marry, marier 
the mason, le ma(on 
moreover, de plus 
to move in, emminager 
to move out, demenager 
nicely, bien, delicatement 
the oak, le chene 





10 VINGTIEME LEQON 23 

VOCABULAIEE- (Continue) 


tlie opinion, Vopinion 
tlie plasterer, le pldtrier 
really, rSellement 
red, rouge 
to rent, louer 

to settle, s'itablir , payer une 
dette 

tlie sofa, le canape 

tlie square, le carre, la place 

tlie suite, Vappartement 


to swear, jure* 

sweet, doux 

tlie taste, le godt 

tlie temper, le caractere 

tlie tenant, le locataire 

tlie trimming, la garniture 

to turn, tourner 

white, blanc 

to win, gagner 

yellow, jaune 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION 


/. c. s. 

English Record No. 20 

I heard, Mr. Scott, that you 
are building a house in 
Monroe Square. When 
shall you have it com¬ 
pleted? 1 

I think the plasterers will 
have finished by the last 
of this month, and then we 
shall begin at once to work 
on the interior. By the 
first of May, too, I hope I 
shall have done 2 a good 
deal on my new 3 country 
home. The contractor told 
me yesterday that the 
masons had finished the 
foundations. Moreover, 
my architect promised to 
turn the keys over to me 
before the first of June. 

O, you are putting up an¬ 
other house? Shall you 
move into it? 


i. c. s. 

Cylindre d’Anglais No. 20 

J’ai entendu dire, M. Scott, 
que vous batissez une mai- 
son sur la Place Monroe. 
Quand sera-t-elle finie? 

Je pense que les platriers 
auront fini vers la fin de ce 
mois, et alors nous com- 
mencerons a travailler de 
suite a l’interieur. Vers 
le premier mai, j’espere 
finir aussi une grande partie 
du travail dans ma nou- 
velle maison de campagne. 
L’entrepreneur m’a dit hier 
que les magons avaient 
fini les fondations. De 
plus, mon architecte m’a 
promis de me remettre les 
clefs avant le premier juin. 

Oh! vous construisez une 
autre maison? L’habiterez- 
vous? 





24 


ANGLAIS 


10 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Yes; as soon as I have fur¬ 
nished it. 

I am sorry to lose so good a 
neighbor/ I shall miss 5 
you at the club. 

Not at all; as soon as I have 
settled 6 in the country, I 
shall be at the club as often 
as ever. We are going to 
have such an attractive 
home; and the furniture I 
have bought is really ele¬ 
gant. In the parlor* the 
chairs, the armchairs, and 
the sofa are of mahogany; 7 
in the dining room, the 
buffet, the chairs, and the 
extension table 8 are of an¬ 
tique oak; and all the beds 
have iron bedsteads with 
brass trimmings. 

Is it a frame or a brick 
house ? 

It is a frame house, except 
that below the ground floor 
it is of brownstone. 

What color have you chosen 
for the exterior? 

My wife insists upon yellow 
for the house, and a deep 
red for the roof. Will they 
not harmonize nicely with 
white doors, windows, and 
cornices ? 


Oui; aussitot que je l’aurai 
meublee. 

Je suis fache de perdre un 
aussi bon voisin. Vous me 
manquerez au club. 

Pas du tout; aussitot que je 
serai installe a la cam- 
pagne, je viendrai aussi 
souvent qu’autrefois. Nous 
allons avoir une maison 
bien attrayante, et les meu- 
bles que j’ai achet^s sont 
reellement dlegants. Dans 
le salon, les chaises, les 
fauteuils et le sofa sont en 
acajou; dans la salle a man¬ 
ger, le buffet, les chaises 
et la table a rallonges sont 
en vieux chene; et tous les 
lits sont en fer avec des 
garnitures de cuivre. 

Est-ce une maison en bois ou 
en brique? 

C’est une maison en bois, 
except^ la partie au-dessous 
du rez-de-chaussee qui est 
en pierre brune. 

Quelle couleur avez-vous 
choisie pour l’exterieur? 

Ma femme insiste pour que la 
maison soit peinte en jaune 
et le toit en rouge fonce. 
Ces couleurs ne s’harmo- 
niseront-elles pas bien avec 
les portes, les fenetres et 
les corniches qui seront 
blanches ? 



§10 VINGTIEME LEQON 25 

PHRASES ET CONVERSATION— (Continuees) 


Yes; your choice displays the 
most exquisite taste. Then 
you really intend to rent the 
house on Monroe Square ? 

O, yes; it is an apartment 
house, and I have already 
let every suite. 

I am sorry. Only yesterday 
I met Mr. Porter, and he 
asked me about those very 9 
apartments. 

Indeed? By the way, Mr. 
Porter married Miss Ford, 
did he not ? 

No; the marriage will not 
take place until after his 
mother has returned from 
Switzerland. 

I know Miss Ford’s family 
very well, and I am sorry 
not to have Mr. and Mrs. 
Porter for tenants. I had 
a difference of opinion with 
Miss Ford’s mother several 
years ago, but I have quite 10 
forgiven her. At one time, 
I swore never to speak 11 to 
her again; but her sweet 
temper and generous dis¬ 
position have won the day. 


Oui; votre choix montre un 
gout exquis. Alors, vous 
avez reellement l’intention 
de louer la maison sur la 
Place Monroe? 

Oh! oui; c’est une maison a 
plusieurs appartements et 
je les ai deja tous lou6s. 

J’en suis fache. Hier meme, 
j’ai rencontre M. Porter, et 
il m’a demand^ des rensei- 
gnements au sujet de ces 
memes appartements. 

Vraiment? A propos M. Por¬ 
ter a Spouse Mile. Ford, 
n’est-ce pas? 

Non; le mariage n’aura pas 
lieu avant que sa mere soit 
rentree de Suisse. 

Je connais tres bien la famille 
de Mile. Ford, et je suis 
fach6 de ne pas avoir M. et 
Mme. Porter comme loca- 
taires. J’ai eu quelques 
differences d’opinion avec 
la mere de Mile. Ford, il y 
a quelques annees, mais je 
lui ai pardonnd entiere- 
ment. A un certain moment 
j’avais jur6 de ne jamais 
plus lui parler; mais son 
doux caractere, ses dispo¬ 
sitions gen^reuses m’ont 
gagne (ont gagne le jour). 



26 


ANGLAIS 


10 


REMARQUES 

1. Nous introduisons dans cette legon un nouveau temps 
du verbe; c’est le futur anterieur. II est forme du futur du 
verbe to have , et du participe passe du verbe que l’on conju- 
gue. II est evident que vous devez suivre les regies que 
nous avons donnees precedemment (Legon 14) pour l’emploi 
de shall et de will. Le futur anterieur, dans les declarations, 
est comme suit. 


to go, alter 


Futur Anterieur 


I sliall liave gone, 

He | 

She twill have gone, 
It J 

We shall have gone, 
You will have gone, 

They will have gone, 


Je serai alle 

It sera alle 
Elle sera allee 

Nous serous alles 
Vous serez alles 
Its seront alles 
Elies seront allies 


Comme en frangais, le futur anterieur represente une 
action qui, bien que s’accomplissant dans l’avenir; sera 
passee quand une autre aura lieu. 

The ship will sail before I shall have reached the pier, Le bateau 
aura fait voile avant que je sois arrive a Venibarcadbre. 

When shall you have completed your house? Quand aurez-vous 
fini votre maison? 


Ce temps du verbe est d’un emploi assez rare en anglais. 
On ne l’emploie jamais en conversation et peu souvent en 
ecrivant. Son usage montre generalement de l’affectation. 
Au lieu de s’en servir, on le remplace par le parfait indefini. 

I shall leave when I have finished my business, Je partirai qtcand 
f aurai fini mes affaires. 

Dans cette phrase, I have finished est mis pour I shall have 
finished. En voici d’autres exemples. 

I shall see her as soon as she has come, Je la verrai aussitot qu'elle 
sera arrivee. 

When he has gone, 1 shall tell her that you were here, Je lui dirai 
que vous etes id quand il sera parti. 


10 


VINGTIEME LECON 


27 


He will go to Paris when you have returned his money, It ira a 
Paris quand vous lui aurez rendu son argent. 

My sister will be glad when you have forgiven her, Ma sceur sera 
contente quand vous lui aurez pardonne. 

2. Les verbes suivants qui sont donnes dans cette legon 
sont irreguliers. Etudiez-les soigneusement afin d’etre farni- 
liers avec toutes leurs formes, car ils sont d’un usage frequent 
dans la conversation. 


Infinitif 

to build, batir 
to choose, choisir 
to do, faire 
to forgive, pardonner 
to swear, jure* 
to win, gagner 


Imparfait 

I built, Je batis 
I chose, Je choisis 
I did, Je fis, Je faisais 
I forgave, Je pardonnai 
I swore, Je jurai 
I won, Je gagnai 


Participe Passe 

built, bdti 
chosen, choisi 
done, fait 
forgiven, pardo?inb 
sworn, jure 
won, gagne 


3. On ne fait pas de distinction entre nouveau et neuf en 
anglais. Tous deux sont traduits par new. 

Le mots news (prononcez l\y), nouvelles, signifiant les ren- 
seignements que l’on regoit d’un evenement, est toujours au 
singulier en anglais. 


What is the news? Quelles nouvelles? 

No news is good news, Pas de nouvelles, bonnes nouvelles. 


4. En anglais, lorsqu’un adjectif est precede d’un des 
adverbes so, si; as, aussi; too, trop, l’article indefini a, ou an 
se place entre l’adjectif et le nom, au lieu de preceder l’ad- 
verbe comme en frangais. 

I have never seen so fine a house, Je n'ai jamais vu line si belle 
maison. 

He has bought that estate at too high a price, II a achete cette pro¬ 
priety a un prix trop eleve. 

I have as good a house as your brother, J’ai une aussi bonne maison 
que votre frere. 

5. Le verbe to miss, manquer, dans le sens de regretter 
l’absence de quelqu’un est un verbe actif en anglais, tandis 
qu’il est neutre en frangais. II en resulte une anomalie dans 
la traduction. Le nom, qui est complement direct en anglais, 
devient le sujet du verbe en frangais, et le pronom qui est 
sujet du verbe anglais devient complement indirect du verbe 


28 


ANGLAIS 


10 


en frangais. Par exemple, la phrase I miss my friends devient 
en frangais: Mes amis me manquent , c’est-a-dire, vies amis man- 
quent a moi. II en est de meme dans les phrases suivantes: 

I miss my mother, Ma mere me manque. 

He misses you, Vans lui manquez. 

They miss her very much, Elle leur manque beaucoup. 

We miss our uncle so much since he went to Europe, Notre oncle 
nous manque tant depuis qu'il est parti pour VEurope. 

6. Notez que le present est employe en anglais apres les 
adverbes de temps comme when, quand, as soon as, aussitot 
que, as, comme, etc. pour exprimer que l’action aura lieu 
dans le futur, alors que nous employons le futur en frangais. 

I shall come when I have finished, Je viendrai quand faurai fini. 

I shall see you as soon as you come, Je nous verrai aussitot que vous 
viendrez. 

Do as you please, Faites comme vous voudrez. 

7 . Pour exprimer la matiere d’un objet, on se sert en 
anglais de l’expression made of, fait de. 

What is this table made of? It is made of oak. En quoi est cette 
table? Elle est en chine. 

On peut aussi supprimer le mot made qui est alors sous- 
entendu, et n’employer que la preposition of. 

This table is of mahogany, Cette table est en acajou. 

That chair is of oak, Cette chaise est en chine. 

Lorsqu’on n’exprime pas le verbe en frangais, comme une 
robe de soie, une bague en or, etc., le nom de la matiere precede 
le nom en anglais, et la preposition of ne se traduit pas. Ce 
nom de matiere devient alors un veritable adjectif en anglais. 

a silk dress, une robe de soie 

a gold ring, une bague en or 

8. Nous avons deja dit que la langue anglaise possede 
une grande facilite pour former des noms composes. Cette 
legon en contient un certain nombre. 

On peut former un nom compose en anglais dans les cas 
suivants. II faut remarquer alors que le nom de l’objet 


10 


VINGTIEME LECON 


29 


qualifie suit toujours, contrairement au frangais, le nom du 
qualificatif qui devient alors un veritable adjectif, par conse¬ 
quent invariable. 

1. Si le qualificatif indique la matiere, le temps, le lieu. 

a silk dress, une robe de soie 
a gold chain, une chaine en or 
Sunday school, Pecole du dimanche 
a summer dress, une robe d'ete 
a kitchen table, une table de cuisine 
a parlor armchair, uu fauteuil de salon 

2. Si le qualificatif indique l’usage, la nature ou le 
moteur de l’objet. 

an extension table, une table a rallonges 
a dining-room, une salle a manger 
a tea table, une table h the 
a dessert knife, un couteau a dessert 
a water mill, un moulin a eau 
a steamship, un bateau a vapeur 

3. Si le qualificatif indique l’occupation. 

an apple-woman, une manchande de pommes 
a milk-woman, une laitiere 
the milkman, le laitier 
the butterman, le marchand de beurre 

9. II y a plusieurs manieres de traduire mime en anglais. 

1. Lorsque le mot meme a le sens de precisement, exacte- 
vient, il se traduit par very. 

He asked me about that very thing, II m'a demande apris la mime 
chose. 

This is the very thing I need, C'est la chose mime dont j'ai besoin. 

2. Place apres plusieurs noms ou adjectifs, meme equivaut 
a un adverbe, et se traduit par even. 

My parents, my sisters, and even my little brother were there, Ales 
parents , tnes sceurs et mime mon petit fr'ere itaient la. 

She is very agreeable, even charming, Elle est tris agreable, meme 
charmante. 

I have not even seen him, Je ne I'ai mime pas vu. 


30 ANGLAIS § 10 

3. Lorsque le meme indique une comparaison, on traduit 
par the same. 

I have the same book that you have, J'ai le meme livre que vous. 

He buys the same tea that I do, II achUe le meme the que moi. 

10. Le mot tout se traduit aussi de differentes manieres 
en anglais: 

1. Pris dans un sens collectif, on le traduit par all. 

I sent you all my books, Je vous ai envoye tons mes livres. 

He has all he can do, II a tout ce qu'il pent faire. 

Do not spend all your money, Ne depensez pas tout votre argent. 

2. Si l’on veut indiquer la totalite, tout devient whole 
en anglais. 

I visited the whole country, J'ai visite tout le pays. 

He was so hungry that he ate a whole chicken, II avait si faint qu'il 
a mange tout un poulet. 

3. Dans le sens de chaque , il se traduit par every. 

We speak to him every day, Nous lui parlons tons les jours. 

I know every man here, Je connais tous les homines id. 

4. S’il signifie tout ct fait, il se rend par quite. 

He is quite ill, Il est bien (tout a fait) malade. 

She is not quite ready, Elle n'est pas tout a fait prete. 

5. Devant un adjectif suivi de que, on ne traduit pas que, 
et tout devient though ou although. 

Although rich, he is not happy, Tout riche qu'il est , il n'est pas 
heureux. 

Although attentive, he learns nothing, Tout attentif qu'il soil, 
il n'apprend rien. 

11. Devant un infinitif, not, ne . . . pas, never, ne . . . ja¬ 
mais, se placent avant la preposition to. 

He ordered me not to send you the goods, Il m'a commande de ne 
pas vous envoyer les marchandises. 

He departed, never to return, Il est parti pour ne jamais revenir. 

Mais l’expression no more, ne plus, se place ordinairement 
apres l’infinitif. 

I swore to say no more about it, J'ai jure de ne plus en parler. 

It is hard to see him no more, C'est dur de ne plus le voir. 


§10 


VINGTIEME LEQON 


31 


EXERCICE ORAL 

Tomorrow he will have given away at least 
a thousand dollars. 

Demain, il aura donnk au moins mille dollars. 

When he shall have come home, tell him about it. 

I shall have lost three hundred dollars before next Sunday. 
After you shall have explained the matter to him, send 
him to me. 

She will have written him before you can see him. 

I shall have met him three times if I see him today. 

They will have traveled a thousand miles this year. 

We shall have asked her a second time. 

Do not do it; he will have had another invitation. 

You will have been writing two weeks tomorrow. 

We shall have been walking more than an hour, if we do 
not go home soon. 

Day after tomorrow I shall have been seeking a position 
for more than three months. 

You will have been thinking about that for a year tomor¬ 
row night; why do you not make up your mind? 

You will have thought it over carefully, I suppose, before 
you answer him. 

I shall have walked two miles in thirty-five minutes. 

He will have said all that you or I can say. 

She will have invested everything she has, if you do not 
see her quickly. 

When she has finished her lesson, I will 
talk with her. 

Quand elle aura fini sa legon, je lui parlerai. 

After we have inspected the building, he will go to walk 
with us. 

When I have seen the bridge, I am coming home. 

As soon as I have won her, I shall marry her. 

When you have set the table, call us to dinner. 

Before you have left the house, I will tell him to see you. 


32 


ANGLAIS 


10 


When you have closed the office, Charles, will you not 
come directly home? 

After we have visited your friends, we shall take the train 
to 33d Street. 

Before he has learned anything about it, we shall be 
far away. 

I am doing what you asked me to do. 

Je fais ce que vous ni’avez demande. 

She does whatever she pleases. 

We do not like to walk so fast. 

They are doing the best they can. 

I will do as you tell me. 

You shall do as your mother wishes. 

I did not want to see him. 

You did not do what we expected. 

They did as my uncle required. 

You have done wrong. 

He has done right to tell me about it. 

We shall have done as you asked before you can reach 
the store. 

I shall have done everything possible. 

You will have done him a great deal of good. 

They will have spoken to him about it. 

We shall have answered everything. 

They had done too much. 

I choose this one; which one do you like 
best? 

Je choisis celui-ci; lequel aimez-vous le mieux? 

He is choosing the best colors. 

I am choosing the right book. 

We choose to go this way. 

Why do you choose that street? 

He chose to tell the truth. 

She chose an apple; what did you choose? 

We chose one of the best oranges in the basket. 

I chose to go one dar-k night. 

We shall not choose this kind of day. 


10 VINGTIEME LEQON 

He will not choose the book you wish. 

I shall choose what pleases me best. 

Shall you choose the front room? 

He has chosen the best of everything. 

I have chosen this house. 

What vegetables have you chosen? 

What paintings has he chosen? 

He had chosen the large picture before I came. 

She had chosen to walk when I arrived. 

You will have chosen the best, believe me. 

I will have chosen them all, if you are not careful. 
They will have chosen the worst; I know them. 

Shall you forgive him?—I have forgiven him. 
Lui pardonnerez-vous?—Je lui ai pardonne. 

I forgive you, sir. 

He forgave her before she had asked him. 

We forgave them all—did you forgive them, too? 

I forgave both men; they did not intend to do it. 

She forgave me, although I was wrong. 

It was not right, and yet she forgave him. 

I will forgive him, if you will. 

Shall you forgive every one?—Certainly, I shall. 

Will he forgive me, if I ask him? 

I have quite forgiven you, my friends. 

They have forgiven everybody. 

He had forgiven one; then he forgave the other. 
After they had forgiven me, I went to them again. 
She will have forgiven him, if you do not hurry. 

We will have forgiven them all, sir. 

I liave sworn not to forgive him. — Do not say 
that, swear not at all. 

J'ai jure de ne pas lui pardonner. — Ne dites pas cela, ne 
jurez pas du tout. 

He swore not to speak to him. 

I swear to do my best. 

She swears to forgive him. 

You swore not to tell any one. 


34 


ANGLAIS 


10 


He swore that no one knew of it. 

They all swore to do their best. 

He has sworn not to go there. 

We have sworn never again to drive so fast. 

Shall you swear to keep it to yourself? 

Will you swear to drink no more? 

I will have sworn, sir. 

I shall have sworn to tell all, if they do not come soon. 
She will have sworn to everything. 

They will have sworn to remain at home, before we can 
get there. 

If you win her, swear to marry her. 

Si vous vous faites aimer d'elle, jurez de Vepouser. 

I am winning too much money. 

She wins everything. 

Can you win that for me? 

I will win it for you, dearest. 

We shall win whatever we try for. 

He won a great deal. 

We won the best house in town. ' 

They are winning all the money. 

He has won the best woman in the world. 

I shall have won all before they arrive. 

You will have won the best of everything. 

It is too fine a day to stay in the house; let 
us take a walk. 

II fait trop beau temps pour rester dans la maison , prome- 
nons-nous. 

That is too fine a hat for you. 

She is too fine a girl for such a man as he is. 

It will be too fine a dress for a poor man’s wife. 

He was too fine a man for the position. 

It was too fine a concert for the money. 

No, I cannot buy it; it is too fine a table for my house. 

I shall miss you; when are you coming hack? 

Vous me manquerez; quand reviendrez-vous? 

It is missing; I cannot find it anywhere. 


10 


VINGTIEME LEQON 


35 


If you miss me much, mother, you will write, will you not? 
He knows that he will miss me. 

I missed it yesterday. Where can it be? 

She missed her book. Did you find it? 

They will miss us, if they take that street. 

Let us hurry, or we shall miss the train. 

We missed you somewhere. How did it happen? 

She is not so good a musician as your sister. 

Elle n'est pas aussi bonne musicienne que votre sosur. 

This is not so large a house as yours. 

This is not so pretty a garden as is Mrs. Grant’s. 
Although he is handsome, he is not so tall a man as your 
father. 

It cannot be so sweet an orange as this. 

It is not so fine a building. 

You will not have seen so beautiful a painting in many 
months. 

This is not so cold a day as yesterday. 

It is as pretty a glass as I have ever seen. 

C’est le plus joli verre que j’ aie jamais vu. 

He will be as kind a man as your father was. 

It is as safe an investment as I know of. 

It was as attractive a home as I have ever read about. 

He is as good as he is agreeable. 

She is as rich as Henry Adams. 

It is as pleasant today as yesterday. 

Have you heard the news? —No; is there any 
news in this morning’s paper? 

Avez-vous entendu les nouvelles? — Non; y a-t-il du nouveau 
dans le journal de ce matin ? 

There was news of Mr. Jackson’s accident. 

We received the news last night. 

One of my friends has had news of him. 

What kind of news do you call that? It is no news at all. 
O, for some news! Give us news, news, news! 

There is not much news in this paper. 

Have you had any news of your brother? 


36 


ANGLAIS 


§10 


I shall have news of him soon. 

You will have had all the news before your sister comes 
home. 

Come into the garden, and I will tell you all the news. 

As soon as I come, tell him to go. 

Aussitdt que je viendrai, dites-lui de partir. 

He is coming as soon as you are. 

As soon as you finish that book, lend it to me. 

As soon as I find it, I will give it to you. 

She will take another lesson as soon as her teacher comes 
back from Europe. 

Buy it as soon as you can; prices are going up. 

Bring it to me as soon as possible; I need it badly. 

As you cannot do it yourself, I will do it 
for you. 

Comme vous ne pouvez pas le faire vous-meme, je le ferai 
pour vous. 

As it is far to the factory, let us take a cab. 

As he is running home, he will not be late. 

As you know, it is a warm day. 

She is as pretty a child as you can see anywhere. 

As you are winning so much, lend me ten dollars. 

You will see that it is as I tell you. 

When you go after the paper, do not forget 
to buy a new ticket. 

Quand vous irez chercher le journal , n'oubliez pas d'acheter 
un nouveau billet. 

When you are playing, you must be careful. 

Will you give it to me when I come to see you? 

When he has a thousand dollars his father will invest it 
for him. 

When it rains, put up your umbrella. 

When you wonder at such things, what shall you say 
to this? 

What is this table made of? —It is made of 
wood. 

En quoi est cette table?—Elle est en bois. 



10 


VINGTIEME LEGON 


37 


Is it made of hard wood ? 

No, I told you that it was made of iron. 

She insisted that it was made of brass. 

This pen is made of —well, what is it made of? 

Have you anything made of iron? 

Tliat is tlie very thing I want. 

C’est cela mime que je veux. 

It is the very one he showed me yesterday. 

Why, 1 myself walked down that very street. 

O, Walter, this is the very piano that I saw. 

Who told you it was the very same thing? 

It is the very same language that Englishmen speak—the 
very same, sir. 

Yes, Charles, this is the very house that we want. 

Those are the very pictures that I gave her. 

This is the same hook that my father had. 

C’est le mime livre que mon pire avait. 

She is the same happy girl since her marriage that she 
was before it. 

These are not the same people that were here yesterday. 
We have the same opinions as you. 

We have the same opinions that you have. 

It is just the same as that one. 

I think the same as you do. 

He said the same that I did. 

It is ail there; I cannot give you more. 

Vous avez tout; je ne puis vous en donner davantage. 

All men will die. 

All pleasures are welcome. 

All the better; we have much to do. 

You are all in all to me. 

It is all there is; I am sorry, I .can do no more. 

In all kindness I told you about it. 

Not all will go home so early in the evening. 

All is possible for those who dare to die. 

All is God, and God is all. 

At all times, he will be true. 


38 


ANGLAIS 


10 


All my delight is in God. 

I will love him all the days of my life. 

4 4 Be a whole man at everything, ’ ’ once said 
a well-known Englishman. 

“Soyez un homme dans tout'' dit une fois un Anglais 
bien connu. 

Tell me about it, in whole or in part. 

The whole paper is there. What more do you want? 

The whole thing is untrue. 

Yes, sir; I will buy the whole place. 

Yes, I have read it, and the whole book is very interesting. 
The whole world will honor him. 

But you have not learned the whole lesson. 

All that which was, has passed away. 

Tout ce qui Halt est passS. 

All that which was true, I heard gladly. 

All that which was good and fair, I saw. 

All that which will be known, I have already told you. 

He has spoken of all that which was bad. 

She had seen much of all that which happened. 

All that which is dead, shall have new life. 

Every man feels that life is hard. 

Tout homme sent que la vie est dure. 

Every child loves its mother. 

Every girl can do this if she tries. 

Every woman wants what every other woman wants. 
Every church will be full tomorrow. 

Not every book is interesting. 

Some men believe that every player is a musician. 

Stop, sir; you are never to speak of that 
affair. 

Arretez, monsieur; vous ne devez jamais parler de cette 
affaire. 

She is never to speak of it. 

His uncle’s business manager told the bookkeeper never 
to speak of it. 


§10 


VINGTIEME LEQON 


39 


You asked me never to speak of it, did you not? 

I did, sir; I said that you were positively not to speak of it. 

Tell it to some one else; you are never to 
speak of it to me. 

Dites-le a d’autres; vous ne devez jamais en par lev a la 
maison. 

They are never to speak of it. 

His manager is never to speak of the business to another. 
Of course not; did he not say that you were never to 
speak of it? 

But will they not say that we are never to speak of it? 

So you are never to speak of it? I wonder why —can you 
not explain ? 

I have no more to say, sir. 

Je n'ai plus rien a dire , monsietcr. 

She had no more to say. 

But they will have no more to say about it. 

They will have no more to say, if you do not tell them 
the news. 

There is no more to say; he gave him the check. 

Let him pay it, sir; there can be no more to say. 

If you have no more to say, we will go home at once. 

O, sir; lie was not to speak of that affair! 

Oh! monsieur; il ne devait pas parler de cette affaire! 

It is not much —not to speak of. 

It is not much —nothing to speak of. 

But we told them not to speak of it. 

They promised me not to speak of it. 

You are not to speak of my business affairs to any one. 
Whoever will be there, you are not to speak of this last 
investment; do you understand me, sir? 

Although 1 clo not like him, he shall be wel¬ 
come. 

Quoique je ne V aime pas , il sera le bienvenu. 

It is small, although very beautiful. 

Although this season’s trade is larger than usual, it is not 
entirely satisfactory. 


40 


ANGLAIS 


10 


Although she chose the sweetest rose, I obtained the most 
beautiful one. 

Although he said it was not so, I learned that it was. 

She came into the house quite out of breath, although she 
had promised her mother not to run home from school. 

However dark today, it will be clear to- 
morrow. 

Quoiqu'il fasse sombre aujourd'hui, le temps sera clair 
demain. 

However old, however young — . 

However, I will go with you. 

She said it was not true; I did not, however, believe her. 
However good business may be- this month, I shall go 
away on a short vacation. 

However kindly he speaks of her, she does not wish to 
see him. 

I learned yesterday that you had decided not to buy the 
picture; however, I was not sorry, for I know of one who 
will buy it. 

Did you say that it is quite certain to 
happen ? 

Avez-vous dit que cela arrivera certainement? 

Is he quite dead? 

That is quite another thing. 

It is quite a large house; shall you like it? 

O, yes; it is a quite safe investment. 

The doctor told me that he is in quite good health. 

She is quite alone. 


KEYUE ET CONVERSATION 


Shall we go for a drive in the 
park this afternoon? 

Certainly, if you wish. James, 
send the hansom to the door. 
We will be ready in twenty 
nainutes. And, James, do not 


Irons-nous nous promener dans 
le pare cet apres-midi? 

Certainement, si vous le desirez. 
Jacques, faites venir le cab a la 
porte. Nous serons pretes dans 
vingt minutes. Et, Jacques, 




§10 


41 


V1NGTIEME LEQON 

REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


forget to send those roses to 
poor Mrs. Grant this afternoon. 

No, madam; the hansom will be 
here directly. 

If we drive through the park, 
shall we not see the President? 

Possibly, but I do not think it 
very likely. I prefer to go out 
over the old boulevard, if you 
do not mind. 

No, indeed; then we shall see all 
the great factories, shall we not? 

Yes; and we shall also see the 
monuments for which our city 
is so famous. 

* 

* * 

How beautiful everything is to¬ 
day! It is not too warm, and 
we shall enjoy ourselves im¬ 
mensely. 

Yes. That is St. Paul’s church 
over there; and just beyond is 
the church of St. Mary’s. That 
building on the left is the High 
School, while this one on the 
right is the country home of C. 
D. Perkins, the well-known 
manufacturer. 

Shall we take this road through 
the gardens? 

Yes; Charles, turn to the right 
and drive along the river please. 

Is not this a lovely place? And 
such a beautiful house. Let us 
drive this way; visitors are al¬ 
ways welcome here. From here, 
we can look down upon the 
city and can see the churches, 
the schools, the factories, and 
many other beautiful buildings. 
The City Library, of which you 


n’oubliez pas d’envoyer ces 
roses a cette pauvre Mme. 
Grant cet apres-midi. 

Non, madame; le cab sera ici de 
suite. 

Si nous allions dans le pare, ne 
verrions-nous pas le President? 

C’est possible, mais je ne pense 
pas que ce soit probable. Je 
prefere aller sur le vieux boule¬ 
vard, si cela ne vous fait rien. 

Non, pas du tout; alors nous ver- 
rons toutes les grandes manu¬ 
factures, n’est-ce pas? 

Oui; et nous verrons aussi les 
monuments qui ont rendu notre 

ville si fameuse. 

* 

* * 

Que tout est beau aujourd’hui! 
II ne fait pas trop chaud, et 
nous allons nous amuser im- 
mensement. 

Oui. Voila l’eglise St. Paul, la- 
bas; et tout pres derriere est 
l’eglise Ste. Marie. Ce batiment 
sur la gauche est l’Ecole Supe- 
rieure, tandis que celui-ci a 
droite est la residence d’ete de 
M. C. D. Perkins, le manufac¬ 
turer bien connu. 

Allons-nous prendre ce chemin a 
travers les jardins? 

Oui; Charles, tournez a droite et 
conduisez-nous le long de la 
riviere, s’il vous plait. 

N’est-ce pas un endroit ad¬ 
mirable? Et cette belle maison. 
Allons de ce cote; les visiteurs 
sont toujours bienvenus. D’ici 
nous pouvons regarder la ville, 
et voir les eglises, les ecoles, 
les manufactures et beaucoup 
d’autres batiments La Biblio- 
theque de la Ville, dont voys 




42 


ANGLAIS 


§10 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


have heard so much, is just be¬ 
hind that long, low building. 
That is the Court House. 
There on your left is the factory 
of Messrs. Franklin & Sons, the 
iron manufacturers. 

We must go out there some day. 
We cannot go home before we 
have visited at least one of the 
large factories. 

* 

* * 

Tell me, Emma, who was that 
stranger with you? 

I do not know. He stopped me 
merely to ask if this is the City 
Club. 

What did you tell him? 

Why! I simply told him that as I 
was a stranger here myself, I 
did not know. 

It is not the City Club. It is the 
Library. 

Let us call on Mrs. Warren; we 
will have a pleasant afternoon. 


PHRASES 

I always have a great deal to do. 
Do not do it any more. 

He has been the architect of his 
fortune. 

When shall you get up tomorrow ? 

At what time did you get down 
this morning? 

Have you any more coffee r 
I have some more. 

I have no more. 

I have a little more. 

I still have very much. 

I still have enough. 

I have three more pounds of it. 


avez tant entendu parler, est 
derriere ce long et bas batiment; 
Voila le Palais de Justice. La, 
sur votre gauche est la manu¬ 
facture de MM. Franklin et fils, 
les usiniers de fer. 

II faut que nous y allions quelque 
jour. Nous ne pouvons pas re- 
tourner chez nous avant d’avoir 
visite au moins une de ces 

grandes usines. 

* 

* * 

Dites-moi, Emma, qui etait cet 
etranger la avec vous? 

Je n’en sais rien. II m’a arretee 
simplement pour me demander 
si c’etait le Club de la ville. 

Que lui avez-vous dit? 

Mais, je lui ai seulement dit que, 
etant etrangere moi-meme, je 
ne savais pas. 

Ce n’est pas le Club de la ville; 
c’est la bibliotheque. 

Allons faire visite a Mme. War¬ 
ren; nous passerons un apres- 
midi agreable. 


USUELLES 

J’ai toujours beaucoup a faire. 

Ne le faiteg plus. 

II a ete Partisan de sa fortune. 

A quelle heure vous leverez-vous 
demain? 

A quelle heure etes-vous descendu 
ce matin? 

Avez-vous encore du cafe ? 

J’en ai encore. 

Je n’en ai plus. 

J’en ai encore un peu. 

J’en ai encore beaucoup. 

J’en ai encore assez. 

J’en ai encore trois livres. 





10 


VINGTIEME LEQON 


43 


PHRASES XJSUELEES—(Continuees) 


I have a few more pounds. 

I have but one more pound. 

The more one studies, the more 
one learns. 

I am sorry to hear that news. 

That is easy to say, but hard 
to do. 

Is not this man able to work ? 

Take these letters to the post office. 
How does it happen that you are 
never satisfied ? 

I have had a dress made. 

I will have a hat made like hers. 

Is your brother married ? 

No; but he is going to be very soon. 
How old do you think she is ? 

She cannot be more than twenty. 

How old was he when he died ? 

I am very well pleased with it. 

I am pleased to do so. 

Is your coffee sweet enough ? 

Shall I help you to some chicken ? 
Is it worth while to write to her? 
You do not make the most of 
your talents. 

We shall see that. 

Mind your business. * 

Dinner is served. 

I will have neither. 

Not one in the world knows it. 

I know them both. 

He was not in good health when 
he was in Paris. 

We shall go to bed early tonight. 

As to that, I cannot tell you any¬ 
thing. 

Tea is better for me than coffee. 
Take good care of yourself. 


Pen ai encore quelques livres. 

Je n’en ai plus qu’une livre. 

Plus on etudie, plus on apprend. 

Je suis fache d’apprendre cette 
nouvelle .' 

C’est facile a dire, mais difficile a 
faire. 

Cet homme ne peut-il pas tra- 
vailler ? 

Allez porter ces lettres a la poste. 

Comment se fait-il que vous n’etes 
jamais satisfait ? 

Je me suis fait faire une robe. 

Je me ferai faire un chapeau 
comme le sien. 

Votre frere est-il marie? 

Non; mais il va se marier bientot. 

Quel age lui donnez-vous ? 

Elle ne peut avoir plus de vingt 
ans. 

A quel age est-il mort. 

II me plait beaucoup. 

II me plait d’agir ainsi. 

Votre cafe est-il assez sucre ? 

Vous servirai-je du poulet ? 

Cela vaut-il la peine de lui ecrire ? 

Vous ne faites pas valoir tous vos 
talents. 

C’est ce que nous verrons. 

Melez-vous de ce qui vous regarde. 

Le diner est servi. 

Je ne veux ni Tun ni Pautre. 

Personne au monde ne le sait. 

Je les connais tous les deux. 

II n’etait pasen bonne sante quand 
il etait a Paris. 

Nous nous coucherons de bonne 
heure ce soir. 

Quant a cela, je ne puis rien vous 
dire. 

Le the vaut mieux pour moi que 
le cafe. 

Soignez-vous bien. 



44 


ANGLAIS 


§10 


PHRASES XJSUEELES—(Continuees) 


It comes to the same. 

Make yourself at home. 

He left them all well off. 

That does not look like it. 

He married my cousin. 

He got married yesterday. 

When will you get married ? 

Mind what you say. 

Mind the door. 

That news will please my wife. 

I will see it done. 

Can you turn French into Eng¬ 
lish? 

He does not know which way to 
turn. _ 

I have got off easily. 

Not to my knowledge. 

Do your duty, no matter what 
may happen. 

He was received in such a manner 
that he will not return. 

I have no occasion for it. 

One gets accustomed to every¬ 
thing. 

Rome was not built in a day. 
Those things happen every day. 

Sit down all. 

We will never part with each 
other, will we? 

He did not expect to see me so 
soon. 

If you speak ill of others, they 
will speak ill of you. 

He is looking twice at it. 

Do not look back. 

Who has broken that vase? 
Nobody has broken it; it has 
fallen. 

He is broken with grief. 

We hope to see you again soon. 
Ground floor to let. 


Cela revient au meme. 

Faites comme chez vous. 

II les a tous laisses dans Paisance. 
Cela n’y ressemble pas. 

II a epouse ma cousine. 

II s’est marie hier. 

Quand vous marierez-vous ? 

Faites attention a ce que vous 
dites. 

Ayez Poeil sur la porte. 

Cette nouvelle fera plaisir a ma 
femme. 

Je veillerai a ce que cela se fasse. 
Pouvez-vous traduire du frangais 
en anglais? 

II ne sait ou se donner de la tete. 

Je m’en suis tire a bon compte. 
Pas a ma connaissance. 

Fais ce que dois, advienne que 
pourra. 

On Pa traite de fagon qu’il n’y 
reviendra pas. 

Je n’ai que faire de cela. 

On se fait a tout. 

Paris n*a pas ete bati en un jour. 
Ces choses-la arrivent tous les 
jours. 

Asseyez-vous tous. 

Nous ne nous separerons jamais, 
n’est-ce pas? 

II ne s’attendait pas a me voir 
sitot. 

Si vous parlez mal des autres, on 
parlera mal de vous. 

II y regarde a deux fois. 

Ne regardez pas en arriere. 

Qui a casse ce vase? 

Personne ne Pa casse; ilesttombA 

II est brise de douleur. 

Nous esperons vous revoir bientot, 
Rez-de-chaussee a louer r 



10 


VINGTIEME LEQON 


45 


PHRASES USTJELlLES—(C ontinuees) 


Furnished apartments for rent. 
Permit me to answer him. 

What has happened? 

A terrible accident happened on 
the river. 

The tenants are good people. 
Wait for me at the club. 


Appartements meubles a louer. 
Permettez-moi de lui repondre. 
Qu’est-il arrive? 

Un terrible accident est arrivd sur 
la riviere. 

La maison est bien habitee. 
Attendez-moi au cercle. 


EXERCICE ECRIT 

Repondez en anglais aux questions suivantes. Ecrivez les 
questions et les reponses en double expedition, et envoyez- 
les-nous pour correction, mais ne les enregistrez pas sur un 
cylindre avant d’avoir regu une copie corrigee par nous. 

1. Tell us about an accident that happened where 
you live. 

2. Have you an apartment to let? 

3. How many chairs and armchairs have you in your 
parlor? 

4. Do you like antique oak for the furniture in your 
dining-room? 

5. Did you build a house last year? 

6. Have you a brick or a frame house? 

7. On what floor is your parlor? 

8. Are you married? 

9. When did you move into the house you live in? 

10. Do you like mahogany for your parlor furniture? 

11. Do you like tea parties? 

12. Does the house you live in belong to you, or do you 
rent it? 

13. Do you like to drive when the weather is beautiful? 

14. Has anything happened to you on your last journey? 

15. Where did you live before? 

16. Shall you go to England next year? 

17. When will your friend come to see you again? 

18. Did you go to bed late last night? 

19. Whom have you met on your way home? 

20. Have you not written to your friend lately? 



























































































■* 


' 


\ % 



































































. 


ANGLAIS 

(PARTIE 11) 


VINGT-ET-UNIEME LECON 


CYLINDRE phonogeaphique 


YOCABULAIEE 


tlie arm, le bras 
the armful, la brassSe 
besides, de plus, outre 
the bouquet, le bouquet 
bright, brillant 
by, a cote de, par 
the carnation, Vceillet 
cloudy, ?iuageux 
the daisy, la marguerite 
the danger, le danger 
darling, cfieri, chirie 
easy, facile 
easily, facilement 
extreme, extreme 
the flower, la fleur 
the flower-bed, le parterre 
(de fleurs) 

fragrant, odorifSrant 
to freeze, geler 
to gather, cueillir 
hardly, ct peine 
the hothouse, la serre 
to kiss, embrasser 


the lawn, la pelouse 
lovely, aimable, beau, ravis- 
sant 

the noise, le bruit 
the nurse, la garde-malade, 
la nourrice 

out-of-doors, en plein air 
the pansy, la pensee {fleur) 
the peas, les pois 
the sweet-peas, les pois de 
senteur 

t 

to pick, ramasser 
pink, rose 
the plant, la plante 
to plant, planter 
the i*ain, la pluie 
to rain, pleuvoir 
to remember, se rappeler, se 
souvenir 
round, rond 
to set out, replanter 
to shine, briller 
the snow, la neige 


For notice of copyright , see page immediately following the title page 
§11 






2 


ANGLAIS 


§11 


VOCABULAIRE-(Continue) 


to snow, neiger 
to sprinkle, arroser, tomber 
de la petite pluie 
the story, Vhistoire, le 
conte 

the sun, le soleil 


thoughtful, attentif, prive- 
nant, qui n'oublie pas 
the tree, Varbre 
under, sous, au-dessous 
to use, faire usage, habituer 
wet, mouille 


PHRASES ET 

I. c. s. 

English Record No. 21 

Papa, what are you planting 
there ? 

I am planting some sweet 
peas, Daisy. You shall 
have as many bouquets this 
summer as 1 you need. 

But is it not too early? Only 
two weeks ago we had 
snow. 

O, no; there is little danger 
of extreme cold weather 
now. Besides, sweet peas 
do not freeze easily. Do 
you like pansies ? Shall we 
set out these few plants 
under the parlor window? 

O, no, papa; could* we not 
put them in the round 
flower bed as we used to 
do?* 

If you wish. Now run into 
the hothouse and gather a 
whole armful' of flowers 
and take them up to your 


CONVERSATION 

I. c. s. 

Cylindre d' Anglais No. 21 

Papa, que plantes-tu la? 

Je plante des pois de senteur, 
Daisy. Tu auras autant de 
bouquets que tu voudras 
cet eti. 

Mais, n’est-ce pas de trop 
bonne heure? Nous avions 
de la neige il n’y a que 
deux semaines. 

Oh! non; il y a peu de 
danger de grand froid 
maintenant. De plus, les 
pois ne gelent pas facile- 
ment. Aimes-tu les pen- 
sees? Veux-tu que nous 
mettions ces quelques 
plants sous la fenetre du 
salon? 

Oh! non; papa. Ne pourrions- 
nous pas les mettre dans le 
parterre rond, comme nous 
le faisions d’habitude. 

Si tu veux. Maintenant, tu 
devrais aller dans la serre 
et cueillir une brass^e de 
fleurs et les porter a ta 





9242 


§11 


VINGT-ET-UNIEME LEQON 


3 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


mother. She is hardly able 
to sit up 6 today, and she 
will enjoy them so much. 
You should 7 pick some pink 
carnations as well as roses. 

I ought 4 to have thought 8 of 
that before! Mama will 
be so glad! She always 
kisses me when I bring her 
flowers. Good by, papa! 

Good by, Daisy. 

* 

* * 

Come in, dear; I knew you 
would" not forget me. O, 
what lovely carnations! 
How sweet and fragrant 
they are! It is so good of 
you to remember me, 
Daisy. You are a thought¬ 
ful little girl. 

I should come oftener, 10 
mama, but nurse will not 
let me in. If I don’t 11 
come every day, you will 
not think I do not love 
you, will you, mama? 

No, child. Now run out-of- 
doors, and play in the 
bright sunshine. Play on 
the lawn under the trees, 
where I can see you from 
the window. 


mere. Elle peut h peine se 
lever aujourd’hui, et cela 
lui fera tant plaisir. Tu 
devrais cueillir des oeillets 
roses aussi bien que quel- 
ques roses. 

J’aurais du penser a cela 
avant! Maman sera si con- 
tente, et elle m’embrasse 
toujours. quand je lui ap- 
porte des fleurs. Au revoir, 
papa! 

Au revoir, Daisy. 

*** 

Entre, chdrie; je savais bien 
que tu ne m’oublierais pas. 
Oh! quels jolis oeillets! Et 
quel parfum ils ont! Que 
c’est aimable de ne pas 
m’oublier, Daisy. Tu es 
une petite fille bien atten¬ 
tive. 

Je viendrais plus souvent, 
maman, mais la garde- 
malade ne veut pas me 
laisser entrer. Si je ne 
viens pas tous les jours, tu 
ne penseras pas que je ne 
t’aime pas, n’est-ce pas, 
maman? 

Non, mon enfant. Mainte- 
nant, va dehors, et joue 
sous ce beau soleil brillant. 
Joue sur la pelouse, la sous 
les arbres, oh je pourrai te 
voir de ma fenetre. 



4 


ANGLAIS 


11 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Please, mama, let me stay a 
while with you. I don’t 
want to play now. I should 
be so glad if you would 12 
tell me a story. 

I would gladly, but I am not 
strong enough. Come, 
darling, kiss me. O, look, 
it is sprinkling! Why, I 
did not think it would rain 
today. 

It has been cloudy all the 
morning, mother. 13 I don’t 
want to get wet. Let me 
sit by 14 you. I will not 
make any noise. 


Laisse-moi rester un peu avec 
toi, je te prie, maman. Je 
ne veux pas jouer mainte- 
nant. Je serais si contente 
si tu youlais me raconter 
une histoire. 

Je voudrais bien, mais je ne 
suis pas assez forte. Viens, 
cherie embrasse-moi. Oh! 
regarde, il tombe une 
petite pluie fine. Eh bien! 
je ne pensais pas qu’il 
pleuvrait aujourd’hui. 

Le temps a ete nuageux 
toute la matinee, maman. 
Je ne veux pas etre mouil- 
lee. Laisse-moi m’as- 
seoir pres de toi. Je ne 
ferai pas de bruit. 


RE MARQUES 

1. L’expression autcmt de se traduit par as much devant 
un nom singulier, par as many devant un nom pluriel dans 
les phrases affirmatives et le que , ou que de qui suit en frangais 
se traduit par as. 

I have as much money as I want, J’ai autant d’argent que je veux. 

He has as many books as I, II a autant de livres que moi. 

They have as many boys as girls, Its ont autant de garqons que de 
fit les. 

Dans les phrases negatives, les expressions as much et as 
many deviennent respectivement so much et so many. 

I have not so much money as I want, Je n’ai pas autant d’argent que 
je veux. 

He has not so many books as I, II n'a pas autant de livres que moi. 

They have not so many boys as girls, Its n'ont pas autant de garqons 
que de filles. 




11 


VINGT-ET-UNIEME LEQON 


5 


Devant un participe, aussi et autant se rendent par as much, 
as well , si la proposition est affirmative, et par so much, so 
well si elle est negative. Dans les deux cas, que est traduit 
par as. 

He is as much satisfied as your brother, It est aussi satisfait que 
votre frire. 

She is as well served as we, Elle est aussi bien servie que nous. 

He is not so well satisfied as your brother, II n'est pas aussi satisfait 
que votre fr'ere. 

She is not so well served as we, Elle n'est pas aussi bien servie que 
nous. 

Cependant, lorsque la deuxieme proposition introduite par 
que est une consequence de la premiere, que se rend par that: 

I am so tired that I cannot eat, Je suis si fatigue que je ne puis 
manger. 

He has so little money that he cannot buy that, It a si peu d'argent 
quHl ne petit acheter cela. 

Les autres degres de comparaison phis de . . . que de, et 
moins de . . . que de, se traduisent par more . . . than et 
less . . . than. 

I have more money than I want, J'ai plus d'argent que je ne veux. 

He has more books than I, It a plus de livres que moi. 

They have less boys than girls, Its ont moins de gar cons que de filles. 

2. Nous avons deja vu que can indique le pouvoir phy¬ 
sique de faire une chose, aussi la possibility, le savoir-faire. 
II traduit done notre verbe pouvoir en franqais. II n’a que 
deux temps, I can, pour le present et I could, pour l’impar- 
fait. Si nous exceptons la deuxieme personne du singulier, 
ces deux formes sont invariables a toutes les personnes. 
Pour rendre les autres temps du verbe pouvoir, on se sert de 
to be able, etre capable. 

I shall not be able to do this, Je ne pourrai pas faire ceci. 

He has not been able to come, It n'a pas pu venir. 

La forme could peut non seulement traduire l’imparfait de 
pouvoir, mais aussi le conditionnel. 

Could you not speak French? Ne pouviez-vous pas parler frangais? 

I could speak it a little, Je pouvais le parler un peu. 


6 


ANGLAIS 


11 


Could your friend Smith come Friday morning? Votre ami Smith 
pourrait-il venir vendredi matin? 

No; but he could come on Sunday, if you could wait till then, 
Non; mais it pourrait venir dimanche si vous pouviez attendre 
jusqu'a ce jour. 

Si could est suivi d’un verbe a l’infinitif passe, comme {to) 
have spoken , {to) have seen, etc. on le traduit par le condition¬ 
al passe de pouvoir suivi du verbe a l’infinitif. II est a 
remarquer que la preposition to ne se traduit jamais apres 
could , ni apres aucun autre auxiliaire. 

I could have spoken to him if I had wished, J'aurais pu Ini parler 
sij’avais voulu. 

He could not have seen me, even if he had looked this way, It 
71' aicrait pas pu me voir , meme s'it avait regarde de ce cote. 

3. Lorsque l’imparfait franqais exprime l’habitude de 
faire une chose dans le passe, on emploie en anglais la forme 
tised to suivie de l’infinitif. Etudiez le modele suivant. 

to go, alter 
Pass6 Habituel 

I used to go, J’allais, J’avais Vhabitude d'alter 

He 1 //I 

She used to go „„ \allait 

It \ EUe\ 

We used to go, Nous allions 

You used to go, Vous alliez 
Its 1 

Tliey used to go, \allaient 

When I was in Paris, I used to walk on the boulevards, Quand 
j'etais a Paris , j'avais 1'habitude de me promener sur les boulevards. 

I used to breakfast at eight o’clock but now I breakfast at seven, 
J'avais t'habitude de deje finer a huit heures, mais maintenant, je 
dejefme a sept. 

I used to call on her every day, J'avais t'habitude d'alter la voir 
tons les jours. 

4. Nous avons vu que must exprime la necessite ou 
l’obligation de faire une chose. Le verbe irregulier ought 
indique une obligation morale ou renferme une idee de devoir, 


11 


VINGT-ET-UNIEME LEQON 


7 


de convenance. II est invariable a toutes les personnes 
(sauf a la deuxieme personne du singulier). Le verbe ought 
est l’ancienne forme du passe du verbe to owe , devoir, qui se 
conjugue regulierement aujourd’hui. 

Lorsque le verbe ought est place devant un infinitif present, 
il exprime une obligation morale au temps present, et 
traduit ordinairement notre conditionnel du verbe devoir. 


You ought to go to school, Vous devriez alter a V&cole. 

Lucy ought to be more attentive, Lucie devrait etre plus attentive. 
He ought to come, II devrait venir. 


Ought suivi du passe de l’infinitif exprime une obligation 
morale dans le passe, et se traduit generalement par le con¬ 
ditionnel passe de notre verbe devoir. 

He ought to have gone to school, II aurait dd alter a ! ecole. 

Lucy ought to have been more attentive, Lucie aurait dd etre plus 
attentive. 

He ought to have come, II aurait dd venir. 


5. Le suffixe ful , plein de, ajoute a un nom en fait un 
adjectif ou un autre nom. 


the arm, le bras 
the beauty, la beautt 
the care, le soin 
the wonder, la merveille 
the hand, la mam 


armful, la brassee 
beautiful, beau {plein de beaute) 
careful, soigneux 
wonderful, merveilleux 
a handful, plein la main 


6. L’expression to sit up s’emploie surtout en parlant de 
malades pour exprimer qu’ils peuvent se lever. 


He is not able to sit up, II n'est pas capable de se lever. 
She is hardly able to sit up, Ellepent a peine se lever. 


7 . L’auxiliaire should remplace souvent le mot ought, mais 
il n’est jamais suivi de la preposition to devant l’infinitif. 

You should go to school, Vous devriez alter & Vicole. 

Lucy should be more attentive, Lucie devrait etre plus attentive. 
You should have gone to school, Vous auriez dd aller a Vicole. 
Lucy should have been more attentive, Lucie aurait dd etre plus 
attentive. 


8 


ANGLAIS 


11 


8. Le verbe to think, penser, qui demande generalement 
la preposition a en frangais, est snivi de of, de, en anglais. 

What are you thinking of ? A qnoi pensez-vous? 

I am thinking of John, Je pense a Jean. 

9. En anglais, le conditionnel, comme le futur est un 
temps compose. II se forme avec les auxiliaires should et 
would qui sont les imparfaits des auxiliaires shall et will du 
futur. La merne regie que nous avons observee dans l’emploi 
de shall et will pour le futur, s’applique egalement a should 
et would. Le tableau suivant montre leur usage: 


to go, aller 


Idee Condi- 

TIONNELLE 

Simple 


Declarations 


Interrogations 


Volonte, Con- 

SENTEMENT, • 

Resolution 


Declarations 


Interrogations 


I should 

.[go 

He would J 
Should I 1 


Would he 
I would 

He should 
Would I 

Should he 


>go? 


►go 


'g Of 


We should 1 
You would >go 
They would J 
Should we 1 
Should you [go? 
Would they J 
We would 
You should >go 
They should J 
Would we 1 
Would you >go? 
Should they J 


10. Les adverbes, comme les adjectifs, ont les trois 
degres de comparaison; quelques-uns sont incomparables, 
comme here, there, then, now, etc. 

Les degres de comparaison se forment comme pour les 
adjectifs, en ajoutant er ou est, ou par l’usage de more et 
de most. 


Positif 
near, pris 
often, souvent 

happily, heureusement 


COMPARATIF 
nearer, plus prhs 
oftener, plus souvent 

more happily, plus 
heureusement 


SuPERLATIF 
nearest, le plus pres 
oftenest, le phis sou¬ 
vent 

most happily, le plus 
heureusement 


Quelques adverbes, et des plus communs, forment leurs 
degres de comparaison irregulierement. En voici la liste: 





§11 


VINGT-ET-UNIEME LEgON 


9 


POSITIF 


COMPARATIF 


SUPERLATIF 


far, loin 
forth, en avant 
badly oil ill, mal 
much, beaucoup 
well, bien 
little, pen 


farther, plus loin 
further, plus en avant 
worse, phis mal 
more, plus 
better, mieux 
less, moins 


furthest, le plus en avant 
the worst, le plus vial 


farthest, le plus loin 


the most, le plus 
the best, le mieux 
the least, le moins 


11. Don't est l’abreviation de do not. 

12. Lorsque le verbe de la proposition principale est au 
conditionnel, le verbe de la proposition subordonnee com- 
mengant par if, si, though, quoique, when, quand, until, 
jusque, etc., est aussi au conditionnel. Dans ce cas, on 
emploie ordinairement should, a moins que le sujet n’exprime 
une idee de desir, de consentement, de volonte; alors on 
emploie would. 

All would be well if you would do this, Tout serait bien si vous 
vouliez faire ceci. 

I would go if you would, J'irais si vous vouliez. 

Would you help him if he should ask it? L'aideriez-vous s’il vous 
le demand ait? 

Should I prove that you were wrong, would you admit it? Si je 
vous prouvais que vous avez tort, Vadmettriez-vous? 

Si le verbe de la proposition principale est au conditionnel 
passe, le verbe de la proposition subordonnee est ordinaire¬ 
ment au plus-que-parfait. 

I should have gone to Paris, if I had had the money, Je serais alle a 
Paris si j’avais eu de Vargent. 

He would have called today, if you had told him that you would like 
to see him, II serait venu vous rendre visite aujourd’hui si vous lui 
aviez dit que vous vouliez le voir. 

13. En anglais, l’adjectif possessif n’est pas exprime 
comme en frangais devant les mots mother, mere, father, 
pere, child, enfant. 

14. Le mot by, par, a aussi le sens de a c6te de, comme 
dans l’expression: sit down by me, asseyez-vous pres de 


10 


ANGLAIS 


§11 


moi. De plus, ce mot est employe dans un grand nombre 
d’expressions. En void quelques-unes. 

year by year, annke par annke 

Do not value yourself by what you have, Ne votes jugez pas d'aprts 
ce que vons possedez. 

He has done by me as I did by him, II a fait pour moi ce que j'ai 
fait pour lui. 

by and by, tout a Vheure 
a by-name, un surnoin 


EXERCICE ORAE 

Henry lias as many apples as your sister 
lias. —Why should he have more tlian she? 

Henri a autant de pommes que votre sccur. — Pourquoi 
devrait-il en avoir plies qu'elle? 

She has less money than I thought. 

They have not so many rooms as we. 

You have as many pictures as Charles. 

I had as many chickens as your father. 

He could carry more books than any child of his age. 

She had less to do than we thought. 

The price is more than I can pay. 

There are as many baskets as you will need. 

There are more peaches than she can eat. 

There is less milk than I thought. 

We have as many friends to love us as you have to love 
yourself. 

I shall buy as many carnations as I wish. 

Xes, and I shall give mama as many of 
them as she wants. 

J' ache terai autant d'ccillets que je voudrai. — Oui; et j'en 
donnerai a maman autant qu'elle voudra. 

Shall you have as many apples as you want? 

He will have as many servants as he pleases. 

We shall close the window as often as we choose. 

She will stay as many weeks as she chooses. 

He will keep as many of them as he can. 

We shall walk as many miles as we can. 



11 


vingt-et-unieime LEQON 


11 


We could not find the key. — Have you lost it, 
madam? 

Nous ne pouvions pas trouver la clefL'avez-vous perdue , 
madame? 

I could not find my card, so I could not leave my name. 
He could not walk so far. 

Could you call the superintendent, sir? —No, sir; I am 
sorry, but I could not do that even for the manager himself. 
They could never make us believe such a story. 

She could not love him; and to his surprise he found that 
he could not love her. 

She could not tell a lie. 

He could break that window if he chose. 

I used to think that men could do anything. 

Je pensais que les hommes pouvaient tout faire. 

I used to ask mama to read to me. 

She used to tell her friends all she knew. 

We used to wonder where you got so much money. 

Every one used to say that he was a bad man. 

Three men of Rome used to pass this way. 

She used to go home about six o’clock. 

I have heard that he used to teach school here. 

They used to talk about the most impossible things. 

I used to think that all children were happy. 

She used to save her money, but now she spends all 
she can get. 

You used to call often; why do you come no more? 

Who used to give you those pretty roses? 

She used to speak very softly. 

You ouglit to be glad that you have so 
beautiful a sister. 

Vous devriez etre content d' avoir une sceur aussi belle. 

You ought to go home at once. 

He ought to know that dollars do not grow on every tree. 
You ought to oblige all your friends. 

We ought to do that for them; I am sure they are 
expecting it. 


12 


ANGLAIS 


§11 


But he ought never to say anything about it. 

Really, sir, you ought not to tell so many stories. 

I think he ought to buy the house; it is certain to be a 
good investment. 

Your nephew ought to hurry, madam, or he will not be 
able to catch the train. 

You ought to know that you ought to do it. 

Is it not enough that you ought to go? 

Who said we ought to tell them about it? 

She certainly ought to speak of it. 

Choose to do all that you ought; do all that you choose. 

Tell me, doctor, liow soon can I hope to 
sit up? 

Dites-moi, docteur, dans combien de temps puis-je esperer 
pouvoir me lever? 

Sit up in your chair, my child. 

She cannot sit up yet. 

Yes, he sat up yesterday for the first time. 

Can he sit up today, doctor? 

Now do not do that; sit up and be a good boy. 

She shall sit up tomorrow. Yes, I promise you that she 
shall —that is, if it is a good day. 

Let her sit up this afternoon. 

I could not sit up at all yesterday. 

Henry, sit up in your chair. Try to be a good boy at the 
table. 

Mama, can I sit up a little while? 

He should tell everything to his father. 

II devrait tout dire a son pbre. 

You should come home early tonight. 

We should take an umbrella; it is going to rain. 

He should say whether he can go or not. 

You should call on me on your way back. 

They should do that. 

You should tell me all about it. 

She should do as she pleases. 


11 


VINGT-ET-UNIEME LECON 


13 


You should have told your father all about it. 

Vous auriez dP, dire tout a votre pbre. 

He should have come home an hour ago. 

You should have taken your umbrella; you knew that it 
would rain. 

I should have said that I could not go. 

She should have opened the door. 

We should have called on your niece as we promised you. 
We should have done that. 

They should have told us; they have made a bad mistake. 
I should have sold my house; I am sorry that I did not 
keep my promise. 

Why should we have done as he wished? 

If she had come, I would have gone. 

Si elle Uait rentree, je serais sorti. 

If he had taken my advice he would have succeeded. 

If he should take my advice, he would succeed. 

If she could speak French, she could understand you better. 
He would have told you all he knew, if you had let him. 
We would have asked, if we had thought of it. 

We should have gone, too, but we thought you would 
not go. 

If they had been honest, they would have been happier. 

If it should be found out, he would lose his position. 

If it had not rained, we would have gone. 

If I had not sold all that I had, I would sell you all that 
you can use. 

If mama had not been so ill, we should have gone 
to ride. 

Thank you; I should be glad if you would call. 

She comes oftener than her sister. — I won¬ 
der why Alice does not come oftener? 

Elle vient plus souvent que sa sceur; je me demande pour- 
quoi Alice ne vient pas plus souvent? 

But Charles can run faster than Henry ever could. 

She visits her uncle more frequently than you do. 


14 


ANGLAIS 


11 


Most certainly, I shall do nothing of the kind. 

No, I think it is more likely to happen. 

The sooner you start the better; who will get there 
soonest? 

It is farther to Mr. Grant’s than to my uncle’s. 

She studies easiest in the morning. 

He writes more distinctly than he used to. 

Which is farther north, New York or Boston? 

She speaks more slowly than you do. 

Can you not come more quickly? 

She plays better than Charles does. 

It is too terrible to tliiitk of,—one should 
never have to think of anything so awful. 

C'est trop terrible d'y penser, — on ne devrait jamais avoir 
a penser a une chose aussi affreuse. 

I did not think of it. 

He would not think of his friends. 

She never thought of anything. 

We could not think of such a thing. 

But why did they not think of it? We cannot think of 
everything. 

Yes, I Have thought of it a great deal, but the more I 
think of it, the more certain I am that I cannot do as you 
wish. 

I should be pleased if you would do that. 

Je serais enchants si vous vouliez faire cela. 

Would you be glad if I gave you that French book? — 
■Indeed I should be. 

Would he give you any money if you wanted some? —No; 
he would not. 

I should go with you if I had time. 

Why should he not come?—Because he says that one 
should never go there. 

I would not go with you if I did have time. 

What should I do?—You should do as I told you. 

Would John be here if he had been able? 

She would be more attentive to what I say. 


§11 


VINGT-ET-UNIEME LEQON 


15 


I would do so if I could. 

I would have called, if you had ever asked me to do so. 
She would give you more, if she had not already given 
you so much. 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


One evening in June, as I ran 
down to the post office to get the 
letters for father, I met your 
cousin near Newell’s drug store. 

So that was the way you hap¬ 
pened first to meet him? f 

Yes; I should never have known 
him, but he recognized me and 
called me by name. Then we 
became quite good friends. 

He used to speak of you often — 
oftener, I think, than of any one 
else. He will be here again in 
a few weeks, and then you 
must call on us and spend a 
few days at our house. 

1 don’t know whether or not I can 
stay more than one day, but 
anyway, I shall be glad to call. 
Your cousin Harry is one of the 
finest men in the world, and I 
am very anxious to see him 
again. 

I had a letter from him today, in 
which he said that he should 
probably arrive about the fourth 
of August. Of course, father 
and mother will go to New 
York to meet him. I wish I 
could go to. 

Why can’t you? You would not 
lose much time from your work. 


Un soir de juin, comme j’etais alle 
a la poste chercher les lettres de 
mon pere, je rencontrai votre 
cousin pres de la pharmacie 
Newell. 

Alors, c’est de cette maniere que 
vous l’avez rencontre pour la 
premiere fois? 

Oui; je ne l’aurais jamais connu, 
mais il me reconnut et m’appela 
par mon nom. Depuis, nous 
sommes devenus de tres bons 
amis. 

II parlait souvent de vous, plus 
souvent, je crois, que de n’im- 
porte qui. II sera ici de nou¬ 
veau dans quelques semaines, 
et alors vous devrez venir nous 
voir et passer quelques jours 
chez nous. 

Je ne sais pas si je pourrai rester 
plus d’un jour, mais j’aurai le 
plaisir d’aller vous voir. Votre 
cousin Henri est le meilleur 
homme du monde, et il me 
tarde de lerevoir. 

J’ai regu une lettre de lui au- 
jourd’hui, dans laquelle il dit 
qu’il arrivera probablement vers 
le quatre aout. Naturellement, 
mon pere et ma mere iront au- 
devant de lui jusqu’a New-York. 
Je voudrais pouvoir y aller 
aussi! 

Pourquoi ne pouvez-vous pas? 
Vous ne perdriez pas beaucoup 
de temps de votre travail. 




16 


ANGLAIS 


11 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


No; I cannot think of it; it is 
quite impossible. I am very 
busy just now; I have so much 
to do that I hardly know which 
way to turn. But lam keeping 
you. 

Not at all; I am only too glad to 
see you. Remember me to your 
mother. Good by. 

* 

* * 

Good afternoon, sir. Have you 
sent those chairs to my house 
yet? I told you that I was in a 
hurry for them. I wish you 
could send the sofa today, too. 
How about the buffet? 

I will do my best. I sent up the 
chairs about an hour ago. The 
buffet and the sofa will not be 
here until tomorrow. I would 
have had them yesterday, but 
my order was lost somewhere, 
and the letter was not mailed 
until late in the day. 

Very well; I know you will finish 
the work as quickly as you can. 
When you have finished, you 
will send me your bill, please; 
I will give you my check at 
once. 


PHRASES 

Could you be kind enough to ... . 
That would render me a great 
service. 

I should have liked to do more. 


Non; je ne peux pas y penser; 
c’est tout a fait impossible. Je 
suis tres occupe en ce moment. 
J’ai tant a faire que je ne sais 
reellement pas de quel cote me 
tourner. Mais je vous fais 
perdre votre temps. 

Pas du tout; je suis seulement 
content de vous voir. Rappe- 
lez-moi au bon souvenir de votre 
mere. Au revoir. 

* 

* * 

Bonjour, monsieur. Avez-vous 
deja envoye les chaises chez 
moi? Je vous ai dit que j’en 
avais le plus grand besoin. Je 
voudrais que vous puissiez aussi 
envoyer le sofa aujourd’hui. 
Et le buffet? 

Je ferai mon possible. Jevous ai 
envoye les chaises il y a environ 
une heure. Le buffet et le sofa 
ne seront pas ici avant demain. 
J’aurais du les avoir hier, mais 
mon ordre a etd perdu quelque 
part et la lettre n’a ete mise a la 
poste que tres tard dans la 
journee. 

Tres bien; je sais que vous finirez 
votre ouvrage aussi vite que 
possible. Quand vous aurez 
fini, vous m’enverrez votre fac- 
ture s’il vous plait; je vous don- 
nerai mon cheque immediate- 
ment. 


USUELLES 

Seriez-vous assez bon pour .... 
Cela me rendrait un bien grand 
service. 

J’aurais voulu pouvoir faire 
davantage. 





§11 


VINGT-ET-UNIEME LEQON 


17 


PHRASES USUELRES—(Continuees) 


In your place, this is what I 
should do. 

Should you not have done the 
same? 

I think you would do well. 

Who would have thought of it? 

Nothing could make me happier. 

How many times a week do you 
go to church? 

I go twice. 

What country are you from? 

I don’t care about it. 

Don’t be long before you return. 

Send for the newspapers. 

I thought I could do it. 

I should be very much obliged to 
you. 

I could not make myself heard. 

How do you manage to do that? 

I was out all day. 

Speak out. 

He died for want of help. 

He played with his health. 

He played into your hands. 

It shall be as you please. 

If he should happen to die. 

If he cannot do it, he should at 
least say so. 

The less one studies, the less one 
knows. 

To hear him, one would say that 
he knows everything. 

He changed color when you told 
him that. 

He has given me a written order. 

If that becomes known, we are 
lost. 

Who drank out of that glass? 

It is a play upon words. 

When there is plenty for one, there 
is enough for two. 

The dress does not make the man. 


A votre place, voici ce que je 
ferais. 

N’auriez-vous pas fait de meme? 

Je crois que vous feriez bien. 

Qui l’eut pense? 

Rien ne pouvait me rendre plus 
heureux. 

Combien de fois par semaine allez- 
vous a l’eglise? 

J’y vais deux fois. 

De quel pays etes-vous? 

Je n’y tiens pas. 

Ne tardez pas a revenir. 

Envoyez chercher les journaux. 

Je croyais pouvoir le faire. 

Je vous serais tres oblige. 

Je n’ai pas pu me faire entendre. 
Comment vous y prenez-vous pour 
faire cela? 

Je suis sorti toute la journee. 
Parlez ouvertement. 

II est mort faute de secours. 

II a joue avec sa sante. 

II vous a donnd beau jeu. 

Ce sera comme vous voudrez. 

S’il venait a mourir. 

S’il ne peut pas le faire, il devrait 
au moins le dire. 

Moins on etudie, moins on sait. 

A l’entendre, on dirait qu’il sait 
tout. 

II a change de couleur quand vous 
lui avez dit cela. 

II m’a donne un ordre par ecrit. 
Si on vient a savoir cela, nous 
sommes perdus. 

Qui a bu dans ce verre? 

C’est un jeu de mots. 

Quand il y en a pour un, il y en a 
pour deux. 

L’habit ne fait pas le moine. 



18 ANGLAIS §11 

PHRASES USUELEES—(Continuees) 


He bought things of great value. 

We are just beginning. 

I have forgotten on what street 
he lives. 

I wonder what you are doing there. 

I did that without any bad inten¬ 
tion. 

You have nothing to fear. 

I shall go to see him one of these 
days. 

Lucy came to open the door for 
me. 

Make room for him. 

I have not had a moment to 
myself. 

Will you give us the pleasure of 
your company tonight? 

He sees a great many people. 

Never spend your money before 
you have it. 

He can hardly read and write. 

She is twenty at the most. 

She is above twenty. 

You have done enough. 

I love him the more for it. 

Any other would have done it. 

He is no longer the same man. 

One is as good as the other. 

I have seen many stranger things 
than that. 

I knew as much. 

Have you news of Mr. Grant? 

I have heard that he met with an 
accident. 

You look well today. Yesterday 
you seemed ill. 

If you knew how happy I am! 

The more we have, the more we 
want. 


II a achete des choses de prix. 

Nous ne faisons que de commen- 
cer. 

J’ai oublie dans quelle rue il 
demeure. 

Je me demande ce quevous faites 
la. 

J’ai fait cela sans penser a mal. 

Vous n’avez rien a craindre. 

J’irai le voir un de ces jours. 

Lucie est venue m’ouvrir la porte. 

Faites-lui place. 

Je n’ai pas eu un moment a moi. 

Voulez-vous nous faire le plaisir 
de passer la soiree avec nous? 

II voit beaucoup de monde. 

Ne depensez jamais votre argent 
avant de l’avoir dans vos mains. 

C’est a peine s’il sait lire et ecrire. 

Elle a au plus vingt ans. 

Elle a plus de vingt ans. 

Vous avez assez fait. 

Je l’en aime d’autant mieux. 

Tout autre l’aurait fait. 

C’est un tout autre homme. 

L’un vaut l’autre. 

J’en ai vu bien d’autres. 

Je le savais bien. 

Avez-vous re£u des nouvelles de 
M. Grant? 

J’ai entendu dire qu’il lui etait 
arrive un accident. 

Vous avez bonne mine aujour- 
d’hui. Hier, vous aviez l’air 
malade. 

Si vous saviez comme je suis 
heureux. 

Plus on a, plus on veut avoir. 



11 


VINGT-ET-UNIEME LEQON 


19 


PHRASES USTJELLES— (Continuees) 


I have some money left. 

There is not the least breath of 
air. 

They do not visit one another. 

My best days are over. 


II me reste quelque argent. 

II ne fait pas d’air. 

Ils ne se voient pas. 

Mes beaux jours sont passds. 


EXERCICE PIIONOGRAPHIQUE 

Apres avoir termine cette legon, vous devez avoir regu 
votre exercice ecrit de la 20eme legon avec nos corrections. 
Enregistrez-le sur un cylindre vierge, et envoyez-le-nous en 
suivant les directions donnees precedemment. 




20 


ANGLAIS 


§11 


VINGT-DEUXIEME LECON 


CYLINDRE PIIONOGRAPHIQUE 


VOCABULAIRE 


accustomed, accoutume, ha¬ 
bitue 

tlie ache, la souffranee, la 
douleur 

to ache, faire mal 
acre, acre (me sure de sufier- 
ficie = 40 ares 46) 
advantageous, avantageux 
afterwards, apres, ensuite 
the air, Vair 
the asparagus, I'asperge 
awake, 

to awake, | i r eveiller 
to awaken, J 
the barn, VStable 
to bear, porter ( produire ) 
behind, derriere 
to borrow, emprunter 
the brook, le ruisseau 
the carriage, la voiture 
the cheese, le from age 
to complete, computer 
to contain, contenir 
the corn, le mads, le ble 
the cow, la vache 
the cross, la croix 
to cross, croiser, traverser 


the detail, le detail 
the distance, la distance 
the dog, le chien 
to dress, habiller 
the farm, la ferme 
favorite, favori 
to fear, cramdre 
the fish, le poisso?i 
to fish, pecker 
the fisherman, le pecheur 
the fishing, la pec he 
to flatter, flatter 
to be fond of, aimer 
the game, le gibier 
the grape, le raisin 
the grape vine, la vigne 
the gun, le fusil 
the hare, le lievre 
the horse, le cheval 
to hunt, chasser 
the hunting, la chasse 
to lack, manquer 
the market, le marche 
to mean, vouloir dire, si 
gnifier 

own, le sien propre 
the perch, la perche 





§11 


VINGT-DEUXI&ME LEQON 


21 


V OCABULAIRE-(Continue) 


the pheasant, le faisan 
tlie pickerel, le brocheton 
the pond, l'Hang 
principally, principalement 
the product, le produit 
to raise, clever, produire 
the shot, le tireur 
the signal, le signal 
situated, situe 
the situation, la situation 
the sleep, le sommeil 
slow, lent 

the sport, 1'amusement, la 
recreation 


the straw, la paille 

the strawberry, la {raise 

successful, qui reussit 

surely, sfirement 

the tooth, la dent 

toward, vers 

the trout, la truite 

true, vrai 

the valley, la vallSe 

wary, fin, ruse 

tlie watch, la montre 

the wheat, le ble 

the woods, les bois, la foret 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION 


/. c. s. 

English Record No. 22 

What! You have not finished 
dressing 1 yet? What can 
you mean? 2 We shall surely 
miss that six-fifteen train. 


I could not help being late. 
I was awake nearly all 
night with a toothache, 3 
though toward morning I 
got a little sleep. 4 We can 
take a carriage. 

O, no; it is too long a drive; 
we would not reach the 
farm before nine. There is 
another train going at six- 
fifty. We have just time 


/. c. s. 

Cylindre d' Anglais No. 22 

Quoi? Vous n’avez pas en¬ 
core fini de vous habiller? 
Qu’est-ce que cela signifie? 
Surement, nous manque- 
rons le train de six heures 
quinze. 

Je n’ai pas pu faire autre- 
ment. J’ai ete tenu eveille 
toute la nuit par un mal 
de dents, et je n’ai dormi 
que vers le matin. Nous 
pouvons prendre une 
voiture. 

Oh! non; c’est trop loin pour 
aller en voiture; nous n’ar- 
riverions pas a la ferme 
avant neuf heures. II y a 
un autre train qui part a six 





22 


ANGLAIS 


11 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Contlnuees) 


for breakfast, and to catch 
that train afterwards. 


Here we are. The train hasn’t 6 
started yet. But we have 
time enough; it is only six- 
forty by my watch. 6 

O, no; your watch is slow, 7 I 
fear. It is six-fifty already. 

Yes; there is the signal; now 
we are starting. 

*** 

Tell me a little, please, about 
your uncle’s farm. I have 
never been there, and I 
should like to know a few 
details about it before ar¬ 
riving. 

It is situated in the most 
charming valley you ever 
saw; it contains about 
eighty acres. It is only a 
short distance from the 
station. The situation is 
especially advantageous, 
for it is easy to send the 
products to market. 

What does your uncle raise 
on his farm? 


heures cinquante. Nous 
avons juste le temps de 
ddjeuner et de prendre le 
train apres. 

*** 

Nous voici arrives. Le train 
n’est pas encore parti. Mais 
nous avons bien le temps; 
il n’est que six heures qua- 
rante a ma montre. 

Oh! non; j’ai peur que votre 
montre ne retarde. II est 
bien six heures cinquante. 

Oui; voila le signal; nous 
partons. 

*** 

Parlez-moi un peu, je vous 
prie, de la ferme de votre 
oncle. Je n’y suis jamais 
alle, et je voudrais bien 
avoir quelques details 
avant d’arriver. 

Elle est situee dans la plus 
charmante vallee que vous 
ayez jamais vue; elle con- 
tient environ quatre-vingts 
acres. Elle^n’est qu’a peu 
de distance de la gare. 
Cette situation est excep- 
tionnellement avantageuse, 
car il est facile d’envoyer 
les prod rits de la ferme au 
marche 

Qu’est-ce que votre oncle 
cultive sur la ferme? 




§11 


VINGT-DEUXIEME LEQON 


23 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Principally corn and wheat, 
but he has also a few acres 
of asparagus and strawber¬ 
ries, and he has a great 
many fruit trees. His grape 
vines bear grapes enough 
for him to make all his own 8 
wine. He always keeps two 
horses and about twenty 
cows, and he makes a good 
deal of cheese. 

Is there any fish there? I am 
very fond of fishing. 

O, yes; in the little brook 
crossing the farm are many 
trout, and the pond behind 
the barn is full of perch 9 
and pickerel. But do not 
flatter yourself on being 
able to catch them. You 
know how wary they are. 

But really I am quite a suc¬ 
cessful fisherman. 

Well, then I will complete the 
dinner by adding a hare or 
a pheasant. I do not like 
fishing, but hunting is my 
favorite sport. I will bor¬ 
row a gun from my uncle 
and will ask him to lend 
me his hunting dogs. There 
is no lack of game, and I 
am a good shot. 

You will get very tired, I 
am sure, for you are not 


Principalement du ma'is et 
du ble, mais il a aussi 
quelques acres d’asperges 
et de fraises, et il a un 
grand nombre d’arbres 
fruitiers. Ses vignes don- 
nent assez de raisins pour 
faire tout son vin. Il a 
toujours deux chevaux et 
a peu prSs vingt vaches, et 
il fait beaucoup de fromage. 

Y a-t-il du poisson? J’aime 
beaucoup la peche. 

Oh! oiii; dans le petit ruis- 
seau qui traverse la ferme, 
il y a beaucoup de truites, 
et l’etang derriSre l’ecurie 
est plein de perches et de 
brochetons. Mais ne vous 
flattez- pas d’etre capable 
de les prendre. Vous savpz 
combien ils sont ruses. 

Mais, reellement, je suis un 
pecheur experiments. 

Alors, je completerai le diner 
en y ajoutant un lievre ou 
un faisan. Je n’aime pas 
la peche, mais la chasse 
est mon sport favori. J’em- 
prunterai un fusil a mon 
oncle, et je lui demanderai 
de me preter ses chiens de 
chasse. Il ne manque pas 
de gibier et je suis bon 
,tireur. 

Vous serez tres fatigue, je 
suis sur, car vous n’etes 



24 


ANGLAIS 


§11 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


accustomed to walking 
very much. 

True, but I enjoy going out 
in the open air and wan¬ 
dering about in the woods. 


pas habitud a marcher beau- 
coup. 

C’est vrai, mais j’aime aller 
en plein air et marcher 
dans les bois. 


REMARQUES 

1. Cette legon a pour objet d’introduire l’usage du 
participe present en anglais. Ce temps est d’un emploi 
beaucoup plus frequent que dans notre langue, comme on 
pourra le voir dans les observations qui suivent. Nous 
avons a considerer deux choses: 1°, sa formation; 2° son 
emploi. 

Formation du Participe Present. — Le participe present de 
tous les verbes anglais se termine par ing. Cette terminai- 
son s’ajoute ordinairement k l’infinitif du verbe: to be , etre, 
being , etant; to expect , attendre, expecting , attendant; to go, 
aller, going , allant, etc. 

II y a cependant quelques exceptions a cette regie, comme 
suit: 

(a) On double la consonne finale avant d’ajouter ing , si 
cette consonne est simple et precedee d’une voyelle breve: 
to stop , arreter, stopping , arretant; to win , gagner, winning, 
gagnant. 

( b ) Dans les verbes de plusieurs syllabes qui se terminent 
par une consonne simple precedde d’une voyelle, on double 
aussi la consonne finale avant d’ajouter ing, si l’accent 
tonique tombe sur la derniere syllabe de l’infinitif: to begin, 
commencer, beginning, commengant; to commit , commettre, 
committing, commettant. 

On ne double pas la consonne suivante si l’accent tonique 
ne tombe pas sur la derniere syllabe de l’infinitif: to water, 
arroser, watering, arrosant; to flatter, flatter; flattering, 
flattant. 

( c ) Lorsque e est la terminaison de l’infinitif, on sup- 
prime generalement cet e avant d’ajouter la terminaison ing; 




11 


VINGT-DEUXIEME LEgON 


25 


to have avoir, having , ayant; to like , aimer, liking, aimant; 
to receive, recevoir, receiving, recevant. 

Lorsque l’infinitif se termine par ie, ces voyelles se 
remplacent par y au participe present: to lie, mentir, lying, 
mentant. 

II y a encore quelques exceptions fort peu importantes, et 
qui seront etudiees dans la grammaire. 

2. Emploi du Participe Present. — Le participe present 
peut etre employe en anglais dans les cas suivants: 

(a) Comme nous l’avons deja vu, il est d’un usage 
frequent avec le verbe to be pour exprimer qu’une action 
s’accomplit au moment meme ou l’on parle. C’est ce que 
nous avons appele la forme progressive d’un verbe. 

I am reading an interesting book, Je lis (en ce moment ) un livre 
interessant. 

She is playing in the other room, Elle joue dans l'autre chambre. 

( b ) Le participe present s’emploie dans tous les cas ou 
nous l’employons en frangais. 

Being ill, I was not able to study, Etant malade, je ne pouvais pas 
etudier. 

Seeing that, they went away, Voyant cela, its s'en allerent. 

( c) Quelquefois, le participe present remplace une propo¬ 
sition incidente commengant par qui ou que. 

There is a train going at six o’clock, II y a un train qui part d six 
he lires. 

I saw him walking on the street, Je Vai vu qui niarchait dans la rue. 

(d) Le mot en ing peut etre un adjectif. 

a hunting dog, un chien de chasse 

the following day, le jour suivant 

( e) Le participe present qui ne peut etre employe en 
frangais qu’apres la preposition en, est de rigueur en anglais 
apres toutes les prepositions, excepte la preposition to qui 
est le signe de l’infinitif. 

I am afraid of missing the train, J'ai peur de manquer le train. 

He died on reaching home, II mourut en arrivant a la tnaison. 


26 


ANGLAIS 


11 


Before going, I should like to speak to you, Avant de partir, je 
voudrais vous parley. 

He spoke about going home, II par la de rentrer chez lui. 

I thought first of calling on you, J'ai d’abordpensb aller votes voir. 


(/) Le participe present peut s’employer apres certains 
verbes lorsque nous employons l’infinitif en frangais, comme 

Une liste complete en sera 


complements de ces verbes. 
donnee dans la grammaire. 

to begin, commencer 
to complete, completer 
to continue, continuer 
to delay, diffbrer 
to enjoy, jouir 
to finish, finir 


En voici les principaux. 

to give up, renoncer 

to help, s’empecher de 

to like, aimer 

to prefer, preferer 

to prevent, emp ticker 

to be worth, valoir la peine de 


He began speaking at two o’clock, It commenga a parler a deux 
heures. 

He continued coming every day, II continua a venir chaque jour. 

Has she not finished dressing? N'a-t-elle pas fini de s'habiller? 

I enjoyed fishing, J’ai du plaisir a pecker. 

He gave up smoking, It a renonce a fumer. 

We cannot help regretting that opportunity, Nous ne pouvons nous 
empecher de regretter cette opportunity. 

Do you like hunting? Aimez-vous la chasse? 

I prefer fishing to hunting, Je prefire la peche a la chasse? 

It is not worth going there, Cela ne vaut pas la peine d'y aller. 

Quelques-uns de ces verbes peuvent etre suivis par le 
participe present ou par l’infinitif. Le premier est preferable 
s’il s’agit d’une action qui a lieu en meme temps qu’une 
autre ou qui n’est pas finie au moment ou l’on parle; dans 
les autres cas, on emploie l’infinitif. 

They liked reading when they were here, Its aimaient a lire quand 
ils Haient ici. 

I should like to go to France, J’aimerais a aller en France. 

(g-) Pour exprimer une action simultanee, notre participe 
present avec en se rend en anglais par while , pendant, et le 
participe present. Si Ton indique la cause, le moyen, en se 
traduit par by avec le participe present. 

While going to market I met Mr. Jones, J'ai rencontre M. Jones en 
allant au marche. 

He escaped by jumping, It s'est sauve en sautant. 


§11 


VINGT-DEUXIEME LEgON 


27 


Noms Yerbaux. — II y a aussi un grand nombre de noms 
qui se terminent par ing. II ne faut pas confondre ces noms 
verbaux avec le participe present. Le nom verbal peut etre 
sujet ou complement d’un verbe, et remplir toutes les fonc- 
tions propres au nom. Prenons par exemple les deux 
phrases. 

I met your father while walking down town, J'ai rencontre votre 
pere en allant en ville. 

Walking is good exercise, Marcher est un excellent exercice. 

Dans la premiere phrase, walking , est evidemment un par¬ 
ticipe present, puisqu’il exprime une action; dans la seconde, 
walking est un nom, puisqu’il est le sujet d’un verbe. 
Presque tous les verbes anglais sont susceptibles de former 
un nom en ing, comme vous pouvez le voir dans les exemples 
suivants. 


to begin, 

commencer 

the 

to 

build, 

batir 

the 

to 

fish, picker 

the 

to 

meet, 

rencontrer 

the 

to 

mean, 

signifier 

the 

to 

read, 

lire 

the 

to 

teach, 

enseigner 

the 

to 

write, 

icrire 

the 


beginning, le commencement 
building, le batiment 
fishing, la peche 
meeting, la reunion 
meaning, la signification 
reading, la lecture 
teaching, Venseignement 
writing, V icriture 


2. Le mot mean peut etre un adjectif. II a dans cette 
fonction le sens de bas , de pauvre ou de faible. II signifie 
aussi moyen, et entre dans les combinaisons in the meantime 
et in the meanwhile , en attendant, dans l’intervalle. 

Comme nom, il signifie milieu , moyens , et forme quelques 
expressions comme suit. 


by means of, au moyen de 

by all means, par tous les moyens 

by no means, nullement , en aucune fa eon 

by some means or other, d'une maniire ou d'une autre 

by this means-, par ce moyen 

Enfin, to mean peut etre un verbe et a le sens de signifier , 
vouloir dire , avoir en zme. 

to mean well, avoir de bonnes intentions 
What do you mean? Que voulez-vovs dire? 


28 


ANGLAIS 


§11 


3. Avoir mal se traduit de plusieurs manieres en anglais. 
Generalement, on se sert de to have a pain , avoir une douleur. 

I have a pain in my right hand, J’ai mal d la main droite. 

Where do you feel any pain? Oil avez-vous mal? 

Notez que l’adjectif possessif s’emploie en anglais dans ce 
cas devant le nora de la partie du corps, alors qu’on le sup- 
prime en frangais. 

Le mot ache s’emploie aussi comme nom ou comme verbe 
pour exprimer la meme idee.. 

I have a toothache,! „ . , , 

„ r , , , }J at mal aux dents. 

My tooth aches, J 

I have a headache,! ,, . 

}J at mal a la tete. 

My head aches, J 


Enfin, le mot sore, malade, peut aussi s’employer dans le 
meme cas. 

I have sore eyes, } ,, . 

}J at mal aux yeux 
My eyes are sore,J 


4. Les quatre verbes suivants, qui sont donnes dans 
cette legon, sont irreguliers. En voici les principales 
formes: 


Infinitif 
to sleep, dormir 
to mean, vouloir dire 
to awake, eveiller, 
to dri xe, alter envoiture 


Imparfait 
I slept, je dormais 
I meant, je voulais dire 
I awoke, je m'eveillais 
I drove, J'allaisenvoiture 


Participe Passe 
slept, dormi 
meant, voulu dire 
awaked, eveille 
driven, alle en voi- 
ture 


5. Hasn't est l’abre-viation de has not. 


6. La preposition a dans les expressions a ma montre , 
ci la pendule , est traduite par by en anglais. 


What time is it by your watch? Quelle heure est-il a votre montre? 
It is a quarter of ten by my watch, II est dix heures moins tin quart 
d ma montre. 

What time is it by the clock? Quelle heure est-il a la pendule? 

It is three by the clock, II est trois heures a la pendule. 


7 . Pour exprimer en anglais qu’une montre avance , 
retarde ou est juste , on se sert des expressions suivantes. 


§11 


VINGT-UEUXIEME LEQON 


29 


My watch is five minutes fast, Ma montre avance de cinq minutes. 

My watch is five minutes slow, Ma montre retarde de cinq minutes. 

My watch is right, Ma montre est juste. 

8. Le mot own s’emploie dans un grand nombre de¬ 
pressions. II s’ajoute souvent a l’adjectif possessif pour 
indiquer la possession d’une maniere claire et energique. 
L’expression peut etre un pronom ou un adjectif. 

I did it with my own hand, Je I’ai fait de ma propre main. 

He came in a carriage of his own, It est venu dans sa voiture a lui. 

We had vegetables of her own growing, Nous avoits eu des legumes 
qu'elle avait cultives elle-meme. 

I saw it with my own eyes, Je I’ai vu de mes propres yeux. 

I have a house of my own, J’ai une maison a moi. 

Quelquefois, le mot own s’emploie par affection, pour 
montrer de la tendresse a quelqu’un. II est dans ce cas 
intraduisible en frangais. 

my own dear child, man bien cher enfant (mon enfant bien a moi ) 

my own dear brother, mon frire bien aime 

9. Remarquez que les noms designant les poissons ne 
prennent pas la marque du pluriel, mais ils peuvent etre 
employes dans cette forme au pluriel ou au singulier. La 
raison en est, qu’ils etaient autrefois des adjectifs, par con¬ 
sequent invariables, parce qu’on les considerait comme 
suivis du mot fish , poisson. 


EXERCICE ORAL 

Look. Tell me, can you see tliem playing on 
tlie lawn? 

Regardez. Dites-moi, pouvez-vous les voir jouer sur la 
pe louse? 

I can hear him coming up the stairs. 

She could have seen her father driving down to the station. 
I can feel it coming on again, dear mother. 

He is not worth looking at. 

She is not worth wasting your time on. 

They are not worth going after. 

She has done with making sport for her friends. 



30 


ANGLAIS 


11 


They have finished working- on the house. 

We cannot understand his going away so soon. 

She is very fond of hunting. 

I am especially fond of hunting. 

They cannot help obliging us. 

We cannot help being of the same opinion. 

Tell me truly, are you tired of hearing me? 

Dites-moi franchement , Hes-vous fatigue de nf entendre? 

Did you say that you were tired of reading that book? 

He has had enough of driving for one day. 

Can you not keep her from going out so much? 

Will you not make her happy by giving her a beautiful 
present? 

Is there any good in reading so much? 

I did not know that there was so much profit in selling 
property. 

On going into the room, I saw her lying on the floor. 

On coming home, she explained the whole matter. 

On finding him there, she went directly home. 

Between walking and riding there is much to choose. 

For asking her about it, they sent him away. 

She lost all she had by taking his advice. 

Wlille wondering how long he could live 
that way, his money gave out. 

En se demandant combien de temps it pourrait vivre ainsi, 
it manqua d'argent. 

He lost his way while driving about London. 

After reading that book, he must come home. 

When eating heartily, eat slowly. 

Before trying to find out where your next lesson is, finish 
the lesson you are now studying. 

That is good only for passing the time. 

Ce n'est bon qu'a passer le temps. 

Who has never had an opportunity of increasing his 
fortune? 

He escaped by crossing the river. 


11 


VINGT-DEUXI^MEj LEQON 


31 


I have done with hoping for anything from him. 

He had good reasons for not telling him about it. 

Stop him from giving away all his money. 

In hopes of seeing you, he took the first train. 

For fear of offending his uncle, he went home yesterday. 
I wish I could keep him from eating those apples. 

Dreaming as lie walked along, lie fell into 
ttie brook. 

Revant tout en marchant, it tomba dans le ruisseau. 

Hearing the noise, the porter ran to the window. 

John was a thinking man. 

Look! There are the hunting dogs. 

Getting and spending, we waste our powers. 

I have heard them singing. 

You are right, sir; it is a most surprising thing. 

He was a good boy—loving and obliging. 

Driving is very pleasant, my friend; but 
reading and studying are more profitable. 

Alter en voiture est trbs agreable , mon ami; mats lire et 
itudier sont beaueoup plus profitables. 

She likes reading. 

She told me about the crossing of the river. 

I know of no better exercise than walking. 

Bring me writing paper, boy. 

Early rising improves the health. 

I am very fond of hunting. 

Your father’s coming was quite a surprise. 

Charles is walking in his sleep. 

By all means let us go quickly. 

Par tous les moyens, allons-nous-en vivement. 

Do it, by all means. 

By no means, sir; I will never do it. 

By whatever means you can, see that he does it. 

She has no other means of knowing about it. 

And by that means, he completed the entire work. 


32 


ANGLAIS 


§1 


By some such means as this, it came about. 

It was by this means that he persuaded them. 

By these means he succeeded in doing what he had a mind 
to do. 

By these means they sent him away. 

He said lie liad never seen so mean a man. 

II a dit qu'il n' av a it jamais vu un hormne aussi bas. 

She has a very mean character. 

He is the meanest man I know of.- 
Can anything be meaner than this? 

It was such a mean thing —how could he do it? 

What a poor, mean, little man he is! 

The meanest thing about it is that it is true. 

It was a mean thing to say. 

What do you mean, sir? —I do not mean you 
any harm. 

Que voulez-vous dire , monsieur?—Je ne veuxrien vous dire 
de mat. 

What does he mean? 

Did she mean to pass by without speaking to him? 

But you could not have meant to do any such thing. 

We meant to have asked her to come. 

I have meant to do many things that I have never done. 
They meant to please you, believe me. 

Do you mean it? —I believe you do. 

Work means success. 

These rings are my own,—my own mother 
gave them to me. 

Ces bagues sont bien a moi, ma mire me les a donnees. 

It is his own, —do not trouble him. 

They are their own children; are they not lovely girls? 
This flower is all my own, mama. I will give it to you. 
The carriage is his own. 

He keeps his own horses. 

“It is my own, my very own,” she said. 


§11 


VINGT-DEUXIEME LEQON 


33 


Is that your own ring, Alice? 

Where are your own books? You are always borrowing 
mine. 


I cannot sleep, motlier; I sliall be awake all 
night. Do you understand? 

Je ne peux pas dormir, maman; je serai eveille toute la 
nuit. Comprenez-vous? 

Let him sleep; do not trouble him. 

No, he is awake; I will call him. 

Yes, I am awake; I was awake when you first came in. 
She did not understand him; he did not speak distinctly. 
They were all awake; they could not sleep. 

Awake! Awake! 

I slept well last night. 

She is sleeping quietly now. 

My watcb is just right. —No; it is three min¬ 
utes slow. 

Ma montre est juste.— Non; elle retarde de trots minutes. 

Your watch is fast, sir. 

Yes, I know it is; is yours just right? 

Mine is right, sir; but yours has stopped. 

It has not stopped, but it is very slow. 

That clock is half an hour fast. 

His watch is ten minutes too slow. 

My watch is ten minutes slow. 

Yes, sir; my watch is slow. 

Your watch is an hour fast, sir. 

An hour fast? O, no; my watch is an hour too slow. 

She is very fond of him. 

Elle I'aime beaucoup. 

He is very fond of her. 

Yes, mama is very fond of flowers. 

I am fond of all kinds of sports. . 

She is fond of good wines. 

I am fond of all kinds of meats and vegetables. 


34 ANGLAIS §11 

O yes, we are very fond of her —she is such a lovely 
child. 

His wife is very fond of him. 

I do not mind going witli yon, if yon so desire. 

Je veux bien alter avec votes, si votes le desirez. 

Do you mind going for the newspaper for me? 

He enjoyed fishing in the pond very much. 

He has not finished writing his letter yet. 

Which do you prefer, hunting or fishing?—I much prefer 
fishing. 

I am afraid of missing the train. 

When he ceased speaking, it was half past five. 

I cannot help telling you that you should not speak about 
the matter. 

It is not worth while looking into the matter. 

While going to the post office, I met your 
father. 

En allant a la poste, j'ai rencontre votre plre. 

I cut myself while carving a chicken. 

You can learn a great deal by reading. 

You can oblige me by telling all you know about it. 

He got rich by investing in real estate. 

He fell from the carriage while turning the corner. 

He spoke to me while coming from school. 

You will not learn anything by attending that school. 

She will lose nothing by staying at home. 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


Well, Louisa, are you ready? 

Have you finished dressing ? 
Not yet, but I shall have finished 
in a moment. I have only to 
put on my hat, but I do not 
know where I put it last night; 
I do not find it. 

Which hat do you wish to wear ? 


Eh bien ! Louise, etes-vous prete ? 
Avez-vous fini de vous habiller ? 

Pas encore, mais j’aurai fini dans 
un moment. Je n’ai plus que 
mon chapeau a mettre, mais je 
ne sais pas ou je l’ai place hier 
soir; je ne le trouve pas. 

Quel chapeau voulez-vous mettre? 




§11 VINGT-DEUXIEME LEQON 35 

REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


I shall wear my straw hat. 

Here is your every-day hat, put it 
on; it is good enough to wear in 
the country. 

No; I prefer my straw hat; it is 
probably in the other room. 

O, I know now. You left it in the 
parlor. This morning when I 
went to get the newspaper, I 
saw it there on the table. 

Indeed, I had forgotten it. Here 
it is. Well, now I am ready. 

How long you are in dressing! I 
thought you would never finish. 
It is already a quarter after 
eight, and you know that the 
train starts at eight-forty. I am 
afraid we shall miss it. Let us 
hurry; if not we shall be late; 
the train will not wait. 

Well, let us go. We have twenty- 
five minutes in which to reach 
the station. We have time 
enough. However, if you are 
afraid of missing the train, we 
can take a carriage. 

I would gladly take one, but I see 
none near by. Let us walk. 

Here we are. The train has not 
started. It is eight-forty by my 
watch. Sir, how long before the 
train starts, if you please? 

It starts at eight-forty, sir; you 
have ten minutes yet. But you 
may get on the train now. 

We have ten minutes yet. My 
watch is fast. Let us get on. 
We will choose a good place. 


Je prendrai mon chapeau de paille. 

Voici votre chapeau de tous les 
jours; mettez-le; il est assez bon 
pour aller a la campagne. 

Non; je prefere mon chapeau de 
paille; il est probablement dans 
Pautre chambre. 

Oh! je sais maintenant. Vous 
Pavez laisse dans le salon. Je 
Pai vu la ce matin sur la table 
quand je suis alle chercher le 
journal. 

Eli effet, jePavais oublie. Le voici. 
Bien, maintenant je suis prete. 

Comme vous etes longue a vous 
habiller. J’ai cru que vous 
iPauriez jamais fini. Il est deja 
huit heures et quart, et vous 
savez que le train part a huit 
heures quarante. J’ai peur de 
le manquer. Depechons-nous, 
ou sinon nous serons en retard; 
le train n’attend pas. 

Eh bien! partons. Nous avons 
vingt-cinq minutes pour aller a 
la gare. Nous avons le temps. 
Cependant, si vous craignez de 
manquer le train, nous pouvons 
prendre une voiture. 

J’en prendrais une volontiers, 
mais je n’en vois pas tout pres. 
Marchons. 

Nous voici arrives. Le train n’est 
pas parti. J’ai huit heures 
quarante a ma montre. Mon¬ 
sieur, dans combien de temps le 
train part-il, s’il vous plait ? 

Il part a huit heures quarante, 
monsieur; vous avez encore dix 
minutes. Mais vous pouvez mon- 
ter maintenant dans le train. 

Nous avons encore dix minutes. 
Ma montre est en avance. Mon¬ 
tons. Nous choisirons une bonne 




36 


ANGLAIS 


§11 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION - (Continuees) 


At last, here we are in the 
train. 

Let me sit near the window. I 
am too warm. Now, give me a 
few details about your uncle’s 
farm, please. 

It is a magnificent property of 
more than one hundred acres, 
situated near the railroad and 
at a little distance from the city. 

Does this farm belong to your 
uncle? 

Yes; it belongs to him. He 
bought it five years ago. It 
belonged then to Mr. Warren. 

Why did Mr. Warren sell his 
farm? 

He had lost a great deal of money. 
He was obliged to sell. 

What are the products of the 
farm ? 

They are many. More than 
twenty milch cows are there, 
and the milk is sent every 
morning to Paris. Besides, my 
uncle makes butter and cheese. 
When we arrive, we will drink 
a glass of excellent milk. There 
are also a great many chickens 
and ducks; if we wish, we will 
eat good fresh eggs —much bet¬ 
ter than those we find in the 
market, I assure you. 


Do they not raise vegetables on 
the farm? 

O, yes; my uncle raises many 
vegetables,especially asparagus, 
which always sells at half price. 
Fruits are also some of the best 
products of the farm. Finally, 


place. Enfin, nous voila dans 
le train. 

Laissez-moi m’asseoir pres de la 
portiere, j’ai trop chaud. Main- 
tenant, donnez-moi quelques de¬ 
tails sur la ferme de votre oncle, 
je vous prie. 

C’est une propriety magnifique de 
plus de cent acres, situee pres 
du chemin de fer et a peu de 
distance de la ville. 

Cette ferme appartient-elle a 
votre oncle? 

Oui; elle lui appartient. II l’a 
achetee il y a cinq ans. Elle 
appartenait alors a M. Warren. 

Pourquoi M. Warren a-t-il vendu 
sa ferme? 

II avait perdu beaucoup d’argent. 
II a ete oblige de la vendre. 

Quels sont les produits de la 
ferme? 

Ils sont nombreux. II y a la plus 
de vingt belles vaches laitieres 
et le lait est envoye tous les 
matins a Paris. De plus, mon 
oncle fait du beurre et du 
fromage. Lorsque nous ar- 
riverons, nous* pourrons boire 
un verre d’excellent lait bien 
frais. II y a aussi beaucoup 
de poulets.et de canards; si 
nous le desirons, nous aurons le 
plaisir de manger des oeufs bien 
frais, bien meilleurs que ceux 
que nous trouvons au marche, 
je vous assure. 

Ne cultive-t-on pas de legumes 
sur la ferme? 

Oh! oui; mon oncle en cultive 
beaucoup, specialement les as- 
perges, qui se vendent toujours 
tres cher. Les fruits sont aussi 
un des meilleurs produits de la 



11 


VINGT-DEUXIEME LEQON 


37 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION — (Contlnuees) 


he has splendid grape vines. Of 
the grapes, he makes an excellent 
wine, which you will find vqry 
good, I am sure. I hope it will 
not rain, for I intend to go 
fishing in the small brook that 
crosses the farm. There are 
beautiful trout there, which are 
excellent when prepared by my 
cousin. 

I do not like fishing, because I do 
not catch any fish. 1 much pre¬ 
fer hunting. If your cousin has 
a good gun to lend me, and per¬ 
mits me to hunt on his ground, 
I should be pleased to add some 
game to our dinner, a hare or a 
pheasant, for I flatter myself on 
being a good shot. 

There is no doubt that you will 
have full permission. You will 
even have at your service excel¬ 
lent hunting dogs. 

There, the train is stopping. 
Have we already arrived? 

Yes; I see the station, and yonder, 
my cousin who is waiting for 
us with a carriage. 


ferme. Enfin, il a aussi des 
vignes splendides. Avec les 
raisins, il fait un vin excellent 
que vous trouverez tres bon, je 
suis sur. J’espere qu’il ne 
pleuvra pas, car j’ai l’intention 
de pecher dans le petit ruisseau 
qui traverse la ferme. Il y a la 
de belles truites qui sont excel- 
lentes quand elles sont pre- 
parees par ma cousine. 

Je n’aime pas la peche, parce que 
je ne prends jamais de poisson. 
Je prefere de beaucoup la 
chasse. Si votre cousin a un 
bon fusil a me prefer, et s’il me 
permet de chasser sur ses terres, 
j’aurai le plaisir d’ajouter quel- 
que gibier a notre diner, un 
lievre ou un faisan, car je me 
flatte d’etre un bon tireur. 

Il n’y a pas de doute que vous 
aurez toute liberte. Vous aurez 
meme a votre disposition d’ex- 
cellents chiens de chasse. 

Voila le train qui s’arrete. Som- 
mes-nous deja arrives? 

Oui; je vois la gare, et la-bas 
mon cousin qui nous attend 
avec une voiture. 


PHRASES 

What do you mean? 

What is the meaning of that word 
in French? 

What does that word mean? 

What do they mean by that? 

He means it well. 

He did not mean that. 

He means that you shall do it. 

Do you understand English? 

I understand it better than I 
speak it. 


USUELLES 
Que voulez-vous dire? 

Que veut dire ce mot en frangais. 

Que veut dire ce mot? 

Que veulent-ils dire par la? 

Ses intentions sont bonnes. 

Ce n’etait pas la son intention. 

Il entend que vous le fassiez. 
Comprenez-vous l’anglais? 

Je le comprends mieux que je le 
parle. 





38 


ANGLAIS 


§11 


PHRASES USUELLES-(Continuees) 


Can you make yourself under¬ 
stood in English? 

I cannot make myself understood 
in English. 

Are there no other means? 

She has the means to do it. 
Waiter, my bill. 

Give me a first-class return ticket 
for New York. 

A gun shot. 

That is understood. 

No sooner said than done. 

My watch loses time. 

By no means. 

I do not like studying. 

Why do you make such a noise? 

I have not made any noise. 

Living is very expensive here. 

Do you wish to take a walk? 

I would take a walk if I had less 
to do. 

Let us take a drive. 

He walks up and down. 

She has walked from home to the 
market. 

I did not sleep at all. 

I slept late this morning. 

I shall never accustom myself to 
it, I think. 

I do not wish to go away before 
having spoken to you. 

I went away without taking leave. 
I am attending to my own busi¬ 
ness. 

One must not go too near the 
horses. 

Help yourself first. 

Do you remember me? 

I remember you. 

I remember her very well. 

I take pleasure in working. 

Do you like living in the city? 

We must part with each other. 


Pouvez-vous vous faire compren- 
dre en anglais? 

Je ne peux pas me faire compren- 
dre en anglais. 

N’y a-t-il pas d’autre moyen? 

Elle a les moyens de le faire. 
Gargon! ma note. 

Donnez-moi un billet d’aller et 
retour pour New-York. 

Un coup de fusil. 

Cela va sans dire. 

Aussitot dit, aussitot fait. 

Ma montre retarde. 

En aucune fagon. 

Je n’aime pas etudier. 

Pourquoi faites-vous un tel bruit? 
Je n’ai pas fait de bruit. 

II fait cher vivre ici. 

Voulez-vous vous promener? 

Je mepromenerais si j’avais moins 
a faire. 

Promenons-nous en voiture. 

II se promene de long en large. 
Elle a marche de chez elle au 
marche. 

J’ai passe une nuit blanche. 

J’ai fait la grasse matinee ce 
matin. 

Je ne pourrai jamais m’y habi- 
tuer, je crois. 

Je ne veux pas m’en aller avant 
de vous avoir parle. 

Je suis parti sans prendre conge. 
Je me mele de mes propres affaires. 

II ne faut pas s’approcher trop 
pres des chevaux. 

Servez-vous d’abord. 

Vous souvenez-vous de moi? 

Je me souviens de vous. 

Je me souviens tres bien d’elle. 

Je me plais a travailler. 
Aimez-vous vivre a la ville? 

11 faut nous separer. 



11 


VINGT-DEUXIEME LEQON 


39 


PHRASES TJSUELEES—(Continuees) 


Has he the means to travel so long? 

She is five years older than I. 

He has neither father nor mother. 

If you had come earlier, you 
should have dined with us. 

That is my way of thinking. 

He is quite willing. 

You tell me fine stories. 

They have given up working at 
that building. 

I came near falling. 

Remember me to your friend. 

He goes his own way. 

He went on an errand. 

Do you like taking a walk? 

I prefer driving. 

Do you feel able to walk? 

I do not know what has become 
of her. 

The train has just left. 

What will you have me do while 
waiting? 

You should have left earlier. 

You are very far from being an 
artist. 

Understand that I am a man of 
good character. 

May you succeed. 

What is that watch worth? 

It has rained all night. 

It rains hard. 

They should tell me so. 

You should have thought before 
speaking. 

We have not heard from them 
yet. 

I read the paper while waiting 
for the train. 


A-t-il de quoi voyager si long- 
temps? 

Elle a cinq ans de plus que 
moi. 

II n’a ni pere ni mere. 

Si vous etiez venu plus tot, vous 
auriez dine avec nous. 

C’est ma maniere de penser. 

II ne demande pas mieux. 

Vous m’en contez de belles. 

On a abandonne les travaux de ce 
batiment. 

J’ai manque de tomber. 

Rappelez-moi au bon souvenir de 
votre ami. 

II va son train. 

II est alle en course. 

Aimez-vous vous promener a pied? 

Je prefere me promener en 
voiture. 

Vous sentez-vous capable de 
marcher? 

Je ne sais pas ce qu’elle est 
devenue. 

Le train vient de partir. 

Que voulez-vous que je fasse en 
attendant? 

Vous auriez du partir de meilleure 
heure. 

II s’en faut de beaucoup que vous 
soyez artiste. 

Sachez que je suis un homme 
honorable. 

Puissiez-vous reussir! 

Que vaut cette montre? 

II a plu toute la nuit. 

11 pleut fort. 

Ils devraient me le dire. 

Vous auriez du penser avant de 
parler. 

Nous n’avons pas encore regu de 
leurs nouvelles. 

J’ai lu le journal en attendant le 
train. 




40 


ANGLAIS 


§11 


PHRASES USUELLES—(Continuees) 


By working, one learns to work. 

I saw her going to the post office. 
He runs up bills everywhere. 
Excuse me from coming this 
evening. 

Try to feel him on the matter. 
The corn rises. 


En travaillant, on apprend a 
travailler. 

Je l’ai vue qui allait a la poste. 

II fait des dettes partout. 
Dispensez-moi de venir ce soir. 

T&tez-le un peu sur ce sujet. 

Le ble rencherit. 


EXERCICE fiCRIT 

Repondez en anglais aux questions suivantes. Ecrivez les 
questions et les reponses en double expedition, et envoyez- 
les-nous pour correction, mais ne les enregistrez pas sur un 
cylindre avant d’avoir regu une copie corrigde par nous. 

1. Do you like hunting or fishing? 

2. Are you long in dressing? 

3. Did you sleep well last night? 

4. Do you like a long drive in the country in summer? 

5. Is your watch slow or fast? 

6. Give us a few details about a farm that you have seen. 

7. Are you fond of walking in the woods? 

8. Is there much game where you live? 

9. Where were you yesterday, and what did you do? 

10. What is the furniture of your parlor and dining room? 

11. Could you write a letter in English? 

12. What lesson are you studying now in English? 

13. Have you traveled much? 

14. Where do you spend your evenings, and what are 
you doing? 

15. Which is the prettiest city you have ever seen? 

16. What do you do in the morning? 

17. How many people is there in your family? 

18. If you come to the United States, shall you be glad to 
speak English? 

19. Have you a garden? What do you raise in it? 

20. What time is it by your watch? 




ANGLAIS 

(PARTIE 12) 


VINGT-TROISIEME LECON 


CYLINDRE P1IONOGRAPH1QUE 


VOCABULAIRE 


all right, ires bien 
along, le lo?ig de 
tlie back, le dos, le derriere 
back, en arriere , de retour 
black, noir 
blue, bleu 

tlie button, le bouton 
to button, boutonner 
the chestnut, la chataigne 
the cheviot, drap nouveaute, 
ou cheviotte 
the cloth, le drap 
the clothes, les habits 
the coat, le paletot 
the collar, le col 
common, commun 
the customer, le client 
to decide, decider 
the excuse, Vexcuse 
to excuse, excuser 
extra en phis 
fancy, de fantaisie 
to fit, aller ( vetements) 
gray, gris 


handsome, beau 
to hang, pendre 
to introduce, introduire 
the length, la longueur 
the lining, la doublure 
the measure, la viesure 
the mistake, la meprise , 
Verreur 

the mixture, le melange 
to measure, mesurer 
the notice, Vavis 
to notice, remarquer 
the novelty, la 7iouveaute 
the pair, la paire 
to pass, passer 
the pattern, le modele 
perhaps, peut-btre 
permanent, permanent 
plain, simple , uni , commun 
the plan, le plan 
to plan, projeter , faire un 
pla7i 

popular, pop7ilaire 

the sack, le vestou droit . 


For notice of copyright, see page immediately following the title page 

§12 






2 


ANGLAIS 


12 


VOCABULAIRE - (Continue) 


the satin, le satin 
Scotch, Ecossais 
the serge, la serge 
the shoulder, Vipaule 
the sleeve, la manche 
to slip, glisser , passer ou 
mettre un vetement 
special, special 
the suit, le costume complet 
to suit, convenir , satisfaire 
the tailor, le tailleur 


the telephone, le telephone 
to telephone, tilSphoner 
the trifle, le rien , la baga¬ 
telle 

the trousers, le pantalon 
the twills, drap croise 
the waistcoat, le gilet 
worsted, laine anglaise 
the wrinkle, la ride , le pli 
to wrinkle, rider , iaire des 
plis 


PHRASES ET 

I. c. s. 

English Record No. 23 

Good morning, Mr. Stone. 
Were you going 1 this way? 
I think I passed you yes¬ 
terday as I was walking 
up Chestnut street. 

It is quite possible. Yes; I 
was intending to go to the 
tailor’s. I must order a 
new suit of clothes. Have 
you anything special in 
mind? 

No. To whom do you go? 

To Davis and Johnston. 

Indeed? They are my own 
tailors. I was going to 
see them, too. Shall we 
walk along together? Mr. 
Davis measured me last 


CONVERSATION 

/. c. s. 

Cylindre d'Anglais No. 23 

Bonjour, M. Stone. Alliez- 
vous de ce cote-ci? Je 
pense que je vous ai vu 
hier comme je montais la 
rue des Chataignes. 

C’est bien possible. Oui; 
j’avais l’intention d’aller 
chez le tailleur. II faut 
que je commande un habil- 
lement complet. Avez- 
vous quelque chose a me 
dire? 

Non. Chez qui allez-vous 
ordinairement? 

Chez Davis et Johnston. 

Vraiment? Ce sont mes tail- 
leurs. J’allais aussi les 
voir. Nous m archer ons 
ensemble. M. Davis a 
pris ma mesure la semaine 





12 


VINGT-TROISI^ME LECON 


3 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


week, and early this morn¬ 
ing he telephoned* me to 
come in and try the coat on. 
What kind of suit were you 
planning to get? 

Just a plain sack with satin 
lining. If it pleases me, 
I shall give them another 
order. 

* 

* * 

Mr. Davis, let me introduce 
my friend Mr. Stone. If 
you can suit him as well as 
you do me, I shall have 
brought you a permanent 
customer. I told him that 
he would make no mistake 
in coming to you. 

I will do my best, of course. 
Our business is to please 
customers. 3 Mr. Stone will 
excuse me while you try 
on your coat? 4 Just slip 
this on, Mr. Powell. You 
remember that piece of 
cloth from which I cut the 
last pair of trousers that I 
made for you? I tliink I 
can cut out an extra pair 
too, if you wish them. 

Yes, by all means; make 
them up. This sleeve 
seems to be a trifle long, 
doesn’t it? 


derniere, et de bonne heure 
ce matin, il m’a t61ephon£ 
de venir essayer mon pale¬ 
tot. Quelle sorte de cos¬ 
tume avez-vous l’intention 
de faire faire? 

Simplement un veston droit 
avec doublure en satin. 
Si j’en suis satisfait, je leur 

donnerai un autre ordre. 

* 

* * 

M. Davis, permettez-moi de 
vous presenter mon ami 
M. Stone. Si vous pouvez 
le satisfaire comme moi, je 
vous aurai amene un client 
permanent. Je lui ai dit 
qu’il ne faisait aucune 
erreur en venant chez vous. 

Je ferai mon possible, natu- 
rellement. Notre devoir 
est de plaire a nos clients. 
M. Stone, veuillez m’ex- 
cuser pendant que j’essaie 
ce paletot? Passez ce 
vetement, M. Powell. 
Vous vous rappelez cette 
piece de drap de laquelle 
j’ai coupe le dernier pan¬ 
talon que j’ai fait pour 
vous? Je pense que je 
puis en couper un autre si 
vous le desirez. 

Mais certainement, faites-en 
un autre. Cette manche 
semble un peu longue 
n’est-ce pas? 



4 


ANGLAIS 


§12 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION—(Continuees) 


A trifle. — How is that? How 
is the length of the coat? 


The length is all right. But 
doesn’t it fit a little too 
tight over the shoulder? 
How.does the back 5 hang? 
Does it wrinkle? The 
collar is just right. 

Yes; the coat is a perfect fit. 
Thank you for coming in. 

I should have come in any¬ 
way. Before you tele¬ 
phoned, I thought about it. 
* 

* * 

How do you like this blue 
serge, Mr. Stone? Or per¬ 
haps you prefer English or 
Scotch worsteds? Here are 
some novelties. You don’t 
care for these French 
twills? How are you going 
to have this made up, 6 Mr. 
Stone? Why do you not 
get an English walking 
suit? This gray mixture 
would make a very hand¬ 
some suit. 

Yes; it would. I have been 
thinking, too, about one of 
those black cheviots. 

They do 7 please our cus¬ 
tomers. Did you notice 
Mr. Powell’s coat? 


Presque rien. —Comment est- 
ce maintenant? Comment 
trouvez-vous la longueur 
de ce paletot? 

Le longueur est tres bien. 
Mais n’est-il pas un peu 
trop etroit sur les epaules? 
Comment va le dos? Y 
a-t-il des plis? Le col est 
tres bien. 

Oui; le paletot va a merveille. 

Merci d’etre venu. 

Je serais venu quand meme. 
Avant que vous tel 6 - 

phoniez, j’y pensais. 

* 

* * 

Comment aimez-vous cette 
serge bleue, M. Stone? 
Peut-etre preferez-vous ces 
draps anglais ou 6cossais? 
Voici quelques nouveautes. 
Vous n’aimez pas ces 
draps croises frangais? 
Comment voulez-vous faire 
faire votre costume, M. 
Stone? Pourquoi ne pren- 
driez-vous pas un costume 
de ville anglais? Ce drap 
melange gris ferait un tres 
beau costume. 

Oui; je le crois. Je pensais 
aussi a cette cheviotte 
noire. 

Elle plait beaucoup a nos 
clients. Avez-vous re- 
marque le paletot de M. 
Powell? 




§12 


VINGT-TROISIEME LEQON 


o 


PHRASES ET CONY 

I did, yes; and the coat did 
fit him perfectly. The 
buttons that you were 
showing him I liked very 
much. They are not very 
common. 

I like them, too. Have you 
seen these fancy 8 waist¬ 
coats? Are they not 
pretty? These patterns are 
very popular just now. 

Yes; they are pretty. I will 
come in again —tomorrow, 
perhaps. Then I will de¬ 
cide on something. 


EESA'J’ION — (Continuees) 

Oui; il lui allait parfaite- 
ment. J’aime beaucoup 
les boutons que vous lui 
avez montres. Ils ne sont 
pas communs. 

Je les aime beaucoup aussi. 
Avez-vous vu ces gilets 
fantaisie? Ne sont-ils pas 
jolis? Ces modeles sont 
tres populaires a present. 

Oui; ils sont jolis. Je 
reviendrai peut-etre de- 
main. Je me deciderai 
alors sur ce que je veux 
prendre. 


REMAEQUE8 

1. Le but de cette leqon est de completer les explications 
que nous avons donnees dans la Legon VI, au sujet d’une 
forme particuliere de la conjugation anglaise que nous avons 
appelee forme progressive. 

Nous avons dit que l’on emploie cette forme au present 
pour denoter qu’une action est en progres au moment ou l’on 
parle. Dans la phrase: / am going , l’idee exprimee est que 
l’action de partir se fait en ce moment meme, et peut etre 
rendue par Je suis en train de partir. 

La meme forme existe au passe et sert a rendre notre 
imparfait exprimant simultaneity ou progression. Cette 
forme indique que nous etions e?i train de faire une chose. 

I was reading when he came in, Je lisais ( j'etais en train de tire) 
quand it entra. 

He was coming when I saw him, II venait [it etait en train de venir) 
quand je Vai vu. 

We were calling him when you heard us, Nous Vappelions quand 
vous nous avez entendus. 




6 


ANGLAIS 


12 


Comme.on le voit la forme progressive de l’imparfait se 
forme en ajoutant le participe present a l’imparfait du verbe 
to be. 

to go, alter 
Imparfait Progressif 


Affirmatif 


I was going, 
lie 1 

Slie > was going, 

It J 

We were going, 
You were going, 

They were going, 


J’allais 

allait 


II 

Elle 


Nous allions 
Vous alliez 
Ils 
Elies 


> allaient 


Negatif 


I was not going, 

He 1 

She was not going, 

It J 

We 1 

You were not going, 
They I 


Je n'allais pas 
|«’allait pas 


II 
Elle 


Nous n’allions pas 
Vous n'alliez pas 

^He^n'allaient pas 


Interrogatif-A Ifirmatil 


Was I going? 

( lie 1 

Was she Igoing? 

[it J 


I we 
you 
they 


going? 


Allais-je? 

Allait-1 

{elle 


Allions-nous? 

A lliez-vous ? 

Allaient- \ 1 ^ _ 

\elles? 


In terrogatil-Negati f 


Was I not going? 

[he j 

Was she >not going? 

[it J 


Were 


we ] 

you [not going? 
they] 


N’allais-je pas? 


N’allait- 



N’allions-nous pas? 

Nalliez-vous pas? 

N’ allaient- j j pas ? 


12 


VINGT-TROISIEME LEQON 


7 


Comme on le voit, notre imparfait frangais peut se rendre 
de trois manieres differentes en anglais: 

(a) Par une forme simple. 

I was with him this morning, J'etais avec lui ce matin. 

I enjoyed fishing when I was in the country, J'avals du plaisir & 
pecker quaild j' etais a la campagne. 

( b ) Par la forme progressive. 

I was dressing when you came, Je in'habillais quand vous etes arrive. 

I was driving yesterday when it rained, Je me promenais en voiture 
hier quand il a plu. 

( c ) Par le passe habituel. 

When I was in Paris I used to take a walk on the boulevards every 
morning, Quand j'etais a Paris , je me promenais tons les matins sur 
les boulevards. 

I used to get up early, but now I do not rise before eight, Je me 
levais de bonne heure , mats maintenant je ne me leve pas avant huit 
heures. 

Forme Progressive Complete. — La forme progressive 
peut etre employee a tous les temps d’un verbe, et se forme 
en ajoutant le participe present aux formes du verbe to be. 
Cette forme du verbe indique une continuation de l’action 
du verbe, et elle est souvent preferable a la forme simple du 
verbe. 


Forme Progressive de to read 

infinitif: to be reading 
infinitif passe: to have been reading 
present: I am reading, he is reading, etc. 
imparfait : I was reading, we were reading, etc. 
parfait indefini: I have been reading, we have been reading, etc. 
plus-que-parfait: I had been reading, we had been reading, etc. 
futur: I shall be reading, he will be reading, etc. 
futur anterieur: I shall have been reading, they will have been 
reading, etc. 

conditionnel: I should be reading, he would be reading, etc. 
imperatif: Be reading. 


ANGLAIS 


12 

Emploi de la Forme Progressive. — Considerez les 
remarques suivantes an sujet de Temploi de la forme 
progressive: 

( a ) Lorsqu’on veut marquer qu’une action a eu lieu 
sans interruption, et qu’elle dure encore au moment ou 
l’on parle, on fait usage de la forme progressive du parfait 
indefini. 

I have been reading all the morning, J’ai lu toute la matinee. 

How long has he been living in the country? Depuis combien de 
temps a-t-il demeure a la campagne? 

Dans ces deux exemples, Taction dure encore au moment 
oil Ton parle. Dans la premiere phrase, J'ai lu toute la 
matinee, on exprime aussi que je lis encore eu ce moment. 
Dans la deuxieme, il n'a pas cessS de demeurer a la campagne. 

Quelquefois meme cette forme progressive du parfait 
indefini se traduit en frangais par le present, comme dans les 
phrases suivantes. 


They have been studying French these three years, Its Hudient le 
frangais depuis trois ans. 

We have been living here since we built this house. Nous demeurons 
ici depuis que nous avons bdti cette maison. 

( b ) On se sert de la forme progressive du plus-que- 
parfait pour marquer qu’une action exprimee par le premier 
verbe durait encore au moment oil Taction d’un second 
verbe a eu lieu. C’est avec Timparfait que la meme idee se 
rend en frangais. 

I had been waiting for two hours when the train reached the station, 
J’attendais depuis deux heures quand le train est arrive en gare. 

She had been studying music in Paris for a year when her parents 
called her home, Elle Hudiait la musique & Paris depuis une annee 
quand ses parents la rappelerent a la maison. 

2. II y a en anglais un grand nombre de mots qui 
peuvent etre verbes et noms sans aucune modification. 


§12 


VINGT-TROISIEME LEQON 


9 


the telephone, le telephone 
the bridge, le pont 
the measure, la mesure 
the market, le marche 
the detail, le detail 
the fear, la peur 


to telephone, tHephoner 
to bridge, construire un pont 
to measure, me surer 
to market, vendre au marche 
to detail, detailler 
to fear, craindre , etc. 


3. L’article defini the n’est pas d’un usage aussi frequent 
en anglais qu’en franqais. Des regies completes concernant 
son emploi ou son omission vous seront donnees dans la 
grammaire. Les remarques generales suivantes peuvent 
suffire dans ces leqons de conversation. 

1. L’article ne s’emploie pas en anglais devant les noms 
de personnes, de profession, de dignite. 

I have seen Mr. Grant, J'ai vie M. Grant. 

When in the park I saw President Grant, Quandj'etais an pare, j'ai 
vu le President Grant. 

Have you ever met Professor Stone? Avez-vous deja rencontre le 
Professeur Stone? 

Dr. Powell is a very able physician, Le docteur Powell est un medecin 
tips capable. 

2. Contrairement au franqais, on emploie l’article the en 
anglais devant l’adjectif numeral ordinal apres le nom d’un 
souverain. 

William the first, Guillaume l er 

Edward the third, Edouard III 

George the fourth, George IV 

3. On n’emploie pas Particle devant les noms de pays au 
singulier, mais il est exprime devant les noms pluriels. 

I long to see France, II me tarde de voir la France. 

England is a great country, L' Angleterre est un grand pays. 

Have you traveled in the United States? Avez-vous voyage aux 
E tats-Unis? 

4. L’article se supprime devant les noms ou les adjectifs 
de couleur. 

I like red better than yellow, J'aime mieiix le rouge que le jaune. 

Which color did you choose? —I chose gray, Quelle couleur avez-vous 
choisie? — J'ai choisi une couleur grise. 


10 


ANGLAIS 


§12 


5. On supprime aussi l’article devant les noms abstraits 
ou qui ne sont pas pris dans un sens determine; devant les 
noms de matieres pris dans un sens general. 

Dinner is ready, Le diner est prft. 

I went out when supper was over, Je suis sorti a pris le semper. 

Water is more necessary than wine, L'ean est phis necessaire que 
le vin. 

I prefer coffee to tea, Je prefere le cafe an the. 

6. L’article se supprime dans certaines expressions qui 
semblent former de veritables verbes composes. 

to go to bed, to church, to school, alter an lit , a Vfglise, a Vbcole 

to come from church, from school, venir de l' eg Use, de I'ecole 

to be in bed, at table, itre an lit, a table 

to keep company, house, horses, tenir coinpagnie, un menage, des 
chevaux 


7. On n’emploie pas l’article devant man et woman lors- 
qu’ils designent toute l’espece. 

Men are mortal, Les hommes sont mortels. 

the rights of men, les droits de Vhomme 

4. En anglais, nous avons vu que les verbes peuvent 
etre fr£quemment suivis d’une preposition ou d’un adverbe 
pour former une sorte de verbe compose qui a souvent une 
signification autre que celle du verbe primitif. Quand la 
preposition conserve son caractere de preposition, elle se 
place toujours avant le complement. 

I went up the stairs, J'ai monte Vescalier. 

He looked at the house, II a regarde la maison. 


Si la preposition devient adverbe, elle se place indifferem- 
ment avant ou apres le complement, et dans ce cas, e’est 
ordinairement l’euphonie qui decide de sa place. Dans le 
cas ou le complement serait un pronom, il faut le placer 
avant la preposition: 


Try your coat on,f „ , , , ., 

_ / } Essayez votre habit. 

Try on your coat,J 

Put on your hat, 

Put your hat on, 

Take off your hat, take it off, Otez votre chapeau , dtez-le. 


l Mettez votre chapeau. 

b J 


§12 


VINGT-TROISIEME LEQON 


11 


5. Le mot back peut aussi etre un adverbe et a le sens 
de en arriere, de retour. Lorsqu’il se joint a un verbe pour 
former un verbe compose, il se rend souvent par le meme 
verbe en frangais precede du prefixe re, ou par un autre 
verbe. 


to call, appeler 
to come, venir 
to give, dormer 
to go, alter 
to hold, tenir 


to call back, rappeler 
to come back, revenir 
to give back, rendre ( redonner ) 
to go back, retourner , redder 
to hold back, retenir 


6 . Notre expression faire faire se traduit en anglais par 
to have made. 


Where did you have your hat made? Oil avez-vous fait faire votre 
chapeau? 

I had a dress made at Miss Perkin’s, J'ai fait faire une robe chez 
Mile. Perkins. 

Where do you have your clothes made? Oil faites-vous faire vos 
habits? 


7 . Comparons les deux phrases I study et I do study. 
Toutes deux expriment un temps present et se traduisent en 
frangais de la meme maniere, par j'etudie. II y a cependant 
une difference entre les deux. Quand je dis / study , j’ex- 
prime un simple present, mais avec la forme I do study , j’af- 
firme energiquement que j'etudie. C’est pour cela qu’on 
appelle cette forme la forme emphatique du present. 
Elle se compose du present du verbe to do et de l’infinitif 
du verbe sans la preposition to. 


Present Emphatique 


I do study, 

He } d ° eS stud y’ 


We 

You 

Tliey 


do study, 


J'etudie 

| etudie 

Nous etudions 
Vous Hudiez 

^1?., 1 etudient 
Elies J 


II faut remarquer que cette forme emphatique ne peut 
exister qu’au present affirmatif, puisque les phrases negatives 
et interrogatives sont deja formees au moyen de 1’auxiliaire 


12 


ANGLAIS 


§12 


do, qui ne peut avoir une double fonction. On voit done qu’il 
y a trois manieres d’ exprimer notre present en anglais: le 
simple present, le present progressif et le present emphatique. 

I read every day, Je lis tons les jours. 

I am reading, do not speak to me, Je lis {en ce moment meme), ne 
me parlez pas. 

Why do you not read? —But I do read, Pourquoi ne lisez-vous pas? 
Mats, je lis {Je vous assure que je lis). 


Cette forme emphatique existe aussi au passe, et est 
formee de did et de l’infinitif du verbe. Comme did 
s’emploie au passe pour les formes negatives et interroga- 
tives, cette forme emphatique avec did ne peut exister que 
dans les phrases affirmatives. 


to read, lire 


Passe Emphatique 


I did read, 

She} dld read > 
We did read, 
You did read, 

Tliey did read, 


J'ai lu 
ElleV 

Nous avons hi 
Vous avez lu 

Elies) 0 "* lu 


Souvent do et did expriment la surprise: 

I study. —Do you? J'Hudie. — Ah! vraiment. 

He drinks wine. —Does he? Ilboit du vin. — Pas possible. 

Mother does not speak English. — Does she not? Maman ne parle 
pas a?iglais.— Vous m'Honnez. 


8. Le mot fancy peut avoir la fonction d’un nom, d’un 
adjectif ou d’un verbe. Comme nom, il se traduit par ima¬ 
gination, fantaisie, gout; comme adjectif, par de fantaisie, 
nouveautf : et enfin comme verbe par s' imaginer, aimer. 11 
entre aussi dans certaines expressions dont voici les 
principales. 

to my fancy, h ma guise 
to have a fancy for, aimer, itre de son go-fit. 
to take a fancy to, prendre en affection 
fancy articles, articles de fantaisie, nouveautes 
fancy work, ouvrage de dames 


§12 


VINGT-TROISIEME LECON 


13 


EXERCICE ORAE 

O no, dear mother; I shall be studying when 
you come home. 

Oh! non, chire mire; je serai a etudier quand tu reviendras 
d la maison. 

He is investing all his property in that new mill. ' 

She was asking how much her account was. 

We were leaving the ball room when the stranger came in. 
In the meantime they are organizing as fast as possible. 
Mrs. Cleveland’s little girl will be playing on the piano 
soon. 

Mother was expecting you yesterday. 

We have been writing letters all day. 

What has your brother been doing today? 

So you will be traveling in France soon? 

Charles was talking about it when you went away. 

We were thinking of sending for you. 

Hearing so many stories, we were wondering what had 
become of you. 

Knowing that you were ill, my friend had been hoping for 
time to call on you. 

I knew that it was true, and I had been tell¬ 
ing him so. 

Je savais que c'Hait vrai, et je le lui avais dit. 

She had been coming home at four o’clock. 

He had been giving away all his money. 

You had been saying so. 

If you had been willing to go, the company would have 
engaged you, and given you a permanent contract. 

Where has she been studying all the morning? 

Have you been studying English long? 

Had they been waiting for me long, when you saw them? 
Had you not been traveling for two years, when you were 
called home? 

What has he been doing in Paris? 


14 


ANGLAIS 


12 


He has been thinking about it. 

II y a pense. 

The president has been expecting you. 

We have been hoping that it would be warmer. 

The coachman has been driving very slowly. 

We subscribed for it last month. —How long have you 
been taking it? 

The plants have been growing more rapidly than usual. 
The gardens have been looking richer than ever. 

She will be planning something new. 

Elle formera de nouveaux plans. 

At four o’clock I shall be practicing. 

They will all be hurrying to help you. 

We shall be buying a great many things at that time. 

They will be owing us ten thousand eight hundred and 
fourteen dollars at that time. 

They will be requiring more in another year. 

I shall be manufacturing a great deal of steel in two years 
more. 

He was watching his clerk very closely. 

II veillait son commis de trbs prls. 

She was paying her bill. 

I was laughing at them. 

We were talking about several things. 

You were intending to write, were you not? 

They were riding in the park. 

Mrs. Jones was going out of the front door just as you 
were coming through the gate. 

I used to go there too. 

We used to like playing when we were young. 

She used to be very fond of hunting. 

She enjoyed walking in the morning, when she was living 
with us. 

They used to call on us every day, when we were living 
in the country. 

She was writing to her mother, when John called on her. 


§12 


VINGT-TROISIEME LEQON 


15 


Do not trouble him, he is working. 

While I was studying my English lesson, my brother used 
to come into the room. 

I am learning to like botli reading and 
studying. 

J' apprends a aimer a lire et a Hudier. 

We are going to see your old friends again. 

Mr. and Mrs. Smithson are coming to visit us. 

They are driving on the boulevard. 

I am hoping to hear from him soon. 

She is setting the table now. 

They are playing on the lawn. 

You did not write carefully. 

Vous n’avez pas ecrit soigneusement . 

She did tell me all about it. 

My children did like to play with your children. 

She does read Dickens’ works. 

Charles does study very hard. 

They do talk so much. 

We do expect him, sir. 

You did know that she was but a child. 

He did say it was eighteen hundred miles to Chicago. 
They did call on you yesterday. What more can you ask? 
I do think they should have known better. 

They do not eat as though they were hungry. 

He does call on me every night. 

He does read aloud well. 

She did forget it, sir; believe me, she did 
forget it. 

Elle Va oublie, monsieur; croyez-moi, elle I'a oublie. 

I did hope to see my uncle there. 

You did not do anything of the sort. 

You did say that you wished me to come soon. 

Mr. Cleveland did enjoy himself with you. 

She did feel very angry about it. 

They did believe everything you said. 


16 


ANGLAIS 


12 


We did go as fast as we could, but we could not possibly 
have arrived earlier. 

I do not care much for hunting, but I do like fishing. 

I did like so much to live in Paris. 

I like music. — Do you? 

J'aime la musique . — AM vraiment. 

She plays beautifully on the violin. —Does she? 

He called for me. —Did he? 

Father does not speak English. —Does he not? 

I love the country.— Do you? 

I do wish I owned that house. —Then why do 
you not buy it? 

Je desire vivement posseder cette maison.—Alors, pourquoi 
ne l'achetez-vous pas? 

I do love you. 

He does speak English well. 

I do wish I could be of some service to you. 

I do enjoy your summers here. 

Mr. Warren does write too much. 

Doctor James does not come so often as we wish he 
would. 

I do not believe that either the painter or his picture are 
very well known. 

Strangers have pleasant-times here. 

Grace does work very hard to save $1,300 a year. 

Try on this suit, please.-If it suits you, I 
will ordei’ one. 

Essayez ce costume , s’il vous plait. —SHI vous va bien , j'en 
commanderai un. 

This suit is too long. 

Whose suit is that? 

You did not like the rooms? They did not suit you. 

What kind of suit shall you buy? 

Did the table suit you, madam? 

I think my tailor can suit you as well as any tailor in 
town. 


12 


VINGT-TROISIEME LEQON 


17 


When shall I come to try on my suit, sir? 

I tried it on yesterday.— It did not suit me. 

Walk in, sir. —I will call Mr. Grant at once. 

Entrez , monsieur. —Je vais appeler M. Grant tout de suite. 

Walk in; it is not very dark. 

Shall you walk out of the city today, sir? 

Can we not walk over this bridge, mama? 

Walk in; there is always room for another. 

Walk by very slowly, and see if you can hear him. 

We were walking out into the country when it began to rain. 
Walk on the rails, Charles. 

Walk through the first room, then turn to your left. 
Walking past the house, she saw a man coming. 

How much sliall you charge me for a tele¬ 
phone, sir? 

Combien demandez-vous pour telephoner, monsieur? 

I want a telephone in my house. 

I will telephone him about it. 

Did they telephone you not to come? 

What kind of telephone is that? 

One can telephone from New York to Chicago. 

Have you ever telephoned from Liverpool to London? 
Telephone me about that matter, please. 

Is that a telephone? I never telephoned anywhere. 

Have you seen President Grant? He was 
in the park just now. 

Avez-vous vu le President Grant? It Hait au pare tout 
& Vheure. 

Farmer Jones brought me some vegetables yesterday. 

I am taking English lessons from Professor Perkins. 
Doctor Johnson took care of father. 

This morning I read about George the fourth. 

France is a beautiful country. 

Do you not like that gray cloth? —No; I much prefer the 
black. 

I do not like coffee, but I am very fond of tea. 


18 


ANGLAIS 


§12 


At what time do you go to bed? 

He went to school this morning at half past eight. 

She did not go to church last Sunday. 

At what time do you come home from school? 

We were coming back from church when it began to rain. 
I am always in bed by nine o’clock. 

How many horses do you keep? —We do not keep any. 

Call liim back; I want to speak to liim. 

Rappelez-le; je veux ltd parley. 

He called me back before I had turned the next corner. 
When are you coming back? 

They told me they would come back before dark. 

Do you intend to give back the books I lent you? 

He has not given back my money. 

Go back to your house, and ask your brother what he 
means. 

He went back without his hat. 

If he wants to go, hold him back. 

Have yon really any fancy for tliose gold 
lockets ? 

Aimez-vous reellement ces medallions en or? 

She had taken a fancy to him. 

Do you fancy those dress patterns? 

I fancied that I saw him. 

He showed me a fancy waistcoast. 

I did it to suit her fancy. 

But really they are not at all to my fancy. 

Have you seen the latest fancy work on the market? 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


You were coming from the tailor’s 
when I met you? 

No; I was not, and I never shall 
go there again. 

How is that? 

Why, I ordered a suit about a 
month ago. They promised to 


Vous veniez de chez le tailleur 
quand je vous ai rencontre? 

Non; je n’en venais pas, et je 
n’irai jamais plus la. 

Comment cela? 

Eh bien! J’avais commande un 
costume il y a environ un mois. 




12 VINGT-TROISIEME LEgON 19 

REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


have that suit ready for me last 
week. When I went there, it 
was not done. I waited until 
yesterday, but they did not send 
it. I wrote them that I would 
not accept it, and I had to buy 
a ready-made suit, for I am 
leaving tomorrow on a business 
trip. 

To what tailor shall you go now? 

I was going to Johnson and Son’s 
when I met you. 

They are my tailors, and their 
work has always pleased me 
very much. 

Yes? I heard that they do very 
good work. Will you come in 
with me? Will you not intro¬ 
duce me? But first let us stop 
here; I need a few collars. 

* 

* * 

Mr. Johnson, I am bringing you 
a new customer, and I hope you 
will do your best to please him. 

Of course I shall, Mr. Powell. I 
thank you for your kindness. 

Mr. Johnson, will you please 
show me cloth for a walking 
suit? 

With pleasure. How do you like 
this blue serge? Have you any 
fancy for this gray mixture? 
All these goods are the latest 
out, and all are very popular. 

No; I do not care for them. I 
think you may make me a suit 
of this black cheviot. Do you 
wish to take my measure now? 


II me l’avait promis pour la 
semaine derniere. Quand j’y 
suis alle, il n’etait pas fait. 
J’ai attendu jusqu’hier, mais il 
ne me l’a pas envoye. Je 
lui ai ecrit que je ne l’ac- 
cepterais pas, et il m’a fallu 
acheter un habit tout fait car 
je pars demain en voyage 
d’affaires. 

Chez quel tailleur irez-vous main- 
tenant? 

J’allais chez Johnson et fils quand 
je vous ai rencontre. 

Ce sont mes tailleurs, et leur 
travail m’a toujours beaucoup 
plu. 

Oui? J’ai entendu dire qu’ils 
fournissaient un bon travail. 
Voulez-vous entrer avec moi? 
Ne me presenterez-vous pas? 
Mais d’abord, arretons-nous ici; 

j’ai besoin de quelques cols. 

* 

* * 

Mr. Johnson, je vous amene un 
nouveau client, et j’espere que 
vous ferez votre possible pour 
le satisfaire. 

Certainement, M. Powell; je vous 
remercie de votre bonte. 

M. Johnson, voulez-vous, je vous 
prie, me montrer vos draps pour 
un costume de ville? 

Avec plaisir. Comment trouvez- 
vous cette serge bleue? 
N’aimez-vous pas mieux ce drap 
gris melange? Toutes ces mar- 
chandises sont des nouveautes 
et sont tres populaires. 

Non; elles ne me conviennent pas. 
Je pense que vous pouvez me 
faire un costume de cette 
cheviotte noire. Voulez-vous 
prendre ma mesure maintenant? 



20 


ANGLAIS 


§12 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Yes; whenever yon are ready. 
How will you have the coat 
made? Will you have a three- 
button sack? 

No; make me a coat like this one. 

Yes, sir; with satin lining, I sup¬ 
pose? 

Of course. And cut the collar 
high, please. When shall I 
come to try it on? 

It will be ready in two or three 
days. 

I am going away tomorrow; I 
shall not be back before Tues¬ 
day or Wednesday of next week. 

Call when you come back, then. 
Do you not need a spring over¬ 
coat? I have just received 
some goods from England. 

It is too early to order one. Be¬ 
sides, I want to see how the 
suit I just ordered fits me. If I 
am satisfied I shall become a 
permanent customer. 

* 

* * 

Some one told me that you were 
riding in the park yesterday? 

Yes; I was driving with Mr. and 
Mrs. Perkins, who came to 
spend a few days with us. 
We had a delightful time. It 
was warm, and the trees and 
lawns were beautiful. The air 
was clear and fresh. I wish 
you could have been with us. 
We went out to the lake. We 
had dinner at the hotel there, 
and drove back to town in the 
evening. 


Oui; si vous etes pret. Comment 
voulez-vous le paletot? Voulez- 
vous un veston droit a trois 
boutons? 

Non; faites-moi un paletot comme 
celui-ci. 

Oui, monsieur; avec doublure en 
satin, je suppose? 

Naturellement. Coupez le col 
assez haut, s’il vous plait. 
Quand dois-je venir l’essayer? 

II sera pret dans deux ou trois 
jours. 

Je m’en vais demain; je ne serai 
pas de retour avant mardi ou 
mercredi de la semaine pro- 
chaine. 

Venez quand vous serez rentre 
alors. N’avez-vous pas besoin 
d’un pardessus de demi-saison? 
Je viens de recevoir des draps 
d’Angleterre. 

C’est encore trop tot pour en com¬ 
mander un. De plus, je veux 
voir comment le costume que je 
viens de commander me va. 
Si je suis satisfait, je serai un 
de vos clients permanents. 

* 

* * 

On m’a dit que vous etiez en 
voiture au pare hier? 

Oui; j’etais avec M. et Mme. Per¬ 
kins qui sont venus passer quel- 
ques jours avec nous. Nous 
avons eu beaucoup de plaisir. 
II faisait chaud; les arbres et 
les pelouses etaient magnifiques. 
L’air etait clair et frais. J’aurais 
voulu que vous eussiez ete avec 
nous. Nous sommes alles au 
pare. Nous avons dine a Photel 
et sommes revenus en ville le 
soir. 




12 


VINGT-TROISIEME LEQON 


21 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Did you not find it cold in the 
evening? 

O, no; it was not cold at all. We 
certainly had a most enjoyable 
time. You should have heard 
us singing on our way back! 


Ne faisait-il pas froid dans la 
soiree? 

Oh! non, pas du tout. Nous 
avons certainement eu beau- 
coup de plaisir. Vous auriez 
du nous entendre chanter quand 
nous revenions! 


PHRASES 

I am quite willing. 

What does that man mean? 

I wish you well. 

We must first see what his inten¬ 
tions are. 

What are you driving at? 

I will not stay, I shall be back 
directly. 

He is not worth answering. 

He does not sit well on horseback. 
Here, there is what I owe you. 

He takes after his father. 

Upon the whole. 

Look out for this carriage. 

Take care of yourself. 

He nearly lost his life. 

What do you mean-by doing that? 
I am thinking of going soon. 
Take no notice of that. 

Some day or other he will fall into 
my hands. 

It is easy for him to say so. 

He opened his mind to me about 
it. 

He turns his hand to everything. 
I turned him out of doors. 

I have lost a good opportunity. 
He has broken his word. 

We shall see. 

I am having a hat made. 

To be sure. 

I know very well what I mean. 
He minds nobody. 


USUELLES 

Je veux bien. 

Que veut dire cet homme? 

Je vous veux du bien. 

II faut le voir venir. 

Ou voulez-vous en venir? 

Je ne ferai qu’aller et venir. 

II ne vaut pas la peine qu’on lui 
reponde. 

II se tient mal a cheval. 

Tenez, voici ce que je vous dois. 
II tient de son pere. 

A tout prendre. 

Prenez garde a cette voiture. 
Prenez bien soin de vous. 

II a pense mourir. 

A quoi pensez-vous de faire cela? 
Je pense partir bientot. 

Passez cela sous silence. 

II passera un jour par mes mains. 

II en parle bien a son aise. 

II s’en est ouvert a moi. 

II se met a tout. 

Je l’ai mis dehors. 

J’ai manque une bonne occasion. 
II a manque a sa parole. 

C’est ce qu’il faudra voir. 

Je fais faire un chapeau. 

Cela s’entend. 

Je m’entends. 

II n’ecoute personne. 





22 


ANGLAIS 


§12 


PHRASES TJSUERLES —(Continuees) 


That made me think. 

We are next-door neighbors. 

Wanted, a clerk well acquainted 
with French and English. 

I must ask him what I owe him. 

There is a report that she is dead. 

Was there any one in the parlor? 

Against whom has he anything? 

He is the right man for me. 

This is the right side of the cloth. 

What you are doing is not right. 

I am not attentive to what you 
are saying. 

You are late this morning. 

I did not expect to be late. 

I shall go to see you toward 
evening. 

My house is not for sale. 

I have been down for more than 
an hour. 

The bad weather is over. 

1 heard from home. 

Shall you finish writing soon? 

We cannot hear one another on 
account of the noise. 

He flatters himself that he knows 
English. 

How long has your sister been 
reading? 

She has been reading these three 
hours. 

I have been waiting so long that 
I am tired. 

What were you doing when I 
came in? 

I was playing. 

Do you remember having seen 
me? 

I thought I saw you yesterday. 

Seeing that it was going to rain, 
we made haste to return. 

I found your father walking in 
the garden. 


Cela m’a donne a penser. 

Nous demeurons porte a porte. 

On demande un commis sachant 
bien le frangais et Fanglais. 

II faut que je lui demande ce que 
je lui dois. 

Le bruit court qu’elle est morte. 

Y avait-il quelqu’un au salon? 

A qui en a-t-il? 

C’est rhomme qu’il me faut. 

C’est Pendroit de l’etoffe. 

Ce que vous faites n’est pas bien. 

Je ne suis pas a ce que vous dites. 

Vous etes en retard ce matin. 

Je ne pensais pas etre en retard. 

J’irai vous voir sur le tard. 

Ma maison n’est pas a vendre. 

II y a plus d’une heure que je 
suis descendu. 

Le mauvais temps est passe. 

J’ai des nouvelles de chez moi. 

Aurez-vous bientot fini d’ecrire? 

Nous ne pouvons nous entendre a 
cause du bruit. 

11 se flatte de savoir l’anglais. 

Depuis combien de temps votre 
soeur lisait-elle? 

Elle lisait depuis trois heures. 

J’ai attendu depuis si longtemps 
que je suis fatigue. 

Que faisiez-vous quand je suis 
entre? 

Je jouais. 

Vous rappelez-vous de m’avoir vu? 

Je pensais vous avoir vu hier. 

Voyant qu’il allait pleuvoir, nous 
nous sommes hates de revenir. 

J’ai trouve votre pere qui se 
promenait dans le jardin. 




§12 


VINGT-TROISIEME LEQON 


23 


PHRASES USUELLES—(Continuees) 


That coat fits you very well. 

My tailor fits me well. 

I am going to a party. 

These bills do not pass here. 

That just suits me. 

I shall bring suit against him. 

That amounts to nothing. 

As if nothing at all was the 
matter. 

We passed each other. 

He passed by your house. 

It is neither good nor bad. 

What were you saying? 

I was not saying anything. 

He gives all his time to studying. 
You are fond of music, are you 
not? 

He is tired of living in the country. 
That cloth will wear well. 


Cet habit vous va tres bien. 

Mon tailleur habille bien. 

Je vais a une soiree. 

Ces billets n’ont pas cours ici. 
Cela me convient bien. 
J’intenterai des poursuites contre 
lui. 

Cela ne signifie rien. 

Comme si de rien n’etait. 

Nous nous sommes croises. 

II a passe pres de chez vous. 

Ce n’est ni bon ni mauvais. 

Que disiez-vous? 

Je ne disais rien. 

II passe tout son temps a etudier. 
Vous aimez la musique, n’est-ce 
pas? 

II est f&tigue de vivre a la cam- 
pagne. 

Ce drap durera longtemps. 


EXERCICE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 

Aussitot que vous aurez regu une copie corrigee de votre 
Exercice ecrit de la legon 22, enregistrez-le sur un cylindre 
vierge que vous nous enverrez en suivant les directions 
donnees precedemment. 




24 


ANGLAIS 


12 


VINGT-QUATRIEME LECON 


CYEINDRE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 


YOCABULAIRE 


to arrange, arranger, ranger 
tlie arrangement, /’ ar¬ 
rangement, la disposition 
tlie bay window, fenftre en 
baie 

beyond, au delci de 

tbe center, le centre 

clean, propre 

to clean, nettoyer 

close to, pres de 

the coal, la houille 

conveniently, commodfment 

cosy, a Vaise, agreablement 

definitely, definitivement 

desirable, desirable 

the disposal, disposition 

the divan, le divan 

the electricity, Velectricite 

to engage, engager, retenir 

the gas, le gaz 

the heat, la chaleur 

to heat, chauffer 

hot, chaud 

including, comprenant 
to invite, inviter 
the janitor, le concierge 
the lease, le bail 


the leather, le cuir 
the light, la lumfere, Viclai- 
rage 

to light, fclairer, allumer 
the lock, la serrure 
to lock, fermer (a clef) 
to be mistaken, se tromper 
the neighborhood, le voi- 
sinage 

novel, neutnouveau 
the piano, le piano 
proper, propre , convenable 
the range, le fourneau de 
cuisine 

satisfactory, satisfaisant 
settled, arrange, pay6 
the sign, la signature, Ven- 
seigne 

to sign, signer 
social, social 
tiny, tout petit, mignon 
the trunk, la malle 
Turkish, turc, de Turquie 
to unlock, ouvrir (avec une 
clef ) 

the upholsterer, la tapissier 
the wardrobe, la garde-robe 





12 


VINGT-QUATRIEME LEQON 


25 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION 


i. c. s. 

English Record No. 24 

I am told 1 that you have 
apartments to let, madam? 

Yes, a beautiful suite of 
rooms on the second floor. 
Shall I show them to you? 

Yes; we should like very 
much to see them. Come, 
Helen, let us look 2 at the 
rooms. This seems to be 
an especially desirable 
neighborhood. 3 The streets 
are very clean and well 
kept, and here we should 
be in the center of the 
social life of the city. If I 
am not mistaken 4 it cannot 
be far 5 to the public library, 
madam? 

O, no; not more than five 
minutes’ walk. 6 We are 
very close to the public 
gardens also. 

* 

* * 

Shall I unlock the door for 
you? 

Thank you. The key does 
not fit very well. It is 
hard to turn. 

What a pretty room this is! 
Do you not like it, Henry? 
We could make these rooms 
very cosy. My piano would 
just fill that corner, and your 


/. c s. 

Cylindre d’Anglais No. 24 

On m’a dit que vous avez 
des appartements a louer, 
madame? 

Oui; un magnifique apparte- 
ment au second etage. 
Voulez-vous le visiter? 

Oui; nous voudrions bien le 
voir. Viens, Helene, et 
voyons les chambres. II 
me semble que le voisinage 
est specialement desirable. 
Les rues sont propres et 
bien tenues, et ici, nous 
serions dans le centre de la 
societe de la ville. Si je 
ne me trompe pas, nous 
ne devons.pas etre loin de 
la Bibliothkque publique, 
madame? 

Oh! non; pas plus de cinq 
minutes de marche. Nous 
sommes aussi tres pres des 
jardins publics. 

A 

Voulez-vous que j’ouvre la 
porte pour vous? 

Merci. La clef ne va pas 
bien' dans la serrure. Elle 
est difficile a tourner. 

Quelle jolie chambre! Ne 
l’aimes-tu pas, Henri? 
Nous pourrions rendre ces 
chambres trks agr^ables. 
Mon piano ferait justement 




26 


ANGLAIS 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Turkish divan could be put 
there beyond the bay win¬ 
dow. How much do you 
ask for this suite, madam? 

Thirty-five dollars a month, 
including both heat and 
light. 7 You see that the 
rooms are lighted by gas 
and electricity. 

That is not too much. Do 
you think we can find an 
apartment that we shall 
like better than this, Henry? 

No, dear; this seems to be 
just what we want. I like 
these antique chairs —they 
are novel; and the leather 
upholsterings seem to be 
very inviting. 

How large the wardrobes are, 
Henry. Did you notice 
them? Let us look at the 
kitchen. O what a tiny 
range; it is just large 
enough for two; hot and 
cold water here, the pantry 
there, the wood and coal— 
everything is just as one 
would wish it. 


bien dans ce coin, et nous 
pourrions mettre ton divan 
turc la, pres de cette fenetre 
en baie. Combien de- 
mandez-vous pour cet 
appartement, madame? 

Trente-cinq dollars par mois, 
et ceci comprend aussi le 
chauffage et l’eclairage. 
Vous voyez que les cham- 
bres sont eclairees a la 
fois par le gaz et l’electri- 
citd. 

Ce n’est pas trop cher. Pen- 
ses-tu que nous puissions 
trouver un appartement 
que nous aimerions autant 
que celui-ci, Henry? 

Non, ma chere; c’est juste- 
ment ce qu’il nous faut. 
J’aime ces chaises anti¬ 
ques, c’est un nouveau gen¬ 
re; et ces tapisseries en 
cuir semblent les rendre 
tres confortables. 

Que les garde-robes sont 
grandes, Henri. Les avez- 
vous remarqudes? Voyons 
la cuisine. Oh! quelle gen- 
tille petite cuisiniere, c’est 
juste assez grand pour 
deux! Comme tout est 
bien arrangi; ici, eau chau- 
de et eau froide, la l’office, 
le bois et le charbon, tout 
est comme on pourrait le 
desirer. 



VINGT-QUATRIEME LEQON 


27 


§ 12 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Yes, indeed; shall we engage 
the rooms, Helen? 

Why, I don’t think we can 
find anything better, do 
you? 

No, I doubt it. —Madam, we 
will take the rooms, and 
our trunks will be sent 
here tomorrow morning. 
I suppose the janitor will 
be here to make arrange¬ 
ments for their proper dis¬ 
posal? 

O, yes; the janitor will be 
here. Come at any time 
after eight o’clock. I will 
have the rooms cleaned 
today. 8 Will you sign the 
lease now, sir? 

Yes; that is, I will sign a 
contract for a six months’ 
lease. I do not wish to 
bind myself for a year un¬ 
til my business plans are 
more definitely settled than 
they are at present. 

Very well; I understand. 
That will be satisfactory. 

* 

** 

We shall look for you tomor¬ 
row, then. 

Yes; good morning. 

Good day, sir; good day, 
madam. 


Oui, vraiment; veux-tu que 
je retienne ces chambres, 
Helene? 

Mais, je pense que nous ne 
pouvons pas trouver mieux, 
et toi? 

Non; j’en doute. Madame, 
nous retenons ces cham¬ 
bres, et nous enverrons 
nos malles demain matin. 
Je suppose que le con¬ 
cierge sera ici pour nous 
aider a arranger ce que 
nous avons? 

Oh! oui; le concierge sera 
ici. Venez quand vous 
voudrez apres huit heures. 
Je ferai nettoyer les cham¬ 
bres aujourd’hui. Voujez- 
vous signer le bail au¬ 
jourd’hui, monsieur? 

Oui; c’est-a-dire que je si- 
gnerai un bail de six mois. 
Je ne veux pas m’engager 
pour une annee jusqu’a ce 
que mes affaires soient de- 
finitivement arrangees. 

Tres bien; c’est entendu; je 
suis entierement satisfaite. 

* 

* * 

Nous vous attendrons de- 
main, alors. 

Oui; bonjour, madame. 

Bonjour, monsieur; bonjour, 
madame. 



28 


ANGLAIS 


12 


REMARQUES 

1. Cette legon a pour but d’introduire la forme passive. 
Elle est d’un usage beaucoup plus general qu’en frangais. 
La present de la forme passive est seul etudie dans cette 
legon. Nous avons a considerer plusieurs points: 

1 . Differences Entre la Voix Active et la Voix Passive.— 
Comparons les phrases suivantes. 

Lucy loves Louise, Lucie aime Louise. 

Louise is loved by Lucy, Louise est aimee par Lucie. 

Ces deux phrases expriment absolument la meme idee; 
dans les deux cas, c’est Lucie qui aime , et c’est Louise qui est 
aimie. Cependant la forme de ces phrases est differente. 
Dans le premier cas, Lucie est le sujet du verbe; dans le 
second, c’est Louise. Dans la premiere phrase Lucie est 
representee comme agissant d’une certaine maniere, comme 
faisant quelque chose, et cette action est exprimee par le 
verbe aime. Dans la seconde, Louise, le sujet, n’est pas 
represents comme faisant quelque chose, au contraire, on 
lui fait quelque chose, et cette action est toujours faite par 
Lucie, qui n’est plus dans £ette phrase qu’un complement 
indirect. Cette action qui indique que le complement indirect 
fait quelque chose , et que cette action est regue par le sujet est 
exprimee par le verbe est aimie. 

Le verbe aime est a la voix active, tandis que est aimie est 
a la voix passive. 

On dit qu’un verbe est a la voix active quand il reprSente 
le sujet comme faisant quelque chose. 

Un verbe est a la voix passive quand il represente le com¬ 
plement indirect comme faisant une action qui est alors regue 
par le sujet. 

La plupart des verbes actifs peuvent devenir verbes passifs. 
Ainsi la phrase a la voix active: John eats an apple , devient 
a la voix passive an apple is eaten by John. On voit par la que 
John , le sujet dans la voix active, devient le complement indi¬ 
rect dans la voix passive, et que apple , le complement direct 
dans la voix active, devient le sujet dans la voix passive. 


§12 


VINGT-QUATRIEME LECON 


29 


De ce que c’est le complement direct de la voix active qui 
devient le sujet du verbe de la voix passive, il s’ensuit que 
les verbes neutres, n’ayant pas de complement direct, ne 
peuvent s’employer a la voix passive. 

2. Conjugaison d'un Verbe Passif. — En anglais comme en 
frangais, on forme le verbe passif, en ajoutant le participe 
passe du verbe que l’on conjugue a la propre forme du verbe 
to be, etre. 

Le present d’un verbe passif dans ses quatre formes peut 
etre etudie dans le modele suivant. 


to lose, perdre 


Affirmatif 


I am lost. 
He f 

She | is lost 
It [ 


Je suis perdu 


I 


II est perdu 
Elle est perdue 



Nous sommes perdus 
Vous ites perdus 
f Its sont perdus 
\ Elies sont perdues 


{ 


Negatif 



Je ne suis pas perdu 


(II n'est pas perdu 
\Elle n'est pas perdue 


{ 



Nous ne sommes pas perdus 
Vous n'etes pas perdus 
j Its ne sont pas perdus 
\Elles ne sont pas perdues 


{ 


Interrogate-Affirmatif 



Suis-je perdu? 


I 


f Est-il perdu ? 

1 Est-elle perdue? 


{ 



Sommes-nous perdus ? 
Etes-vous perdus? 


f Sont-ils perdus? 
\Sont-elles perdues? 


30 


ANGLAIS 


12 


Interrogatif-Negatif 


Am I not lost? 



Ne suis-je pas perdu ? 

JN'est-ilpas perdu? 
\N'est-elle pas perdue? 


{ 


1st slie mot lost? 
it 



Ne sommes-nous pas perdus? 


N’etes-vous pas perdus? 
j Ne sont-ils pas perdus? 

\ Ne sont-elles pas perdues? 


{ 


3. Empioi de la Forme Passive. — La forme passive s’em- 
ploie generalement en anglais dans une foule de phrases 
ou nous employons la forme active avec on comme sujet 
du verbe. 

English is spoken here, On parle anglais ici. 

I am told that he is dead, On rn'a dit qu’il est mort. 

English is not taught here, On n'enseigne pas Vanglais ici. 

Two hundred dollars were offered me for that horse, On m'offrait 
deux cents dollars de ce cheval. 

2. Le verbe to look , peut se joindre a un grand nombre de 
prepositions et d’adverbes pour former des verbes composes. 
II entre aussi dans un certain nombre d’idiomes. Etudiez 
soigneusement les verbes composes et les idiomes suivants. 

to look at, regarder 

to look on, regarder , considerer 

to look to a thing, veiller a quelque chose 

to look like, avoir Vair 

to look ill, avoir mauvaise mine 

to look well, avoir bonne mine 

to look twice, regarder deux fois 

to look after, veiller, garder 

to look for, chercher , attendre 

to look into, exammer 

to look over, regarder par dessus, parcourir des yeux 

to look about, regarder autour de soi 

to look away from, detourner ses regards de 

to look down, baisser les yeux 

to look back, regarder en arrilre 

to look forward, regarder devant soi , s'attendre 

to look in, regarder en dedans 

Lookout! Prenez garde! 


12 


VINGT-QUATRIEME LEQON 


31 


3. Le suffixe hood s’ajoute souvent aux noms et aux 
adjectifs pour marquer la qualite, le caractere ou la condition; 
il a aussi souvent un sens collectif. 


the brother, le frbre 
the widow, la veuve 
the priest, le pretre 


the brotherhood, la confrerie 
the widowhood, le veuvage 
the priesthood, la pretrise 


4. Notre forme pronominale se traduit par la forme pas¬ 
sive en anglais lorsque le verbe ne montre pas un retour 
sur le sujet. Le verbe to be mistaken en est un exemple, et 
se traduit par se tromper. 

I am not mistaken, I think, Je ne me trompepas, jepense. 

French books are sold here, Les livres fran^ais se vendent ici. 

That is seen every day, Cela se voit tons les jours. 

These strawberries are eaten with sugar, Ces {raises se mangent 
avec du sucre. 

5. Nous avons vu que l’expression to be far , etre loin, 
marquant l’Oloignement, etait gdneralement suivie de la pre¬ 
position from. 

It is not far from here to the public library, II n'y a pas loin d'ici a 
la bibliothbque publique. 

He cannot be far from the house, II ne pent etre loin de la maison. 

Si cette expression est employee a la forme impersonnelle, 
far peut etre suivi de la proposition to , comme dans les 
phrases: 

It is not far to the public library, Ce n'est pas loin de la bibliothbque 
publique. 

It is not far to your house, Ce n'est pas loin de chez vous. 

Cependant, dans ces phrases, la preposition from est 
rdellement sous-entendue. C’est comme si on disait. 

It is not far (from here) to the public library. 

It is not far (from there) to your house. 

6. On emploie le cas possessif en anglais dans certaines 
expressions qui marquent genOralement la duree ou la 
distance: 

a day’s journey, un voyage d'un jour 

a month’s lease, un bail d'un mois 


32 


ANGLAIS 


12 


five minutes’ walk, cinq minutes de marche 
in a month’s time, dans un mois 

7. Le mot light peut etre un nom. Dans cette fonction, 
il a le sens de lumiere , de jour , de feu. II entre dans un cer¬ 
tain nombre d’expressions comme suit. 

to rise with the light, se lever avec le jour 
daylight, la lumiere du jour. 

moonlight, sunlight, le clair de lune, la lumiere du soleil 

by the light of, a la lumihre de 

to bring to light, mettre au jour 

to come to light, venir au jour 

to put out a light, eteindre tine lumiere 

Comme adjectif, il signifie clair ou leger . 

a light apartment, un appartement clair 
It is light, Il fait clair. 

This book is very light, Ce livre est trls leger. 

Comme verbe, il signifie allumer ou eclairer. 

The streets are lighted with electricity, Les rues sont eclairees a 
V electricite. 

Light the gas, Allumez le gaz. 

8. Notre verbe faire suivi de l’infinitif, se rend en 
anglais par to have et le participe passe du verbe. 

Have the rooms cleaned, Faites nettoyer. les chambres. 

I had my suit made at Mr. Grant’s, J’ai fait faire mon costume 
chez M. Grant. 

I had the price of the hat added to my bill, J’ai fait ajouter le prix 
de mon chapeau a ma facture. 


EXERCICE ORAE 

This is done with a knife. It can be cut in 
no other way. 

On le fait avec un couteau. On ne peut pas le couper d’une 
autre maniere. 

It is made of oak, sir. 

It is settled. There is nothing more to be said. 
Everything is accounted for —you need go no farther. 



$12 


VINGT-QUATRIEME LEQON 


33 


The money was missed yesterday. 

It is said that he ran away from home. 

These papers are sent to all our students. 

The letters are written every day. 

But it is already sold; you cannot buy it. 

It is paid for; I cannot take your money. 

Is it understood? Then there is nothing more to be 
explained. 

The thing is proved. You can add nothing 
more. 

La chose est prouvee. Vous ne pouvez rien y ajouter de 
plus. 

All this wool is sold; but I have some cotton here, would 
you not like to buy it, sir? 

All the stock is subscribed, thank you. 

He is accompanied by his sister. 

I am delighted with my new suit. 

He is stopped here every day. 

The accounts are balanced every month. 

All these vouchers are checked, sir. 

Mama, a good position with Perkins & Co. is offered 
me. Shall I accept it? 

It is thought that he will die. 

It is feared that they may win. 

I am told that English is spoken all over the 
world. 

On m'a dit que Vanglais est parU dans le monde entier. 

It is generally believed that they are mistaken. 

No, sir; these goods are sold. 

It is feared that he cannot live. 

Come in and rest a few minutes; it is said that you have 
far to go. 

We are taught to say, “The world is young and gay.” 

The flowers are beautifully arranged. 

The streets of Boston are well paved. 

But the book is read by every one. 

My piano is broken; I cannot practice today. 


34 


ANGLAIS 


l‘A 


It is done simply because yon wish it. 

It is thought that he has lost all his money. 

What a beautiful painting! Look at it, papa. 

Quelle belle peinture! Regarde-la , papa. 

What are you looking for, Harry? 

Johnnie, look over there, and tell me who is there. 

She was looking out of the window when I passed by. 

O, look here! What a pretty ring! 

Ethel, look through this glass and tell us what you can 
see. How green it makes everything look! 

I was looking in and saw you sitting there. 

She was looking at it steadily. 

He has been looking at me. 

On looking over this account, I find that you have made 
several mistakes. 

Look out of the window, Harry. 

Look out! You will hurt yourself. 

Look into it carefully. 

She is mistaken. I am sure she mistook it 
for a diamond. 

Elle se trompe. Je suis stir qu'elle Va pris pour urt 
diamant. 

It is my mistake, sir. 

I am mistaken about it. 

Are you mistaken? 

She was mistaken when she said that I called. 

His mother did not call him. He was mistaken. 

O, but you will find that you are mistaken. 

Who is mistaken? Why do you not answer me? 

How did you happen to make such a mistake? 

How much is offered you for your house? 

Combien vous offre-t-on de votre maison f 

This young man is not taught music. 

It is not said that he will be there. 

It is supposed that he fell off the cliff. 

It is believed that he went to Germany. 


12 


VINGT-QUATRIEME LEQON 


35 


I am told that your uncle is ill. 

Is French taught in that school? 

What book is read in your school? 

Wliat are you looking at? 1 am looking at 
that ship. 

Que regardez-vous? Je regarde ce bateau. 

He was looking at a picture book when I Came in. 

I looked on you as my friend. 

Will you look into this affair? 

Look to your own affairs. 

He looks like a gentleman. 

It was hard to tell how he looked. 

She was not feeling well; she has been ill all summer. 

I am glad to see you looking so well. 

He was looking well when he lived in the country. 

Do not hurry, look twice at it. 

I was looking after the child. 

What are you looking for? I am looking for the paper. 
You were not looking for me, were you? 

I shall look for you early tomorrow morning. 

You will do well to look into that affair carefully before 
investing your money in it. 

Will you please look over my letter? 

He looked about him but he could not see anybody. 

He saw me, but looked away. 

She looked down for a moment, and then said what I 
have told you. 

I called them, but they never looked back. 

' A good business man looks forward as far as possible. 

She was looking forward to a pleasant Sunday. 

O, I sliould say tliat it is fifteen minutes’ 
walk to tlie drug store. 

Oh! Je pense qu'il y a un quart d'heure de marche d'ici 
cl la pharmacie. 

Tell me, is it far to the station? —No; not more than ten 
minutes’ ride. 

Why, it is half an hour’s ride to the city. 


36 


ANGLAIS 


12 


It cannot be more than three minutes’ walk. 

Harry, will you not go to the office for me? It is not 
more than six minutes’ walk. 

It is no more than two hours’ ride to New York. 

It is only a week’s sail to Liverpool. 

If you wish, I will sign a year’s lease of the property. 
Please to sign this lease. 

I think you need not light the rooms, Lucy; 
these two windows make them light 
enough. 

Je pense que vous n'avez pas besom de faire de la lumibre , 

Lucie; ces deux fenetres nous donnent assez de lumihre. 

It is light enough —the sun is very bright. 

Turn on the light, please. 

Charles, will you not kindly turn up the light? 

The church is lighted by both gas and electricity. 

Yes, sir; the house is lighted by electricity. 

How light it is here! Where can all the light come 
from? —I see no windows. 

I have heard that the gardens are brilliantly lighted. 

It seemed to be very light there. 

Will you not buy tbese books? You can 
pay for them five dollars a month. 

Ne voulez-vous pas acheter ces livresf Vous pouvez les 
payer & raison de cinq dollars par mois. 

He is receiving six dollars a week. 

She is getting thirty dollars a month. 

How much is this? —Fifty dollars cash, or you can pay for 
it five dollars a month for eleven months. 

I am wondering whether he will pay two dollars a month. 

I understand that you can speak French. 

J’entends que vous pouvez parler frangais. 

I understand that they are coming home soon. 

She can understand everything he says. 

I hear that you understand English. 

He said that he understood me. 


§12 VINGT-QUATRIEME LEQON 37 

But you could not have understood me; you certainly are 
mistaken. 

I am told that Henry understood him to say fifteen dollars. 

Charles said that he understood you. 

You are mistaken if you think that my house 
is sold. 

Vous vous trompez , si vous pensez que j'ai vendu ma maison. 

We are mistaken; we shall apologize. 

She is mistaken in thinking that he is ill. 

It is easy to be mistaken; and it is easy not to be 
understood. 

I am mistaken; I relied too much on my judgment. 

Although his house is sold, he is bearing up bravely. 

If you are mistaken, why do you not tell him that the 
farm was sold? 

Their factory is sold —there can be no mistake about that. 

He is mistaken; I am awake. 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


Harry; do you not think this is 
a good time to go out and look 
for some new apartments? It is 
so pleasant this afternoon. 

Yes; this is just the day for that, 
Lucy. I am very tired of these 
rooms. They are dark and too 
small. I wish we could find 
something lighted by electricity 
and heated by steam. 

I wonder if we could not find such 
a suite on River Avenue? 


We can try. It is said that many 
beautiful apartments are to be 
had there. 


Henri, ne pensez-vous pas que le 
moment est favorable pour sor- 
tir et aller voir de nouveaux 
appartements? II fait si beau 
cet apres-midi. 

Oui; c’est une belle journee pour 
cela, Lucie. Je suis fatigue de 
ces chambres. Elies sont som- 
bres et trop petites. Je voudrais 
pouvoir trouver un appartement 
eclaire a l’electricite et chauffe 
a la vapeur. 

Je me demande si nous ne pour- 
rions pas trouver un tel appar¬ 
tement sur l’Avenue de la 
Riviere. 

Nous pouvons essayer. On dit 
qu’il y a beaucoup de jolis 
appartements a louer sur cette 
avenue. 




38 


ANGLAIS 


12 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION — (Continuees) 


I will tell John to bring the car¬ 
riage to the door. You will be 
ready in half an hour, I sup¬ 
pose? 

O, yes; just as soon as I can 
change my clothes. 

* 

* * 

Is the janitor at home? We 
should like to look at the apart¬ 
ments on the second floor, 
please. 

Yes, sir; he is. I will call him. 
Come, Lucy, the janitor will be 
here directly. Let us look at 
the rooms. I like this location, 
don’t you? 

Yes; it is very pleasant here. 
The view is magnificent. 

It is also a very good neighbor¬ 
hood. 

* 

* * 

The door is locked, sir. Let me 
open it. Come in. Here is the 
parlor. As you see, it is a very 
large room, well lighted by 
these two windows looking on 
the avenue, and by those two 
on the garden. It is also in 
good condition, newly papered 
and painted. 

What a pretty room! How do you 
like it, Harry? And the sun 
will shine in here nearly all day. 
O, here is the dining room. 
Isn’t it cosy? All the rooms are 
lighted by electricity, are they 
not, janitor? 

Yes, madam; they are. You see 
that the dining room is well 
lighted also. 


Je vais dire a Jean d’amener la 
voiture a la porte. Vous serez 
pret dans une demi-heure, Je 
suppose? 

Oh! oui; aussitot que j’aurai 
change de vetements. 

* 

* * 

Le concierge est-il a la maison? 
Nous voudrions visiter l’appar- 
tement du second etage, s’il 
vous plait. 

Oui, monsieur; il est ici. Je vais 
l’appeler. Venez, Lucie; le con¬ 
cierge va venir. Allons voir les 
chambres. J’aime cette situa¬ 
tion et vous? 

Oui; c’est tres agreable ici. La 
vue est magnifique. 

C’est aussi un tres bon voisinage. 

* 

* * 

La porte est ferrnee a clef, mon¬ 
sieur. Laissez-moi l’ouvrir. 
Entrez. Voici le salon. Comme 
vous voyez, c’est une tres grande 
chambre bi$n eclairee par ces 
deux fenetres qui donnent sur 
l’avenue, et par ces deux autres 
qui donnent sur le jardin. Elle 
est aussi en bon etat, etant nou- 
vellement tapissee et peinte. 

Quelle jolie chambre! Comment 
la trouvez-vous, Henri? Et le 
soleil donnera ici presque toute 
la journee. Oh! voici la salle 
a manger. N’est-elle pas co¬ 
quette? Toutes les chambres 
sont eclairees a l’electricite, 
n’est-ce pas, monsieur? 

Oui, madame; elles lesont. Vous 
voyez que la salle a manger est 
bien eclairee aussi. 



12 VINGT-QUATRIEME LEQON 39 

REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Here is the kitchen with a new 
kitchen range, hot and cold 
water. On this side are three 
bedrooms and the bathroom. 

How far is it to the City Hall, 
janitor? 

Not more than ten minutes’ walk, 
sir. 

How much do you ask for this 
suite? 

We ask thirty-five dollars a month, 
if the apartment is rented by 
the month. Do you intend to 
stay a year? If you want these 
rooms for a year, we can 
make the rent thirty dollars a 
month. 

Can you give me any information 
about the other tenants of the 
house? 

The owner lives on the ground 
floor; the first floor is occupied 
by an insurance agent, and the 
floor above by Mr. Scott, the 
well-known musician. 

Thirty dollars a month is not too 
much, is it, Harry? I do not 
think we can find an apartment 
that we shall like better, do 
you? 

No; let us take these rooms. If 
you will have the lease made 
out, I will sign it at once. Or 
better yet, send it to my office 
tomorrow morning, and I will 
see that it is signed and returned 
to you at once. Here is my 
card. We were very fortunate 
to get these rooms, Lucy. 


Voici la cuisine avec une nouvelle 
cuisiniere; l’eau chaude et l’eau 
froide. De ce cote sont trois 
chambres a coucher et la salle 
de bains. 

Quelle distance y a-t-il d’ici a 
l’Hotel de Ville, monsieur? 

Pas plus de dix minutes de 
marche, monsieur. 

Combien demandez-vous pour cet 
appartement? 

C’est trente-cinq dollars par mois 
si l’appartement est loue au 
mois. Avez-vous l’intention de 
rester une annee? Sivousvoulez 
louer ces chambres pour une 
annee, nous pouvons vous les 
laisser a trente dollars par 
mois. 

Pouvez-vous me donner des ren 
seignements sur les autres lo- 
cataires de la maison? 

Le proprietaire demeure au rez-de- 
chaussee; le premier etage est 
occupe par un agent d’assu- 
rances, et l’etage au-dessus par 
M. Scott, le musicien bien 
connu. 

Ce n’est pas trop, trente dollars 
par mois, n’est-ce pas, Henri? 
Je ne pense pas que nous puis- 
sions trouver un autre apparte¬ 
ment que nous aimerions autant 
que celui-ci, et vous? 

Non; prenons ces chambres. Si 
vous voulez bien preparer le bail, 
je le signerai immediatement. 
Ou mieux encore, envoyez-le a 
mon bureau demain matin, et je 
verrai a ce qu’il soit signe et 
vous soit retourne de suite. 
Voici ma carte. Nous avons eu 
de la chance de trouver ces 
chambres, Lucie. 



40 


ANGLAIS 


12 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION—(Continuees) 


I think so too, Harry. Shall we 
drive home by way of the park? 

Yes, by all means. How beauti¬ 
ful the lawns are today! 


Je crois que oui, Henri. Allons- 
nous rentrer en passant par le 
pare? 

Mais certainement. Que les pe- 
louses sont belles aujourd’hui! 


PHRASES 

What is to be done? 

She does not mind the price. 
Dinner is served. 

What is done is done. 

That can be seen every day. 

He is known by everybody. 

Are you not mistaken? 

You pain me. 

She is scarcely able to speak. 

He shall not have it for less. 

He does not seem pleased. 

You ought not to go out in this 
bad weather. 

Would you not have done the 
same? 

How is that rendered in French? 
How is that gentleman dressed? 

Saying and doing are different 
things. 

He knows very well what he 
means. 

Sleeping is as good as eating. 

You are wanted. 

This chair is engaged. 

Has he given that to your keep- 
ing? 

That is seen at a distance. 

That is not done. 

It must be lively there. 

Those are trifles. 

My finger is broken. 

Are you sorry to hear it? 

Each day brings its trouble. 


USUELLES 

Comment faire? 

Elle ne regarde pas au prix. 

Le diner est servi. 

Ce qui est fait est fait. 

Cela se voit tous les jours. 

II est connu de tout le monde. 

Ne vous trompez-vous pas? 

Vous me faites de la peine. 

Elle a de la peine a parler. 

II ne Laura pas a moins. 

II n’a pas Fair content. 

Vous ne devriez pas sortir par ce 
mauvais temps. 

N’auriez-vous pas fait de meme? 

Que veut dire cela en frangais? 
Comment ce monsieur est-il ha- 
bille? 

Faire et dire sont deux. 

II s’entend bien. 

Qui dort dine. 

On vous demande. 

Cette chaise est retenue. 

Vous a-t-il donne cela en garde? 

Cela se voit de loin. 

Cela ne se fait pas. 

II doit y faire gai. 

Ce sont des riens. 

J’ai un doigt casse. 

Etes-vous fache de l’apprendre? 
Chaque jour apporte sa peine. 





12 VINGT-QUATRIEME LEQON 41 

PHRASES USUELLES—(Continuees) 


He does not work now as he used 
to do. 

We used to be friends. 

He spoke of it first. 

When shall I see you? 

I have seen it, and cannot believe 
my eyes. 

I am going to the merchant whose 
address you gave me. 

He broke open my door. 

He makes light of that. 

He makes much of her. 

For the time to come. 

It will come in due time. 

We separated two miles from town. 

Out of love for me. 

He took a liking to me. 

For want of wine, he drinks 
water. 

He bought that second hand. 

He did that without my knowl¬ 
edge. 

That will come in course of time. 
1 arrived at the very moment. 

I came at the very beginning. 

He bought a ready-made coat. 
Every one of us must die. 

After all, he was a great man. 

However little he may eat, he 
is ill. 

Let him do what he will. 

I became acquainted with him. 

I make much of that man. 

I make little of that man.' 

They were everything to each 
other. 

You are far better than he. 

Whatever you may say and do, 
nobody will believe you. 


II ne travaille plus maintenant 
comme il le faisait autrefois. 

Nous etions amis autrefois. 

C’est lui qui en a parle le premier. 

Quand vous verrai-je? 

Je Pai vu, et je n’en puis croire 
mes yeux. 

Je vais chez le marchand dont 
vous m’avez donne Padresse. 

II a enfonce ma porte. 

II n’y attache pas grand impor¬ 
tance. 

II fait grand cas d’elle. 

A Pavenir. 

Cela viendra en son temps. 

Nous nous sommes separes a deux 
milles de la ville. 

Par amour pour moi. 

II me prit en affection. 

A defaut de vin, il boit de Peau. 

II Pa achete d’occasion. 

Il Pa fait a mon insu. 

Cela viendra avec le temps. 

J’arrivai au moment meme. 

Je vins des le commencement. 

Il acheta un habit tout fait. 

Tant que nous sommes, nous 
devons mourir. 

A tout prendre, ce fut un grand 
homme. 

Pour peu qu’il mange, il est 
malade. 

Il a beau faire. 

Je fis connaissance avec lui. 

Je fais grand cas de cet homme. 

Je fais peu de cas de cet homme. 

Ils se tenaient lieu de tout. 

Vous valez beaucoup mieux que 
lui. 

Vous avez beau faire et beau dire, 
personne ne vous croira. 




42 


ANGLAIS 


§12 


PHRASES USUELLES—(Continuees) 


He is in too great a hurry. 

Give me a book, no matter which. 

It is my opinion that you should 
stay. 

He had not walked a mile when 
he lost his way. 

Is it the lowest price? 

How much do you sell this cloth 
for? 

What is the price of this cloth? 

How much do you ask for this 
cloth? 

What are you taught at school? 

The rain will soon be over; the 
weather is clearing up. 

Set your watch back ten minutes. 

My watch is out of order. 

I don’t like sitting up late. 

Early to bed and early to rise 
make a man healthy, wealthy, 
and wise. 

Is the door locked? —Yes, I have 
just locked it. 

Put out the light. 

We are too close in this room. 

She is very fond of light blue. 

Shall I help you to some wine? 

I will trouble you for a little. 

The heat makes me thirsty. 

He looks very sad. 

I always rise with the light. 

As you like. 

I should like to see it. 

I should like to live in a house 
looking on a lake. 

I can make nothing of that affair. 


II se presse trop. 

Donnez-moi un livre, n’importe 
lequel. 

Je suis d’avis que vous restiez. 

II n’avait pas fait un mille qu’il 
perdit son chemin. 

Est-ce le dernier prix? 

Combien vendez-vous ce drap? 

Quel est le prix de ce drap? 

Combien demandez-vous pour ce 
drap? 

Que vous enseigne-t-on a l’ecole? 

La pluie cessera bientot; le temps 
s’eclaircit. 

Retardez votre montre de dix 
minutes. 

Ma montre est derangee. 

Je n’aime pas a veiller tard. 

Se coucher de bonne heure et se 
lever de bonne heure rendent 
un homme bien portant, riche 
et sage. 

La porte est-elle fermee a clef? — 
Oui; je viens de la fermer. 

Eteignez la lumiere. 

Nous sommes a l’etroit dans cette 
chambre. 

Elle aime beaucoup le bleu clair. 

Vous offrirai-je du vin? 

J’en prendrai un peu. 

La chaleur m’altere. 

II a Pair bien triste. 

Je me leve toujours avec le jour. 

Comme vous voudrez. 

Je serais curieux de le voir. 

Je voudrais demeurer dans une 
maison ayant vue sur un lac. 

Je ne puis rien comprendre a cette 
affaire. 




12 


VINGT-QUATRIEME LEQON 


43 


EXERCICE fiCRIT 

R6pondez en anglais aux questions suivantes. Ecrivez 
les questions et les reponses en double expedition, et 
envoyez-nous les deux copies en meme temps. N’enregis- 
trez pas cette legon sur un cylindre vierge avant d’avoir regu 
une copie corrigee par nous: 

1. Did you notice how beautiful the trees are now? 

2. Do you play well on the piano? 

3. Will you sign a year’s lease? 

4. Have you a telephone in your house? 

5. How are your rooms heated? 

6. Do you use wood or coal? 

7. How is your room lighted, by gaS or by electricity? 

8. Do you often have a headache? 

9. What lesson are you studying now? 

10. Can you make yourself understood in German? 

11. Have you been ill this week? 

12. Do you lock your door every night before going to 

bed? 

13. How much does butter cost a pound now? 

14. Is Paris as large a city as London? 

15. Are you fond of river fish? 

16. Would you be able to walk twenty miles a day? 

17. Has your doctor a carriage of his own? 

18. When do you intend to go abroad? 

19. Do you get your vegetables from the market? 

20. When your friends write to you, do you always* 

answer their letters? 

21. Do you enjoy good health in winter? 

22. Do you like to see the snow falling? 

23. What must one do when one has not what one likes? 

24. Will you not be glad when you are able to speak 

English well? 

25. Have you been studying English long? 





















































I 



















- 

































ANGLAIS 

(PARTIE 13) 


VINGT-CINQUIEME LECON 


CYEINDRE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 


VOCABULAIRE 


tlie bath, le bain 
to bathe, se baigner 
the bathrobe, la robe de 
bain 

the bronze, le bronze 
the ear, le wagon (de chemin 
de fer) 

cent, cent {en escompte) 
the cravat, la cravate 
the cuff, la manchette 
the cnff button, le bo7(ton de 
manchette 

dangerous, dangereux 
the delivery, la livraison 
the diamond, le diamant 
the discount, Vescompte 
to discount, escompter 
the dozen, la douzaine 
to be entitled, avoir droit , 
etre intitule (pour un livre) 
the fashion, la mode 
to import, importer 
Italian, italie7i 
the jeweler, le bijoutier 
the line, la ligne 


lined, double 
the linen, la toile de lhi 
the link, l'annea7i, la chaine 
long-tried, eprouvf 
the lot, le lot 

the manufacture, Vusine, 
la manufacture 

to manufacture, fabriquer 
the package, le paq7iet 
the pajamas, le pajamas 
the pearl, la perle 
per, par , pour 

plenty, abondant, en abon- 
dance 

the purchase, Vachat 
to purchase, acheter 
the puzzle, Venigme 
to puzzle, embarrasser 
V esprit 

the race, la race, la co7U r se de 
chevaux 

to repair, repai'er 
to reset, ei7chdsser , monter 
(un bijou) 

the shirt, la chemise 


For notice of copyright, see page immediately following the title page 

§ 13 







2 


ANGLAIS 


13 


VOCABULAIEE- (Continue) 


the show case, vieuble pour 
italage 

simply, simplement 

the size, la dimension 

the socks, les chaussettes 

the spot, le Point 

the stripe, la raie 

the stud, le bouton de chemise 


the style, le style 
stylish, a la mode 
tan, brun-clair 
the tie, la cravate 
the underwear, le linge de 
corps 

the wagon, la voiture 
to wait on, servir 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION 


I. c. s. 

English Record No. 25 

Is Mr. Parker in? I wish 1 to 
look at some of your ties, 
and as he has always waited 
on 2 me, I prefer to see him. 
He is a long-tried friend of 
mine. 

Mr. Parker has just stepped 
out. Can I not show you 
what we have? Here are 
some English cravats re¬ 
ceived only yesterday. Do 
you like them with the 
stripe? Here is another 
lot just in from New 
York. They are very pretty, 
especially those with spots. 
They are very stylish. 

Let me examine them, please. 
And what have you for 
underwear? Show me 
some suits; let me see both 
linen and cotton suits, 
please. 


/. c. s. 

Cylindre d’Anglais No. 25 

M. Parker est-il ici? Je vou- 
drais examiner quelques 
cravates, et comme c’est 
toujours lui qui me sert, je 
prefererais le voir. II est 
un de mes amis les plus 
intimes. 

M. Parker vient de sortir. 
Ne puis-je pas vousmontrer 
ce que nous avons? Voici 
des cravates anglaises que 
nous avons regues pas plus 
tard qu’hier. Les aimez- 
vous a rayures? En voici 
un lot qui vient d’arriver 
de New-York. Elies sont 
tres jolies, surtout celles-ci 
a points. Elies sont tres a 
la mode. 

Voyons, que je les examine, 
s’il vous plait. Et qu’avez- 
vous comme linge de corps? 
Montrez-m’en de differents 
genres, en toile et en coton 
s’il vous plait. 





13 


VINGT-CINQUIEME LECON 


3 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION- (Continuees) 


Yes; what size? A fifteen 
collar, sir? Have you 
plenty of socks? We have 
some novelties; bath robes, 
pajamas —any thing you 
like, sir. 

I will take half a dozen 3 of 
these socks, half a dozen 
ties, and two pairs of tan 
gloves, silk lined. How 
much do I owe 4 you? I 
purchase 6 all my things 
here; am I not entitled to 
a discount? 

We will give you ten per 
cent. off. Your bill is four¬ 
teen dollars. 

Will you have the package 
sent 6 to the house? Shall 
I get it this afternoon? 

Yes; our delivery wagon will 
be at your house before six. 


Come, George, I must go to 
the jeweler’s. I need some 
cuff buttons, and I must 
leave my shirt stud to be 
repaired. 

Let us hasten; perhaps we 
shall be in time for the 
races. Let us take the 


Oui; quelles dimensions? Un 
col numdro quinze, mon¬ 
sieur? Avez-vous assez 
de chaussettes? Voici des 
nouveautes: robes de bains, 
pajamas, tout ce que vous 
pouvez d^sirer, monsieur. 

Je prendrai u’ne demi- 
douzaine de ces chaussettes 
et une demi-douzaine de 
cravates, aussi deux paires 
de gants, brun clair, 
doubles en soie. Combien 
vous dois-je? J’achete ici 
tout ce dont j’ai besoin; 
n’ai-je pas droit a un 
escompte. 

Nous vous donnerons dix 
pour cent. Votre facture se 
monte a quatorze dollars. 

Voulez-vous m’envoyer le 
paquet a la maison? L’au- 
rai-je cet apres-midi? 

Oui; notre voiture de li- 
vraison sera chez vous 
avant six heures. 

*** 

Venez, Georges; il faut que 
j’aille chez le bijoutier; j’ai 
besoin de boutons de man- 
chettes et je lai'sserai un 
bouton de chemise a r 6 - 
parer. 

Hatons-nous, nous serons 
peut-etre a temps pour les 
courses. Prenons le chemin 



4 


ANGLAIS 


13 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees 


elevated cars if you must 
go down town. 

I can never get used to these 
elevated lines of yours. 
At first I thought them 
dangerous, but now they 
simply puzzle me. 

*** 

Here we are. This is Stet¬ 
son’s. Stetson’s has long 
been said to be the best 
jeweler’s in town. 

Please to 7 show me some cuff 
buttons. 

In this show case you will 
find different kinds and 
styles: gold, pearl, bronze. 

I like those pearl ones. Can 
you tell me where they 
were made? Were they 
manufactured in this 
country? 

No; they were imported from 
France. Our best buttons 
are French or Italian. Do 
you prefer the link buttons? 

Yes; the others are too old- 
fashioned. Here is my 
stud. Can you have the 
diamond reset? 

Yes; certainly. This is a 
beautiful diamond. 


de fer eleve si vous avez a 
aller dans le bas de la ville. 

Je ne puis jamais m’habituer 
a vos lignes elevdes. 
D’abord, je les croyais dan- 
gereuses, maintenant je ne 
sais plus qu’en penser. 

*** 

Nous voici arrives. Voici 
Stetson. Depuis long- 
temps, Stetson a la repu¬ 
tation d’etre le meilleur 
bijoutier de la ville. 

Montrez-moi des boutons de 
manchettes, s’il vous plait. 

Dans cet etalage, vous en 
trouverez de differentes 
sortes et de differents 
styles; en or, en perle, en 
bronze. 

J’aime ceux-ci en perle. 
I’ouvez-vous me dire oh 
on les fabrique? Ont-ils 
ete faits dans ce pays? 

Non; ils sont importes de 
France. Nos meilleurs 
boutons viennent de France 
ou d’ltalie. Preferez-vous 
ces boutons a chaine? 

Oui; les autres ne sont plus a 
la mode. Voici mon bouton 
de chemise. Pouvez-vous 
reenchasser le diamant? 

Oui; certainement. C’est un 
diamant magnifique. 




§13 


VINGT-CINQUIEME LEQON 


5 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION— (Continuees) 


Yes; it is. I should like it 
next Saturday if possible. 

You may call for it tomorrow 
if you wish; it will be 
ready. 


Oui; il est tres beau. Je 
voudrais l’avoir samedi si 
c’est possible. 

Vous pouvez venir le cher- 
cher demain si vous voulez; 
il sera pret. 


REMARQUES 

1. Notre verbe vouloir peut se traduire de differentes 
manieres en anglais. 

Lorsqu’on exprime un desir settlement, on emploie to wish. 

I wish to see him, Je veux le voir. 

We wish to go to the park this afternoon, Nous voulons alter au 
pare cet apres-midi. 

Si en meme temps que le desir, on veut exprimer que l’on 
a besoin d’une chose, il faut rendre vouloir par to want. 

I want something to eat, Je veux quelque chose a manger. 

What do you want? Que voulez-vous? 

Dans le sens de aimer , vouloir se traduit par to like. 

I should like to go to Paris, Je voudrais alter d Paris. 

What would you like? Que voudriez-vous? 

Si on veut exprimer une idee de consentement, on emploie 
to be willing. 

I am willing, Je veux bien. 

Are you willing to come with me? Voulez-vous venir avec moi? 

Si vouloir est suivi de que avec un subjonctif a la voix 
active, on emploie generalement will; que se rend par have 
et le subjonctif par l’infinitif sans la preposition to. 

She will have you stay, Elle veut que vous restiez. 

He would have me go home, Il voudrait que je partisse chez moi , 




6 


ANGLAIS 


13 


Le qiie apres vouloir peut etre suivi d’un subjonctif a la 
voix passive. Dans ce cas, q^le est aussi traduit par have, 
et le subjonctif passif par le participe passe. 

I would have his farm sold, Je voudrais que sa ferine fht vendue. 

I will have you invited, Je veux que vous soyez invite. 

2. Le verbe to wait, attendre, se traduit par servir 
lorsqu’il est joint aux prepositions at ou on. 

My sister waits at the table, Ma sceur sert a table. 

My brother will wait on you, Mon fr'ere vous servira. 

Lorsque le participe present waiting suit le verbe to keep, 
l’expression se traduit par faire attendre. 

Do not keep me waiting, Ne me faites pas attendre. 

He kept me waiting very long, It m'a fait attendre longtemps. 

3. Lorsque les mots pound, livre; sail, vaisseau a voiles; 
pair, paire; dozen, douzaine; etc. sont en anglais precedes 
d’un adjectif numeral, ils ne prennent ordinairement pas un 
^ au pluriel, l’adjectif numeral etant considere comme suffi- 
sant pour marquer le pluriel. Cependant lorsque ces mots 
sont suivis cle of, on ajoute ordinairement un y au pluriel. 

I bought a ten-pound hare, J’ai achete tin li'evre de dix livres. 

He bought six pairs of socks, It a achete six paires de chaussettes. 

Give me two dozen eggs, Donnez-moi deux douzaines d’ceufs. 

4. Notre verbe devoir se traduit de differentes manieres 
en anglais, selon le sens que l’on veut exprimer. 

1. Dans le sens de devoir zme somme diargeiit, il se rend 
par to owe. 

How much do I owe you? Combien vous dois-je? 

You owe me three dollars, Vous me devez trois dollars. 

2. Si on a en vue l’obligation morale de faire quelque 
chose il faut employer ought suivi de l’infinitif avec la prepo¬ 
sition to. 

He ought to be here, Il devrait etre ici. 

She ought to fulfil her duties, Elle doit remplir ses devoirs. 


13 


VINGT-CINQUIEME LECON 


7 


3. Pour marquer la necessite absolue, on se sert de must 
suivi de l’infinitif sans la preposition to. 

I must do this at once, It faut que je fasse ceci immediatement. 

If you want to learn English, you must study hard, Si vousvoulez 
apprendre Vanglais, vous devez beaucoup etudier. 

4. Enfin, on emploie to be ou to have suivi de l’infinitif 
avec la preposition to , s’il s’agit d’une chose qui doit avoir 
lieu par suite d’une intention ou d’une convention arretee. 

Your brother is to come here at four, Votre frere doit venir ici a 
quatre heures. 

You have to learn your lessons, Vous devez apprendre vos logons. 

5. To purchase et to buy sont deux synonymes qui veulent 
dire acheter. Dans presque tous les cas, on peut les employer 
indifferemment l’un pour 1’autre. 

6. Les verbes passifs peuvent etre conjugates a tous les 
temps, et sont formes du verbe to be et du participe passe du 
verbe. Prenant comme exemple le verbe passif to be called , 
etre appele, il est conjugue comme suit dans les differents 
temps que nous avons etudies jusqu’a present: 

to be called, etre appele 


PRESENT 


I am called 


Je suis appele 



j II est appell 
\ Elle est appelee 


{ 


We 

You 


Tliey 


are called 


Nous sommes appeles 
Vous fetes appeles 
j Its sont appeles 
\ Elies sont appelees 


\ 


IMPARFAIT 


I was called 


J'etais appele 



{ 


Elle etait appelee 


II Hait appele 


We 

You 


Tliey 


’were called 


Nous etions appeles 
Vous Hiez appeles 
ills Haient appells 


{ 


Elies Haient appelees 




8 


ANGLAIS 


13 


FUTUR 


I shall be called, 
He 1 

She [will be called, 

It J 


We shall be called, 
You will | 


They will 


be called, 


Je serai appele 

IIL sera appele 
\Elle sera appelee 

Nous serous appeles 
Vous serez appeles 
j Ils seront appeles 
1 Elies seront appelees 


PARFAIT INDEFINI 


I have been called, 
He 1 

She [has been called, 


It J 

We 

Yon 


have been called, 


They 


J'ai ete appele 

j II a ete appele 
\Elle a ete appelee 

Nous avons ete appeles 
Vous avez ete appeles 
j Ils out ete appeles 
\ Elies out ete appelees 


PLUS-QUE-PARFAIT 


I had been called, 

He 1 

She [had been called, 

It J 


We 

Yon 


}had been called, 


TheyJ 


J'avals ete appele 

j II avait ete appele 
\Elle dvait ete appelee 

Nous avions ete appeles 
Vous aviez ete appeles 
[ Ils avaient ete appeles 
\Elles avaient ete appelees 


FUTUR ANTERIEUR 


I shall have been called, 
He 1 

She [will have been called, 


It J 

We shall 
You will 


have been called, 


They will 


J’aurai ete appele 

til aura ete appele 
\Elle aura ete appelee 

Nous aurons ete appeles 
Vous aurez ete appeles 
f Ils auront ete appeles 
\ Elies auront ete appelees 


CONDITIONNE L PRESENT 


I should be called, 

He 1 

She [would be called. 

It J 


Je serais appele 

f II serait appele 
\Elle serait appelee 




§13 


VINGT-CINQUIEME LEQON 


9 


We should 
You would 

Tliey would 


be called, 


Nous serious appeles 
Vous seriez appeles 
f Ils seraient appeles 
\ Riles seraient appelees 


CONDITIONNEL PASSE 


1 should have been called, 
He 1 

She > would have been called, 
It J 


We should 
You would 

They would 


have been 
called, 


J’aurais ete appele 

\Il aurait ete appele 
\Elle aurait ete appelee 

Nous aurions ete appeles 
Vous auriez ete appeles 
j Ils auraient ete appeles 
\ Elies auraieut ete appelees 


7. L’imperatif en anglais avec please pent s’exprimer de 
deux manieres, comme on peut le voir dans les exemples 
suivants. 


Please to show me some cloth, 
Show me some cloth, please, 


} 


Montrez-moi du drap , s’il vous plait. 


Please to come early, 
Come early, please, 


Venez de bonne heure, je vous prie. 


EXERCICE ORAL 

But his father chose to let him ^o. I do not 
understand why you should care. 

Mais son p'ere veut le laisserpartir. Je ne comprends pas 
pourquoi vous vous en inquieteriez. 

I know that they are wanted at the house. 

She said that your mother is wanted in the parlor. 

If I wish you to come, why do you not do so? 

O, yes; every one knows that you would like to go. 

He is willing to come to the office, but we do not wish 
him to do so. 

His father would have me stay to dinner, although I said 
that I could not well afford to do so. 

He will want us three to meet again. 

She was willing to let him invest her money. 

I should like to go to the theater with you. 





10 


ANGLAIS 


§13 


“Many are called, but few are chosen.” 

But I will have you stay with us tonight. 

Wait on me at once, please; I have been 
waiting long. 

Servez-moi de suite , s'il vous plait; voila longtemps que 
j'attends. 

Mrs. Smith, wait on this gentleman, please. 

Come, boy, wait on your customers. 

I will wait upon you at your office, sir. 

Wait here for me. Your father is very angry. 

Yes, I will wait until you come. 

Tell them to wait for the cashier. 

Wait—wait —wait —there is nothing but “wait.” 

Be still —wait here by the door. I will return soon. 

Yes, sir; wait in here, if you please. 

Do not wait out there in the cold. 

Were you waiting long at the door? 

His child was waiting on the steps. 

Step in, sir; I will call Mr. Grant. 

Entrez, monsieur; je vais appeler M. Grant. 

Step faster; you are too slow. 

Step out here; I will not have you in my house. 

I was just turning by the post office, when John stepped 
round the corner. 

Will you promise to step away when he comes? 

Step aside if you choose. 

Step aside, please. 

Please to step aside. 

Shall you venture to step through the door? 

Step down, please. We cannot pass while you are stand¬ 
ing there. 

Please to step this way. The cashier will talk with you. 
Step up quickly —it is your turn. 

Step over here. Where you are, you are in the way. 

It has been said that all valuable men should be chosen. 
When the room was lighted, it seemed to be larger than 
usual. 


§13 


VINGT-CINQUI^ME LEQON 


11 


Although he had sold all his books, he could not obtain 
money enough. 

You have not been gone long. 

The story was told aloud. 

America was discovered in 1492. 

Many houses have been burned. 

Food had been given by them. 

The plates have been washed for two hours. 

Some one told me that all his payments had been antici¬ 
pated. 

Many journeys have been made into the interior of the 
country. 

My business has been thoroughly organized. 

Your property has been thought to be worth about four 
thousand dollars. 

Iron has been known for many hundred years. 

All the raspberries have been put in the pantry. 

God willing, I shall be with you tomorrow. 

News from America was received this morning. 

The door was opened yesterday. 

His brother has been assisted in many ways. 

His trade had been well learned. 

But you will be lost if you venture out in so small a boat. 
It was spoken in a low, soft voice. 

He has been treated badly. 

She had been put to sleep. 

The key to the front door has been broken. 

It was accepted without reply. 

All her letters have been received. 

The hotel has been kept in good repair. 

Various apologies were made. 

Your exercises have not been written well. 

All the trees have been cut down. 

No; the oranges were eaten yesterday. 

Your pajamas have been torn badly. 

Our lessons have been well learned. 

Joseph was sold many years ago. 

The river was crossed in the night. 


12 


ANGLAIS 


§13 


The building was completed quickly. 

Neither city nor town can be said to be beautiful. 

Her promises have never been broken. 

Plain, honest words are needed. 

Men are made old by overworking. 

It has become very cold. 

Neither horses nor cows were sold. 

The house has been completely destroyed. 

It was accomplished by some wrong means. 

It had been lost when we arrived. 

Poor man! He was sent away last week. 

From morning to night is called day. 

Here is the man who could never be found. 

I was much pleased with him. 

If you are willing to pay for it, why should 
you care whether or not you buy it ? 

Si vous voulez bien le payer , qu'est-ce que cela me fait que 
vous Vachetiez ou non? 

I am willing to let him accompany you. 

They are willing to listen to what you have to say. 

He ought to come home soon. 

The accident ought not to have happened. 

A pair of gloves is more expensive than two pairs of socks. 
One ought always to act wisely. 

In times of plenty, there is work for all. 

He has just stepped out on the street. 

I know, but I heard that you had been chosen. 

I do not care; I cannot be made to serve. 

Who are you? Yours is a well-known name. 

O, yes; all the papers were signed yesterday. 

Oh! oui; tons les papiers ont ete signbs hier. 

It was an excellent venture for him. It made him a great 
man. 

It is all included in your bill. 

We were induced to remain here another week. 

It has never been lost. 

He had been introduced by several men. 


13 


VINGT-CINQUI&ME LEQON 


13 


We were left with him. 

The thieves were caught without great difficulty. 

All these buildings will be inspected. 

He was very decided about it. 

It had been kept from us all. 

The horses have been started! The race is on! 

It is not worth while. Let him go. 

How tiresome riding does become! 

It is a thing to be remembered. 

They planned to go by rail. 

Their tickets were taken away from them. 

Perhaps gold cuff buttons have been worn 
more generally by men than any other 
kind. 

Les boutons de manchettes en or ont peut-etre ete portes phis 
generalement par les hommes qu'aucune autre sorte. 

Their replies have been wanted several days. 

O, but I am sure that he will be chosen. 

To have been chosen president is something. 

She has him stay to lunch every time he calls. 

Yes, but it will be wished that he had gone away. 

Collars and cuffs as well as hats and ties must be purchased 
often. 

He would have been found if he had not left the train. 

The country has been thought to be more healthful than 
the city. 

I can never get used to your opera. 

Je ne peux jamais m'habituer a votre Optra. 

We were seventeen years in getting used to these Amer¬ 
ican customs. 

He got used to our ways very quickly. 

O, we soon got used to getting up at six o’clock. 

He got used to winning soon enough. 

I could never get used to that. 

If I could get used to her voice, I think I should like her 
better. 


14 


ANGLAIS 


13 


One quickly gets used to that sort of thing. 

Nobody could get used to that sort of thing. 

One soon gets used to dangers. 

How well harmonized are all these colors! One would 
quickly get iised to their soft tone. 

We get used to everything. 

We have plenty of fish. Do you wish some? 

Nous avons du poisson en abondance. En voulez-voust 

There is fruit enough —you always have plenty of every¬ 
thing. 

There will be plenty for all. 

Here all people dwell in plenty. 

Wherever there is plenty, the poor gather in great 
numbers. 

Xes; please to send me three dozen eggs. 

Oui; envoyez-moi trois douzaines d'osufs, s’il vous plait. 

I will take four dozen pairs. Charge them to my account. 
He bought three pairs of socks. 

Mr. Smith, kindly have two dozen eggs sent to my house 
today. 

O, perhaps, she will purchase two pairs of gloves. 

Yes, these socks are fifty cents a pair. 

Yesterday eggs went up ten cents a dozen. 

Tomorrow the price of eggs will be raised ten cents a 
dozen. 

Eggs rose four cents a dozen yesterday. 

He has five pairs of horses. 

Call at my office this evening.—I called on 
you yesterday. 

Venez cl mon bureau ce soir. —J’ai ete vous voir hier. 

You were called at four o’clock. Why did you not 
answer? 

Call for me at seven o’clock. 

What do you call your dog? 

Who called at the house today? 


13 


VINGT-CINQUIEME LEQON 


15 


I will call on you when I am in town. 

Call after him. He will come back. 

Did you call me? 

Did you say that you must call at Mrs. Franklin’s? 

Yes; call some time when you are passing by. 

Yes; she called once before. 

Call off your dog, sir, or else I will kill him. 

Call out as loud as you can. , 

Her friend said that she would call within an hour. 

How much do I owe you?—You never owed 
me a cent, sir. 

Combien vous dois-jef— Vous ne m'avez jamais dll un sou, 
monsieur. 

You ought to pay your bills promptly. 

He must see that I do not like him. 

O, yes; he is to be here tomorrow at three o’clock. 

I understand, but, as I told you, he has to be there at five 
o’clock. 

Her father said that she must study English. 

She ought to know better. 

He must see why we cannot come. 

Your bill ought to have been paid weeks ago, sir. 

Well, he ought never to have done that. 

Whenever such things had been said, we discovered that 
he had been heavily in debt. 

I cannot go with you; I have to learn my lesson first. 
Although he well knew that he ought to have done it, he 
did not do it. 

O, yes; it has been thoroughly investigated. 

Oh! oui; on a fait une enqutte serieuse. 

If these things had not been said of him, he would have 
succeeded. 

It was reported that many lives had been lost. 

He has been discharged. He was told to leave yesterday, 
but he refused to do so. 

He was killed in this very place. 


16 


ANGLAIS 


13 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


Good morning, sir. I have been 
told that you are having a spe¬ 
cial sale today. My little boy 
needs some cuff buttons. Do 
you think you can please him? 

We will see. You will not want 
very expensive ones, will you? 
How do you like these? 

O, these are very pretty. Papa, 
I wish you would get me a pair 
of cheap buttons, too. Then I 
can keep these buttons for Sun¬ 
days and holidays. 

Very well, Harry. You are get¬ 
ting to be quite a wise little 
man. See if you cannot find 
a pair that you like. And Mr. 
Perkins, if I leave this diamond 
to be reset, when can I have it? 
Some time this week? 

O, yes; it will be ready for you by 
Friday, at the latest. 

I will call for it Friday afternoon, 
then. 

Papa, I like these buttons. They 
are very pretty. 

Very well; take them. How much 
is my bill, please? 

There is nothing else that you 
want, sir? The bill is seven 
dollars and fifty-five cents. 
Will you take these things with 
you, or shall they be sent to 
your house? 

I will take them with me. 

O, there is a small charge against 
you on our books —three dollars 
and eighty-five cents for a small 
gold chain. 


Bonjour, monsieur. On m’a dit 
que vous aviez une vente spe- 
ciale aujourd’hui. Mon petit 
gargon a besoin de boutons de 
manchettes. Pensez - vous en 
avoir a son gout? 

Nous allons voir. Vous n’en 
voulez pas de tres chers, n’est-ce 
pas? Comment trouvez-vous 
ceux-ci? 

Oh! ils sont tres jolis. Papa, je 
voudrais que tu en achetes une 
paire bon marche. Alors', je 
pourrais conserver ceux-ci pour 
les dimanches et jours de fete. 

Tres bien, Henri. Tu commences 
a devenir un petit homme sage. 
Vois si tu peux en trouver une 
paire qui te plaise. Et, M. Per¬ 
kins, si je laissece diamant pour 
etre enchasse quand pourrai-je 
Pavoir? Un jour de cette se- 
maine? 

Oh! oui; il sera pret vendredi au 
plus tard. 

Je viendrai le chercher vendredi 
apres-midi, alors. 

Papa, j’aime ces boutons-la. Ils 
sont tres jolis. 

Tres bien; prends-les. Combien 
vous dois-je, je vous prie? 

Vous ne desirez pas autre chose, 
monsieur? Votre facture se 
monte a sept dollars et cin- 
quante-cinq “cents.” Voulez- 
vous prendre ces marchandises 
avec vous, ou dois-je les en- 
voyer chez vous? 

Je vais les prendre avec moi. 

Oh! nous avons un petit compte 
sur nos livres: trois dollars et 
quatre-vingts cents pour une 
petite chaine en or. 




§13 


VINGT-CINQUIEME LEQON 


17 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Yes, thank you; I remember now. 
Here is the money. 

Thank you, sir. 

* 

* * 

Now, Harry, let us go to Mr. 
Grant's store on Harrison Ave¬ 
nue. I want to buy some col¬ 
lars and cuffs. 

How much are those collars? 

Twenty-five cents. 

I will take half a dozen, please. 
Let me have half a dozen pairs 
of cuffs, too —number ten and a 
half. When I was here yester¬ 
day one of your clerks showed 
me some very pretty cravats; 
I should like to look at them 
again, please. 

Yes, of course. These are some 
that were ordered last spring in 
London. They were not made 
up until last month, so you can 
see that they are the very latest 
patterns. We have another or¬ 
der that is to come from Paris 
some time during this coming 
week. Do you not like these? 

Yes; they are very handsome. I 
will take these —a dozen, I 

i 

think. Now, will you show me 
your straw hats? 

Yes; Mr. Warren, will you wait 
on Mr. Perkins, please? 

Step this way, Mr. Perkins. Did 
you want the hat for yourself? 

If you can fit me, I will take one. 
But I am looking for one for 


Oh! oui, merci; je me rappelle 
maintenant. Voici votre argent. 

Merci, monsieur. 

* 

* * 

Maintenant, Henri, allons au 
magasin de M. Grant sur 
l’avenue Harrison. Je veux 
acheter des cols et des man- 
chettes. 

Combien ces cols? 

Vingt-cinq “cents." 

J’en prendrai une demi-douzaine, 
s’il vous plait. Donnez-moi 
aussi une demi-douzaine de 
paires de manchettes, numero 
dix et demi. Quand j’etais ici 
hier, un de vos commis m'a 
montre de jolies cravates; je 
voudrais les examiner de nou¬ 
veau, je vous prie. 

Oui, certainement. En voici qui 
ont ete commandees a Londres 
le printemps dernier. Elies 
n'ont pas ete faites avant le 
mois dernier vons pouvez voir 
qu’elles sont de la derniere 
mode. Nous avons une autre 
commande qui doit venir de 
Paris pendant la semaine pro- 
chaine. N’aimez-vous pas cel- 
les-ci? 

Oui; elles sont tres jolies. Jevais 
en prendre une douzaine, je 
crois. Maintenant, voulez-vous 
me montrer vos chapeaux de 
paille? 

Oui; M. Warren, voulez-vous ser- 
vir M. Perkins, je vous prie? 

Venez par ici, M. Perkins. 
Voulez-vous un chapeau pour 
vous-meme? 

Si j’en trouve un qui m’aille, je 
le prendrai, mais j’en veux un 



18 


ANGLAIS 


13 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


my little boy. How much is 
this hat? It seems to fit me 
well. 

Try this one on, Harry. It fits 
you well, too. Well, sir, I think 
we will take these two hats. 
Please to send them to my house, 
with the cravats, collars, and 
cuffs. Here is my card. 

Very well, sir, you will receive 
them this afternoon. 


pour mon petit gargon. Quel 
est le prix de ce chapeau. II 
me semble qu’il me va bien. 

Essaie celui-ci, Henri. II te va 
bien aussi. Eh bien! monsieur, 
je pense que je prendrai ces 
deux chapeaux. Envoyez-les 
chez inoi, je vous prie, avec les 
cravates, les cols et les man- 
chettes. Voici ma carte. 

Tres bien, monsieur; vous les re- 
cevrez cet apres-midi. 


PHRASES 

So far as I can see, there is noth¬ 
ing more to do. 

Is there anything more to do? 

He kept me waiting. 

They painted the house yellow. 
Harry was hurt. 

Life is what we make it. 

What he does is well done. 

What he promises he will do. 

You must do what you are told. 
He says what he means, and 
means what he says. 

She has gone, no one knows 
where. 

I was very kindly received. 
Always take time to do your best. 

I was about to send for you, for 
I have something to show you. 

Ask either of them. 

He looks like his father. 

We must have walked over ten 
miles. 

I have not seen her since. 

Since it is raining, we will not go. 


USUELLES 

Autant que je puis voir, il n’y a 
plus rien a faire. 

Ya-t-il encore quelque chose a 
faire? 

II m’a fait attendre. 

Us ont peint la maison en jaune. 

Henri a ete blesse. 

La vie est telle que nous la faisons. 

Ce qu’il fait est bien fait. 

II fera ce qu’il promet. 

Vous devez faire ce qu’on vous dit. 

II dit ce qu’il veut dire, et il veut 
dire ce qu’il dit. 

Elle est partie, personne ne sait ou. 

On m’a regu avec bonte. 

Prenez toujours le temps de faire 
de votre mieux. 

J’allais vous envoyer cliercher, car 
j’ai quelque chose a vous mon- 
trer. 

Demandez a n’importe . lequel 
d’entre eux. 

Il ressemble a son pere. 

Nous avons du marcher plus de 
dix milles. 

Je ne l’ai pas vue depuis. 

Puisqu’il pleut, nous ne partirons 
pas. 





13 


VINGT-CINQUIEME LEQON 

PHRASES USUEELES — (Continuees) 


19 


Since then, he has done better. 
Rome was not built in a day. 

How is it that you came so soon? 

Did you see him fall? 

He will tell you himself. 

Whom do you take her to be? 

I forgot his name. 

Love me, love my dog. 

He is an Englishman. 

It is not the time for hunting. 
That is good for nothing. 

I am more tired than you think. 

I am the less rich of the two. 

He turned water into wine. 

I have been ill these two months. 

We left home in the morning, and 
came back in the evening. 

He spoke in the name of his 
father. 

She receives me twice a week. 

He could not speak for fear. 

We saw your father last week; at 
that time he was ill. 

Bring me what books you please. 

I cannot say what road she has 
taken. 

He is not much of a musician. 
She is something of a painter. 
What pleasure does he find in it? 
He had a mind to come. 

They have bought that at too 
high a price. 

I saw her many a time. 

Is that all you have to say? 

This man lives for himself. 

See that tree yonder. 


Depuis, il a mieux fait. 

Paris n’a pas ete bati en un 
jour. 

Comment se fait-il que vous veniez 
si tot? 

L’avez-vous vu tomber? 

II vous le dira lui-meme. 

Pour qui la prenez-vous? 

J’ai oublie son nom. 

Qui m’aime, aime mon chien. 

II est Anglais. 

Ce n’est pas le temps de chasser. 

Cela n’est bon a rien. 

Je suis plus fatigue que vous ne le 
pensez. 

Je suis le moins riche des deux. 

II a change l’eau en vin. 

II y a deux# mois que je suis 
malade. 

Nous sommes sortis de chez nous 
le matin, et revenus le soir. 

II a parle au nom de son pere. 

Elle me regoit deux fois par 
semaine. 

La crainte l’empechait de parler. 

Nous avons vu votre pere la 
semaine derniere; il etait malade 
alors. 

Apportez-moi les livres qu’il vous 
plaira. 

Je ne puis pas dire quel chemin 
elle a pris. 

Il n’est pas grand musicien. 

Elle est tant soit peu peintre. 

Quel plaisir trouve-t-il a cela? 

Il avait envie de venir. 

Ils ont achete cela a un prix trop 
eleve. 

Je Pai vue bien des fois. 

Est-ce la tout ce que vous avez a 
dire? 

Get homme vit pour lui. 

Voyez cet arbre la-bas. 




20 


ANGLAIS 


§13 


PHRASES USUELLES-(Continuees) 


This hat is finer than the one she 
had on yesterday. 

She went out yesterday, I know. 

How are all your little ones? 

Come in, or else you will get wet. 

I owe her many thanks. 

Are you able to walk today? 

He is far from playing well on the 
piano. 

I do not wish to trouble you, —far 
from it. 

I have found two more. 

I remember that day well. 

Do you speak to him?—Speak to 
him! Never! 

Whatever he does, he never suc¬ 
ceeds. 

Wherever I may go, I prefer be¬ 
ing at home. 

The day that she died, I was 
gone. ^ 

I will not go out before I have 
spoken to you. 

Do not go out for fear he should 
come. 

What is the child named? 

Do they hear me? 

Is that house for sale, or to let? 

Have you been obliged to run? 

Have you finished writing? 

Has your mother returned from 
the market? 

Are you pleased with the watch 
I bought for you? 

How long have you been waiting 
for me? 

How long is it since you heard 
from that cousin of yours? 

I have not heard from her for a 
great many years. 


Ce chapeau est plus beau que 
celui qu’elle avait hier. 

Elle est sortie hier, je le sais. 

Comment se portent tous vos 
enfants? 

Entrez, ou bien vous serez 
mouille. 

Je lui dois bien des remerciements. 

Pouvez-vous marcher aujourd’hui? 

II s’en faut de beaucoup qu’il 
joue bien du piano. 

Je ne veux pas vous deranger, 
tant s’en faut. 

J’en ai encore trouve deux. 

Je me rappelle bien ce jour. 

Lui parlez-vous? —Lui parler! Ja¬ 
mais! 

Quoi qu’il fasse, il ne reussit ja¬ 
mais. 

Quelque part que j’aille, je pre- 
fere mon chez moi. 

Le jour qu’elle mourut, j’etais 
parti. 

Je ne sortirai pas que je ne vous 
aie parle. 

Ne sortez pas, de peur qu’il ne 
vienne. 

Comment s’appelle cet enfant? 

Est-ce qu’on m’entend? 

Cette maison est-elle a vendre ou 
a louer? 

Avez-vous ete oblige de courir? 

Avez-vous fini d’ecrire? 

Votre mere est-elle revenue du 
marche? 

La montre que j’ai achetee pour 
vous, vous plait-elle? 

Depuis combien de temps m’atten- 
dez-vous? 

Combien de temps y a-t-il depuis 
que vous n’avez regu des nou- 
velles de votre cousine? 

Je n’ai pas regu de ses nouvelles 
depuis bien des annees. 



§13 


VINGT-CINQU1EME LEgON 


21 


PHRASES USUELLES—(Continuees) 


How many days have you been 
ill? 

How long has he been a physi¬ 
cian ? 

He went away a few minutes ago. 

How long has your book been 
lost? 

At what time were you used to 
dining? 


Combien de jours avez-vous ete 
malade? 

Depuis combien de temps est-il 
medecin? 

II est sorti il y a quelques minutes. 

Depuis combien de temps votre 
livre est-il perdu? 

A quelle heure aviez-vous l’habi- 
tude de diner? 


EXERCICE PHONOGIIAPIIIQUE 

Aussitot que vous aurez regu votre exercice de la vingt- 
quatrieme legon corrige par nous, enregistrez-le sur un 
cylindre vierge, et envoyez-le-nous en suivant les directions 
donnees precedemment, et passez a la legon suivante. 




22 


ANGLAIS 


13 


VINGT-SIXIEME LECON 


CYLINDRE PHONOGRAPIIIQUE 


VOCABULAIKE 


absolutely, absolument 
almost, presque 
the barber, le coiffeur , le 
barbier 

the beef, le bceuf 
the beefsteak, le bifteck 
the bunch, la botte, (de le¬ 
gumes) le paquet 
the bushel, le boisseau 
the butcher, le bouclier 
the butcher shop, la bouche- 
rie 

the cafe, le cafe ( restaurant) 
the case, le cas 
to charge, charger , accuser 
the telery, le celeri 
the court, la cour (de jus¬ 
tice) 

the crime, le crime 
the cutlet, la cotelette 
the dealer, le marchand 
the defendant, Vaccuse 
to detain, retenir 
to dismiss, congSdier 
the evidence, Vividence 
flimsy, ISger , pauvre , faible 
the foot, le pied 


green, vert 
the grocer, VSpicier 
the grocery, VSpicerie, ce 
qu'on acKete a VSpicerie 
impossible, impossible 
innocent, innocent 
the instep, le cou-de-pied 
the mutton, le mouton 
narrow, Stroit 
the pardon, le pardon 
to pardon, pardonner 
the peck, le peck ( mesure , 
environ 9 litres) 
the pepper, le pcrivre, le 
piment 

petty, mesquin, insignifiant 
the petit jui*y, le jury 
to pinch, pincer 
the police, la police 
the pork, le pore 
the potatoes, les pommes de 
terre 

to preside, prSsider 
the quart, la quarte (environ 
un litre) 

to question, questionner 
to rate, rSprimander 





§13 


VINGT-SIXIEME LEQON 


23 


VOCABULAIRE— (Continue) 


to serve, servir 
severely, severement 
sharply, vertement, vivement 
to shave, raser 
the shoes, les souliers 
to shoe, ferrer (un cheval) 
the shoemaker, le cordon- 
nier 

the shoe dealer, le marchand 
de souliers 

the shop, la boutique 
the slippers, les pantoulles 
the spinach, les epinards 
s uddenly, souda inemen t 
to summon, convoquer, as- 
signer 

the theft, le vol 


to, issue, lancer (un man- 
dat) 

the lad, un gargon 
the lamb, Vagneau 
the liver, le foie 
loose, lache, ample, large 
the lunch, le dejeilner 
might, imparfait de may 
thick, epais 
together, ensemble 
unusually, rarement 
utterly, entierement, absolu- 
ment 

the veal, le veau 
the warrant, le mandat 
d'arret 


PHRASES ET 


I. c. s. 

English Record No. 26 


CONVERSATION 

/. c. s. 


Where is Burton today? It 
is almost a week since I 
have seen him . 1 

He is in town. Just now, I 
think he is being shaved . 2 
He went to the barber 
shop about an hour ago. 
Have you anything special 
to do? Then 3 come down 
to Sanderson’s with me. 
I must get a new pair of 
shoes. Mrs. Clark asked 
me to get her some slip¬ 
pers too; I must not forget 
them. 


Cylindre d’Anglais No. 26 

Oil est Burton aujourd’hui? 
II y a presque une semaine 
que je ne l’ai vu. 

II est en ville. A present, 
je crois qu’il se fait raser. 
II est entre chez le barbier 
il y a environ une heure. 
Avez-vous quelque chose 
de particulier a faire? 
Alors, venez avec moi chez 
Sanderson. II faut que 
j’achete une paire de sou¬ 
liers neufs. Mme. Clark 
m’a aussi demande de lui 
acheter des pantoufles; je 
ne veux pas les oublier. 





24 ' 


ANGLAIS 


13 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Yes; I will go with you. 
Afterwards can we not find 
Burton and go to lunch 
together? We might 4 go 
to the cafe in Hotel Ven- 
dome. -0,1 must tell you. 
Yesterday, I was sum¬ 
moned to serve on the 
petit jury. 6 A young man 
was being questioned 
sharply, when your father, 
who was presiding over 
the court, suddenly dis¬ 
missed the case. It was 
some kind of petty theft 
with which the defendant 
was charged. In dismiss¬ 
ing the case, your father 
rated the police severely 
for issuing a warrant on 
such flimsy evidence. The 
lad was only a high-school 
boy, and was absolutely 
innocent. Indeed it was 
utterly impossible for him 
to have committed the 
crime in question. It was 
a most 6 interesting case.— 
But here we are at Sander¬ 
son’s. 

* 

* * 

What have you for a narrow 
shoe? My foot is unusu¬ 
ally 7 narrow. y 

I see. I doubt whether any 
other shoe dealer in the 
city could fit you. Try 


Oui; j’irai avec vous. Apres, 
ne pouvons-nous pas re- 
joindre Burton et dejeuner 
ensemble? Nous pourrions 
aller au cafe de l’Hotel 
Vendome. — Oh! II faut que 
je vous dise. Hier, j’avais 
regu une assignation pour 
servir comme jure. On 
questionnait rigoureuse- 
ment un jeune homme, 
quand votre pere qui pre- 
sidait la cour, annula 
l’affairesubitement. C’etait 
un cas insignifiant de vol 
dont l’accuse etait chargd. 
En annulant l’affaire, votre 
pere reprimanda la police 
severement pour lancer un 
mandat d’arret d’apres une 
Evidence aussi faible. Le 
jeune homme n’etait qu’un 
dcolier, et il lui etait abso- 
lument impossible d’avoir 
commis le crime dont il 
s’agissait. C’6tait une af¬ 
faire des plus interessantes. 
— Mais nous voici arrives 
chez Sanderson. 

*** 

Montrez-moi des souliers tres 
etroits. Mon pied est ex- 
cessivement 6troit. 

Je vois. Je doute fort 
qu’aucun autre marchand de 
chaussures de la ville puisse 



§13 


VINGT-SIXIEME LEQON 


25 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


this on, please. It pinches 
a little over the instep? 
Try these. 

Yes; they seem to be just 
right. I think it 8 better to 
have them a little looser. 
I will wear them, and leave 
these to be repaired. I 
want a pair of slippers for 
my wife —five and a half, 
please. I think that is the 
size she told me; yes, I 
am sure it is. ' Send them 
up to the house with the 
bill. 


Mr. Clark, you will pardon 
me. I will not detain you 
long —just long enough to 
order my groceries for 
tomorrow. Here is my 
grocer and butcher’s. 
Good morning, Mr. Wilder. 
Send me two bunches of 
celery, half a peck of green 
peppers, a bushel of pota¬ 
toes, and three quarts of 
spinach. Have you any 
veal?® No? Well, send up 
about three pounds of lamb 
cutlets then. You have no 
lamb? Have you any liver? 


trouver des souliers qui 
vous aillent bien. Essayez 
ceux-ci. Ils vous serrent 
un peu sur le cou-de-pied? 
Essayez ceux-la. 

Oui; ils me semblent etre 
bien. Je pense qu’il vaut 
mieux les avoir un peu 
amples. Je vais les mettre 
et laisser ceux-ci pour etre 
repares. Je veux une paire 
de pantoufles pour ma 
femme — numdro cinq et 
demi, s’il vous plait. Je 
crois que c’est le numero 
qu’elle m’a donne; oui, j’en 
suis sur. Envoyez-les chez 
moi avec la facture. 

*** 

M. Clark, vous me pardon- 
nerez. Je ne vous ferai pas 
attendre longtemps; juste 
assez de temps pour com¬ 
mander des provisions pour 
demain. Voici mon epicier 
et mon boucher. Bonjour, 
M. Wilder. Envoyez-moi 
deux bottes de celeri, un 
demi-peck de piments verts, 
un boisseau de pommes 
de terre et trois quartes 
d’epinards. Avez-vous du 
veau? Non? Alors envoyez- 
moi environ trois livres de 
cotelettes d’agneau. Vous 
n’avez pas d’agneau? Avez- 
vous du foie? 



26 


ANGLAIS 


13 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Nothing but beef, mutton, 
and pork. 

Well, send me a very thick 
beefsteak —about three 
pounds. Now, Mr. Clark, 
if you wish, we will see if 
we can find Burton. 


Rien que du boeuf, du mou- 
ton et du pore. 

Eh bien, envoyez-moi un bif- 
teck tres epais, a peu pres 
trois livres. Maintenant, 
M. Clark, si vous voulez, 
nous irons voir si nous 
pouvons trouver Burton. 


REMARQUES 

1. Notre expression il y a ... . que se traduit de la 
maniere suivante, et le 7ie qui suit en frangais ne se rend 
pas en anglais. 

It is almost a month since I saw him, II y a presque un mois que je 
ne I'ai vu. 

How long is it since you heard from your uncle? Combien de temps 
y a-t-il que vous n’avez regu des nouvelles de votre oncle? 

2. La forme progressive existe aussi dans les verbes 
passifs, mais elle n’est employee qu’au present et a l’impar- 
fait. Comme dans la forme progressive active, elle exprime 
qu’une action se fait au moment meme ou l’on parle 
(present), ou s’accomplissait au moment meme ou une autre 
action egalement passee avait lieu (imparfait). 

„Dans la phrase: I am being shaved now, On me rase main- 
tenant, Faction d'etre rase s’accomplit au moment ou l’on 
parle; c’est comme si l’on disait, On est en train de me raser 
maintenant. 

Les deux actions exprimees dans la phrase. 

I was being shaved when you passed by, On me rasait quand vous 
avez passi, 

sont entierement passees, mais la premiere, indiquee par la 
forme progressive passive, avait lieu au meme moment 
que l’autre. 

Comme on le voit, la forme progressive passive ne differe 
de la simple forme passive qu’en ce qu’on introduit le 




13 


VINGT-SIXIEME LEQON 


27 


participe present being entre le verbe to be et le participe 
passe. Comparez ces deux formes dans les tnodeles 
suivants. 


to be called, s'appeler (etre appele ) 

PRESENT 

Passif simple 

I am called, On m'appelle 

lie 1 

She > is called, On Vappelle 

It | 

We 1 nous 1 

You > are called, On | vous > appelle 

They J \ les J 

Passif Progressif 

I am being called, On m'appelle 
He 1 

Slie > is being called, On Vappelle 

It I 

We 1 [ nous j 

You > are being called, On j vous > appelle 

They I I les J 


Imparfait 
Passif Simple 

I was called, On m'appelait 

He 1 

She > was called, On Vappelait 

It J 

We ] nous 1 

Yon > were called, On j vous J appelait 

They J [ les J 

Passif Progressif 

He 1 

She i Avas being called, On Vappelait 

It J 

We 1 f nous 1 

You i AA r ere being called, On < vous \appelait 

They J l les J 

I was being called, On m'appelait 


28 


ANGLAIS 


13 


3. La place de l’adverbe dans un grand nombre de cas 
est generalement la meme en franqais qu’en anglais, c’est-a- 
dire que l’adverbe prend generalement place apres le verbe 
dans les temps simples, entre l’auxiliare et le participe passe 
dans les temps composes. 

Does he live far away? Demeure t-il loin? 

She paints well, Elle peint bien. 

I shall never forget your kindness, Je n'oublierai jamais vos bontes 

I have carefully studied this case, J'ai soigneusement etudie cette 
affaire. 

Dans les cas suivants, cependant, la place de l’adverbe 
differe dans les deux langues: 

1. Si le verbe a un complement direct, l’adverbe se place 
apres ce complement. 

I like his letter very much, J'aime beaucoup sa lettre. 

She speaks and writes English very well, Elle parle et ecrit trbs 
bien Vanglais. 

I eat vegetables quite often, Je mange trbs souvent des legumes. 

2. Les adverbes de temps comme always , toujours, never , 
jamais, soon , bientot, often , souvent, sometimes , quelquefois, 
seldom , rarement, etc. et quelques autres comme probably , 
probablement, certainly , certainement, perhaps, peut-etre, etc. 
se placent ordinairement entre le sujet et le verbe dans les 
temps simples, mais entre l’auxiliaire et le verbe dans les 
temps composes. 

He always comes for dinner, II vient toujours diner. 

1 never met him, Je ne Vai jamais rencontre. 

He soon went out, II partit bientdt. 

He often calls in the morning, II vient souvent nous voir le matin. 

She sometimes travels, Elle voyage quelquefois. 

We probably passed him, Nous Vavons probablement passe. 

They certainly understand you, Us vous comprennent certainement. 

She always thought you were a Frenchman, Elle pensait toujours 
que vous Hiez Franqais. 

He has never come to see us, It n'est jamais venu nous voir. 

They have probably taken another way, I/s ont probablement pris 
un autre chemin. 

Le verbe to be , cependant, employe seul, se place toujours 
devant ces adverbes. 


13 


VINGT-SIXIEME LEgON 


29 


I am always on time, Je suis toujours a temps. 

He is often late, II est souvent en retard. 

We are probably the first, Nous sommes probablenient les premiers. 

3. Dans les phrases exclamatives et emphatiques, 
lorsqu’on considere l’adverbe comme le mot important de la 
phrase, on place cet adverbe entre le sujet et le verbe, et 
meme en tete de la phrase quand on veut specialement 
attirer l’attention sur ce mot. 

Well do I remember the day he told me that, Je me rappelle bien le 
jour ou il.m'a dit cela. 

I call your attention especially to this, J'appelle specialement votre 
attention sur ceci. 

I really wish you would come, Je desire reellement que vous veniez. 

4. Dans l’expression to like better , better se place apres le 
premier complement. 

I like tea better than coffee, J'aime mieux le the que le cafe. 

We like John better than Charles, Nous aimons mieux Jean que 
Charles. 

4. Might est l’imparfait de may. Si nous en exceptons 
la deuxieme personne du singulier, might est invariable a 
toutes les formes. II se joint a l’infinitif sans la preposition 
to, et se rend ordinairement par l’imparfait ou le conditionnel 
de notre verbe pouvoir. 

Might , comme may renferme une idee de permission. 

I might read certain books, Je pouvais lire certains livres, (On me 
Vavait permis). 

Might he not come next week, Ne pourrait-il pas venir la semaine 
prochaine? 

Might exprime aussi la possibility qu’une chose se fasse, 
qu’un evenement arrive. 

It might rain today, It pourrait pleuvoir aujourd’hui. 

I might need the carriage this afternoon, Je pourrais avoir besoin de 
la voiture cet aprhs-midi. 

Enfin might peut aussi exprimer un subjonctif lorsqu’il est 
employe dans une proposition subordonnee, comme on le 
verra lorsque nous traiterons du subjonctif. 


30 


ANGLAIS 


13 


5. On appelle petit jury les jures qui sont appeles a juger 
les cas en cour, et grand jury ceux qui preparent l’accusation. 
Le petit jury correspond au jury frangais, et le grand jury a 
la Chambre des mises en accusation. 

6. Le mot most sert a former des superlatifs qui ne 
peuvent pas se rendre toujours litteralement en frangais, 
comme dans les exemples suivants. 

Your brother is most generous, Votre frfre est Vhomtne le plus 
genereux du monde. 

I have just read a most interesting book, Je viens de lire un livre 
des plus hit Ires sants. 


7. Le prefixe un est tres commun en anglais; il est negatif 
ou privatif, et se traduit par notre prefixe in ou de\ il signifie 
aussi non, qui n'est pas, etc. Il s’ajoute principalement-aux 
adjectifs et aux participes, quelquefois aussi aux verbes. 


able, capable 
broken, casse 
certain, certain 
to dress, habiller 
due, du 


unable, incapable 
unbroken, qui n'est pas casse 
uncertain, incertain 
to undress, deshabiller 
undue, qui n'est pas dii, non echu 


8. Apres certains verbes comme to think, penser, to find, 
trouver, to imagine , imaginer, to consider, considerer, etc., on 
emploie quelquefois it qui n’a pas alors d’equivalent en 
frangais: 

I do not think it difficult to learn English, Je ne pense pas qu'il soit 
difficile d'apprendre 1'anglais. 

I find it difficult to answer that letter, Je trouve qu'il est difficile de 
repondre a cette lettre. 

He thinks it .better not to say anything, Il pense qu'il est mieux de 
ne rien dire. 


9. En anglais les mots bceuf, mouton, veau, pore, se tra- 
duisent respectivement par ox, sheep, calf, pig, si on designe 
l’animal lui-meme et en vie; par beef , mutton, veal et pork si 
on a en vue la chair de cet animal, lorsqu’il est tue. Le mot 
agneau se traduit par lamb dans les deux cas. 


9242 


VINGT-SIXIEME LEQON 


31 


§ 13 


EXERCICE ORAL 

I think it better to tell them at once. 

Je pense qu'il est mieux de le leur dire immediatement . 

Do you not think it better to go home at once? 

She thought it kinder to let them know as soon as possible. 
I believed it better to pay their bill. 

You were wrong to say that I thought it better to write to 
them today. 

Your sister thinks it better not to know them. 

He thought it safer not to go out in the boat. 

She thought it wrong to mention the matter. 

Do you not think it better to try it on the other foot? 
Papa, do you not think it better to take this pair? 

She thought it better to come home two hours ago. 

Why, it must be at least a month since I 
have heard from him. 

Jlfais, il doit y avoir au moins un mois que je n'ai regu de 
ses nouvelles. 

It is a week today since I saw him. 

It is more than a year since I have seen them. 

Yesterday he told me that he had not heard from them 
since they went to Europe. 

Yes, sir; it will be just a month tomorrow since I bought 
this house. 

My dear boy, did you know that it would have been just 
two years tomorrow since we have heard from you? 

He went away more than three years ago; it is now nearly 
two years since he has written us or sent any word of himself. 

Speak slowly and you will be better under¬ 
stood. 

Parlez lentement, et on vous comprendra mieux. 

If you write clearly you will please him. 

Let us walk more slowly; otherwise we shall get tired soon. 
Why do you not come oftener? 

It was well done, was it not? 

It will be well done, I know. 


32 


ANGLAIS 


13 


He said that they would certainly come. 

“To have loved and lost, is better than never to have 
loved at all.” 

“To die quickly—that is something.” 

He passed by quickly. 

She has returned quickly. 

She has always thought as you do. 

I have never believed what you told me. 

It will be finished soon. 

O, yes; it will be thoroughly investigated. 

Often to speak of such things is not in good taste. 

Slowly they walked down town. 

Sweetly, O sweetly, she sang. 

Calling loudly, he ran down the street. 

Do it quickly, will you not? 

Yesterday he fell into the river. 

He fell into the river yesterday. 

Tomorrow I will call at your office. 

I shall be at your house tomorrow. 

Whenever he comes, let him in. 

As soon as you see him, please to tell him. 

I have apples enough; have you? 

She will always have plenty. She has money enough for 
three families. 

There are strawberries enough. 

"Let us go home. —Have you not seen enough? 

Enough! Tell him to keep still. 

You did that quickly enough. Could you do it again? 

No; do not buy any. We have enough. 

Buy me two pairs of shoes, please. —No; why should I? 
You have shoes enough now. 

Send it to him at once. He will return it soon. 

Yes, certainly it is a most interesting book. 

Oui , certainement; c'est un livre des plus interessants. 

Yes, indeed; she is a most amiable woman. 

Indeed he is a most kind man. 

It is the most charming little child I have ever seen. 


13 


VINGT-SIXIEME LEQON 


33 


Certainly he is a most interesting speaker. 

But she is really a most interesting writer. 

We had a most enjoyable time; every one seemed to be 
delighted. 

They said that they had a most enjoyable time at the 
theater yesterday. 

He iniglvt end the whole matter if he chose. 

IIpouvait finir toute Vaffaire s’il avait voulu. 

He might come home sooner just to please me. 

She might not believe you, if you said that. 

We might have done it that way, but we thought it better 
not to do so. 

Yes, indeed; he might walk home that way—certainly there 
is nothing to prevent him. 

It might have seemed to be true, but there was no truth 
in it. 

He might invest his property there, but I hardly think 
he will. 

True, they might extend every courtesy to us, but I do 
not think they will. 

You .might do it, but you will not. 

She probably thinks that you have forgotten 
her. 

Elle pense probablement que vous Vavez oubliee. 

They surely remember having told us that. 

How often do you go out?-—I seldom go out of the house. 
Do you travel much?—I never travel. 

Father will probably come tomorrow morning. 

I would willingly have bought that house. 

He likes my dress pretty well. 

Does your brother speak English? —He is beginning to 
speak it a little. 

I like my French book better than yours. 

I was never here before. 

Are they going anywhere this summer? 

I am thinking of going somewhere near Lake George. 


34 


ANGLAIS 


§13 


Have you found your hat? Have you looked everywhere? 
It is very cold here; why do you not go in? 

Will your friend go anywhere this summer? 

Is it not very cold outside? 

Did he not say that he seldom reads the newspapers? 

Has he ever traveled in France? 

Does he understand English easily? 

I can write English as rapidly as French. 

I cannot tell how many days she will spend in Paris. 

He has not enough to do. 

We seldom see them since they moved to their country 
home. 

You know that merchant well, do you not? . 

I usually get up at six. 

You sometimes go hunting, do you not? 

Do you ever go to the grocer’s? 

Is your father still in France? 

When shall you see your friend again? —I do not know 
yet; I expect a letter from him soon. 

He will be ready immediately. 

I am going; I have waited long enough. 

We are very sorry to hear that your father is so ill. 

I have better news this morning; the doctor says he is 
almost out of danger. 

They may have forgotten your order, 
it might be bad weather tomorrow. 

She may call this afternoon when she is in town. 

May John come to the park with me? 

The matter might be settled before night. 

Can we not get John to go with us? —Not 
now; he is being shaved. 

Ne pouvons-nous pas demander a Jean de venir avec 
nous?—Pas maintenant; it se fait raser. 


Who is building this house? —I do not know, but I think it 
is being built by Monroe and Company. 

All kinds of things are being told about them. 

The mail is being carried in foreign ships. 


§13 


VINGT-SIXIEME LEgON 


35 


Immense buildings are now being built of steel. 

Do come quickly; he is being taken away. 

Yes, I think he will catch the train; he is being driven 
rapidly enough to the station. 

The report is being circulated that he has failed in 
business. 

The story is being well told. 

These books are being read very much. 

The horses are being killed by hundreds. 

Cities are being built everywhere. 

He was being watclied yesterday. 

On le surveillait hier. 

♦ 

No, sir; you were being paid when I came in. 

It was being carefully looked into. 

She was being driven from home, when the law stepped in. 
I was being shaved when you were there. 

All kinds of things were being said about them. 

A great many wrong things were being done. 

He was being slowly put to death. 

The factory was being constructed very slowly, until Mr. 
Grant came home. 

O, yes; the apples were being picked yesterday. 

No, no; lie cannot liave been gone more than 
a week. 

Non , non; il ne pent pas y avoir plus d'une semaine qu’il 
est parti. 

It is already three weeks since he sailed. 

It is an hour since he went out to do that errand. 

It is more than a year since we have heard of him. 

O, yes; it is two months since she had the fever. 

He has been imagining all kinds of things since he was ill. 
It is nearly three hours since we sent for the doctor. 

Do not make any noise; do not wake her; it is only an 
hour since she went to sleep. 

Listen; it is a long time since I told you this story. 

Many years have passed away since I have seen a pound 
sterling. 


36 


ANGLAIS 


13 


Yes; she is being cared for by Doctor 
Jackson. 

Oui; le Docteur Jackson prend soin d'elle. 

He was being dressed when I called t<? see how he was. 
The wine was being drawn while we waited. 

Yes, I understood; but I know that the beef was being cut 
while we were there. 

So you waited while the diamond was being reset? 

While slippers were being found for my friend, I read the 
morning paper. 

I thought it better to have the tooth taken 
out. 

J'aipense qu'il Hait mieux d’arracker la dent. 

He believed it better to call at once. 

We thought it better to insist on payment. 

He thought it better to insist on payment being made at 
once. 

She thinks it better to insist on being paid at once. 

You said that you thought it better to send for a physician. 
When Charles came home last night, he said that he 
thought it better to go to New York tonight. He added 
that he could not wait until tomorrow. 

But I know it to be better to go today. 

I think it better always to be honest. 

We thought it better to speak the truth. 

Of course; every one knows that he is a most 
excellent man. 

Naturellement, tout le monde sail que c'est le meilleur 
homme du monde. 

You are most welcome. Come often, sir. 

She has a most entertaining manner. 

He says that he has seen a most interesting person. 

Why, all the world knows her to be a most charming 
girl. 

This is a most important message; I want to go down 
town at once. 

It is a most extraordinary undertaking. 


§13 


VINGT-SIXIEME LEQON 


37 


Whether you like it or not, you are asked to 
write these sentences carefully. 

Que votes Vaimiez ou non, on vous demande d'ecrire ces 
phrases avec soin. 

The hansom is coming soon; shall we wait? 

Fortunately the ring was not badly broken. 

It has often been said that you do not always speak the 
truth. 

Come quickly. 

It belongs to me; why are you always saying that it is 
yours? 

When spring comes we shall travel much more. 

The trolley is coming swiftly round the corner. 

Handle it carefully; do not drop it on the floor. 

He is always satisfied; he does not care what happens. 
The statement was not taken seriously. 

The story that you told about your friend is being told 
everywhere. 

Now to go home would not do any good. 

Frequently the coachman calls at the front door. 

The stone fell suddenly. 

We have been wandering far and near. 

They know that you still admire them. 

These glasses were very easily broken. 

You should never say such things. Can you never tell the 
truth? 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


Mr. Williams, I purchased these 
shoes here yesterday, but I do 
not like them. They do not fit 
at all well. Can I not exchange 
them ? 

Yes, sir; you can. Would you 
like something of the same 
kind? Or do you prefer a soft 
leather shoe? What do you 
think of this pair? 

Let me try them on, please. I 
have been trading with you for 


M. Williams, j’ai achete ces Sou¬ 
liers ici hier, mais je ne les 
aime pas. Ils ne me vont pas 
bien du tout. Ne puis-je pas 
les changer? 

Oui, monsieur; vous le pouvez. 
En desirez-vous de la meme 
sorte? Ou preferez-vous des 
souliers en cuir mou? Que 
pensez-vous de cette paire?. 

Laissez-moi les essayer, je vous 
prie. J’ai fait des affaires avec 




38 


ANGLAIS 


§13 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION— (Continuees) 


some time, and I like your 
goods very much. But I could 
never wear this pair of shoes. 
Now these seem to fit me 
better, —I believe they are just 
right. If you can fit me as well 
with a pair of slippers, I will 
take them, too. 

I will try. How do you like 
these? Try them on, please. 
By the way, I must thank you 
for the tickets you sent me yes¬ 
terday. It was a courtesy I had 
not expected. 

O, the tickets! Yes, I thought 
you might like them. These 
slippers seem to be all right. 
Please to charge both shoes and 
slippers to my account. I will 
call for them on my way home. 

* 

* * 

Charles, have you spoken to the 
grocery-man yet? 

No, I have not ordered anything. 
Have you? 

No, and we must attend to it at 
once. There is not a thing in 
the house to eat. We ought to 
have some potatoes, some eggs, 
some butter, and some steak 
at once. We need other things 
too. 

How many eggs shall I order, 
dear? Will two dozen be 
enough? 

Don’t you think you had better 
order three dozen, Charlie? 
And order some peas too, 
please. 


vous depuis quelque temps, et 
j’aime beaucoup vos marchan- 
dises. Mais je ne pourrais 
jamais porter cette paire de 
souliers. Ah! ceux-ci me sem- 
blent mieux aller. Je crois que 
j’en serai content. Si vous 
pouvez me trouver une paire 
de pantoufles qui m’aillent 
aussi bien, je l’acheterai aussi. 

Je vaisessayer. Comment trouvez- 
vous cette paire-ci? Essayez- 
les, je vous prie. Oh! j’ypense, 
je vous remercie beaucoup des 
billets que vous m’avez envoyes 
hier. C’est une politesse que je 
n’attendais pas. 

Oh! les billets! Oui, j’ai pense 
que cela vous ferait plaisir. 
Ces pantoufles me plaisent. 
Ajoutez le prix de ces souliers 
et des pantoufles a mon compte. 
Je viendrai les prendre en reve- 
nant a la maison. 

* 

* * 

Charles, avez-vous parle a l’epi- 
cier? 

Non; je n’ai rien commande, et 
vous? 

Non; il faut nous en occuper tout 
de suite. II n’y a rien a man¬ 
ger a la maison. II nous faut 
des pommes de terre, des oeufs, 
du beurre et un bifteck. Nous 
avons aussi besoin d’autres 
choses. 

Combien d’ceufs faut-il comman¬ 
der? Est-ce assez de deux 
douzaines? 

Ne pensez-vous pas qu’il vaudrait 
mieux en commander trois, 
Charles? Commandez aussi des 
pois, je vous prie. 




13 


VINGT-SIXIEME LE£ON 


39 


REVUE ET CONYERS 

Will you walk along slowly? I’ll 
not keep you waiting long. — 
Mr. Johnson, I wish you to 
send me three dozen eggs some¬ 
time today. You have some 
fresh ones, I suppose? 

Just in this morning, sir. 

# 

Send me also half a peck of green 
peas, and a bushel of potatoes. 
You can get them to our house 
before four o’clock? 

O, yes; our wagon will be there 
in an hour. Is there anything 
else, sir? 

Yes; I want a steak. 

Suppose you step into our butcher 
shop and pick out just the kind 
of steak that you want. 

Certainly. O, I see you have 
some veal. How much is it? 

Eighteen cents a pound, sir. 

Well, send me three pounds from 
this part. How is your steak 
today? You can give me such 
a piece as I like? You know 
the kind of steak I want, John? 

Yes, sir; I do. I will give you 
the best we have. 

Very well, then; send four pounds 
of steak with my other order. 

* 

* * 

I am sorry to have kept you 
waiting so long, Grace. My 
order will be at the house 
within an hour. Where shall 
we go now? It is too early to 


ATION — (Continuees) 

Voulez-vous marcher lentement, 
je ne vous ferai pas attendre 
longtemps. —M. Johnson, veuil- 
lez m’envoyer aujourd’hui trois 
douzaines d’ceufs; vous en avez 
des frais, je suppose? 

11s viennent d’arriver ce matin, 
monsieur. 

Envoyez-moi aussi un demi-peck 
de petits-pois, et un boisseau de 
pommes de terre. Vouspouvez 
les envoyer chez moi avant 
quatre heures? 

Oh! oui; notre voiture y sera dans 
une heure. Desirez-vous autre 
chose, monsieur? 

Oui; je voudrais un bifteck. 

Voulez-vous passer dans notre 
boucherie, et choisir vous-meme 
le bifteck que vous desirez? 

Certainement. Oh! je vois que 
vous avez du veau. Combien 
la livre? 

Dix-huit cents, monsieur. 

Alors, envoyez-m’en trois livres 
de cette partie. Avez-vous de 
bon bifteck aujourd’hui? Vous 
pouvez m’en donner de celui 
que je prends ordinairement? 
Vous savez ce que je veux, 
Jean? 

Oui, monsieur. Je vous donnerai 
le meilleur morceau que nous 
ayons. 

Tres bien, alors. Envoyez-m’en 
quatre livres avec mon autre 
commande. 

* 

* * 

Je suis fache de vous avoir fait 
attendre si longtemps, Grace. 
Ma commande sera chez nous 
dans une heure. Ou allons- 
nous maintenant? Est-il de 




40 


ANGLAIS 


13 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


go home? Have you any 
errands to do? 

No, not one. We might go and 
see the new bridge over the 
Hudson? 

Yes, by all means. Work on the 
bridge is being hurried as fast 
as possible; perhaps we can 
walk across now. 

Do you not think it better not to 
attempt anything quite so 
dangerous? 

We can tell better, Grace, when 
we have seen the bridge. Now 
we can see it. O, it is not 
nearly done. Of course we can¬ 
not think of attempting to 
cross it. 

Is it not beautiful here? Charles, 
should you like to live in this 
neighborhood? 

Why, I think so. Some afternoon 
we will drive out here and see 
if there are any houses to be 
had. But now we must go 
back to town, Grace, or we 

^ shall be late to dinner. 

Is it so late? And Mrs. Sloane is 
coming to take dinner with us. 
I do hope she will not get there 
before we do. Let us go back 
on the trolley, Charles. 

Yes; here is our car. 


PHRASES 

Lost time is never found again. 

Never put off till tomorrow what 
you can do today. 


trop bonne heure pour rentrer a 
la maison? Avez-vous des 
courses a faire? 

Non, pas une. Nous pourrions 
aller voir le nouveau pont sur 
le Hudson? 

Oui; c’est une bonne idee. On 
pousse le travail aussi vite que 
possible, et nous pourrons peut- 
etre traverser de P autre cote. 

Ne croyez-vous pas qu’il vaudrait 
mieux ne pas essayer une chose 
aussi dangereuse? 

Nous pourrons mieux en juger 
quand nous aurons vu le pont. 
Maintenant, nous pouvons le 
voir. Oh! il est loin d’etre 
termine. Naturellement, nous 
ne pouvons pas penser d’essayer 
de traverser. 

Oh! que c’est joli ici! Charles 
n’aimeriez-vous pas de demeurer 
dans ce voisinage? 

Mais, je crois que oui. Un apres- 
midi, nous viendrons ici en 
voiture voir s’il y a des maisons 
libres. Maintenant, il nous faut 
retourner en ville, Grace, sinon 
nous serons en retard pour le 
diner. 

Est-il si tard que cela? Et Mme. 
Sloane qui vient diner avec nous! 
J’espere qu’elle n’arrivera pas 
avant nous. Prenons le tram¬ 
way pour rentrer, Charles. 

Oui; voici notre tramway. 


USUELLES 

On ne retrouve jamais le temps 
perdu. 

Ne remettez jamais au lendemain 
ce que vous pouvez faire le 
jour meme. 





13 


VINGT-SIXIEME LEQON 


41 


PHRASES USUELLES — (Continuees) 


That child is more than ten years 
old. 

I have not enough money; I 
should like to make more. 

That is not taken into account. 

Madam, there is an extra charge 
on this letter. 

How much is there to be paid? 

I should like to change my dress. 

Do not be too long dressing your¬ 
self. 

Give me your arm. 

The open air has done me good. 

Where do you think she may be? 

Take what you like best. 

Will you be so kind as to excuse me? 

Is Mrs. A. to be seen? 

Is there anything new? 

Nothing that I know of. 

You ought not to go out in such 
weather. 

I do not like my black dress; it 
does not fit me well. 

Let us be going. 

I am pleased at your being here. 

Permit me to ask you a question. 

He is about to leave. 

I am afraid he will not suit you. 

I knew that when I engaged her. 

He was out of breath when he 
reached home. 

Do you think there will be many 
people there? 

It will be crowded, they say. 

It is growing late, we must part. 

I do not mind either what she 
says or what she does. 

I cannot do two things at once. 

Take care not to catch cold. 


Cet enfant a plus de dix ans. 

Je n’ai pas assez d’argent; je 
voudrais en gagner davantage. 

Cela ne compte pas. 

Madame, cette lettre est surtaxee. 

Combien y a-t-il a payer? 

Je voudrais changer de toilette. 

Ne soyez pas trop longtemps a 
vous habiller. 

Donnez-moi le bras. 

Le grand air m’a fait du bien. 

Ou pensez-vous qu’elle soit? 

Prenez ce que vous aimez le 
mieux. 

Voulez-vous bien m’excuser? 

Mme. A. est-elle visible? 

Y a-t-il quelque chose de nouveau? 

Rien que je sache. 

Vous ne devriez pas sortir par un 
temps pareil. 

Je n’aime pas ma robe noire; elle 
ne me va pas bien. 

Allons-nous-en. 

Je suis content que vous soyez ici. 

Permettez-moi de vous faire une 
question. 

II est sur le point de partir. 

Je crains qu’il ne fasse pas votre 
affaire. 

Je savais cela quand je l’ai prise 
a mon service. 

II etait essouffle en arrivant a la 
maison. 

Pensez-vous qu’il y ait beaucoup 
de monde? 

II y aura foule, dit-on. 

II se fait tard, il faut nous separer. 

Je ne m’inquiete ni de ce qu’elle 
dit, ni de ce qu’elle fait. 

Je ne peux pas faire deux choses 
a la fois. 

Prenez garde d’attraper froid. 



42 


ANGLAIS 


13 


PHRASES USUELLES—(Continuees) 


She carries her age well; she does 
not grow old. 

She got married again three years 
ago. 

Do you wish him to go on an 
errand for you. 

I do not see any way out of that 
difficulty. 

We will stay at home while wait¬ 
ing for you to come and take us 
to his house. 

Who is not mistaken? 

When she goes away, be kind 
enough to let me know. 

They say he committed suicide. 

I do not care for what they say.l 

I do not mind what they say. j 

I have to move tomorrow^. 

Remember me to your family. 

Send me word. 

At what hotel are you staying? 

It is as plain as can be. 

You must make the best of every¬ 
thing. 

Look out, you are in a draft. 

Business is going from bad to 

•■worse. 

She took a fancy to him. 

He entered without sending in his 
name. 

I got myself into hot water. 

Well, I will think it over. 

She is gone away for good. 

Six of one, and half a dozen of 
the other. 

1 cannot get the better of him. 

You do not heed my advice. 

I know what I am talking about. 


Elle porte bien son age; elle ne 
vieillit pas. 

Elle s’est remariee il y a trois ans. 

Voulez-vous qu’il aille faire une 
course pour vous. 

Je ne vois pas le moyen de sortir 
de cette difficulty. 

Nous resterons a la maison en at¬ 
tendant que vous veniez nous 
chercher pour aller chez lui. 

Qui ne se trompe pas? 

Quand elle partira, voulez-vous 
me le faire savoir. 

On dit qu’il s’est suicide. 

Je ne m’inquiete pas de ce qu’on 
dit. 

II faut que je demenage demain. 

Rappelez-moi au souvenir de vos 
parents. 

Faites-le-moi dire. 

A quel hotel etes-vous? 

Cela saute aux yeux. 

Vous devez tirer parti de tout. 

Prenez garde, vous etes dans un 
courant d’air. 

Les affaires vont de mal en pis. 

Elle Pa pris en amitie. 

II est entre sans se faire annoncer. 

Je me suis attirre des desagre- 
ments. 

Bien, j’y penserai. 

Elle est partie pour de bon. 

C’est chou vert et vert chou. 

Je ne peux pas venir a bout de 
de lui. 

Vous ne faites aucun cas de mes 
conseils. 

J’en parle en connaissance de 
cause. 




§13 


VINGT-SIXIEME LEQON 


43 


PHRASES USUELLES —(Continuees) 


Do not try it again. 

She is never at home. 

Put these papers under lock and 
key. 

How was it done? 

Let us go halves in that business. 
I gave him a holiday. 

He is an old hand at it. 

This book is very popular. 

I must have it at any cost. 

He does nothing by halves. 

He is a true, tried friend. 

Do not put out the gas. 

All my troubles went for nothing. 
It took me one hour to go there. 
He insisted on taking me with 
him. 

I will give you money as you 
need it. 

Do nothing of the kind. 

He takes to it. 

He shall do it whether he likes it 
or not. 

She will start a week from to¬ 
day. 

You have done it without my 
knowledge. 

I will go there every other day. 
We see each other from time to 
time. 

Never spend your money before 
you get it. 

I care very little for his advice. 
They do not get on well together. 
He inquired about you. 

A workman is known by his work. 
He who drinks will pay. 

It is freezing very hard. 

All the rooms are on the same 
floor. 

We must hear both sides. 

Good by, take care of yourself. 


N’y revenez plus. 

Elle n’est jamais chez elle. 

Mettez ces papiers sous clef. 

Comment cela s’est-il fait? 
Faisons cela de compte a demi. 

Je lui ai donne un conge. 

II n’en est pas a son coup d’essai. 
Ce livre est tres populaire. 

II me le faut coute que coute. 

II ne fait rien a demi. 

C’est un ami a toute epreuve. 
N’eteignez pas le gaz. 

J’en suis pour ma peine. 

II m’a fallu une heure pour y aller. 
II a voulu a toute force m’em- 
mener avec lui. 

Je vous donnerai de Pargent au 
fur et a mesure que vous en 
aurez besoin. 

N’en faites rien. 

II y prend gout. 

II le fera bon gre mal gre. 

Elle partira d’aujourd’hui en huit. 

Vous l’avez fait a mon insu. 

J’irai tous les deux jours. 

Nous nousvoyons de loin en loin. 

Ne depensez jamais votre argent 
avant de l’avoir. 

Je fais bon marche de ses avis. 

Ils font mauvais menage. 

II a demande de vos nouvelles. 

A l’oeuvre on connait Partisan. 
Qui casse les verresles paie. 

II gele a pierre fendre. 

Toutes les chambres sont de 
plein pied. 

II faut entendre le pour et le 
contre. 

Au revoir, portez-vous bien. 



44 


ANGLAIS 


13 


EXERCICE ECRIT 

Repondez en anglais aux questions suivantes. Ecrivez les 
questions et les reponses en double expedition, et envoyez- 
nous les deux copies pour correction, mais n’enregistrez pas 
cette legon sur un cylindre vierge jusqu’a ce que nous vous 
ayons retoume une copie corrigee. 

1. Who is your butcher and where does he live? 

2. Where do you buy your collars and cuffs? 

3. Do you like diamonds? 

4. Have you tried to write a letter in English? 

5. In what language do we write to each other? 

6. Why must you go? 

7. Can you speak English as fast as French? 

8. Could you understand English before you studied 
with us? 

9. Do you like to study when it is very warm? 

10. Are you quite sure that you can write this exercise 
without a mistake? 

11. Could you take coffee either with or without cream? 

12. Have you heard anything new this morning? 

13. Do you wear a straw hat in summer? 

14. How long have you been studying English? 

15. What do you want for dinner? 

_ 16. Should you go to New York if you had money 
enough? 

17. Have you traveled lately? 

18. What have you been doing lately? 

19. Have you a carriage, and do you drive often? 

20. What does the butcher sell? 

21. Do you go to church every Sunday? 

22. How much have you paid for your dining-room 
table? 

23. Whom have you invited to dinner? 

24. Do you prepare your own dinner? 

25. Who is that well-dressed man? 


ANGLAIS 

(PARTIE 14) 


VINGT-SEPTIEME LECON 


CYLINDRE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 


YOCABULAIEE 


the absence, Vabsence 
alive, vivant 

the allowance, la pension , 
le mois (argent donne par 
les Parents aux end ants) 
aloud, d haute voix 
attentive, attentif 
the author, Vauteur 
to bind, relier, lier 
bound, relie 
the case, le cas 
classical, classique 
the collection, la collection 
the critic, le critique 
the criticism, la critique 
curious, curieux 
current, courant 
eager, impatient 
the edge, la tranche ( d'un 
livre) 

the edition, Vedition 
the event, VSvtnement 
exceptionally, exceptionnel- 
lement 

the exhibition, Vexposition 


familiar, familier 
fearful, qui a peur 
the fiction, la fiction 
flexible, flexible 
gilt, dor6 

the harm, le mal , le malheur 
the history, Vhistoire 
Indian, indien 
lest, que , de peur que 
the listener, auditeur, qui 
6coute 

literary, littiraire 
the luncheon, le second dS- 
jefiner 

the magazine, la revue 
the museum, le musie 
the novel, le roman 
nowadays, de nos jours 
the page, la page 
the philosophy, la philoso¬ 
phic 

to print, imprimer 
provided, pourvu que 
to publish, publier , faire 
paraitre 


For notice of copyright , see,page immediately following the title page 






2 


ANGLAIS 


§14 


VOCABUI^ 

rather, un peu, mieux, plutot 
regularly, regulierement 
the relic, la relique, Vanti- 
quaille 

the review, la revue, la 
critique 

the sense, le sens 
the set, la collection com¬ 
plete 

sharp, subtil, habile 


PHRASES ET 
I. C. S. 

English Record No. 27 

Are this month’s magazines 
in yet, Mr. Burns? 

Yes, sir; they came this 
morning. 

Do you read the literary 
criticisms and the book re¬ 
views every month, Grace? 

Not so regularly as I used 
to. When father was alive, 
he would 1 have me read 
.aloud to him almost every 
day. I was always glad to 
read to him, and I enjoyed 
his criticisms on current 
events so much. He was a 
very attentive listener and 
a sharp critic. I should 
have read more than I did, 
had F been wise. But I 
was fearful always lest I 
should weary 3 him. I sup¬ 
pose you would rather 4 
study history or read some 


IE — (Continue) 

to tease, contrarier 
the translation, la traduc¬ 
tion 

to waste, pcrdre 
weary, fatigue, ennuye 
to weary, fatiguer, ennuyer 
wise, sage 

the works, les oeuvres, les 
ouv rages 

to worry, etre en peine 


CONVERSATION 

I. c. s. 

Cylindre d’Anglais No. 27 

Les revues de ce mois sont- 
elles arrivees, M. Burns? 
Elies sont arrivees ce matin, 
oui, monsieur. 

Grace, lisez-vous les critiques 
littdraires et la revue des 
livres tous les mois? 

Pas aussi regulierement que 
j’en avais l’habitude. 
Quand mon pere etait 
vivant, il me faisait lire a 
haute voix presque chaque 
jour. J’etais toujours 
heureuse de lire pour lui, 
et j ’avais beaucoup de 
plaisir a entendre ses cri¬ 
tiques sur les evenements 
courants. II ecoutait tou¬ 
jours avec attention et il 
etait critique habile. 
J’aurais du lire plus que je 
ne l’ai fait, si j’eusse ete 
sage. Mais j’avais toujours 





9242 


§14 


VINGT-SEPTIEME LEQON 


3 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION- (Continuees) 


classical work than waste 
your time over a novel? 


Don’t tease me, Louise. You 
know better than 5 that. 
Perhaps I do not read so 
much philosophy or history 
as you do, but I have sense 
enough to enjoy good 
books. I try to read the 
best fiction that is pub¬ 
lished, but there are so 
many good authors now- i 
adays, that it is hard to be 
familiar with them all. 
Mr. Burns, have you no 
better edition of Shake¬ 
speare than this? Some¬ 
thing printed on heavy 
paper, with gilt edges, and 
bound in flexible leather? 


Yes, Miss Bennett, I have. 

Here is a very fine edition 

bound in full morocco. 

Did you notice this edition 

of Dickens’ works? By 

the way, a few days ago, 

you were inquiring about 

a set of Balzac’s works. 

I have an edition now, 

/ 

printed in French on the 


peur que mon pere ne se 
fatiguat. Je suppose que 
vous aimeriez mieux etudier 
l’histoire ou lire quelque 
ouvrage classique plutot 
que de perdre votM temps 
a lire un roman? 

Ne vous moquez pas de moi, 
Louise. Vous savez bien 
le contraire. Je ne lis 
peut-etre pas plus de phi¬ 
losophic ou d’histoire que 
vous, mais j’ai assez de 
bon sens pour aimer tous 
les bons livres. J’essaie 
de lire les meilleurs romans 
qui soient publies, mais il 
y a tant de bons auteurs de 
nos jours, qu’il est difficile 
d’etre familier avec tous. 
M. Burns, n’avez-vous pas 
de meilleure Edition de 
Shakespeare que celle-ci? 
Une edition imprimde sur 
papier fort, avec tranches 
dordes, et reliee en cuir 
souple? 

Oui, Mile. Bennet, j’en ai. 
En voici une reliee tout en 
maroquin. Avez-vous re- 
marque cette Edition des 
oeuvres de Dickens? Mais 
j’y pense, il y a quelques 
jours, vous m’avez de- 
mande une edition com¬ 
plete des oeuvres de Balzac. 
J’en ai une maintenant, 





4 


ANGLAIS 


14 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


left-hand page and with 
the English translation on 
the right-hand page. You 
said your brother wanted 
something of the kind. It 
is the best on the market. 


In case I should take all 
three sets, how much should 
you charge me? Ninety 
dollars? Very well, I will 
take them, and mail you 
a check the first of the 
month —as soon as father 
gives me my allowance. 


Come, Louise, let us go over 
to the museum. Mr. Davis 
has a large collection of 
old Indian relics on ex¬ 
hibition there for a day or 
Two. I am quite eager to 
see them. It is said that 
the collection is an excep¬ 
tionally curious one. 

Yes; provided you will not 
stay long. I must be at 
home in time for luncheon. 


Suppose you should be late, — 
would there be any harm? 


imprim^e en frangais sur 
la page de gauche, et avec 
la traduction anglaise sur 
la page de droite. Vous 
m’avez dit que votre frere 
desirait quelque chose de 
semblable. C’est la meil- 
leure Edition parue. 

Au cas que je prenne ces trois 
collections completes, com- 
bien me demanderez-vous? 
Quatre-vingt-dix dollars? 
Eh bien! je les prendrai et 
je vous enverrai un cheque 
par la poste' le premier du 
mois, aussitot que papa 
m’aura donne mon mois. 

*** 

Venez, Louise; allons jus- 
qu’au musee. M. Davis 
y expose une grande col¬ 
lection de vieilles curio- 
sites indiennes pour un jour 
ou deux. Je suis impa- 
tiente de les voir. On dit 
que cette collection est 
exceptionnellement inte- 
ressante. 

Oui; pourvu que nous ne 
restions pas trop long- 
temps. II faut que je ren- 
tre a la maison a temps 
pour le dejeuner. 

Supposez que vous soyez en 
retard, y aurait-il du mal a 
cela? 




14 


VINGT-SEPTIEME LEQON 


5 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Perhaps not, but mother 
would probably be worried 
over my absence. It is 
better that I should be 
there. 

She knows you are with 
me, —she will not worry. 


Peut-etre que non, mais 
maman serait probable- 
ment en peine de mon 
absence. II est mieux que 
je sois la. 

Elle sait que vous etes avec 
moi; elle ne se mettra pas 
en peine. 


REMARQUES 

1. Would est souvent employe pour exprimer l’habitude. 

Her father would often call on us in the evening, and would take 
supper with us, Son pbre venait souvent nous voir le soir et soupait 
avec nous. 

She would play for a while, and would then go to her room to study 
her lesson, Elle jouait un peu et montait ensuite dans sa chambre pour 
etudier sa lefon. 

.Notre verbe falloir qui n’existe pas en anglais, se rend a 
l’imparfait par shotild lorsqu’il est employe dans certaines 
phrases qui se disent sur un ton de reproche ou d’impa- 
tience. 

You should have come earlier, II fallait venir plus tdt. 

You should have said it to me, It fallait me le dire. 

2. Quelquefois si est sous-entendu devant le plus-que- 
parfait ou devant un subjonctif. On emploie alors had et on 
donne a la phrase une tournure interrogative. 

Had I known that yesterday, I would have spoken to him, Si j'avais 
su cela hier,je lui aurais parle. 

.Rad she been there, I would have introduced you, Si elle avait ete 
la, je vous aurais presents a elle. 

Had they come sooner, they would have taken dinner with us, S’ils 
ftaient venus plus tdt, ils auraient dine avec nous. 

3. Le subjonctif est tres peu usite en anglais. La plu- 
part des phrases ou il entre en frangais se traduisent en 




6 


ANGLAIS 


14 


anglais de differentes manieres. Etudiez soigneusement les 
remarques suivantes: 

1. Notre subjonctif s’emploie lorsqu’uri doute est exprime. 
En anglais, il faut non seulement que le doute soit exprime, 
mais aussi que Faction se rapporte a l’avenir, comme on le 
verra dans la legon suivante consacree-a l’etude du subjonc¬ 
tif anglais. II s’ensuit que lorsque Faction exprimee dans 
les phrases interrogatives ou negatives est simplement 
douteuse, on emploie l’indicatif en anglais. 

I do not think she knows how to play the piano, Je ne crois pas 
qu'elle sache jouer du piano. 

Do you believe they are rich? Croyez-vous qu'ils soient riches? 

I do not think they have much money, Je ne crois pas qu'ils aient 
beaucoup d'argent. 

2. L’action peut se rapporter a un fait futur, sans etre 
douteuse, auquel cas on emploie le futur en anglais. 

I do not think she will come, Je ne crois pas qu'elle vienne. 

He does not believe they will buy it, 11 ne croit pas qu'ils 
I'achUeront. 

3. Apres certains verbes impersonnels comme it is neces¬ 
sary, il faut, it is just, il est juste, it is possible, il est possible. 
it is impossible, il est impossible, it is time, il est temps, it is 
sufficient, il suffit, etc. on emploie generalement should 
avec l’infinitif sans la preposition to, alors que l’on met le 
verbe au subjonctif en frangais. 

It is necessary that he should come, Il faut qu'il vienne. 

It is just that you should receive that money, Il est juste que vous 
receviez cet argent. 

It is impossible that she should arrive in time, Il est impossible 
qu'elle arrive a temps. 

It is possible that you should meet him, Il est possible que vous le 
rencontriez. 

It is time that they should pay me, Il est temps qu'ils me paient. 

It is sufficient that you should write, Il suffit que vous ecriviez. 

Au lieu de should, dans ces phrases, on peut employer 
l’infinitif, mais alors il faut faire preceder le nom ou le 
pronom de la preposition for. 


§14 


VINGT-SEPTIEME LECON 


7 


It is necessary for him to come, II faut qn'il vienne. 

It is impossible for her to arrive in time, II est impassible qu'elle 
arrive a temps. 

It is sufficient for you to write, II stiff it que vous ecriviez. 

4. Apres les conjonctions before , avant que, provided that , 
pourvu que, till , loitil, jusqu’a ce que, on emploie le present 
ou le futur si le verbe de la proposition principale est au 
present ou au futur, et le passe ou should si le meme verbe 
est au passe ou au conditionnel. 

You have time to take dinner before we arrive, Vous avez le temps 
de diner avant que nous arrivions. 

I shall speak to him provided he comes, Je ltd parlerai pourvu 
qu'il vienne. 

I shall wait till he comes, J'attetids qu’il vienne. 

I waited until he came, J'attendais qu'il vint. 

5. Apres les conjonctions lest , for fear , de crainte que, 
in case , en cas que, suppose that , suppose que, on emploie 
generalement should suivi de l’infinitif pour traduire le sub- 
jonctif frangais. 

In case she should come before I am back, tell her to wait for me, 
En cas qu'elle vienne avant que je sois rentee , dites-lui de m'attendee. 

Suppose that he should die, what would become of her? Suppose 
qu’il meure , que deviendrait-elle? 

Let us hurry, for fear it should rain before we arrive, Depechons- 
nous, de peur qu'il ne pleuve avant que nous arrivions. 

6. Notre subjonctif peut aussi se rendre au moyen d’un 
des auxiliaires may, might , should , would , could , lorsque l’idee 
exprimee se rapporte a la possibility, a la volonte ou au 
devoir. 

1 wish that she may succeed, Je souhaite qu’elle reussisse. 

It is time that you should begin your work, II est temps que vous 
commenciez votre travail. 

I wish you would speak English with me, Je desire que vous parliez 
anglais avec moi. 

However rich he may be, he is not happy, Quelque riche qu'il sort, 
il n’est pas heureux. 

Hurry, so that you may be there in time, Depechez-vous que vous 
arriviez a temps. 


8 


ANGLAIS 


§14 


4. Le mot rather a plusieurs significations. Joint a un 
adjectif il signifie zm peu; il a egalement ce sens lorsqu’il 
est joint a un verbe, c’est-a-dife qu’il en attenue la force. 

It is rather high, C'est un peu haut. 

This coat is rather large for me, Ce paletot est un peu grand pour 
moi. 

I rather think so, Je le crois un peu. {Je suis assez dispose a le 
croire.) 

I rather like the idea, J’aime assez cette idee. 

Ce mot exprime aussi une preference et se traduit alors 
par plutbt ou mieux. Il est alors souvent suivi de la con- 
jonction than pour marquer une comparaison. 

I would rather walk than drive, J’aimerais mieux marcher que 
d’aller en voiture. 

Do not doctor yourself, go rather to a physician, Ne vous soignez 
pas vous-meme, allez plutdt consulter un medecin. 

Dans le langage familier, rather est souvent employe dans 
le sens de beaucoup. 

Were you cold? —Cold? Well, rather! Aviez-vous froid? — Froid? 
Je vous crois! 

Was he sorry? —Sorry? —Well, rather! En etait-il fache? — Fache? 
Je vous crois! 

„ L’usage autorise aujourd’hui l’expression I had rather pour 
I would rather , J’aimerais mieux. 

Take some more coffee. —I had rather not, thank you, Prenez encore 
du cafe. — Non, jevous remercie. {J’aime mieux ne pas en prendre , 
merci.) 


5. D’apres ce que nous avons vu jusqu’ici, le mot que 
peut se traduire de bien des manieres en anglais. 

1. Dans les exclamations, que se rend par hozv devant un 
adjectif en anglais, et par how many ou how much devant 
un nom. 

How beautiful she is! Qu’elle est belle! 

How rich they are! Qu'ils sont riches! 

How many books you have! Que de livres vous avez! 

How much money I saw there! Que d'argezit j'ai vu la! 


§14 VINGT-SEPTIEME LEQON 

2. Que signifiant afin que , se rend par that. 


9 


Come here that I may see you, Venez ici que je vous vote. 

Give him money that he may go, Donnez-lui de Vargent qu’il 
s’en aille. 

3. Devant le second terme d’une comparaison, que se rend 
par as dans le comparatif d’egalite, par than pour les com- 
paratifs de superiority et d’inferiorite. 

He is as old as I am, It est aussi age que moi. 

You are not so rich as she, Vous n' etc s pas aussi riche qu'elle. 

She is more beautiful than her sister, Elle est plus belle que sasoeur. 

They are less diligent than our children, /Is sont moins diligents que 
nos enfants. 

4. Dans le sens de soil que , pour montrer une alternative, 
que se rend par whether. 

Whether you go or not, I do not care, Que vous partiez ou non , cela 
m'est eg at. 

It is his own business —whether he speaks to me or not, C'est son 
affaire qu'il me parle ou non. 

5. Notre que expletif qui se trouve dans quelques gal- 
licismes ne se traduit pas en anglais. 

Brussels is a beautiful city, C'est une belle ville que Bruxelles. 

It is one’s duty to oblige one’s friends, C'est un devoir que d'obliger 
ses amis. 

What a pleasure to see one’s country again! Quel plaisir que de 
revoir sa patrie! 

What a rich country the United States is! Quel riche pays que les 
Etats- Unis! 

I think so, Je pense que oui. 

I think not, Je pense que non. 

There, it is raining! Voila qu'il pleut! 

He told me that; it may not be true, II m'a dit cela; peut-ftre que ce 
n'est pas vrai. 

6. Que , signifiant quand se traduit par when. 

I was hardly twelve when I left school, A peine avals-je douze ans 
que je quittai Vecole. 

The day when he arrived, I was not at home, Le jour qu it est 
arrive , je n'etais pas chez moi. 


10 


ANGLAIS 


§14 


7. Dans le sens de pourquoi, on exprime que par why. 

Why did you not tell me that sooner? Que ne m'avez-vous dit cela 
plus tot? 

8. Que , signifiant parce que se traduit par because. 

If I am not eating, it is because I am not hungry, Si je ne mange 
pas, c'est que je n’ai pas faim. 

If he does not get up, it is because he is tired, S'it ne se live pas, 
c’est qu'il est fatigue. 

9. Que signifiant avant que, jusqu’a ce que, a moms que, 
se traduit respectivement par before, until et unless. 

I shall not go before I have seen him, Je ne m'en irai pas que je ne 
llaie vu. 

Wait until I have finished my work, Attendez que j’aie fini mon 
travail. 

10. Pour eviter la repetition de si, de comme ou de puis- 
que nous employons souvent que en frangais. Ce que n’est 
generalement pas traduit en anglais. 

If you go to Paris and meet my brother, tell him we are missing 
him very much, Si vous allez a Paris et que vous rencontriez mon 
frbre, dites-lui qu'il nous manque beaucoup. 

As it was dark and far from the city, we stayed over night at the 
farm, Comme it faisait nuit et que nous etions loin de la ville, notes 
passames la nuit cl la ferme. 

"Since you are rich and have plenty of time, why should you not 
spend some time in Europe? Puisque vous etes riche et que vous avez 
beaucoup de temps , pourquoi ne passeriez-votts pas quelque temps en 
Europe? 


EXEItCICE ORAL 

If you do not succeed, it will be because tlie 
times are liard. 

Si vous ne rlussissez pas, c’est que les temps sont durs. 

If you will watch him carefully, you will learn everything, 
because he is an able man. 

If you go soon, you will not miss him, because he always 
goes to his office at this hour. 



§14 


VINGT-SEPTIEME LEgON 


11 


He did it because you wished him to do it. 

I went home because 1 thought you wished me to leave. 

I told him all I knew because he asked me. 

If you do not see him, it is because he has not been able 
to come. 

If he did not speak to you, it is because he did not 
see you. 

If I am not there at nine, it is because I shall have missed 
the train. 

If she does not speak English, it is because she has not 
studied long enough. 

If they do not come to our party tonight, it is because 
they do not care for us. 

If I was late, it was because I missed the first train, and I 
had to wait for over an hour at the station. 

The clay when he came home, I was in New 
York. 

Le jour qu'il est arrive, j'Hais a New-York. 

The time when he was to be here has passed. 

Those evenings when you used to come to see me were 
very pleasant. 

The hour when the clock struck two —oh, that was the 
hour! 

The evening when Harry was here, —how well do we all 
remember it! 

The day when he went away, none of us will ever forget. 

The morning when that accident happened, I was on my 
way to my cousin’s farm. 

At the time when you were on the road for that firm, I 
was a bookkeeper at the bank. 

The day when your father died, I sailed for America. I 
spent three months in New York, Boston, and Chicago. 

The time came when he had to pay for the goods, and he 
was unable to do so. 

He spent several months in Paris, and enjoyed himself 
very much. He would not come back home, but the time 
came when he had to do so; his parents called him. 


12 


ANGLAIS 


§14 


Whether he remains or not, I am going soon. 

Qu'il reste ou non, je m'en irai bientdt. 

Whether the sun shines or not, I am going to the city. 
Whether William or Harry comes, I shall go soon. 

I do not know whether or not he will be there. 

I do not know whether he will be there or not. 

But you asked him yesterday whether he would come. 

So he said that you were to order the goods, whether he 
came or not? 

Whether you like it or not, I am coming to see you. 
Whether or not Charles comes, I shall go by the next 
train. 

I wonder whether all the books are sold? 

I wonder whether you can read this easily? 

Whether it is fine weather or not, we must make that trip. 
Whether he is rich or poor, I do not care. 

Come here, Cliarles, that I may talk to you. 

Venez id, Charles, que je vous parle. 

He went to see Uncle Harry merely that uncle might 
know him better. 

I call on you so often that I may know you better. 

He asked me to come that he might see me. 

You went to his store that you might obtain credit. 
^.William said that you might come tonight. 

When you get to Paris, write often that we may all know 
much of you. 

Make haste, that we may catch the eleven-twenty train. 

He gave me a week’s vacation that I might go to the 
country and rest. 

Step aside that I may close the door. 

Give me some money that I may buy some groceries. 
Leave me for a while that I may finish my letter. 

Tell him to call on his way back, that I may give him my 
orders for the day. 

Give them the books that they may examine them. 

Tell her to get ready, that she may go out when I call 
for her. 


§14 


VINGT-SEPTIEME LECON 


13 


Do you not tliink that the red wine is better 
than the white ? 

Ne pensez-vous pas que le vin rouge est meme meilleur que 
le blanc? 

Is not this a rather better horse than that one? 

Is not this house rather better than that one? 

He has a rather better animal than you have. 

He has a rather faster horse than you have. 

Mine is rather better than this. 

It is rather large, is it not? 

It is rather small, is it not? 

Did he like it?—Like it? Well, rather! 

I would rather die than do that. 

I had rather not take any more of it. 

He is rather tall for his age. 

They would rather go there on foot. 

I would rather read English than French. 

She would rather leave sooner. 

We would rather leave later on. 

They would rather lose their money than ask for it. 

That chair is rather high for the child. 

He was very fortunate not to have been killed in that 
accident. —Fortunate? Well, rather! 

This trunk is rather heavy. 

The country is rather pretty at this time of the year. 

Are you angry with me?—Well, rather! 

Will I go?-Rather! 

Did she tell him to go home? —Rather! 

When were you here? At five o’clock did you say? O, 
you were not here at all, were you? —Rather! 

Am I going to Miss Smith’s party? —Rather! 

Are we planning to give a dance this winter? —Well, rather! 
I rather think he will not come. 

So you rather imagine he will not come? 

Yes, I was rather pleased with him. 

No, I rather think not. If you do not mind, I will not come. 
It is rather uncertain what will happen. 

It will be rather troublesome, but we can take care of it. 


14 ANGLAIS § 14 

It is sure to be rather difficult, but I think we can bring 
the matter to a satisfactory conclusion. 

This is rather an interesting magazine. 

Yes, it is a rather good paper. 

I would rather go with you than with him. 

He would rather talk to you, of that I am sure. 

I would rather ride than walk. 

We would all rather be rich than poor. 

You should write to him rather than to his father. 

She said that she would rather have you come to the house 
than have your brother do so. 

I would rather visit St. Paul’s than St. Mary’s. 

I would rather go to bed than sit up all night. 

Suppose you should lose ten dollars, you 
would not care, would you? 

Supposes que vous percLiez dix dollars , cela ne vous ferait 
rien, n'est-ce pas? 

Suppose your friend should not come today, should you 
expect him tomorrow? 

Suppose John should forget you, would you forget him? 

Suppose your father should not send you the money, 
would you telephone him? 

Suppose that everything should turn out just as you wish, 
what should you do? 

Suppose that you should find it hard to write that sen¬ 
tence, should you stop trying to learn English? 

Suppose you could learn English in a year, would not the 
time be well spent? 

Suppose you should find yourself able to write and speak 
English in six months, would you regret a few hard lessons? 

In case you should not find me, telephone to 
the house. 

Au cas que vous ne me trouviez pas, telephones chez moi. 

In case he should come home early, have dinner ready 
at five. 

Send the books back, today, in case he should want them 
tomorrow. 


§14 


VINGT-SEPTIEME LEQON 


15 


In case he comes, bring in the ledger. 

He sent me home for a bottle of wine, in case his friend 
should come on the evening train. 

In case it is very cold, cover up the plants, please. 

In case you do not get your money, do not worry about it. 

In case such a thing should happen, what should you do? 

He comes home every day, for fear that lie 
will lose his money. 

II rentre chez lui chaque jour de peur qu'il ne perde son 
argent. 

For fear that you would come to see him, he had all the 
doors locked. 

I said he would not do it for fear that you would be 
displeased. 

For fear that the goods would not suit you, we did not 
send them. 

For fear that his children would be ill, he did not go to Italy. 

Lest the young man should come too often, he asked him 
to keep away. 

For fear that the money would spoil him, his father would 
not let him have it. 

For fear something might happen, the captain would not 
sail. 

Had your uncle been tbere, it could never 
liave happened. 

Si votre pire avait ete Id, cela ne serait jamais arrive. 

Had she not been ill, she would have received him. 

Had we heard of it, we could have prevented the trouble. 

Had you not bought those magazines, I would give you 
these. 

Had the horses not run away, the children would have 
been happy yet. 

Had I not seen him coming, he might have overtaken me. 

Had the dinner been better, we should have gone there 
again. 

Had the cows drunk any of that water, they would have 
died before evening. 


16 ANGLAIS § 14 

Had I not heard so much of you, I should ask for your 
references. 

In tlie long summer evenings, we would sit 
and talk together until all the lights 
were out. 

Dans les longues soirees cl'tte, nous anions Vhabitude 
de nous asseoir et de parler ensemble jusqu’a ce que 
toutes les lumieres fussent Ueintes. 

He would often come to see me. 

We would go frequently. 

When Charles was alive, we would often go over to our 
neighbors’. 

Although he would not come to see us, we would often 
call on him and his wife. 

He would go out a Sunday morning, and walk over to his 
cousin’s. 

Yes, I understand; but you would do that every day before 
your father’s death. 

They would come running and singing like so many 
children. 

I would often sit and listen to him as he told stories of his 
boyhood days. 

Wait till I have dined. 

Attendez que i'aie dint. 

Wait here till I come; I will not be gone long. 

Stay until I come; I shall not be gone long. 

I was waiting for you. Why did you not tell me to wait 
until the next car left here? 

He would not go; he said he would stay in the station 
until the train arrived. 

They would not call on us until they were introduced to us. 

He played until he had lost all the money he had with him. 

Let them come if they wish to. 

Qu'ils viennent s'ils veulent. 

Let them examine our books if they have any desire to 
do so. 


§14 


VINGT-SEPTIEME LEQON 


17 


Let them do as they please. 

Let him choose the book he wants. 

Let her buy that edition of Shakespeare. 

How beautiful the lawn looks this morning! 

Que la pelouse est belle ce matin! 

How kind this gentleman is! 

How attentive your children always are! 

How well bound these books are! 

How cold the weather is this morning! 

How many calls I have to make today! 

How many carriages there are on the streets today! 

How much furniture you have bought! 

How many flowers you have brought me! 

How magnificent these buildings are! 

O, liberty! How many crimes are committed in your 
name! 

How light this room is! 

If he is able, and works well, we will give 
him a permanent position. 

S’il est capable et qu’il iravaille bien, nous lui donnerons 
une position permanente. 

If it is too expensive and if you have not much money, do 
not buy it. 

If the room is large and if it is light, we shall engage it. 
As he was in a foreign country and had not much money, 
his situation seemed very hopeless. 

Since you are young and wish to work, I will give you the 
position. 

She is much younger than I. 

Elle est beaucoup plus jeune que moi. 

You are more attractive than your cousin. 

Your cousin is not so attentive as you. 

Have you ever seen a more pleasant room than this one? 
This horse is not worth more than ours. 

Since then, he came as regularly as before. 

These shoes are not so stylish as those I had before. 


18 


ANGLAIS 


§14 


I shall not love you unless you work more. 

Je ne vous aimerai pas a moins que vous ne travailliez 
mieux. 

Why did you not wait for me? 

I will not go out before I have spoken to her. 

Whatever he may say, do not listen to him. 

Send him your book that he may read it. 

In case you should need me, call me; I will help you. 

I will go there, provided you accompany me. 

Can you wait until I have finished that letter? 

Though he is rich, he is not happy. 

Let us finish the work today, for fear it should rain 
tomorrow. 

Should any one call for me, tell him I will be at home 
at seven tonight. 

Do you think your brother is willing to come with me? 

I am very sorry you could not do it. 

This is the best edition of Dickens’ works that I have. 

Is it certain that your friends will call on you today? 

I am surprised that she has not yet heard the news. 

She is the only friend I have. 

We will wait to hear from you. 

I wish you to be happy. 

We want you to work better. 

* Nous voulons que vous travailliez mieux. 

He fears that you may not arrive. 

I wish her to come. 

It is necessary for him to work in the evening. 

Do you think she is as wealthy as they say? 

I do not think she has much money. 

He will speak unless you object. 

There was no one who could give me that information. 

He ordered them to report at nine o’clock. 

Who came during my absence? —No one that I know of. 
Come who will, I shall stay here. 

I order you to speak. 


9242 


14 


VINGT-SEPTIEME LEQON 


19 


He wishes me to go to see him. 

I doubt whether you will arrive in time. 

Do you think we may be in London by ten o'clock? 
It is necessary that you should arrive early. 

1 do not believe that you know him. 

It does not seem to me that he is right. 

Supposing he should come, what would you do? 

I wish that you would write tomorrow. 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


Alice, I cannot remember where 
Mr. Franklin’s store is. Is it 
on this street, or on the one 
above? 

Neither, Louise; it is just around 
the corner. How long shall you 
be at Franklin’s? If you will 
not be there more than half an 
hour, I shall have just time 
enough to go to Davis’ and get 
back again when you are ready 
to leave. Then we can go to 
the museum together. 

Yes; I am sure I shall be ready in 
half an hour. I want to get 
something for a present for 
mother. And then, too, Mr. 
Franklin sent me a letter this 
morning saying he had received 
the set of Dickens that he had 
told me about. You will meet 
me here then in half an hour? 


Yes, I will. I would rather stay 
with you, but if I do, we can¬ 
not visit the museum this morn¬ 
ing. You will hurry, so that 
we shall have as much time as 
possible. 


Alice, je ne puis me rappeler ou 
est le magasin de M. Franklin. 
Est-ce dans cette rue ou dans 
celle au-dessus? 

Ni l’une ni l’autre, Louise; c’est 
pres du coin. Combien de 
temps resterez-vous chez Frank¬ 
lin? Si vous ne restez pas plus 
d’une demi-heure, j’aurai juste 
assez de temps pour aller chez 
Davis et revenir quand vous 
serez prete asortir. Alors, nous 
pourrons aller au musee en¬ 
semble. 

Oui; je suis sure que je serai 
prete dans une demi-heure. Je 
veux acheter quelque chose 
pour un cadeau a maman; et 
puis, M. Franklin m’a envoye 
une lettre ce matin dans la- 
quelle il me dit qu’il a regu la 
collection des oeuvres de Dickens 
dont il m’avait parle. Vous me 
trouverez ici alors dans une 
demi-heure? 

Oui; j’y serai. J’aimerais mieux 
rester avec vous, mais si je 
reste, nous ne pourrons pas 
visiter le musee ce matin. 
Depechez-vous, de maniere ace 
que nousayons autant de temps 
que possible. 




20 


ANGLAIS 


§14 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Of course, and I will wait for you 
here, in case you should be a 
few minutes late. 

* 

* * 

I found your letter, Mr. Franklin, 
when I came down to break¬ 
fast this morning. Had I not 
received it today, I should 
have purchased another set of 
Dickens. You know I must 
have the books tomorrow. As 
I told you, tomorrow is mother’s 
birthday. 

Yes; I understand. But here is 
the work, and it is a very nice 
set too. I am sure your mother 
will like it. Notice how soft 
the leather is. Is it not beauti¬ 
fully bound? 

It is, indeed. It is quite satisfac¬ 
tory. What kind of Shake¬ 
speare have you, Mr. Franklin? 
Have you anything as well 
bound as this Dickens? 

No, Miss Warren, I have not. 
But this is the latest edition 
out. I think it the best too. 
It has been well spoken of by 
the critics. 

How much did you say the 
Dickens is? And the Shake¬ 
speare? 

The price of the Dickens is thirty- 
eight dollars, and of the Shake¬ 
speare twenty-two dollars. I 
will make the price of both 
works fifty dollars, Miss War¬ 
ren. 

Very well, I will take them. You 
may send them to the house 


Certainement, et je vous attendrai 
ici dans le cas ou vous seriez en 
retard de quelques minutes. 

* 

* * 

M. Franklin, j’ai trouve votre let- 
tre quand je suis descendue 
pour le dejeuner ce matin. Si 
je ne l’avais pas regue, j’aurais 
achete une autre collection de 
Dickens. Vous savez qu’il me 
faut ces livres pour domain. 
Comme je vous l’ai dit, c’est 
demain l’auniversaire de la 
naissance de ma mere. 

Oui; je comprends. Mais voici 
l’ouvrage, et c’est une ma- 
gnifique collection. Je suis sur 
que votre mere en sera con- 
tente. Remarquez comme le 
cuir est souple. N’est-ce pas 
admirablement relie? 

Oui, vraiment. J’en suis tout a 
fait satisfaite. Quelle edition 
de Shakespeare avez-vous, M. 
Franklin? En avez-vous une 
aussi bien reliee que ce Dick¬ 
ens? 

Non, Mademoiselle Warren, je 
n’en ai pas, mais voici la der- 
niere edition publiee. Je crois 
que c’est la meilleure. Les 
critiques en font l’eloge. 

Combien m’avez-vous dit que 
coute ce Dickens, et ce Shake¬ 
speare? 

Les ouvrages de Dickens coutent 
trente-huit dollars, et ceux de 
Shakespeare trente-deux dol¬ 
lars. Je vous laisserai les deux 
au prix de cinquante dollars, 
Mademoiselle Warren. 

Tres bien. Je les prends. Vous 
pouvez les envoyer chez moi 



§14 


VINGT-SEPTIEME LEQON 


21 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION - 


today, please. I will send you 
a check the first of the month. 

Thank you, Miss Bennett. I sup¬ 
pose you have read all this 
month’s magazines? In the 
London Review there is a very 
good article on the summer 
resorts of America. It is very 
interesting. I did not know 
that there were so many Ameri¬ 
can resorts, nor did I suppose 
that they were so much fre¬ 
quented. 

O, yes; there are many more in 
America than in England—al¬ 
most as many as in Europe— 
but, of course, ver,y few of them 
are well-known. I wish you 
might see some of them, Mr. 
Franklin. Here comes my 
friend. 

* 

* * 

You are just in time, Louise. I 
think you have not been gone 
more than half an hour. 

I am quite out of breath, Alice. 
I was afraid that I might keep 
you waiting, and I hurried as 
much as possible. Do you think 
we have time to go to the mu¬ 
seum now? Or would you rather 
go somewhere else? 

I hardly think we have time 
enough to visit the museum 
this morning; there are so many 
things to see. But we have 
time enough before lunch to 
see all that is worth seeing in 
the public library. You have 
never been there? Let us go, 
then, and this afternoon we 


(Continuees) 

aujourd’hui, s’il vous plait. Je 
vous enverrai un cheque le pre¬ 
mier du mois. 

Merci, Mademoiselle Bennett. Je 
suppose que vous avez lu toutes 
les revues de ce mois? Dans la 
Revue de Londres, il y a un 
tres bon article sur les places 
d’ete d’Amerique. C’est tres 
interessant. Je ne savais pas 
qu’il y en eut autant en Ame- 
rique, ni ne supposais qu’elles 
fussent aussi frequences. 

Oh! oui; il y en a beaucoup plus 
en Amerique qu’en Angleterre; 
presque autant que dans toute 
l’Europe; mais naturellement, 
bien peu sont connues. Je sou- 
haite que vous puissiez en voir 
quelques-unes, M. Franklin. 
Ah! voici mon amie, 

* 

* * 

Vous arrivez juste a temps, Loui¬ 
se. Je pense que vous n’avez 
pas ete partie plus d’une demi- 
heure. 

Je suis tout essoufflee, Alice. 
J’avais peur de vous faire at- 
tendre, et je me suis depechee 
autant que possible. Croyez- 
vous que nous ayons le temps 
d’aller au musee maintenant? 
Ou preferez-vous aller ailleurs? 

Nous avons a peine le temps de 
visiter le musee ce matin, je 
pense; il y a tant de choses a 
voir. Mais nous avons assez de 
temps avant le dejeuner de voir 
tout ce qui vaut la peine d’etre 
vu a la Bibliotheque publique. 
Vous ne l’avez jamais visitee? 
Allons-y alors, et cet apres-midi 



22 


ANGLAIS 


14 


EEYUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


can visit the museum. Don’t 
you think that will be the best 
plan? 

Perhaps so; you know best, Louise. 
Certainly I should not wish to 
go away from the city with¬ 
out having visited the public 
library. 

Let us take a cab, then, and 
drive there at once. It is 
nearly a mile, and we cannot 
spare the time to walk so far. 


PHRASES 

He will call for me as he goes by. 

How much shall you charge us to 
do that? 

What fancy struck him? 

The river is not frozen. 

That would not have happened 
had he been there. 

If it were not for that, I should 
be satisfied. 

They keep a close watch over 
him. 

They say no. 

Has she any one in view for this 
position? 

What is the good of that? 

I look at it in quite a different 
light. 

We have enough to live on. 

She will take either one or the 
other. 

That does not pay enough. 

What does he know about it? 

What is the price of the stock? 

I know what to think of it. 

They keep very late hours. 

He will get out of it, one way or 
another. 


nous pourrons visiter le musee. 
Ne pensez-vous pas que ce soit 
mieux ainsi? 

Peut-etre bien; vous savez mieux 
que moi, Louise. Certainement 
je ne voudrais pas quitter la 
ville sans avoir visite la Bi- 
bliotheque publique. 

Prenons un fiacre, alors, et fai- 
sons-nous-y conduire immedia- 
tement. II y a presqu’ un mille 
pour y aller, et nous n’avons 
pas le temps de marcher aussi 
loin. 


USUELLES 

II me prendra en passant. 
Combien nousprendrez-vous pour 
faire cela? 

Qu’est-ce qu’il lui a pris? 

La riviere n’est pas gelee. 

Cela n’aurait pas eu lieu s’il eut 
ete la. 

A cela pres, je serais satisfait. 

On le garde a vue. 

On dit que non. 

A-t-elle quelqu’un en vue pour 
cette position? 

A quoi bon? 

Je vois la chose a un autre point 
de vue. 

Nous avons de quoi vivre. 

Elle aehetera l’un ou 1’autre. 

Cela ne rapporte pas assez. 

Qu’en sait-il? 

Que valent ces actions? 

Jesais a quoi m’en tenir. 

Ils rentrent tres tard. 

II s’on tirera d’une fagon ou 
d’une autre. 






14 


VINGT-SEPTIEME LEQON 


23 


PHRASES USUELLES —(Continuees) 


There is more than enough. 

What are you driving at? 

Answer me by return mail. 

He let me have it at cost price. 
She will not be long in coming. 

It is as plain as can be. 

It is not to be thought of. 

On the whole, he is not sorry for 
it. 

He is quite attentive to her. 

Do you believe that you can come? 
Have you been here long? 

I am writing to her not to come. 
Am I right in saying so? 

On what do you live? 

They live on fruit. 

He has not enough to live on. 

I cannot make that out. 

You will find a ready market for 
these goods. 

In this way matters went on. 

He went as if nothing was the 
matter. 

There are the persons we usually 
meet. 

He has not yet made up his 
mind. 

The child did not mind his pa¬ 
rents. 

He turns everything into money. 
Once more, if you please. 

I was out all day. 

I will hear him out. 

He left for foreign parts. 

I will not part with it at any 
price. 

At this, they parted. 

Give me a receipt in full. 

Nothing was said about it. 


II y en a de reste. 

A quoi voulez-vous en venir? 
Repondez-moi par retour du cour- 
rier. 

II me l’a cede au prix de revient. 
Elle ne tardera pas a venir. 

Cela saute aux yeux. 

II n’y faut pas songer. 

En somme, il iTen est pas fache. 

II est aux petits soins aupres 
d’elle. 

Pensez-vous pouvoir venir? 

Y a-t-il longtemps que vous etes 
ici? 

Je lui ecris de ne pas venir. 

Ai-je raison de dire cela? 

De quoi vivez-vous? 

11s se nourrissent de fruits. 

II n’a pas de quoi vivre. 

Je ne puis dechiffrer cela. 

Vous trouverez un debit facile de 
ces marchandises. 

Les affaires afferent de cette 
maniere. 

II s’en alia comme si de rien 
n’etait. 

Ce sont les personnes que nous 
voyons habituellement. 

11 n’a pas encore pris de parti. 

L’enfant n’ecoutait pas ses pa¬ 
rents. 

II fait argent de tout. 

Encore une fois, s’il vous plait. 
J’etais sorti toute la journee. 

Je l’entendrai jusqu’au bout. 

II est parti pour l’etranger. 

Je ne m’en deferai a aucun prix. 

La-dessus ils se separerent. 
Donnez-moi quittance pour solde 
de compte. 

On n’en a rien dit. 




24 


ANGLAIS 


§14 


PHRASES USUELLES— (Continuees) 


You cannot get better goods any¬ 
where. 

Please to take off the discount, 
and we will pay you. 

There is an error charged against 
you. 

I am afraid it is so. 

I was introduced to him at his 
partner’s house. 

Prices have fallen ten per cent. 

I used to see her quite often, but 
now I hardly ever meet her. 

I have lived in France a very long 
time and know the silk trade 
well. 

They are very anxious to please 
you. 

So much the better for her. 

This matter takes up all my time. 

My eyes are not sore, but they 
ache from much reading. 

Have you posted her letter? 

I take this opportunity of offering 
you my services. 

1 know what I can do, and what 
I cannot do. 

Turn off the water. 

Can you wait about a quarter of 
an hour? 

Has he not sent any at all? 

He has some in stock, but not 
many. 

Do you like these any better? 

It will be late next week; if you 
cannot send the goods before 
Thursday, do not send them at 
all. 

He that has the most time has 
none to lose. 


Vous ne pouvez trouver de meil- 
leures marchandises nulle part. 

Diminuez-nous l’escompte et nous 
vous paierons. 

Vous avez fait erreur a votre 
desavantage. 

J’ai peur qu’il en soit ainsi. 

On me l’a presente chez son 
associe. 

Le marche a baisse de dix pour 
cent. 

Je la voyais souvent il y a quelque 
temps, mais maintenant il est 
rare que je la rencontre. 

J’ai demeure longtemps en France 
et je connais bien le commerce 
de la soie. 

Ils ont un vif desir de vous etre 
agreable. 

Tant mieux pour elle. 

Cette affaire m’occupe entiere- 
ment. 

Je n’ai pas mal auxyeux, mais les 
yeux me font mal d’avoir lu 
aussi longtemps. 

Avez-vous mis sa lettre alaposte? 

Je saisis cette occasion pour vous 
offrir mes services. 

Je sais ce que je peux faire et ce 
que je ne peux pas faire. 

Fermez l’eau. 

Pouvez-vous attendre a peu pres 
un quart d’heure? 

N’en a-t-il pas envoye du tout? 

Il en a en magasin, mais pas 
beaucoup. 

Aimez-vous mieux ceux-ci? 

Ce sera trop tard la semaine pro- 
chaine; si vous ne pouvez pas 
envoyer les marchandises avant 
jeudi, ne les envoyez pas du 
tout. 

Celui qui a beaucoup de temps 
n’en a pas a perdre. 



14 


VINGT-SEPTIEME LEQON 


25 


PHRASES USCTELLES—(Continuees) 


Ill news travels fast. 

Money is a good servant. 

If the coat fits you, you may put 
it on. 

Diamond cut diamond. 

They are hand and glove to¬ 
gether. 

There are two sides to everything. 

Do you think it will rain this 
afternoon? 

I think it will. 

I ought to have done as you did. 

Give me back my money. 


Les mauvaises nouvelles se repan¬ 
dent vite. 

L’argent est un bon serviteur. 

II n’y a que la verite qui blesse. 

A bon chat bon rat. 

Ce sont deux tetes dans le meme 
bonnet. 

Toute medaille a son revers. 

Pensez-vous qu’il pleuve cet 
apres-midi? 

Je pense qu’il pleuvra. 

J’aurais du faire comme vous. 

Rendez-moi mon argent. 


EXERCICE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 

Aussitot que vous aurez regu votre copie de la vingt- 
sixieme legon corrigee par nous, enregistrez-la sur un 
cylindre vierge, et envoyez-le-nous, en suivant les directions 
donnees precedemment. 




26 


ANGLAIS 


14 


VINGT-HUITIEME LECON 


CYLINDRE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 


VOCABULAIRE 


to admire, admirer 
the arm, Varme , le bras 
to arm, armer 
to attend, s'occuper de 
the benefit, le profit , V avan- 
tage 

to benefit, profiter a, faire 
du bien a 

the blanket, la couverture 
the camp, le camp 
to camp out, camper 
chilly, frais, un peu froid 
the climate, le climat 
deeply, profondement 
the earth, la ter re 
evidently, ividemment 
to explore, explorer 
the face, la face , la surface 
the fire, le feu 
the firearms, les armes 
d feu 

the fishing tackle, Vatti- 
rail de peche 
the geyser, le geyser 
the grandeur, la grandeur 
the guide, le guide 


to guide, guider 
the height, la hauteur 
to hesitate, hisiter 
the hot springs, les sources 
d'eau chaude 
interested, inter esse 
lofty, haut, eleve 
the match, Vallumette 
the mineral, le mineral 
the. mount, le mont 
the mountain, la mon- 
tagne 

the overcoat, le pardessus 
the peak, le pic 
the pocket, la poche. 
the provisions, les provi¬ 
sions 

the reason, la raison 
remarkable, remarquable 
rocky, rocheux 
the scenery, la scene , la Vue, 
la perspective 

the spot, Vendroit, la place 
the spring, le printemps , la 
source , le res sort 
the stone, la pierre 





§14 VINGT-HUITIEME LEGON 27 


VOCABULAIRE- (Continue) 


sufficient, suffisant 
tlie tent, la tente 
thoroughly, entierement , a 
fond 

undecided, indicis 
the utensils, les ustensiles 


varied, varie 
the width, la largeur 
wild, sauvage , dSsert 
the wildeimess, le dfcert, la 
solitude 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION 


I. C. S. 

English Record No. 28 

How beautiful it is! I have 
heard so much about your 
American mountains, their 
wildness and their gran¬ 
deur, but, believe me, I 
had never imagined any¬ 
thing so wonderful as this. 
The peaks are as lofty as 
the Alps, while the scenery 
is far wilder and much 
more varied. Now I do 
believe that Yellowstone 
Park is the most remark¬ 
able spot on the face of 
the earth. If only father 
were 1 here! How he would 
enjoy it! Years ago, when 
we were living among the 
Alps, we would often sit 
together admiring Mount 
Blanc. Then we would 
wonder if the stories that 
are told of the Rocky 
Mountains and Yellow¬ 
stone Park could be true. 
Many of these peaks must 


/. c. s. 

Cylindre d’Anglais No. 28 

Que c’est beau! J’ai beau- 
coup entendu parler de vos 
montagnes d’Amerique, de 
leur solitude et de leur 
grandeur; mais, croyez- 
moi, je ne m’etais jamais 
imagine quelque chose 
d’aussi merveilleux que 
ceci. Les pics sont aussi 
sieves que ceux des Alpes, 
tandis que la scene est 
plus sauvage et plus variee. 
Maintenant, je crois que 
le pare Yellowstone est 
l’endroit le plus remarqua- 
ble sur la surface de la 
terre. Si seulement mon 
pere 6ta.it la! Comme il 
aurait du plaisir! II y a 
quelques annees, quand 
nous demeurions dans les 
Alpes, nous nous assey- 
ions souvent ensemble, et 
nous admirions le Mont 
Blanc. Alors nous nous 
demandions si tout ce 





28 


ANGLAIS 


§14 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION—(Continuees) 


be more than twenty thous¬ 
and feet in height. 2 


No; not many of them 3 are 
so high. How should you 
like to camp out here for 
two or three weeks? I am 
ready to stay a month if 
you wish. Why should 
you hesitate? You can 
have no reason for going 
back to the city, and you 
know that you could do 
nothing that would be 
of more benefit to your 
health than camping out 
for a few weeks in such a 
climate as this. 

I know; I am not undecided. 
Yes, let us stay for two or 
three weeks. I am deeply 
interested in the hot springs 
and the geysers, and in the 
minerals that are evidently 
to be found here. I should 
like to explore the park 
thoroughly. 

Yes; and we will have the 
tents and firearms sent 
here tomorrow morning; 
or perhaps we might wait 
here and send one of the 
guides back after them? 


qu’on nous disait des Mon- 
tagnes Rocheuses et de Yel¬ 
lowstone Parc pouvait etre 
vrai. Plusieurs de ces pics 
doivent avoir plus de vingt 
mille pieds de hauteur. 

Non; il n’y en a pas beau- 
coup qui soient aussi hauts. 
Comment aimeriez-vous 
camper ici pendant deux ou 
trois semaines? Je suis 
pret a rester un mois, si 
vous voulez. Pourquoi 
hesiteriez-vous? Vous ne 
pouvez avoir aucune raison 
pour retourner a la ville, 
et vous savez que vous ne 
pourriez rien faire qui put 
profiter davantage a votre 
sant6 que de camper quel- 
ques semaines dans un 
climat comme celui-ci. 

Je sais; je ne suis pas ind^cis. 
Oui, restons deux ou trois 
semaines. Je suis pro- 
fond6ment interesse dans 
les sources d’eau chaude, 
les geysers et les mineraux 
que l’on doit evidemment 
trouver ici. J’aimerais a 
explorer le pare a fond. 

Oui; et nous ferons venir ici 
nos tentes et nos armes a 
feu demain matin, ou, peut- 
etre pourrions-nous atten- 
dre ici et envoyer un de 
nos guides les chercher? 




14 VINGT-HUITIEME LEQON 29 

PHRASES ET CONVERSATION— (Continuees) 

Combien de tentes devons- 


How many tents ought we to 
send for? 4 My largest one 
is about thirteen feet long 
by nine in width. Do you 
think it will do? Or would 
it- be better to have the 
guide bring both tents? 
Do you think one will be 
sufficient? 


Yes; I think so. Tell 5 the 
guide to bring some kit¬ 
chen utensils, my fishing 
tackle, and some provisions. 

I will attend to that at once, 
and will tell him not to 
forget the blankets, for the 
nights are quite chilly. 

Very well, in the meantime 
I will build a fire if you 
will give me a few matches. 

You will find some in the 
pocket of my overcoat. 


nous envoyer chercher? 
La plus grande des mien- 
nes a a peu pres treize 
' pieds de long par neuf 
de large. Pensez-vous 
qu’elle suffira? Ou serait-il 
meilleur de faire venir les 
deux tentes par le guide? 
Ne pensez-vous pas qu’une 
nous suffira? 

Oui; certainement. Dites au 
guide d’apporter quelques 
ustensiles de cuisine, mon 
attirail de peche et quelques 
provisions. 

Je vais m’en occuper de suite, 
et je lui dirai de ne pas 
oublier quelques couver- 
tures, car les nuits sont un 
peu froides. 

Tres bien; en attendant, je 
vais faire du feu, si vous 
me donnez quelques allu- 
mettes. 

Vous en trouverez dans la 
poche de mon pardessus. 


REMARQUES 

1. Cette legon a pour but d’introduire le subjonctif 
anglais. Ce mode est beaucoup moins employe qu’en 
frangais. On le rencontre tres souvent dans la litterature 
anglaise ancienne, dans la poesie et dans le style eleve de 
nos jours. Mais dans la prose, et specialement dans la con¬ 
versation, il est d’un emploi tres rare. 

1. Formation du Subjonctif. — Le verbe au subjonctif est 
invariable a toutes les personnes et a au present la meme 




30 


ANGLAIS 


14 


forme que l’infinitif Les settles exceptions sont les verbes to 
be et to have clont les formes suivent. Comme la forme du 
verbe ne change pas pour les differentes personnes, nous 
ne donnerons que la premiere personne du singulier. 
Remarquez que nous faisons preceder le verbe par if, parce 
que c’est apres cette conjonction que le subjonctif est le plus 
commun en anglais. 

to be, etre 
Subjonctif 
Present 

If I be, Que je sots 

Imparfait 

If I were, Que je fusse 

Passe 

If I liave been, Que j'aie ete 
Plus-que-Parfait 

If I liad been, Que j’eusse ete 

to liave, avoir 
Subjonctif 
Present 

If I liave, Que j'aie 

Imparfait 

If I bad, Que j’eusse 

Passe 

If I liave liad, Que j'aie eu 
Plus-que-Parfait 

If I bad had, Que j’eusse eu 

Etudiez soigneusement les formes suivantes d’un verbe 
au subjonctif, a la voix active. Nous ne donnons que la 
premiere personne du singulier, car les formes sont les 
memes a toutes les personnes. 

to call, appeler 
Subjonctif 
Present 

If I call, Que j'appelle 
Imparfait 

If I called, Que j’appelasse 


14 


VINGT-HUITIEME LEQON 


31 


Passe 

If I liave called, Que j'aie appele 

Plus-Que-Par fait 

If I had called, Que j'eusse appele 

Present Progressif 

If I be calling, Que j'appelle 

Imparfait Progressif 

If I were calling, Que j'appelasse 

PassS Progressif 

If I have been calling, Que j'aie appelS 

Plus-que-Parfait Progressif 
If I had been calling, Que j'eusse appele 

Present Emphatique 

If I do call, Que j'appelle 

Imparfait Emphatique 

If I did call, Que j'appelasse 

Les formes suivantes sont celles d’un verbe passif au 
subjonctif. 

to be loved, Hre aime 
Subjonctif 
Present 

If I be loved, Que je sois aime 

Imparfait 

If I were loved, Que je fusse aime 

PassS 

If I have been loved, Que j'aie StS aime 

Plus-que-Parfait 

If I had been loved, Que j'eusse StS aimS 
Imparfait Progressif 

If I were being loved, Que je fusse aimS 

2. Emploi du Subjonctif. — Le mot subjonctif vient du 
latin subjunctivus qui veut dire subordonni, dipendant. Le 
subjonctif a regu ce nom parce que Faction exprimee par un 
verbe au subjonctif est ordinairement dependante d’une 
autre action exprimee par le verbe d’une proposition princi- 
pale. II ne faut pas en conclure cependant que tout verbe 
d’une proposition subordonnee d'oive etre au subjonctif. 


32 


ANGLAIS 


14 


Le subjonctif est employe dans les cas suivants. 

( a ) Quand le doute ou la denegation sont exprimes par 
une proposition subordonnee. 

If I were sure of him, I would engage him, Si j'etais stir de lui , je 
V engagerais. 

Ici, il y a doute exprime, je ne suis pas sur de lui. 

Had he been killed, his father would have died of grief, S'ileht He 
tue, son pere serait mort de chagrin. 

Dans cette phrase, il y a denegation; on nie qu’il a ete tu 6. 

(b) Apres although, though, quoique, pour exprimer une 
concession, non pas comme un fait, mais simplement comme 
supposition. 

Though he were my brother, I should not do this for him, Serait-il 
mon frere, que je ne ferais pas cela pour lui. 

Mais si la concession est exprimee comme un fait, on 
emploie l’indicatif au lieu du subjonctif. 

Though he was dead, his influence lived, Quoiqu'il flit mort, son 
influence vivait. 

Although the lake was artificial, it was beautiful, Quoique le lac flit 
artificiel, il etait rnagnifique. 

(c) Le subjonctif est surtout employe apres if, si, unless, 
a moins que, exprimant une condition, une simple supposi¬ 
tion, ou un futur incertain. 

If this be true, I am sorry for him, Si c'est vrai, j'en suis fache pour 
lui (Cepent etre vrai ou non). 

If it snow, I shall be surprised, S'il neige, j'en serai surplus (fl 
pent neiger ou non ). 

Unless he come for the money, I shail not pay him, A moins qu'il 
ne vienne chercher son argent, je ne le paierai pas. 

If twice four be ten, my account is right, Si deux fois quatre 
faisatent dix, mon compte serait juste. 

( d ) Apres as if, comme si, on emploie le subjonctif. 

He speaks as if he were the master, Il parle comme s'il etait le maltre. 

You act as if I were not your friend, Vous agissez comme si je 
n'etais pas votre ami. < 


14 


VINGT-HUITIEME LEQON 


33 


(e) Une condition peut aussi s’exprimer par le subjonctif 
sans if. Dans ce cas, il y a inversion du sujet. 

Were the sun cold, all life would disappear from the earth, Si le 
soleil Halt froid, la vie disparaitrait de la terre. 

Were my father here, you would not say that, Si mon plre etait ici, 
vous ne diriez pas cela. 


(/) Le subjonctif est employe dans les souhaits ou les 
prieres. 

God forbid! A Dieu ne plaise! 

The Lord be with you! Que le Seigneur soit avec vous! 

God help our country! Que Dieu aide notre pays! 

O, that I were a man! Oh! si j' etais un homme! 

O, that my father were here! Oh! si mon plre etait ici! 

(g) Pour exprimer une supposition regardee comme 
fausse ou improbable, on se sert du subjonctif. 


If I were you, this is what I should do, Si j'etais de vous , void ce 
que je ferais. 

Though I were dead, I should hear your voice, Meme si j'Hais 
mort, j'entendrais votre voix. 

Dans tous les cas, la proposition subordonnee exprime 
quelque chose qui n’a pas d’existence en realite, qui est con- 
traire a la verite, ou que l’on congoit seulement. Le mode 
subjonctif est le mode du doute, de l’imagination et de 
l’incertitude. C’est le contraire de l’indicatif qui est le mode 
de la certitude et de l’actualile. Les phrases suivantes sont 
donnees dans le but de montrer cette difference entre les 
deux modes. 


Subjonctif 

If twice four were ten, my 
account would be correct, Si deux 
fois quatre faisaient dix, mon 
compte serait juste. 

Though I were dead, I should 
hear your voice, Meme si j'etais 
mort , j'entendrais votre voix. 

Unless he come for the money, 
I shall not pay him, A moins 
qu'il ne vienne chercher son 
argent , je ne le paierai pas. 


Indicatif 

If twice five is ten, my account 
is correct, Si deux fois cinq font 
dix , mon compte est juste. 

Though he was dead, his in¬ 
fluence lived, Quoiqu'il ffit mort , 
son influence vivait. 

Unless he is here, you must 
wait until he comes, A moins 
qu'il ne soit ici , vous devez 
attendre jusqu'a ce qu'il vienne. 


34 


ANGLAIS 


14 


If he be a gentleman, he will 
take off his hat, S’il est gentil- 
homme, il dtera son chapeau. 

If it rain, I shall be surprised, 
S’il pleut, j’en serai surpris. 


If he is a gentleman, why did 
he not explain his action? S'il 
est gentilhomme, pourquoi n’a-t-il 
pas explique son action? 

If it rains tomorrow, I will not 
go out, S’il pleut demain, je ne 
sortirai pas. 


3. Les Temps du Subjonctif .—Le subjonctif n’exprime pas 
le temps d’une fagon bien precise. Ordinairement, il denote 
le futur. Le present du subjonctif denote le present ou le 
futur. Il exprime le doute quant a la vdrite d’un cas suppose. 


If he find this out, he will be sorry, S’il arrive , a savoir cela, il en 
sera fache. 

If this be true, he is lost, Si c’est vrai, il est perdu. 


L’imparfait a reference au present, et implique que le cas 
supposd n’est pas un fait. 

If father were here, what would he say? Si papa Hait id, que 
dirait-il? 

If he were dead, what would she do? S’il Hait mort, que ferait- 
elle? 


Le passd du Subjonctif denote ordinairement un temps 
present avec l’indication que la supposition n’est pas un fait. 

If I be caught in the act, I will do it, Mime si je suis pris sur le 
fait, je le ferai. 

Unless he have finished, I will go, A moins qu'il n'ait fini h pri- 
sent, je partirai. 

Le plus-que-parfait du subjonctif se rapporte a un temps 
passe et denote que la supposition n’etait pas un fait. 

Had it been raining, I should have been sorry, S’il avait phi, j’en 
aurais Hi fache. 

Even though it had rained, I should go, Mime s’il avait plu, je 
serais parti. 

2. La dimension s’exprime en frangais par Ure et un 
adjectif, ou par avoir avec un nom; en anglais, c’est to be 
qu’il faut employer dans les deuk: cas. Dans le cas d’un 
adjectif, on place cet adjectif apres la dimension et le de ne 


§14 


VINGT-HUITIEME LEQON 


35 


se traduit pas. Si c’est un nom, de se rend par in. Les 
noms et les adjectifs suivants sont employes pour exprimer 
les dimensions. 

Noms 
long, long 

wide ou broad, large 
high, haut 
thick, Spais 
deep, pro fond 

Adjectifs 

in length, long de , de long , de longueur 

in width ou in breadth, large de, de large , de largeur 

in height, haut de , de haut, de hauteur 

in thickness, epais de, d' epaisseur 

in depth, pro fond de, de profondeur 

Our table is four feet long ou in length, Notre table a douze pieds de 
longueur, ou est longue de douze pieds. 

My room is ten feet wide ou in width, Ma chambre a dix pieds de 
large. 

This building is fifty feet high ou in height, Ce bdtiment a cin- 
quante pieds de hauteur. 

Lorsque le verbe n’est pas exprime, le de ne se traduit pas 
en anglais. 

a room fifteen feet long, une chambre de quinze pieds de long 

a river five feet deep, une riviere de cinq pieds de profondeur 

Pour exprimer les superficies, notre preposition sur se 
traduit en anglais par by ou and; il n’est meme pas besoin 
en anglais d’exprimer l’adjectif de dimension. 

My table is three feet long byl ,,,,, , . . . , , , 

„ , Ma table a trots pieds de long- 

five feet wide, 1 , , 

„, , , . ’ „ , ueur sur cinq de largeur. 

My table is three feet by five, J 

Si le nom de dimension, de poids, de mesure, est precede 
d’un comparatif, la preposition de se traduit par by. II en 
est de meme devant un nombre qui a rapport a l’age. 

I am taller than he is by three inches, Je suis plus grand que lui 
de trois pouces. 

She is older than your sister by two years, Elle a deux ans de plus 
que votre soeur. 

It is too expensive by a half, C’est trop cher de moitie. 


36 


Anglais 


§14 


3. D’apres tout ce que nous avons etudie jusqu’ici, on 
Voit qu’il y a plusieurs manieres de rendre notre pronom en 
en anglais. Etudiez les differents cas suivants. 

1. E?i peut representer les personnes ou les choses. On 
le traduit par un des pronoms personnels him, her, it, them, 
precede de la preposition requise par le verbe. 

I do not talk about him, Je n'en parte pas. 

He is very sorry for it, II en est bien fache. 

I have not sold any of them, Je n'en ai pas vendu. 

2. Lorsque en se rapporte a une proposition entiere, on 
le traduit par for it. 

She is not the less happy for it, Elle n'en est pas moins heureuse. 

John lost some money; I am sorry for it, Jean a perdu de Vargent; 
j'en suis fache. 

3. En peut dans certains cas se remplacer par un des 
possessifs its ou their. 

Paris is beautiful; I admire its monuments, Paris est 7 me belle ville; 
fen admire les monuments. 

I am very fond of tea, but I fear its effects, J'aime beaucoup le the, 
mais j'en crains les effets. 

4. En se traduit par some ou any pour indiquer une quan¬ 
tity par none ou not any dans les propositions negatives. 

You have many apples; give me some, Vous avez beaucoup de 
pommes; donnez-m'en. 

I have French books; have you any? J'ai des livres trangais, en 
avez-vous ? 

I have none, Je n'en ai pas. 

5. Pour eviter la repetition d’un nom, on emploie one au 
singulier, ones au pluriel lorsque en est suivi d’un adjectif 
en frangais. 

Do you like pears? I have some very good ones, Aimez-vous les 
poires? J'en ai de iris bonnes. 

Have you horses? —Yes; I have very fine ones, Avez-vous des 
chevaux? —Oui; j'en ai de tr'es beaux. « 


§14 


VINGT-HUITIEME LEGON 


37 


6. Lorsque en signifie de la, il se traduit par from it, 
from there, thence. 

Do you come from school? —Yes; I am coming from there, Venez- 
vous de Vecole ?— Oui; j'en viens. 

7. En ne se traduit pas en anglais dans les reponses oil 
le verbe n’est pas exprime. 

Did you receive any letters? —Yes; I did, Avez-vous regu des let- 
tre$?—Oui; j'en ai regie. 

Have you any French books? —I have, Avez-vous des livres fran- 
gaisf—J'en ai. 

8. Avec un adverbe de quantite, ou un adjectif numeral, 
en ne se traduit ordinairement pas. 

How many sisters have you? —I have two, Combien de sceurs avez- 
vous? — J'en ai deux. 

Have you many apples? —Yes; I have many, Avez-vous beaucoup de 
pommes? —Oui; j'en ai beaucoup. 

4. La preposition for apres certains verbes se traduit en 
frangais par chercher. 

Go for a doctor, Allez chercher un medecin. 

I come for my money, Je viens chercher mon argent. 

He sent for me, Itm'a envoye chercher. 

Call for me at six, Venez me chercher a six heures. 

5. Lorsque le verbe to tell est suivi d’un seul comple¬ 
ment, soit direct, soit indirect, on ne traduit pas la preposi¬ 
tion a, to. 

Tell it again, Dites-le encore. 

Tell him to come early, Dites-lui de venir de bonne heure. 

Mais s’il y a deux complements exprimes, l’un direct, 
l’autre indirect, on place la preposition to devant le comple¬ 
ment indirect. 

Tell it to him, Dites-le lui. 

Tell it to your mother, Dites-le h votre mire. 


38 


ANGLAIS 


14 


EXERCICE ORAL 

If lie be tired, send bim to bed. 

S’il se trouve fatigue, envoyez-le se coucher. 

Though he be poor, at least he is noble. 

If we were riding faster, we should surely arrive in time. 
If you had been there, all would have been well. 

Did you have the latest books on sale, you would have a 
much larger trade. 

Did I know him well, I would introduce you. 

Were I to come home soon, I should not close my house. 
“Though he were dead, yet shall he live.” 

However hard it may be, I shall do my duty. 

If these things be so, speak to him quickly. 

I had rather not go just now. 

II vaudrait mieux que je n’y aille pas maintenant. 

She said you had better do it at once. 

He might better have gone to his father. 

God forbid! 

Though I were alone, still would I do it again. 

Though he kill me, yet will I love him. 

He had rather ride with us, I know. 

He had rather come this way; the road is shorter. 

Why, any one had rather be rich than poor. 

God defend us! 

Heaven preserve our nation! 

Save the state! 

If the doctor come not soon, he will surely die. 

However famous he be, I will never see him. 

Quelque fameux qu'il soit, je ne le verrai jamais. 

He may be very good, —I do not know. 

He may come tonight; I hardly think he will. 

O that it were true! How gladly would I see him! 

O that he were younger than I! 

If she be older than he, of course they can never be 
married. 


§14 


VINGT-HUITIEME LEGON 


39 


Were he here now, we should have dinner served at once. 
Were he what he seems, all would like him. 

Were its position more advantageous, the city would have 
a much larger trade. 

Did he have a good reputation, we should be glad to have 
him call at our house. 

Were the superintendent to speak better of his secretary, 
we should be better pleased. 

If it would only snow! 

S’it neigeait seulement! 

If he love me, he will serve me still. 

Though he be not my father, yet do I honor him. 

Would that it were tomorrow! 

May we never forget this day! 

I had better go quickly. 

He had better not do any such thing. 

If I were you, I should send it tonight. 

If you were a man, you would apologize. 

If they were not so rich, they would be happier. 

Were they not invited, it would not matter. 

Though they came early, they did not stay long. 

Four times five is twenty. 

Quatre fois cinq font vingt. 

Thirty is five times six. 

Five times six is thirty. 

A dozen is enough for these people to eat. 

Seven dozen is enough to feed those people. 

“Many are called, but few are chosen.” 

None are coming tonight. 

No, sir; none is too good for my child. 

Build me a house forty feet by fifty. 

Construisez-moi une maison de quarante pieds par cin- 
quante. 

The table is three feet long and two feet wide. 

The room is ten feet in length by eight in width. 

It is sixteen feet high. 


40 


ANGLAIS 


14 


In height, it is the most remarkable in the world. 

Why, its length cannot be less than four hundred feet. 

The house covers nearly half an acre; it is much talked of. 
It is 4 ft. 12 in. X 3 ft. U in. 

I had rather not go, thank you. 

J' aimerais mieux ne pas partir , merci. ' 

She said that she had rather remain at home. 

You said yesterday that you had rather drive than walk. 
How is that? I thought you were fond of walking. 

It is said that some men had rather work than eat. 

. They insisted that they had rather stay here. 

We had much rather go to the mountains. 

I had rather write than read. 

I see that you had rather write English than French. 

Who had rather walk than drive? 

Who had not rather ride than walk? 

Why had you rather go by train than by carriage? 

You show by your actions that you had rather go hunting 
than fishing. 

If slie be not happy, why do you not send her 
home? 

Si elle n'est pas heureuse, pourquoi ne Venverriez-vous pas 
chez elle? 

If the river be so high as to be dangerous, why should we 
attempt to cross it here? 

If it prove a pleasant day, let us go to the lake. 

If he come early, perhaps we can go. 

If the party be small, there will be room enough for all. 

If horses were not so cheap, fewer would be seen on the 
streets. 

If I were you, I should ask him about it. 

He told me to tell you that he would have come when you 
first invited him, if you were not living so far away. 

Were it probable that Charles would be here, 
of course we would wait for him. 

S'tl Halt probable que Charles fut id, naturellement nous 
V attendrions. 


41 


§14 VINGT-HUITIEME LECON 

Were he going sooner, I might accompany him. 

Were she not so ill, I assure you that we should come to 
see her. 

Were they to come soon, we would not go away. 

Were I to study another language, I would do it with the 
phonograph. 

Were we to go to the country this summer, we should 
close the house. 

Were she to sing at church next Sunday, I should cer¬ 
tainly go to hear her. 

Were he to offer me three thousand dollars for my house, 
I would sell it to him. 

Though she be poor, she is much loved. 

Quoiqu'elle soit pauvre, on Vaime beaucoup. 

Although he were young, I would not see him. 

“I would my daughter were dead at my foot, and the 
jewels in her ear!” 

If she come, I will talk with her. 

If it were so, it was a fault. 

Whoever he be, he cannot be a good man. 

If the house were mine, I should never sell it. 

Si la maison St ait a moi, je ne la vendrais jamais. 

I wish there were some other way in which I might be of. 
service to you. 

You speak English as easily as if it were French. 

If only it were summer, we might drive to the lake. 

If my home were not in Spain, I should think as you do. 

My wife often looks as if she were going to cry. 

She looked at me as though she were disappointed in you. 

If you were to be taken away, I should never marry 
again. 

If I were you, I should stay at home today. 

If he think well of it, he will sign the voucher. 

If he look out of the window, he will see the 
children playing. 

S’il regarde par la fenetre, il verra les enfanls jouer. 


42 


ANGLAIS 


§14 


Unless he be a better boy, he cannot go with us tomorrow. 

Were it not that I love you, I should go away. 

Were he not so strange and silent a man, he would be 
more popular. 

Were these checks correctly made out, they would be 
signed at once. 

Unless she be more careful they will dismiss her. 

Unless he come quickly, he will be too late. 

However happy she may seem, I know that 
she is quite hopeless. 

Quelqu'heureuse qu'elle semble,je sais qu'elle est tout a fait 
sans espoir. 

However strong the little girl may be, she must be very 
careful not to overwork. 

However bright a boy he may be, he must study hard in 
order to succeed. 

However careful a student you may be, you must study 
very hard. 

However thoughtful I be, I am continually making mis¬ 
takes. 

However young she be, she is still too old. 

However cheerful she may seem, she cannot be very 
happy. 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


To be lost among the moun¬ 
tains,—O, Charles, would it 
not be terrible? Sometimes, 
when we are far from home, 
and especially if the day be 
dark and rainy, I wonder what 
would happen to us if the 
guides should suddenly leave 
us in the night, and in the 
morning we were to find our¬ 
selves alone in the Alps. 

But the guides will not leave us. 
You are always borrowing 


Etre perdu dans les montagnes,— 
Oh! Charles, ne serait-ce pas 
terrible? Quelquefois, quand 
nous sommes loin de chez nous, 
et surtout si le jour est sombre 
et pluvieux, je me demande ce 
qu’il nous arriverait si les 
guides nous quittaient soudaine- 
ment pendant la nuit, et que 
nous nous trouvions seuls le 
matin dans les Alpes. 

Mais les guides ne nous quitteront 
pas. Vous vous mettez toujours 




14 


VINGT-HUITIEME LECON 


43 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION - (Continuees) 


trouble, William. Why will 
you not look on the brighter 
side of things? Why are you 
always imagining things that 
are disagreeable? Do try to be 
a little more cheerful. 

1 will try, but a man cannot 
change his nature in an instant. 
Just to please you, I will try. 

Well, let us talk about something 
else, Charles. Tell me what 
your sister had to say in her 
last letter. Did she write any¬ 
thing of Arthur? How is he 
doing in London? I should 
suppose that he would find it 
rather difficult to build up a 
practice in so large a city, 
where one cannot know many 
people except after a long time. 
Does he like his profession as 
well as he expected? 

O, yes; my sister wrote me such 
a nice letter. She wrote six¬ 
teen pages, and every line was 
full of news. Arthur does find 
it rather hard to establish him¬ 
self in London; but he has 
money enough to guarantee his 
expenses for nearly three years, 
so I think he will be able to 
stay until he does build up a 
practice. A physician's life is 
not an easy one, but Arthur is 
willing to work. 

What did your sister write about 
Florence? 

O, Florence is in San Francisco. 
She went there last month with 
her father. I think I told you 
that her father's health had 
been failing for more than a 


en peine, Guillaume. Pourquoi 
ne pas voir les choses du bon 
cote? Pourquoi vous imaginez- 
vous toujours des choses desa- 
greables? Tachez done d'etre 
un peu plus gai. 

J'essaierai, mais on ne change pas 
ainsi sa nature dans un instant. 
Simplement pour vous plaire, 
j'essaierai. 

Allons, parlons d'autre chose, 
Charles. Dites-moi ce que votre 
soeur vous a ecrit dans sa 
derniere lettre. A-t-elle ecrit 
quelque chose concernant 
Arthur? Que fait-il a Londres? 
Je suppose qu’il doit trouver un 
peu difficile de se creer une 
clientele dans une ville aussi 
grande, ou on ne peut pas con- 
naitre beaucoup de personnes 
avant un certain temps. Aime- 
t-il sa profession autant qu'il 
s'y attendait? 

Oh! oui; ma soeur m'a ecrit une 
si gentille lettre. File m’a ecrit 
seize pages, et chaque ligne 
etait pleine de nouvelles. 
Arthur trouve un peu dur de 
s’etablir a Londres, mais il a 
assez d'argent pour garantir ses 
depenses pendant pres de trois 
ans; done je crois qu'il pourra 
rester jusqu’au moment ou il se 
fera une clientele. La vie d'un 
medecin n’est pas facile, mais 
Arthur est decide a travailler, 

Qu’est-ce que votre soeur a ecrit a 
propos de Florence? 

Oh! Florence est a San-Fran- 
cisco. Elle y est allee le mois 
dernier avec son pere. Je 
pense que je vous ai dit que la 
sante de son pere devenait de 



44 


ANGLAIS 


§14 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION - (Continuees) 


year. The doctor told him that 
he ought to go to San Francisco. 

And your mother is in London 
with Arthur? 

No; Arthur is alone there. 
Mother went over to Ireland 
last week. She intends to 
spend three or four weeks there 
before going south to Italy and 
Egypt. Mother feels that she 
cannot go through another cold 
winter, so she is going to Cairo 
about the first of December. 
By that time, I expect to join 
her. 

How delightful! I wish I had 
time to go with you. I have 
never been there, and I am sure 
it must be very interesting. 

» 

But you can come if you will. 
Now that you have retired from 
business, I don’t see what can 
prevent you from enjoying 
yourself. You have worked 
hard all your life. 

No, I cannot go. I have to be in 
New York about that time. I 
have invested some of my 
money in a company there, and 
I shall be busy for several 
months. 


plus en plus mauvaise depuis 
une annee. Le docteur lui a 
dit qu’il devrait aller a San 
Francisco. 

Et votre mere est a Londres avec 
Arthur? 

Non; Arthur est seul. Ma mere 
est allee en Irlande la semaine 
derniere. Elle a l’intention 
d’y demeurer trois ou quatre se- 
maines avant d’aller dans le sud, 
en Italie et en Egypte. Marxian 
pense qu’elle ne pourrait pas 
supporter un autre liiver froid; 
et ainsi, elle ira au Caire vers 
le premier decembre. En ce 
moment, j’espere la rejoindre. 

Que c’est agreable! Que je 
voudrais avoir le temps d’aller 
avec vous! Je ne suis jamais 
alle la, et je suis sur que ce 
doit etre tres interessant. 

Mais vous pouvez venir si vous 
voulez. Maintenant que vous 
etes retire des affaires, je ne 
vois pas ce qui pourrait vous 
empecher d’avoir un peu de 
plaisir. Vous avez travaille 
dur toute votre vie. 

Non; je ne puis y aller. II faut 
que je sois a New-York vers ce 
temps-la. J’ai place de l’argent 
dans une compagnie, et je 
serai occupe pendant quelques 
mois. 


PHRASES USUELLES 


She has a fine complexion. 

Do you fear he will come? 

It was different in my time. 

I have seen nothing like it. 

I do not know what would have 
become of him. 


Elle a de belles couleurs. 
Craignez-vous qu’il ne vienne? 
C’etait different de mon tenjps. 

Je n’ai rien vu de semblable. 

Je ne sais pas ce qu’il serait 
devenu 







§14 


VINGT-HUITIEME LEQON 


45 


PHRASES USUELLES—(Continuees) 


He thinks no one ever does 
enough for him. 

All that lives must die. 

He is difficult to please. 

It is difficult to please him. 

I lose my appetite when I see 
him. 

As the saying is. 

So to say. 

That has nothing to do with it. 
He calls himself your friend. 

He was taken ill yesterday. 

What else? 

Do your best or your worst. 

How he looks! 

Am I in your way? 

It is fortunate that he knew noth¬ 
ing of it. 

He fancies himself to be a great 
doctor. 

It matters little. 

We shall not see that in our day. 

If you don’t like it, you may 
leave it. 

That is going too far. 

It is in the paper. 

He has nothing of his own. 

There are still twenty-five dollars 
due you. 

There is a time for all things. 

It is the old story again. 

He is a man as good as his word. 
Do not mind people’s talk. 

There is nothing like a good 
glass of water. 

I will let you have it at that price. 
That may be done. 

His life will not last longer than a 
year. 

He is the only friend I have. 

It is time that she should begin 
to study. 


II croit toujours qu’on n’en fait 
pas assez pour lui. 

Tout ce qui vit doit mourir. 

II est difficile a contenter. 

II est difficile de le contenter. • 

II me semble que j’ai dine quand 
je le vois. 

Comme on dit. 

Pour ainsi dire. 

Cela ne veut rien dire. 

II se dit votre ami. 

II est tombe malade hier. 

Quoi encore? 

Faites ce que vous voudrez. 

Comme le voila fait! 

Est-ce que je vous gene? 

C’est heureux qu’il n’en ait rien 
su. 

II s’imagine etre un grand doc- 
teur. 

II importe peu. 

Nous ne verrons pas cela de nos 
jours. 

Si vous ne l’aimez pas, vous 
pouvez le laisser. 

C’est aller trop loin. 

C’est dans le journal. 

11 n’a rien a lui. 

On vous doit encore vingt-cinq 
dollars. 

II y a temps pour tout. 

C’est toujours la vieille histoire. 

C’est un homrae de parole. 

Ne vous inquietez pas de ce qu’on 
dit. 

II n’y a rien de tel qu’un bon 
verre d’eau. 

Je vous le laisserai a ce prix. 

On peut le faire. 

11 ne vivra pas plus d’un an. 

C’est le seul ami que je possede. 

II est temps qu’elle commence a 
etudier. 




46 


ANGLAIS 


§14 


PHRASES USUELEES—(Continuees) 


Whatever he may say, people will 
not believe him. 

If I were in your place, I would 
not do that. 

She was dressed in black. 

My shoes are quite wet. 

What is agreeable is not always 
useful. 

I do not know that gentleman; he 
is a stranger to me. 

I must tell you something, but do 
not tell anybody. 

I took leave of him yesterday. 

I am in better health than when 
I lived in the city. 

Her dress is very becoming. 

They are engaged to be married. 

Who goes there? 

It is for you to see that there is 
nothing wanting. 

I have nothing to do with that. 

Call a carriage. 

He will sell at any price. 

A horse such as you want is not 
easily to be found. 

After that, I shall say no more. 

I told him that we should be 
there. 

I had better not speak about it. 

Hands off! 

Do not be uneasy. 

These poor people have not had 
work all winter. 

This matter is well worth think¬ 
ing of. 

He is working for his living. 

People die as they live. 

Were I to die for it. 

Nobody is to know it. 

That is not it. 

What business is that of yours? 

Mind your own business. 

My business is with you. 


Quoi qu’il dise, on ne le croira 
pas. 

Si j’etais a votre place, je ne 
ferais pas cela. 

Elle etait habillee de noir. 

Mes souliers sont tout mouilles. 

Ce qui est agreable n’est pas tou- 
jours utile. 

Je ne connais pas ce monsieur; 
c’est un etranger pour moi. 

II faut que je vous dise quelque 
chose, mais ne le dites a per- 
sonne. 

Je lui ai fait mes adieux hier. 

Je me porte mieux que quand je 
demeurais a la ville. 

Sa robe lui va bien. 

Ils sont fiances. 

Qui vive? 

C’est a vous a voir qu’il ne man¬ 
que rien. 

Je n’ai rien a voir a cela. 

Faites venir une voiture. 

II vendra a tout prix. 

Un cheval coniine vous en voulez 
un n’est pas facile a trouver.' 

Apres cela, je ne dirai plus rien. 

Je lui ai dit que nous serions la. 

J’aurais tort d’en parler. 

Ne touchez pas! 

Soyez tranquille. 

Ces pauvres gens n’ont pas tra- 
vaille de tout Phiver. 

Cette affaire vaut bien la peine 
d’y penser. 

II travaille pour gagner sa vie. 

Telle vie, telle mort. 

Dut-il m’en couter la vie. 

Personne ne doit le savoir. 

Ce n’est pas cela. 

De quoi vous melez-vous? 

Melez-vous de vos affaires. 

C’est a vous que j’ai affaire. 






14 


VINGT-HUITIEME LEQON 


47- 


PHRASES USUELRES —(Continuees) 


Go about your business. 

He had no call to do that. 

I made several calls today. 

I saw him when he stepped out of 
his carriage. 

“Many are called, but few are 
chosen.” 

Come what may! 

He can do that at small cost. 

At the lowest cash price. 

All our goods are subject to five 
per cent, discount. 

We cannot take anything off. 

By return of post. 

By next mail. 

I will remit before it falls due. 

As per advice. 

As you request. 

He promised me wonders. 

Take my word for it. 

It is a world to see. 

I got the worst of it. 

Let us suppose the worst. 

He replied that he could not come. 

He is not more than ten years old. 
She is younger than I by three 
years. 


Allez vous promener. 

II n’avait pas besoin de le faire. 

J’ai fait plusieurs visites aujour- 
d’hui. 

Je l’ai vu comme il descendait de 
voiture. 

II y aura beaucoup d’appeles mais 
peu d’elus. 

Advienne que pourra! 

II peut faire cela a peu de frais. 

Au plus bas prix. 

Nous faisons 5% d’escompte sur 
toutes nos marchandises. 

Nous ne pouvons faire aucune 
remise. 

Par retour du courrier. 

Par le prochain courrier. 

Je vous couvrirai avant l’eche- 
ance. 

Suivant avis. 

Selon vos desirs. 

II m’a promis monts et mer- 
veilles. 

Croyez-moi. 

C’est merveilleux. 

J’ai eu le dessous. 

Mettons les choses au pis. 

II a repondu quil ne pouvait pas 
venir. 

II n’a pas plus de dix ans. 

Elle est plus jeune que moi de 
trois ans. 


EXERCICE ECRIT 

Repondez en anglais aux questions suivantes. Ecrivez 
les questions et les reponses en double expedition, et 
envoyez-nous les deux copies pour correction, mais n enre- 
gistrez pas cette legon sur un cylindre vierge jusqu’a ce que 
nous vous ayons retourne une copie corrigee. 

1. Were you attentive when you were going to school? 

2. Do you admire fine scenery? 





48 


ANGLAIS 


14 


3. Do you sometimes camp out in the woods in summer? 

4. Have you an edition of Shakespeare’s works? 

5. Do you like to read history, or do you prefer novels? 

6. How high is your house? 

7. Are you deeply interested in the study of English? 

8. At what time do you have luncheon? 

9. Where are the Rocky Mountains? 

10. Can you translate French into English easily? 

11. Are you in good health? 

12. Are you a good musician? 

13. Are you acquainted with the cashier of the bank? 

14. Have you studied electricity? 

15. Do you like to sit on the lawn in summer, when it is 
very warm? 

16. Have you read the history of your country? 

17. Can you speak English fluently with your friends? 

18. What is the book you are reading entitled? 

19. Does your grocer give you a discount on the goods 
you buy from him? 

20. How is your house painted on the exterior? 

21. Have you ever seen New York? 

22. Do you live in a frame or a brick building? 

23. Have you grape vines in your garden? 

24. Do you like to study by correspondence? 

25. Is there a French paper printed in the city where you 
live? 


ANGLAIS 

(PARTIE 15) 


VINGT-NEUVIEME LECON 


CYLINDRE PIIONOGRAPHIQUE 


VOCABULAIRE 


adjoining, cittenant , voisin, 
qui touche 

tlie air-ship, le ballo7i 
the amusement, V amuse¬ 
ment 

the armor, Varmure, Farme- 
ment 

the armor plate, la plaque 
de blindage 
around, autour 
the art, Vart 
the artist, Vartiste 
the attention, Vattention 
to attract, attirer 
the award, la recompense 
to award, decerner 
the battle, la bat ail le 
the battleship, le cuirasse 
( vaisseau) 

the comment, le commen- 
taire 

to comment, commenter 
the crowd, la foule 
to devote, devouer , consacrer 
the display, F exposition, 
Fetal age 


to display, deployer, etaler 
to draw, tirer , dessiner , 
trainer 

Egyptian, Egyptien 
the engine, la machine a 
vapeur , la locomotive 
the stationary engine, la 

machine fixe 

the entertainment, 

F amusement, le divertisse¬ 
ment 

the exhibit, Fexposition 
to exhibit, montrer , exposer 
to expose, exposer 
the exposition, Fexposi¬ 
tion 

the fair, la Poire, Fexposition 
fair, beau 
the field, le champ 
the gallery, la galerie 
the general, le general 
in general, en general 
the grain, le grain 
grand, grand , grandiose , 
splendide 

the hall, la salle 


For notice of copyright , see page immediately following the title page 

a 15 






2 


ANGLAIS 


15 


YOCABULAIRE—(Continue) 


Hindoo, Hindon 
the implement, Vinstru- 
ment <Tagriculture 
India, Inde 
Japanese, Japonnais 
the judge, le juge 
to judge, juger 
the machine, la machine 
the machinery, les machines 
the masterpiece, le chef- 
d'oeuvre 

the model, le mocCele 
the nation, la nation 
the occasion, Voccasion 
Oriental, oriental , d’ Orient 
the palace, le palais 
Persian, Persan 
the place, la place , Vendroit 
to place, placer 
the plate, Vassiette 
the prize, le prix 


the power, la force , la puis¬ 
sance 

to propel, mouvoir , mettre 
en marche 

to reap, moissonner 
to require, exiger , falloir 
the science, la science 
the sculptor, le sculpteur 
the sculpture, la sculpture 
the section, la section 
the show, le spectacle , Vex¬ 
position 

to show, montre? 
solely, seulement, exclusive- 
ment 

to sow, semer 

stationary, fixe , stationnaire 
to thresh, battre {en grange) 
Turk, Turc 
the use, Vusage 
to winnow, vanner 


PHRASES ET 

I. c. s. 

English Record No. 29 

Did you say that you visited 
the exposition yesterday? 

Yes. You should have been 
there. 1 To me, it seemed 
to be the most complete 
world’s fair that we have 
yet had. Do you not en¬ 
joy going to exhibitions c?f 
this kind? The buildings 
devoted to science, to in¬ 
dustry, and to art were 


CONVERSATION 

i. c. s. 

Cylindre d'Anglais No. 29 

M’avez-vous dit que vous 
avez visite l’exposition 
hier? 

Oui. Oh! vous auriez du etre 
la. II m’a sembl£ que 
c’dtait l’exposition univer- 
selle la plus complete que 
nous ayons jamais eue. 
N’avez-vous pas de plaisir 
a aller aux expositions de 
cette sorte? Les batiments 
consacres a la science, a 





15 


VINGT-NEUVIEME LEQON 


3 


PHRASES ET CON VERS ATION-(Continuees) 


especially interesting. I 
am sure that you would 
have been pleased with 2 
the exhibit in the palace 
of art. The masterpieces 
•of the great living Italian 
and French painters were 
exposed in a long hall, or 
gallery, while in a room 
adjoining were to be seen 
the works of English and 
American artists. The 
grand prize was awarded 
to a French painter. 

Were the exhibits of sculp¬ 
ture in the same building? 

No; the sculptors had a build¬ 
ing solely for their own 
use. Their display was 
unusually good, and occa¬ 
sioned a great deal of com¬ 
ment. The judges who 
awarded the prizes said 
that, in general, their work 
was of a higher order than 
that of the painters. In 
the hall of science and in¬ 
dustry, I saw many of the 
latest machines. The sta¬ 
tionary engines, and the 
exhibitions of armor plate 
most attracted my atten¬ 
tion. There was a model 
of an American battleship 
and a model of a French 


l’industrie et aux arts sont 
sp£cialement interessants. 
Je suis sur que 1’exposition 
dans le palais des arts vous 
aurait beaucoup plu. Les 
chefs-d’oeuvre des grands 
peintres italiens et frangais 
etaient exposes dans une 
longue salle ou galerie, 
tandis que dans une salle 
attenante, on pouvait voir 
les oeuvres des artistes 
anglais et americains. Le 
grand prix a et 6 ddcernd a 
un peintre frangais. 

L’exposition de sculpture 
etait-elle dans le meme 
batiment? 

Non; les sculpteurs ont un 
batiment special pour leur 
propre usage. Leur ex¬ 
position etait reellement 
excellente, et a occasionne 
beaucoup de commentaires. 
Les juges qui decernaient 
les prix ont dit qu’en 
general leur travail etait 
d’un ordre superieur a 
celui des peintres. Dans 
la salle r£serv6e aux 
sciences et a 1’industrie, 
j’ai vu un grand nombre 
de machines nouvelles. 
Les machines fixes et l’ex- 
position des plaques de 
blindage ont surtout attire 
mon attention. II y avait 



4 


ANGLAIS 


15 


PHRASES ET COJSVERSATION-(Continuees) 


air-ship. There was a great 
crowd around both models 
all the time. But to me, 
the most wonderful things 
in the whole exhibition 
were the American agri¬ 
cultural machines. In 
America, they sow, 3 reap, 
thresh, and winnow their 
grains by machinery. Some 
of their field implements 
are drawn by horses, but 
many of them are propelled 
by steam power. 


I should like to have seen 
them. 4 Did you not visit 
the cafes? What kind of 
places of amusement did 
you see? 

Every nation has its own 
cafe. In the Oriental sec¬ 
tion they seem to be most 
crowded. I got my lunch 
and had an excellent cup 
of tea at the India cafd. 
The Hindoos certainly 
know how 5 to make good 
tea. And as for theaters 
and shows, every section 
has several. But the most 
interesting were those in 
the Egyptian, Persian, and 
Japanese sections. The 


un modele d’un cuirasse 
amdricain, et un modele 
d’un ballon frangais. II y 
avait foule autour de ces 
deux modeles toutle temps. 
Mais pour moi, les choses 
les plus merveilleuses dans 
toute l’exposition dtaient 
les machines agricoles 
amdricaines. En Ameri- 
que, on seme, on mois- 
sonne, on bat et on vanne 
le grain a 1’aide de ma¬ 
chines. Quelques-uns de 
ces instruments agricoles 
sont tirds par les chevaux, 
mais beaucoup se meuvent 
par la vapeur. 

J’aurais aimd les voir. 
N’avez-vous pas visite les 
cafes? Quelles sortes de 
places d’amusements avez- 
vous remarquees? 

Chaque nation a ses cafes 
propres. Dans la section 
orientale, il semble que la 
foule se presse davantage. 
J’ai ddjeund et j’ai pris une 
tasse d’excellent the au 
cafe hindou. Les Hindous 
savent certainement prd- 
parer de bon thd. Quant 
aux thdatres et aux diffd- 
rentes expositions, chaque 
section en a plusieurs. 
Mais les plus intdressants 
sont ceux des Egyptiens, 




15 


VINGT-NEUVIEME LEQON 

PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


5 


Turks too had a curious 
entertainment. We will 
both go there tomorrow 
and the next day if you 
like, for it requires 6 time to 
see everything. 


des Persans, et des Japon- 
nais. Les Turcs ont aussi 
de curieux divertissements. 
Nous irons tous deux de- 
main et le jour suivant, car 
il faut du temps pour tout 
voir. 


RE MAItQUES 

1. Le mot y comme pronom personnel, signifie a lui, 
a elle, a eux, h elles, a cela. On le traduit en anglais par un 
des pronoms him, her, them, it , selon le cas, precede de la 
preposition reclamee par le verbe ou l’adjectif. 

I was thinking of him all day, J’y pensais {a lui) toute la journee. 

Were yon thinking of her when she wrote to you? Y pensiez-vous 
(a elle) quand elle vous a ecrit ? 

I have seen their brothers, and I am thinking of them, J’ai vu leurs 
fr'eres, et j'y pense (d eux). 

I have seen their sisters, and I am thinking of them, J’ai vu leurs 
sceurs , et j'y pe7ise (d elles). 

I have received this letter, and I am going to answer it, J’ai requ 
cette lettre, et je vais y repondre. 

Mais le mot y peut representer un adverbe de lieu. Dans 
ce cas, il se traduit par here, there ou in: 

Are you going to school, John? —Yes; lam going there. Allez-vous 
a 1'ecole, Jean? — Oui; j'y vais. 

It is fine on the lawn, come here, Il fait bon stir la pelouse,venez-y. 

As he was passing the river, he slipped and fell in, Coniine il passait 
prds de la rividre, il glissa et y tomba. 

Y ne se traduit generalement pas en anglais dans les 
reponses elliptiques, et aussi dans le cas oh le verbe prin¬ 
cipal n’est pas exprime: 

Are you going to school?-I am, Allez-vous d Vecole?—J'y vais. 

Has he been here this morning?-He has, A-t-il He ici ce matin?- 
Il y a eti. 

He lives in Paris; I do not, Il demeure d Paris; je n'y demeure pas. 




6 


ANGLAIS 


15 


2. En anglais, comme en fragais, les adjectifs sont joints 
a leurs complements a l’aide de prepositions. Cependant, 
la preposition exigee par l’adjectif anglais ne correspond pas 
toujours a celle qui est exigee par l’adjectif frangais. Une 
liste detaillee des adjectifs et de la preposition qu’ils 
demandent sera donnee dans la grammaire. Pour le present, 
nous donnons seulement les adjectifs qui ont paru dans les 
legons prdcedentes. Considerez soigneusement les points 
suivants. 

1. Apres un adjectif ou un participe, si le complement 
est un infinitif, c’est ordinairement to et l’infinitif que Ton 
emploie. 

I am ready to go, Je suis prH a partir. 

Was he happy to see you? Etait-il heureux de vous voir? 

He was sorry to leave us, II Hait facht de nous quitter, 

I am glad to make your acquaintance, Je suis enchante de faire 
votre connaissance. 

I am glad to go, Je suis content de partir. 

2. Apres un adjectif exprimant un sentiment envers quel- 
qu’un c’est ordinairement to ou toward que l’on emploie. 

She is good to me, Elle est bonne pour moi. 

He is very kind to children, It est tris bon pour les enfants. 

3. Apres to be , etre, to seem, sembler, to appear , paraitre, 
employes a la forme impersonnelle, on fait aussi usage de to. 

It seems wrong to do that, II semble injuste de laire cela. 

It is difficult to make him go to school, II est difficile de le faire 
aller a V ecole. 

It appears useful to know English, II parait utile de savoir 
V anglais. 

4. Of s’emploie apres un grand nombre d’adjectifs qui 
prennent de en frangais. 

He is full of kindness, II est plein de bontf. 

His exercise is full of mistakes, Son exerciceest plein de fantes. 

5. From est la preposition demandee par un adjectif qui 
renferme une idee d’eloignement. 


§15 


VINGT-NEUVIEME LEQON 


7 


Are you far from the city? Etes-vous loin de la villef 

Were you long away from your house? Avez-vous ete longtemps 
absent de chez vousf 

6. Quelques adjectifs exprimant le contentement ou le 
mecontentement, ou une idee de quantite, demandent la 
preposition with. 

I am angry with him, Je snis fache contre lui. 

This apple tree is loaded with apples, Ce pornmier est charge de 
pommes. 

I am pleased with my gardener, Je suis content de mon jardinier. 

Are you satisfied with the servant you engaged lately? Etes-vous 
satis fail du domestique que vous avez engage dernierenient ? 

7. Enfin, la preposition at s’emploie apres les adjectifs 
et les participes suivants dans l’acception qui leur est don- 
nee ici. 

angry at, fache de good at, fort en 

astonished at, etonne de surprised at, surpris de 

3. Les verbes suivants qui ont paru dans les legons 
precedentes sont irreguliers. Nous en donnons ici les 
parties principales qui serviront a les conjuguer dans tous 
leurs temps. II est tres important de les etudier soigneuse- 
ment et d’en connaitre toutes les formes, car ils sont d’un 
usage frequent dans la conversation. 


Infinitif 

Imparfait 

Participe Passe 

to awake, tveiller 

I awoke 

awoke 

to bear, porter, produire 

I bore 

born, borne 

to bind, tier, relier 

I bound 

bound 

to choose, choisir 

I chose 

chosen 

to draw, dessiner , tirer 

I drew 

drawn 

to freeze, geler 

I froze 

frozen 

to mean, vouloir dire 

I meant 

meant 

to mistake, se tromper 

I mistook 

mistaken 

to shoot, tirer [un coup de fusil ) 

I shot 

shot 

to show, 7 nontrer 

I showed 

shown 

to sleep, dormir 

I slept 

slept 

to sow, semer 

I sowed 

sowed, sown 

to swear, jurer 

I swore 

sworn 


4. D’apres les legons precedentes, nous pouvons resumer 
ici les differentes manieres de rendre le pronom le. 


8 ANGLAIS §15 

1. Lorsque le represente un nom de personne, on le 
traduit par him, place apres le verbe. 

I see him, Je le vois. 

I do not know him, Je ne le connais pas. 

2. Lorsque le a le sens de cela , il se rend par it, et par 
that pour telle chose. 

He came yesterday, I know, II est venu hier , je le sals. 

I will not do that any more, Je ne le feral plus. 

3. Le employe pour eviter la repetition d’un verbe ou 
pour representer un adjectif dans le sens de ainsi, se rend 
par so en anglais. 

Louise is attentive; you are not so, Louise est attentive; vous ne 
Vites pas. 

You are rich; I am not so, Vous etes riche , je ne le suis pas. 

She is happy, —and she deserves to be so, Elle est heureuse—et elle 
nitrite de l'etre. 

4. C’est encore so que l’on emploie pour le accompagnant 
certains verbes qui expriment une operation de 1’esprit, 
comme, to hear , entendre, to hope, esperer, to do, faire, 
to think, croire, to say, dire, to suppose, supposer, etc. 

I do not think so, Je ne le crois pas. 

He will surely come, —I hope so, II viendra shrernent.—Je respire. 

I understand you; I will do so, Je vous cornprends; je le ferai. 

If you are sure, say so, Si vous etes stir, dites-le. 

5. Lorsque le se rapporte a un nom indetermine au 
singulier, on le traduit par one. 

I am not a teacher, but I should like to be one, Je ne suis pas pro- 
tesseur , mais j’ aimerais a 1'etre. 

He was a merchant, and is one still, II etait marchand et il I’est 
encore. 

6. S’il y a opposition entre les deux membres de la 
phrase on ne traduit pas le en anglais. 

He is a physician, I am not, Il est medecin , je ne le suis pas. 

He is a rich man, I am not, Il est riche, je ne le suis pas. 


§15 VINGT-NEUVI&ME LEgON 9 

7. Le remplagant un nom determine ne se rend pas en 
anglais. 

Are you Mr. Warren’s son? —No; I am not, Etes-vous le fils de M. 
Warren?—Non; je ne le suis pas. 

Are you the gentlemen I expected? —Yes; we are, Etes-vous les 
messieurs qve /’attendais ? — Oui; nous les sommes. 

8. Enfin le ne se traduit pas dans les reponses elliptiques, 
ni dans le second terme d’une comparaison. 

Are you a teacher? —Yes; I am. Etes-vous pro fesseur? — Oui; je le suis. 

Will you do this? —Yes; I will, Voulez-vous faire cecif—Oui; je le 
ferai. 

% 

Are they as rich as they say l — Sont-ils aussi riches qu'on le dit? 

He is happier now than he will ever be, II est plus heureux qu'il 
ne le sera jamais. 

5 . Avec les verbes to know , savoir, to learn , apprendre, 
to show , montrer, et to teach , enseigner, si l’on veut exprimer 
la maniere dont une chose se fait, on les fait suivre de 
l’adverbe de maniere how, comment. 

I know how to do this, Je sais faire cela. 

He learned how to read and write in English, II a appris a lire et a 
ecrire en anglais. 

I will show you how the thing is done, Je vous montrerai comment 
la chose est faite. 

He taught me how to write, II in'a enseignf a ecrire. 

6. Notre verbe falloir n’existe pas en anglais. Pour le 
traduire on se sert des expressions suivantes. 

1. Si falloir marque un besoin, on le rend par to want , ou 
to require: 

They require a house, II leur faut une maison. 

I want some money, II me faut de Vargent. 

2. En parlant d’une maniere generale, on emploie la forme 
impersonnelle de to require. 

It requires a great deal of money to travel around the world, II faut 
beaucoup d'argent pour faire le tour du monde. 

It will require time to build that railroad, II faudra du temps pour 
construire ce chemin de fer. 


10 


ANGLAIS 


§15 


It required a week to travel from here to New York, before the rail¬ 
road was built, II fallait une semaine pour aller d'ici a New-York 
avant la construction du chemin de fer. 

3. Si falloir marque une obligation pour une personne de 
faire une chose, on emploie to be obliged ou must. 

I am obliged to get up early, II faut que jeme leve de bonne heure. 

We are obliged to be at the office at eight, It faut que nous allions 
au bureau a huit heures. 

4. Si falloir est precede de ce que et suivi d’un infinitif, 
on le traduit par must suivi de la forme passive. 

He sees what must be done, II voit ce qu’il faut faire. 

I do not know what must be sold, Je ne sais pas ce qu'il faut vendre. 

What must be given for dinner? Que faut-il donner a diner? 


EXERCICE ORAE 

Why is your father so angry with you ? 

Pourquoi votre pere est-il si fdche contre vous? 

My dear Charles, I am so sorry for you. 

I am very thirsty for a glass of cold water. 

O, no, throw it away; it is good for nothing. 

What kind of man is he, do you ask? —He is good for 
nothing at all. 

You are very good to your sister. 

But he is not angry with me. 

It is good to be kind. 

It is right to be good. 

It is well to be rich. 

I am satisfied with his offer. 

Your father told me that he is satisfied with your present 
conduct. 

I am wet through. 

The plants are wet with dew. 

It is wet with rain. 

It is covered with dew. 

Now she is covered with a whole armful of flowers. 

We were anxious to know what had happened to you. 



§ 15 


VINGT-NEUVIEME LEQON 


11 


I am disappointed in you. 

Vous m'avez disappoints. 

She is very angry with me. 

He was especially grateful for the flowers. 

I am so sorry for you. 

1 am so thirsty for a drink of water. 

I believe I was never in my life so thirsty for a glass of 
wine. 

He is very good to her. 

Is he kind to you? 

I am not at all satisfied with him. 

I am anxious to see you. 

He is anxious on her account. 

I am anxious for his safety. 

You are too anxious for success. 

Are you not mistaken? 

Ne vous trompez-vous pas? 

We are always mistaken. 

I mistook you for my friend. 

They mistook us for their friends. 

You mistook me yesterday. 

Why will you always mistake me? 

We were mistaken; you were right. 

He will never admit that he is mistaken. 

I meant to do it for you. 

J'avais Vintention de le faire pour vous. 

Did you mean to do it, or was it an accident? 

Of course he meant to do it. 

They have long meant to injure him. 

He means to do right. 

All these things were meant to make him unhappy. 

They meant to honor him. 

It is freezing.-Did you say it froze last 
night? 

II gSle . — Avez-vous dit qu'il avait gele la nuit derniSre ? 

When it is cold, plants will freeze. 

Look out, or you will freeze your nose. 


12 


ANGLAIS 


§15 


If it freezes tonight, many poor people will suffer. 

It is frozen; I did not think it was so cold. 

If she had not frozen her feet, she could have continued 
her walk today. 

I froze my fingers yesterday. 

Let him freeze.— Never; you are a cruel man. 

He drew it easily. 

II V a tratne facilement . 

The carriage was drawn by an excellent team of horses. 
She drew many friends about her. 

They were drawn away from the theater. 

They drew the engine over rough roads for more than two 
miles. 

Can you draw this load up the hill? 

He draws the cab easily. 

If you clioose to go, how can I prevent you? 

Si vous etes decide a partir , comment puis-je vous en 
empicher? 

He chooses the best of everything. 

She has chosen to ride, what more is to be said? 

She chose her course, — why do you try to change her mind? 
Choosing new friends is not an easy thing to do. 

To choose well is to live happily. 

If more than two had been chosen, surely you would have 
been the third to be selected. 

They bound the trees together and threw 
them over the cliff. 

Its librent les arbres ensemble , et les jetbrent par dessus 
les rockers. 

Can you not bind it better? 

Bind it as fast as possible. 

We bound the horses together. 

A dozen pencils were bound in each package. 

She bound her hair with a silver thread. 

It has been bound there more than ten years 
I shall never bind them again; shall you? 


§15 VINGT-NEUVI&ME LEQON 13 

I am awake; why do you trouble me? 

Je suis eveille, pourquoi me dirangez-vous ? 

She is awake; do not keep calling' her. 

When I awoke, the sun was already high in the heavens. 
Awaking early, she went silently down-stairs. 

Were I awake when you came, I should have sent for you 
at once. 

Although I had awakened early, I did not hear you. 

He showed me a very pretty picture. 

II m'a montre un trbs joli tableau. 

Show me another ring, please. 

May I not show you my rose garden? 

The roses have been shown to many people. 

We were shown all over the garden. 

They will be shown to all who care to see them. 

He shows them to every one. 

Please to show us the latest books. 

I showed them a.11 I had for sale. 

All the grain is sown. 

Tout le bU est seme. 

In this country, the farmers sow at least three times a year. 
He sowed at least ten acres of corn. 

I am sowing this field with meadow grass. 

They sowed their rice in June. 

All their grains were sown early. 

Why do you shoot so low? 

Pourquoi tirez-vous si bas? 

He was shot through the head. 

The horse had been shot in the leg. 

Do you enjoy shooting? 

He shoots every day. 

Do you like to shoot? 

I have shot ten deer in my lifetime. 

I do not understand how you can shoot so much. 

The general’s horse was shot under him. 


14 


ANGLAIS 


15 


Why do you swear so much?—Your fathex* 
never swore at all. 

Pourquoi blasphemez-vous tantf— Votrepire ne blasphemait 
jamais. 

He swore to walk home with the girl. 

I heard him swear that he would not go to school. 

Every day he was to be heard swearing and talking 
loudly. 

Swearing is a practice to be condemned. 

I have sworn to have my revenge. 

They have sworn never to speak to him. 

She swore not to tell his secret. 

He swears altogether too much. 

Ho not mention her to me; I do not wish to 
think of hei*. 

Ne me parlez pas d'elle; je ne veux pas y penser. 

Do not be afraid of him; he cannot harm you. Why 
should you think of him? 

What do you think of it? 

I can never think of anything that I wish to remember. 

She cannot think of anything worth repeating. 

I could not think of his name. 

Why could you not think of that story yesterday? 

Tell us what you think of the new railroad. 

O, I see what is to be said in oi'der to make 
mattei's ldght. 

Oh! je vois ce qu'il faut dire pour arranger les choses. 

He knows what must be done to correct the whole affair. 
She told me that it must be attended to at once, if her 
father’s life was to be saved. 

We have heard that it must be reported tomorrow. Is it 
true? Can you tell us? 

However good she may be, she knows that such things 
cannot be said to others without danger to oneself. 

He always knows what is to be done. 


It must he done at once. 

II faut le faire immediatement. 


§15 


VINGT-NEUVIEME LEGON 


15 


O, yes; this must be done, even though all else fail. 

It must be done soon or it will be too late. 

The thing must be done tomorrow, or there will be 
trouble of serious kind. 

It must be done today; I promised that I would do it 
today. 

It must be done as soon as he comes home. 

It must be done; the telegram must be sent. 

I am obliged to you. 

Je vous suis oblige. 

O, Mr. Grant, can I ever tell you how obliged I am to you 
for your kindness? 

She said she was greatly obliged to him. 

I am very much obliged to you. 

I will tell her that you said you were much obliged to her. 
We are all exceedingly obliged to you, sir. 

They were obliged to go home early. 

II leur fallait retourner chez eux de bonne heure. 

I sent for a carriage; I was obliged to drive to the city. 
We were obliged to go by train; there was no trolley. 

On account of her mother’s illness, she was obliged to 
write that she could not come. 

He was obliged to leave school, on account of lack of funds. 
He was obliged to go away from home; his parents were 
too poor to support him. 

She was obliged to work; all her days were passed in 
sorrowing. 

It requires much time to write a good book. 

II taut beaucoup de temps pour ecrire un bon livre. 

It requires much hard work to learn to write well. 

It will require a great deal of money to buy that lot. 

It has already required more money than I could spare. 

It requires too many men; it cannot be done. 

It will require at least a dozen men and two yoke of oxen. 
It required the best traps in the market to catch all the 
mice in his house. 


16 


ANGLAIS 


§15 


But this is just the kind of house that she 
wants. 

Metis c’est justement cette sorte de maison qu'elle veut. 

He requires about ten feet more of land. 

She wants far more than I require. 

They want new suits for winter wear. 

Very well, Harry; but the children will require at least 
another dozen. 

Of course; what you say is true. But nevertheless they 
want much more than we do. 

When they have told you all they will want, I will tell you 
what I shall require. 

It was I who taught him how to study. 

Oest moi qui ltd ai enseignt a Hudier. 

Teach me how to win the fight. 

His mother taught him how to act. 

His mother taught him how to carry himself. 

We taught him how to speak English. 

They have taught many young people how to speak, read, 
and write English. 

She taught me how to paint. Do I not paint well? 

Her mother taught me how to sew. 

I can never learn how to handle these things. 

Je ne peux jamais apprendre a manier ces choses. 

She learned very quickly to do it. 

Why do you not learn how before you try? 

Will they ever learn how to do things right? 

She will never learn how to tell the truth. 

He learned how to study when a very small boy. 

Show me how to open this knife, please. 

Montrez-moi comment ouvrir ce couleau , s'it vous plait. 

Please to show the young lady how to open the window. 
Show him how to drive; he does not understand. 

Can I show you how to ring the bell? 

Mrs. Johnson, will you not be kind enough to show my 
friend how to make these delicious cakes? 


15 


VINGT-NEUVIEME LEgON 


17 


Show me how to do that. 

Show him how to do it. 

Show the young man how to ride. 

Show us how we are to get them. 

Do you know liow to telegraph. ? 

Savez-vous telegraphier? 

Do you know how to teach Spanish? 

Mrs. Jackson insists that you do not know how to study. 
I am told that you know how to play the piano. 

When we were driving through the Champs Elysees, we 
saw a man who knew how to cross the street with his eyes 
shut. 

Do you know how to please the young men? 

He knows how to win his father’s good will. 

She asked him to call at her house, but he 
said that he could not do so. 

Elle lui demanda de venir chez elle, mais il dit qu’il ne le 
pouvait pas. 

He might have done so, had he wished. 

Why do you do so? 

I wanted him to take it home, but he would not do so. 

He wished to buy it, but his father did not wish him to 
do so. 

We told him that he ought to believe it, but he said he did 
not think so. 

He will be delighted with your story. 

II sera enchants de votre histoire. 

Mrs. Jackson was pleased with her appearance. 

The mountains are most remarkable for their magnificent 
scenery. 

Her father was very angry with her. 

Although I heard them talking loudly, I could say nothing; 
I was very sorry for her. 

He is thirsty for money. 

Money, money, money,—he is always wanting money. 


18 


ANGLAIS 


15 


She is satisfied with her present pay. 

You are very good to me. 

I am wet with rain. 

Her head was covered with an enormous hat. 

Why is Mrs. Sloane so anxious to know what you are 
doing? 

The scene of the story is far removed from here. 

She is remarkable chiefly for her beauty. 

I am astonished at your progress in English. 

I am curious to see if you are right. 

I am happy to please you, sir. 

It gives me pleasure to serve you. 

I am pleased with all that you say. 

He is absent from town today. 

O, yes, it is far removed from here. 

Her eyes filled with tears. 

All the baskets are filled with roses. 

She told me to say that she was delighted with you. 

The city is noted for its magnificent buildings. 

O, she is noted for her wonderful voice. 

Are you angry at me? 

You are very good at figures, are you not? 

It is remarkable for its varied industries. 

I am suprised at you. 

Are you astonished at what I have told you? 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION 


What are you going to do this 
afternoon? Have you anything 
special in mind? 

No; nothing at all. Might we 
not go over to the exposition? 

Yes; of course. It is not too 
hot, and we shall have a de¬ 
lightful time. We can have tea 
at the Hindoo restaurant. Do 
you not like tea? 


Qu’allez-vous faire cet apres-midi? 
Avez-vous quelque chose de 
special dans l'esprit? 

Non; rien du tout. Ne pour- 
rions-nous pas aller jusqu’a 
1’exposition? 

Oui; certainement. II ne fait pas 
trop chaud, et nous passerons 
un temps agreable. Nous pou- 
vons prendre du the au restau¬ 
rant Hindou. N’aimez-vous 
pas le the? 




§15 


VINGT-NEUVIEME LECON 


19 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


Yes. Come, then, let us take 
this car. By changing cars at 
Central Park we can go directly 
to the exhibition grounds and 
it will not be necessary to take 
a cab. 

How much is the admission? 

Twenty-five cents, I think. But 
no matter, I have money enough. 
I can lend you all that you are 
likely to want. 

The fountains are beautiful, are 
they not? I suppose you have 
seen them in the evening when 
the colored lights are turned 
on? It is wonderful,— all that 
can be done with electricity. 

Yes; I rented a chair one evening 
and sat out here and watched 
the fountains for more than an 
hour. The French orchestra 
was playing and the place was 
crowded with people of all 
nations. The French orchestra 
is one of the best that I have 
heard here. 

It is very good indeed. O, here 
is the palace of arts. Shall we 
go in? 

As you wish. Here is the en¬ 
trance. O, this must be the 
classical room. See, there are 
some of the old German and 
Italian masters. Yes, and here 
are some of the works of 
English and French painters. 
These must have been borrowed 
from the public museums and 
other private collections of Paris. 
Through this door, I suppose 
we shall find the exhibits of 


Oui. Venez, alors; prenons ce 
tramway. En changeant au 
Parc Central, nous pouvons 
aller directement sur le terrain 
de Pexposition et nous n’aurons 
pas a prendre de fiacre. 

Combien coute V entree? 

Vingt-cinq “cents,” je crois. 
Mais cela ne fait rien; j’ai 
assez d’argent. Je puis vous 
preter tout ce dont vous aurez 
probablement besoin. 

Les fontaines sont magnifiques, 
n’est-ce pas? Je suppose que 
vous les avez vues le soir quand 
les lampes coloriees sont allu- 
mees ? C ’est merveilleux tout ce 
qu’on peut faire avec l’elec- 
tricite. 

Oui; j’ai loue une chaise un .soir; 
je me suis assis ici, et j’ai re¬ 
garde les fontaines pendant 
plus d’une heure. L’orchestre 
frangais jouait. et des habitants 
de toutes les nations se pres- 
saient en cet endroit. L’or¬ 
chestre frangais est un des 
meilleurs que j’aie jamais en- 
tendus ici. 

II est vraiment bon. Oh! voici 
le palais des arts. Entrons- 
nous? 

Comme vous voudrez. Voici l’en- 
tree. Oh! ceci doit etre la salle 
des classiques. Voyez, voila 
quelques oeuvres des vieux 
maitres allemands et italiens. 
Oui, et en voici des peintres 
anglais et frangais. On a du 
les emprunter des musees et 
d’autres collections privees de 
Paris. Par cette porte je sup¬ 
pose que nous trouverons 1’ex¬ 
position des peintres modernes. 




20 


ANGLAIS 


15 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


modern painters. Shall we go 
in? Are you interested? 

By all means. What an immense 
collection! The prizes are not 
yet awarded, are they? 

To be sure they are. See, this 
picture is marked ‘ ‘ Grand Prix. ’’ 
It is by an American painter. 
There are few great American 
artists. In America men devote 
themselves mostly to science or 
to industry. 

Yes; America has accomplished 
more in science than in art. 
The telephone, the telegraph, 
the railroads, and the armor- 
clad battleships were first con¬ 
structed in America. 

This is the sculptors’ hall. How 
different is modern sculpture 
from the ancient! And yet all 
modern sculptors follow the 
principles established by the 
ancient masters. Is not that a 
beautiful statue? 

The building adjoining is the 
building of science and indus¬ 
try Shall we spend a short 
time there? Do you care to 
look at some of the latest in¬ 
ventions, or are you not inter¬ 
ested in machinery? 

Yes, indeed I am, but it is late 
already, and I begin to be 
thirsty. Let us go into one of 
the cafes, and tomorrow we 
will come again and visit this 
section. 


Desirez-vous entrer? Cela vous 
interesse-t-il? 

Mais certainement. Quelle im¬ 
mense collection! Les prix 
n’ont pas encore ete decernes, 
n’est-ce pas? 

Oh! certainement, ils le sont. 
Voyez, ce tableau est marque 
‘'Grand Prix.” II a ete peint 
par un artiste Americain. II y 
a peu de grands peintres Ameri- 
cains. En Amerique, les hom¬ 
ines se consacrerit plutot aux 
sciences ou a l’industrie. 

Oui; P Amerique a plus accompli 
en science qu’en art. Le tele- 
phone, le telegraphe, les che- 
mins de fer et les vaisseaux 
cuirasses out d’abord ete con- 
struits en Amerique. 

Voici la salle de la sculpture. 
Que la sculpture moderne est 
differente de celle des anciens, 
et, cependant, tous les sculp- 
teurs modernes suivent les 
principes etablis par les maitres 
anciens. N’est-ce pas la une 
belle statue? 

Le batiment voisin est consacre 
aux sciences et a Pindustrie. 
Voulez-vous que nous y pas¬ 
sions quelque temps? Aimez- 
vous a voir quelques-unes des 
plhs nouvelles inventions, ou 
n’avez-vous aucun interet dans 
les machines? 

Oui, vraiment, mais il est deja 
tard, et je commence a avoir 
soif. Entrons dans un de ces 
cafes, et demain nous revien- 
drons pour visiter cette section. 




15 


VINGT-NEUVIEME LEQON 


21 


PHRASES USUELLES 


Whatever is worth doing at all, is 
worth doing well. 

Whether you go or stay is of little 
account. 

What a man puts into his head 
cannot be stolen from him. 

The world will not inquire who 
you are. It will ask, “What 
can you do?” 

This is important if true. 

He looks as if he were tired. 

Speak so as to be understood. 

You are the man I want to see. 

You read too fast. 

I am much better now; I hope to 
be quite well soon, but I must 
not walk too far today. 

Unless it rains, we shall all go. 

Do not lose a second. 

He rooms on the floor above. 

We must have walked over six 
miles. 

Since then he has done better. 

She is one of the best mothers 
that ever lived. 

God helps them that help them¬ 
selves. 

They go by steamer. 

He says that he will be back in 
an hour; but we cannot wait 
for him. 

The king is dead! Long live the 
king! 

When shall I see you again? 

He goes to town every Saturday. 

I will make the pleasure last 
long. 

r have eaten nothing since this 
morning. 


Ce qui vaut la peine d’etre fait 
vaut la peine d’etre bien fait. 

Que vous partiez ou que vous 
restiez est de peu d’importance. 

Ce qu’un homme met dans sa 
tete ne peut pas lui etre vole. 

Le monde ne demandera pas ce 
que vous etes, mais ce que vous 
pouvez faire. 

Ceci est important si c’est vrai. 

II a l’air fatigue. 

Parlez de maniere a ce qu’on 
vous comprenne. 

C’est vous que je veux voir. 

Vous lisez bien trop vite. 

Je suis beaucoup mieux; j’espere 
etre tres bien en peu de temps, 
mais je ne dois pas marcher 
trop loin aujourd’hui. 

Nous irons tous, a moins qu’il ne 
pleuve. 

Ne perdez pas une minute. 

11 a une chambre a l’etage au- 
dessus. 

Nous avons du marcher plus de 
six milles. 

Depuis, il a mieux fait. 

C’est une des meilleures meres 
qui aient jamais vecu. 

Aide-toi, le Ciel t’aidera. 

Ils prennent le bateau a vapeur. 

II dit qu’il sera de retour dans 
une heure; mais nous ne pou- 
vons pas l’attendre. 

Le roi est mort! Vive le roi! 

Quand vous reverrai-je? 

II va en ville tous les samedis. 

Je ferai durer le plaisir longtemps. 

Je n’ai rien mange depuis ce 
matin. 




22 


ANGLAIS 


§15 


PHRASES HSUEEEES—(Continuees) 


A man should eat to live, not 
live to eat. 

She is satisfied with her lot. 

He is happier than a king. 

Lend me the best book in your 
library. 

This picture pleases me more 
than the other. 

She has done her duty. 

Do not come without them. 

Every one works for himself. 

Every one lives according to his 
own way. 

Do not do to others what you 
would not wish others to do to 
you. 

Give me his address and yours. 

My sister enjoys good health. 

I have chosen it out of a thousand. 

Receive her kindly. 

You shall see what I can do. 

Here are three thousand francs, 
will that be enough? 

We know nobody in this neigh¬ 
borhood. 

1 would know her among a 
thousand. 

He was a man who feared 
nothing. 

He tells all he knows. 

Everything he does, he does well. 

You ask too much for your 
goods. 

He is a man who has read a great 
deal. 

Say that again, please. 

After having said that, he held 
his tongue. 

Fathers live again in their chil¬ 
dren. 

You will go before, and he, after. 

Sit on this sofa, you will be more 
comfortable than on that chair. 


II faut manger pour vivre, et non 
vivre pour manger. 

Elle est contente de son sort. 

II est plus heureux qu’un roi. 

Pretez-moi le meilleur livre de 
votre bibliotheque. 

Ce tableau me plait plus que 
l’autre. 

Elle a fait son devoir. 

Ne venez pas sans eux. 

Chacun travaille pour soi. 

Chacun vit a sa maniere. 

Ne faites pas a autrui ce que vous 
ne voudriez pas qu’on vous fit. 

Donnez-moi son adresse et la 
votre. 

Ma soeur jouit d’une bonne sante. 

Je l’ai choisi entre mille. 

Recevez-la avec bonte. 

Vous verrez ce que je sais faire. 

Voici trois mille francs; cela 
suffira-t-il? 

✓ 

Nous ne connaissons personne 
dans ce voisinage. 

Je la connaitrais entre mille. 

C’etait un homme qui ne craignait 
rien. 

II dit tout ce qu’il sait. 

Tout ce qu’il fait, il le fait bien. 

Vous surfaites vos marchandises. 

C’est un homme qui a beaucoup 
lu. 

Repetez, s , il vous plait. 

Apres avoir dit cela, il retint sa 
langue. 

Les peres revivent dans leurs 
enfants. 

Vous irez devant et lui apres. 

Asseyez-vous sur ce sofa; vous 
serez mieux que sur cette chaise. 




§15 


VINGT-NEUVIEME LEgON 


23 


PHRASES USUELLES—(Continuees) 


Of all great writers, he is the one 
I like best. 

Beef sells at eighteen cents a 
pound. 

1 will pay you in gold. 4 

That kind of work does not please 
anybody. 

God said: Let there be light, and 
there was light. 

The pound sterling is worth about 
twenty-five francs. 

He has made astonishing prog¬ 
ress. 

He is fit for anything. 

I am pleased with his answer. 

I am very glad that you have 
returned. 

She is taller than her sister by a 
whole head. 

Take them, or leave them, it is 
all one to me. 

What I wish most, is to come and 
see you. 

Here is a lady whom you know. 

Whom shall we invite? 

I thank you for the trouble you 
have taken. 

A woman cannot always be young 
and pretty. 

When a woman is handsome she 
is not ignorant of it. 


De tous nos grands ecrivains, 
c’est celui que j’aime le mieux. 

Le boeuf se vend dix-huit cents la 
livre. 

Je vous paierai en or. 

Ce genre d’ouvrage ne plait pas a 
tout le monde. 

Dieu dit: Que la lumiere soit, et 
la lumiere fut. 

La livre sterling vaut environ 
vingt-cinq francs. 

II a fait des progres etonnants. 

II est propre a tout. 

Sa reponse me plait. 

Je suis bien aise que vous soyez 
de retour. 

Elle est plus grande que sa soeur 
de toute la tete. 

Prenez-les ou laissez-les, cela 
m’est egal. 

Ce que je desire le plus, c’est 
d’aller vous voir. 

Voici une dame que vous con- 
naissez. 

Qui inviterons-nous? 

Je vous remercie de la peine que 
vous avez prise. 

On n’est pas toujours jeune et 
jolie. 

Quand une femme est jolie, elle 
ne Pignore pas. 


EXERCICE PHONOGRAPHIQUE 

Aussitot que vous aurez regu votre copie de la vingt- 
huitieme legon corrigee par nous, enregistrez-la sur un 
cylindre vierge et envoyez-le-nous en suivant les directions 
donnees precedemment. 





24 


ANGLAIS 


15 


TRENTIEME LECON 


CYLINDRE PHONOGIIAPHIQUE 


VOCABULAIRE 


tlie adventure, Vaventure 
altogether, tout a fait 
amen, ainsi soit-il 
the backwoods, le fond des 
bois 

the bay, la baie 
the bear, Fours 
the beaver, le castor 
comparatively, co?npara- 
tivement 

the compass, le compas, la 
boussole 

the conduct, la conduite 
to conduct, conduire 
daily, quotidien 
the deer, le cerf 
to deliver, delivrer 
to describe, decrire 
the description, la descrip¬ 
tion 

to dig, creviser 

distant, eloigne 

the district, le district 

droll, drble 

the elk, Velan 

the evil, le mal 

the expedition, Vexpedition 


the family, la famille 
the fight, le combat 
to fight, se battre 
the forest, la for'et 
to forgive, pardonner 
the fortune, la fortune 
frequently, drequemment 
the grandfather, le grand- 
pere. 

to hallow, sanctifier 
the heaven, le Ciel 
humorous, plaisant , spiri- 
tuel 

intent, fort applique 
the king, le roi 
the kingdom, le royawne, le 
regne 

to lead , conduire 
the lord, le seigneur 
the lumber, les bois de con¬ 
struction 

the lumberman, le bflcheron 
the majority, la majorite 
the miner, le mineur 
the north, le no7'd 
the ocean, Vocean 
pacific, pacifique 





15 TRENTIEME LEQON 25 

VOCABULA1 RE— (Continue) 


pitiful, pitoyable, digne de 
pi tie 

the prayer, la priere 
quaint, original, singulier 
quickly, vite, rapidement 
the region, la region 
the road, le chemin 
ruined, rume 
the shore, la rive, la plage 
the south, le sud 
southern, du sud 
strange, Strange 
to suffer, souffrir 
the temptation, la tentation 
terribly, terriblement 


thine, le tien 
thou, tu 

through, a travers . 
thy, ton 

the trail, la piste, la trace 
to trap, tendre une trappe 
the trapper, le trappear 
the trespass, Vinjure, l'of¬ 
fense 

to trespass, offenser 
the tribe, la tribu 
the village, le village 
the west, Vouest 
the will, la volonte, le testa¬ 
ment 


PHRASES ET 

/. c. s. 

English Record No. 30 

When we children were 
younger, grandfather 1 used 
to tell us stories about the 
lumber and mining camps 
of Canada. 

I did not know that your 
grandfather ever was a 
lumberman or a miner. 

He was neither; but for 
many years he was a trap¬ 
per, and his expeditions 
often led 2 him through 3 the 
forests into distant mining 
regions and lumber dis¬ 
tricts. There, while trap¬ 
ping for beaver or hunting 
the elk and the deer, he 


CONVERSATION 

/. c s. 

Cylindre d’Anglais No. 30 

Quand nous etions plus 
jeunes, grand-pere nous 
racontait souvent des his- 
toires sur les camps des 
bucherons et des mineurs 
du Canada. 

Je ne savais pas que votre 
grand-pere eut jamais ete 
bucheron ou mineur. 

II n’etait ni l’un ni l’autre, 
mais pendant bien de«s 
annees, il etait trappeur 
et ses expeditions le con- 
duisaient souvent a travers 
les forets jusqu’auxregions 
minieres tres eloignees. 
La, pendant qu’il posait 
ses trappes pour le castor. 





26 


ANGLAIS 


§15 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


had many strange adven¬ 
tures. He has frequently 
been to the southern shores 
of Hudson Bay, and even 
farther north. He has 
been as far west as the 
Pacific Ocean. Some time 
you must ask him to tell 
you about his fight with a 
bear in the backwoods of 
Ontario. 


I will, —the next time I see 
him. But now, do* tell me 
something about a trap¬ 
per’s life in those early 
days. It 8 must have been 
very difficult to get from 
place to place. There 
could have been no roads 
then. Did your grand¬ 
father have to find his way 
entirely by the compass? 

O, no; not altogether. There 
were many Indian trails 
through the woods, and it 
was an easy matter to find 
Indian guides who would 
conduct him from one tribe 
to another. You should 
hear 8 him describe the In¬ 
dian villages. As you 


ou chassait l’elan et le cerf, 
il eut beaucoup d’etranges 
aventures. II a 6te 
frequemment jusqu’aux 
rives du sud de la Baie 
d’Hudson, et meme plus 
loin vers le nord. A 
l’ouest il a ete jusqu’a 
l’Ocean Pacifique. Un 
jour, vous devriez lui de- 
mander de vous raconter 
le combat qu’il eut a sou- 
tenir contre un ours dans 
le fond des forets d’On- 
tario. 

Je le lui demanderai la pro- 
chaine fois que je le verrai. 
Mais maintenant, parlez- 
moi de la vie du trappeur 
de ce temps-la. Ce devait 
etre bien difficile d’aller 
ainsi de place en place. 
Il ne devait pas y avoir 
de routes alors. Est-ce 
que votre grand-pere devait 
trouver son chemin en- 
tierement a l’aide de la 
boussole? 

Oh! non, pas entierement. Il 
y avait beaucoup de pistes 
a travers leS bois, et c’etait 
chose facile de trouver des 
guides indiens qui le con- 
duisaient d’une tribu a une 
autre. Vous devriez 
l’entendre decrire les vil¬ 
lages indiens. Comme 



§15 


27 


TRENTIEME LECON 

PHRASES ET CONVERSATION—(Continuees) 


know, he has a very quaint 
and droll manner, and 
always sees the humorous 
side of things. His de¬ 
scriptions of Indian fam¬ 
ilies and villages are very 
amusing. Many times he 
has said to me that the 
most pitiful things he has 
ever seen were to be found, 
not among the Indians, but 
among the poor miners in 
the west. There were hun¬ 
dreds of them, all intent 
on digging gold and ma¬ 
king their fortunes quickly. 
Of course but compara¬ 
tively few of them suc¬ 
ceeded, while the great 
majority lost all they had. 
Many of them suffered 
terribly, and many were 
utterly ruined. 


I must ask him to tell me 
about it. 


The Lord's Prayer 

Our Father, who art 7 in 
heaven, hallowed be thy 
name. Thy kingdom come. 
Thy will be done on earth 
as it is in heaven. Give us 
this day our daily bread, and 


vous s a v e z, il a une 
maniere originale et drole 
de raconter, et il voit 
toujours le cote plaisant de 
toutes les choses. Sa des¬ 
cription des families et 
des villages indiens est 
tres amusante. Il m’a dit 
bien des fois que les choses 
les plus dignes de pitie 
qu’il ait jamais vues ne se 
passaient pas parmi les 
indiens, mais parmi les 
pauvres mineurs de l’ouest 
Il v en avait des centaines, 
tous fort occupes a creuser 
pour chercher de l’or et a 
faire leurs fortunes rapide- 
ment. Naturellement, bien 
peu reussissaient pendant 
que la grande majorite 
d’entre eux avaient perdu 
tout ce qu’ils possedaient. 
Beaucoup souffraient d’une 
fagon terrible, et 6taient 
enti&rement ruines. 

Il faut que je lui demande de 
m’en parler. 


L' Oraison Dominicale 

Notre Pere, qui etes aux 
Cieux, que votre nom soit 
sanctifie, que votre r&gne 
arrive, que votre volonte 
soit faite sur la terre 
comme elle est aux Cieux. 






28 


ANGLAIS 


15 


PHRASES ET CONVERSATION- (Continuees) 


forgive us our trespasses 
as we forgive those who 
trespass against us. And 
lead us not into temptation; 
but deliver us from evil. 

Amen. 


Donnez-nous aujourd’hui 
notre pain quotidien, et 
pardonnez-nous nos of¬ 
fenses comme nous par- 
donnons a ceux qui nous 
ont offenses, et ne nous 
laissez pas succomber a la 
tentation, mais ddlivrez- 
nous du mal. 

Ainsi soit-il. 


REMARQUES 

1. Remarquez les diff^rentes expressions que le mot 
grayid peut former en se joignant aux noms d6signant les 
diff^rentes relations des personnes composant une famille: 


grandfather, grand-pire 
great grandfather, grand-grand- 
pire 

grandmother, grand' mire 

great grandmother, grand-grand' 
mere 


grandchild, petit-fils, petite-fille 
granddaughter, petite-fille 

great granddaughter, arriire- 
petite-fille 
grandson, petit-fils 


2. Les verbes suivants sont irr6guliers. Etudiez soigneu- 
sement les formes suivantes qui vous permettront de les 
conjuguer dans tous les temps. 


Infinitif 
to clothe, vttir 
to dig, creuser 
to fight, se battre 
to forget, outlier 
to forgive, pardonner 
to lead, mener, conduire 


Imparfait 
I clothed, clad 
I'dug 
I fought 
I forgot 
I forgave 
I led 


Participe Passe 
clothed, clad 
dug 
fought 
forgotten 
forgiven 
led 


3. Le complement indirect ou circonstanciel d’un verbe 
se joint a ce verbe a l’aide de differentes prepositions. Les 
cas les plus importants sont donnes ci-apres. 

1. La preposition to sert a marquer le but vers lequel on' 
tend, et from le point d’ou l’on part. 




§15 TRENTIEME LEQON 29 

I sent a letter to your brother yesterday, J'ai envoye une lettre 
a votre frere hier. 

I received a letter from him a few days ago, J'ai regie une lettre de 
lui it y a quelques jours. 

2. Quelques verbes, entre autres, to admit , achnettre, to 
beg , demander, prier, to think , penser, etc. prennent la prepo¬ 
sition of. 

This matter admits of no criticism, Cette affaire n'admet pas de 
critique. 

I begged of him not to do that, Je le priai de ne pas faire cela. 

I did not think of that matter until the next day, Je ne pensai pas a 
cette affaire jusqu’au lendemain. 

3. Les verbes to depend , dependre de, to dine , diner de, to 
breakfast , dejeuner, to hnpose , en imposer, etc., demandent la 
preposition on ou upon. 

He depends on his father for a living, It depend de son phre pour 
vivre. 

We dined upon fish, Nous avons dine de poisson. 

I do not wish to impose upon you, Je ne veux pas vous en imposer. 

4. To rejoice , se rejouir de, to wo?ider, s’etonner de, et 
quelques autres verbes demandent la preposition at devant 
un complement indirect. 

I rejoice at his success, Je me rejouis de ses succes. 

I wonder at his success, Je m'Honne de ses succes. 

5. Le verbe to ask , demander, se construit avec la prepo¬ 
sition of devant le nom de la personne qui est complement 
indirect si un complement direct suit le verbe; dans le cas 
oil le nom de la personne est place le premier, on l’emploie 
sans preposition, et la preposition for se place devant le nom 
de la chose. 

I asked a French book of your' 

father, J'ai demands un livre frangais 

I asked your father for a French a votre plre. 
book, 

We asked an interview of him,l Nous lui avons demande une 

We asked him for an interview, \entrevue. 



30 


ANGLAIS 


§15 


4. La forme emphatique s’emploie a l’imperatif en 
plaQant do devant la forme reguliere. 

Do tell me what you want, Dites-moi ce qae vous votilez. 

Do let us go, Laissez-nouspartir. 

5. Lorsque ce se rapporte a tin nom precedemment 
enonce, il est pronom personnel en anglais, et se traduit 
comme tel. 

I have seen your brother; he is a very kind man, J'ai vu votre 
fr'Cre; c'est un homme plein de bonte. 

I met her sister yesterday; she is a very amiable person, J'ai 
rencontre sa sceur hier; c'est tme personne Iris aimable 

Si le substantif n’est pas precedemment enonce, on traduit 
ce par it. 

It is they who told me that, Ce sont eux qui m'ont dit cela. 

It is he who came first, C'est lui qui est venu le premier. 

6. Apres les verbes to feel, sentir, to hear , entendre, to 
see, voir, l’infinitif qui sert de complement direct en frangais 
se traduit de trois manieres en anglais. 

1. Par l’infinitif sans la preposition to si l’action exprimee 
par cet infinitif ne dure plus. 

I saw them play, Je les at vus jotter. 

I heard them say that they would come at three, Je leur ai entendu 
dire qu'ils viendraient a trois heures. 

2. Par le participe present si Paction exprimee durait 
encore. 

I see them playing on the lawn, Je les vots jotter sur la pelouse. 

I hear her singing in the next room, Je t’entends chanter dans la 
chantbre voisine. 

3. Par le participe passe, si l’on a en vue la chose faite 
plutot que la personne qui la fait. 

I saw a horse killed, J'ai vu tuer tin cheval. 

7. Jusqu’ici, nous n’avons pas employe la deuxieme per¬ 
sonne du singulier d’un verbe. Comme nous l’avons deja 
dit, elle n’est jamais employee en anglais, excepte dans la 


§15 


TRENTIEME LECON 


31 


poesie, dans la bible ou en s’adressant a la divinitd. La 
terminaison si caracterise cette deuxieme personne. 
Remarquez les differentes formes suivantes: 


Infinitif 

Present 

Imparfait 

to do, faire 

thou dost 

thou didst 

to be, etre 

thou art 

thou wast, wert 

to have, avoir 

thou hast 

thou hadst 


thou wilt 

thou wouldst 


thou shalt 

thou shouldst 


thou mayst 

thou mightest 


thou canst 

thou couldst 

to love, aimer 

thou lovest • 

thou lovedst 

Les pronoms employes dans le style poetique ou biblique 

la deuxieme personne du singulier sont les suivants. 


Singulier 

Pluriel 

hi 

thou 

ye 

ton 

thy 

your 

le tien 

thine 

yours 

te, toi 

thee 

ye 

Ces formes etaient 

les seuls employees 

a l’origine de la 


langue. 

Dans le vieux style anglais, on trouve beaucoup 
cl’exemples dans lesquels Vs du verbe a la troisieme per¬ 
sonne du singulier est remplace par la terminaison eth. 

Out of the abundance of the heart the mouth speaketh, Quand le cceur 
est plein , il deborde. 


DIFFERENCES ENTRE EA EANGITE FRAN C AISE 
ET EA LANGUE ANGEAISE 

8. En etudiant ces legons de conversation, vous avez du 
remarquer que les deux langues presentent de grands points 
de similarity, et qu’en general la construction de la phrase 
est la meme en anglais qu’en frangais. Cependant, vous 
avez aussi du etre frappe par quelques points de dis¬ 
semblance dont les plus saillants sont resumes dans les 
remarques suivantes. 

1. Si nous exceptons les mots d’origine etrangere intro- 
duits dans la langue anglaise et qui n’ont pas encore ete 



32 


ANGLAIS 


15 


anglicises, nous remarquons que les signes orthographiques, 
tels que les accents, la cddille; etc. ne sont pas employes en 
anglais. 

2. Les noms des mois, des jours, les adjectifs derivant 
de noms propres s’6crivent avec une lettre majuscule en 
anglais, tandis que ces memes mots prennent une lettre 
minuscule en frangais. 

3. La langue anglaise est beaucoup plus elliptique que 
la langue frangaise. Ceci est specialement vrai dans le cas 
de la reponse en anglais. Alors que dans notre langue la 
reponse doit toujours se composer du verbe et de ses com¬ 
plements, ou de pronoms representant ces complements, on 
supprime generalement le verbe et les pronoms dans la 
r6ponse en anglais, et il suffit de repdter l’auxiliare employe 
dans la question, ou l’une des formes / do , I do not , / did, 
I did not. De plus, les pronoms relatifs et la conjonction 
que entre autres, s’omettent frequemment en anglais, surtout 
dans le style familier. 

4. II n’y a en anglais qu’une seule conjugaison des 
verbes; la seule difference entre les verbes reguliers et les 
verbes irreguliers est que ces derniers ne prennent pas la 
terminaison ed a l’imparfait ou au participe pass6, et que 
souvent dans ces deux formes le radical du verbe change. 

5. L’auxiliare to have, avoir, est seul employe dans les 
temps composes des verbes actifs, neutres ou reflechis en 
anglais. 

6. Le tutoiement n’est pas admis en anglais. Seuls les 
Quakers en font usage. La deuxieme personne du singulier 
ne s’emploie que dans la poesie, le langage dleve ou en 
s’adressant a Dieu. 

7. La forme passive d’un verbe est d’un usage beau- 
coup plus frequent en anglais qu’en frangais. Dans la 
plupart des cas, nous traduisons cette forme passive en 
frangais par on et la forme active, ou par la forme reflechie; 
en d’autres termes, nous pr^ferons la forme active qui 
donne plus de vie au style. 

8. Nos trois temps passes de l’indicatif, l’imparfait, le 
passe defini, et le passe indefini, n’ont que deux temps 


15 


TRENTIEME LECON 


33 


Equivalents en anglais, l’imparfait pour exprimer une action 
entierement EcoulEe, et le parfait indEfini qui ne prEcise pas 
le temps ou 1’action a eu lieu, ou qui exprime un passE 
rEcent ou un passE EloignE qui se relie au prEsent. 

9. En frangais, tout verbe qui suit une prEposition, 
exceptE la prEposition en, se met a l’infinitif; en anglais, on 
emploie le participe prEsent apres toutes les prEpositions ; 
exceptE la prEposition to qui est le signe de l’infinitif. 

10. Tres frEquemment, les prEpositions requises par un 
verbe different dans les deux langues. De plus, nombre de 
verbes peuvent etre actifs en frangais et avoir pour corres- 
pondants des verbes neutres en anglais, et vice versa. II 
s’ensuit que les prEpositions d’une langue ne se rendent pas 
dans 1’autre. Cette question des prEpositions est la plus 
difficile, et ne s’apprend bien que par la lecture de nom- 
breux textes anglais. Cependant, des directions minutieuses 
seront donnEes dans la grammaire. 

11. La langue anglaise possede une grande facilitE de 
crEer des verbes composEs a l’aide d’un verbe et de prEposi¬ 
tions ou d’adverbes; aussi des noms et adjectifs composEs. 

12. L’adjectif, en anglais, prEcede toujours le nom. 

13. L’adverbe se place quelquefois en anglais entre le sujet 
et le verbe; il ne peut jamais occuper cette place en frangais. 

14. Certains plEonasmes, condamnEs en frangais sont 
permis en anglais. En voici quelques exemples. 

to ask a question, faire une question (demander une question) 

If I possibly can, Si je puis {si je puis possiblement ) 

I have a pain in my head, J 1 ai mat a la tete {dans ma tete) 


EXERCICE ORAL 

I really,cannot come.-Why do yon insist? 

Je ne puis reellement pas venir . — Pourquoi insistez-vous? 

She suddenly opened the door. 

He often asks for you. 

We seriously considered the matter. 

Frequently he came home after midnight. 

She frequently comes to see you. 



34 


ANGLAIS 


§15 


I quickly shut the door. 

I shut the door quickly. 

Quickly did I shut the door. 

I certainly thought you would come. 

The man merely looked through the window. 

He certainly is mistaken. 

Why can you not agree with him? 

Pourquoi ne pouvez-vous pas vous accorder avec lui? 

Shall you change it for a larger size? 

Will you change places with me? 

How long have you been corresponding with her? 
Here is a glass that corresponds to yours. 

He is entirely dependent on his father. 

Why should I not differ with him? 

She always differs with her brother. 

But your father’s opinion differs from yours. 

Your statement differs from mine. 

Mother says that my cravat is different from yours. 
We were disappointed in her. 

We were glad of his success. 

We were glad at your success. 

Yes, indeed; I am glad of the book. 

None were glad at the president’s death. 

She is in need of money. 

There is need of more men. 

There is some need for such things. 

She is very tired of reading. 

Elle est tr£s fatiguee de lire. 

He was sorry for having said so much. 

She is wrong in thinking any such thing. 

They were delayed by calling for you. 

I am much pleased with his riding. 

Nothing could keep him from lying still. 

He understood the necessity of using them. 

She had a good reason for not giving him permission. 
We profited much by trading with your people. 

She got away by crossing the river. 


§15 


TRENTIEME LEQON 


Such books are good only for passing the time. 

What do you care about eating? 

His success depends on his getting there quickly. 

Yesterday the books were sent to the city. 

Hier les livres ont ete envoyes a la ville. 

The windows were washed yesterday. 

The floors have been swept thoroughly. 

She was pained by his death. 

He was taken ill yesterday morning. 

The steak has been burned, madam. 

The rivers are covered with ice. 

The door is closed. 

The pitcher was broken this morning. 

They have been lost nearly two weeks. 

They were missed day before yesterday. 

All their houses were destroyed. 

It will be seen that you are very young. 

It will be said that you are too young. 

The papers shall be filled out tomorrow. 

My help cometh from the Lord ! 

L'aide me vient du Seigneur! 

He seeth all things, both light and dark. 

My heart longeth for thee. 

He goeth up in the early evening. 

Believest thou me? 

He thinketh he cometh in the name of the Lord. 

He sitteth on high. 

He standeth on the right hand. 

I have kept my word. 

All my delight hath been in thy law. 

Strengthen thou me according to thy loving kindness. 
We are thine, O Lord. 

What sort of man art thon?-Speak. 

Quelle sorle d’homme es-tu? — Parle. 

Thou art my dearest friend. 

Thou wast my friend many years ago. 


36 


ANGLAIS 


15 


Thou wilt love them though they love not thee. 

Thou shalt see. 

Thou wert a fair child. 

Thou couldst not have been kind to him. 

When I saw thee, I knew thee. 

Quand je te vis, je te connus. 

We all do love thee, child. 

Thou art a pretty boy. What shall we do for thee? 

We found thee alone here. 

He could not have treated thee kindly. 

I came closer to thee, and learned then thou wert my 
child’s child. 

On earth will I call upon thee. 

Sur terre, je te visiterai. 

I will dwell in thy house forever. 

And suffereth not our feet to slip .... 

Hide not thy face from me. 

Thou art my helper; I believe in thee. 

He doeth it himself. 

Remember thy Creator in the days of thy youth. 

Thou shalt have no other gods before me. 

Honor thy father and thy mother. 

Thou shalt not kill. 

Thou shalt not steal. 

Love thy neighbor as thyself. 

The Lord knoweth the thoughts of man. 

For his mercy endureth forever. 

He forgot to tell Ills fattier about It. 

II a oublie d'en parler a son pbre. 

When his mother spoke of it, he said that he had for¬ 
gotten all about it. 

Do you forget things easily? 

I forgot to call his attention to the matter. 

She has forgotten to take her purse. 

The boy forgot to leave the paper this morning. 

Arthur never forgets to write home every week. 


TRENTIEME LEQON 


37 


§15 


It is easy to forget an injury done one by a friend. 

The king forgets nothing. 

You should never forget to act like a gentleman. 

He never forgets his kingly bearing. 

We had almost forgotten to tell you about our uncle’s 
illness. 

We were led. many miles through, the forest. 

On nous conduisit plusieurs milles au travers de la foret. 

Let the blind lead the blind. 

Will you be kind enough to lead my horse home? 

I will lead you to other friends. 

Where are you leading me? 

I led him home / without difficulty. 

She led him through many strange lands. 

We led our horses to drink from the lake. 

The guides were led far astray. 

I was easily led to do this because I thought it would 
please you. 

He has been led into difficulties. 

It is easy to lead a friend into trouble. 

Lead me unto thee, O Lord! 

We saw them play on the street. 

Nous les avons vus jouer dans la rue. 

We saw him going to your house. 

I heard him coming up the stairs. 

We all saw you go into the hotel. 

We believed him to have been killed. 

We thought we saw them driving in the park. 

I have often seen them playing in Mr. Grant’s meadow. 
We saw many murderers executed. 

We have seen many poor children going about the streets 
very lightly clad, even in the coldest weather. 

I knew you were reading that book. 

She caught him coming up-stairs. 

Do ask him to come quickly. 

Demandez-lui de venir vite. 


38 


ANGLAIS 


15 


Do tell the physician that he must come. 

Do invite only your best friends. 

Do go and see my grandfather. 

Charles, do you come here at once. 

Do never tell an untruth. 

O, do whisper it in his ear. 

Do always only that which is right. 

Do speak to him about it. 

Do take a carriage; there is danger of rain. 

Have you quite forgiven Mm? 

Lui avez-vous pardonne tout a fait? 

Yes, I forgive you. 

Can you ever forgive them? 

He forgave me for what I had done. 

They forgave us all. 

Mrs. Jackson told Mrs. Smith that she should never for¬ 
give Harry. 

Though he did wrong, his friends forgave him. 

She forgave him for not coming to see her. 

Although we did them no little wrong, we were entirely 
forgiven. 

They might have been forgiven had they not thought it 
best to try to compel their friends to yield. 

Certainly I should have forgiven them. 

Please to dig another hole here. 

Creusez un autre trou id , je vous prie. 

Sir, are you digging for gold? 

We have dug more than ten feet into the earth. 

They dug a great hole there. 

Dig the grave long and deep. 

They are digging as though their lives depended on how 
deep they dug. 

They have dug through the smallest mountain. 

Please dig this ground up well. 

No, sir; it was dug up yesterday. 

Though he fights well, he does not often win. 

Quoiqu’il se batte bien, it ne gagne pas souvent. 


15 


TRENTIEME LEQON 


39 


The brave man fights an earnest fight. 

He fought nobly and well. 

Women have long been fighting for their rights. 

I will never fight with you. 

He fought against them all. 

The battle was fought on the second day of July. 

This was not the last of their fighting. 

My grandmother told me about you. 

Ma grand,'mere m’a parli de vous. 

His grandfather said it was untrue. 

Your grandson came home early yesterday. 

Mrs. Grant’s granddaughter will be here tomorrow. 

Her grandchildren are always happy at Christmas time. 

To be a grandchild is to be happy, and to have many 
pleasant things in store. 

I know that my grandmother loves me. 

Harry, when are you coming home?—At 
once, mamma. 

Henri , quand allez-vous revenir a la maisonf —Tout de 
suite , maman. 

Do you know that man? —Which one? 

Are you going to church tomorrow? —No. 

Which horse do you think will win the race? —The first 
one. 

She said she loved him. 

He told me to come early in the morning. 

Your mother asked me if I would not take care of you 
tonight. 

I know you are ill. 

I know who he is. 

Why will you not call your sister’s attention to the 
matter? —Why should I? 

We asked you to go home. 

Men are coming to drive you away. 

There are few left to love us. 

Some there are who pay their bills promptly. 


40 


ANGLAIS 


§15 


EEYUE ET CONVERSATION 


Several weeks ago, I met your 
grandfather on the train from 
Buffalo to Chicago. Your 
cousin was with him, and it 
was she who introduced me. 

He is coming here in a few weeks. 
I hope you will know him bet¬ 
ter. I am sure you will like 
him. 

O, we are already quite good 
friends. I sat with them all 
the way to Chicago. He seemed 
to take much interest in me 
and in my work at college. He 
entertained me with stories of 
his adventures in Canada and 
the western United States, when 
he used to trap and hunt al¬ 
most fifty years ago. He is one 
of the most delightful men I 
have met for many years. 


We are very fond of him. Al¬ 
though he is now over seventy- 
five, he seems comparatively 
young. He is as well today as 
he was ten years ago, and he 
says that he feels like a young 
man. You must ask him to tell 
you about his experiences with 
the Indians in the mining 
camps of America. 

Yes, I shall; I like Indian stories. 

Grandfather tells a story about 
saving my grandmother's life 
one time soon after they were 
married, that is especially ex¬ 
citing. It appears that he had 


II y a plusieurs semaines, j'ai 
rencontre votre grand-pere dans 
le train de Buffalo a Chicago. 
Votre cousine etait avec lui, et 
c’est elle qui m'a presente. 

II va venir chez nous dans quel- 
ques semaines. J’espere que 
vous le connaitrez plus intime- 
ment. Je suis sur que vous 
Taimerez. 

Oh! nous sommes deja de tres 
bons amis. Lai ete avec lui 
pendant tout le trajet jusqu'a 
Chicago. II semblait prendre 
beaucoup d’interet a moi et a 
mon travail au college. II m’ 
a amuse avec les histoires de 
ses aventures au Canada et 
dans l’ouest des Etats-Unis 
quand il faisait le trappeur, ou 
qu’il chassait il y a pres de 
cinquante ans. C’est un des 
hommes les plus charmants que 
j’aie rencontres depuis bien des 
annees. 

Nous l’aimons beaucoup. Quoi* 
qu’il ait maintenant plus de 
soixante-quinze ans, il semble 
comparativement jeune. Il se 
porte aussi bien aujourd’hui 
qu’il y a dix ans, et il dit qu’il 
se sent comme un jeune 
homme. Il faudra lui deman- 
der de vous dire ses experiences 
avec les Indiens dans les camps 
des mineurs d'Amerique. 

Oui, je le ferai; j’aime ces his¬ 
toires d’Indiens. 

Grand-pere raconte comment il 
sauva la vie de ma grand’mere 
une fois, peu de temps apr6s 
leur mariage, et l’histoire est 
tres saisissante. Il parait qu’il 



§15 


TRENTIEME LECON 


41 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


been hunting for two or three 
years, and had been unusually 
successful; so successful in fact 
that he had saved nearly three 
thousand dollars. Then he 
thought he could afford to get 
married. They had been en¬ 
gaged for several years, and 
grandmother had made him 
promise to take her with him 
part way at least on one of his 
expeditions. Grandfather had 
some warm friends at the 
Franklin mining camp, about 
forty miffes west of where Ot¬ 
tawa how is. At Ottawa they 
got their guides, and leaving in 
the morning, arrived at the 
camp rather late in the after¬ 
noon. Arrangements had been 
made for them; they went at 
once to Walter Adams’ cabin. 
Grandfather noticed that there 
seemed to be more Indians 
about than usual, but no one 
had the least thought of dan¬ 
ger. At that time there were a 
great many elk a few miles to 
the north of the camp, and Mr. 
Adams had planned for a hunt¬ 
ing trip that night. So grand¬ 
father, with Mr. Adams, several 
friends, and two friendly Indi¬ 
ans set out soon after dinner, 
expecting to be gone until even¬ 
ing of the next day. When 
they returned, they found that 
the Indians had fallen upon the 
camp, burned the cabins, killed 
many of the miners, and carried 
away my grandmother and sev¬ 
eral others. They immediately 
organized a party and started 
after the Indians. Two days 


avait chasse pendant deux ou 
trois annees, et qu’il avait eu 
un succes peu commun; en fait, 
un tel succes qu’il avait econo¬ 
mise pres de trois mille dol¬ 
lars. Alors, il crut qu’il etait 
assez riche pour se marier. Us 
avaient ete fiances depuis plu- 
sieurs annees et ma grand’mere 
lui avait fait promettre de la 
prendre avec lui au moins pour 
une partie de l’une de ses ex¬ 
peditions. Grand-pere avait des 
amis sinceres au camp de mi- 
neurs de Franklin, a peu pres a 
quarante milles a l’ouest de 
l’endroit ou Ottawa se trouve 
maintenant. A Ottawa, ils 
prirent des guides, et partant 
le matin, ils arriverent un peu 
tard dans l’apres-midi. On 

avait dejafait des arrangements 
pour eux. Ils afferent im- 

mediatement dans la case de 
Walter Adams. Mon grand- 
pere avait remarque plus d’ln- 
diens qu’a l’ordinaire, mais 

personne m'avait la moindre 
pensee d’un danger. En ce 
temps-la, il y avait beaucoup 
d’elans a quelques milles au 
nord du camp, et M. Adams 
avait projete une partie de 

chasse pour cette nuit. Alors 
mon grand-pere avec M. Adams 
quelques amis, et deux Indiens 
amis partirent bientot apres le 
diner, esperant etre absents 
jusqu’au soir du lendemain. 
Quand ils revinrent, ils trou- 
verent que les Indiens etaient 
tombes sur le camp, avaient 
brule les cases, tue plusieurs 
mineurs et emmene ma grand’ 



42 


ANGLAIS 


§15 


REVUE ET CONVERSATION-(Continuees) 


later they overtook them in the 
forests nearly thirty miles west. 
They hid themselves during the 
day, and late at night sur¬ 
rounded the camp. All the 
Indians were killed. Grand¬ 
mother and all the other prison¬ 
ers were saved, but they had 
been badly treated by the In¬ 
dians. 


It does not seem as though such 
things could have happened so 
recently. 

O, yes; even within the last 
twenty years, both the United 
States and Canadian govern¬ 
ments have had serious diffi¬ 
culties with the Indian tribes in 
the west. 

I shall be glad when your grand¬ 
father comes. I must ask him 
to tell me more about his 
adventures in those early days. 


mere et plusieurs autres. Ils 
organiserent immediatement 
une expedition et se mirent a la 
poursuite des Indiens. Deux 
jours plus tard, ils les re- 
joignirent dans les forets pres 
de trente milles a l’ouest. Ils 
se cacherent pendant le jour, et 
tard pendant la nuit entourerent 
le camp. Tous les Indiens 
furent tues. Ma grand’mere 
et les autres prison'nieres furent 
toutes sauvees, mais elles 
avaient ete bien maltraitees par 
les Indiens. 

II ne semble pas que de telles 
choses puissent arriver si recem- 
ment. 

Oh! oui; meme dans les vingt 
dernieres annees, les gouverne- 
ments des Etats-Unis et du 
Canada ont eu de serieuses 
difficultes avec les tribus indien- 
nes de l’ouest. 

Je serai content auand votre 
grand-pere viendra. II faudra 
que je lui demande de me 
raconter d'autres aventures des 
temps de sa jeunesse. 


PHRASES 

Give to study all the time you 
can. 

Have you done all that you should 
have done? 

Did you do the work that you 
promised to do? 

I should be glad to oblige you if I 
were able. 

Can you tell me what he does for 
a living? 

Ought he not to pay me? 

Have you had your dinner? 


USUELLES 

Donnez a l’etude tout le temps 
que vous pouvez. 

Avez-vous fait tout ce que vous 
auriez du faire? 

Avez-vous fait le travail que vous 
avez promis de faire? 

Je serais content de vous obliger 
si je le pouvais. 

Pouvez-vous me dire ce qu’il fait 
pour gagner sa vie? 

Ne devrait-il pas me payer? 

Avez-vous dine? 





§15 


TRENTIEME LEQON 


43 


PHRASES USUELJLES—(Continuees) 


Be sure that we would go if we 
could. 

I happened to be there. 

If it were not so cold, it would 
rain. 

Love not idleness, lest thou come 
to want. 

Thou shalt love thy neighbor as 
thyself. 

They agree like cat and dog. 

I will make them agree. 

All is well that ends^well. 

He cannot make both ends meet. 

Would you do it before his face? 

He finds fault with everything I 
do. 

He will not set the world afire. 

Silence gives consent. 

They are hand and glove together. 

Charity begins at home. 

Home, sweet home! 

I do not leave things undone. 

He left for foreign parts. 

This is more than I can stand. 

He took it well. 

It does not work the same here. 

That does not suit me. 

You must strike while the iron is 
hot. 

You are in for it, and you must 
go through. 

He does not know which way to 
turn. 

It is always the same old song. 

That is a matter which I take 
much to heart. 

Out of sight, out of mind. 


Soyez sur que nous irions si nous 
pouvions. 

II arriva que j’etais la. 

Shi ne faisait pas si froid, il 
pleuvrait. 

INTaime pas la paresse, de peur 
que tu ne tombes dans le 
besoin. 

Tu dois aimer ton prochain comme 
toi-meme. 

Ils s’accordent comme chien et 
chat. 

Je les mettrai d’accord. 

Tout est bien qui finit bien. 

II ne peut pas joindre les deux 
bouts. 

Le feriez-vous en sa presence? 

II trouve a redire a tout ce que je 
fais. 

II n’a pas invente la poudre. 

Qui ne dit rien consent. 

Ce sont deux tetes dans le meme 
bonnet. 

Charite bien ordonnee commence 
par soi-meme. 

O mon doux foyer! 

Je ne fais pas les choses a 
moitie. 

II est alle en pays etranger. 

C’est plus que je n’en puis sup¬ 
porter. 

II l’a pris en bonne part. 

II n’en va pas de meme ici. 

Cela ne me va pas. 

II faut battre le fer pendant qu’il 
est chaud. 

Le vin est tire, il faut le boire. 

II ne sait de quel bois faire fleche. 

C’est toujours la meme chanson. 

C’est une affaire que j’ai fort a 
coeur. 

Loin des yeux, loin du coeur. 




44 


ANGLAIS 


§15 


PHRASES TJSUELEES—(Continuees) 


I have a bad matter on my hand. 

The will of the people is the will 
of God. 

Every one for himself and God for 
us all. 

That does not mean anything. 

A little bird told me of it. 

He cries before he is hurt. 

Do as you think best. 

Are you so far? 

How much do you charge for the 
making? 

I shall do it some way or other. 

I have nothing to do with fhem. 

As you sow, so shall you reap. 

Come to the point. 

Lay up something for a rainy 
day. 

I find it to my liking. 

I have it from good authority. 

I do not know any means of 
doing it. 

He made up his mind. 

Do not trifle away your time. 

She did not come, neither did he. 

My name is no more for sale than 
for rent. 

It is not for me to make it so. 

The richer he is, the less is he 
satisfied. 

They shall not go; neither will I. 

He did as I did. 

The more one has, the more one 
wants. 

I do not believe he will come, or 
that he is thinking of coming. 

All roads lead to Rome. 

He will make his way. 


J’ai une mauvaise affaire sur les 
bras. 

La voix du peuple est la voix de 
Dieu. 

Chacun pour soi et Dieu pour 
tous. 

Cela ne signifie rien. 

Mon petit doigt (lit, un petit 
oiseau) me Pa dit. 

II crie avant qu’on Pecorche. 

Faites comme vous l’entendrez. 

En etes-vous la? 

Combien faites-vous la fagon? 

J’y parviendrai d’une fagon ou 
d’une autre. 

Je n’ai que faire d’eux. 

Qui bien fera, bien trouvera. 

Venez au fait. 

Gardez une poire pour la soif. 

Je le trouve a mon gre. 

Je le tiens de bonne main. 

Je ne connais aucun moyen de le 
faire. 

II a pris un parti. 

Ne passez pas votre temps a vous 
amuser. 

Elle n’est pas venue, ni lui non 
plus. 

Mon nom n’est pas plus a vendre 
qu’a louer. 

II ne tient pas a moi que cela ne 
soit. 

Plus il est riche, moins il est con¬ 
tent. 

Ils n’iront pas, ni moi non plus. 

Il a fait comme moi. 

Plus on a, plus on veut avoir. 

Je ne crois pas qu’il vienne, ni 
qu’il pense a venir. 

Tous les chemins menent a Rome. 

Il ira son chemin. 



§15 


45 


TRENTIEME LEQON 

PHRASES USUELLES —(Continuees) 


It did not suit me to answer him. 

Excuse me for interrupting you. 

He fell into that trap. 

They go arm in arm. 

That made me think. 

He opened his heart to me about 
it. 

Some day or other he will fall 
into my hand. 

You take up too much room. 

She may come when she pleases. 


II ne m’a pas convenu de lui 
repondre. 

Pardonnez-moi si je vous coupe 
la parole. 

II a donne dans ce piege. 

Ils se donnent le bras. 

Cela m’a donne a penser. 

II s’en est ouvert a moi. 

II passera un jour par mes mains. 

Vous tenez trop de place. 

Elle peut venir quand ellevoudra. 


EXEKCICE fiCRIT 

Repondez en anglais aux questions suivantes. Ecrivez 
les questions et les reponses en double expedition, et 
envoyez-nous les deux copies pour correction, mais 
n’enregistrez pas cette leqon sur un cylindre vierge jusqu’a 
ce que nous vous ayons retourne une copie corrigee. 

1. Give us a description of the house you are living in. 

2. Have you means to live without working? 

3. Do you keep all the letters we send you? 

4. How far is it from your house to the church? 

5. At what time must you be up in the morning? 

6. Were there any letters for you this morning? 

7. How does your uncle speak English? 

8. How many hours do you sleep? 

9. Have you heard anything new this morning? 

10. How long shall you stay in the country this summer? 

11. Are you fond of driving? 

12. How long have you known your friend? 

13. Do you not consider it difficult to speak a foreign 
language as well as your own? 

14. Would you not go abroad if you had money enough? 

15. Tell all that you can about your room and its 
furniture. 





TABLE ANALYTIQUE DES MATIERES 


Dans cette table, le premier nombre indique le numero de la section, imprime en tete de 
chaque page, et precede de la marque §; le deuxieme indique la page dfe la section. Par 
exemple, either 9-7, veut dire que l’on trouvera ce mot a la septieme page de la section 
marquee $9 en tete de la page. 


Sec. Page 


Sec. Page 


a, au lieu de par". 

5 

7 

after, pour exprimer les heures en 



a, avec what. 

6 

4 

anglais. 


3 

26 

a, by. 

11 

28 

again, encore. 


5 

5 

d, comment exprime en anglais . . 

3 

25 

age, comment exprime .... 


9 

25 

a, comment on le traduit en an- 



agneau, lamb. 


13 

30 

glais. 

2 

21 

ago, il y a. 


6 

29 

a, employe pour de. 

1 

7 



9 

28 

& la pendule. 

11 

28 

agreable, pleasant. 


10 

10 

a ma montre. 

11 

28 

ainsi il a. 


6 

27 

a pour exprimer with. 

4 

5 

all, tout. 


10 

30 

abattoir. 

7 

30 

aller chercher, exprime par to get 

4 

4 

able, to be, pouvoir. 

14 

5 

par to 

go 



accentuation .. 

1 

19 

and get 

4 

5 

ache s’emploie comme nom ou 



aller chercher, exprime par to 

go 



comme verbe. 

11 

28 

for. 


4 

5 

acheter, purchase, buy. 

13 

7 

aller en voiture, to drive . . . 


11 

28 

“ to buy. 

7 

5 

“ s’en, to go away. 


7 

5 

adjectif demonstrate. 

3 

27 

to go. 


7 

5 

“ genre et nombre de 1’. . . 

1 

7 

although avec subjonctif . . . 


14 

32 

“ numeral un avec. 

14 

37 

tout. 


10 

30 


10 


“ possessif employe au lieu 

de Particle. 

“ possessif, quand il n’est 

pas exprime.11 

adjectifs, comparaison des .... 8 

de dimension.14 


always, place de . 


infinitifs apres. 

possessifs, s avec . . . 
prepositions apres . . . 

propres . 

qui denotent la natio¬ 
nality . 


adverbe, place de V . 

“ “ l’dans les phrases 

emphatiques . . 
adverbes, comparaison des .... 


15 


9 

5 
35 

6 


“ toujours . . 

am.. . 

an, au lieu de par . . 

“ avec what. 

“ comment employe 


2 

13 

4 
1 

5 

6 
1 


place des, avec to be 
afford, significations de . . . . 


24 

28 

5 

6 
7 
4 
7 


6 

11 

and, sur . 

14 

35 

15 

6 

anglaise. Differences entre la lan- 



4 

7 

gue frangaise et la 





langue . 

15 

31 

4 

7 

anglais, genres en. 

1 

7 

15 

29 

“ pleonasmes en. 

15 

33 

13 

28 

“ subjonctif . 

14 

29 



“ monnaie. 

8 

11 

13 

29 

angry at, fache de. 

15 

7 

11 

8 

anterieur, futur. 

10 

26 

11 

8 


4 

4 

13 

28 

“ .. 

9 

5 

7 

4 


14 

36 


XXIX 


/ 
































































XXX 


TABLE ANALYTIQUE DES MATIERES 


Sec. 


any one .. 9 

place de, avec un nom .... 4 

some, aulieu de. 4 

tout, quelconque.8 

anybody . 9 

anyhow. 9 

anything:. 9 

anyway. 9 

anywhere. 9 

appear, to apres.15 

apostrophe avec la forme posses¬ 
sive . 5 

arbre, tree. 4 

are, there. 6 

arreter, to stop. 7 

article, adjectif possessif employe 

au lieu de 1’.10 

defini. 1 

indefini. 1 

partitif. 2 

n’est pas traduit . 4 

as. 2 

-as. 3 

if, subjonctif apres.14 

many . . as. 3 

“ “ as.14 

much as. 3 

“.14 

que.10 

soon as, aussitot que.10 

well.14 

ask. 3 

a question, faire une question 15 

prepositions apres le verbe . . 15 

assez. 3 

bien. 3 

astonished at, etonne de.15 

at, apres adjectifs.15 

avec quelques verbes.15 

home, comment exprime en 

frangais. 5 

preposition. 3 

ate. 8 

passe de to eat. 8 

atteindre . 8 

attendre to wait, avec for .... 4 

aucun. . .ne, none. 4 

aussi et autant devant un participe 14 

... que. 2 

aussitot que, as soon as.10 

autant de, as much ........ 11 

. . . que de. 3 

... as many as ... . 14 

autre, other. 9 

autres, pour exprimer some ... 4 

auxiliaires en anglais. 3 


Sec. Page 

auxiliaires shall et will. 7 26 

avancer a. 8 34 

avant-hier. 7 6 

avoir, agre. 9 25 

chaud. 1 22 

“ “ 8 34 

“ faim. 1 22 

“ formes angflaises du present 2 4 

“ froid. 1 22 

“ “ 8 34 

“ l’intention. 2 22 

mal, to have a pain .... 11 28 

“ soif. 1 22 

to have, imparfait de . . . . 6 9 

awake.15 7 

eveiller.11 28 

away, avec verbes. 7 5 

far, bien loin. 7 5 

“ loin. 7 5 

awoke.15 7 

B 

back en arriere, de retour.12 11 

bad . 8 8 

batir, built.10 27 

batir, to build.10 27 

be able, pouvoir.14 5 

deuxieme personne du singulier 

de.15 31 

devoir.13 7 

“ etre. 9 25 

far, etre loin.12 31 

forme interrogative de. 1 7 

forme interrogative present . 1 8 

negative de, present . . . 1 8 

le present de. 1 6 

obligfed, falloir.15 10 

on the road, etre sur le chemin . 7 7 

“ place de, avec adverbes .... 13 28 

du sujet de. 1 8 

pour etre et avoir exprimer la 

dimension. r ... 14 34 

subjonctif de.14 30 

there to, y avoir. 9 29 

to apres.15 6 

“ imparfait de. 6 8 

bear.15 7 

beaucoup, many, much. 8 8 

rather.14 8 

traduction de. 2 7 

because, que sig:nifiant parce que 

se traduit par.14 10 

been, ete. 9 25 

before, il y avait. 9 28 

rendu par que.14 10 

temps apres.14 7 


Page 

5 

4 

4 

11 

5 

6 

5 

6 

6 

6 

4 

6 

29 

29 

9 

7 

7 

6 

5 

23 

7 

32 

7 

4 

7 

4 

28 

28 

5 

5 

33 

29 

24 

24 

7 

7 

29 

6 

25 

30 

11 

34 

25 

7 

5 

23 

28 

4 

7 

4 

7 

6 

4 





























































































TABLE ANALYTIQUE DES MATIERES 


XXXI 


Sec. Page 


beg: of . 15 

begfan . 


29 


celui-ci 


Sec. Page 
6 30 


bind 


boeuf, ox, beef 


bring:, apporter 


brought 


business man, traduction de . . . 
but, mais. 


by, 


pas 


call on, to, visiter. 

“ passif de. 

prog:ressif du verbe . . 
“ simple du verbe . . . . 

subjonctif de. 

came. 

can. 

“ afford. 

“ pour n’est-ce pas. 

44 pouvoir. 

canst. 

cardinals. 

cardinaux. 

carry away, emporter. 

.. 

44 se traduit quelquefois par it . . 

ceci. 

cela. 

celle pour marquer un rapport de 
possession . 


6 

29 

pour marquer un rapport de 



8 

29 

possession. 

5 

6 

3 

24 

cependant . 

9 

6 

7 

5 

certain, certain . 

10 

10 

4 

6 

certainly, place de. 

13 

28 

15 

7 

certains, some, any . 

9 

5 

8 

11 

ces. 

4 

24 

13 

30 

cet. 

3 

27 

3 

24 

cette. 

3 

27 

15 

7 

ceux-ci. 

6 

30 

15 

7 

pour marquer un rapport de 




7 

possession. 

5 

6 

9 

29 

ch, differents sons de. 

4 

25 

7 

5 

chacun, every, each. 

9 

9 

8 

30 

chaque, every, each. 

9 

9 

15 

7 

chaud, avoir. 

1 

22 

10 

4 

chemin, way. . 

5 

27 

8 

30 

chemins de fer eleves. 

9 

5 

8 

30 

chercher, for. 

14 

37 

10 

4 

choisi, chosen. 

10 

27 

10 

27 

choisir, choose. 

10 

27 

10 

27 

choisis, chose. 

10 

27 

3 

27 

choose . 

15 

7 

10 

8 

choisir. 

10 

27 

7 

5 

chose . 

15 

7 

13 

7 

choisis. 

10 

27 

11 

28 

chosen, choisi. 

10 

27 

i 11 

10 

• 4 

15 

7 

11 

9 

ci. 

3 

27 

14 

35 

clad. 

15 

28 

14 

35 

clothe. 

15 

28 



clothed. 

15 

28 



cold. 

1 

22 

6 

11 

combien, comment il se traduit en 




7 

anglais . 

5 

4 

13 

27 

how. 

9 

8 


13 27 come. 8 30 

14 30 “ venir. 7 29 

7 29 commencer, to beg:in. 6 29 

8 30 comment on doit envoyer les cylin- 

3 6 dres a recole. 1 17 

7 4 comparaison de deux objets .... 8 9 

3 8 “ des adjectifs .... 8 5 

14 5 44 44 “ table de la 8 10 

15 31 “ irreg:ulieres des ad- 

7 6 jectifs . 8 8 

7 6 44 regies speciales de . 8 8 

7 5 comparatif d’ eg:alite . 2 23 

3 27 44 “ neg:atif ... 3 7 

15 30 44 d’inferiorite . 8 9 

3 28 “ de superiority, form- 

3 28 ation du . 8 7 

comparatifs des adjectifs . 8 7 

5 6 composes, mots . 4 23 






























































































XXX11 


TABLE ANALYTIQUE DES MATIERES 


Sec. Page 

condition, exprimee par lesubjonctif 14 33 

conditionnel, temps anglais .... 11 8 

conduire, exprime par to take . . 3 7 

conjugaison, d’un verbe passif . . 12 29 

reflechi 10 6 

convenir, do dans le sens de . . . 9 24 

cost, cotiter.10 4 

could, avec subjonctif .14 7 

est un auxiliaire.14 5 

cousin. 2 6 


Sec. Page 


cut, couper. 

Cylindre phonographique. 

cylindres, Comment on doit les en- 


1 > 

dame.. 

day before yesterday. 

de avec phrase negative. 

comment exprime avec noms 
en phrases particulieres . . . 
complement du superlatif . . . 

1 1’, any. 

la, any.'. 

pour exprimer possessif .... 

* se traduit par by avec noms de 
dimension precedes d’un com- 

paratif. 

desire, mind. 

dead, mort. 

defini, article. 

dehors, out. 

demander. 

demeurer, formes anglaises du pre¬ 
sent de. 

to live, parfait indefini . 

demi, half. 

demoiselle. 

demonstrate, adjectif. 

demonstrates, pronoms, emploi de 
denegation ou doute exprime par 

subjonctif. 

depenser, spend. 

des, any. 

descendre . 


deux, les, both. 

deuxieme personne de 1’ imperatif 
des pronoms 
personnels . 
du singulier 
omise . . . 
du singulier 
d’un verbe 

devenir, exprime par to get .... 


devoir, a, comment exprime par le 

subjonctif.. 14 

“ manieres de se traduire . . 13 
“ quand to be peutetre traduit 
par. 


did 


fit 


6 

6 

8 

10 


die, mourir . 7 

died . 7 


7 

6 

7 

4 

30 

27 

29 

29 


10 

4 • 

ne confondez pas avec dead . 

10 

10 

1 

2 

differences entre la langue fran- 





gaise et la langue anglaise . . . 

15 

31 

1 

17 

dig. 

15 

28 



dimension, comment exprimee . . 

14 

34 



noms et adjectifs de . . 

14 

35 

2 

7 

dire, to say. 

7 

5 

7 

7 

“ “ tell. 

7 

5 

4 

4 

44 4 4 4 4 

8 

29 



Directions generates. 

1 

1 

3 

27 

distinctions de who, which, that . . 

5 

27 

8 

11 

Distinctions entre imparfait et par- 



4 

4 

fait indefini. 

8 

31 

4 

4 

do. 

12 

11 

5 

4 

dans la forme emphatique a 





l’imperatif. 

15 

30 



les phrases indiomatiques 

9 

24 

14 

35 

deuxieme personne du singulier 



10 

4 

de. 

15 

31 

10 

10 

faire. 

9 

24 

1 

7 

4 4 4 4 

10 

27 

6 

10 

to, il traduit n’est-ce pas . . . . 

2 

25 

3 

5 

does. 

2 

21 



done. 

8 

30 

2 

20 

fait. 

10 

27 

8 

29 

donner, to give. 

7 

5 

5 

7 

don’t... 

11 

9 

2 

7 

dormir, sleep. 

11 

28 

3 

27 

doute ou denegation exprimes par 



6 

30 

le subjonctif. 

14 

32 



drank . 

8 

30 

14 

32 

passe de to drink. 

8 

11 

9 

25 

draw. 

15 

7 

4 

4 

drawn. 

15 

7 

6 

28 

dress oneself, s’habiller. 

10 

6 

8 

33 

drew. 

15 

7 

9 

29 

drink, boire. 

8 

11 

1 

9 

drive, aller en voiture. 

11 

28 



drunk . 

8 

30 

15 

31 

du, any . 

4 

4 



dug. 

15 

28 


15 

4 


E 

30 each, chaque, chacun. 9 9 

5 easy, facile. 8 8 








































































TABLE ANALYTIQUE DES MATIERES 


XXXlll 


Sec. Page Sec. Page 


eat, manger. 

8 

10 

every, tout. 

. 10 

30 

eaten. 

8 

30 

everybody. 

. 9 

8 

ecouter, to mind . 

10 

5 

everything. 

. 9 

8 

ecrire, to write. 

7 

5 

everywhere. 

. 9 

8 

efTet, en. 

6 

27 

Exercice Ecrit. 

. 5 

39 

egalite, comparatif d’. 

2 

23 

4 1 4 4 

. 6 

42 

negative . . 

3 

7 

it *4 

7 

41 

either . 

9 

7 

4 4 4 4 

. 8 

44 

non plus. 

4 

5 

• t tt 

. 9 

43 

eloignement, comment denote . . 

7 

5 

it tt 

. 10 

45 

else, en plus. 

9 

7 

tt 11 

. 11 

40 

emmener, exprime par to take . . 

3 

7 

tt tt 

. 12 

43 

emphatique forme du verbe .... 

12 

11 

tt tt 

. 13 

44 

s’emploie a l’im- 



11 tt 

. 14 

47 

peratif en pla- 




. 15 

45 

gant do devant 



Exercice Oral . 

1 

9 

la forme . . . 

15 

30 

4 4 4 4 

1 

24 

emploi de la forme passive .... 

12 

30 

11 11 

. 2 

8 

progressive . . 

12 

8 

11 tt 

2 

25 

des pronoms demonstrates 

6 

30 

tt it 

. 3 

8 

du participe present .... 

11 

25 

4 4 4 4 

. 3 

30 

emporter, to carry away. 

7 

5 

11 tt 

. 4 

7 

en, avec adverbe de quantite ou 



it 11 

. 4 

26 

adjectif numeral ....... 

14 

37 

11 tt 

. 5 

7 

comment il se traduit en an- 



tt tt 

. 5 

23 

glais. 

14 

36 

tt it 

. 6 

11 

dansles reponses. 

14 

37 


. 6 

32 

effet. 

6 

27 

tt tt 

7 

8 

plus, else. 

9 

7 


. 7 

26 

more, encore. 

5 

6 

“ “ 

. 8 

13 

retard, late. 

1 

23 

tt tt 

. 8 

34 

encore, equivalents en anglais . . 

5 

5 

tt tt 

. 9 

9 

enlever, to take away. 

7 

5 


. 9 

31 

enough, place de. 

6 

10 

tt 11 

. 10 

10 

entendre, to hear. 

7 

5 

4 4 4 4 

. 10 

31 

entrer . 

6 

28 

4 4 4 4 

. 11 

10 

envie. Mind . 

10 

4 

tt 11 

. 11 

29 

s’envoler, to fly away . 

7 

5 

tt tt 

. 12 

13 

envoyer, to send. 

7 

5 

4 4 4 4 

. 12 

32 

es.pour former les pluriels de noms 




. 13 

9 

qui se terminent par x. 

4 

24 

tt tt 

. 13 

31 

espace de temps exprime par com- 




. 14 

10 

bien. 

5 

5 

tt t* 

. 14 

38 

esperer, to expect, plus-que-par- 



,t tt 

. 15 

10 

fait de. 

9 

26 

11 tt 

. 15 

33 

s’esquiver. 

8 

33 

“ Importance de V . 

1 

9 

etonne de, astonished at. 

15 

7 

Phonographique .... 

1 

16 

etre absent, to be away. 

7 

5 


1 

32 

“ formes anglaises du present . 

1 

6 


. 2 

16 

" loin, to be far. 

12 

31 


. 2 

34 

etroit, narrow. 

8 

8 


. 3 

19 

eveiller, awake . 

11 

28 


3 

40 

even, meme. 

10 

29 


. 4 

18 

every . 

9 

8 


. 4 

37 

“ chaque., chacun. 

9 

9 



18 

“ one . 

9 

8 


. 6 

23 
































































































XXXIV 


TABLE ANALYTIQUE DES MATIERES 



Sec. Page 


Sec. Page 

Exercice Phonographique. 

7 

21 

faut, il. 

14 

6 

4 4 ft 1 

8 

23 

feel, infinitif apres. 

15 

30 

4ft ft 4 

9 

19 

participe apres. 

15 

30 

«• a 

10 

21 

fell. 

10 

4 

a a 

11- 

19 

few, peu. 

7 

29 

«t a 

12 

23 

fight. 

15 

28 

4 4 4 4 

13 

21 

find, trouver. 

6 

31 

u it 

14 

25 

finir, finish, imparfait de . 

6 

6 

it (4 

15 

23 

finish, finir, imparfait de. 

6 

6 

Impor- 



finished . 

8 

29 

tance de’l 

1 

16 

fis, did. 

10 

27 

expect, esperer, plus-que-parfait de 

9 

26 

fish, poisson. 

11 

28 

expletif, que. 

14 

9 

fly away, s’envoler. 

7 

5 




fois. deux. 

7 

5 

F 



quatre. 

7 

5 

f, noms qui se terminent par . . . 

4 

24 

une. 

7 

5 

fabriquer, to make. 

9 

24 

for, avec to pay. 

8 

33 

fache de, angry at. 

15 

7 

chercher . 

14 

37 

sorry . 

8 

8 

demande par le verbe to wait 

4 

25 

facile, easy. 

8 

8 

fear, should apres. 

14 

7 

faim, avoir. 

1 

22 

it, en. 

14 

36 

faire attendre, keep waiting: .... 

13 

6 

forgave . 

15 

28 

dans expression de la tem- 



pardonnai . 

10 

27 

perature ou des conditions 



forget. 

15 

28 

du temps. 

1 

23 

forgive. 

15 

28 

entrer, to show in. 

6 

27 

pardonner . 

10 

27 

exprime par to get. 

4 

5 

forgiven. 

15 

28 

traduction de, par to have 



pardonne . 

10 

27 

made. 

12 

11 

forgot. 

8 

30 

monter, to show up. 

6 

28 

44 

15 

28 

partir. 

8 

33 

forgotten. 

8 

30 

pour agfir. 

9 

24 

* 4 

15 

28 

suivi de l’infinitif . 

12 

32 

formation de l’imparfait. 

6 

5 

“ to do. 

2 

21 

des comparatifs de su- 



“ “ “ 

9 

24 

periorite et du super- 



it t« tt 

10 

27 

latif . 

8 

7 

make. 

9 

24 

du participe present . . 

11 

24 

show . 

6 

27 

plus-que-parfait . . 

9 

25 

une question, ask a question . 

15 

33 

forme emphatique du verbe .... 

12 

11 

fait de, made of . 

10 

28 

passive du verbe . 

12 

28 

done. 

10 

27 

possessive . 

5 

4 

fall, tomber . 

10 

4 

progressive complete .... 

12 

7 

fallen. 

10 

4 

dans les verbes 



falloir, must .. 

15 

10 

passifs .... 

13 

26 

n’existe pas en anglais . . 

15 

9 

du verbe.... 

12 

5 

precede de ce que et suivi 



pronominale se traduit par 



d’un infinitif. 

15 

10 

la forme passive en anglais . . . 

12 

31 

rendu par should . 

14 

5 

fort en, good at. 

15 

7 

to be obligred. 

15 

10 

fought . 

15 

28 

require. 

15 

9 

found . 

8 

29 

want. 

15 

9 

four times. 

7 

5 

fancy, traductions de. 

12 

12 

frangais et l’anglais, Differences 



far away, bien loin. 

7 

5 

entre le. 

15 

31 

“ loin. 

8 

8 

franchir. 

8 

34 

“to. 

12 

31 

freeze . 

15 

7 

“ “ be, etre loin. 

12 

31 

froid, avoir. 

1 

22 





























































































TABLE ANALYTIQUE DES MATIERES 


XXXV 



Sec. Page 


Sec. Page 

from it, en. 

14 

37 

go, passe, habituel du verbe . . 

. 14 

6 

preposition . 

5 

7 

progressif de. 

. 12 

6 

apres adjectifs . 

15 

6 

verbe, present progressif . . 

. 3 

25 

to be far .... 

12 

31 

gone. 

. . 8 

29 

preposition sert a marquer le 



good at, fort en. 

. 15 

7 

point d’ou l’on part .... 

15 

28 

day. 

. 3 

24 

quand il est sous-entendu . . 

12 

31 

goht, mind. 

. . 10 

4 

there, en. 

14 

37 

grandchild. 

. . 15 

28 

froze. 

15 

7 

granddaughter. 


28 

frozen. 

15 

r* 

/ 

grandfather. 

. . 15 

28 

ful, le suffixe. 

14 

7 

great . 

. 15 

28 

futur, anterieur. 

10 

26 

grand jury. 

. 13 

30 

comment exprime en an- 



grand’mere. 

. . 15 

28 

glais . 

7 

26 

grandmother. 

. 15 

29 

G 



grand’pere . 

. . 15 

28 



grandson . 

. 15 

28 

gagnais.won. 

10 

27 

great grandfather. 

. 15 

28 


gagner, to win 
gagne, won . 
gave. 


genres en anglais 
gentleman . . . . 


gentlemen. 

genitif saxon. 

get at, to. 

au lieu de to go and. 

avec to have. 

away, to. 

back, to. 

cold, to. 

down, to. 

exprime par aller chercher . . 

free, to. 

into bed, to. 

out of bed, to. 

over, to. 

prepositions avec. 

the better of, to. 

to, exprime par devenir . . . . 

faire. 

le verbe. 

warm, to. 

well, to. 

ve, donner. 

riven. 

go, aller. 

“ au futur. 

“ futur anterieur de . . . . 
and get, to, exprime par aller 

chercher . 

away, s’en aller. 

conditionnel du verbe . . , . 
for, to, exprime par aller cher¬ 
cher . 


g 


10 

10 

7 

8 
1 
2 
9 

9 
5 
8 
4 
8 
8 
8 
8 
8 
0 
8 
8 
8 
8 
8 
8 
4 
4 
4 
8 
8 

7 

8 
7 
7 

10 

4 

7 

11 

4 

4 


27 

27 

5 
29 

7 

6 

28 
28 

4 

34 

4 
33 
33 

33 

34 
33 
00 
33 

33 

34 
34 

33 

34 

5 
5 

4 
34 
34 

5 
29 

5 

26 

26 

5 

5 

8 
5 
5 


II 


habiller s’, to dress oneself .... 

10 

6 

had, avais. 

9 

25 

rather, I. 

14 

8 

half, demi. 

5 

7 

happy, heureux. 

10 

10 

have, avoir. 

deuxieme personne du sin- 

9 

25 

gulier de . 

15 

31 

devoir. 

13 

7 

got avec to. 

8 

33 

just, to. 

9 

29 

made, faire faire. 

12 

11 

to, formes du present .... 

2 

4 

imparfait de. 

6 

9 

pour prendre . . 

4 

5 

pour si. 

14 

5 

rather, I. 

14 

8 


he. 

hear, entendre . . . 

infinitif apres 
participe apres . . 
heard . 


help, dans les phrases idiomati- 

ques. 

her. 

en. 

y. 

here, ici. 

y. 

hers. 

herself.. 

heure, hour. 

heures, comment exprimer les . . 

heureux, happy. 

him, en. 

“ le. 


1 

7 

15 

15 

7 

8 

7 

2 

14 

15 

1 

15 

6 

10 

3 

3 

10 

14 

15 


o 

30 

30 

5 
29 

6 
5 

36 

5 

23 

5 

7 

5 

26 

26 

10 

36 

8 






























































































XXXVI 


TABLE ANALYTIQUE DES MATIERES 



Sec. Page 


Sec. Page 

him, y. 

15 

5 

Importance de l’exercice phono- 



himself. 

10 

5 

graphique. 

1 

16 

his. 

2 

5 

in case that, should apres. 

14 

7 

> < 

6 

7 

44 comment exprime. 

2 

21 

home, comment l’exprimer en 



“ en ou dans. 

6 

28 

frangais. 

5 

6 

44 le prefixe. 

13 

30 

homme . 

10 

7 

11 

y. 

15 

5 

d’affaires, comment ex- 



indefini, article. 

1 

7 

prime. 

3 

27 

parfait, son emploi .... 

8 

30 

hood, le suffixe. 

12 

31 

passe, des verbes. 

8 

27 

hour, heure. 

3 

26 

infinitif apres les verbes to feel, to 



prononciation de. 

3 

26 

hear, to see. 

15 

30 

house, quand sous-entendu .... 

5 

6 

au lieu de should. 

14 

6 

how, avec to know. 

15 

9 

avec to apres un adjectif 



tt «« t« , 

learn. 

15 

9 

ou participe. 

15 

6 

show. 

15 

9 

inflexions de who. 

5 

26 

*.teach. 

15 

9 

intelligence, mind. 

10 

4 

long:. . 

5 

5 

intend, to. 

2 

22 

many. 

5 

5 

interrogatifs, pronoms. 

5 

23 

que. 

14 

8 

interrogative forme de to be . . . 

1 

7 

much . 

5 

5 

forme de to be 



que. 

14 

8 

present . 

1 

8 

que, combien. 

9 

8 

negative forme d’un 



however. 

9 

6 

verbe . 

2 

24 

hungry. 

1 

22 

into, en ou dans. 

6 

28 




irreguliers, pluriels. 

4 

25 

I 



verbes . 

8 

29 

I, je, avec une lettre majuscule . . 

4 

7 

it ti 

9 

25 

idiomes avec by. 

11 

10 

liste de. 

15 

7 

44 avec le mot mean .... 

11 

27 

ti tt tt ti 

15 

28 

verbe to look . . . 

12 

30 

is . 

1 

6 

“ “ light. 

12 

32 

it not, traduction de n’est-ce pas 

1 

22 

if, si . 

8 

33 

there . 

6 

29 

subjonctif apres. 

14 

32 

isn’t. 

10 

10 

il y a . . .. 

3 

28 

it. 

1 

7 

44 “ “ ago. 

6 

29 

apres certains verbes dans les 



«< «* «« 

9 

28 

phrases idiomatiques . 

13 

30 

4 4 4 4 avait, before. 

9 

28 

11 

ce. 

15 

30 

44 y a . . . que. 

13 

26 

4 4 

en.•. . . 

14 

36 

imparfait de finish. 

6 

6 

is impossible. 

14 

6 

44 “ to be. 

6 

8 

necessary . 

14 

6 

have. 

6 

9 

possible . 

14 

6 

et parfait indefini, Dis- 



sufficient. 

14 

6 

tinctions entre .... 

8 

31 

time. 

14 

6 

formation del’. 

6 

5 

44 le. 

15 

8 

forme du verbe. 

6 

4 

i • 

y . 

15 

5 

modele d’un verbe a 1’ . 

6 

6 

its. 

2 

5 

imperatif a la forme negative . . . 

2 

24 

4 4 

6 

7 

avec please. 

13 

9 

4 4 

en. 

14 

36 

de differents verbes . . . 

2 

23 

itself. 

10 

5 

deuxieme personne de 1’ 

1 

9 




do dans la forme em- 



J 



phatique a 1’. 

15 

30 

joli, pretty. 

3 

24 

toutes les formes de, 



jurai, swore. 

10 

27 

dans le present .... 

3 

8 

jure, sworn. 

10 

27 

Importance de l’exercice oral . . . 

1 

9 

jurer, to swear. 

10 

27 


























































































TABLE ANALYTIQUE DES MATIERES 


xxxvii 


jury, grand.. 

petit . 

just, exactement. 

juste, il est. 

K 

keep waiting, faire attendre . . . . 
knew . 


know, how avec 
known. 


L 

la. 

lady. 

young . 

laisser . 

late, tard et en retard. 

le, aussi, le, so. 

differentes manieres de rendre 

le pronom . 

employe pour eviter la repeti¬ 
tion d’un verbe. 

him. 

“ it, that. 

“ ne se traduit pas dans les re¬ 
ponses elliptiques. 

“ on ne le traduit pas s’il y a 

opposition. 

one. 

“ remplagant un nom determine . 


lead. 

learn, how avec 
leave, quitter . 
Legon I . . . . 
“ II . 

“ III . . . 
“ . IV . . . 
“ V . . . . 
“ VI . . . 
“ VII . . . 
“ VIII . . 
“ IX . . . 
“ X . . . . 
“ XI . . . 
“ XII .. . 
“ XIII . 

“ XIV . . 
“ XV . . . 
“ XVI . . 
“ XVII . . 
“ XVIII . 
“ XIX . . 
“ XX . . . 
“ XXI . . 


Sec. Page Sec. Page 

13 30 Legon XXII.11 20 

13 30 “ XXIII.12 1 

6 28 “ XXIV.12 24 

14 6 “ XXV.13 1 

" XXVI.13 22 

“ XXVII.14 1 

13 6 “ XXVIII.14 26 

7 29 " XXIX.15 1 

8 30 “ XXX.15 24 

15 9 left, quittais. 9 25 

8 30 “ quitte. 9 25 

less. . . than.moinsde . . .quedel4 5 

lest, should apres.14 7 

3 27 let. 3 8 

2 7 lettre majuscule, avec I. 4 7 

2 7 leur. 2 5 

3 8 leurs. 2 5 

1 23 If, noms qui se terminent par ... 4 24 

15 8 light, idiomes avec.12 32 

comme nom.12 32 

15 7 like better, place dans la phrase . 13 29 

vouloir.13 5 

15 8 lire, to read. 7 29 

15 8 little, peu. 7 29 

15 8 “ “. 8 8 

live, demeurer, parfait indefini . . 8 28 

15 9 “ temps present. 2 21 

“ “ “ . 2 22 

15 8 “ to, formes du present de . . . 2 20 

15 8 lived. 8 29 

15 9 led.15 28 

15 8 loin, away. 7 5 

15 28 “ bien, far away. 7 5 

15 9 long, how. 5 5 

9 25 look, idiomes avec le verbe ... 12 30 

1 1 lose, forme passive de.12 29 

1 19 lost. 8 29 

2 1 love, subjonctif de, dans le passif . 14 31 

2 19 ly, le suffixe.10 10 

3 1 

3 21 M 

4 1 ma. 2 5 

4 20 madame. 2 7 

5 1 made, faisais. 9 25 

5 20 “ fait. 9 25 

6 1 “ of, fait de.10 28 

6 24 mademoiselle. 2 7 

7 1 mais,but.10 8 

7 22 majuscule, lettre, avec I. 4 7 

8 1 make, dans phrases idiomatiques 9 24 

8 24 “ fabriquer. 9 24 

9 1 “ faire. 9 24 

9 20 mal a la tete . .. 15 33 

10 1 malade, sore.11 28 

10 22 man, homme.10 7 

11 1 “ on.10 7 


































































































xxxviii TABLE ANALYTIQUE DES MATIERES 


Sec. Page 

manquer, to miss.10 27 

many . 2 7 

beaucoup. 8 8 

how. 5 5 

que.14 8 

may .. 3 5 

avec subjonctif.14 7 

pour n’est-ce pas. 3 8 

mayst.15 31 

mean.15 7 

dans les phrases idioma- 

tiques.11 27 

signification de.11 27 

vouloir dire.11 28 

meant.15 7 

meme.10 29 

same ..10 30 

memoire, mind.10 4 

mes. 2 5 

mesure, noms de.13 6 

mien, le. 6 7 

mieux, rather.14 8 

might avec’subjonctif.14 7 

comment on emploie .... 13 29 

imparfait de may.13 29 

mind, expressions avec.10 5 

mine. 6 7 

Miss. 2 7 

manquer.10 27 

mistake.15 7 

mistaken.15 7 

mister. 2 6 

mistook.15 7 

mistress. 2 7 

moins de . . . que de, less than . . 14 5 

mon. 2 5 

more, encore. 5 5 

... than, plus de . . . que 

de.14 5 

monnaie anglaise . 8 11 

monsieur . 2 6 

monter . 6 28 

en voiture. 8 34 

montre avance, retarde, est juste . 11 28 

most, pour formes superlatives . . 13 30 

matieres, noms des.10 28 

mots composes. 4 23 

mourir, to die. 7 29 

mouton, sheep, mutton.13 30 

Mr. 2 6 

Mrs.2 7 

much. 2 7 

44 beaucoup. 8 8 

how. 5 5 

que. 14 8 

multiplicatifs, nombres. 7 5 


Sec. Page 

must. 3 2 

devoir.13 7 

44 falloir.15 10 

*' pour n’est-ce pas. 3 8 

suivi de la forme passive . 15 10 

my. 2 5 

myself.10 5 

N 

narrow, etroit. 8 8 

nationality, adjectifs qui denotent 

la. 4 7 

n’est-ce pas au parfait defini ... 8 32 

avec to have. 2 5 

comment exprime en 

anglais. 1 22 

exprime pas may, can, 

must. 3 8 

quand il se traduit par 

did. 6 8 

4 4 4 4 traduction par to do . 2 25 

... jamais, never. 8 32 

44 44 44 . 10 30 

44 . . . ni . 9 7 

44 ... pas, not.10 30 

... personne. 9 7 

“ ... plus. 7 30 

no more.10 30 

... rien. 9 7 

necessary, it is.14 6 

negative, forme, de to be, present 1 8 

neither . . . nor. 9 7 

neuf et nouveau.10 27 

traduction de. 1 23 

never, ne . . . jamais. 8 32 

place de.13 28 

never, ne . . . jamais.10 30 

new. 1 23 

44 nouveau, neuf.10 27 

news, nouvelles.10 27 

no. 2 6 

more. 7 30 

44 “ ne plus.10 30 

one. 9 7 

pas un. 4 6 

pas de. 4 3 

such thing, rien de tel.10 9 

nobody. 9 7 

nom determine, le remplagant . . 15 9 

pluriel avec l’apostrophe . . 5 7 

nombre exprime par combien . . . 5 5 

nombres de repetition. 7 5 

les.3 28 

ordinaux. 7 6 

emploi des . . 7 6 

noms de dimension.14 35 

































































































TABLE ANALYTIQUE DES MATIERES 


XXXIX 


\ 

Sec. Page 


Sec. Page 

de plusieurs personnes . . . 

9 

28 

of, pour exprimer le possessif . . 

. 5 

4 

des matieres. 

10 

28 

off, comment employe. 

. 10 

9 

et verbes qui sont les memes 

12 

9 

separation. 

. 10 

9 

quelquefois sous-entendus . 

5 

6 

often, place de. 

. 2 

24 

qui se terminent par f . . . 

4 

24 

«< i» tt 

. 13 

28 

a tt 44 If 

4 

24 

souvent . 

. 4 

6 

“ o . . . 

4 

24 

old,to be . 

9 

25 

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 sh . . 

4 

25 

on.‘. 

. 6 

29 

y . • . 

4 

25 

“ 

. 9 

8 

sont aussi verbes .... 

7 

7 

avec quelques verbes. 

. 15 

29 


non plus, either. 4 5 

“ traduction de. 2 6 

none, aucun . . . ne. 4 7 

44 en.14 36 

44 pas un. 4 6 

pour exprimer en et la nega¬ 
tion . 4 6 

not any. 4 7 

nos. 2 5 

not any, en.14 36 

more. 7 30 

“ 44 pour none. 4 7 

44 ne . . . pas.10 30 

nothing. 9 7 

44 rien. 8 32 

notre . 2 5 

noun, adjectivally used. 3 27 

44 comment employe adjec- 

tivement. 3 27 

nouns, de mesure ou quantity pre¬ 
cedes d’un adjectif nu¬ 
meral . 


noms quise terminent par x 
nouveau et neuf. 


nouvelles, recevoir des, comment 

exprime en anglais. 

numeral, adjectif, en avec . . . . 


O 

o, pluriel de noms qui se terminent 

par. 

objet possede, sons-entendu . . . 

obliged, to be, falloir. 

o’clock, pour exprimer les heures 


44 noms de mesure on quan¬ 
tity . 

avec quelques verbes. 

complement du superlatif . . . 
pour exprimer les heures an an¬ 
glais . 


one.10 

once. 7 

one, comment employe.14 

44 le.15 

pour exprimer on. 9 

44 “ “ son.9 

“ un. 2 

4 4 4 4 pluriel de. 2 

ones. 2 

comment employe.14 

oneself.10 

soi-meme.10 

or. 9 

oral, Exercice, Importance .... 1 

ordinals. 7 

ordinaux, nombres. 7 

other, autre. 9 

ought, devoir.13 

le verbe.14 

our. 2 

ours. 6 


7 

5 
36 

8 

6 
7 
5 
5 

5 
36 

6 

5 
7 
9 

6 
6 
7 
6 
6 
5 

70 


13 

6 

“ 

6 

8 

11 

27 

out, dehors . 

6 

10 

4 

24 

owe, devoir. 

13 

6 

10 

27 

own, comment il s’emploie .... 

11 

28 

1 

23 






P 



7 

7 

packing-house. 

7 

30 

14 

37 

paid. 

8 

30 

3 

4 

pain, to have a, avoir mal. 

11 

28 

3 

28 

par, au lieu de a ou an. 

5 

7 

3 

29 

“ by. 

11 

9 



pardonnai, forgave. 

10 

27 



pardonne, forgiven. 

10 

27 



pardonner, forgive. 

10 

27 

4 

24 

parent, equivalents de. 

2 

6 

5 

6 

parfait indefini, son emploi .... 

8 

30 

15 

10 

parler, formes anglaises du present 



3 

26 

de. 

2 

20 

15 

6 

44 to speak. 

7 

29 



participe apres les verbes to see, 



13 

6 

to hear, to feel. 

15 

30 

15 

29 

present . 

11 

24 

8 

11 

“ “ emploi du . . . 

11 

25 



44 formation du.. . 

11 

24 

3 

26 

partitif, article. 

2 

6 

















































































xl 


TABLE ANALYTIQUE DES MATIERES 


Sec. 


partitif, article n’est pas traduit . . 4 

pas de, exprime par no. 4 

traduction de. 2 

un, none, no one. 4 

passe indefini des verbes. 8 

passifs, verbes, forme progressive 

des.13 

passive, forme, apres must .... 15 

du verbe . . & . . 12 

past, pour exprimer les heures en 

anglais . 3 

pay, payer. 8 

payer, to pay. 8 

pendant que. while. 9 

penser, to think. 7 

perdre, to lose. 8 

perhaps, place de.13 

permettra. 3 

permit. 3 

personal pronoun y.15 

personne, troisieme, du singulier 

des verbes. 3 

personnels, pronoms. 3 

deuxieme 
personne 15 

petit-fils .15 

jury.13 

petite-fille.15 

peu, little ou few. 7 

“ un, rather.14 

phonographique, Cylindre. 1 

Exercise, Impor¬ 
tance de 1’ . . . 1 

Phrases et Conversation. 1 


1 

2 

2 

3 

3 

4 

4 

5 

5 

6 
6 
7 

7 

8 
8 
9 
9 

10 

10 

11 

11 

12 


Sec. Page 

Phrases et Conversation.12 25 

“ “ 13 2 

“ “ 13 23 

“ “ “ 14 2 

“ “ 14 27 

“ “ 15 2 

“ “ 15 25 

“ Usuelles. 4 36 

“ “ 5 16 

“ “ 5 37 

“ “ . 6 20 

“ “ 6 40 

“ “ 7 18 

“ “ 7 39 

“ “ . 8 21 

“ “ 8 42 

“ “ 9 17 

“ “ 9 41 

“ “ * .10 19 

“ “ 10 42 

M “ .11 16 

“ “ 11 37 

“ “ .12 21 

“ “ 12 40 

.13 18 

“ “ 13 41 

“ “ 14 22 

“ “ 14 44 

“ “ 15 21 

“ “ 15 42 


pied, se promener a. 3 5 

place de l’adverbe.13 28 

pleasant, agreable.10 10 

please, imperatif avec .13 9 

pleonasmes en anglais.15 33 


pluriel dans les noms anglais, regie 

generate pour former le . 1 24 

des nouns qui se terminent 

par f 4 24 

terminent 
par fe . 4 24 

terminent 
par If . 4 24 

terminent 
par o.4 24 

terminent 


par sh . 4 25 

terminent 
par y . 4 25 

nom, avec l’apostrophe . . 5 7 

pluriels irreguliers * . 4 25 

plus de . . . que de, more than . . 14 5 

que-parfait, emploi du . . . . 9 27 

forme du verbe . 9 25 

plutot, rather.14 8 

poisson, fish.11 28 


Page 

5 

3 

6 

6 

27 

26 

10 

28 

26 

33 

33 

9 

29 

29 

28 

5 

5 

5 

7 

5 

31 

28 

30 

28 

27 

8 

2 

16 

4 

20 

2 

17 

2 

22 

1 

21 

1 

21 

2 

25 

2 

23 

2 

25 

2 

21 

2 

23 

2 

21 

2 















































































TABLE ANALYTIQUE DES MATIERES 


xli 



Sec. Page 


Sec. Page 

poli, polite. 

8 

8 

pronoms comme membres d’une 



polite, poli. 

8 

8 

comparaison. 

8 

9 

pore, pig, pork . 

13 

30 

demonstrates, emploi 



positif des adjectifs. 

8 

6 

des. 

6 

30 

possessif adjectif employe au lieu 



interrogratifs . 

5 

23 

de rarticle . . 

10 

9 

personnels . 

3 

5 

quand il n’est pas 



« i » t J • V 

deuxieme 



exprime . . . 

11 

9 

personne 

15 

31 

drns certaines formes 



possessifs . 

6 

7 

angdaises. 

12 

31 

reflechis. 

10 

5 

possessifs adjectifs, s avec .... 

6 

11 

relatifs. 

5 

23 

pronoms. 

6 

7 

prononciation de hour. 

3 

26 

possession, comment exprimee en 



Remarques sur la . 

1 

19 

anglais. 

5 

4 

pronoun, personnel, ce. 

15 

30 

possessive, English. 

5 

4 

y. 

15 

5 

possible, il est. 

14 

6 

propres, adjectifs. 

4 

7 

possibility, comment exprimee par 



provided that, temps apres .... 

14 

7 

le subjonctif. 

14 

7 

purchase, acheter. 

13 

7 

possessive, forme . 

5 

4 

put, mettre. 

10 

4 

pourtant. 

9 

6 

Q 



pouvoir, can. 

14 

5 



to be able. 

14 

5 

quand, when . 

4 

26 

precisement, very. 

10 

29 

u «t 

10 

28 

prefixe in. 

13 

30 

quantite, en avec adverbe de . . . 

14 

37 

un. 

13 

30 

exprime par combien . . 

5 

5 

prendre . 

3 

7 

noms de. 

13 

6 

44 le dessus. 

8 

34 

que, apres vouloir. 

13 

5 

pour exprimer to have . . 

4 

5 

44 avec subjonctif 

13 

6 

preposition apres verbes. 

12 

10 

44 as. 

10 

28 

verbes . 

4 

26 

“ de, as. 

11 

4 

44 at. 

3 

25 

expletif. 

14 

9 

from. 

15 

28 

how. 

9 

8 

“ to. 

3 

25 

44 manieres de le traduire en an- 



4 4 4 4 

15 

28 

gflais. 

14 

8 

prepositions apres adjectifs . . . 

15 

6 

44 pour si, comme, et parce- 



le verbe to ask 

15 

29 

que ne se traduit pas en 



avec to g:et. 

8 

33 

angdais. 

14 

10 

verbes . 

15 

29 

44 quand il se traduit par before, 



gfouvernees par un 



until, unless. 

14 

10 

verbe . 

4 

23 

44 se rend par as. 

14 

9 

present, participe. 

11 

24 

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 than. 

14 

9 

prog:ressif, forme du verbe 

3 

24 

44 “ 4 4 4 4 whether. 

14 

9 

pretty, joli. 

3 

24 

44 signifiant afin que se rend par 



probably, place de . . T. 

13 

28 

that. 

14 

9 

prog:ressif, present, forme du 



parce que se traduit 



verbe . 

3 

24 

par because . . . 

14 

10 

progressive, forme complete . . . 

12 

7 

pourquoi se traduit 



44 des verbes 



par why. 

14 

10 

passifs . . . 

13 

26 

quand se traduit par 



41 44 du verbe . . . 

12 

5 

when. 

14 

9 

4 4 4 4 emploi de la 

12 

8 

44 tel, such as. 

10 

9 

repetition du verbe 



quelconque, any. 

8 

11 

avec la forme . . . 

4 

7 

quelque . . . que. 

9 

6 

promener a pied, se. 

3 

5 

quelques, some, any. 

9 

5 

pronominale, forme, se traduit par 



-uns, exprime par some 

4 

6 

la forme passive en anglais . . . 

12 

31 

quite, tout. 

10 

30 





































































xlii 


TABLE ANALYTIQUE DES MATIERES 


R 

raison, right . 

rappeler, to mind . 

rarement, seldom . 

rather, avec than . 

I had . 

“ would . 

significations de . 

read ., . . 

forme emphatique de . . . . 

lire . 

progressive forme du verbe . 

recevoir . 

des nouvelles, comment 
on exprime en anglais 
reciproques, verbes 
reflechis, pronoms 
regarder a, to mind 
regie generate pour former le plu 
riel dans les noms en anglais 
relatifs, pronoms 

relative . 

Remarques sur la prononciatio 
de grammaire 


Sec. Page 


rentrer chez soi . 
renvoyer, to send away 
repetition du verbe avec la forme 
progressive. 


3 

27 

repetition nombres de. 

7 

5 

10 

5 

require, falloir. 

15 

9 

4 

6 

reponse au parfait defini. 

8 

32 

14 

8 

construction de, en an- 



14 

8 

glais . . 

2 

22 

14 

8 

de la, en 



14 

8 

anglais . 

. 1 

8 

8 

30 

la, au passe . 

6 

7 

12 

12 

revenir. 

6 

28 

7 

29 

* 4 

8 

33 

12 

7 

Revue et Conversation. 

1 

14 

8 

33 

•« it *« 

1 

29 



*4 44 44 

2 

13 

7 

7 

44 44 44 

2 

31 

10 

8 

44 44 44 

3 

16 

10 

5 

44 44 44 

o 

O 

37 

10 

5 

44 44 44 

4 

15 



44 44 44 

4 

34 

1 

24 

44 44 44 

5 

14 

5 

23 

44 44 44 

5 

34 

2 

6 

44 44 44 

6 

18 

1 

19 

i « 4 4 4 4 

6 

37 

1 

6 

44 44 44 

7 

15 

1 

22 

44 44 44 

7 

36 

2 

4 

44 44 44 

8 

18 

2 

20 

44 44 44 

8 

40 

3 

4 


9 

15 

3 

24 

44 44 44 

9 

38 

4 

3 

44 44 44 

10 

16 

4 

23 

44 44 44 

10 

40 

5 

4 

44 44 44 

11 

15 

5 

23 

44 44 44 

11 

34 

6 

4 

ft ft ft ft ft ft 

12 

18 

6 

27 

44 44 44 

12 

37 

7 

4 

44 44 44 

13 

16 

7 

26 

44 44 44 

13 

37 

8 

5 

44 44 44 

14 

19 

8 

27 

44 44 44 

14 

42 

9 

5 

44 44 44 

15 

18 

9 

24 

ft ft ft ft ft ft 

15 

40 

10 

4 

rich, riche. 

10 

10 

10 

26 

rien de pareil, no such thing .... 

10 

9 

11 

4 

tel, no such thing. 

10 

9 

11 

24 

nothing. 

8 

32 

12 

5 

right, raison. 

3 

27 

12 

28 

road, to be on the. 

7 

7 

13 

5 




13 

26 

S 



14 

5 

s avec adjectifs possessifs .... 

6 

11 

14 

29 

sa. 

2 

5 

15 

5 

said. 

7 

5 

15 

28 

“ 

8 

30 

8 

34 

same, meme. 

10 

30 


savoir, to know. 7 

saw. 8 


29 

30 


V_ 


4 

















































































TABL*E ANALYTIQUE DES MATIERES 


xliii 


Sec. 


saxon, genitif . 5 

say, dire. 7 

se lever .. 6 

mettre au lit. 8 

promener a pied. 3 

retablir. 8 

see, infinitif apres..15 

laisser.10 

participe apres.15 

seem, to apres.15 

seen. 8 

seldom, place de.13 

44 rarement. 4 

sell, vendre. 7 

send away, renvoyer. 7 

envoyer . 7 

sent. .... 7 

“ . 8 

ses. 2 

set, mettre.10 

sh, noms qui se terminent par . . 4 

shall. 7 

et will, distinction de . . . . 7 

“ “ “ 44 44 table 

de 7 

shalt.15 

she. 1 

shoot.15 

shot.15 

should, apres certaines conjonc- 

tions.14 

avec subjonctif.14 

44 infinitif au lieu de.14 

44 pour ought.11 

44 rendu par falloir.14 

44 suivi de l’infinitif pour 

traduire un subjonctif 

frangais.14 

show.15 

down, to. 6 

how, avec.15 

in, to. 6 

“ out, to. 6 

44 to, faire. 6 

44 up, to. 6 

showed . 8 

“ 15 

shown. 8 

“ 15 

shut, fermer.10 

si est quelquefois sous-entendu . 14 

44 if. 8 

44 so.10 

sien, le. 6 

sir. 2 

sit, s’asseoir. 0 

/ 


Sec. Page 

sit up, pouvoir se lever.11 7 

sleep.15 7 

dormir.11 28 

slept.15 7 

so ... as. 3 7 

“ 8 9 

avec verbes qui expriment une 

operation de l’esprit.15 8 

he has. 6 27 

44 le.15 8 

many as. 3 7 

. 14 4 

much as. 3 7 

. 14 4 

44 si.10 27 

well ..14 5 

soi-meme.10 5 

soif, avoir. 1 22 

sold. 7 29 

44 8 30 

some au lieu de any. 4 4 

44 du. 9 5 

44 en.14 36 

exprime par autres. 4 6 

quelques-uns . 4 6 

44 one. 9 5 

way. 9 6 

somebody. 9 5 

somehow. 9 6 

something. 9 5 

sometimes, place de.13 28 

somewhere .. 9 6 

son. 2 5 

soon, bientot. 4 6 

44 place de.13 28 

sore, malade.11 28 

sorry, facile. 8 8 

sortir.6 28 

“ . 6 28 

du lit. 8 34 

souhaits, subjonctif pour exprimer 

le.14 33 

souvent, often. 4 6 

sow.15 7 

sowed.15 7 

sown.15 7 

speak, parler. 7 29 

44 present tense. 2 20 

“ 44 44 . 2 24 

spend, depenser. 9 25 

spent, depensais. 9 25 

44 depen se. 9 25 

splendid, splendide.10 10 

spoke. 7 29 

“ 8 30 

spoken. 8 30 


Page 

4 

5 

28 

34 

5 

34 

30 

4 

30 

6 

30 

28 

6 

29 

5 

5 

5 

30 

5 

4 

25 

26 

27 

29 

31 

7 

7 

7 

7 

7 

6 

7 

5 

7 

7 

28 

9 

27 

28 

27 

28 

30 

7 

30 

7 

4 

5 

33 

27 

7 

6 

28 












































































































xliv 


TABLE ANALYTIQUE DES MATIERES 


steamship 


stop, arreter 


apres as if. 

if, unless .... 
verbes imperson- 

nels. 

avec although, though 
avec pouvoir se rap- 
porte a un fait futur 
dans les souhaits . . . 

emploi du. 

est tres peu usite . . . 
exprime par auxiliaires 
formation du anglais . 
pour exprimer condition 
pour exprimer possi¬ 
bility, volonte, ou de¬ 
voir . 

pour exprimer supposi¬ 
tion fausse . 

pour exprimer supposi¬ 
tion improbable . . . 


sujet, ou on le place dans- les 


suppose that, should apres .... 
supposition fausse, subjonctif pour 

exprimer . 

improbable, subjonctif 
pour exprimer . . . 
sur. se traduit par by ou and . . . 


swear. 

jurer . 

swore. 

jurai. 

sworn.15 

jure.10 


table de distinction de shall et will 7 

des differentes manieres de 
comparaison des adjectifs 8 

take a walk, to . 3 

away, enlever. 7 

prendre.10 

to. 3 

taken .10 


7 

27 


29 

10 

5 

5 

4 

7 

4 


Sec. Page 


Sec. Page 

6 

7 

tard,late . 

1 

23 

5 

5 

teach, how avec. 

15 

9 

7 

29 

tel que, such as. 

10 

9 

14 

29 

tell, dire. 

7 

5 

14 

32 

• « « « 

9 

25 

14 

32 

to, apres le verbe. 

14 

37 



temps, apres before. 

14 

7 

14 

6 

provided that . . . . 

14 

. 7 

14 

32 

4i “ till, until. 

14 

7 



du subjonctif. 

14 

34 

14 

6 

il est. 

14 

6 

14 

33 

than, avec rather . 

14 

8 

14 

30 

rendu par que. 

14 

9 

14 

5 

that. 

3 

28 

14 

7 

44 

5 

24 

14 

29 

4 4 

5 

27 

14 

33 

4 4 

6 

30 



est souvent sous-entendu . . 

4 

26 



“ le. 

15 

8 

14 

7 

que signifiant afin que .... 

14 

9 



the, article defini . 

1 

7 

14 

33 

usage de. 

12 

9 



their. 

2 

5 

14 

33 

< • 

en. 

14 

36 

14 

6 

theirs . 

6 

8 

14 

34 

them, en. 

14 

36 

14 

6 

4 4 

y • • . .. 

15 

5 

14 

7 

themselves . 

10 

6 

12 

31 

then, il y a. 

3 

28 



thence, en. 

14 

37 

3 

27 

there are. 

6 

29 

8 

7 

is. 

6 

29 

14 

7 

“ la. 

1 

23 



y . 

1 

23 

14 

33 

“ “ 

15 

5 



these . 

4 

24 

14 

33 

44 

6 

29 

14 

35 

4 4 

6 

30 

8 

34 

they, on. 

10 

8 

15 

7 

think, generalement est suivi de of 

11 

8 

15 

7 

“ of. 

15 

29 

10 

27 

penser . 

7 

29 

15 

7 

thirsty . 

1 

22 

10 

27 

this. 

3 

27 


those 


though avec subjonctif 

tout. 

thought . 


three times . . 

threw. 

throw, jeter . . 
till, temps apres 


3 
6 

4 
6 

14 

10 

7 

8 
/ 

10 

10 

14 


28 

30 

24 

30 

32 

30 

29 

30 
5 
4 
4 
7 



















































































TABLE ANALYTIQUE DES MAT IE RES 


xlv 



Sec. Page 


Sec. Page 

time, how expressed. 

3 

26 

vendre, to sell. 

7 

29 

times, three. 

7 

5 

venir de. 

9 

29 

to, apres le verbe to tell. 

14 

37 

to come. 

7 

29 

to be r to seem, to appear 

15 

6 

verbaux, noms. 

11 

27 

un adjectif exprimant 



verbe avec preposition. 

12 

10 

sentiment. 

15 

6 

deuxieme personne singulier 



to be, imparfait de. 

6 

8 

du. 

15 

30 

le present de . 

1 

6 

du, condition. 

11 

9 

speak, formes du present de . . 

2 

20 

forme emphatique du . . . . 

12 

11 

intend. 

2 

22 

“ passive du. 

12 

28 

live, formes du present de . . . 

2 

20 

progressive du . . . . 

12 

5 

preposition. 

3 

25 

imparfait, forme du. 

6 

4 

preposition sert a marquer le 



le futur anterieur du . . . . 

10 

26 

but vers lequel on tend .... 

15 

28 

to get. 

4 

4 

do. 

2 

21 

passe indefini. 

8 

27 

have, formes du present .... 

2 

4 

plus-que-parfait du. 

9 

25 

imparfait de. 

6 

9 

prepositions gouvernees par 



told. 

7 

5 

un. 

4 

23 

** 

8 

29 

present progressif, forme du 

3 

24 

disais. 

9 

25 

reflechi, Conjugaison d’un . 

10 

6 

“ dit. 

9 

25 

to ask, prepositions apres . 

15 

29 

too, traduit trop. 

1 

22 

to be, imparfait de. 

6 

8 

trop. 

10 

27 

present tense .... 

1 

6 

took. 

10 

4 

go, present progressif . . 

3 

25 

toujours, always. . 

4 

6 

have, present. 

2 

4 

tout, all. 

10 

30 

imparfait de ... 

6 

9 

“ although. 

10 

30 

live, present. 

2 

21 

«« 

any. 

8 

11 

speak, present . 

2 

20 

every. 

10 

30 

44 44 44 44 

2 

24 

quite . .. 

10 

30 

verbes avec away . 

7 

5 

whole. 

10 

30 

et noms qui sont les memes 

12 

9 

towards, apres un adjectif expri- 



irreguliers. 

9 

25 

mant sentiment. 

15 

6 

liste des .... 

15 

7 

tree, arbre . 

4 

6 

44 44 44 44 

15 

28 

trois fois . 

7 

5 

passifs, forme progressive 



troisieme personne du singulier 



des . 

13 

26 

des verbes . 

3 

7 

prepositions avec . 

4 

26 

trop traduit too. 

1 

22 

quelques, prenant at ... . 

15 

29 

too. 

10 

27 

“ of. . . . 

15 

29 

trouver, to find . 

6 

31 

onouup- 



tt <1 44 

8 

29 

on . . 

15 

29 

twice . 

7 

,5 

44 qui sont aussi noms .... 

7 

7 




44 reciproques . 

10 

8 

u 



“ termines pas s, x, z, ch, sh, 



un, le prefixe . 

13 

30 

ou o 

3 

7 

unless, rendu par que. 

14 

10 

44 to see, to hear, to feel, in- 



subjonctif apres. 

14 

32 

finitif apres. 

15 

30 

until, rendu par que. 

14 

10 

44 to see, to hear, to feel, 



temps apres. 

14 

7 

participe apres. 

15 

30 

upon. 

9 

8 

very, meme. 

10 

29 

avec quelques verbes .... 

15 

29 

visiter, to call on. 

6 

11 

used to, pour exprimer habitude . 

14 

6 

Vocabulaire. 

1 

4 

V 



“ 

1 

19 

v pour former le pluriel des noms 



4 4 

2 

1 

se terminant par f. 

. 4 

24 

4 4 

2 

17 

veau, calf, veal. 


30 

4 4 

3 

1 














































































xlvi 


TABLE ANALYTIQUE DES MATIERES 


Vocabulaire 


voici 


voila 


n’est plus engistre 


here is 


44 there is. 

voiture, monter en. 

volonte, comment exprime par 


subjonctif. 

14 

7 

write, ecrire 

VOS. 

2 

5 

written . . 

votre. 

2 

5 

wrote . . . 

vouloir dire, mean. 

manieres de le traduire en 

11 

28 

4 « 

anglais. 

13 

5 


suivi de que. 

4i , 

13 

5 

x, noms qui i 


Sec. Page Sec. 

3 21 what avec a ou an. 6 

1 whatever. 9 

20 when, quand. 4 

1 “ “ .10 

20 “ que signifiant quand se tra- 

1 duit par.14 

24 whether, rendu par que.14 

1 which. 5 

22 44 5 

1 44 invariable. 5 

24 whichever. 9 

1 while, pendant que. 9 

20 who. 5 

1 44 inflexions de. 5 

22 whole, tout.10 

1 why, signifiant pourquoi se traduit 

20 par que.14 

1 will. 7 

24 “ et shall, distinction de . . . . 7 

1 “ “ “ 4 44 table de 7 

22 44 vouloir. 7 

1 willing - , to be, vouloir.13 

26 wilt .15 

1 win, gagner.10 

24 wish, vouloir.13 

1 with, apres adjectifs.15 

28 44 exprime par a. 4 

30 won, gagnais.10 

23 44 gagne.10 

28 wore.10 

30 worn . . . . % .10 

23 would, avec subjonctif.14 

34 44 comment employe .... 14 

rather, I.14 


8 


4 

4 

5 

5 

6 
6 
7 

7 

8 
8 
9 
9 

10 

10 

11 

11 

12 

12 

13 

13 

14 

14 

15 
15 
10 

3 

6 

1 

3 

6 

1 

8 


voyelles, le son des 


W 


wait, to, attendre, demande for . . 4 

walk, to take a. 3 

want, falloir.15 

vouloir . . i .13 

warm . 1 

was, etais, fus. 9 

way, chemin. 5 

wear, mettre.10 

weather, comment exprime .... 1 

well, bien. 3 

went. 7 

44 . 8 

were. 6 

what. 5 

44 5 


25 

5 

9 

5 

22 

25 

27 

4 

23 

24 

5 
29 

8 

24 

25 


y, a lui. 

adverbe de lieu. 

avoir. 

there to be. 

noms qui se terminent par . . . 

him, her, them, it. 

ne se traduit generalement pas 
dans les responses elliptiques 

personal pronoun . 

then, here, in. 

there . 

yesterday, day before, avant-hier 

yet, encore. 

young lady. 

your. 

yours . 

yourself. 


15 

15 

6 

9 

4 
15 

15 

15 

15 

1 

7 

5 
2 
2 

6 
10 


Page 

4 
6 

26 

28 

9 

9 

24 

25 
27 

6 

9 

24 

26 
30 

10 

26 

27 

29 

30 

5 

31 
27 

5 

7 

5 

27 

27 

4 

4 

7 

5 

8 
5 

29 

5 

29 


24 


5 

5 

29 

29 

25 

5 

5 

5 

5 

23 

7 

5 

7 
5 

8 
5 
























































































































< a 

Ap. ** v<& X 



* « . A * A 0 , . %, » 0 K 0 0 \T , * 0 

/^ A', ^ V ^1 > 

e Jp§pL : ^ ^ - Mp ° ^ V 
a a v ^ o l/'Sjol * c^ : lliiP « aV <?„ o 

* ^ ■\‘Wv ^ - .. 

. ^ ., -o> /-. ' 




** v v A ,* 11 * %V‘*" # ^ 

„. ^ " '///n\JO ^ X 0< ^ * ° a5 "Tj, »- ^ 

*' ■ wVAVw /Mk\ %A < 

° ^ V <v - 


^ : «* ^ 






- 

V* o> ^ ^ 

<A J o » y * <0 X <- ** i + * s s A O, 

^ ^ C o N c * <#> £ , <* 1 ' a * ^ 

*> rxtN^v f -P /*0 . ^ "* 





^ V 



, A . f - V ■ ^ ^ ' '' ' ' Vl -^f -' < >P°'<- 

N ° v N *V*°* % * 8 " X / ? > S ^ C %. " 0N °' v V 

A * ^SScTte * <\. <* j(Vs»A r « ^ <& * C&i!S0l ° <* ,v 

1 ** <$> • ° 70mmk^ - <^- -A v 

" ^ ^ - lliiir * ^ v ^ z ^ 

A V V* ^^!SiK2’ * Ar <-> 

in, '^?' y 0 * ^ ^ ivP o n c 'Cv ** 

^.*,9, ,-P' ,V_ ^ 


^ c* 
V 


J> v V » 

V- ^ 

* 




^ ° o5 ^ x 








: W ^ 

, N 0 - ^ " v 7,\.^ A 0° C o/% , N o o* <$> V^ - A 

V>„ . v ,*4 „'. ^ A v >W*, % v > 9 

^v „ A\\/?^/A © ^ <x> 



3 


« ,^ v % 

& 



c o N c ^ v -^> v 

r> ^ ^ 9- 




% * ■ "''Vf.-'X^v^ < • .X^;> A . > • • ,;v 

4 ' " $ * jA A). A ^ aV 

V V ° -" t/' ,<v 










-«■•** / Nc <u x a , ^ %::! ■»' ,o^ 

'^-' a\ * j&m/Az-, * ° 

•*'« -< • & 





o o 


*($■* ,--'j i ..- V- // ■ •; Jp 4 *v X 

y r>_ ^ A CJl / « Mouuanoiy ayciu. iviaync; 

\T * 9 \ \ * A’ « ^ « > ^ 0 N 0 Treatment Date: Oct. 2006 

^ s- A ^ . ' ' 'A A'f 



iicauueiu udiw. wui. ^uud 

x x PreservationTechm 

A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRE: 

c s> 111 Thomson Park Drive 

Cranberry Township, PA 
(724) 779-2111 


.*** h 










c 0 N c « 

_ r-v > ^ 


A O’ 

° * * * jy* 



c 


<A ^AAL s'- A <3^ *? 

A * i 1 # * 

" + ,’ A Al^ -/ 9j> 

; v^ ; 

>,0 o * 

> A X* ^ 

•$* . f* y A 

fr a . t*. % aO v c c> % „ A o' o>' ^ 

9 % V *'*o, ■ > 


V 


v*> 




* - ty ^ ° r/ 
?~s **: *;%' J r * s .*••* /% 


* A A'/£ 


\° °* 




U I ' 


AV A 


A’ vP- 4 i 

aV --P- ° 

*A >*, o 



V iP ,# 


^ 4 , ™ * A 


,V 



r\ _ ^ 

\ a - >r_ a xx, ^ v ^~ $ >i i 

* Aa’ <-> t (V ^ ol \ 

/AA\ °" v'\ 


Z 


<S> ^ 


* V ' 6 * ^ ° ^ ,0^ c 0 N c * < ^ i a 4 S S jf' 

^ 0 * _oT\»\ A *P fA S 

A ^ 
x° A. * 



V 1 B 


A> % - 

* .A ^ 

■*■ A <• * 


: a r ; ^ 

O -l » « 


0 K 0 " V 

, V * » #■ > ■ ' ' s s 

"’xf* <\^’ * A ^ C A * 

</> ^ V « rSS\\Zs>y/ ; I c ^ ^ o 




V*^°’/ v*o / 

O V * °/- > ' 





AA f ^ VW-* ^ “A - 

^ °o 0° .‘!A,'*A<%> A «•'-?.*, \ 


V ^ ^ 

r\V CA x ^ 

^ S * * ; ^ ^ N 0 ^ \^> 

c> V V 


A V v • ^ ' C> V V ^ Y ^ ° /* 

■% A * £&&: • a 

VV ° 

^ <J A> ° 

8 « / ° ’ ^ 0^° c ° N C ♦ ^ * * 


i 





rs'7'*%* 0H9 \< 


* A 



,^' v ^ 

'•V " ^ ^ ^ ’ -A A ^ 




^ A 

n rv* 



V 


x° * 

Z 1 

-> A v' C\. X 

r ff I \ * s\^ O * 

v A » 

%& 

ft '^A> ° ||pF * V 5 "A 

^ *V ^ 


o ^ a : 

z v 

A. <A Z ‘ 

AV ° 

> ^K^yi^w- X ^ O 

<C ^ ^ s s % y\ o’ 

‘V,•'■■.*< ^ 

' A- / 

^ '^. V^WV ■°°' < ' ^ 

o n o 0 ^> (l ,*' A' 'o o •s 

A 81 .<f s'*" 0n ° \> 


•”‘* - V' • *'’ CV "■*/'•■• 

■ N , 0 ^ 






0 ^ x 



«r 

*> 




o< : a 




N 0 




r A 

•A % \y$y- 4 

^ v « v 1 ® * '\> J 0 ’ " 0^° c ° N ° A ^<5 




b ft x 


'^o x : 

V ^ ^ ^ 

'X pv j ' >y ^ ^ <» o > • /- 

' * o^° S ^ * J- ^ * 5 * 0 ’ V ^ * 1 11 * AA 

A 9 ' C A V N > ,0^ 

v/ » A A - 

> <S>, 













































